


v~ oe eee eer . wate de 
ee kel Tae Pete Ont te? so | eh re a 

ae tee oe Se Caton ores 
: i eens ean 0 Oa Non 

















spat shy Nettles wg AW A fh 
(hos ha Sheed then pot <8 f= 
earn xs 
‘ ‘ A gthghng Maen eean 
49 fgtty aes Ny! 





o 
bo Ag ste Sele er Renee Neue Be ‘ 
tom ~~ eeeetk rare ie AE Oe er : 5 
palette ty Stree ate tte te gO Smee nema’ 5a 2 a 4 
— os © Nranbetete hs rir neteests py tens an Aten eat ytete™ f ‘ ow) 
nae pease nee tes Seer Cae nah eee eee ere <I Bstabe Rb-Oehtes tots paraiso w 8 ( 
sey Aetinte Se pa og ae ee ee rw nara —~ io Sameer tL rar ee a OR aT patel a tr sts ne nomenchcnbtph. a tetohs Mi aNS ERLE 
Sasa eersce ae em Bae ee hace ees eee seen rir lene reorient nieone 
- eee eae ee aA we * ae Se ene eae Rees ae nah bene ete y pee eee Tey Aaah satya aa her Maat eh aT NNO seating 70! 
r ma Sela pntcontcbetene7e fot" at rai) On ear shy Weta atectie tater ge re rer WF ot SS guts tate heii har egy MS sec bn- arin We a tes 
ee Coca <teshaeate Meo yore apete Spec De 1h cto Men owngle what 9M Spats Ota ahh ideada hada gAn tints cine cy hgAng als gt 
: Pen er eytt ae reer ee ene ee gests : ah tty Hod srrieaho Neen champ mance mnetelie Mpheie fs 
e Gotha eet? : a y ’ . na Pechiatn torah alta Ta Nan help Amgite heey lh! 
seat ’ hh ean Ne saa a ta aia Ne fire Meena 
4 . ach seam gauptalte ana yt re a Nn eR Regen Aeglhe Ms he Cha 
ae Fae ite tha tg ety Peg Bie 
hs 

















mr bg ety te yee = 
att a nitentin Se My OMe? enge beriete teres ates 
agp te we Pame rete As aia OE rs SEO, een 7 
pat.<Agtery ne ee Pe ree ee recht tet oan ape eve Ae Te dethoraget ; es 
Ry Gels Sn yA aye en EI pe ype a. Png de Bethe ee OO Kote ee ew + i i Menton wf ' 
s aA. rere 2" ng he Ap batennl™ sagtot yteticmm nn Bee eh Mg Rec Ae lhe nate ear r D iain Be Heath On fAatarate es fate tester 
Fig Blige er te WRotets x. eee ve Saw ee ee al ny We agri HACE ere" he thetapiin rte tye terPortte Sint eD teeta Ay Tete thet tte talhtsiee 
pie eee PAS Serre ere Ae Brathan hoe AAAs tel etait OI enti ; “s ahaa tains rere Lg peste Ayigiles 
feet Aytewrelen=it ry eer rk eo Aint. tot eer Beh et rheoe-t op ee aan emake ts See Ae Ah rs a 4 si nv spie hetret 
Sierra neo we rate a enw Pe eet es ~ a . : . ” ; 
whl pte s Mo 0 ert ly ape tre sth Bhs rhea Mic Me tan oe a Brae ave ign BE et whe a pire: ‘ a2 ; wei : 
- pay OPE DSc eee Lara Oe Apfel (ie tePe tin Rete MS ee ice a me mene ash? eae a a 
mye cal SP te tht Sper a OE inte ee pateAaAgte eB ete a lt IIS art me a . ; ? “ we 
ahntty aos whale he Naa AN rhe atest Pete tae RS we Fiat : : cestest \ ‘ : 
DA tight fee ety Oe tee er ee Se Hn ee ne et ci tetra Mal ME ae ae ‘ 
pighotgin yt teeter tee Pies Oe TE eee faint: PSR \ pcs clin AAR eee Hewes re ert aR 
nay a tga tele teen netgan tert Signer eran ehh he aan ne TE wt eoait tis ie fur J mA Pt inte Oke Me PesPna ir fe Nal MENS Th aehimainebed ateyttil tt: ton 7 7 fs 2 
= me” +o feneh Be Sat A ns re fag © Pg hte eae Mae FE ton Sg i gees Pave : nat ath Heltte aati : Act Ee eed: “ efi teee pa oe BOE reenners ae 3 
~ ” *« %, = Sa ro Fa " 4 a in F P S - “ <a i ” te 
Sa eee ee SEF Ee PRIS EG ih EEF: ple Sa tpt Artin SS NN eG NTR gto ete i es ae hath. te pee SOE ate ee oe Po aareue te 
Dig tatlg Mote a pamper etche™ ante ae Hare Pe Re Oe ee center es dee iy st il = bey ats Lay Bahr fh , oe 
ety ®t thn Agfin tp #2 Me 2% Sas ee HN ee acted sete? ate te nee-2. 3 ans q 2 rattigt teats Rete" 
ha tate tetas Matalin eS hg He alten PFE S Antenne atetgt nts at Tisih) seatrreaftathytee® Ce ere ; 
o% maocectanetehna Ech aNnssnae™ iT De ee ae adi rar! ate ‘ 
ete tte" papitata hee gl O™ sagt ents te Ngee ae ar ares tr Pre Ms ‘ Reta (ne fhe Reger - 5 
‘ . > i < ecpuhobate OOH prectie ithe™ b= eee he 
en Me ei tptin Mane NP Aa Bin ee Gai Metin g Rage hehe b Fen Gipittete** " ree eee Nits efit 
Lane Oot sh ai nA. he teenie 2) Se a te hye PP ee a ek Het ote Cotes a rar ry Be ” oe Han Aptmnt nape aria pee * iri wt write Pw A Sytiinw eo ' ie 
; . j s : Ss > : ei , oe : tap bibs st yl ne ae age ° =F ert ae Lae e 4 4 
¥ “5 + pateNe aa te a eee: ook eens 2 Ook octane MES af .. ew atin Ne Myton - alatette ee phir we es.’ hn OnlnmitieT nie Ie ert RY Mt one ene ware en Ce : 
Ee ae ear ie ly Cert Re es man honatis hn pO A Rial concep te a trie fg ee NS Mires hae ee Te S TR be naeenetot ee cugbgha heater tata Bm 
=e ere e® nOn 0, 0a ‘’ ane ™ i Sag, Seethet > elate Se Be Path Re Pen te apes ee9 ; . ; , niet ey ’ : f ; pad ak aah Arta y , ‘ : . 
RA a Be ey cr tetiy prerwen wee et SOE, eS re ip te ernie tt patna oe ere ware PP Sie ST eae aiets mys 
a eo annsang EP tle tae atnotig Rate nn ho ME Ta Ac apie rte da bedat atte ee si a syeney: ra Me tetatentngin te al" erent tae a ae alent ste ast yA 
peteien ety toy Set ete ely ie heme eon yh tale Gyre? = eden ucts PEs ee ed = nad ether on tel ee ee ah Sapucsatinths 
a ee nite a pe | ee were ie Shan ete teil vette ther fee ar 3 Path Ponta Bee's . a ewe eerie frentne cee oe ia 
nat eel i ee eer sepetieta te fe eo eer eat Sank Rasen ahaha ten ORE a Ee ee ets ee theft 
SS ee a NT eas ys . * D - NS ee ee delle, 0 he Woe Pere aya = Argh Be ee ante Son oan ~~ 
“4 a8 ir ‘ ‘ a 2m phen tine thet ae AN Eo ua eae 
, y 7: ye eaten 
ee Auckegeeeaents® 
pigs hel ee 


re Ts ery 
fe alg Tp te Ce 





il 


oh -Se8o4s*? wn ete te Mah ue a 
28> Nettie he i a ee he eet ae ee 
Lette 5 no fee tern he A, tne ~~ inte ite me oh Ain ten Me™ a Ay J 
‘ ds a het ae en At Pear: 
= he Ho et 





notte mS 
Anta bite lr vevitats ee by Rete en tettostp the 
sty Fug ty tesla eet ctee™ ney ig oon Me Ph 
a ee a einen —_* ee en ~ ee ae ead en ee othe Ah fier Oty \ ~ 
Ne utente ea ee bee eis tata Stet magic ten” 
oe Tog, a nee eb ae ip Owe Pa wo fgg rte eee »" eins fe" wt 
gta ete Ae Mang A ate Pee an Nate Se " m Rettcr ee he 
aint ag An 1 ig t,t Sal ee eet pw any ghs eter lg et tet po east 
Rigit te Ne eee as Mie me “ .) wt ig Ten Or > AeOr: **'* 
‘ in ean ye mq = 7 < hoe OG al 
my eee ee the tet 4 - i Baha tet p it » 
er Bee St Ee a be ait ee td a Nok a, ey 2 her her “oy 3% iy Me! an 
nee nt in Mie nee ye es €.n-h a ee 
ght QeTe ee NE aad + £6 «, He" miter eighth? — ~ 
Benes \y = = Se ~ en oe “ " ag 
fig aM nT Airs Pe ae eS ee — ote 
By tage Ratt A ee na Aa Mam Sethe? _—. a alg Lito 
Rat Tass. =~ a > ee" Fear fr an ee ey, nit * 
- mae = 








Return this book on or before the 
Latest Date stamped below. 





University of Illinois Library 





OCT 18 wap | SUNT 107 


ani! 6 ante 
ee 55. oY £y 4754 Se 
us & MS iw 


C65 





BEC 3 


ocr 27 19 ‘Nov 31197 
+ amg. | NOV sinks 





L161—H41 





ey HR Pai - iF a f 
1d yet a '’ a ry Y 
aD ie ute) jee? Yr “Ni 















y ' «ay len’ 
ij 7’ hi Pe int i 
moe iL 
i rit ¥ 
5 vy 
pt 
ie Waar 
ay | bd 
Mtl 
it {) t I 
: haa 
ae 
“} iit ‘ ‘ \y 
area ae) m 
lal y 
Plas j 
} 
" 
ae a Veh. 
ey Be 
low , (4 ie ive 
Ji 
Ki 
Fe 
\ ) 
? i] 
' 
n 
1 
Wa ve v lion, aay ; , 
val Wi) ky ‘ek bik sca aie! . ti | 
bP ier OA es We Ve ah Liles OM Hkh) 
Aap Dae i mi Sd ih ef (a i ’ , Mh 
sin) SCE by id ta } My ie: ' 
UR i} 7 ‘. 
ef : jie i % By a, 
ri.s o ; | ) ‘ i ' | 
1 Weal RU Sar tee 
i } ed | 
, ey 7 
k f , 
i. ¥ re ; 
’ ve 7 
“ 
' 
i 
> yj 
y 


1nd 
A eho tie 4k 


Me 










Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2017 with funding from 
University of Illinois Uroana-Champaign Alte 


& ‘ 





-httos://archive.org/details/greekgrammarforsOOhadI_0 
RD a 


1) oe 
Pa Oe Lie : 
* h) "f By “ 


' ’ * re 
¥ 3 rn PB i, i ‘al : a 
; vary Mas ae fe a 
Tae eat } ‘aon st Ge Pre 
os 5 wi ~ mo se ke ween be ,% i ae 





j 
: 


? 
4 
: 
} 









FOR 


SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 


BY 


JAMES HADLEY, 


LATE PROFESSOR IN YALE COLLEGE, 


- REVISED AND IN PART REWRITTEN 
BY 


| PREDERIC DE FOREST ALLEN, 


PROFESSOR IN HARVARD COLLEGE, 


_ NEW YORK - - CINCINNATI -:- CHICAGO 
er M ERICAN BOOK © OMPANY. 





———s 





o 








ed ate fae 


bn iy 





Copyriant, 1860, Re oe a 
Bi D. APPLETON AND COMPANY = 





en | Printed bo 
eT | BD. Hppleton & Company ane 
‘as See | Rew Dork, US. A. 











, * 
/ 
* 
" ; Ri 
are 
; 
4. 
, 
yy 



























. - 4 ~ - 
1" , : ] ru) ’ > Pees tl .8 - ~*, 
ee | MWeteure Sie Mast Sa ann ‘ CUM Fh. 


: > i ae a % mA Sb shy | & i’ ode. _—~ : t 
she Schulyeaymtik te a a. ar Lea PET han.’ Stage Camas 

a 
¢ eo +h ee Ys ae ae eee eee me a! pr ey E ye a ings 
The We & of PE eee ait ahr peri. Ee | Fe ON ete a 2 





bias 


op 
a 
rs 
fa 
~ 
So 
| 
wad 
<2 
* 
oo 
oe 
4 . 
Pa 
he 
_ 
al 
- 
t 
~ 
. 
ro 
e 
bs) 
. 
- 
wy 
ate 
, 
> 
* 
, 
. 


via" 


poured, : ate oF G§ with some eiee’ ERE foci aetishud ehee 


fi jmp ortant ady Hee Koken es ceding os FREER 
¢ ~ - ' -- _ ied s 
pict; - 4 year. : a tr , fs ak: it ae 


Cay Peo My Sret ight wont ne ©: leretiau 4 


. > * . - 
3} epee EY Cole ae ehanees as might. seem 
OTE th the Glite ated ALAR OD ASt TR wel ae eats. 
te ny: arg be x 4 a? > ee Y . 7 , 
bee eee, SF age erie, Be es Te ei ae ae 


mem suCu fase’ ame & 8 Ahaypee We hare yt wee ae. "+ 
PA. hi: aos ea. 4 Awd nt ri ue ., a eay; tet aoa - 


PRBS e9f Hithls i emia cs (Uo 0 tp ap wh 
vd ig inaidh i, ro, egy va Wty eho De OY m 4 ‘ PAS 
mre ps oe. 6 oy) Pra ay eta yede U's POUANS: cece 
ito he: the ov piptover colirael tiat "ab ocld aysume li 3 
rk, ik g's. 3) 8S chee ly co, the ful at ekne 
be ; — Pats ~ ’ ~ ol Ae p ; ® By 3 8 j 
£.Om to t=: &:995), “ealas, Sheald tis’ voluxe ag 7s 
wees gf a osateal Ineurae ‘ui. the ° a ees a 
tv Aik Gedad afd chompbéfal beh isk: mah Bie ov. ae 
“fo me ae 46 toDlow £8 ay ar tile SER ager OTT 
ai i red Ss 
be . * a? a 
a uvtrot, to some Fear ite Min Ce aw aes: 


00, thet the dag 
posh 


iv PREFACH TO THE FIRST EDITION. 


other Indo-European languages, has of late received, and is still receiving, 
much light from the scientific comparative study of the whole class to which 
it belongs. The new views of Greek etymology and structure, developed 
and established by that study, have been made the object of special atten- 
tion in the preparation of this work; and have been taken up into it, as far 
as seemed to be consistent with the practical ends which must always be 
paramount in an elementary grammar, 3 

The multiplicity of forms presented by the different Greek dialects is 
the occasion of considerable embarrassment to the grammarian. Scattered 
through the sections which describe the Attic language, they interfere seri- 
ously with the unity of exhibition and impression which it is important 1. 
secure: but when thrown together by themselves at the end of the book 
they lose in clearness and significance, by being severed from those common 
facts and principles with which they are naturally associated. In ti’. 
Grammar will be found a sort of compromise between the opposite di 
culties. The peculiarities of euphony and inflection, which belong to the 
other dialects, are given in smaller type at the foot of each page, under the 
corresponding Attic forms, so as to be kept clearly distinct from the latter, 
while yet presented with them in the same view. 

It is» hardly necessary to say that a complete exhibition of the dialecis is 
not attempted in these pages. The multitude of forms which appear only 
in lyric fragments, or in ancient inscriptions, or in the writings of g 1- 
marians, are passed over without iotice. The object has been simply 9 
supply what is necessary in this respect for a proper reading of the cla 
authors, and particularly Homer, Herodotus, Pindar, and Theocritus. 
the language of Homer, I have derived much assistance from the Hom. » 
Grammar of Ahrens (Griechische Fornenlehre des Homerischen und Aitiscacn 
Dialektes: Gottingen, 1852); and for that of Herodotus, from the careful 
and thorough investigations of Bredow (Quaestiones Criticae de Dialecto 
Herodotea: Lipsiae, 1846). 

In the sections on the verb, the forms of voice, mode, and tense are 
reduced to a small number of groups, called “ tense-systems.” Under this 
arrangement, which is similar to those already adopted by Ahrens and 
Curtius, the inflection of the verb is represented as the inflection of a few 


tense-stems, which are formed, each in its own way, from the common verb: 


=~ 


PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. V 


‘stem. It is hoped that the arrangement may commend itself in use, not 


only as consistent with the obvious analogies of verb-formation, but also as 


Pificulated to make the structure of the verb simpler and more intelligible 


to the learner. 
Among these tense-systems, the most prominent is that which includes. 


‘the present and imperfect, the tenses of continued action; and it is also the 


one which shows the greatest variety of formation. Hence the formation of 


_ the present is taken as the basis of a new classification, the whole mass of 


verbs being divided into nine classes, according as the stem of this tense 
coincides with that of the verb, or varies from it by different changes. 


The special formation of particular verbs—“ anomalous” formation, as it 


a 
has been generally, but to a great extent inappropriately, termed—is ex- 


apis with considerable fulness, and according to a uniform method, 


mended to assist the apprehension and memory of the learner. 
"In the Syntax, the leading aim has been—not to construct a philosophical 


‘system of human expression, with Greek sentences for illustrations—but to 


4 ‘Tepresent, as fully and clearly as possible within the prescribed limits, the 


‘actual usage and idiom of the Greek language. It has also been an object 


| to accompany the full statement of rules and principles with brief phrases, 


. describing their substance, and convenient for use in the recitation-room. 


M Dak 


“In regard to the examples by which the Syntax is illustrated, it has not 


re 

been thought necessary to give for each one the name of the author from 
ot 
w: om it is cited. Only those taken from non-Attic sources, as Homer and 


* ‘erodotus, are credited to their authors: those which come from Attic poets 


TF y+ 


ave marked simply as poetic: while those which come from Attic prose- 


. YON 


writers, and constitute perhaps nine-tenths of the whole number, are given 


ee ny 


without any indication of their source. The examples are translated through- 
out, untranslated examples being (if I may trust my own observation) of but 


little use, In general, even to the better class of students. Regarded as 


illustrations, they are imperfect, since it is only with difficulty, and perhaps 


with uncertainty, that the learner recognizes their relation to the rule or 


principle to be illustrated. And if we view them as exercises in translation, 
it may be questioned whether detached sentences, torn from the connections 
in which they stood, and involving often peculiar difficulties of language and 


construction, are best suited for this purpose. A similar rule has been fol: 


' 


vi PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 


lowed even in the earlier portions of the Grammar; except, indeed, in the first 
part (Orthography and Euphony), where it could hardly be carried out with 
convenience: but in the second and third parts, which treat of Inflection 
and Formation, the Greek words introduced are accompanied regularly by a 
statement of their signification. This course has been adopted, partly from 
the feeling that a student cannot fairly be expected to take much interest in 
words that have no meaning to his mind; and partly in the belief that it is 
possible, for a student, in this way, as he goes through his grammar, to 
acquire, with little trouble, a useful vocabulary of-Greek expression. 

In preparing this division of the work, I have made frequent use of the 

Syntax der Griechischen Sprache (Braunschweig, 1846), by Professor J. N. 
Madvig of Copenhagen. But my obligations are much greater—not for the 
Syntax only, but for almost every part of the kook—to K. W. Kriger, whose 
Greek Grammar (like that of Buttmann before it) marks a new epoch in the 
scientific treatment of its subject. Important aid has been received also 
from the school-grammars of Buttmann and Kihner, which are familiar to 
American students in the skilful translations of Dr. Robinson and Dr. 
Taylor. Nor must I omit to acknowledge myself indebted, for many valuable 
suggestions, to the excellent grammars produced in our own country by 
Professor Sophocles and Professor Crosby. 
e Inthe appended chapter on Versification, I have relied, partly on Munk’s 
Metres of the Greeks and Romans (translated by Professors Beck and Felton, 
Cambridge, 1844), but still more on the able treatises of Rossbach and 
Westphal (Griechische Rhythmik, Leipzig, 1854; and Griechische Metrik, 
Leipzig, 1856). 


PREFACE 


TO THE REVISED EDITION. 


THE Greek Grammar of Professor Hadley—the foundation of the 
present work—appeared in 1860; and has been in use, unchanged in 
any way, since that time. Professor Hadley died on the fourteenth 
of November, 1872, at the age of fifty-one. The leading features of 
his work, and its relation to Curtius’s Griechische Schulgrammatik, 
are set forth in the foregoing reprint of his own preface. It re- 
mains for the reviser to state, so far as may be done in a few words, 
what his work has been, and how the new book differs from the old 
one. 

In the first place, it seemed an urgent reform that the quantity of 
a, , and v should be uniformly and systematically indicated to the 
eye. Accordingly, a, t, 0 have been everywhere printed where these 
vowels are long; so that the unmarked a, t, v are understood to be 
short. This notation, now generally adopted in elementary Latin 
books, is equally important in Greek. Mis 

The general plan of the work and the arrangement of its divisions 
remain unchanged; the most important transposition is that of the 
chapter on Adjectives and Adverbs (§§ 640-653, new grammar) and 
that on Pronouns (§§ 677-705); these formerly stood after Cases. 
The parts least changed are perhaps Writing and Sound (Part First), 
and Declension. Here the paradigms and rules relating to adjectives 
have been completely (instead of partially) separated from those of 
substantives, and the adjectives have been rearranged according to 
their stems. In the substantives, a class of F-stems has been recog- 
nized. 

Much more altered is the part relating to the structure of the 
verb. The complicated machinery of ‘tense-signs,’ ‘ mode-signs,’ 
‘voice-signs,’ and ‘connecting vowels,’ has given place to a simpler 
system of ‘tense and mode suffixes,’ according to which all that 
intervenes between ‘verb-stem’ and personal ending is reckoned as 
a single element (or in the optative as two elements). This requires 





viii PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. oe 


a change in the use of the term stem. The old ‘connecting vowel’. * 
is now counted apart of the tense-stem: the first aorist tense-stem-is  » 
no longer Avo-, but Adoa-; and in like manner Aeyo- (not Aey-) is 
called the stem of éyo-pev, just as we call Aoyo- (not doy-) the stem — 
of Aédyo-s. In fact, it seemed desirable to restrict the term stem,+in ~ 
conjugation as well as in declension, to that which is ready to receive 
the inflectional endings. I have, therefore, recognized no ‘stems’ ex+id + 
cept tense-stems (and mode-stems); and for the old ‘verb-stem’—the © . 
element whence the different tense-stems are derived—I have uséd: .« 
the term theme. Another necessary innovation is the ‘variable vowel? | - 
and its sign, °|<.. This sign may be read ‘omicron or epsilon,’ qr= 4 
‘9 or é’:; but Av|.- should be read ‘Xwvo- or Ave-’. * pawirs 
Of the nine classes of verbs, two have disappeared: the ‘ e-clas8’yo»" 
is made a subdivision of Class I, and the ‘reduplicated class’ dss? 
tributed among the other classes. On the other hand, a new ‘rookie 3, 
class’ has been added, comprising the pu-verbs, which could no longeto f; 
form a part of Class I. It will be observed, moreover, that the wyy-. « : 
form of inflection has received a new treatment: its main»peculiaritiega — 
are enumerated in § 385, in immediate contrast to the ordinary formy.~ 
and details of the present and second aorist ,.-forms are given under 
those tenses respectively. The inflection of the irregular p-verbs ii 
given by itself in full, and four regular ones have been added to the-= 
synopses, §§ 3849-352. eS Lh 
» The paradigms have been pruned here and there in the intené$tis~« 
of a stricter Atticism. For instance, -7 in the second person singwbd ov6 
middle has been dropped, and forms like rip@npev, dvoyu, Eorainpes| ovs 
édiS@v, di8ov (imperative middle), have disappeared. So AdovnwssiT 
AvécGwv, have taken precedence of Avérocay, Ai€obooay 5 AvoedweRi 3 
Avoeve Of AVoms, AUoar; the pluperfect in -Ky of that Im -Kew; AvGepao0ite 
pev, SiSoipev Of AvOeinuer, Sidoinpev ; Prdroiny of prot. The perfiiaec’: * 
active imperative has been relegated to a note, and so has the opiind — 
tive form AeAveoiny ; the noun dywyewy has been discarded as non-H -of 
istent. In the dual feminine of pronouns, To, rade, rovrw have talitnolk 4 
the place of rd, rade, ravra. So the rules for augment of ean { 
(357) and of the pluperfect (358) have been restated in accordares ~_ . 
with the now established Attic usage. I might have drawn the lines: ~ 3, 
still closer in these matters; but the maker of a school-grammar 4 
is hampered by the necessity of having some regard to the cua ae 
Greek texts. ee ie ¢ 
The Classified Verb-List has been revised with the aid of Veiteh’s. Be 


PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. ix 


Greek Verbs, and the forms of Attic prose and poetry distinguished 
by means of two kinds of type. The Alphabetical Verb-List, which 
was formerly a mere index to the other, has been amplified so as to 
serve some purposes independently, and has been placed at the end of 
the book instead of the middle. 

The greatest changes are in the Syntax: here a good deal is sub- 
staniially rewritten. This is particularly true of the Syntax of the 
Modes. And here I owe very especial thanks to Professor Goodwin 
for cordial permission to adopt some important features of his works: 
especially the distinction of general and particular conditions, and 
the application of the categories of conditions to conditional relative 
clause . The arrangement of final clauses also follows closely Pro- 
fessor Goodwin’s. 

TY! . introductory part of the Syntax as far as § 689, is entirely re- 
cast «.d rearranged. There is less that is new in the syntax of Cases, 
ard c. the Infinitive and Participle; yet even here much is altered. 
The prepositions I have arranged in alphabetical order. In all parts 
of the Syntax I have striven to bring into greater prominence what 
is impcrtant and peculiar to Greek, and to separate it more thoroughly 
fr in what is unimportant or self-evident. 

P-ofessor Hadley, as he explains in his preface, did not think it 
necessary to give the sources of the Greek examples used in illustrat- 
ing the syntax. In the new edition, on the other hand, I have fol- 
lowed ‘he plan of giving exact citations for these. The old examples 
hav. io en very generally employed, yet in numerous instances others 
ha: cca substituted or added. 

The See: on Word Formation has been somewhat enlarged, 
bui >= ge eat not much changed. The same is true of the Versifi- 
coi,» only here I have stated the modern theories more boldly than 
Protec or Hadley had ventured to do, and have modified the system 
of now*!ion. 

©- much about the separate parts of the work. Throughout the 
wheie the lesser changes, in wording, arrangement, and so on, and 
tae isi.or additions and omissions, are numerous. Many good hints 
as to « xciser forms of expression were derived from Professor Had- 
ley’s sinaller work, Z’he Hlements of Greek Grammar (1869). 

A yord respecting explanations of the origin of inflectional forms. 
1 hope no one will suppose that this book professes to embody the 
latest results of comparative grammar. Those results are at present 
partly in a very chaotic-condition, partly very ill suited to be set 


r? ’ _ aN CR iy See Antene 


effigies ie et ihe oak covptega sad dies 
cerita bus. B artgey Tye, AO 3 hag: Ray ba ae err G 
weg ti saobiye Fo Oy AE its crae. sear 
error Gee Rennes: seqhuat, & 
s shall not . fury BPO “re sith 
- generis. I cong C00 wey ons etrifle f 
Hadley dee: these. historical ai. sienie; sat <a ves 
trerched ch omoctcd. explanalio.* 4 nich he gave, ail 
gntwily conten.’ leey., sarch une nikined,, And J 
Thovie.. go far as possible, au SE as ae aphs # 
ape » 
eleeas aver oi bi: +3 tO. Gone ota em a 
Dbt bac? then ath i Lat mast contest tiyself with 2 
Whe buys Goue me th. 0c) sei vice... My coilaen, I ue 
dad Dane us, ond ty iced. Dr. Relert Keep, of ye Ret 
have Lean 2... sway 9a edvice ad useful su; sii 
PG Secs. ef 4 se hem, sent me some gobd: 4, win aig 
Peatet sa. Sd doy ped On HL ML Clarke gave 3 
Roms eco 'g Jouning, Peete ay ee Clarke also 4 ee 
es rca oe 0 general ini" es are in rue Vn wu Ws 
he Ds ab. Goddard ond Dr. A. W. Roberts: Res?9s these,” 
teh. att) 08m a on oes 2 
“roiuts, «. who have written me of | 


ee 
























Ps igh ag) 
hs de self ' 
* 
oa 

M A 
: A ae 

‘ ey. ft bid i 
{ z 
» 7 

" moet Gile aoe. wae ae 
, ee as 
’ + 
F ot wae 
1 fe 
: m, : i 
' 1 f Peary 
. 
n a oF ne br 3°? 
; 

* + “Si " Me? e 


¥ 


ee 


~ oa oad 
PVEPAR TS 


UNIVE 
CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Greek Language and Dialects. 


PART FIRST. 


WRITING AND SOUND. 


Alphabet 

Vowels . 
Diphthongs 
Breathings . 
Consonants 

Vowel Changes 
Consonant Changes 


Special Changes of Final Sounds 


Crasis 

Elision 

Final Consonants 

Movable Consonants 
Syllables 

Quantity 
Accent 

Accent affected ‘e Quantity 

Accent in Vowel-Changes 

Accent in Connected Discourse 
Punctuation 


PART SECOND. 


INFLECTION. 


Nouns ; 

First Declension (A- Decl.) 

Second Declension (O-Decl.) 
Attic Second Decl. 

Third Declension (Cons. Decl.) 
Labial and Palatal Stems 
Lingual Stems : 
Liquid Stems : 
Stems in -eg- and -ao- 
Stems in -F- 

Stems in -1- and -v- . 

Diphthong Stems 
Irregular Declension 
Local Endings 


PAGE 
1 


A r 


ft iN 


SITY OF ILLINOIS. 


Adjectives . 
Vowel-Declension 
Consonant-Declension . 
Comparison of Adjectives 
Form. and aii iy of Adverbs . 
PRONOUNS 
Numerals . : 
VERBS 


| Paradigms of Verbs 


Formative Elements of the Verb. 
Augment 
Reduplication 
Tense and Mode Suffixes . 
Endings. 
Use of the Endings 
Accent of the Verb 
Formation of Tense-Systems 
Present and Imperfect 
Future Active and Middle 
First Acrist Act. and Mid. 
Second Aorist Act. and Mid. 
Perfect and Pluperfect Active 
Perf., Pluperf., Fut. Perf., Mid. 
Aorist and Future Passive 
Verbal Adjectives 
Irregular Verbs in -u 
Enumeration of pu-forms . 
Presents of wi-form. ‘ 
Second Aorists of wi-form 
Shorter 2d Perf. without -a- 
Dialectic Formations 
Irregularities of Meaning 
Classified Verb-List ; 
First Class (Variable-Vowel 
Class) . 
Second Class 
Class) . 
Third Class (Tau- Class) . 
Fourth Class (Iota-Class) 
Fifth Class (Nasal Class) . 
Sixth Class (Inceptive Class) 
Seventh Class (Root-Class) 
Kighth Class (Mixed Class) . 


(Strong-Vowel 


So & . 
aa CONTENTS. 


PART THIRD. 


| The Tenses 


FORMATION OF WORDS. pace | Tenses of the Indicative 
formation of Simple Words 188 Tenses in other Modes . | 
Substantives : ; . 189} The Modes . : : ; 

Adjectives . 3 . 198 The Adverb &y 
Denominative Woke : . 195 | Finite Modes in Simple Sentences 
“omposition of Words 197 | Finite Modes in Comp’d Sentences 
Form of Compound Words. 197 Final Clauses : 
Meaning of Compound Words. 199 Conditional Sentences 
Peculiarities . ; *. 
PART FOURTH. Relative Clauses ; 
SYNTAX. Clauses of Cause and Result 
Definitions . . 901 | _ Indirect Discourse . 
eneral Rules of the Sentence 203 | Infinitive . , 
Subject . : . 203 Subject and Predicate 
Verb . 203 Infinitive without Article 
Predicate-Nouns _ 206 Infinitive with Neuter Article . 
Attributives 097 | _ Infinitive with &y 
Appositives . 208 | Participle 
Pronouns of Reference 210 | Attributive Participle . 
“ther Peculiarities in Number Predicate-Participle 
and Gender . 3 Sway Circumstantial Participle . 
\djectives and Adverbs Sie with Case Absolute 
The Article i ; 215 Adjuncts of Partiviple 
6in Poetry . ‘ ; _ 915 Supplementary Participle 
6 as Demonstrative 215 |~_Participle with@ 9.  . 
d's We Aide _ 916 | Verbal Adjectives in -réos . 
Peonetne - ‘ . 999 | Relative Sentences . 
he Cases . ; ' _ 296 Attraction, Incorporation 
N panda and Vocative : 


Aecusative . 
Two Accus. with ane ‘eisits 


ce | 


2 - | Other Peculiarities 
Interrogative Sentences 
N egative Sentences 


‘" mitive . 232 | Particles -. . A 
with Substantives 233 | Conjunctions . hae 
with Verbs _ 235 : Figures of Syntax 2 
with Adjectives and Adverbs 241 
in looser Relations . /_ APPENDIX, 


L ytive 


544 | Versification 


of Indirect Object ve » 244 Trochaic Rhythms 

of Interest . 245 Jambic Rhythms . 

of Association and Likeness . 246 Dactylic Rhythms : : 

with Compound Verbs 248 . Anapaestic Rhythms. 

of Instrument, Means, Manner, Logaoedic Rhythms 
Cause. 948 Dactylo- Epitritic Rhythms 

of Time and Place . . 250 | OCretic Rhythms . 

“-epositions with Cases . 95() |  Choriambic Rhythms 

General View . . 252 lonie Rhythms . 

Use of the Pr onda 252 Dochmiac and Bacchic Rhyth. 

The Voices , B 7 . 260 | -\bbreviations 

Active : : .  . 260 | ALPHABETICAL LisT OF Vine: ‘ 

Middle . ; : .  « 260 Greek INDEx : ee oe 

Passive p ; . eae Eneuish INDEX .. ‘ , 


262 | 





INTRODUCTION. 


The Greek Language and Dialects. 


l. The inhabitants of ancient Greece called themselves Hellenes 
("E\Anves), and their country Hellas (‘EdAds). The name Hellenes 
was applied also to the members of the same race, dispersed by colo- 
nization over the islands and coasts of the Mediterranean. By the Ro- 
mans they were called Graeci, and hence are known to us as Greeks. 
Their language—the Greek—is connected with the languages of the 
Indians, Persians, Romans, the Slavonic, Germanic, and Celtic na- 
tions. These are all kindred languages, and together form the Indo- 
European family of languages. 


2. The Hellenes referred themselves for the most part to three 
principal divisions, Aeolians, Dorians, and Ionians. To these be- 
longed three groups of dialects : the Aeolic, spoken in Aeolis, Boeo- 
tia, Thessaly, and elsewhere ; the Doric, in Peloponnesus, Isthmus, 
and north-western Greece, also in Crete and Caria, Sicily and southern 
Italy ; the Jonic, in Ionia and Attica, and in most of the Aegean 
islands. The Aeolic and Doric groups were more closely related to 
each other than either was to the Ionic. In each group the various 
dialects differed somewhat from each other; and the Aeolic dialects 
in particular were very unlike. As regards the written works which 
have come down to us, it is enough to specify the following forms: 


3, a. The Aeolic of Lesbos, found in the lyric fragments of Al- 
caeus and the poetess Sappho (600 B. c.). 


b. The Doric, found in the lyric poetry of Pindar (470 B.c.) and 
the bucolic (pastoral) poetry of Theocritus (270 B.c.). Even the 
Attic dramas in their lyric parts contain some Doric forms. The lan- 
guage of Pindar has some peculiarities derived from the Aeolic, and 
still more from the Epic. : 


ce. The Jonic, including 

(1) The Old Ionic, or Epic, found in the poetry of Homer and 
Hesiod (before 700 B.c.). In all the poetry of later times (though 
least of all in the dramatic dialogue) we find more or less admixture 
of Epic words and forms. 


_ (2) The New Ionic, the language of Ionia about 425 B. c., found 
in the history of Herodotus and the medical writings of Hippocrates. 


_ iD. In Homer, Hellas is only a district in northern Greece, the Hellenes 
its inhabitants. For the Greeks at large, he uses the names ’Axavoi, "Apyezor, 
Aavact, which, strictly taken, belong only to a part of the whole people. 


2D. The division into Aeolians, Dorians, Ionians, is unknown to Homer. 


2 GREEK LANGUAG E AND DI 

’ jai At ig Og RO eine il 
_ The following dialect, though in strictness t 
closely related to the two preceding, is always ¢i 

d. The Aftic, the language of Athen isk period 

(from 490 B. c.), found in many works of poetry and prose, cially — 
the tragedies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and ‘uripides, the comedies — 
of Aristophanes, the histories of Thucydi‘es and Xenophon, — 
philosophical writings of Plato, and the oration: of Lysias, Isocratés, 
Aeschines, and Demosthenes. The political importance of Athens 
end the superiority of her literature gave a great ascendancy to her 
‘dialect, which at length banished the others froia literary use; though | 
the Doric and the Old Ionic were still retained, the latter for epic, 
the former for lyric and bucolic poetry. The Attic thus became the 
common language of all cultivated Greeks: but at the same time be- 
gan to lose its earlier purity. In this stave, commencing about the 
time of Alexander (who died 823 B.c.), it is called 













 e. The Common dialect (n xowv:) d:dXexros), in distinction from the 
purer Attic. On the border between the two, stands the great phi- 
losopher Aristotle, with his pupil Theophrastus. Among later au- 
thors, the most important are the historians Polybius (140 B. c.), Plu- 
tarch (100 A. D.), Arrian (150 a. p.), and Dio Cassius (200 a. p.), the 
geographer Strabo (1 4. p.), and the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- 
carnassus (30 B. c.), and Lucian (170 A. D.). 


| 


- Remarxk.—There is a noticeable diiference between the earlier and 
later Attic. The first is secu in the tragic poets and Thucydides; 
the last, in most other Attic writers. The language of Plato has an 
intermediate character. The tragic language is marked by many pe- 
culiarities of its own. ar 


4, For completeness, we may add 


f. The Hellenistic, a variety of the Common diaiect, found in the 
New Testament, and in the Septuagint version of the Old Testament. 
The name comes from the term Hellenist (“PAAnmeris from €ddAnvife), 
applied to 'tebrews, or others of foreign birth, who used the Greek 
language. . 


g. The Modern Greek, or popular language for the last thousand 
years, found in written works since about 1150 a.». It is also called 
Romaic {vom ‘Pepaio: (Romans), the name assumed in place of “EAAnves 
by the Greeks of the middle ages. 


Nore.—Through the first two Parts of the Grammar, the forms of Attic 
Greek, especially the Attic pros», are described in the b dy of the text ; 
while the peculiarities of other 'ialects (particularly those of Homer and 
Herodotus) are added in smaller t; ne »t the foot of cach page. . 











Hm. stands for Homer, and Hd. ‘or Herodotus ; cf. is used for Latin con-— | 


fer (compare); se. for seilicet (to wit), 7. for ibidem (in the same place) ; 
a. ¢. for id est (that is); e.g. for exempt gratia (for example); «7A. for kak 
7a Aoumd (Lat. ct ectera). Other abbrevi:tions will explain themselves, 





Oe eee HeMIieAonwnazaer>rnrHetNE PHD 


Form. 


— 


eee oe 27 Qgd A oO Mm's RF > a 


WRITING AND 


- @s ta 2 WR 
S | 


wa 


Alphabet. 


6, The Greek is written with twenty-four letters. 


wT. 
name. 


ara 
pe 
Yop. 
d¢ATa 

€ Wid ov 
tyra 
Ta. 
Onra 
ira 
KOTTG. 


AdpBda 


PART FIRST. 


SOUND. 


alpha 
beta 
gamma 
delta 
epsilon 
Zeta 

eta 
theta 
tota 
kappa 
lambda 
mu 

nU 

xe 
omicron 
pt 

rho 
sigma 
tau 
upsilon 
phi 

ch: 

730 
omega 


SS OE OS Ree a On ee 


24 
a 


dls” S 


= 4 VOWELS. [6 


6. Sigma at the end of a word has the form s; in any 
other »lace the form «: thus ordois faction. 
a. Avbreviations for many combinations of two or three letters are found 


in manuscripts and old editions. Two of these are still occasionally em- 
ployed: 8 for ov, and ¢ for er. 


7. The oldest Greek alphabet had two other letters : 
FF Fav va Latin v 
: ° oma koppa ere 
Vau stood in the alphabet between e and ¢, koppa between m and p 
Vau is also called digamma, Sdiyaypa (double gamma, from its font 


8, The ancients used only the capital letters. The small letters came intc 
use during the middle ages. The names epsilon, omecron, upsilon, and omega 
are also of late origin ; the ancient names were e7 or @, ov or 0, d, and @. 


a. The term alphabet is formed from the names of the first two letters. 
The Greek alphabet is the source of the Latin: it is itself derived from thc. 
Phoenician alphabet. 


Vowels. 
9. The vowels are a, «, 7, 1, 0, , v. 
Of these, «, o, are always short, ( 
Ny Os always long, 
ena short 1 in some words, long in others . 


10, The short sounds of a, s, v, are sometimes indicated by 4, i. 
v ; the long sounds, by 4, @, v. 


In this grammar, however, the long vowels, a, 7, 3, are so 
marked throughout, and the unmarked a, 1, v are therefore; 
understood to be short. We have, then: 


the short vowels, «a, «& tt o, v, and | 
the long vowels, 4 4% %& @,° W. 


Notrt.—The mark of length is omitted over circumflexed vowels (96). 





11, The long vowels were originally s.unded as a, ¢, i, 0, u, in 
the English words par, prey, machine, pr ne, prune, slowly and fully 
‘ittered. The short vowels had the same sounds, only less prolonged 
in ntterance—nearly, therefore, like the English short sounds in the 
words papa (first syllable), pet, pzt, obey, pull. 


a. But v and o assumed at an early period (before 400 B. c.) the 


sound of the French w or German %, intermediate between English o 
and ce. At the end of a diphthong v retained its earlier sound. 


11 D. a. Some of the Doric and Aeoliec dialects always retained the older 
sound of v. 


elite 
a, ee 


14] ugh  DIPHTHONGS. 5 


12, The vowels are open or close. 


a, G, the most epen)u 
. The open vowels are ; fi tose open). : 
Uv 


The close vowels are 4, 4, », 


Diphthongs. 


13. The diphthongs (dipOoyyo double sounds) unite two. 
vowels—an open and a close vowel—in one syllable. They 


are | 
a, t,) ot, av, €v, OU, 
SS. Bm ®% nv, wv, and wu: 


but in w, both the vowels are close. 

The diphthongs 4, y, », which have the first act long, are 
sometimes called improper diphthongs. Their second vowel 
is called tota subscript (written below the first). 


a. But when the first vowel is written as a capital letter, . stands 
upon the line: QIAHI = ‘Q.d7 = ody). 


14, a. In the diphthongs, as at first pronounced, both vowels were 
heard, each with its proper sound, but without break between them. 
Thus ac was sounded like Engl. ay affirmative ; av like Engl. ow in 
our ; oc and ev nearly like ot in foil’and eu in feud. But ec and ov, 
though they originally had the diphthongal sounds to be inferred 
from their composition, came at an early time (before 400 B. c.) to be 
pronounced with simple sounds : ov like ow in youth; « like the ei in 
rein (and much later like that in seize), 


b. From the genuine e and ov above. described must be distin- 
guished, however, the spurious diphthongs e and ov, which arise by 
compensative lengthening (34) or contraction of ee, co, oc, co (37 e). 
These were sounded from the beginning as in rein and youth, and 
were not originally written as e and ov; but about 400 B.c. they 
coalesced with the genuine « and ov in sound and writing. 


¢. Ind, 7, , the second vowel was at first written on the line and 
sounded, as in other diphthwngs. But afterwards (about 100 B. c.) 
it ceased to be pronounceé, being swallowed up by the long 4, n, 
before it. The custom of writing it under the line dates from about 
the eleventh century. 


d. The sounds of nv and ov cannot be exemplified from English. 
These diphthongs are rare: nv occurs in Attic only as the result of 
ee 


44D. d. The Tonic has uv «also in vntds (Hm. Hd.) Att. vats ship, and 
yenvs (Hm.) Att. ypais old woman. The New Ionic has wv in witds, rwdrd, 
etc, Ae crasis for 6 airés, ro cwrd (77 D); also in reflexive pronouns, as 
which seems to liave arisen by crasis from €0 avoid ; further 

tua wonder, and words derived from it. | 





J 


G ' BREATHINGS. [15 


augment (357) or of crasis (76): uv is chiefly Ionic. The diphthong 
vt was sounded somewhat like wi in guit,; it is. never followed by a 
consonant in the same word. 


16, in Latin letters the diphthongs we.e represented, 
il, €t, Ol, av, EV, OU, Ub, 9) eee 
Wy de, 6.0% 2 306; Oye BUG, aly ee 


a. For au, OL, in a few proper names, we have Latin ai, 01; Mata 
Maia, Tpoia Troia, Atas Atax. For o, in a few compounds of oon 
song, we have o¢: rpayodés tragoedus. 


16. Diaeresis.—A double dot, called a mark of diaeresis 
(separation), is sometimes written over an ct or v, to show 
that it does not form a diphthong with the vowel before it : 
thus zpotévar, pronounced zpo-vevar to advance. 

a. The diaeresis may be omitted, when it is evident from a breathing (17 a), 
or an accent (96), or from z written on the line (13 a), that the two vowels do 
not unite as a diphthong. Thus in arn, ixdu, AniCouevos, the vowels are 


evidently separate (= ain, ixOvi, Ani(duevos), while in abrh, iyOut, An¢duevos, 
they unite as diphthongs. 


Breathings. 


17. A vowel at the beginning of a word always has either the 
rough breathing (°) or the smooth (’) written over it. The 
rough breathing shows that A was sounded before the vowel : 
thus érra (pronounced hepta) seven. The smooth breathing 
means simply that the vowel was sounded without 2: thus 
eri (pronounced epz) upon. 


a. A diphthong at the beginning of a word takes the breathing over 
its second vowel: avrov of himself, airod of him. But in the improper 
diphthongs, « never takes the breathings, even when it stands upon 
the line: “Acdns = adns Hades. 


b. All words which begin with v or @ have the rough breathing. 


18, The consonant p at the beginning of a word always has 
the rough breathing (thus 6, Latin rh): pytwop rhetor orator. 
And in the middle of a word pp is by many editors writ- 
ten pp (Latin rrh): thus Ilvppos Pyrrhus ; though some write 
Ilvppos. 


a. Except in pp, the breathings belong only to dnztial letters ; if 
brought into the middle of a word by ees a they are not writ- 


17 D. b. The Epic pronouns vupes, vam, dupe (261 D) have the sa 
breathing. The Aeolic dialect had other exceptions. 





ae 

a 
Bree), 

ca. . - 

nae | | 

‘ 

Lm, 

: 

* 


oe kas CONSONANTS. 7 


tens iabhedax (for mpo-erOa) to abandon, though there is evidence 
the rough breathing was often pronounced. Compare the Latin 
_ forms enhydris évvdpis, polyhistor modviorwp. 


Consonants. 


19, The consonants were sounded, for the most part, as we sound 
. the Roman letters used to represent them (5). But observe that x, y, 
'o, t had only the sounds which are heard in Engl. coo, go, so, to: 
thus in Avuxia Lycia, Spvyia Phrygia, Micia Mysia, Roworka Bocotia. 


20. Gamma (y) before x, y, x, or &, had the sound of 7 in ink, 
anger, and was represented by a Latin n- dyKipa (Lat. ancora) 
anchor, dyycdos (Lat. angelus) messenger, opiyé sphine. This 
is called gamma nasal, 


21, The letters ¢, 6, y, seem to have had at first the sounds of oh, 
th, ch, in English uphill, hothouse, blockhead. But afterwards they 
came to sound as in English graphic, pathos, and German machen. 

a. Zeta (¢) was sounded like Engl. dz, in late Greek like Engl. z. 

b. Every consonant was sounded: thus « was heard in krijya posses- 
sion, y In yvaun judgment, and > in bios decay. Similarly févos 
stranger, wevdos falsehood, were pronounced ksénos, pseudos, with k 
and p distinctly heard. 


22, Among consonants we panini: semivowels, mutes, 
and double consonants. 


23. The sEMIVOWELS are A, p, v, p, o, and sina of which 


ao 1s called a spirant (or a sibilant), 
.. p, v, p are called liquids, 
fv, y-nasal are called nasals. 


a. Another spirant is the old Greek F (see 7), which had the sound 
of English w. 


24, The muTEs are sei three classes: 


at 


labial mutes © T B gb or 7-mutes, 
Sate lingual mutes T 8 7 or T-mutes, 
palatal mutes K y x or x-mutes. 


- Mutes of the same class are said to be cognate, as produced 
_ by the same organ (lips, tongue, or palate). 


85, The mutes are also divided into three orders: 
| Sah smooth rautes 3 T x  (tenues), 
ae _ middle rautes B 5 y (mediae), 


swe rough matites co) 6 x (aspiratae). 
me) f the same order are saici to be co-ordinate. 






8 INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS. - [26 
ff 
a. The rough mutes, or aspirates, are so named from the rough breathing 
(hk) which was heard in ‘them. The middle mutes are so called merely from 
their place in the arrangement. 


26. The DOUBLE consonants are ¢, & w; of which y is 
written for wo, and é for ko. 


27. The relations of the consonants may be seen from the following 
table: 


Semivowels. Mutes. Double 
ooo Tr OOo". -—————_—_—- sor or ror--> >> nso- 
Spirants. Liquids. ‘Smooth. Middle. Rough. nants. - 
SSeS 
Nasals. | 
Labials F ph 7 B co) uy 
Linguals o Ap v T 8 6d C 
Palatals y-nasal. K y xX é 


a. SURDS AND SonantTs.—The smooth and rough mutes, with og, yp, 
€, are surd ; that is, hushed or whispered sounds. The other conso- 
nants and all the vowels are sonant, sounding. 


VOWEL CHANGES. 
Interchange of Vowels. 


28. The open short vowels (a, ¢ 0) are often intetolanped 
‘in the inflection and formation of words: tpéd-w nourish, 
é-Tpad-nv was nourished, té-Tpod-a have nourished, Tpog- n nour- 
ishment. 


a. So sometimes 7 and @ : dpiyy-a help, dpwy-ds helper. 


29. In like manner a and o:, in root-syllables (see 32), are 
interchanged : A«iz-w leave, r€é-Aovr-a have left, Nowr-ds left. 
In oredd-w hasten, orovd-7 haste, we have a like interchange 
of ev and ov. 


30. In Attic the general rule is that a of the earlier lan- 
guage becomes 7, unless preceded by «4 or p: thus dyn 
report, older (Doric) form papa; totype set up, older (Doric) 
tora; but yevea generation, copia wisdom, mpaccw do, re- 
main unchanged. 


29 D. The variation of ev to ov is seen in eiAhAovda (Hm.) for éAnaAvéa 
have come (root eAv@-, strong form eAev9-, 539, 2). 

30 D. (1) The Tonic (Epic and New Ionic) has 7 for Attic a, even after 
€, t, and p: Ion. venvins for Att. vedivids young man ; SO even, coin, mphacw, 
for yeved, copla, mpacow. But not so when 4 arises by contraction or com- 


33 | LONG AND SHORT VOWELS. 9 


a. This rule does not apply to @ arising by contraction (87) or 
compensative lengthening (34). This is always unchanged. 


“81, A close and open vowel are rarely interchanged: éott is, to: be thou ; 
dvoua name, avdvuyos nameless ; poetic uapos blame, dpduwv blameless ; dvivns 
(for ov-ovnpt) benefit. In such cases the open vowel is always the original. 


Strong and Weak Root- Vowels. 
_ 82, In root syllables we often find an interchange of 


e with e or o, 
v with ev (seldom ov), 
@: WIth, G., 


In such cases the short vowel is said to be the weak form, 
the diphthong or long vowel the strong form. The weak 
vowel is conveniently treated as the fundamental form. Thus: 


€-himr-ov (root Aum-) left, Neim-w leave, Né-hourr-a have left. 
é-puy-ov (root duy-) fled, pevy-w fice. 


a. Hor the interchange of e and o1, ev and ov, see 29. 


Long and Short Vowels. 


33, Long and short vowels are sometimes interchanged in 
the inflection and formation of words. 


Thus corresponding to a, 6S ee Oa ae 
the long forms are y or a4, 9», t o, W. 
ripa-w I honor, Ti-Oe-ney we put, di-Se-pev we give, 
tipn-ow I shall honor, —ri-On-yu I put, di-dw-us I give. 
ti-ows retribution, pv-ois nature, 
tt-cw shall repay, mé-Ppi-Ka aM. 





pensative lengthening: Ion. and Att. Spa (for 8pa-e) see thou, wérds (for 
peAay-s) black. 

F (2) The Doric and Aeolic, on the other hand, have & for Attic 4: Dor. 
dauos for Ati, Sijos people, warnp (Lat. mater) for phrnp mother, *Aeava 
(used also in Trag.) for Hom. ’A@fvn (in Att. commonly ’A@nva) the goddess 
Athena. But not so when 7 arises from a lengthening of ¢: Dor. and Att. 
TlOnut (root Ge-) put, Amwhy (Gen. Aruev-os) harbor. 


31D, In the dialects this change is more frequent: I P fae 
for Att. éorla hearth. 5 requen on. fortln Dor. ioria 


33 D, Hm. puts a long vowel or a diphthong for a short vowel in many 
words which would otherwise be excluded from his verse. Thus, where 
otherwise three short syllables would stand in succession: jvopén from avhp 
nee clopivds from Yap spring, oddAduevos for drduevos destroying, o¥peos, 
ovpea from dpos (never ovpos) mountain, ovvoua for ivoua name (also in Hd.), 


OTe re oe 
« tied aN 
PD a ta Se 


- *% - 
a® ng! s 
‘ <a Cia 





10 COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING. —[ 


a, It is convenient, in general, to treat the short vowel as the funda- 
mental form, and to speak of the long vowel as the result of the “sil 
ative lengthening. 


b. The lengthened form of a coincides with its strong form (62). 
Venaeee @ or n is used depends on 30. 


Compensative Lengthening. 


34, A short vowel is sometimes lengthened to make up for 
the omission of a telorane consonant. This is Compensative 
Lengthening. 


By this, a, 4 l, 0, V, 


become 4, El, i, ov, v. 
Thus for pedgev-s, Ge-vT-s,  expt-vo-a, AD O-v-ol, v-vT-s, 
‘we have pexas, Geis, exptva, Avovet, dis. 


a. For an exception in which a becomes 7, sce 431; for one in which e¢, o 
become 7, w, see 168 (2). 


b. The e and ov arising by this process are the spurious diphthengs — 
(14 b). 


350, When « is dropped between twovowels (44), the former vewel is 
sometimes made long: thus dei, x@@, from aie, Kai. 


36, 'RANSFER OF Quantiry.—<A long open vowel standing before a 
short one sometimes shifts its length to the latter, do and 70 becoming 
eo, and na becoming ea: thus vads temple becomes VE@S, PeTHOPOS 
aft peréwpos, Basia king Baowéa. Even dw and nw become eo: 
reOvews for reOvnws dead. 


idumérnaos from mwéradov leas; TOhwevos for ridéuevos putting; or a short 
between two long, Sucajwy for Svodéwy from Suvadhs ill-blowing. Also, where 
two long syllables would stand between two short ones: OdAdpaato (for 
*Ordumot) of Olympus, eihhdovba (for eAndAovba) have come. 

34D. The dialects differ much in respect to compensative lengthening. 
Most Aeolic and Doric dialects lengthened ¢, o to 9, w: Hvar: = ely (from 
éo-vat), Ons = Ocls, waoca = poten (from povea). The Aeolic of Lesbos made 
ais’, eto’, o1g from avo, evo, ova; as maica = waca, MéAats = MéAaS, moto'a = povca 
(used also by Pindar and Theoeritus) : but in other cases avoided compensa- 
tive lengthening by using assimilated forms (46): Expwva = Expiva (from 
éxpw-a), 2 €upl = eiul (from éo-t), BorAAG = = Bovah. The Ionic agrees in the 
main with the Attic. In getvos for &évos stranger, xewds for kevds empty, 
eivena for vera on account of, povvos for pdvos alone, kovpos, kovpn for 
képos, kdpn boy, girl, the Ionic employs the lengthening while the Attic does 
not: these are general poetic forms. 


36 D, So especially i in Tonic : "Arpe(Sew, originally *Arpeldao (Att. °ArpelBov) 
of Alrides ; mudéwv, orig. mudawy (Att. mvady) of gates ; Moceidéwr, orig. ‘Tho 
gesdawy (Att. HooeiBav) the god Poscidon. 


eee 


38] 


CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. 


Contraction of Vowels. 


11 


87. Contraction unites concurrent vowels of different sylla- 
bles into one long vowel or diphthong. 


For simple vowels the rules are these : 


a, An open vowel before a close forms a diphthong with it. 
b. Two like vowels unite in the common lony. 
ec. An o-sound absorbs an a- or an e-sound and becomes wo. 


d. If an a- and an e-sound come together, the first in order 


absorbs the second and becomes long. 


e. But ee gives €L5 €-0, O-€, 0-0 give Ov. 


ad. €-b EL ‘YévE-t yevet Cc. o-a @ aidd-a aid@ 
O-t of metOd-t Trevor a-0 @ Opd-opey op@pev 
e-v ev é-U ra) o-n @ Ondd-nre Ond@TeE 
d-- G ypa-idwoy ypadcov e-@ @ giré-aor irace 
n-t 1 KAn-LOpoy KAnOpov @-a ® 7pPw-a How 
@-L @ Tpw-i Te d.a-e G& O6pd-ere pare 

b. aa @ yépa-a yepa a-n G@ Opda-nte  opate 
en n iré-nre irre ea Nn Yyéve-a yen 
n-E oN Tipn-evTeE TEpHyTe €C. e-€ eb ire-e iret 
t-t t Xt-Los Xtos €-0 OU ‘évE-os yévous 
o-®@ @ Ondd-wor dynddcot o-e ov Ondo-e OnAov 
@-0 @ g@oS cas 0-0 ov TAd-os Tous 


38, a. A close vowel before an open is seldom contracted: yet iydu-es 
jishes gives ixOis. 








87 D, The dialects differ widely in respect to the contraction of vowels. 


f. The Ionic (Old and New) has wncontracted forms in very many cases 
where the Attic contracts: vdéos for vots mind, yévea for yévn races, didéns 
for gids thou mayst love, dékwv for akwy unwilling, do15h for @d4 song.— 
In a few instances, however, these dialects have contracted forms where the 
Attic does not contract: Ion. ipds (and iepds) Att. iepds sacred (see 88 a), 
oyieKovra for Att. dydohkovra eighty. 

g. All dialects, except the Attic, leave eo, ew, eov, as a rule, uncontracted. 
But the Ionic and Doric occasionally contract eo, cov into ev (instead of ov): 
Towvpev, Toevot, from ore-owev, wore-ovct (Att. moiotuev, moter), we do, 
they do. 

h. The Doric and Aeolic often contract ao, do, aw, dw into a: ’Arpelda, 
orig. “Atperdao (see 146 D); wvaay, orig. muAdwy (141 D); Moceidav or Morer- 

dav, Hm, Mocedawv (Att. Mooedar). 
1, The Doric often contracts ae, aes to 7, 7: 
(Att. Spa, Spas), see thou, thou seest. 

if All Aeolic and some Doric dialects contract e¢ into y, 00 and oe into w: 
Dor. ayirau, from arye-era (Att. Fyetra) he leads, picOevt: from puc6o-ovTt 
(Att. pro 0001) they let for hire. 


dpn, Ops, from Gpa-e, épd-ers 


12 CONTRACTION OF VOWELS.  ————=«*[89 
b. Contraction is often neglected when the first vowel is long: yi 
to a ship, Evvdopos helpmect. But see 36. 


39, Simple vowels before diphthongs are often contracted. 

a. In general they are contracted with the first vowel of the 
diphthong: the last vowel, if it is 4, becomes subscript. 

b. But « and o are absorbed in some diphthongs without 
changing them. 

ce. And o-«, o-y give o; a-ov gives w. 


a. a- G@ Tipd-e Tipa b. eer ec Ghidé-er- hides 
a-n G Ttpa-y TL ua e-o ot iré-o1 idot 
a-0l @ Ttpa-oupt TEL pe e-ov ov gtdé-ov idovd 
€-at 7 dwe-at hin o-ot ot Ondrd-o1 Sndot 
n-at n Avyn-a hon o-ov ov OyAd-ov dyrov 
N-0L @ pepvy-olunv peuvopnvy C. o-e ot Ondo-er Ondoi 
o-av @v Mpo-avday mpavday o-7 ot Onrd-n Sydot 


a-ov @® Tipd-ov Tipe 


40. a. The spurious diphthong e: (14 b) is contracted like simple 
€: tipay (not ziyav) from tipd-ew, oivovs from oivd-ers, riuns from 
Tiprj-ets. 

b. aex rarely gives a: instead of a: atpw raise from 4d-elpw, aixhs un- 
seemly from aéixys. 


ce. e-at in the second person singular of verbs gives both es and y: Aver or 
Avy, from Aves. But see 384. 


41. Irrecutar Conrraction.—In contracts of the firet and second declen- 
sions, a short vowel followed by a, or by any long vowel-sound, is absorbed: 
éoré-a, 6g7a (not oorn); apyupe-dy, apyupay: amAd-y, away (not aawrw); Sirdrd- 
ais, Surdais. Only in the singular, ed, afier any consonant but p, is con- 
tracted to n: xpicé-d, xpvom. Other cases of irregular contraction will be 
noticed as they occur. 


49. SynizEsis.—Sometimes two vowels, which could not form a 
diphthong, were yet so far united in pronunciation as to pass for one 
syllable: thus Oeds god, used in poetry for one syllable. This is called. 
synizesis (setting together). It is not indicated in the writing, and 
therefore appears only in poetry, where it is detected by the metre. 


Omission and Addition of Vowels. 


43. A short vowel between two consonants is sometimes 
dropped (syncope): warpdés (for rarépos) from warnp father. 


42 D, Synizesis is very frequent in Hm., especially after «: Oupewv of 
doors, xpiaéas golden, orhOca breasts, médias cilies, dySoos eighth, all used 
as wor: of two syllables. ae 


ili EE Se 


/ 


\ 
Y 


49] DOUBLED CONSONANTS. 13 


44, The close vowels « and v are sometimes dropped be- 
tween two vowels: Bacir<-wy (for Bactrev-wv) from Bacrr<v-s 
king, axo-n (for dxov-y) hearing, wré-wv for wA«i-wy more. 


' a. In this case, v was first changed to the cognate semivowel F (BactAcFwv, 
axoFn), which afterwards went out of use. 


45, a. Prothetic Vowel—A short vowel appears at the beginning of some 
words which formerly began with two consonants or a single semivowel: 
é-x6és, also x0és, yesterday. When such a vowel came before initial F, it re- 
mained after the F had disappeared: &e@Aov (Att. abAov) prize, formerly 
a-Fe@Aov. 

b. A similar vowel is sometimes developed between A or p and another 
consonant: dpdy-uvia, also dpy-via, fathom ; arét-w defend, from root aaré- (cf, 
n-aré-ts batilement), 3 


CONSONANT CHANGES. 


46, AssmmILaTion.—Many of the following changes are of the na- 
ture of assimilation ; that is, the making of one consonant like another 
contiguous one. Assimilation may be total or partial. 


Doubled Consonants. 


47, These have in many cases arisen by total assimilation. See 53, 55 c, 59, 
66. The middle mutes are never doubled in Attic. The rough mutes are 
never doubled, but +, 70, xx are used instead. 


48, The later Attic has rr for oo of the earlier Attic and 
most other dialects: rarrw arrange, xpeittwv stronger, later 
Attic for taco, kpcicowv. 


a. This rule applies only to the oo arising from a mute with «. 


See 67. 


49, p at the beginning of a word is doubled when, by in- 
flection or composition, a simple vowel is brought before it: 
péw flow, epper was flowing, xata-ppéwv flowing down. After 
a diphthong, p remains single: ev-poos fair-flowing. 


47 D. Hm. in many words doubles a consonant which is single in the com- 


mon form, especially a semivowel: €rAdAaBe for @AaBe he took, diroumerdys 


for giAoucidqs fond of smiles, éivyntros for ev-yntos well-spun, Socov for 
doov quantum, oricow for dmicw backward. Less often a mute: Smmws for 
Omws as, Ort for Sti that, @dee for edeuve he feared. In some words he 
has both a single and a double form: ’Ax:AAevs, "Oducceds, less often ’AxiAevs, 
*Oduceds.—For some cases in Hm. (kaddvoa, dBBdAAewv, etc.), in which a mid- 
dle mute is found doubled, see 84 D. 


, 49D. In Hm. p sometimes remains single, even after a simple vowel. 
E-pete from fel do, ant-poos swift-flowing. 





14 _ CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS, e . [50 


a. This doubling is due to the assimilation of ar initial ¢ or Fy with whieh 
most of these verbs originally began: 2-pfe: for e-cpet. 


50. The later Attic has pp for po of the earlier Attic and 


the other dialects: xdéjpy ict Odppos courage, for © Koper, 
Odpoos. 


Consonants with Consonants, 
Mutes BEFORE MourTEs. 
51, Before a lingual mute, a labial or Palatal mute heconmes 


co-ordinate (25). Thus, tO eee 
Br and gr become mr yt and yr become a 
wd * pd 6s BS Kd CS x6 6c »%h 
mwO * BO 66 Ye KO * y9 66 5 9 ‘ aoe 

. Par et 

Térpimra. for rerptB-ra. AéNexrae for >2re~ , 
yéypamraa ‘= -yeypatb-rat Oédexra, “ys Beg 
ypaBsny ‘¢  ypap-Snv mhéydny i mek-F 
eheihOnv ¢  Aein-Onyv emhexOnv ‘* ender = 
éerptpony ‘* erpiB-Onv edéxOnv “Ss eheyn 


62, A lingual mute before another lingual mute is ..aanged 
to o. 


tore for 16-re némeora for deeded 
tof “ W-Oe ~ emeicOnv = ‘Ss erratOaOyx os 8 


a. But rr for oo (48) remains unchanged. So also rr and 70 inai 
other words: “Arrids, "ATOls Attic. 


pak 
hy 7 * 
Mutes BEFORE JaQquips. i la 
53, Before p, a labial mute becomes p, ey 2am 
a palatal mute “ = y, z 
-alingual mute “ — ao. 
~ ' oA I. 
AeAerupar for edewr-par mémheypat for mem)ex-* ©” re 
rérpippat ‘* rerptB-pat eWevopat 6 ebevd-pei 
yéypappat ‘* yeypad-pat nérevopa. ‘* qemed-wat 


a. But xu, tu, brought togethe. “by metathesis (64), are nevér' *ianawil: 
re-eun-Ka am wearied, é-ruh-Onv was eut. And often a palatal or linguai 
mute remains before a fermative suffix beginning with p: et edge, ar-pds 
vapor, orad-uds station. : 


— 





63 D. a. In Hm. the exceptions are more numerous: %-uevos favoring 
(root. fk-, ixdvw come), dxax-uevos sharpened (root ax- or ax-, Lat. avuo), oF ud 
Att. druh smell (root 95-, &¢w sme/l, Lat. odor), t8-wev Att. truer we te 
(root .d-, sie kexopuOuevos equipped (theme Kopu0-, koptoow). 


ae ae 


“) 59] CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS. — 15 





b. Before the other liquids, A, p, v, the mutes remain unchanged. Yet 
ve find veuvds revered for ceB-vos (céB-oua revere), and épeuyds murky for 
j aeB-vos (tpeBos thick darkness). 

- 

ats 3 
ie MUTES BEFORE &. 
64, Before o, a labial mute forms p (= ze); 


i XG a palatal mute forms € (= xc); 
) a lingual mute is dropped without further 
| change. 
Aeiyro for Aewt-cH kopaé for kopax-s  o@pact for copar-or 
tpt, » ‘* rpi3-cw proE ‘* droy-s  eAmise “* edmid-ct 


 ypayo “ ypap-co Bn& “ Byx-s dpviot ‘* opvid-ce 


™ & BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS. 
. v before a labial becomes p; 
bef: ve a palatal becomes y-nasal; 


v before A, p, is assimilated; 


v before o is dropped and the preceding vowel is 
lengthened (34). 


a.epne for ev-ris b.cvyxaiw for cvrv-kaiw C. €Adcir@ for ev-heutro 


2 LY 66 y 6s nS “6 
enBaivi» ev-Buwva — ovyyevns “ ouv-yerns _— ouppéa *" ovy-pew 
 euarns “* ev-pavns = auyxéw guv-yeo dd. pédas peeav-s 
an = 
opevo ** ey-pev@ eyEéw *¢ ev-E€@ Avovat ‘** vov-ct 


66. So also vz, vd, v6 are dropped before o (54), and the 
_ preceding vowel is lengthened (34). 


dove 0: dovr-s oneicow for orevd-co  meicopat for mevO-copat 


£1, Before ov of the dative plural, the vowel remains unchanged 
~wheny .one is dropped: péAact, Aipéot, Saipoor, for peAavy-or, Aypev-o1, 
Sayov-o.. But when vr is dropped, the vowel is lengthened: maou, 

- Oeigt, Avovor, for wavt-c1, Oevt-o1, AdovT-ct. 


- remains before o in the nominatives €Amuiws worm, Tipuys Tiryns, 
@-s, Tipuv@-s (54), and in a few nouns in -ous, as Oépuavots warming. 


_ + 59, In composition: 
ev belore p, o, is not changed: cv-pvOyos, év-crato. 
Fi , ° 
avy, before o with a vowel, becomes oug-: cua-cirwov; 
__ before o with a cons., or ¢, becomes au-: ov-ornua, cv-(vyos. 
way, waduy, before o, retain vy: mav-copos; or change v to g: maXio- 
OvTos. 





64 D. In Hm., a 7-mute is sometimes assimilated to a following «: xoa-cl 
~ wod-o1 Att. wool to feet. 


> \\ 


a | 


‘ Via. CUR aa, ee 


Tees ,, oe 
16 CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS. ° — : 


60, Between y and p is developed a 6; this happens in ‘am thesis: , 2 
sion of avnp man: avdpos for avpos for a Spas. Similarly, between py and 5; 
p (or X) is developed a B, in peony Spia, midday, south, for peo-nypia for fe es 
Ree ae from pécos and jpépa. 3 =a 
61,.0 between two consonants is dropped: yeypdd-Oax for = ‘ 
yeypag-c8a1; ex-unvos of six months for é€-punvos. | | 


Me 


a. Not so, however, when initial o is brought by composition be- 
tween two consonants: ev-o Tao. 


ai 


b. The preposition é¢& (= exs) in composition drops s before any | 
consonant, but undergoes no further change: éx-dotva: give out (not 
ey-Sovvat, 51). 


62, When two sigmas are brought together by inflection, one of 
them is dropped: reixeou for retyeo-o1, 2omaca for eonac-cat. 


63, The combination 8, in some adverbs of place (219 a), passes into ¢: ; 
Odpace out for bupac-de. a, 


Consonants with Vowels, : sf 
METATHESIS. . 


64, A vowel and a liquid are sometimes transposed: tig * 
courage, also @pacos; thus, too, h, 


aorist €-Jop-ov, present Opo-cxw; —_ present sh-de, perfect Bé-BAn-Ka ; 


‘¢  €-Gay-or, “  Ovij-oKe ;  TEp-vo, ‘+  ré-Tun-ka. ‘ 


a. The vowel is often made long. See the last four examples. 


CONSONANTS BEFORE I. . 


65. The close vowel 1, following a consonant, gives rise to 
various changes. ‘Thus, frequently, 








——— 


60 D. This change of yup, pA to uBp, uBA takes place in a few Epic words: 
pe-uBrw-Ka, have gone (from root poa-, by transposition uAw-, 64). At the be- 
ginning of a word, » before this B is dropped: BAdsxw go, for pBro-oKe 
(root MoA-, .Aw-) ; Boords mortal for uBpo-ros (root pop-, upo-; Lat. mor-ior mor- a 
twus). But in Sgagoeiese remains: &-pBpotos immortal, ($0%01-uBporos man- 
destroying. : 

62D, In Hm., both sigmas are often retained: éreo-o1 Att. éreot to words, . 
ég-of Att. ef thou art. ua 

63 D. The Aeolic has o3 for ¢in the middle of a word; this is oftenfound = = 
in Theocritus: pealodw Att. uerdl(w make melody. a 


64 D. Metathesis is very frequent in Hm.: kaprepdés and Kparepds power. S 
ful, ndpriotos = Att. npdricros most powerful, best, from Kxpdros power, ‘arap- “f 
més Att. arpamnds path, rpamelouey for rapmetonev (root Tepm-, Tépmw ia 
Similarly, @pakov from S¢px-oucu sec, Zrpadoy from mwép6-w destroy. | 


~ 





. eee 
 * 


42] DISAPPEARANCE OF SPIRANTS. 17 


r, after v and p, passes over to the preceding vowel and 
unites with it by contraction (epenthesis). 


xelpwy for yxep-.oy teivo for Tev-.w 
Soretpa = **_— ss Sorep-ta kptva ‘*  Kpw-ww 
paivowae ‘* pay-Lopat atpo ‘* gup-.e 

66, . after A forms with it AA. 

‘paddov for pad-voy Gos for ad-tos Lat. alius 

aTé\ho “'  aTed-1w G\Aopac “* dd-copat Lat. salio 


67. « after x, y, x, or after 7, 6, forms with them oo (later 
Attic 77, 48). 


joowv for 7K-toy éhdooov for edax-Loy 
Opacca ‘* Opax-ta Kpnooa ‘* Kopnr-ta 
| Tacom ‘* Tay-.w Koptac@ ‘* Kopv6-.e 
68, . after 6 (sometimes after y) forms with it Z. 
eAmi(m for edmd-1 pei(oy for pey-voy 


69. + before « often passes into o. 


didwot, originally didare mova.os for movT-tos, from mAovTos. 


a. The same change occurs, though rarely, before other vowels: ov, col, 
o¢, originally rv, Tol, T¢é; ofpuepov to-day for thpepor. 


Disappearance of Spirants. 


When o is not supported by a consonant before or after it, it often dis- 
appears. Thus: 

10. Initial o before a vowel often changes to the rough 
breathing: ts for ais, Lat. sus ; tory for ovary, Lat. sisto. 


Tl. o between two vowels is dropped: thus Ave con- 
tracted from Ave-ar for Ave-car, Atcato for Avoal-co, yévovs CON- 
tracted from yéve-os for yeveo-os, Lat. gener-is. 


 . 72, Vau (digamma, 7) disappeared entirely in Attic and Ionic at 
an early period: otvos wine, formerly Foivos (Lat. vinwm); ots sheep, 





| 69 D. The Doric often retains the original r: df5wr1, Tv, Tol, ré; A€yovTe 
they say, Att. Aéyovor. Even the older Attic retains it in thuepoy and a few 
other words. 


72D. Vau was retained by the Dorians and Aeolians long after it was lost 
by the Ionians: thus Dor. and Aeol. Féros year, Fidtos own, Att. @ros and 
Yios; Dor. xaéFos renown, aiFet always, Att. kAréos, aie. It must have ex- 
_isted, however, in the old Ionic of Homer, although not written in the text 
of his poems. Thus it must have been sounded by Hm., more or less con- 
stantly, at the beginning of these words and their derivatives. (Those in which 
_ the former existence of F is confirmed by inscriptions are marked insc.): 


18 REJECTION OF ASPIRATION. 


formerly ofis (Lat. ovis). Some words have lost both o and Ff at tl 
beginning : ndvs sweet, ds his own, formerly Fadus, Fos, still older 
ofdadus, ofos (Lat. suavis, swus). 


| Rejection or Transfer of Aspiration. 
73. The Greeks disliked to begin successive syllables with rough 
mutes, especially the same rough mute. To avoid this: 


a. Reduplications change a rough mute to the cognate 
smooth: zé-v-xa for de-pi-xa, ti-Oyn-pe for Oc-Oy-pu, €-Ké-xv-To 
for €-XE-XU-TO. , 

b. The imperative ending -: becomes -r: after -@y- in the 
first aorist passive : Av-Oy-re for Av-By-Oe. 

c. The roots 6e-, Ov-, of tiOnuc put, btw sacrifice, become re-, r 
before -@y- in the first aorist passive : é-ré-Onyv, €-rv-Onv. P 


d. Single instances are duméxw, aumicxe clothe, for aup-, éxexeipla truce, 
for exe-xetpia (from éxw and xeip), and a few other words. 


e. For a like reason the rough breathing was dropped at the beginning of 
éxw have, hold, for é-xw (fut. fw), originally cexw. 





&yvume break, Gdus in numbers, enough, ardva to be taken, tvak lord (insc.), 
avidve please (insc.), &&rv town (insc.), gap (Lat. ver) spring, €dvov bride- 
gift, eixoor twenty (inse., Dor. Firart, Lat. viginti), etxw yield, etaw press (insc.), 
eipw say, fut. épéw (insc.), Exarres each (inse.), stem éxa- (éxnBdros far-shoot- 
ing ete., insc.), Ente by will of, éxdyv willing (inse.), éxupés father-in-law, €rié 
coil, crooked, €rrouos hope, €& six (inse.), €0, oi, €, himself (inse.), ros word 
(inse.), elwov I said (insc.), yor work (inse.), &5w go, éptw draw, root Fee - 
(Evvia: clothe, éoOjs clothing, ciua garment), cf. Lat. ves-tis, Eorepos evenir ’ 
(insc., cf. Lat. vesper), Erns elansman (insc.), éros year (insc.), hddbs sweet, idx. 
iaxh cry, root Fib- (ideiv to see, olda L know), insc., cf. Lat. vid-ere, root Fi \ 
(YeAos, efkeAos like, Zotxa am like), inse., Yov violet (cf. Lat. vio-la),*Ipis Jr | 
rainbow, ts, ip: strength (insc., cf. Lat. 2s), Ieos egwal (insc.), trén willo 
oixos house (insc., cf. Lat. views), olvos «ine (insc.), 6s, 9, dv his. Probab , 
also dpouds slender, €6vos host, “Irios Troy, #9ca haunts, ; . 

a. At the beginning of some words Hm. has a prothetie vowel ¢ (45 a) as 
a result of former F: éelroc: twenty, éton fem. of tvos equal, éépan dew, eép,w 
shut in or out. | 

For effects of vau in Hm., see 75 Da, 92 D ec, 93D. 

b. Other examples of preserved F, from inscriptions, are Fieria hearth, 
Fparpa treaty, tévFos guest, SpFos boundary (Att. éoria, phrpn, Eévos, Spos). 

73 D. Hm. often has a smooth breathing where the Attic has the rough: 
°AlSns Att. “Ardns the god Hades, tuata Att. Guata wagon, néAios Att. HAsos 
sun, nds (So Hd.) Att. ws dawn, ipnt (so Hd., ef. 87 D f) Att. igpaz hawh, 
Cf. Hd. ofpos Att. dpos boundary. A smooth mute used instead of a rough is 
seen in adris (Hm. Hd.) Att. ad@is again, obkt (Hm. Hd.) Att. ody! not, déxopas 
(Hd.) Att. déxoua: receive. | Fiz 


4 
Pid 
by 


a 


bs 





15] TRANSFER OF ASPIRATION, HIATUS. 19 


74, Transfer of aspiration is found in a few roots which begin with 
rand end with ¢ or xy. When, for any cause, the rough sound is lost 
at the end of the root, it appears at the beginning, changing r to 6. 

This occurs: 


a. In the substantive-stem rpry- hair; gen. sing. rpryds, nom. plur. 
pixes, but nom. sing. Opig, dat. plur. Opus. 





b. In the adjective rayvs swift, superlative rdyioros, but compara- 
tive Gacocwyr (Oarrey) for rayiwy (258). 


| c. In the roots: 
tpep-, pres. rpépw nourish, fut. Opéyro, subst. Opéupa nursling ; 


tag-, y Garra bury, a ie ‘¢ —rahos tomb ; 
ru 

TpeX- *" TpEXo TUN, :  OpeEopa, oie 

tTpup-, Oputrea weaken, Opvyo, tpvpn delicacy , 

tup-, ‘* ridw smoke, perf. ré-0dppat. 


d. The first aorist passive and perfect middle infinitive of these verbs re- 
ain @ at the beginning of the root, although the last consonant has been 
again made rough by 51: so é-Opép-Onv, re-Opdp-Oat, Te-Odp-Oau. 


SPECIAL CHANGES OF FINAL SOUNDS. 


' 75, Hrarus.—When a word ending with a vowel is followed by 
another beginning with a vowel, the result is a hzatus. This, though 
not agreeable to the Attic ear, was often endured in prose: often, how- 
_ ever, it was obviated by crasis or elision, or the addition of a movable 
consonant. Crasis and elision occur especially when the first of the two 
words is short and unimportant, or when the two words are often used 
together. 


74D. Hd. shows a transfer of aspiration in m@dyv Att. xirdy tunic, anc 
evOaira there, évOedrev thence, Att. évravOa, évredbev. 


75 D. Hiatus in Epic Portry.—In Epic poetry, the hiatus is allowed in 
many cases ; the most important are the following: 

a. When the second word begins with digamma: xata& ofkov = kara Foikov, 
in the house. Here the hiatus is only apparent. 

b. When the first word ends in a close vowel (1, v), and is one which sel- 
dom or never suffers elision: mad) dracce he bestowed on his son. 

ec. When the two words are separated by a mark of punctuation: éxéwv 
émBhoeo, dppa tina mount the car, that you may see. 

d. When the vowels, which make hiatus, are the two short syllables of the 
third foot: ray of | & éyé- | vovto é-| v) peyd- | poise ye- | vé0An. The two 
_ words are then separated by the feminine caesura of the third foot (1100). 

_@. When a long vowel or diphthong at the end of the first word gives up 
a part of its quantity, and becomes short before the following initial vowel: 
“Arpet0o re kad AAO edxvfpides Axa (LuvlLuvtveteLuvt-) This 
is regarded as a weak (improper) hiatus, being relieved by the sacrifice of 
quantity. 





76. Crasis (mingling) is the«cofraction of a veavel at tho- 
end of a word with a vowel atti the beginning of “the next 
word: The two words are then wrritia@ as one, with a cordnis: 
ory‘ hook’ (’) over. the vowel in. which they jom. Thus 
Tovvopa the name, for-rd dvopc. ' 


__a. The coronis is omitted when the first vowel has the rough breathing: 
av for & ay. 


b. Crasis is used chiefly after forms of the article, the relative pronouns 
3, &, the preposition mpd, the conjunction kat, and the interjection a. 


77. Crasis follows generally the rules of contraction:(37, 89): thus 
rovvayriov the contrary for rd é€vavriay,. ovx for 6 éx, Gelmaércov the cloak 
for 75 iudreoy (82), dyabé my rood sir tor &, ayabe, eyouar I suppose for 
ey oiua, But: 

a. If the first word ends in a diphthong, its last vowel is dropped 
before contraction: ovmi for oi emi, ovy for oi ev, kay for Kat ev. 

b. The final vowel or diphthong of the article is absorbed by initial - 
a: avnp the man for 6 avyp, avdpes the men for oi adpes, ravdpds for rov 
avdSpés, aids the same for 6 avrés. The particle roi follows the same rule: 
rdpa for rot dpa, pevray for pévrou av. | 

c. The diphthong of «ai is absorbed by all vowels and diphthongs 
except ¢« and ev: xavrds for kai airds, xn for Kai 4, xo for kai 6, xot for 
xai oi, but xas for kai és, xara for kai eira. Yet xai ef and kai cis give 
Ket and xeis. 

d..“Erepos other enters into crasis ‘mder the form é&tepos: thus arepos for 
6 érepos, Oarepoy, Oar épov, for Td Erepov, Tod Er€pov. | 


78, Synizests (cf. 42).—Sometimes the final and initial vowels, 
though not contracted by crasis, were so far united in pronunciation 
as to serve in poetry for one syllable. This occurs only after a long 
vowel or diphthong; especially after the conjunctions ere: sme, ¥ or, 
4 interrogative, yy not, and the pronoun eyo J: thus emet ov, as two 
syllables; and so pr) Mor, eye ov. 


79, Elision is the cutting off of a. short vowel at the end of 
a word when the next word begins with a vowel. The place 


< —— 
em 








76 D. Crasis is rare in Hm.; in Hd. it is not.frequent. It is most ex- 
tensively used in Attic poetry. 

77D. b and d. These rules apply mainly to the Atii¢:; Hm. has dpiaros, 
wirds (with coronis in place of the rough breathing) for 6 Epcos, 6 avrés. 
Hd. has évhp for 6 avhp, THAnvés for rd Ghy''és, dybpwmor for ei dy? poomot (yet 
cav0pémov for Tod ayOpdmov), witds, w5Tol, Ta /TOU (ef, 14 Ded), for 6 abrds, of 
avtol, TOD avTov,. TovTEpoy for Td ETEpor. | 


a 






a0} Sate _ ‘BLISION. 21 
Poe | 
of the elided vowel is marked by an apostrophe (’). Thus 
éx ait® for émi avr. 
80, Elision is most irequent in: 
a. Words of one syllable in -«, as yé, dé, ré. 
b. Prepositions and conjunctions of two syllables, as mapa, Ga ; 
(except mepi, dxpt, péx pt, OTL.) fs 
c. Some adverbs in common use, such as ¢r, Gua, eira, wdda, Taxa. 
Exempt from elision are: 
d. The vowel -v. 
e. Final -a, -1, -o, in words of one syllable. 
f. Final -a in the nominative of the first declension, and -c in the 
dative of the third. 


Rew.—Forms which can take y movable (87) are not affected by 
elision in prose, except only ¢or: 2s. 


81, Elision occurs also in the formation of compound words, 
but then without the apostrophe to mark it: drairéw from azo 
and airéw, ovdeis from ovdé and «is, dueBaAdov from dua and <€Gador, 
_ dparrexw (cf. '73 d) from audi and exw. 


82. A smooth mute and rough breathing, brought together 
_ by elision, give the cognate rough mute: 


ad’ av for axr(o) av voxO odnv for vixr(a) dAny (51) 
Se also in compound words: 


apaipéw from azo and aipéo kaOtnu from xara and tn 
Seynpuepos from déxa and nuépa épOnuepos from énra and npépa 


The same effect is seen also in crasis: Odrepov for rd Erepov, x@ for 
kal 6, 6Oovvexa for Srov évexa. 


a. The same change of mute takes place, notwithstanding an intervening 
p, in ppoddos gone (from mpd and 468ds), dpovpds waichman (for mpo-dpos), 
TéOpirros four-horsed (from tértapes and trmos). 


83, APHAERESIs is the elision of e at the beginning of a word after a 
final long vowel or diphthong, especially in yy and #: thus pi’ yo, 7) “pod 

80 D. Elision is less frequent in Hd. than in Attic prose. It is most ex- 
tensively used in poetry. Many forms, which might take v movable, suffer 
elision in poetry: and so, further, the particle Jd (only used in Epic), and the 
possessive pronoun od. Datives (singular and plural) in -: are subject to elision 
in Hm. The diphthongs of the verb-endings -wat, -ca:, -Tat, -var, -oOa are 
elided in Hm. and Aristophanes (not in the tragedy): pol, vol, rot suffer elision 
rarely in Hm., ofuo: before &s in Attic poets. 2 


82 D. 7 New Ionic (Hd.), she smooth mute remains unchanged before 
the rough breathing: an’ 0b for ad’ 06, od obrws for odx obtws, xarinu for 
xadinut, Tobrepov for 7d Ercpov. Es 


%, 
* 


99 FINAL CONSONANTS. N MOVABLE. [es 


for pur) éyo, } €ov. It occurs in poetry only. Some editors write the e 
and: assume synizesis (78). | 


Final Consonants. 


85, The only consonants allowed to stand at the end of a 
word are -v, -p, -s. 


a. The only combinations of consonants allowed are - (qs), -& 
(ks), and -y& (na). 


b. ’Ex from and ov«, ovx not (88 ¢ and a) were hardly felt to be separate 
words. Final -As, -vys are found only in the nominatives GAs salt, sea, EApws 
worm, and Tipuys Ziryns (58). 


86, Other consonants at the end of a word are dropped. 


Thus in the nominatives c@ua body for cwuar (genitive odpar-os), ydAa 
mitk for yaar (gen. ydAar-os), AvOév loosed for AvOevr (gen. AvOéyT-os); and 
the vocatives wat boy for mad (gen. watd-ds), yova: woman for yuvae (gen. 
yuvastk-ds), 


Movable Consonants. 


87. N MovasLE.—Some words annex a -vy when the next 
word begins with a vowel. ‘These are: 


(1) All words in -or, 
2) All verbs of the third person singular in -e, 
3) éort ts. 


Thus aoe ‘SiSom L give to all, but macw eaxa I gave to all: di8oci 
pot Or Sidwowy epoi he gives to me, Swxé pot Or Edaxev enol he gave to me. 


84 D, Apocopr.—Similar to elision, but confined to poetry, is apocope, the 
cutting off of a final short vowel before an initial consonant. In Hm., this 
is seen in the conjunction &p for &pa, the prepositions ay, cdr, mép for avd, 
kard, wapd (and rarely in am, im for amd, td). The apocopate forms are used 
both as separate words and in composition. The vy of & is subject to the rules 
in 55. The + of «dr is assimilated to the following consonant ; but before two 
consonants it is dropped. Thus ris 7 dp tév, wappevere for mapapévere, du 
medtoy for ava medlov, GAAUw for avaddw, Kap péoy for Kata pdov, KaK Kopuphy 
for kata Kopudhy, kvy yévu (pronounced kag gonu) for xara yévu, Kad dé for 
kata Sé, Kaddvon for Karadica, Kar pddapa (47) for KaTrd paddapa, kar Oaveiy 
for xaradavety, kdxrave for karéxrave,.amméeuver for amoméuver, 6BBdAAEw for 
troBdAAew. Compare xdupopos (Hm.) ill-fated for kax-uwopos for kako-mopos. 
—Here belongs also Dor. 2dr (only before the article) for mori = Att. mpds: 
thus mdr ray (or wortay) warépa. 

85 D, For some apparent exceptions (& edlov, Kay yévu, etc.), see 84 D. 

87 D. In the New Ionic (Hd.), which does not avoid a concurrence of vow- 
els, vy movable is not used. 

In Hm., the pronoun éydé(v), and the plural datives (261 D) &upi(v), Buur(v), 
ooi(v), have vy movable. So also forms with the suffix -g: (221 D): 6eddi(v) 
to gods. Likewise most adverbs of place in -Oey (217): a&vevOe(v) without, 


491] - SYLLABLES. 23 


a. The 3d sing. of the pluperfect active rarely takes y movable: 7de(v) he 
knew. So too the impf. fev) he went. Not, however, imperfects in -e: for -ee: 
epire. 

b. This v is also called ébeAkvarixdy (dragging after). It is usual to print 
it at the end of a sentence and at the énd of a verse in poetry. The poets 

_ often use it before a consonant, thus making a final short syllable long by 

- position (92). Even in prose, as appears from inscriptions, y movable was 

' often used before a consonant. 


88, a. The adverb ov not, before a vowel, becomes ovk, but before 
_ the rough breathing, ovx (cf. 82): ob Aéya, ovK avrds, ovx ovTas. 


.. b. My not follows the analogy of ov in the compound pnxére (from 
pr and érv), like ovkére no longer. 


c. ‘EE (eks) Srom and ovras thus drop s before consonants : €& ¢ agTEws 
From town, but éx tis mwodews from the city: otras éddxer 80 it seemed, 
esbut obra Soxet so ét seems. 


SYLLABLES. 


89, Every single vowel or diphthong, whether with or without conso- 
nants before or after it, makes a distinct syllable. Thus tytea has four 
syllables. 


90. Ultima, Penult, Antepenult.—The last syllable of a 
word is called the ultima, the one next to the last, penwlt 
(paenultima) ; the one before the penult, antepenult (ante- 
paenultima). 


91. In dividing a word into syllables (as when it has to be broken at the 
' end of a line) it is customary to observe the following rules: (a) A single 
consonant in the middle of a word is connected with the following vowel: 
i-xa-vés. (b) Combinations of consonants, such as can stand at the beginning 
of a word, are assigned to the following vowel: d-Woua, pd-Bdos, &-ocxov, 
Kd-uvw. (c) Other combinations of consonants are divided: &p-ua, eA-mis, 
in-mos. (d) Compounds formed without elision are treated as if their elements 

_ were separate words: mpoo-ex-rlyw, not mpo-ce-KTIVH. 


: mdpobe(y) before. Further, védogi(v) apart, and the enclitic particles xé(v) 
= Att. dy, and vi(v) now. 

In Hd., some adverbs in -Oey reject v: so mpdaGe before, dmabe behind, 
Uirepbe above, évepbe below. 


88 D, A movable s is found, though used with little reference to the next 

. word, in the following adverbs Supe about, Hm. also duis; avrixpus right 
opposite, Hm. only ay uKpy ; ar peu and Gr pewas quietly, mostly poet. ; GX pt, 
HEXpt until, rarely &xpes, wexpis; evOd (Hd. £0¥) straight towards, evdus (Ha. /i80s) 
, strang rtwary, but in Hm. only i0vs straight towards ; peonyd and peonyus be- 
tween (Hm. peao-); moddrduts often, Ion. also woAAdns (Hm. Hd.). 






24 “AQUA NTIPR, 5 


Quantity. 





92, A syllable is long by nature when it has a long vowel 
or diphthong: kpi-voi-unv may be judged. “ere | 
A syllable is long by position when its vowel is followed by 
two consonants or by a double consonant: dp-rvé qual. . 


a. The consonants, which make a jinal syllable long by position, 
may be partly or wholly in the following word: thus the second sylla- 
ble in d\Xos rémos, and in d\do oropa, is long by position. 


b. In a syllable long by position it must not be supposed that 
the vowel is necessarily long. This was sounded according to its natu- 
ral quantity. Thus the first vowel was sounded short in A\é£@, Kaddos, 
long in An, paddov, though the first syllable in all these words was 
long. 


93. When a vowel naturally short is followed by a mute 
and liquid, the syllable is conimon, that 1 is, it may be used as 
long or short, at pleasure: thus in réxvov, rupdds, ti Spas, the 
first syllable is common. but, 


a. The mute and liquid must be in the same word. Hence the 
oetgguaee €K before a liquid always (even in composition) makes a 
ong syllable: ex ved@y, exréyeu. 


b. The rule applies to middle mutes (8, 5, y) only before p. Be- 
fore p, » they always make a long syllable, and generally so before 
A: thus in raypa, So BiBros the first syllable j is long. 


ec. Epic th ll Or voy 2 REFORE eae —In epic poetry a long 
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word makes a short syllable, when the 
next word begins with a vowel: ef 3) dyuot (Ly vt), wal po duooccor 
(tLvvtv), see 75 De. This takes place occasionally in the choruses 
of the dramatic poets. But the long vowel or diphthong remains long: 
(1) When the rhythmic accent falls upon it (in thesis, 1071): ¢vy meydAw adur@ | 
(Lvvtvvt); (2) When the next word began with the digamma: €xardv 
kal eikoot (vv yar v). 

d. A long vowel or diphthong is rarely made short before a vowel in the 
same word: Hm. oios (v v), BéBAnat odd {(Lvv+t). Even in the Attic drama 
TowvTos (v—-v), Tod (v - delAaos (~v v), and a few other words admit this 
interior shortening. 


93 D. In Hm. a mute and liquid generally make position: ré«vov, rt 
wralers (L-L— 1), tavos ravdaudtwp (L—-Lvv-+t), Even before a simple 
liquid at the beginning of some words a final short vowel often makes a © 
long syllable: xaAhy Te peyadny re (LaoLuvtl), when perhaps the liquid 
was doubled in pronouncing. So too before F: amd 0 (v tv) = amd Féo 
(ard oFeo, 72). So also before § in the root de- (BelB1a fear, ete.) and d4py 
long which once began with 6F. 





ACCENT. be 25 


= 94, The quantity of most syllables is obvious at once. Thus, syl- 


‘a. with y, @, or« diphthong, are always long. 

b. with e, o, before a vowel or single consonant, are short. 

c. with e, 0, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. 
d. with a, «, v, before two consonants, or a double consonant, are long. 


Rules c and d are liable to the exception in 93. There remain, then, sub- 
ject to uncertainty, only the syllables with a, +, v before a vowel or single 
consonant. As to these we observe that 


Syllables with a, «, v may be known to be long: 


e. when they have the eirewmflex accent: xpive. 
f. when they arise from a contraction: dkov from aékoy. 


Rem.—The quantity of a, t, v, so far as it is connected with inflection, is 
to be learned from the grammar. [In other cases, it may be ascertained by 
consulting the lexicons, or by observing the usage of Greek poets. 


- 


ACCENT. 


95, The Greek accent consisted in a raising of the pitch, 
and not in stress of utterance. 


96, There are three kinds of accent : 


the acute, marked ’: eAvOnyv, 
the circumflex, marked“: Atcor, 
the grave, marked *: AeAvKws. 


a. These marks stand over the vowel of the accented syllable. In 
case of a diphthong, the accent stands over the second vowel; but over 
the jirst vowel of an improper diphthong (cf. 17 a): atrovs, avrois, 
auTo. 

b. The acute and grave follow the breathing when both belong to the 
same vowel: dAos, dv; but the circumflex is placed above the breathing: jye, 
obros. When they belong to a capital letter, they are placed before it : “EAAnyv, 

Qros. 


97, The acute shows that the whole vowel was uttered on a higher 
key. The circumflex (made up of the acute and grave, '‘” ) shows that 
the vowel began on a high key, but sank away to a lower. The grave 
belonged in theory to every vowel which had not the acute or cir- 
cumfiex. The term was applied in two ways. First, to unaccented 








94D, The quantity of «, 1, v varies in many words, especially in Hm.; 
they often become long un ier the rhythmic accent (in thesis, see 1071), when 
otherwise they would be short: fouey or twuer ct us go, *Apes, “Apes, Bpord- 
Aovye (Lvuutueltv). ‘im. has nards, rivw for Att. cards, tlvw; on the 
other hand he has usually fyus, Avw for Att. Enus, Ado. 


26 RULES OF ACCENT. [98 


vowels, as we should call them, i. e., those which did not rise above the 
general pitch: here, being the mere negation of an accent, it was not — 
in general written: thus adOpemos, not avOpamos. Secondly, to the 

modified acute atthe end of a word; see 108. 


98, To the Latin terms accent, acute, cireumflex, grave, correspond the — 
Greek mpocwdia singing, pitch, or tévos tone (straining or raising of the voice), 
dkts sharp, mepiommuevos drawn around, and Bapis heavy, flat. From these 
words, together with the prepositions mapa near and mpé before, are derived 
the names in the following section. . 

99, The acute can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
bles of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. A word 
which has the acute 

on the ultima is called oxytone: Baotreds 
on the penult Pe? paroxytone: Bacirevwv 
on the antepenulté “ proparoxytone: BactrcvorTos. 

A word which has the circumflex 

on the ultima iscalled perispomenon: Xureétv. 
on the penult ‘“  properispomenen.: rota. 


A word which has no accent on the ultima is called bary- 
tone. This name, of course, belongs alike to paroxytones, 
proparoxytones, and properispomena. 


Accent as affected by Quantity. 


100. a. The acute stands on long and short syllables alike, 
the circumflex only on syllables long by nature. 

b. If the ultima is long by nature, the acute cannot stand 
on the antepenult, nor the circumflex on the penult. 

c. Final -é and -y, after a short vowel, exclude the acute from the 
antepenult, but not the circumflex from the penult: thus we have 
Hr, but vuxropvAa€ instead of vuerddvaAaé. 


101, Using now the words long and short to denote natural quantity (of 
vowel-sounds) without regard to position, we have the following rules: 
A word with short ultima, if accented 
a. on the antepenult, has the acute: AdIdpeba, EXvovTo. 
b. on a short penult, has the acute: AeAv«Koros. 
ce. on a long penult, has the circumflex: redvkviav. 
d. on the ultima, has the acute: A«dvkos. 


A word with long ultima, if accented 


e. on the penult, has the acute: NeAvKoTwv, AeAvKvias. 
f. on the wltima, has either the acute or the circumflex? 
AeAvKws, AeAUKULOV. 


107] “ACCENT IN CONTRACTION, ETC. a7 


102. It is important to observe, that 

a. Final -o. and -o. have the effect of short vowels on the 
accent of the penult and antepenult: Avovra:, Avdpevou (101 a), 
rocovrot, Tooavrat (101 c). 


b. Not so, however, in the optative mode: maidevor, rardevo'a (101 €) ; 
nor in the adverb otkot at home. 


108, a. Exception to 100 b.—Some words in -ews, -ewy are accented on the 
antepenult : MevéAews, méAews; see 162 a, 203. So also a few other words 
(compound adjectives) in -ws: ddccpws unhappy in love, iplixepws lofty antlered. 

b. Some exceptions to 101 c, as dare, #5e, are explained by the rules for 
enclitics (115, cf. 118). 


104, a. We can often determine the quantity of vowels from the accent. 
Thus the ultima must be short in wéAexus, mpatis (100 b), and long in omapa 
(101 c): the penult must be short in tives, for, if long, it would be writ- 
ten tivec (101 c). 

b. Rules for accent, so far as it is connected with inflection, are given in the 
grammar. But the accent of words must be learned, to a great extent, from 
the lexicons, or by observation in reading. In the majority of words, it re- 
cedes as far from the end as the foregoing rules allow; when thus placed, it 
may be called recessive accent. 


Accent as affected by Vowel- Changes. 


105. Contraction.—If either of the syllables contracted had 
an accent, the contract syllable receives one. 

For a contract penulé or antepenult, the kind of accent is 
determined by the general rules (101). 

A contract wltima receives the acute, if the ultima had it 
before contraction ; otherwise it takes the circumflex. 
Tipapevos from ripa-duevos tipdro from tipa-érw dor@ from doré- 
Tiwagbae =‘ ~Tipd-ecOa =Tipa ‘¢  Tipad-eu é€otas ‘* égTa-ws 

a. Ifneither of the syllables contracted had an accent, the contract 
syllable receives none: riya from ripa-e. 


106, Crasis.—In crasis, the accent of the first word disappears; that of 
the last remains unchanged: taya6d from Ta dyad. 

But the lengthening of an accented penult by crasis may require a change 
from acute to circumflex (101 c): TaéAAa from Ta &AAa, 


e e . e e e . t 
107. Hlision.—In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose 
their accent; other oxytone words throw it back on the penult: 
- > o 3 > > , , = a > 
€W avT@ (emt On), ovd avtos (ovdé neither), but ent joay (énra seven). 





104 D. b. The Aeolic (of Lesbos) has recessive accent in all words: wérapos, 
TOTAMOv, TPAxus, AcAccpOa for moTauds, moTauov, Tpaxds, AcActpOa. But in the 
accent of prepositions and conjunctions it agrees with the other dialects: 
tmepl, ardp. 


- -> 


t. dee 


28 GRAVE FOR ACUTE. ANASTROPHE. PROC 





Accent as affected by Connection in Discourse. 


108. CuancEe or AcuTE To GRavE.—When an oxytone is 
followed by other words in close connection, its acute changes 
to the grave: dad from, but dard rotrov from this, Baa ress 
king, but Baoweds éyévero he became king. ? 


109, Anastrophe.—Oxytone prepositions of two syllables some- 
times shift their accent from the ultima to the penult. This is 
called anastrophe (retraction of the accent). It occurs: 


a. When the preposition follows its case: rovrwy mépi instead of 
mepi rovrwy about this. 

b. When a preposition takes the place of a verb (éori being omit- 
ted): wdpa for mdpeori it is permitted (as preposition mapa); ém for 
éveote it is possible (as preposition evi poetic for éy). 


110, But dyrl, dudl, dd do not suffer anastrophe: nor does avd, except in 
the poetic form ava up/ arise! In prose, wept is the only preposition that 
ever follows its case. 


a. If a preposition with elided vowel stands after its case, it is usually 
written without accent : tod wap’ avOpamwrv; from whom of men ? 


b. In poetry, we have wdpa for mdpeio1, and even for other forms of the 
compound verb: thus éy® wapa (for mdpexus) J am here. 


PROCLITICS. 


111. A few words of one syllable attach themselves so 
closely to a following word as not to have a separate accent. 
They are called proclitics (leaning forward). They are: 

a. The forms 6, 7, of, ai of the article the. 

b. The prepositions év in, eis (or és) into, && (ex) from. 

c. The conjunctions e? 77, ws as, that (also as preposition to). 

d. The adverb ov (ovk, ovx, 88 a) not. 


112. Proclitics sometimes take an accent, thus: 


a. ov at the end of asentence: dys, 4 ot ; sayest thou so or not? Also 
ov n0. 

b. ws and the prepositions when placed after the words to which 
they belong: as xax@y €€ (Hm.) out of evils, beds Ss (Hm.) as a god. 

c. When the following word is an enclitic (115 c). | 


109 D. In Hm. prepositions suffer anastrophe when placed after verbs, to 
which they belong in composition: dA¢oas &ro for amodéoas. e 


110 D. b. Hm. has even 2 for @veior. 


oak 


2 ‘ 
~~ 


ie 


i 


ss BNCLITICS. 29 





113, Some words of one or two syllables attach themselves 
‘so closely to a preceding word as to give up their separate 
accent, They are called enclitics (leaning on another word). 
They are: | 

a. The pronouns of the first person, pov, poi, pé; of the second, 
gov, gol, wé ; of the third, ov, oi, &, and odicr. See 2638. 

b. The indefinite pronoun ris, ri, in all its forms (including rod, 
7 for rwds, twi); :nd the indefinite adverbs mov (or ro6i), m7, roi, 
mobév, woré, 1TH, tas. Used as interrogatives, these words are ortho- 
tone (erect in accent, not enclitic): ris, ri, mov (mob), mn, mot, moder, 
Wore, TOS. | 

c. The present indicative of ciui am and dni say, except the sec- 
ond person singular, «?, ys. 

d. The particles yé, ré, roi, mép, and the inseparable -de (not the 
conjunction dé but, and). 


114. The accent of an enclitic is thrown back, as an acute, on the ultima 
of the preceding word, if that syllable has not an accent already. Yet a 
paroxytone does not admit the additional accent, as the acute or higher pitch 
cannot be sustained through two successive syllables. Hence we have the 
foilowing rules : 


115, The word hefore an enclitic 


a. preserves its proper accent, and never changes an acute 
to grave: dyafov 71, aitdés yor. ~ 

b. if proparoxytone or properispomenon, adds an acute on 
the ultima: avOpwrds tis, ratdés Tues. 

¢e. if proclitic, takes an acute: «7 ts, ov dyot. 


116. The enciitic loses its own accent; except an enclitic of 
two syllables after a paroxytone: Adyos tis, Adyou tives. 


a. A properispomenon ending in -£ or -f is treated like a paroxytone: gotvit 
Tis, point éort. 


117. Of several enclitics in succession, each one takes an acute from 
the succeeding, only the last appearing without accent: «i ris poi dyai 
TOTE. - 


118. In some cases, a word is combined so often with a following 
enclitic that the two are regarded as one word: ore for ds Te, cire, 
PTE, oidare, Gatis, iro, Kairor, The enclitic -de is always treated thus: 
ode, Tovade, oixade. So mwép, in prose, almost always: éovrep. 


113 D, The persona! pronouns ply, viv, opi, and apd, spéwv, odéas are 
enclitic. So too the Ionic e?s and Epic éoot thow art. To enclitic particles 
belong the poetic vd or vy, and Epic xé or xév, Oqv, and pa (for dpa). 


30 ENCLITICS. PUNCTUATION. [119 


a. Eide, valx: from ei, vat, are accented as if -0e and -Xt were enclitic par- 
ticles. 


119, The enclitics in some cases retain their accent (are orthotone): 


a. When there is no preceding word to which they can attach them- | 
selves, as at the opening of a sentence: rives Aéyovot some say. This, — 
however, is not often the case. 


b. When there is an emphasis on the enclitic: Dra o€ héyw but thee 
I mean (no other). For the personal pronouns, cf. 2638; for €or: as 
orthotone, 480. 


c. After elision, when the vowel to be affected by the enclitic is cut | 
off: ravr éati pevd9 for ravra €or. 


d. Enclitics of two syllables after a paroxytone; see 116. 


- 120. The following particles are distinguished by the accent: avd preposition 
over, from poetic ava up! (110); &pa therefore, from dpa interrogative; 4% 07, 
than, from 4 truly and 4 interrogative; viv now, at present, from poetic voy — 
enclitic now (inferential conjunction); ovxovy not therefore, from obkovy there- 
Sore; ws relative as, that, from és demonstrative thus. . 


PUNCTUATION. 


121. The comma and period are the same as in English. The colon, 
a point above the line, takes the place alike of the colon and semicolon: 
é€omepa nv" TOTeE oe dyyedos it was evening : then came a messenger. 
The mark of interrogation is like the English semicolon: ri eéimas ; 
what saidst thou ? 


a. The Diastole or Hypodiastole, which has the form of a comma, is some- 
times used to distinguish the pronouns 6, tT: and 6, re which from the conjunc 
tions drt that and éte when. At present, however, this mark is general! 
omitted, a space being left instead: @ 7: and 6 Te. 





PART SECOND. 


INFLECTION. 


NOUNS. 


122, Inflection belongs to nouns (both substantive and 
adjective), pronouns, and verbs. It gives to the same word 
different forms according to its different relations in the sen- 
tence. 

The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension. 


123. The Greek distinguishes in its declension, 

1) Three genpERS: masculine, feminine, and nereser. 

3} Three NuMBERS: the singular in reference to one ob- 
ject, the plural to more than one, the dual to two only. 

(3) Five cases: nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and 
vocative. In the singular, the vocative is often like the nomi- 
native; in the plural, it is always so. In neuter words, the 
nominative and vocative are always like the accusative, and in 
the plural always end in -a. The dual has but two forms, one 
or the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for the 
tyenitive and dative. 

a. In distinction from the nominative and vocative (casus resi), the 
other cases ure termed oblique (casus obliqui). 


124, GenpER.—To indicate the gender of substantives, forms of 
the article (272) ave used; 6 for masculine, n for feminine, ro for 
neuter. 


_ . 125, Words which designate males are, of course, masculine ; these: 
_ which designate ‘emales, feminine. Further, 

a. Masculine are naiaes of winds (like ‘6 dvewos the wind), of rivers 
(6 morapos the river), and of months (6 pny the month). 

b. Feminine are names of trees (9 dpis the oak), lands (n yn the land), 
islands (y vnoos the is'and), and most cities (9 modus the city). 

c. Also, most abst:act words are feminine ; that is, words which ex- 
._ press quality, state, or action (bodily or mental): thus rayurns swift- 
ness, Sixaroovyn justie, édais hope, vixn victory. 


32 NOUNS. GENDER AND ACCENT. [128 


d. Neuter are many names of fruits (16 cixov the jig); also, most — 
diminutives, even when designating males or females: rd yepovreov dim. 
of 6 yépwy the old man, rd yuvaoyv dim. of 7 yun the woman. The names 
of the detters are neuter: ro adda, To viypa. i 

e. Any word may be neuter when the object thought of is the word — 
itself, rather than the thing which it signifies: +d av@pwmos the name — 
man, To Stxatoovyn the term justice. 


REeMARK.—The gender may often be known from the form of the word. See 
especially 184 and 164, 


126. Common Gender.—Some nouns are either masculine or femi- 
nine, according as they designate males or females: 6, 7 Oeds the di- 
vinity, god or goddess, 6, 7 avOpemos the human being, man or woman. 
These are said to be of common gender. 


127, Epicenes.—In many names of animals, the same word with the 
same gender is used for both sexes: 7 dAwmné the fox, male or female. 
These are said to be epicene (émixowos promiscuous). ‘ 


128, Accent oF Nouns.—The accent of a noun remains, in 
all the forms, on the same syllable as in the nominative singu- 
lar, or as near that syllable as the general laws of accent 
allow. 

avOpwros Man, accus. sing. avOpwrov, nom. plur. avOpwror ; but 
gen. sing. advOpwrov (100 b), dat. plur. av@pwros: dvopa name, 
gen. sing. évduaros (99), gen. plur. dvopatwv (100 b). 


129, An accented ultima, in general, takes the acute: but, 

In the genitive and dative of all numbers, a long ultima, 
if accented, takes the circumflex. 

Thus zorapos river, gen. sing. rotapod; tin honor, dat. sing. 
Tien; movs foot, gen. plur. rodév, gen. and dat. dual zodoitr. 


a. The nominative and accusative have the circumflex on the ultima in 
contracted forms, as éarodyv bone for doréoyv, plur. 607& for éo7éa; and in some 
words of one syllable, as wis mouse, accus. mov (205). 


130, Srems.—The forms of a noun are made by adding dif- 
ferent case-endings to a common stem. 
The stems of Greek nouns end in 
1. The open vowels -a- and -o-, 
2. The close vowels -.- and -v-, 
3. Consonants. 


131, DrcLEeNstons.—Nouns are declined in two principal 
ways. 

1. The Vowel-Declension, for stems ending in an open vowel 

2. The Consonant-Declension, for stems ending in a conse 
nant or close vowel. i 


oe 
; : fe ‘ , 
sigh)  DECLENSIONS. CASE-ENDINGS. 33 


462, But the vowel-declension has two forms, according as 
the stem ends in -a- or -o-. Hence we have 


* . The Vowel- Declension, including 
The A-Declension, commonly called Lirst Declension. 
+ The O-Declension, commonly called Second Declension. 
Il. The Consonant-Declension, commonly called Third De- 
clension. 
a. These three correspond to the first, second, and third declensions in 


Latin. The Latin fourth and fifth declensions are only modifications of the 
third and first respectively. 


133. Casz-ENnpDINGsS. 


—_———_—__. 








VOWEL-DECLENSION. CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 
Mase. and Fem. Neut, Mase. and Fen. Neut. 
Sing. Nomin. -s or none -D- -s or none none 
Genit. -$ OF -10 | -os 
Dative. -t -L 
: 
Accus. | -v -y Or -@ none 
Vocat. none -y none 
Dual N. A. V. none “€ 
G. D. “Ly -OwW 
dur. Nom. Voc. of -a -€S -a 
Genit. -wy -wyV 
Dative. -10t ~Tl, -TTl, -ETCL 
Accus. Vs. -a  -ys OF -as -a 


On comparing these two sets of endings, we see that they agree in many 
points. 


e . 


SUBSTANTIVES. 
First Deciension (A-Declension). 


4. Words of this declension have stems ending in -a-. 
ey are masculine and feminine. 
masculines take the case-ending -s in the nominative 
; the feminines do not. The nom. sing. of feminines 
1 -G, -a, OF -7 5 of masculines, in -as or -nS. 
em oe Te 








34. FIRST DECLENSION. FEMININES. 











135. J. Feminines. 

EXAMPLE. n x@pa. land | n tiph honor | h yépipa bridge | yAaoo — se 

STEM. (xwpa-) (Tipua.-) (yepupa-) (yAworwrn-) / 

Sing. Nom. XYopa Thy yéhipa yrAOou 
Gen. Xopas TUAis yepupas yAoou 5 
Dat. Xopa Tiny yepupa yrAaou 
Accus. Xopa-v Thy yépupa-v yAoooa-v 
Voce. Xopa ThH yépupa ylaooa 

Dual N. A. V. XSpa Tip, yedupa yAdood 
G. D. Xopaw Tiaty yepupaty yAdooaw — 

Plug. Y: XSpar Tipal yéepipar yAa@ocar 
Gen. Xopav TIPLOV yepipav yAooo av 
Dat. Xepats Tipats yepupais yAdo-o-ats 
Accus. Xopas Tipas | yepupas yrooods 


- 


Other examples: juépa day, oxut shadow,—mvhy gate, roping: 


ment,—potpa fate,—d0&a opinion, rpame a table. ney 


136, Originally all these feminines ended in long -4 and were 





"’ 


ss 


declined like yopa. But many have shortened this -a in the nomina- r ¢ 


tive, accusative, and vocative singular. We distinguish, therefore, — 
Two CuLasses OF FEMININES. | \ = 


137, First Cxuass.—Those which have a long vowel (a or 
») in the final syllable throughout the singular; as x#pa, Tia. 


138, Long a, the original vowel, is retained when preceded 
by 64 or p; otherwise it is changed to 7 throughout the sin- 
gular (80): yevea race, copia wisdom, xopa land; but tipy 
honor, ndovyn pleasure. 

a. But in kédpn girl, Spy | neck, we have » after p. After 0, both 4 
and 7 may stand: Bon cry, pon current ; but oroa colonnade, 76a grass, 


xpoa color. In some proper names 4 is ‘retained against the Tule: Anda 
Leda. 


138 D. b. In the Doric and Aeolic, @ remains unchanged: ria, Timas, TEM, . 


Timay. 


p: even, pirchy, Bactrelys, potpn. But Hm. retains a in 6ea goddess and a iow 
proper names. 


‘i 


C. In the Ionic, 4 always changes to 7 in the singular, even after e, 1, and — 


142] FIRST DECLENSION. FEMININES. 35 


139, Sreconp Crass. — Those which have short a in the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. This class 
includes : 


a. Those in which the final -a is preceded by o (& y, oo 
or rr), & AA, OF aw: aS potoa muse, dpaga wagon, diva thirst, 
Oddacoa or OdAratra sea, pila root, dpuirdra contest, Néawa lioness. 

b. Female designations in -rpia and -ea: wWadrpia harper-gu'l, 


Bacirera queen (but Bacrdeia sovereignty). 


c. Abstracts in -ea and -ova, from adjectives in -ys and -oos: 
ddndeva truth, evvora good-will. 
d. Most words in -pa after 0 or a diphthong: dyxipa anchor, poipa 


Sate. 


e. Many others: as réApa daring, Siara living, prvia fly, dxavOa 
thorn. 

Exceptions to a: xépon temple, pan dew.—Exceptions to c: In Attic poetry 
occur forms like edkAela, edvoia, ayvola. 


Remark.—Most of these words betray the shortness of -a by the accent, 
being either proparoxytones or properispomena. 


140. In the genitive and dative singular of words in short 
-a, the vowel of the final syllable is determined by the rule 
in 138. So yAdcoa gen, yAwooys (see paradigm, 135), toAya 
gen. ToAyns. But, of course, yéepipa gen. yepupas, dAnfea gen. 
arnfeias, because p and t precede. 


141, Sproran Rute or Accent.—The genitive plural of 
the first declension is always perispomenon, because -éy is 
contracted from -a-wv. Thus from stem xwpa- comes xwpa-ov, 


Contracted xwpor. 


142, The dative plural has in poetry (rarely in prose) the older 
ending -ao.: mvAaot. The oldest Attic had even -yor; not, how- 
ever, after «,1, orp. See also 220 a. 





> 189 D. The Ionic, has -efn, -ofn in the abstracts mentioned in ¢: dAndeln, 


evvoin. And in general the dialects use this shortening more sparingly: 


“Tonic kvion savor, mpvuvn stern, SKvAAn, Dor. réAua; for Att. kvioa, mpduva, 
_ Skvdda, téAua. Yet Hm. has voc. sing. vduda maiden for vipon. 


141 D, In the genitive plural Hm. has 

a. -dwv, the original form: xAioidwy of tents. 

b. -éwv, the Ionic form (36 D): auAéwy of gates. This -éwy in Hm. is usually 
Sounded as one syllable, by synizesis (42). ; 

¢. -av, the Attic form, mostly after vowels: maperav of cheeks. 

The Doric form -dy, a contraction of -dwy (87 Dh), is used also in the dra- 


Matic choruses: deav of goddesses. 


142 D. In the dative plural Hm. has—(a) the Ion. form -noi(v): «Acotnor. 
—(b) also often -ys: mérpys to rocks.—(c) rarely the Att. -ats : Geais. 


= 


36 FIRST DECLENSION. MASCULINES. 
148, In the accus. plur. -ds stands for -a-vs; cf. 133. 


144, Contract Substantives.—These have the circumflex in all the 
cases (105). In contraction they follow the rule in 41: thus pa, 


pvas, pra, pvay (for pva-a, etc.) mina, yh, yas, yn, yiv (for ye-a oF ya-d) c 


land. See ‘Eppuns (145), Boppas (149). 








145. II. Mascunines. 
EXAMPLE. 6 vedvids young man | é wodirns citizen | 6 ‘Epuns Hermes 
SrEM. (veavia-) (roAiTG-) (‘Epua- for ‘Epued.-) 
Sing. Nom. | veavia-s moXtTn-s “Epps 
Gen. vediviou modtrou ‘Eppod 
Dat. - veal TwoXiTy “Eppy 
Accus. veavla-v moXtty-v —s_ | ‘ Eippfj-v 
Voc. veavl@ moXira *“EppAj 
Dual N. A. V. veivl@ moAtra “Eppa images of H. 
G. D. vedvlau moNtraw |‘Eppaiv 
Piur. N.Y. | vedivlar TmoNtrar *Eppat 
Gen. Veavidy mwoXtrav “Eippav 
Dat. veaviais wodtras _|* Hippais 
Accus. veavias mwoNtTas ‘Epp.as 


So rapids steward, Nixias, —xpirns ju ge, orpariorns soldier, ratSorpiBns 
gymnastic-master, — AdkiSradns (see 147 b). 


146, In the singular of masculines, a is retained after «, 4, 
or p; but after other sounds it is changed to y. — 
a. Compounds in -uérpys form an exception: -yew-pérpns land-measurer. 


147, The vocative singular takes -a short when the nomi- 
- native ends in -rys: thus roAtra (nom. wodirys citizen). 

143 D. The Aecolic (of Lesbos) has -as in the accus. plur.; cf. 34 D. 

144 D. The Ionic generally has the wncontracted forms. Hd. uses yij (Hm. 
yata); but has pyéa for pra. 

146 D. The Ionic has » for a through the sing. (1388 Dc). The Doric has 
& for n; and in the gen. sing. has -4 (contracted from -do, 87 Dh) for -ov: 
"Arpelda. . 





147 D. In some masculine words Hm. has a nom. sing. in -ra for -rys: 
iaadra for immdrns horseman, aixunra for aixunrhs spearman, ete. : also, with 


accent thrown back, pnrlera counsellor, axdunra favorer. So, too, euptvowa far 
sounding. Of. Lat. poeta, scriba. Bah, . 


’ 





Site 


152] SECOND DECLENSION. 37 


a. So, too, in names of nations and compound words, which make the 
nom. in -ys: Ilépoa (nom. Ilépons Persian), yew-pérpa (nom. yew-pérpns 
land-measurer ). 

b. All other words in -ns have -y in the vocative: Kpovidn (nom. 
Kpovidns). 

ce. Aégmora, vocative of deamérns master, has irregular accent. 


148, The gen. sing. of masculines originally ended in -é-10, which became 
-é-o (44), asin Homer. The Attic -ov is wholly irregular. 


149, In the gen. sing. of Boppas (later contracted form of Bopéas north 
wind), the earlier -éo has the Doric contraction to a: Poppa. This occurs also 
in some Doric and Roman proper names, and in a few other words: 2vAAds 
Sulla, dpvidodhpas bird-catcher, G.S. BvAAG, opviBoOnpa. 


150, Two masculines have an irregular accent in the gen. plur. (141): 
xphorns usurer, G. P. xphotwr (but xpnorav G. P. of the adj. xpnords good), 
and érnota annual winds, G. P. érnoiwv. So also the fem. apdn anchovy, 
G. P. adiwy (but apuay G. P. of the adj. apuns dull). 


Seconp DxciEenstion ( O-Declension). 


151. Words of this declension have stems ending in -o-. 
They are chiefly masculine and neuter, with a few feminines. ~ 

The masculines and feminines have -os in the nom. sing., 
the neuters -ov. The feminines are declined like the mascu- 
lines: the neuters differ from them in two respects : 

a. The nom. and voc. sing. take -v, the accusative ending. 

b. The nom., accus., and voc. plural end in -a. 


152. The jeminines may be known, in part, by the general rules (125): 
h onyds kind of oak, h tmreros vine, h Hreipos mainland, » Sdpos (the island) 
Samos, i Képwos (the city) Corinth. 


Of the remaining feminines the most important are: 


a. Several names of mineral or earthy substances: wWaupos sand, yiwos 
chalk, mAtvdes brick, amoddés ashes, némpos dung, Wipos pebble, Bacavos touch- 
stone. 

b. Several words that denote something hollow: yndAds coffer, yvd8os jaw, 


d. In Hd. some words in -ys have -ea for -ny in the accus. sing. (as if from 
stems in -eo-, see 190): dermdrea for Seamdrny. 


148 D. In the gen. sing. Hm. has 

1. -ao, the original form: ’Arpetdao. 

2. -ew, the Ionic form (86 D): ’Arpeidew. This -ew in Hm. is always sound- 
ed as one syllable (42). The accent remains as in the original form (103 a). 


© 3. -», a contraction of -do, used after vowels: ‘Epuelw (nom. ‘Eppelds, Att. 







Pi PHS); mee (nom. Bopéas, 149). 


‘Be 


38 


SECOND DECLENSION. 





KiBwrtds chest, copds coffin, Anvds wine-press, ndpdomos kneading-trough, ied ine 2 


oven. So rddpos trench. 





c. Several words for way: 654s, kéAevOos ; arpamds footpath, apuakitds oie a 


road ; but 6 crevwrds narrow passage. 





d. Several adjectives used as substantives: % Biduerpos (sc. ypauyh line) — 


diameter, avykAnros (sc. Bovah council) legislative assembly, 4 Sidrexros ( 
yAaooa speech) dialect. E 






e. Further, BiBAos book, paBdos staff, vdcos disease, Spdcos dew, Soxds beam. nish 


153, 





EXAMPLE. 
STEM. 


Sing. Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Accus. 
Voe. 


——— 


BBE OS 


Plor. N.Y. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Aecus. 


So vopuos law, xivdivos danger, ratpos bull, morass river, wévos labor, 
Bios life, @avaros death, beds god (see 155),—-vnaos (fem.) island,——ovKoy 


Dual N. A. V. 





6 &yOpwros man 


(avOpwro- ) 


&v8pwrro-s 
a&vSpatrou 
av0pdrw 
&vOpwiro-v 
&vIpwrre 


avipatrw 
avOpatrow 


&vepwirot 

> cA 
avipamev 
avopadrots 
avopdirovs 


Jig, pétpov measure, tparcoy cloak 


154. (a) In the genitive singular the case-ending -to with o- of the stem gives’ 
-o-.0 (as in Homer): thence comes -o-o and by contraction -ov.—(b) In the dat. — 
sing. (-~) and the nom. dual (-w) the stem-vowel -o- appears as -w-.—(c) In the 
voc. sing. of masculines and feminines -o- of the stem becomes -e.—(d) In the 
gen. plur. -o- of the stem disappears before the case-ending -wy, and is not 
contracted with it ; av@pé7-wy: hence this case is not always perispomenon 
in the first declension, 141). 





154 D, a. In the gen. sing. Hm. has two forms, -ov and -ou0, as 
and even -oo is required by the metre in a few places. 
The Aeolic always and the Doric sometimes (but not 


_ -ov (387 D j). 


n 686s way 


To S@pov gift a 4 





Pindar) has -w fog 
book et 






be Pal’ * Bi ¢ it > 
pe 
Me oe 


L 


(Swpoy . iH . 4 
pips | a 
a z aa ts 
Sdpw ae 
Sapo-v tee 
. , 
Sapo-v va 
r Tit ae 7 i 
Sépa i 
, aD cs. aa y} 
Sépow yi 
Sapee Fp Eee . 
} P i 4 
Sdpoy, 
Sdpous " — 
Spa -f we 
pay) ‘ Ai 
a ee 


| - 











(as a Pt 


In like manner -o- disappears before -a of the. | 
neuter plural.—(e) In the accusative plural -ous has arisen from -o-vs (see 133). 


—_—_ ae 1 c 
TO 


eee, 


e. In the accus. plur. the Doric (not Pindar) has -ws or -os for -ous: j UK@S 


or Avxos for AvxKovus wolves. 


The Aeolic (Lesbian) has -os; cf. 34 D. 





f. In the gen. dat. dual Hm. has -ouv for -ow: Spouv from Spos shoule en. 






ACT SUBSTANTIVES. 39 


1e nominative is often used in place of the vocative ; in 


g always so: & Oeds (Lat. deus). 
1e vocative singular of ddeApds brother is &SeApe, with irregular 













The dative plural in poetry often has the older ending -ovst. 
very rare in Attic prose. | 


Contract Substantives. 


| Words which have stems in -co-, -oo- suffer contrac- 
This takes place according to the rules in 37, 89, 





EXAMPLE, 6 vots mind To dcTovv bone 
STEM. (voo-) — (oreo-) 
Sing. Nom. (vé0-s) vot-s (s0ré0-v) d0rod-v 
Gen. (vdov) vot (d0réov) do-rod 
Dat. (vdm) ve (doT€y) ooTe 
Accus, (vdo-v) vod-v (d0r¢o-v) d0rot-y 
Voc. (vse) vod (é0ré0-v) d0rot-v 
Dual N. A. V. (vdw) vo (d0Tréw) d07Te 
G. D. (vdoiv) votv (6créov) déoroty 
eerser N.. V. (vdot) vot (éoréa) dora 
Gen. _ (yéwv) vav (dcréwv) 6aTa&v 
Dat. (vdois) vots (éoréos) éo-rots 
Accus, (vdeus) voids (s0rda) do07@ 


Aovs (from mAdos) voyage, wepimdovs (wepimdoos) circumnaviga- 
vs (poos) stream, Kavovy (from kadveov, cf. 224) basket. 


The accent of the contract forms is, in two points, inconsistent 
he rules in 105. 

he nominative dual, when accented on the ultima, is oxytone: 
rom é6oré@) instead of dare. 

ompounds keep the accent on the same syllable as in the 
t nominative singular: mepimAous (from mepimdoos), dat. sing. 
» (from mepimddw) instead of wepitr@. 





| 56 D. In the dative plural Hm. usually has -o.o1, Hd. always so. 
g é 57 D. The Ionic generally has the wreontracted forms, | 


pm 


40 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 


Attie Second Declension. 
159, The O-Declension includes a few stems ending in -o-. 


This w appears in all the cases; but takes . subscript where the 


common ending hast. This form of the O-Declension, though 
not confined to Attic writers, is known as the Attic Second 
Declension. | 


6 ved-s temple 


S. N. ved-s | D.N. A. ved P. N. veg 
G. ved G. D. veav G. veov 
D. vew D. vews 
A. veo-v A. vedas 


So Aeds people, kadws cable, Mevédews (see 162 a) Menelaus. 


160, Most of these words are produced by transfer of quantity (86), veds, 
Aeds for vadds, Adds, the latter forms being also in use. Others are formed 
by contraction: Aayds hare from Aaywds; adjective a&yhpws ageless from 
aynpaos. | 


161. Some words have -o or -oy in the accusative singular: Aayas 
hare, accus. sing. ay or Aayoy. So the proper names” Adws, Kos, Kéos, 
Mivws. “Eos dawn has only éo. 


162. The accent of these words is peculiar in two respects : 
a. The long » in the ultima does not exclude the accent from the 
antepenult: MevéAews (= MevédAdos) Menelaus. 


b. The genitive and dative, when accented on the ultima, are oxy- 


tone ; yet there is some diversity of theory and usage in this. 


Tuirp Deciension ( Consonant-Declension.) 


163, To this declension belong words whose stems end in a 
consonant or a close vowel (1, v). 


a. In this declension the form of the nominative singular is not suf- 
ficient to determine the other cases. It is often necessary to know 
also either the stem of the word, or the genitive singular, from which 
the stem may generally be found by dropping the ending -os. 


159 D, In the other dialects this variety of declension is little used, except 
in proper names. For veds, Aeds, kdAws, Aayés, Hm. has yvyds, Adds, KaAOs, 
Aawywds; Hd. vnds, Aews (or Ands?), KdAos, Aayds. For ”A€ws, Kds, yadws, Him. 
has ’A@dws, Kéws, yaddws. For €ws, both Hm. and Hd. have js (196 D). 

An older form of the gen. is seen in Mered-o, Hm. (for Merew-1o), noni 
Tlerew-s. 7 


0 








167] THIRD DECLENSION. GENDER. 41 


164, GenpER.—The gender may be known in many cases by the 
last letters of the stem. Thus: 

Neuter:are stems ending in 

@. -aT-, -ap-: aS g@pa (cwpar-) body, vérrap nectar. 

b. -ao-, -eo-: as yévos (yever-) Trace, ynpas old age. 

C. -i-, -v-, With nom. in -1, -v: dotvu city. 

Feminine are those ending in 

d. -rnr-, -d-, -0-: a8 raxutns (raxurnt-) swiftness, domis (acmd-) 
shield. 

e. -yov-, -Sov-: a8 orayav (crayov-) drop, xedXidav (xeAtOov-) swallow. 

f. -1-, -v-, with nom. in -1s, -us : modu-s city, apxu-s net. 

Masculine are those ending in 

g@. -ev-: as ypaev-s writer. 

h. -yr-: as ddovs (odovr-) tooth, révwv (revovr-) tendon. 

i. -nr-, -wT-: aS Tamns (ramnt-) carpet, épws (epwr-) love. (Except 
those in -rnr-.) 
j. -v-: as xreis (krev-) comb, Aetpav meadow. (Except those in -yor-, 
-dov-.) 

k, -p-: as kparnp mizing-bowl. (Except those in -ap-.) 

1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are never neuter, but 
whether they are masculine or feminine cannot be determined by 
general rules. 


165, Several words of masculine form, denoting persons or animals, are 
of common gender (126): as 6, % mdprus (uaptup-) witness, 6, 7 GAEKTpU@Y 
(adextpvoy-) cock or hen, 6, 7 aiffp (atOep-) acther. 


166. Exceptions to the above rules.—Some are evident from the meaning 
(7 Ovydrnp daughtcr). Others are: 

Faceptions to a: 6 dp starling ;—to d: 6 mods (a05-) foot, 6, % Spvts (opvid-) 
bird ;—to f: masc. éyxi-s viper, tpxi-s testicle, ddi-s serpent, Borpu-s cluster of 
grapes, Opivu-s footstool, ix@v-s fish, pi-s mouse, véxv-s corpse, atdxu-s ear of 
corn, TéAEKU-s Axe, WHxu-s fore-arm: also 6, } ci-s or b-s swine ;—to i: h eoOhs 
(ecOnt-) dress, To pas (dwt-) light ;—to j: fem. dphy (ppev-) midriff, axrts 
(axtiv-) ray, yAwXts (yAwxiv-) point of arrow, ts (iv-) strength, pis (piv-) nose, 
@dts (wdiv-) pang ; adKvev (adxvov-) halcyon, eikaév (exov-) image, nidy (niov-) 
shore, xOdv (xGov-) earth, xidbv (xtov-) snow, BAhxXev pennyroyal, uhkwv poppy ; 
—io k: fem. yaorhp (yaortep-) belly, nnp fate, xetp hand ; neut. wip (rup-) fire. 


FoRMATION oF CASES. 
For the case-endings see 133. 


167. The nominative, accusative, and vocative singular of 
neuter words are the simple stem. Final -r- is dropped (86) : 
copa (for cwpar) body. 


166 D.k. Several poetic stems (most of them defective) in -op, -wp are 
neuter: aop sword, jrop heart, EAwp prey, Téxuwp = Téexpap bound. 


42... THIRD DECLENSION. CASE-FORMATION. [168 


168, (1) The nominative singular of masculines and femi- 
nines adds -s to the stem. 


(2) But stems in -v-, -p-, -c-, -ovt- reject the ending -s, 


and lengthen a preceding «, o to y, w: thus 


Aupny (Aypev-) harbor, pyrwp (pyrop-) orator, rpunpys (rpenpec-) trireme 
A€wv (Acovt-) lion. (Cf. 34 a.) 

a. Stems in -iy- take -s: dehdis dolphin. But in late Greek occur 
SeAdty and the like. 7 

b. -s appears also in xreis (krev-) comb and oddovs (odorr-) tooth. 


169. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines 
adds -a to consonant-stems : zovs foot, accus. 7d6-a. 
-v to vowel-stems : wéXi-s city, accus. 7oAL-v. 
a. The same rule, in general, governs the use of the endings -as and -vs in 


the accusative plural. 
b. Only stems in -ev- take -a and -as; see 206. 


_ 170. The vocative singular of masculines and feminines 
is regularly the mere stem. But many words make the vo- 
cative singular like the nominative, thus: 


a. Oxytone stems ending in a liquid: nom. voc. mouuny (mopev-) 


shepherd (but daipwy divinity, barytone, voc. Satpoy like the stem). 

b. Stems ending in a mute: nom. voc. dida€é (fuAak-) watchman. 
Excepting stems in -d- and barytone stems in -yr- ; these, of course, 
drop the - and -r: yépoy voc. of yépwyr (yepovr-) old man. Proper 
names with stems in -ayr- have -ds in Attic, as Aids. 


172. SprctaL Rute or Accent.—Monosyllabic stems of the 
third declension accent the case-ending in the genitive and 
dative of all numbers: -wy and -ow taking the circumflex (129). 


Thus zovs (705-) foot: genitives mod-ds, mod-oiy, m0d-dy ; datives 
Woo-t, Tob-olv, To-ct. 


Eaxceptions.—a. The genitive dual and plural of rais boy, girl, Sues 
slave, 0as jackal, Tpas Trojan, 76 has light, 7 des blister, y das torch, 


168 D. b. For é5ovs, Hd. has 68éy according to the rule. 


170 D. b. From avat king Hm. has, beside the regular voc. sing. avag, a 
form &va (for avaxr) used in addressing gods.—The proper names in -dés (stem 
-ayt-) have in Hm. the voc. in -ay: Alay; but two have -@: HovAvddua, 
Aadoddud. 

171 D. a. In the gen. dat. dual Hm. has -ouy for -ov: rodotv. 

b. In the dat. plur. Hm. has both -o. and -evot: marci (for moid-cr) and 
matS-eoot. Rarely also-ect: aty-eot. He has also sometimes -oox after vowels: 
véxu-oot. But in forms like éreo-or (62 D), the first « belongs to the stem; 
80 in démrac-a1, and moool = mod-o1 (54 D), tpicor = ipsd-ct. 


€ 
% 
‘ 





Repti 


175] LABIAL AND PALATAL STEMS. 43 


rd obs ear, 6 ons moth: raidov, Suoev, Oar, Tpoor, parov, podor, 
Sadav, oTav, Teor. 

“}. Some words in which a stem of two syllables is covtracted to 
one : gap spring, gen. apos or jpos, Gat. eaps or Apr. 


173. The paradigms of the third declension will be given 
in the following order : 


1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute (-1-, -8-, -f-, -K-, ~y-, -x-)- 
~ a lingual mute (-r-, -6-, -6-). 

a liquid (-\-, -v-, -p-). 

-o- (-eo- and -ao-). 

oau (-F-). 

a, simple close vowel (-1-, -v-). 

a diphthong (-ev-, -av-, -ov-). 


Set mee ee 


174. I. Stems ending in a Labial or Palatal Mute. 


6 pvrAakt n prep n odamyeé n Optt 
(guaan-) | (reB-) | (carmeyy) | (pu) 
watchman vein trumpet hair 
Sing. Nom. ptrag preys oadaruys Opté 
Gen. didak-os prcB-ds oadiryy-os TPLX-OS 
Dat. mbdaK-t or¢B-t cadmuyy-t Tpix-l 
Accus pidak-a or<8-a, cadmeyy-a Tplx-a 
Voce. didag prey oddmvyé Oplé 
Dual N. A. V. pidak-e oré8-e oadriyy-€ Tplx-€ 
G. D. pvuAak-ou bdcB-otv cadrlyy-ou TPLX -otv 
Piero NOV. bidXak-es PréB-es oahruyy-€es Tplx-es 
Gen. PvACK-wY prc8-dv cahialyy-ev TPLX-OV 
Dat. piraée pred oadriyée Cpréi 
Accus. pv\aK-as préB-as oaAdTiyy-as Tpix-as 


So 6 Kdop (kr@r-) thief, 6 Adio (ArOior-) Aethiopian, 6 "Apa 
(ApaB-) Arabian, 7 Kdipag (kAtwax-) ladder, 7 paottE (waorty-) whip, 
6 ovu& (ovvx-) claw, n padray€ (padrayy-) phalanz. 


a. For € and p in the nominative singular and dative plural see 54. 
For the vocative singular see 170 b. For the change of aspiration 
in Opié, rpixds, see 74 a. 


175, The stem adwmex- makes nom. sing. A aromnt fox irregularly. On 
the contrary, the stems xypvk-, powik- make nom. sing. 6 xjpvé herald, 6 moive 
palm, with short v and ¢ (100 b). 


44 LINGUAL STEMS. MASCULINE AND FEMININE. 


tt 


II. Stems ending in a Lingual Mute (-r-, -6-, ga 
176. A. Masculines and Feminines. 


Dual N. A. V. 


cpm EF 


Plur. N. V. 


Gen. 
Dat. 


Accus. 


n eAmls 
(cA 718-) 
hope 


e .£ - 
aes 


6 yépwv 
(yeporr-) 
old man 


es aol 


Onr-t 


OAs 


éXrris 
édwl8-05 
éXarlS-u 
éXrr(O-a 
éXarl 


yépav 
YyépovT-0s 
yépovT-t 
yépovtT-a 
Yépov 


—_ ——— —eeeeeeSS SN eEeeseSEE Sees, 


Ofir-€ 
QnT-otv 


QfT-es 
OnT-dv 
Onol 

OAT-as 


éXmr(8-e 


éX7r(S-ov 


éXmr(S-€s 
éXrlS-wv 
éXrriot 

édwld-as 


ép.b-¢ 
€ép{5-ouv 


p.d-es 
épid-wv 
epuoe 

p.d-as 


dpvid-< 
> ~ 
opvtd0-ouv 





épvtd-es 
dpvt0-wv 
dpvicor 


Spvid-as 


yépovr-e 


YepovT-ow 


yépovT-es 
YVEpovT-wv 
yépouct 

YepovT-as 


So 7 7 vug (vuxt-) night, 6 yeros (yehor-) laughter, 7 7 Aaprras (Aaptrad-) 
torch, n xapis (xaptt-) Savor, 6 ylyas (yeyavt-) giant, 6 Néwy (Aeorr-) lion. 


For another declension of é dpvis bird, see 216, 14. 


177. For the dropping of 7, 6, @ before o in the nom. sing. and 
dat. plur. see 54. For the dat. plur. yépovat see 57. 


178. The nom. wods foot (wod-) is irregular. 


both + and -s. 


Aduap (Sauapr-) wife drops 


179. In the accusative singular, barytone stems in -r-, -d-, 
-0-, after a close vowel, commonly omit the mute and take the 


case-ending -r: 


a. This apples to barytone Spe in “T=, ~1)-, -10-, -v6-, -v6-. 
x apis (xapir-), Sener, accus. Xapur, rarely yapit-a. 


176 D. A few stems in -wr- have forms without r+. 
declined in Ionic, xpés, xpods, xpot, xpda. 
xpeTa. HKven the Attic has dat. sing. xp@ in the phrase ev xp@ close. 


as Epl-V, Opv t-V 





Thus 


But oxytones take -a, 


Xpes (xpwt-) skin is 
Hm. has also, but rarely, 


XpwrTds, 
From 


iSpds (tSpw7-) sweat, yéAws (yerwrT-) laughter, tpws (epwr-) love (also pos, 2d de- 
clension, poetic), the forms with 7 are unknown to Hm. He has only dat. sing. 
dpa, yéeA@, Epw, and accus. i5pa, yéAw (or yeAwr, 2d decl.), Epor. 


179 D, In Hm. words of this class often form the accus. sing in -a: 


more frequent than épw, yAavedmida from yAavkémis dright-eyed. 
a. For xAe?s Hm. uses the Ionic «Ants accus. sing. KAnida: 
KAdis (Lat. clavis), rarely KAaé. 


eptda 


the Doric has 





183] LINGUAL STEMS. NEUTER. 45 


edris accus. édvid-a, Only the oxytone kets (kewd-) hey has in the accus, 
sing. kAeiv (rarely cAcida), and in the accus. plur. kdeis or Keidas. 

b. In. these words the 7, 6, or @, is an accessory sound, which did not 
originally belong to the stem: hence its omission. 


180. For the vocative sia see 170 b. mats boy, avi has voc. mat, as 
an -.d- stem. 


181, B. Neuters. 





To compa body | rd hmap liver Td Kepas horn 
(cwpar-) (jrar-) (kepar-, Kepac-) 
Sing. Nom, ope nTrap KEpa.s 
Gen. TORAT-OS WTAT-0s KépGt-0s (Kkepaos) képas 
Dat. TOLAT=L irar-. KepGT-t (epai) Képau 
Accus. oO}.0, Hrap képas 
Voce. oO. qrap Képas 
Dual N. A. V. TOUGT-E frar-< képar-< (kepae) KEepG 
G; D. TWLAT-Ov HwaT-oL KepGT-ov (Kepaowv) KEpav 
Pilar. Ni V. COUAT-O irar-o, Képar-o. (kepaa) Kép@ 
Gen. TOLAT-OV HTaT-ov kepit-oy (Kepawv) KEepav 
Dat. TOpBATL race Képaor 
Accus. TOLAT=O Yrar-a aie ee ee eee KépGT-0 (Kepaa) KEépa 


So ordua (otopar-) mouth, dvopza (ovopar-) name, SérXeap (Sedear-) bait, 
pert (wedut-) honey, yada (yadakr-) milk (see 86). 


182. The words like fap, in -ap, gen. -aros, are crerhap fat, déreap 
bait, oréap tallow, ppéap (Att. gen. Ppéaros), and the poetic eidap food, 
Huap day, metpap limit. Tt is thought that their stems ended originally 
in -apr-, and that p has been dropped j in some cases and 7 in others. 
a. "Ydwp (vdar-) water and oxwp (cxar-) filth have irregularly for 
ain nom. accus. voc. sing. 


183, A few words have double stems in -ar- (or -dr-) and -ac-, and 
form the nom., accus., and-voc. sing. from the latter (like yépas, 190). 
SO képas gen. kepat-os ; and répas prodigy, mépas end, gen. Tépar-os 
mépar-os With short a. «épas makes other (contractec) forms, KEpas, 
etc., from the stem in -ag- (see paradigm) ; but in répas and Tépas 
these do not occur. The contract noun bas (for ddos) light, gen. 
wr-ds, belongs also here. 


183 D. in Képas, TEpas, the forms with 7 are not used in the Ionic. Hm. 
has képas, képar, Képa, Kepdwy, Képact,and kepdeoor; Tépas, Tépaa, TEpdwy, TEepdeool, 
Hd. changes a before a vowel to e, and does not contract: «épei, Tépea., —For 
Tépas, TEparos, Hm. has wetpap, welparos.—F or oa@s Hm. has only paos or péws ; 
dat. pact, plural paea. dos is used also by Attic (Tragic) poets. 





46 LIQUID STEMS. [184 
184, II. Stems ending in a Liquid. 
6 mwotwhv 6 daiuwv 6 aidy 6 Onp 6 pitwp 
(motpmev-) (Sarpov-) (aiwy-) (6np-) (bnrop-) 
shepherd divinity age. wild beast orator 
Sing. Nom TOULTY Salpov aidy 8p pyTap 
Gen wouséy-os | Salnov-os | aidy-os Onp-ds piyrop-os 
Dat. mousev-- | Saluov-t aldy-r Onp-C pHTop-t 
Accus. | mouysév-a | Satnov-o, aidy-a Oijp-a pirop-a 
Voce TOULTY Satpov aldy Ohp pijTop 
Dual N. A. V.| arowpév-e Salpov-e aldy-< Ofjp-e prhtop-e 
G. D. | trowéy-ory | Satpdv-ow | aidv-ow | Onp-oiv pyrdp-ow 
Plur.N.V. | qowpév-es | Safyov-cs aidv-es Oijp-es pnTop-Es 
Gen. mourev-wv | Saudv-wv | aldv-ev Onp-dv PNT Cp-wv 
Dat. TOULeot Salpoot aidacr Onp-o-f PhTop-o8 
Accus, | towév-as | Salpov-as | aidv-as Ofjp-as phTop-as 


* 
o 

res 
eo es 


So 6 phy (uqv-) month, 6 Aywnv (Amev-) harbor, 6 Hyepov (iHyepov-) 
leader, 6 ayav (ayav-) contest, 6 aidnp (abep-) acther, 6 xparnp (xparnp-) 
mixing-bowl, 6 pap (pwp-) thief. 


185. In the voc. sing., warnp savior, Amd\Aoy, and Iocedav short- 
en the long vowel of the stem, and throw the accent back upon the 
first syllable: oarep, “AmodAoyv, Ildcecdov.—The accent is also thrown 
back in compound proper names in -ay: “Ayapéuyav, “Apictoyeirar, 
Voc. Aydwepuvov, Aptoroyerrov. Except those in -fpev: voc. Auxédpov. 


186, ’Ardd\Xoy and Hocedéy have shorter forms of the accus. sing. 
"AmédAAw and Togedé, used chiefly in expressions of swearing after 
vi Tov and pa Tov. 


ee 


187, a. The only stem in -A- is Ga-, nom. 6 &As salt, 4 GAs (poetic) sea. 
b. The neuter word zip (mup-) jive has irregularly 0 in the nom. sing. 


SYNCOPATED STEMS IN -ep-. 

188. Darnp father, pnrnp mother, Ovyarnp daughter, and yaornp belly, 
drop e of the stem in the genitive and dative singular, and accent the 
case-ending (cf. 172). In the other cases they retain e and accent it. 
Only in the vocative singular all throw the accent back to the first 
syllable. And in the dative plural -ép- is changed to -pa- (64). 


185 D. The Epic dahp (Sacp-) husband’s brother has voc. sing. daep. 


186 D, These shorter forms are not used by Hm. or Hd.; but from xukedy 
mixed draught Hm. makes accus. sing. kuke® or KuKELo. 


488 D. The poets often have the full forms in the gen. and dat. sing.: 


190] 


a. The proper name Anufrnp (vocative Anuntep) syncopates all the oblique’ 


LIQUID STEMS. 


AT 


cases, but accents them on the first syllable: Anuntpos, Anuntpa.— Aarip 
(acrep-) star has no syncopated forms, but makes dat. plur. égtpdot. 


b. ’Avjp (avep-) man follows the analogy of rarnp, but syncopates al/ 


the cases in which -ep- comes before a vowel, an 





and p (60). 
6 wathp n enTnp n Ouyarnp 6 avnp 
189, (maT ep-) (unrep-) (@vyar ep-) (avep-) 
father mother daughter man 
Sing. Nom TATHO pATHp Ouyarnp avnp 
Gen TaATp-0S pnrp-os 6uyatp-0s avdp-ds 
Dat twartp-( pytp-¢ Guvyarp-C avip-f 
Accus TATép-a pnt ép-o Buyaréo-a &vip-a 
Voc TATEP prep Oiyarep diveo 
Dual N. A. V. | aarép-e pyrép-e Quyarép-e dvip-e 
G. D. art ép-olv ENTép-ow Ovyarép-ow | davdp-otv 
Plur. N. V TwuTép-€s pnrép-es Ouyarép-es &vSp-es 
Gen Tratép-av pntép-wv Quyarép-wv évip-dv 
Dat. TATOG-CL PyTpa-oe Ovyarpa-ov | avdpa-or 
Accus TATEP-AS ByTép-as Buyarép-as &vdp-as 


inserts 6 between v 


IV. Stems ending in -ec- and -ac-. 


190. The final -c- of the stem appears only in the nominative 
singular, and elsewhere where there is no case-ending. Before all 
case-endings it falls away, and the vowels thus brought together are 
then contracted.—The neuter stems in -eo- have -os instead of -es in 
the nominative singular (28). 


matépos, matépt. In duydrnp they sometimes syncopate other cases: @dyarpa, 
Ovyatpes, Ovyarpoay; this happens also in warp@y for marépwy. In the dat. 
plur. the Epic -eoo: may be used: Oidyarépecot. 

b. From avfp the poets use avépos, avepes, etc., as well as avdpds, &vdpes, 
etc.; in the dat. plur. Hm. has both dvipdo. and avdpeoot. 


190 D, Stems in -eo--—The uncontracted forms prevail in Hm.; yet he 
often contracts -ef to -er: yéver; and sometimes -eos to -evs: @dpaevs from 
Odpoos courage.—kréos fame makes accus. plur. naga for cAé¢ea.—In the dat. 
plur. Hm. has three forms: BeAéeoo1, BéAco-o1, and Bédre-o1, from BéAos 
mussile. 7 

oméos or ometos cave has gen. omefous, dat. omni (for omée-i), dat. plur. 
gmheoo. and irreg. omécot.—déos fear has irreg. gen. delous. 

Hd. has only the uncontracted forms. 





48 STEMS IN -E3- AND -A%-.. [191 
191 Td Yyéevos race 6 Swxparns Socrates Td yépas prize 
(yeveo-) (Swxparec-) (yepao-) 
S. N Yyévos Lokparys Yyépas 
_ G. | (yéve-os) ‘yévous (Swxpdre-os) DwKparovs (yépa-os) ‘yépws 
D. | (yéve-i) yéver (Swxpdre-i) Bwkparer (yépa-i) yépas 
A yévos (Swxpare-x) Bwoxpary yépas 
V Yévos LOKPATES Yépas 





Dual.| (yéve-e) -yévy 
(yevé-orv) ‘yevoiv 





| (yerea) -yévn | (yaa) yepa 


P.N 
G. | (yevé-wv) yevav (yepa-wv) yepav 
D yéevert ) yépace 
A. | (yéve-a) -yévy (yépa-a) ‘yépa 





So 7d eidos form, eros year, pédos song.—6é Anpoobévns Demosthenes.— 
ro ynpas old age, kpéas flesh. 


192, The nominative plural of neuters in -os contracts -ea into -a 
after an e: xypéd from ypéos (xpeco-) debt. The genitive plural is 
sometimes uncontracted, even in prose.—In the dual, -ce gives -y, con- 
trary to 37 e. 


193, Names like Swxpdrns retract the accent in the vocative, con- 
trary to 128. They have often an irregular accusative in -n», Sionpdrg 
as if of the first declension. 


194, Proper names in -xAens, compounded with xdéos (Ree Jame, 
are peculiar in their contraction. 


N. Iepexréns TepixdAns D. (Iepixdee-t) Tlepixdet 
G. (Ilepixdee-os) Tepiuxdéous A. (IleptxAee-a) Tlepuxdéa 
V. (Ilepexdees) Tlepixders. 


eT ase erOvOwOOoOoooowvwvo—= 


Stems in -ac-.-—In Hm. mostly uncontracted, but contraction sometimes 
occurs in the dat. sing., déma; rarely i in other cases, cper@v. In the nom. and 
accus. plur. he has always -. short : Epa, déma cups. In the dat. plur. he has 
three forms: demd-eoot, démag-ot, Kpeaot. 

ovdas ground, floor, Kaas Siecee, Ke €pas possession, in all other forms take 

e for a: ovdcos oder obde1, Koen K@ETL, KTEepea KTEpEwY funeral-gifts : so also 
eas Bpéras, Bpereos, image. Cf. YE ped Hd. for yépaa. The only contract 
forms in Hd. are xpéa, xpeav.—Dor. npiis = xpéas. 

194 D, Hm. declines "Hparaens, “HpakAjjos, ‘HpakAfi, ‘HpakaAja, ‘Hparres.— 
Hd. ‘Hpanaéns, ‘Hparxaéos, ‘Hparddi, ‘HpakrAéa, ‘HpdkAees, one € being Pires 
before endings that begin with a vowel. ) 


ae chal 


199] STEMS ENDING IN -F.. 49 


195, The dat. sing. of neuters in -as is sometimes wrongly written with -¢. 
Forms of the nom. plur. in short -a occur rarely in Attic poets: k«péa. 


196. There is one stem in -ov-, aidoo~ shame (7); inflected N. aidas, 
G. (aido-os) aidovs, D. (aido-i) aidot, A. (aido-a) aid. No dual or plural. 





197, V. Stems ending in -F-. 
6 jpws hero n wee persuasion 
(jpwF-) (aret0oF -) 

Sing. Nom. Tjpws med 
Gen. Tjpa-0s (aretBo-os) trevBots 
Dat. Hpew-t, tow (wrevOo-i) tme8ot 
Accus. Hpa-a, pe (rei0o-a) mwedd 
Voce. Hpws tmevOot 


Dual N. A. V. Tjpw-e 


G. D. Tpo-ow 

foot N.Y. fpw-es, tpws 
Gen. Tpo-wv 
Dat. Hpo-oe 
Accus. Hpwo-as, ipas 


So 6 Tpas Trojan (see 172 a), 6 pntpws mother’s brother,—y nye echo, 
Anro, Kadupo. 


198, These words are few in number. The dative and accus. sing. of the 
masculines are usually contracted, jp, jpw. Some of these words occasion- 
ally have forms according to the Attic second declension : gen. sing. fjpw, accus. 
pov. 


199, The feminines are all oxytone, and chiefly women’s names. The 
nom. sing. is without case-ending, and the contract accus. sing. is oxytone 
like the nom. These stems seem to have formerly ended in -ofi-: hence the 
voc. sing. in -o7, and an older form of the nom. in -@: Zamoy. 

a. In the dual and plural, which occur very rarely, they follow the second 
declension: nom. Aexol, accus. yopyovs; from Acxa, yopye. 


196 D. Besides aidés, the Ionic has another -oc- stem, 7 ds dawn 
(= Att. €ws declined according to 159). Both words always have the con- 
tract form, even in Hm. and Hd. : 

198 D. Hm. has jpwi and tpw, Mivwa and Mivw. 

199 D, Even the Ionic has only the contracted forms. Ud. makes the 
accus. sing. in -ovy, “lovy for *Id. 


50 STEMS IN 1- AND -t-. [200 


200, A few feminine nouns in -ov occasionally have forms as if from 
nouns in -: eixéy (eoy-) image, gen. eixods, accus. eikd; anddv (andov-) night- 
tngale, voc. andor. 








201, VI. Stems in -- and -v-. 
h modus city 6 rnxus forearm | tTdaortv town | 6 ixdus fish 
(woA.-) (3wnxv-) (agrv-) (tx Ov-) 
S. N. | adds THX V-S kory tx 8u-s 
G. | méde-ws THKE-WS dore-ws ix 9i-os 
D. | (wddAc-i) wmode | (ahxe-i) wax | (Aore-i) Gore | tx Gs-t 
A. | wodu-v THX U-V dor ix O0-v 
V.| woXe wihKY dor ix 00 
TONE-€ THX E-€ iore-e ix O0-e 
Du. , > 4 Ud 
qTroN€-OLv 7X €-OLv GQo-Té-o-w ix 00-ow 
P.N. | (wéde-es) modes | (mhxe-es) WHXES | (Kore-a) dory ix 9b-es 
G. | mode-wv THK E-@V do-re-wv ix Ob-wv 
D. | wodeou THXE-OL dore-or ix Od-o 
A. | wodes TIKES (tore-a) dor ix ts 


¢€ 


So 7 dvvapui-s power, 1 ordot-s Saction, 6 méXexu-s axe, (like myxvs), 
6 pv-s mouse (like iyOds, but see 205), 6 Bérpu-s cluster of grapes (like 
ixy@us, but with short v, 205). 


202, The final -- or -v- of the stem always appears in the nom., accus., 
and voc. sing. In the other cases most :-stems and some v-stems insert an € 
before the -1- or -v-, and the latter drops out (44): aoAe(i)-es, aore(v)-. Con- 
traction then takes place in the dat. sing. and nom. plur. The accus. plur. 
modes, WHXELs are irregularly made to conform to the nom. plur. The nom. 
and accus. dual are seldom contracted (-ee to -n, cf. 191): wéAn, &orn. 


201 D. Stems in -1-.-—(a) The New Ionic and the Dorie and Aeolic retain 
tin all the forms, but contract -1-. in the dat. sing. to -7, and form the accus. 
plur. in -is (for -i-vs, 34) or -tas. Thus sing. méAis, wéAcos, wdAt, wort, WAL, 
plur. wéAres, moAtwy, wéAtot, wéAis OF WdALas. 

(b) Hm. declines sing. dais, wéAsos, wéAee (and mrdAet), wéAwv, wéaz, plur. 
méArtes, ToAiwy, wéAeot OY TroAlego1, méAtas or wéAts (written in some editions 
mwéAeis). Perhaps adder médeoe should be written wdéAi wéAiot. In other 
datives he has -i: «dvi, unti, from néu-s dust, witi-s wisdom. 

(c) From wéaus itself Hm. has also a peculiar form with 9: wéAnos, réAni, 
méAnes, TOANGS. 

Stems in -v--—The Ionic always has -os in the gen. sing. Hm. sometimes 
contracts -ei to -e1, -vi to -w in the dat. sing: THXE!; wAnOut (from TAnOvs 
multitude). Hd. has no contraction. Both have ix@vas as well as ix@vs in 
the accus. plur. For the datives véxvoo., mirvoct see 171 D b. 


206] DIPHTHONG-STEMS. 51 


203. After -e- the gen. sing. has -as instead of -os, which, however, 
does not affect the accent (103 a): méAews, mnyews. The gen. plur. 
follows the accent of the gen. sing.: méAcwv, myyewr. 

a. For the origin of -ws by transfer of quantity (wéAews perhaps from éAznos, 
201 Dc), cf. 36. But such forms as médAcos, whxeos, &eTEos Occur, especially 
in poetry. 

b. 6 xi-s, gen. xi-ds weevil, preserves 1 in all cases. 


204. Most substantive stems in -v- keep this vowel throughout. The nom. 
dual and plural may be contracted: (x60 (for ix@ve), ints (for ixdves). The 
accus. plur. has -vs (for -v-vs, 34): in late writers -v-as. 

a. “Eyxedus eel is declined like ix@is in the sing., but like wfyus in the 
plur.: gen. sing. éyxéAv-os, nom. plur. éyxéAets. 


205, Oxytone substantives and monosyllables with -v-stems have 
long d in the nom., accus., and voc. sing.: iydus, iyévv, ixOe; and 
monosyllables take the circumflex in these cases: pis, pov, pv. Bary- 
tones have short -v- : Bdrpus, Borpuy, Borpv. 








206, VIL. Stems ending in a Diphthong. 
6 Bactred-s 6 % Bov-s | % ypai-s N vav-s 
king ox, cow | old woman ship 
Sing. Nom. BactAed-s Bot-s Ypav-s 
Gen, Baovdé-ws Bo-és Yypa-ds 
Dat. (Bacir€-t)  Baorre? Bo-t yea-t 
Accus. Baorhé-a Bot-v ypat-v 
Voe. Bacrdcd od yead 
Dual N. A. V. Baordé-e 7 Bo-e | yed-e 
GD, BacAé-ouv Bo-otv yoG-oiv 
Plur. N. V. (Baoiré-es) Baordets Bs-es ypa-es 
Gen. Baothé-wv Bo-dy Yypa-av 
Dat. Bactded-or Bov-ot ypav-ol 
Accus. Baothé-Gs Bod-s | Yeats 





So 6 yovev-s parent, 6 tepedt-s priest, “Odvrcet-s, “AxAXet-s. 


206 D, Stems in -ev--—Hd. has only the uncontracted forms. Hm. has 7 
instead of e, wherever v falls away: BactAeuvs, Bacirev, BaciActot, but BactAjos, 
BacAji, etc., dat. plur. apicrheoot. Yet in proper names he often has e: 
TInjAjos and TmnAéos, Tnaqi and Tae, etc.; rarely with contraction: gen. 
*Oducevs, dat. "AxtAAe?, accus. Tvd7. In the acc. sg. and plur., a is short. 

Bows Dor. Bas, accus. sing. Body Dor. Bay (once in Hm.): Hm. has in dat. 
plur. Béeoo. and Bouci, accus. plur. Boas and Bois. 

Tpats: Hm. has only ypnis (14 Dd) and ypnis, dat. ypyt, voc. ypnd and 
yenv. 


52 DIPHTHONG-STEMS. [207 


207. The final v of the diphthong disappears before all vowels, according 


to 44.—The stem vav- (originally vav-) becomes yvn- before a short vowel- 
sound, ve- before a long one. 


208, In regard to stems in -ev-, observe that 

a. The contract nom. plur. has -7s in the older Attic and in Plato, 
as Baowdns, instead of Bacurels. 

b. The gen. sing. has -ews, arising from -nos (36); see the Homeric 
form, 206 D. In the same way 

c. The accus. sing. and plur. have -ea and -eds, arising from -na, -nas. 

d. When -ev- follows a vowel, contraction may occur in the gen. and 
accus. sing.: Ie:pacev-s Piraeeus, gen. Teparas, accus, eipaa. 

e. The accus. plur. in -es belongs to late Greek. 


209, Xods (xov-) three-quart measure is declined like Bods, but has accus. 
sing. xéa, accus. plur. xéas. 


210, The only diphthong-stem ending in -:- is o- (formerly oF:-, see 72), 


sing. oi-s sheep, oi-ds, oi-t, ol-v; plur. oi-es, oi-@y, oi-ct, oi-s. 


IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 


211, In some instances, a word has forms belonging to two different 
stems. This is a common cause of irregular declension. 


212. Such words are called heteroclites (érepdxdira differently de- 
clined) when the nom. sing. can be formed alike from either stem. 
Thus N. 8. oxdéros darkness (stem cxoro-, 2d declension, or ckoreo-, 
od declension), G. S. oxdrov or okdrovs. 


213. But usually the nom. sing. can be formed from only one of 
the two stems. Then forms belonging to the other stem are called 
metaplastic (from peratdacpds change of formation). Thus ro wtp jire, 

lur. ra wupd (2d decl.) watch-jfires, D. mupois; 6 oveipo-s dream (2d 
1.), but also G. S. dveipar-os, N. P. dveipar-a (8d decl.); 7 ddo-s 









ads is declined by Hm., nom. sing. vnis (14 D d), gen. (vnds) veds, dat. yt, 
s. (va) véa, nom. plur. (vjes) vees, gen. (vy@yv) vedv, dat. vyvat (vheoot, 
oot), accus. (vias) veas. The forms not in ( ) belong also to Hd. 

209 D. Hippocrates and late writers have forms from stem xoeu-: xoEws, 
xo€e, etc. 

210 D. Hm. (commonly) and Hd. have oi- for o1-: dts, dios, etc., dat. plur. 
Hm. étecor (once ofecr) and decor. 

212 D. From Saprndévy Hm. has Saprydévos, etc., also SaprfSovtos, etc.— 
From Mivws, Att. gen. Mive, etc. (159), Hm. Mivwos, etc. (197). 

213 D, Hm. dan-f D. S. of aanh sirength,—topiv-c D. 8. of topivn batile,— 
udoti D.S., udori-v A. S., of udorit whip,—tx@ (as if for iyw-a, see 197) A. S. 
of ixdép lymph,—iér-a A. S. of twxh rout,—éayrarld-eoo. D. P. of ayrday 
elbow,—avdpardd-eoor D. P. of dvdpdrodo-v slave,—édéouat-a plur. of decpd-s 


bond,—zpocdérat-a plur. of mpéowro-v face,—r& wrevpd Ion. and poet. plur. of 
h wAecupa. side, 


216] IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 53 


threshing-floor declined like é#s (161), but sometimes G. dov-os, etc. : 
like Gos are 6 taws peacock, and (in poetry) 6 ridas whirlwind. 


214, In some words the sing. and plur. are of different genders 
(heterogeneous), though alike in stem. Thus 6 giro-s corn, plur. ta ira; 
6 otabpds station, stall, plur. often ra orabua; 6 Seopos band, plur. 
often ra Seopa; To orad.oy stade, plur. commonly oi oradzot. 


215, a. Many words are defective in number, often from the nature of their 
meaning. Thus aidfp acther, only in the sing.; of ernota annual winds, 
7a Atovicia festival of Dionysus, only in the plural. 

b. Other words are defective in case. Thus dvap dream, trap waking, 
ddedos use, all neuter and used only in the nom. and accus. 


216. The most important irregularities of declension, which have 
not been noticed already, will be found in the following alphabetic table : 

1. “Apns (Apeo-) the god Ares, G. “Apews (poet. “Apeos), D. “Apet, 
A.*Apn, V. reg. “Apes. 

2. Stem apy- lamb (N. 8. apny only in an inscription); hence (rod, 
TIS) apvds, apvi, dpva, dpves, dpvact. The N. 8. is supplied by ayuvos, 
2d decl., regular. 

3. TO yovu knee (Lat. genu), N. A. V. S. All other cases are formed 
from stem yovar-: ydovaros, yovart, etc. 

4. 9 yvvn woman. All other forms come from a stem yvyatk-: the 
genitives and datives accent the case-ending: G. 8. yuvatkos, D. yuvarki, 
A. yuvaixa, V. yuvar; dual yuvaixe, yuvaxoty ; plur. yuvaikes, yuvatkar, 
yuvaéi, yuvaixas. 

5. ro Sdpu spear, N. A. V. 8. All other cases from stem Sopar- (cf. 
no. 3): ddparos, Sdpari, etc. Poetic G. dopds, D. dopi and ddpeu. 


From Wdrpoxdo-s declined regularly, Hm. has also MatpoxAjos, MarpoxaAja, 
Marpdécres (stem MarporaAceo-, 194 D). 

From jvioxe-s chariotecr, declined regularly, Hm. has also ju0xja, nvioxijes 
(stem 7vioxev-, 206 D); cf. Aidtomwas and Ai@orjas, A. P. of Aidioy. 

214 D. Hm. Spuud plur. of dpuuds oak-wood,—éomepa plur. of Exmepos even- 
ang,—Kérevda (also xéAevOar) plur. of 7 KéAcvIos way. 

Hid. Avxva plur. of Avxves lamp, 


215 D. a. Hm. plur. éyeata entrails, D. éyxaot,—iooe eyes, only N. A. dual 
(in Trag. also plur., G. doowv, D. tooos),—plur. dxea, dxéwr, dxer du chariot 
(sing. 6 dxos, not in Hm.). 

b. Only nom. or accus., Hm. 66 (for S@ua) house,—npe (for xpi0h) barley,— 
&pevos wealth,—8éuas body,—dos delight,—pa only in ipa pepe to render a 
service,—nrop heart,—réxuwp (Att. réxuap) bound,—all neuter. Only voc., 7Aé€ 
or nAe€e (Hm.) foolish,—péae (Attic poets) my good sir or madam. Only dat., 
Hm. «redt-eoor to possessions,—(év) dat in battle. 


216 D. The dialects have the following peculiar forms: 
1. *Apns: Hm. ”Apyos, “Apri, “Apna, also ”Apeos, “Aper (Hd. “Ape, Ape). 
3. yovu: Ion. and poetic yobvatos, yotvartt, youvara, youvéTwy, ‘youvact. 
Poetic y Y youvara, 7 
Epic also youvdés, youvi, yodva, yotvwr, yovverst. 
5. dépu: Ion. dovparos, Sovpari, Sovpara, Sovpdtwy, Sovpact. Epic also Soupés, 
Soupl, Sovpe, Sovpa, Sovpwv, Sovpecst. 


54 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. [216 


6. Zevs the god Zeus, G. Ards, D. Art, A. Ala, V. Zed. 

_ 1. 1 Oguis (Geysd-) right, declined reg.: but in the phrase Oéus 
evvat ( fas esse, indic. Oéuis éoti fas est), the nom. is used for the accus. 

8. ro apa head, D. 8. képg. Other cases from stem kpar-: G. kparés, 
D. xpari: also rd xpara N. A. sing., and even xpa@ras accus. plur. mase. 
Poetic word. 

9. 6 7 Kowoprd-s partaker, regular; but also N. A. P. xowév-es, -as. 

10. 6 7 Kvoy dog, V. 8. xioy. All other cases from stem xvuy-: kuvés, 
kuvi, kuva; plur. Kuves, KuvOv, Kvol, KUVaS. 

11. 6 Aa-s stone, contracted from aa-s, G. Aa-os, D. G-i, A. AGa-v, 
Aa-v: plur. Aa-es, Ad-wv, Aad-eoot, OY Aa-eot. Poetic word for los. 

12. 6 7 padpro-s witness, D. P. paprv-ov. All other cases from stem 
paprup-: paprupos, paprupt, etc. 

13. Oidimovs Oedipus makes G. Oidimov (D. Oidim@ does not oc- 
cur), A. Oidirouy, V. OidSizrovs and Oidimov. Late writers have G. D. A. 
Oidimodos, -d1, -dSa. 

14. 6 7 pris (opvt6-) bird, declined regularly (176); A. 8. dpviv, 
also dpvida. Less frequent forms, made from stem opy-, are N. 8. épu-s, 
A. 8. épu-v, N. P. dpvets, G. dpvewy, A. dpves. 


15. 76 ods car, N. A.V. 8S. All other cases from stem @r-: drds, 


eri; plur. era, drwy, doi. (These forms were made by contraction 
from ovas, ovaros, etc., see below.) 

16. 7 Tvé Pnyz, stem Tvxy-: Tv«vés, TMvxvi, Tvkva. 

17. 6 mpeoBevtns (mpeoBevra-) embassador : in the plur. commonly 
mpéa ews, TpéaBewr, mpéoBeot. These forms come from the poetic sing. 
_ mpéoBu-s embassador, also old man, in which latter sense mpeaBurns is 
the common prose word for all numbers. 

18. ray, defective; only in voc. ray (or & ‘rav) my dear sir. 

19. 6 vid-s son, declined regularly: also from a stem viv-, G. viéos, 
D. viet; dual viée, vigow; plur. viets, vigwy, vigor, viets. Forms vis 
and vivy in inscriptions. This word was also written without 1, ids, ete, 

20. 7 xeip hand, stem yerp-; but G. D. D. xepoiv, D. P. xepoi. 


6. Zeds: poet. also Zyvds, Zynvt, Ziva. Pind. At for Act. 
7. Oéuis: Hm. @€uioros, etc., Pind. O€urTos, ete. 
8. Hm. has stems kapyt-, xpar-, and uncontracted kapnar-, Kpaat-. 


N. A. Sing. xapy also xdp 


G Kdpntos Kparés KaphaTos Kpaaros 

D. Kapntt Kpart Kaphare Kpaare 

N. A. Plur. rapa Kpara Kapnata kpaata also Kdpnva 
G. kpaT wy kaphvev 
D. Kpaot. 


9. The Doric (Pind.) has Kowa, rowavos, ete. 

12. udprus: Hm. always uaprupos, 2d decl. Cf. pvAaxos Hd. (once in Hm.) 
for PvAak watchman. 

18. To Oidiarouvs belong also gen. Oid:rdda0 Hm., Oidirddew Hd.; and in 
Trag. gen. Oididda, accus. Oidiarddav, voc. Oidird54. 

14. 3pvis: Hm. and Hd. have only forms from stem opvié-. Dor. dpvixos, 
bpvixt, ete., from stem oprtx-. 

15. ods: Dor. és, Hm. ovaros, plur. ovata, ovact, once wat. 


219] LOCAL ENDINGS. 55 


21. rd-xpéws debt, N. A. V.S. ; only another form of rd ypéos, which 
is declined regularly, but see 192. 


Local Endings. 


217. Closely analogous to case-endings are certain endings 
which mark relations of place. ‘These are 


-6. for the place where: adXo-6: elsewhere. 
-Oev for the place whence: oiko-bev from home. 
-de for the place whither: oixa-d« homeward. 


218. The endings -@ and -6ey are affixed to the stem: ’A@jvn-Oev 
From Athens, xuxr0-bev from the circle (kuxdo-s); but -o- is sometimes 
used for final -a- of the stem: pitd-Oev from the root (from pita root); 
and consonant-stems assume an -o-: mdvr-o-Gev from every side. 


219, The ending -de (enclitic, 118 d) is affixed to the accusative: 
Méyapd-de toward Megara, “Edevoiva-de toward Hleusis ; otx-a-de (from 
oixo-s) is irregular. 

a. With a preceding -s, -3e makes -(e by transposition (68): ’A@fvace (for 

Afmvas-5e) toward Athens, @nBate (for OnBas-de) toward Thebes, Ovpace (for 
Oupas-Se) owt of doors. 
19. vids: Hm. often has vids, vidv, vié,—other forms of the 2d decl. very 
rarely. From stem viv- he has viéos, vidi (vie?), vida, viées (viets), vidas (viets). 
Further, from stem vi- he has vios (gen.), vit, via, vie, vies, vidowt, vias —Hd. 
uses only the 2d decl. forms. 

20. xelp: poet. xepds, xepl. Hm. D. P. xepot and xelpecar, 

The following appear as irregular only in the dialects: 

22. 6 anp (fem. in Hm.) aiv. Ion. Hé€pos, népt, Hépa. 

23. 6’Atdns Hm. (Att. “A:dns the god Hades) 1st decl., G. *Aiéao or ’AiSew, 
D. *Atén, A. ’AtSnv: but also G.”Aidos, D.”Aid: (stem Aid-, 3d decl.). Rare 
N. *Aidwved-s, D. ’Aidwrv Ht (206 D). 

24. 7d Sévdpov tree, Ion. and poet. dévipeov, Sevdpéov, etc. Also irreg. 
D. P. dévdpecr (as if from stem devdpec-). 

25. 6 mets (for wev-s, and that for puny-s), only nom. sing., Ionic and poetic 
form for 6 piv month, 

26. % mwAnOds (declined like ix6is) Ionic for 7d wAHO0s multitude ; of the 
latter, Hm. has only rAndet, wA7 Oe. 

27. 7 wruxh fold, not in Hm., who uses only the defective D. S. mruxl, 
N. A. P. mrixes, wrvxas. 

28. 6 orixos row, not in Hm., who uses only the defective G. S. orixés, 
N. A. P. ortxes, orlxas. 


217 D. The local endings are much more frequent in Hm.: o%xof at home, 
“TA166 apd before Troy, ovpavdbev from heaven, ayopnbev from the assembly. 

The form with -@ev is sometimes used by Hm. as a genitive case: Kara 
Kp7jGev from the head down, wholly, é& ard0ev out of the sea. 

219 D. Homeric forms are: otcovde homeward, dvde SduovSe to his own house, 
nuetepdvee to our (house), rédAwdSe to the city, PéBovde to flight: peculiar are 
puyade to flight, pace, xauace to carth,”Aiddécde to (the abode of ) Hades (216 D, 28). 


56 ADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. [220 


b. An ending -oe, added to the stem, also occurs: &AXo-ce toward another 
place, wéyto-ce in every direction. 


220, For some words we find an ancient Locative case, denoting the 
place where, with the ending -: for the singular, and for the plural -ou: 
oixor at home, Wv6ot at Pytho, “Io Opoi at the Isthmus, A@nvn-o1 at Athens, 
Ivaratdo. at Plataea, Oipaior (Lat. foris) at the doors, abroad, pict at 
the proper season. 


a. It appears from inscriptions that the oldest Attic used the form in -éo., 
-not as dative of the first declension: tots Tauldo., Tots émuorarnow. 


ADJECTIVES. 
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL-DECLENSION. 


222. This is much the most numerous class. The mascu- 
line and neuter follow the second declension ; the feminine 
usually follows the first declension. ‘Thus the nominative 
singular ends in -os, -7 (or -a), -ov (Lat. -ws, -a, -wm). 














M. good fF. IN: M. friendly F. N. 
S. N. aya9ds ayadh  ayaddy i\ros purla iAvov 
G. dya90d ayaiis ayadod gidtov = puAlas ddtou 
D. ayuda  ayaiy  ayads pirty ourta duro 
A. ayatdy ayalnv ayalov {drov putay odfdrov 
Vv. ayadE aya ayadev irre oudla {voy 
Dual. ayatd ayaba  ayadd ourlw gurla pro 
d&yaloty ayalaiy ayadotv @iriow girtav  drdlow 
Pon. ayafol ayatal ayaia plrrou pir diva 
G. ayaIay ayalav ayaidv urlov piilov dirtov 
D. aya9ois ayabais ayalots didlos girttars  tAtours 
a, ayaIots ayalas ayaa duifovs “didias ida 














221 D. Eric Casz-Enpine -p:.—A peculiar suffix of the Epic language is 


gi- (or -piv, 87 D), added to the stem. The form with -d: serves as a genitive 
or dative, both singular and plural. Thus—(a) in the 1st declension always sin- 
gular: Bin-dt with violence, Kring: in the tent, amd veupidt from the bow-string ; 
irregular ér éoyxapddu (for exxapn-pt) on the hearth.—(b) in the 2d declension : 
*fAub-gi of Troy, Gedgi with the gods.—(c) in the 3d declension, almost always 
plural: am dxeo-pi from the car, raps vad-di by the ships, mpbs korvAndov-d-pt 
to the feelers ; irregular amd kpdrea-pi from the head (216 D, 8). 

222 D. a. For Ionic y instead of a& in the feminine, see 138 Dc. Hm. has 
dta fem. of dios divine, with short a: dia Ocawy divine among goddesses. . 


225] 


ADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. 


oF 


a. The nominative singular feminine always has a long vowel, 


either -a@ or -7, according to 138. 


fem. dydon : but -a after -po- ; aOpoo-s collected fem. aOpda. 
b. The feminine, in the nom. and gen. plur., follows the accent of 
the masculine : thus diAra, not diAia as we might expect from nom. 
sing. @iAla (128) ; pidiwy, not dircHy as in substantives (141). 
ec. The dual forms of the feminine in -d, -ay, are often (but not 
always) replaced by the masculine forms: roiy didow the (two) dear 
This applies to all adjectives and participles. 


(maidens). 


After -o-, -7 is used; dydoos eighth 


993, Contract Apsrctives.—Adjectives in -eos and -oos 


are subject to contraction. 
silver, contracted from dzrAvos, apyvpeos. 


are as follows: 


8. 


GmAovs 
e ~ 
a7Aov 
are 
arAovUv 
e ~ 
GTAOVS 
GTA 
Gamwoty 
arAot 
awrOv 
4 ~ 
GiwrAots 
e A 
Q7rAovs 


ahh 
e A 
amis 
arhy 
Garhi 
ahh 
ATA 
amXaty 
arAvat 
awAOv 
e A 
amrXats 
arAas 


Thus arAots simple, apyvpots of 
The contract forms 








amdodv Gpyupots apyvpa  apyupody 
amhod apyvpod § apyupis apyupod 
are Gpyup@  dpyup%  dpyupa 
amhody apyupoty apyupay dpyupody 
amhotv dpyupots dpyupa dapyupodv 
amrrd d&pyups apyupa  apyupe 
aaoty apyupoiy dpyupaiy dapyupotv 
Gra a&pyveot apyvpat dpyupa 
amwhav Gpyupdv apyvpav apyupav 
atois apyupots apyvpais apyupois 
awAG apyupots apyupas apyupa 


So ypuaous, xpvon, ypucouv (xpioeos, -éa, -€eor). 


224, For the peculiarities of contraction see 41. 


The rules of ac- 
cent in 158 apply here too. Adjectives of material in -eos, as dpyvpeos, 
accent their contract syllables, -ovs, -7 (-a), -odv. 
from dpyupéos. 


Thus apyvupovs, as if 


225, ApJECTIVES oF Two Enprnes.—In these the mascu- 
line form is used also for the feminine: M. F. jovyos, N. jovyov 
quict. So most compound adjectives: d-rexvos childless, xapzo- 
dopos fruit-bearing, «&-vous («v-voos) well-disposed. 


a. Many adjectives of. three endings are sometimes used as of two, and, con- 
versely, some adjectives of two endings have occasionally a distinct form for 


the feminine. 


These exceptional cases are most frequent in poetry. 





222 D, b. But the Ionic has -dwy, -éwy in the gen. pl. fem.: see 141 D. 


58 ADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. [226 


M. F. quiet N. M. F. propitious Reo 
S. N Hovxos ijovX ov Udews i ewv 
G. HovKxov «New 
D. Hoixw tdew 
A Hovyov Lewy 
V Hove HovXyov Uews vAeor 
Dual. joie ew 
Fotxow tAewy 
PN iouxXor Hovya thew tea 
G. HovKov Uewy 
i: Hovx ots Udews 
A Hovxous Houxa Uews idea 


227, A few adjectives like thes follow the Attic second declension 
(159) ; but the neut. plur. has -a (seldom -). Of these, mr€as full 
has a separate feminine form: mAéws, mréa, tmAéwv. The defective 
adjective M. F. oa@s, N. c@v (formed from gaos safe) has A. 8. cay, 
A. P. o@s ; also ca as N. 8. fem. and neut. plur. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT-DECLENSION. 


998. The feminine of these, when it differs from the mas- 
culine, follows the first declension: its nominative singular 
always ends in short -a (second class, 189). 

a. The feminine is formed from the stem of the masculine by an- 


nexing -a, but this addition causes various phonetic changes. 
b. For the feminine dual, cf. 222 c. 


Stems in -v-. 


929, The masculine of these is declined like mpxvs, the neuter like 
dorv (201) : but the genitive singular has -os (not -ws) and the neuter 
plural is uncontracted. The feminine has -era (for -ev-ia, 44). 





927 D. For tdAews, Hm. has tAdos or tAaos: for wAéws, Hm. mAcios, 
areln, mAciov, Hd. wAéos, -n, -ov.—Hm. has o@s (only in this form), and 
xdos, obn, dov, comp. cadrepos.—With  wds, -h, -dv living, he has N. 8. ¢@s, 
A. (av. 

229 D. For fem. -eia, -elas, etc., Hd. has -éa, -éns, -én, -€av, etc. Hm. com- 
monly has -eta, -efns, etc., but a@éa for wxeia, Badeins and Babéns, Babetay 
and Badéay. In Hm., #5ds and movads (for wodAds), as well as 7Aus, are Some- 
times fem. In the A. S., Hm. sometimes has -éa for -dv: edpéa mdvrov the 
wide sea. 


230) ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -v- AND £2. 59 





sweet 

Sing. Nom. Hdus nSeta 450 
Gen. 15é0s Hd5elas HS€éos 
Dat. “| (qdet) ASet Hdela (n5€i) HSet 
Accus. Hdov ySetav Hd0 
Voce. 450 deta 750 

Dual N. A. V. 15ée Hdela, Hdée 
G. D. ¥5éou Adela Hdéow 

Plur. Nom. (nd€es) HSets HdSetar 7Séa 
Gen. Hdéov Hdeav Hdéov 
Dat. Hdéor Hdelats HSéou 
Accus. mdets Hdelas Hdéa 


So yrukvs sweet, Bpadvs slow, raxvs swift, ebpis wide. 
a. All these are oxytone except 67Aus female and juovs half. In @fAus the 
poets sometimes use the masculine form for the feminine, 
Stems in -co-. 


230. These are of two endings: M. FE’. edyevys (ev-yevec-), 
N. evyeves well-born. 





M. F. N. 
SN edyevijs edyevés 
G. (evyevé-os) edyevots 
D (edyeve-i) evyevet 
A. (edyevé-a) evyevfj evyevés 
v evyevés 
Dual. (edyevé-c) edyev7 
(ev-yeve-o1v) edyevoty 
PN. (ebyeve-es) evyevets (edyevé-a) edyevi} 
G. (edyeve-wy) edyevdv . 
D. evyevért 
A. evyevets (edyeve-a) evyevil 


So cadns clear, adnOns true, wrAnpns full. 


230 D. a. Hm. and Hd. use uncontracted forms: both have -eas in accus. 
plur. mase. and fem. But Hm. sometimes contracts -ei, -ees: KaTampnvet, 
evapyets. Hd. has axAea& for axdeéa. 


60 ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -ES- AND -n-. [231- 
231, a. Cf. 190. The accusative plural in -es irregularly follows 
the nominative. 
b. -ea is contracted into -a, not -y, when an e precedes (192): evdea 
from evdens needy. After « and v both vowels occur: bya and tya 


from wyiuns healthy ; eipva and eipun from etduns comely. 


232, Compound paroxytones in -ns have recessive accent every- 
where, even in contract forms : avrdpxns self-sufficient, neut. avrapxes, 
gen. plur. avrapxwy (not avtapxéy). This does not apply to words in 
-wdns, -@Ans, -wpys, -npns, Which were not felt as compounds ; yet 
Tpinpov, from rpiunpns irireme, is commonly written. 


a. The neuter &Anéés, when used as an exclamation, throws back its ac- 
cent: andes indeed / 


Stems in -v-. 


233, Stems in -ay- form the nominative masculine with -s (uédds for 
pedav-s, 34), and are of three endings. The feminine péAawa is for 
peAap-va (65). 


234, Other stems in -y- form their nominative masculine according 
to 168 (2), and are of two endings, except répny, répewa, répev tender. 
The accent is recessive : neuter evdapor. 














235, 
black Sortunate 

Sing. Nom. peas pédarva,  redauy eiSatov eJdarov 
Gen. pédavos pedcatyns pédavos evSaipovos 
Dat. péedave pedatvy  péAdcyve evdalpove 
Accus. pédava pédAaway pddav edSaizova  eVSauLov 
Voce. pedav pédawa péeday eVdarpov 

Dual N. A. V. | péXave pedratva  pédave evdaluove 
.5, pedavow pedatyar peddvory evSatpdvorv 

Plur. Nom. pedaves predatvar pedava | edSatnoves edSatpnova 
Gen. pedavav pedaay peddvev edSadveav 
Dat. pcdace  pedalvars péedace evSatpoor 
Accus. pédavas predatyas pédava edSalpovas edvSatpova 


So rddds, rddawva, rdday wretched, capper, cadppov discreet, appny, 
dppev (older dpony, dpaev) male. 


b. In adjectives in -ens Hm. rarely contracts -ee- of the stem: évxActas for 


év-xAeéas, edppetos for evppeéos. 


Of. 194 D. 


239] STEMS IN -ON- AND -NT-. 61 


Comparative Stems in -ov-. 


236, Adjectives of the comparative degree in -wy (stem -ov-) 
have, in some of their cases, shorter forms, which are more 
used in Attic. 


i 


M. F. greater N. 
Sing. Nom. pellov peiLov 
Gen. petLov-os 
Dat. pelCov-t 
Accus, pelLov-a, pellw perfor 
7.O0G. petLov 
Dual N. A. V. pelLov-e 
G. D. perl ov-ouwv 
Plur. N. V. pellov-es, pelfous pelLov-a, paella 
Gen. perl ov-ov 
Dat. pelLoor 
Accus. pelLov-as, peiLous pelLov-a, peila 


—— -— 





So BeArtov better, ainxytov more shameful, ddytov more painful. 


a. The forms in -oy have recessive accent : BéArtop. 

b. The shorter forms are from a different stem in -oc-: pei(w and jelous 
are contracted from pet(o-a, wec(o-es (never used). The accus. plur. pelous 
follows the nominative. 


Stems in -vt-. 


237. In these the feminine has -ca with the preceding vowel length- 
ened (for -vr-1a, -voa, 67 and 34). But stems in -evr- (like yapies) have 
the feminine in -eooa (for -er-va, 67) from shorter stems in -er-. From 
the same is the dative plur. yapiecu. 


a. The nom. sing. xaple:s, mas are for yapteyt-s, mavt-s (56). 


238, Contracted forms of adjectives in -es occur: mrepovvra for 
mMTepoevta, peAtrovTra (48) for peritdecoa honey-cake. So many names 
of places, “Papyovs (-ders), gen. “Papvovvrtos. 


239, In way the vowel is exceptionally long : the compounds sometimes have 
it short: &@may.—The gen. and dat. sing. conform their accent to 172, but not 
the gen. and dat. dual and plural. 





236 D, Hm. and Hd. use both the shorter and longer forms. 


238 D, Hm. seldom contracts: rizjs for tivhets (40 a), Tinjvra for tTiuherta 
The Doric has -as, -avros for -d-ets, -d-evros: apyavra. 


4 








62 ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN -NT.-. [240 
240, 
| pleasing all 
S. N. | xapfes Xapleroa  xaolev Tas Tack Wav 
G. | xaplevros yapieoons yXapievros | wavTds marys tavTds 
D. | xaplevre = =xapieooy  Xaplevtr tmavrt Troon tavrl 
A. | xaplevra = yxapleroav yaptev TAVTG  Twacay Trav 
V. | xaplev Xapleroa  yaplev TOY TAT TOV 
Dual. | xaptevre Yyapriecoa Xaplevre TAVTE TATR  WAVTE 
XaprévTow Yapieccaw YXapréevrow | wavrow macaw mdavTow 
P.N. | xaplevres yapleroar yaplevra | mavres Taco. TavTa 
G. | xapievrav yxapucoay  yapiévTav | ravrey tacév TavTev 
D. | xaplect Xapréeroats Xapleor TOOL TATULS TAC 
A. | Xaplevras yapieocas  xaplevra | mavTras macds tTdavTo 





So mrepdes winged, povijers voiced. 


Participle-Stems in -vt-. 


241, Stems in-ort-, in general, form the nominative singular 
But stems in -ov7- in 


like yépwy (176), according to 168 (2). 


presents and aorists of the pu-form, and all stems in -avr-, 
-evt-, -vyt- form it with -s, according to 56. The vocative 
singular is like the nominative. 











949, 
loosing (AvovT-) giving (:8ovT-) 
S. N. | Avev Avovea dAdoy Sid005 SiS0tca SuS6v 
G.| Asovros Avotoyns Avovros | Biddvros Si80i~ns  Srddvros 
D. | Avovte. Avotioyn Avovte SiSovte Si80tcn  8Sovte 
A. | Avovra Avovcav Adov SidovrTa Si0tcav Sud0v 
V.| Avav AvVovea dov SiS0%s Sis0tca Sid0Vv 
Dual. | Avovre Avoiod Avovre Sis0vre Sids0tcd Sud0Vvre 
Avovrow Avotoaw Avovroi Suddvrow  SS0tcaw  S8id0vrow 
P. N. AvovrTes Avovra. Avovra SiSo0Vvres Si0tcar  SiS0vTa 
G. | AUdvTav AvovtTdav AvovTav SiscvTav  8i0vcdv S.ddvTev 
D. | AvVover Avobaars AvOVTr Sid0008 Si8otacais SiS0d01 
A.| Avovras Avoticls Hvovra SidovTas SS0tcds 


o.usevTa 

















942 D. The Aeolic has -o.wa for -ovca and -aoa for -aoa in the feminine 


participle; also -a:s for -és in the masculine (34 D): tpépoca nourishing, 


em, 


—S. 














243 | PARTICIPLE-STEMS IN -NT-. 63 
loosed (AvOevT-) showing (Sexvuyt-) 
S. N. | AvGels Avvetoa Avoév Seuxvis Sexvion Seuxnviv 
G. | AvOévros Avdelons Avdévros | Sexvivros Sexvions Seuvivros 
D.| AvOévre = AvVIefoy «= Av Pv te Sexvivr,. Seaxvion  Seuvivre 
A. | Av8évtTa = Av Oetoav = Avvév Saxvivra  Sexvicav Sexviv 
V.| Av9els Avdcion Avdév Sexvis Saxvioa  Senxviy 
Dual. | Av9évre hudeiod Avdevre Seuxvivre Sexviod  Sexvivre 
hudévrow Avoelcaw AvOévrow| Sevivrow Sexnviiocaw Sexvivrow 
P.N.| XAvOévres AvIeioa. Avddvra Sexvuvres Sekvioa. SeaKxvivra 
G. | Avdévrav Arvlacdv Avdévrav | Sexvivray Sexvirdv SeKvivrov 
D. | Avdetor Avveloats Avdetor SeuKVUTL Seuxvucorais Serxvior 
A. | Av0évras Avoeloas Avlévra Sexvivras Sexvucas Sexvivra 








Decline also hovaas, 


Avodoa, vUcav; 


Avoavros, Aicdons, AVoavros 
like was (240); but voc. sing. Avoas, and short a in ddoap. 
a. Monosyllabic participles do not follow 172 in accent: dots, gen. dévros 


(not dovrds). 


—e 


243. Participles in -dwr, -éwv, -dwy are contracted : 
TiLawV, Tiudovea, Tysaov honoring, contY. Tiwav, TiLGca, TLILOY 5 
direwv, pirgovea, dircov loving, contr. Pirav, diAovca, PrAodv ; 
dyAdwv, dnAdovca, SyAdov showing, contr. dyAdGv, SynrAotoa, SynAodv. 
The uncontracted forms are like those of Avwy (242) ; the 


contract forms are as follows: 





— ———— 


. | THLav 











N TYLOTA TIL 
G. | Tinavros tTipooys Tipdvros 
— A a= & —_ a 

D. | tTipavre | =otinaoyq = TipayTe 

A. | TiyavTa Tipaoav Tiev 

V. | tiyav TILGTA TILOV 
Dual. | tTiyavte §8=— Tle a = Tipe 

TULOVTOLY TILM@OaLW TIpLMVvToLY 

PLN. | tipavres tipdoar tipavra 

G. | tTipaytav tipecdy Tipavroy | 

D. | tizdor TULOTALS TIGL 

A. | TivGyvras tindocas 





Andy (contracted from dyAcwy) is declined exactly like drdap. 








oudrdy 
@idotvtos 
pirodyte 
prrotvTe 
purav 


pirodvre 
rdrodyTou 


crdodyres 
didrotytoy 
dudotae 


TiavTa | prrotyras 





Girotca  didrodtv 
mirotons didrobvros 
diioten dtdodyte 
piotcay didrodv 
miiotca  didrodv 


girotca  drodvTe 
@rdotcay didotvrow 


purotca, didrotvra 
diiovedy dirotvTev 
@irdoioaus didoder 
piroveds didodyra 








Opéats, Opebaca having nourished. The first of these forms is used by 


Theocritus, and all of them by Pindar. 


64 PARTICIPLE-STEMS IN -OT-. [244 


944, Perrect AcTIVE PAaRTICIPLES.—IThese have stems in 
-ot-. ‘Lhe feminine ends in -va. 


a 











having loosed (AeduKor-) standing (€oTwrT-) 
S. N. | AeAXukds AcAvKviaa AeAvKdS ET TOS écTtaca  éords 
G. | AeAvKdTos §=AeAvKvids AeXvKdTOS | EoTaTOS EoTdoNsS EoTHTOS 
D. | AeXvedte = AeAvKV’A Ss NeAkdte eoTOTL éeoTHon eEoToOTL 
A. | XeAvKdTa = AeAUKViaY AeAUKS éoTraTra éoTracav égros 
V. | NeXuKOS AcAvKULA = AeAKOS EOTAS éoTtaGou  eords 
Dual. | AeXuKdre AeAvxuia ~=—s NeAKOTE EOTOTE EOTHTH  EOTAHTE 
AeAuKSTOW AeAXvKvlaLy AeAUKOTOLW | EoTdTOW EoTacaw éEoTaoTOLV 
P. N.| NeAvedres AcAvevtar AceAuKOTA éorares eoTaoa. éorara 
G. | NeAvKOToOV AEcAUKULa@VY AcEAUKOTAV CCTOTOVY EGTHTOVY ETTOTOV 
D. | XeAXvKdot §=— AeAUKULats ~AeAVKGOL EOTOTL  EOTaoOALs ETTAOL 
A. | AeXuKGTas AeAvKUlas AEeAvKOTA éoTaTas EeOTaTAS eTTaTA 


a. €otws is contracted from éoraws, and is irregular in the forma- 
tion of the feminine. The neuter form éo7ds is also irregular : €otas 
seems to have been also uscd. 


245, OrneR ApsECTIVES.—Of two endings are some compounds of 
substantives, with stems ending in various ways ; as | 
dmarwp, amratop : gen. amarop-os fatherless. 
eVeAmus, eveATL: gen. evéAmLd-os Of good hope. 
eVyapis, evyaps: gen. evydpit-os agreeable. 


246. Adjectives of One Ending.—In these the feminine is like the 
masculine ; but, owing either to their meaning or their form, they have 
no neuter: thus dpmaf, apmay-os rapacious, puyas pvyad-os fugitive, 
iyvas, adyvat-os unknown, amas, ama-os childless, paxap, paxap-os 
blessed, wévns, mévnt-os poor, yupvns, yupynr-os light-armed, idpis, nom. 
plur. idpi-es knowing. 


247. Irregular Adjectives.—Some adjectives are irregular, 
their forms being derived from different stems. So peyas 
(weya- and peyado-) great, rodvs (roAv- and zoAAo-) much, 
many. 





246 D. Hm. has many adjectives which appear only in the feminine: 
métvia (in voc. also wétva) revered, Adxem (or perhaps éAdxea small): 
edmatépera of noble father, bBpysomdtpn of mighty father, aytidveipa match 
for men, Bwridveipa nourishing men, Kvdiaveipa making men glorious, movAv- 
Béretpa much nourishing, toxéapa arrow-showering, immoddceta thick with horse- 
hair, naddAvybvana A. S. rich in fair women, To fem. Odrea rich there is a 
neut. plur. OdAea. 


247 D, Hm. and Hd. have zoaads, -f, -dv reg. like &ya0és. But Hm. has 











248] IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 65 

gs, N. péyas peyady peya Tots Ton TON 
G. | peyaAov peyadns peydadou mo\hod = =«moAddfs moddod 
D. | peydAw peyary peyarw TOAAG ToT ToAAG 
A. | péyav peyadnv péya ToAUy ToMAHy = TOAD 
V. | péyo peyadyn peéya TON moh TOhD 

Dual peyaho peyaha peyaho 

peyadow  peyddaw  peyddou 

P.N. | peyador peyahar jeyada mokdof moddal aodda 
G. | peyddov peyahov peyddov To\NGv qmwodAGv trod\av 
D. | peydAots peyadats peyddors mo\Nots todXats moddots 
A. | peyddous peyadas peydda mo\dots modkds 7odda 


a. mpaos mild forms the whole feminine from stem mpav-: mpaeia, 
mpaeias, etc. The masculine and neuter singular are formed from 
stem mpdo- : mpdov, mpd, mpaov. In the masculine and neuter plural, 
both formations are used: wpao and mpdcis, mpaa and mpdéa. 


b. Some compounds of mots (1o5-) foot form the nom. sing. neuter, and 
sometimes the accus. sing. masc. in -ovy, after the analogy of &mAovs (223) ; 
tplrous three-footed, rpimovy (but in the sense éiped, accus. always tploda). 


CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
A By -TEPOSs AND -TQ@TOS. 


248, The usual ending of the comparative degree is -repos, 
-Tepa, -repov (stem -tepo-); of the superlative, -raros, -rarn, -Tatov 
(stem -raro-). These endings are applied to the masculine 
stem of the positive. Thus: 


alse the common forms qmoAvs, woAv, woAdy, as well as wovAvs, wovAd, rovaAdy ; 
and from the same stem, woAv-, he makes likewise G. 8S. roAéos, N. P. roAées, 
G. woAéwy, D. rodéeror or modeot, A. ToA€as. 

Pindar has mpdais, rpai, the Ionic mpnis wpnd. Compare mpnirepos in Hd. 

Hm. has some feminine adjectives which are not formed from the stem of 
the masculine: @ovpts, -13-0s impetuous, M. Ootipo-s; mieipa fut, rich, M. riwy; 
mpeoBa and mpéoBetpa honored, M. rpéofu-s; mpdppacca favorable, M. mpddppwv. 
—The following are made from the stem of the masculine, but by an un- 
usual mode of formation: xadrKoBdpea heavy with brass, M. xadrkoBaphs ; 
npryevera early-born (M. ipryevfs later); fdveme (Hes.) sweet-speaking, M. 
noverhs ; udrapa (Pind.) blessed, M. wdxao; and in the plur. only, @aueal 
crowded, tappetal frequent, M. Oauées, Tapdées. 

In Hm. épinpo-s trusty, makes plur. nom., and accus. épinp-es, épinp-as. 


248 D, The force of the ending is nearly lost in the Homeric forms: 
Onddtepos feminine, &ypdrepos wild (living in the country), dpéarepos living in 


66 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [240 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Kougos (kovpo-) light KOUP0-TEpos, -G, -ov Kovdd-TaTos, -n, -ov 

yAukus (yAvkv-) sweet yAvuKU-TEpos yAvKvU-Taros 

pedas (weday-) black peAdp-Tepos peAdy-raros 

pedxap (paxap-) blessed poakdp-Tepos pakdp-raros 

cadns (capec-) clear capéc-repos capbéo-Taros 

xapiers (xaptevr-) pleasing yaptéo-repos xXaptéo-Taros 

méyns (mevnt-) Poor TEVvET-TEPOS TEved-TATOS 


xapiéorepos and wevéorepos arise from yapiet-Tepos (237) and mevyt-Tepos 
by change of + to 7 (52). In the latter, » is shortened. 


249, Adjectives in -os with short penult lengthen -o- to -w-: 
this prevents the excessive multiplication of short syllables : 
copw-Tepos wiser, a€iw-taros worthiest, from codd-s, dé£to-s. 

a. But if the penult is long by nature or position, -o- remains : 
movnpd-repos more wicked, Newrd-raros jinest. So always when a mute 
and liquid follow the vowel of the penult : mxpd-raros bitterest. 


250, The adjective yepaccs aged always, madatds ancient, and oxoAaios 
leisurely, sometimes, drop -o- after -a- : yepai-repos, madai-raros. 

a. weoos middle, icos equal, evdies serene, Havxos quiet, xpdios early, bYos 
late, make -aurepos, -a:raros, as if from forms in -atos: peoal-tTaros, mpwial-repov. 
hovxatepos occurs once. From wAnotoy adv. near (adj. mAnow-s poetic) come 
mAnotal-Tepos, -taros; and from zpotpyov (for xpd épyou advantageous) comes 
mpoupytal-T Epos. 

b. @iaos dear makes ofarepos (poetic) and @fAratos. The comparative in 
prose is usually padAdov pidos (256).—diAaitepos, piAalraros occur only in 
Xenophon. 


251. Some adjectives take the irregular endings -eorepos, -eoraros. 
So 

a. Stems in -or-: cappov (codpor-) discreet, cwppovéo-repos, 
evoaiparv (evdaipor-) happy, <?daporvéo-raros.—Special exceptions are 
mtoy fat, widrepos, -raros; and wérwpy ripe, wemairepos, -Taros. 

b. &kparos unmixed, éspwuevos sirong, &ruevos glad, and occasionally some 
others in -os: axparéerepos, éppwpereorepos. 

c. Some contract adjectives in (-oos) -ous: edvoderepos (for edvoerrepos) 
from etvous (evvoos) well-disposed. 


252, a. The adj. Addos talkative, rrwxds beggarly, dpopd-yos dainty, wovopdyos 
eating alone, and some adjectives of one ending, as xAemrns thievish, have 
-LOTEPOS, -lo'TATOS: AcAloTEpos, TTwXlaTATOS, KAETTLOTEpOS. 


the mountains, Gedrepos belonging to the gods, detirepds Lat. dexter, which differ 
little from @jAus, &ypios, Gpetos, Octos, Sekids. 

249 D. The poets sometimes use -w- after a long syllable: di(vpérepos Hm. 
more wretched. —From i6ds straight, Hm. makes i@tvtata; from daewds 
shining, pacwédrepes, but padyraras. 


254] COMPARISON BY -ION AND -I2TO2. 67 


b. Other. adjectives of one gender in -ns (G. -ov) follow the rule for stems 
in -o-: bBpiordrepos from bBporhs insolent. 

c. Compounds of xdpis favor form the comparative and superlative as if 
they ended in -xapito-s: emixapirdérepos from énixapis agreeable. 


B. By -twv AND -.oTos. 


953. A much less frequent ending of the comparative is 
-iwy, -tov (stem -iov-); of the superlative, -wros, -vaTn, -wrrov 
(stem -\0TO-). 

These endings are applied, not to the stem of the positive, 
but to the rooé of the word. THence a final vowel, or syllable 
-po-, in the stem of the positive disappears : 


Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
W0-v-s pleasant (45-onar am pleased) 78-tov 0-LeTOS 
Tax-v-s swift  (rax-os swiftness) Oaoowy (for ray-twv) tay-LtoTos 
péy-a-s great = (ey-eOos greatness) peiCov (for pey-twv)  péy-voTos 
éx6-pd-s hostile (€y6-os hatred) ex 0-tov €xO-.a Tos 
aiax-po-s shameful (aicx-os shame)  aiox-toy aigx-toTos 


a. In pel(wy, for pey-iwy, the . passes into the first syllable, as in delve 
for auev-iwy. For -oo- in Oaccwy (OaTTwy), see 67. 


254, The following require special notice : 


Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
1. dyabds good dwelvoy aptotos (ap-eTrn virtue) 
/ , 
BeATioy BéArioTos 
ji U la , 

Kpelco@y (kpeitr@v)  Kpdrirtos (Kpar-os strength) 

f r 
A@ov A@aTos 


dpeivay, apioros, refer more to excellence or worth ; kpeloowy, kpatioTos, 
more to power and superiority. The opposite of xpelocay is ooo. 


252 D. c. Hm. has ayxapio-repos (for axapit-Tepas), from axapis graceless. 

253 D. In Epic and Doric poetry -iwy (with short 4) is used. The forms in 
-iwy, -toTos are much more frequent in poetry than in prose: thus (the starred 
forms are un-Homeric), *Badiwy, Badicros (Babds decp),—Bpacowy or *Bpadlwy, 
Bapdicros or “Bpddicros (Bpadds slow),—*Bpdxicros (Bpaxds short),—yAviwy 
(yAvuds sweet),—éréyxiatos (é€Aeyxées plur. infamous),—*Kodiwv, KvdioTos 
(xvdpds glorious),—yaocowy, wheotos, Dor. *paxieros (uaxpds long),—otktiaTos 
(otxtpés pitiable),—racowy or *raxlwy, maxiotos (waxts thick),—diArlwy, *9l- 
Moros (plros dear),—ékioTos (@xds quick).—Hd. has wéCwy for pelCor. 

254 D. 1. Hm. comp. apelwy: pos. kpatis powerful, sup. Kdptioros (64): 
comp. Awiwy and Awirepos.—Hd. and Dor. xpéoowy for kpeioowv. — Poet. 
BeArepos, BeAtaros (not used in Hm.): péprepos more excellent, pépratos and 
PeptaTos. 


68 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. [255 


2. Kakos bad kaktov KGKLOTOS 
xelpwv (deterior) xXeElptoros 
joooy, 7rrev (inferior) nrora adv. least of all 
3. pixpds small ptkporepos petkporaros 
pei@y 
4. ddtyos little, few (ddeifev inscriptions) dAlyoros fewest 
. Adocoy (€darTov) eXaxtatos least 


5. modus much, many mreiwy or mA€wv (44) — wAeioTos 
neut. wAéov, also mAety 


6. Kxadds beautiful KxadXtov ka\duoros (KdAXos beauty) 
7. pad.os easy pdev paotos 
8. adyewds painful adytoy adyirtos (dAy-os pain) 


295, Defective Comparison.—The following adjectives are without 
the positive : 


(wpo before) mporepos prior TpOTos primus 
vatepos later, latter votaros latest, last 


a. A superlative ending -aros appears in @oyaros extremus; and in the 
(mostly poetic) forms véaros novissimus, last in place (from véos novus), and 
Uraros supremus, summus (from trép super, whence come also a poetic comp. 
bmepTepos, SUP. brépTaros). 


256, For the comparative and superlative may be used paddoy more, 
padtiora most, with the positive: paddAov déos more worthy, padiora 
mapavonos most unlawful. .For participles this is the only mode of 
comparison. 


2. Hm. comp. kardrepos: xepelwv, xeperdtepos, xeupdtepos: also the defect- 
ive forms, D. 8. xépni, A. 8. xépna, N. P. x€pnes, neut. xépna.—Hd. e€oowr for 
OowWY. 

4. Hm. comp. 6Ai wy. 

5. In the comp. Hm. has also the defective forms wages, wAéas.—Hd. con- 
tracts €o to ev: mwAety, mAcdves, for mAgov, TA€oves. 

7. Hm. pos. pntdios (also in Hd.); adv. pnidiws, often peta, fea; comp. 
pnirepos; sup. pytraros and piioros. 

To the above add for Hm. 

9. Kepdiwv, Kepdio'ros (Kepdardos gainful, artful, Képdos gain). 

10. fiylwy, piysrros more, most dreadful (prynads Hes. chilling, pryes cold). 

11. Kndioros (Kndeios dear, Kij5os care). 

12. Poet. (not in Hm.) tWlwy, tyoros (ipnads high, twos height). 


255 D. Doric mparos for zpéros. Hm. sometimes forms a comp. or sup. 
from a substantive: Bacidedttepos, -raros (from BactAeds king), Koupérepos 
(xodpos youth), kivtepos more dog-like (kiwy dog). 

Other defectives in Hm. are: émAdtepos younger, drAdraros,—apaprepos 
(apap forthwith) ;—and several expressing place: zapotrepos (rdpober before), 
—éntoraros (3miaber behind),—éracovtrepos (aoaov nearer),—puxottaros (ev RUXe® 
in a recess)—The ending -aros appears also in wécoaros from peoos middle, 


260] ADVERBS. 69 


FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 


257. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding -ws to 
the stem. ‘The stem takes the same form as before -wy in the 
genitive plural. The adverb has also the accent of the geni- 
tive plural, and is contracted when the latter is contracted. 


Thus Sixaos just (G. P. dixaiwy), adv. dixaiws justly, copds wise 
(copay) copas wisely, mas whole, all (mavrov) mavrws wholly, raxvs 
quick (rayéwv) taxéws quickly, capns clear (capay contr. from cadéwv), 
capes contr. from cadéws clearly. 


258, A less common ending of adverbs is -a: taxts quick, adv. rdxa 
quickly, in Attic prose perhaps, ima at the same time, uddra very, much. The 
comp. of pddAa is waddov (for mad-iov, 66) more, the sup. udAtora most,—ed 
well is used as the adverb of ayadds good. 


259. For the comparative and superlative of adverbs, the 
accusative neuter of the adjective is commonly used ; in the 
singular for the comparative, in the plural for the superla- 
tive: sodas wisely, copwtepov, coputata ; Kados finely, KdAXiov, 
KéAMorTa. 


a. Forms in -ws also occur: BeBatorépws more firmly, kaddidvas more 
Jinely. 


260, Adverbs in -w (such as &vw above, ndtw below, tow within, ew with- 
owt) make the comp. and sup. in -w: dvwrépw, katwrépw. So also arwrépw 
further from prep. ard from, mepautépw further from wépa beyond, eyyvtépw, 
eyyuTdrw (or éyylrepov, éyyttara) from eyyis near, and a few others. 





and miuaros last.—Hm. has tordrios for teraros, and in the same sense devtatos 
(Sevrepos second), A strengthened sup. is Hm. mpérioros first of all. 


258 D, Adverbs in -a are more frequent in Hm.: kdpta very (Kparvs), Alya 
shrilly (Avydbs), oda clearly (ca¢hs), axa quickly (avs). 

For ed, Hm. has é3, whenever the v would be long by position: éd -yvotny. 
So too in compound words: éd(wvos; yet rarely ev-: évmAexTos or edmAEeKTOS. 
—Hm. has also a defective adj. és or jis, A. S. édy or jiv, also G. S. éfjos. 

260 D. éxds far, Hm. éxaorépw, -rétw,—rijAre or THhAov far, Hm. rnAotdrw, 
—ityx or ayxod near, Hm. docoy (for ayxiov, 67), also docorépw, &yx.0Ta 
eile Hd.). The adj. ayxérepos, ayxéraros, and &yxioTos are post- 

omeric. 


fuk | PERSONAL PRONOUNS. [261 


PRONOUNS. 


961. PersonaL PRONOUNS. 





| 
| FIRST PERSON. | SECOND PERSON. THIRD PERSON. 
: ene ter , 
Sing. Nom. | eyo I | ot thou 
Gen. | nod, pod | oot of of him, her, it 
Dat. euot, pot col t 
| Ld ¢ 
Accus. | ewe, pe oe g 
| 
Daal N. A.V. | ‘ve | oho 
G. D. vay | opav 
Plur. Nom. Hyets we dpets you odeis they 
Gen. hpov UpOv opav 
Dat. | pty opty odicr 
Accus. | npas Upais opas 


261 D. Personal Pronouns in the Dialects—Hm. has the following forms: 
those not in ( ) are found also in Hd. 


tas © eye, (eyav) oe, (dyn) 
éuéo, €uev, med oéo, wed (€o), €0 
(dueto, éuddev) (veto, wé0ev) (cio, Eder) 
D. épot, pot gol, Tol, (retv) oi, (E00) 
A. éué, pé oé (€), (€€), aly 
. Dual. (vai, vd) (opoi, cpa) (cpwe) 
(v@iv) (cpoiv) (cpwiv) 
hone nets, (&ppes) Upeis, (tapes) ogpeis not in Hm. 
G. TBE wY, (nuetwy) Uuewr, (uelwv) ohéwy, (opelwv) 
D.  jptv, (Sumer) Deir, (Bus) chict, opt 
A.  typéas, (Hype) duéas, (dupe) opéas, ope 


éyev is used before vowels (87D). The datives cof and rol are distin- 
ruished in the same way as euol and wot (263). The forms with -up-, &umes, 
BMMES, belong to the (Lesbian) Aeolic. 

a. For piv, the Dor. and Trag. have viv: both are enclitic, both used in all 
genders, and viy is sometimes plural—tIn Hd. and Trag. ope is sometimes 
singular.—In Hd. cole: (not opt) is reflexive: he has also a neut. plur. oped, 

pb. The Dor. has N. 8. eyay even before a consonant, Tv (tu) for ov, G. Ted, 
revs, Teovs, D. rol for cot; also euly, viv, Wy for enol, ool, oi, A. Té, enclitic rv, 
for cé. N. P. dues, dpés G. éudov, D. duly, A. Gud, ud, and wé for opé. Of 
these Pind. has only rv, rol, tiv. 


266] PRONOUNS: PERSONAL, INTENSIVE, REFLEXIVE, "71 


962, The stems of the singular are eue- (Lat. me), oe- (te), €- (se). But 
the nominative is differently formed: éy#, oJ; and in the third person is 
entirely wanting. The stems of the dual are vw- (Lat. no-s), opw-. The 
stems of the plural are jue-, vue-, ope-: €- is contracted with most of the 
endings (cf. 261 D). 


963. The forms mentioned in the list of enclitics (113 a) lose their 
accent when there is no emphasis upon the pronoun ; and in the first 
person singular the shorter forms (od, poi, wé) are then used. But if 
the pronoun is emphatic, it retains its accent, and the longer forms 
(€uov, oi, eué) are used in the first person. So also, in general, after 
prepositions. Thus doxei por it seems to me, epoi ov cot TovTo apéoket 
this pleases me, not thee; map énov from me (not mapa pov), émi oot 
upon thee (not emi wou): yet mpos pe to me frequently occurs. 


264, The genitive, dative, and accusative plural of the first and second per- 
sons, when unemphatic, sometimes throw the accent on the first syllable: juwyr, 
vuwv; the last syllable of the dative and accusative is then usually shortened : 
ju, dpas. The last syllable is sometimes shortened, even when the pro- 
noun is emphatic: we then write juiv, vuly. 


INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 


265, The intensive pronoun airdé-s self (Lat. zpse) is inflected 
avTos auTy auto 
QUTOU QAvTHS avTov etc., 
like dyads (222), except that the neuter singular, in the nomi- 
native and accusative, does not take -v. 

Preceded by the article, 6 airés, 7 airy, 76 aird (or with 
crasis, 77 b, avrds, atrtH, raid, also radrov), it signifies the same 
(Lat. tdem). The neut. plur. raird, for 7a aira, must not be 
confounded with ratra these (272). 


a. In the oblique cases, it also serves as a personal pronoun of the 
third person : hum, her, it. 


REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 


266. The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stems of 
the personal pronouns compounded with aires. They have 
no nominative. In the plural both stems are declined together, 
yet the third person plural has also the compound form. 


265 D. For Ionic crasis in witdés (Hm.), witds (Hd.), see 77 D. 


266 D, Hm. always has the separate forms, even in the sing.: éué airdy, 
of abrG, not euavrdy, éavté.—For euavod, etc., Hd. has éuewvrod, ete, ; and in 
like manner cewurod, éwvrod (14 D). 


"2 PRONOUNS: REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL, POSSESSIVE. [267 


Sing. G. 
D. | épavta, -7 
A. | €paurdv, -qv 


myself 


épavTod, -fis 


ourselves 
Hpov avrav 


A. | fpas airots, -ds 


thyself 
TEAUTOV, -7S 
TEAUTOV, -HV 


yourselves 
tpav abtav 


vpas adrots, -as 


himself, herself, itself 
eauTod, -is 

€ ~ ~ 

e ld UA , 
EQUTOV, =HV, <0 


themselves 
EQUTOV 
or ebay aitrav 
Eavrois, -ats 
or odio. airois, -ais 
EAUTOUS, -ds, -d 
or sas airots, -ds 





a. geavrov and éavrov are often contracted: cavrov, cavtns; abroi, 


auTns, etc. 


267. The indefinite pronoun addos other (Lat. alius) is in- 


flected like airds (265): dAXos, GAAy, GAXo. 


RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 


268. The reciprocal pronoun, meaning each other, is used 
only in the oblique cases of the dual and plural. 


Dual G. D. 
A. 


Plur. G. 


D. 
A. 


M. F. 
&AAHAOW GAAHAGLY 
dARL@ &AAAAG 
aGhAnrAov é&AAHAOV 
aAAHAOLS GAAHAGLS 
&AAHAOVS e&AANAGs 


N. 
GAAHAOW 
GAARA 
&AARA@V 
G&AAHAOts 
&AAnAG 


a. It is formed from the stem of &AAos (267), compounded with itself, 
&AA-nAo- (for adAA-aAAo-). 


PossEssIVE PRONOUNS. 


269. The possessive pronouns are formed from the stems 
of the personal pronouns. 


> , b] , 
Estos Ef 
cos on ody 
Ld td e/ 

és 7 Ov 


euoy my, Mine. 
thy, thine. 
his (her, its) own. 


They are : 


NLETEPOS 
UpeTepos 


opérepos -a -ov 


-a -ov our, ours. 
-a4 -ov your, yours. 
their own. 


a. és is never used in Attic prose, seldom in Attic poetry. 


Sg ee geen lag te hn erage eee ce tt ee 
269 D. Hm. has also reds (also Doric, = twus) thy, éds his ; duds our (prop- 
erly Dor.), duds, sds; also (from the dual stems vw-, opw-) vwtTEpos, TPwtTEpOS. 


yatta ale 


7 


272] ARTICLE AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. %3 


ARTICLE AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 


270. The article 6, 7, ro the, has the two stems o- and ro-. 
For its inflection see 272. 


271, The most important demonstrative pronouns are : 
bbe nO€ rode _ this (here) 


oUTOS ‘airy roto this, that 
> ad > , > lal 
€Kelvos €KElYN  EKELVO that (there, yonder) 


ode is formed from the article and the demonstrative ending -de¢ 
(enclitic) : it is declined like the article, with -de added to each 
form. 

obros follows the article in respect to the / or ¢ at the beginning. 
It takes av in the penult, wherever the last syllable has an a-sound 
(a, n) ; but ov where it has an o-sound (0, , ov). 

exeivos is declined like atrés (265). 











272, 

S.N.|} 6 rd | de HS 768 ovTos a’Tn TovTo 
G.| Tov Tis tod | Totde Tijode Totde | ToUTOV TaiTNS ToviTOU 
D.| ta tH + TH | THdE THde TwdE ToUTW TaiTy ToiTw 
A.| tov thy tO | révde THVde Tdde tovTov taitTyy TodTro 

Dual.| TO TH TH | THdE ThdEe THDdE toiTwa Toiltw TotiTw 

tov Toiv toiv| toivde roitvde roivde | tovrow totTrow ToiTow 

r. of at ta | ofS alde rade OvTOL auTaL Taira 


Tots Tats Tois | rotode traicde rotode | rovrois traiTrais Tovrous 


N 
G.| tav Trav Tdv | rave Tdvd8e TdvSe | TOITWY TOtTwY ToOiTAV 
D 
A.| tots tas ta | trotcde tarde Trade TovTous TaUTas TatTa 


a. Separate feminine forms for the dual, ra raiv, rade raivde, ravra 
Tavray, are rare, and perhaps not Attic. 

b. When used as demonstrative, 6, 7, oi, ai are best written with an 
accent, 6, 7], ot, at. 
“ c. The adverb of é8¢ is be, that of odros is ovrws or olTw (88 C), 
thus, 80. 


belonging to us (you) both.—ayds (also written duds) is found in Attic poetry 
for é€uds.—ds is sometimes used without reference to the third person, in the 
sense of own. 

271 D. For éxetvos the poets have xeivos. 


272 D. In Hm., the article is usually a demonstrative, and has the follow- 
ing peculiar forms : G. 8. toto, G. D. D. rotiv, N. P. roi, tal, G. Fem, rawy, 


4 PRONOUNS: DEMONSTRATIVE, RELATIVE. [278 


273,.—Demonstratives of Quantity, Quality, and Age.—These were 
TOGOS, Totos, THALKos, Which occur often in poetry. In place of them 
the Attic prose uses chiefly the strengthened forms : 


roo 0a de TOTHOE Too OvdeE so much, so many 
Totog Oe Toudoe TOLOVdE such (in quality) 
THALKOG OE THALKTOE Tndtkdvde _—-80 old, so great 
TOTOUTOS TOTaUTN TogovTo(y) 80 much, so many 
TOLOUTOS ToLaUTN TotovTo(v) such (in quality) 


THAtKoUTOS = THALKaUTN _—THALKOUTO(Y) 80 Old, so great 


The last three are declined like otros; but the neuter singular, in 
the nominative and accusative, has two forms, with and without -y: 
TocovTo and Togovrory, etc. 


274, The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes rendered more 
emphatic by appending to the different forms a long accented -z, iota 
paragogicum, before which the short vowels (a, e, 0) are elided : 
ovtoct, avtTnt, TouvTt, Tavtt, dot, rowdt, éxewavt. The particle yé is 
sometimes put between : rouroyt. 


RELATIVE PRONOUN. 


215, The relative pronoun is és, 7, 6 who, which. 


SN. és DNaAy &o& 6) Pow Bee 
G. ov ys ov G.D. ofv ow otv G. ov ov av 
Do qf @ D. ois ais ois 
A. S& Hv & A. ots as & 


a. Separate feminine dual forms, a and atv, are seldom or never 
used in Attic. 


b. és is used as a demonstrative in the phrases kai 6s én and he said, 


7 © 6s said he. In the plural we have xai ot and they; in which of 
may be taken as the article (272 b). 





D. rotot, Tho, or THs. For totode Hm. rarely has rotodeoo: or roicdeot. The 
forms rol, taf are also Doric. 
Hd. has D. P. roto., riict; also roide, ryolde. 


273 D. Hm. has réooos for técos (47 D). 


275 D, Hm. has also 6 for 8s; dov, properly written 60, for ob; €ns for 
js: the nom. sing. and plural he sometimes uses as demonstrative. 

Hd. has 8s, %, of, af: for all other forms of the relative he uses the article 
+6, Tod, THs, etc., except after certain prepositions: wap’ 6, é& of. —This use of 
the article (r-forms) for the relative is often found in Hm., and sometimes 
even in Tragedy. | 


249] INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. '%5 


276, Relatives corresponding to the demonstratives in 273 are daos 
as much as, oios of which sort, nriKos of which age. 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 


277. The interrogative pronoun is ris, ti who? which? 
The same word when enclitic is the indefinite pronoun, some, 
any. 


INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. 
M. F. N. M.. F. N. 
Sing. Nom. tls vl tis Tl 
Gen. tlyvos, Tod TivdS, TOD 
Dat. Tivi, TH vil, TH 
Acc. tiva rf TWa 7) 
Dual N. A. V. Tive Tie 
G. D. tivo TLWOtV 
Plur. Nom. aTlves rive TES TWO 
Gen. tTlyov TWOV 
Dat. Tio fio 
Ace. rlyvas tive TWas TWe 


a. The acute accent of ris, ri interrogative never changes to the 
grave (see 108). 


b. &rra (never enclitic, Hm. aooa) is sometimes used for the indefinite 
Tivd. 


278, Other interrogative pronouns are wérepos which of two? mécos 
how much? motos of what sort? mndixos how old or large? wérepos and 
(with different accent) woads, mous are also indefinite. 


279, Another indefinite pronoun is Seva so and so, what's his name, used 
in colloquial speech, always with preceding article: 6 (4, 7d) Setva. This is 
sometimes used without inflection; sometimes it is inflected as follows, with- 
out distinction of gender: 





Sing. N. 6 detva Plur. N. of deives 
G: Tov Setvos G. Tay Selvov 
D. 76 Set 
A. toy Setva A. tovs Setvas 





276 D. Hm. has often éacos for 00s (47 D); once écadruos. 
277 D, The Ion. (Hm. Hd.) has G. 8. réo, red, D. réw, G. P. réwv, D. réoror. 


278 D. Hd. has «- for z- in the interrogatives and indefinites : xérepos, kdaos, 
kotos; so the adverbs «od, «dre, etc. Cf. Lat. gu- in quis, quot, qualis, ete. 


%6 INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [280 


INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRoNoUN. 


280. The indefinite relative doris, yrs, 6 re whoever, which- 
ever, 1s formed by uniting the relative os with the indefinite 
vis, each being separately declined. 





M. F, N. 
Sing. Nom. doris irs & tT 
Gen. outivos, Stov jorwos ovtwos, Srov 
Dat. gti, Stw qT. wTivi, &rw 
Acc. SyTiwa HvTiwa & tT 
Dual N. A. Vv. OTe OTe OTE 
GD. oivTivow oivTivow oivTivoLy 
Plur. Nom. olTives alruves arwa 
Gen. avtwav, Stev @YTWeV avtwey, Srav 
Dat. ototiot, Strous aioriot otorict, Stous 
Ace. ovoTivas ao-Tivas dirwa 








a. The shorter forms 6 Grou, étm, drwy, Gros are invariably used in 
the older Attic, and drov, 6rm are at all times much more common 
than ovr wos, OTL. 


b. For Griva, there is another form &rra, not to be confounded with &rra 
= tivd (277 b). 


281, Other indefinite relatives (cf. 278) are 6-morepos whichever (of 
two), 6-mdcos however much, 6-motos of whatever sort, 6-mnXixos of what- 
ever age or size. 


CORRELATION OF PRONOUNS. 


282. The following table shows the correspondence, in form and 
meaning, of the last four classes of pronouns: 


280 D. Hm. has the following peculiar forms, in most of which the rela- 
tive stem is undeclined, as it is in 6-mécos, 6-motos, etc (281). 


S. (arts N. (6 tr P. N. aooa 
orev (OTTE0, OTTEV) OTEwY 
OT EW 6Té0e8 
(8Tiva) N. (6 rr (8Tuvas) N. &ooa 


The forms not in ( ) occur also in Hd.—In the nominative and accusative, 
Hm. has also the usual forms. 


281 D. Hm. often doubles 7 in the indefinite relatives: émmérepos, émmotos ; 
and in adverbs érmws, éamére, etc. (47 D). 
Hd. has 6xdrepos, 6xdcos, etc.; and in adverbs Sou, dxd0ev, etc. Cf. 278 D. 





283] 
INTERROGATIVE. 
Simpl tls who ? 
mpl | which? what? 
Compar- | wérepos 
ative | which of two? 
Quantity | récos how 
or much, many ? 
Number 
motos of 
Quality | what sort? 
Age | mnAlxos 
or how old ? 
Size | how large? 


INDEFINITE. 
Tbs 
some 


mT Epos 
one of two 





moods of 
some quan. 
or number 


mods of: 


some sort 


analkos 
of some 
age, size 


65e this (here), 


CORRELATION OF PRONOUNS. 


DEMONSTRATIVE, 


outos this, that 


etepos the one or 


the other of two 


(ré00s) sO 
toadade < much, 
ToaouTos \ many 
(rotos) such 
Toidade 

TOLOUTOS 

(rnAtkos) § so old, 
tnarucdade ( large 
TNALKOUTOS 








TT 





RELATIVE, INDEF. REL. 


oe od4 
bs, batts 
who, which 


éméT Epos 
which of two 


daos, drécos of 
which quan., num., 
(as much, many) as 





olos, dtrotos 
of which sort 
(such) as 


natkos, émnaAlkos 
of which age, size, 
(as old, large) as 


283. CorRELATIVE ADVERBS are also formed from the same pro- 


noun-stems. 





INTERROGATIVE. 


TOU 
where 2 


wédev 


Place 
whence ? 


Woe 
whither ? 


nOTE 

when ? 
Time 

anvika at 

what time ? 


INDEFINITE. 





tA 
TGU 
somewhere 


mobey from 
some place 


tot to 
some place 


Tore some 
lime, ever 


DEMONSTRATIVE. 


(€v0a) évOdde, 


evyTavda, there 


(ev) evbevie, 


evrevdev, thence 


(€vOa) évOdde, 


eytavda, thither 


TéTE 

then 

(rnvira) at 
Tyvikdde < that 
Thvikavta \ time 


REL., INDEF. REL. 
00, O7rov 
where 


S0ev, dmd0ev 
whence 


= 
ol, O7roL 
whither 


oa c 
Ore, 6mdTe 
when 


Cay ec - 
WULKQ, OTTNVLKA 
at which time 


i ree | SY 


wh which 
way? how ? 


my some way, 


somehow 


THE, TAVTN 
this way, thus 


which way, as 


_— Oe SSeS CSS 


TOs 
somehow 


(ds) @be, o¥Tw(s) 


thus, so 





i4 a 
@s, Orws 
as, that 


78 NUMERALS. : [284 


The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (118 b). 


_ a. To the pronoun eékeivos that (yonder), correspond the demonstra- 
tive adverbs of place, éxei there, éxeiOev thence, éxeioe thither. 





284, The demonstratives in parentheses are not used in Attic 
prose except in particular phrases: kal ds even thus, od8 ds, pnd ds 
not even thus; &vOa pév... evOa Sé here... there; so &vbev pév... 
evOev Sé.—In Attic prose, évOa and évev are chiefly relative, fvba being 


used instead of ot and oi, évOey instead of dev. 


285, The indefinite relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are made 
more indefinite by adding the particles ody, dn, 5) more, 54 wor ovv: 
éatis ovy who (which, what) soever, davis dy, Saris 59 wore, Sores dh Tor 
ovv: these are also written as single words, écrucodp, 6aTia bn, oaTie- 
Ontote, daticOnmorovy. With the same force, ris is sometimes added to 
indefinite relatives: dzoids tis and even drroids tis ody of what sort soever. 


286, The enclitic mép gives emphasis to relatives (definite and in- 
definite): vou wep of which number precisely, damep just as. obv is 
sometimes added after it: aamepodr. 


287. Observe also the negative pronouns and adverbs: ots, pyTes 
no one (poet. for ovdeis, undeis, 290 a; in prose only ovri, pyre not at 
all), ovdérepos, pndérepos neither of two, ovdSapyor, pydapod nowhere, 
ovdaun, pndapn im no way, oidapas, pyndapdas in no manner, with some 
others of similar formation. 


NUMERALS. 


288, The words which express number are of various classes; 
the most important are given in the following table: 





288 D. Poetic are 17é0:—= ov, woOi = ov, 60:00; Td there; rdé6er 
thence ;—also jjuos, Tijuos (Dor, duos, Tauos) = bre, TOTe.—For Att. ews as long 
as, tTéws so long, Hm. has also eiws, reiws, and sometimes eios, refos. In the 
same sense, he has Udpa, rédpa. Beside 7, he has the form 4x, but uses 
both only in the local meaning, which way, where: for of, d7at, he always uses 
néae, 6rrdae.—For evOaira, évOedrev in Hd., see 74 D. 

a. For éxe?, ete., the poets use ret61, Ketdev, xetoe (271 D). 

284 D, The demonstrative és (distinguished by its accent from the rela- 
tive &s as, 120) is frequent in Epic poetry: it is sometimes written @:. The 
poets have also rés = o¥Tws. : 

288 D. For the first four cardinal numbers, see 290 D. 

Hm. has for 12, dédexa, Suddexa, and Svoratdena; 20, etkoor and éelxoor; 
30, Tpinkovra; 80, dyddxovra; 90, évevqkovTa and evynkovta; 200 and 300, 
Sinxdorot, Tprnkdaior; 9,000 and 10,000, érvedxiror, dexaxirotr. He has also the 
ordinals 8d, rpiraros ; 4th, rérparos; 7th, €Bdduaros ; 8th, oySdaros; 9th, etvaros; — 
12th, duwdéxaros; 20th, éexxoards; together with the Attic form of each. 























288] NUMERALS. 19 
CARDINAL NUMBERS. ORDINAL. NUM. ADVERBS, 
1 a’ | ets, pla, ev one Tpatos first ama& once 
2| £B | dvo devrepos dis 
3 y | Tpets, Tpia Tpiros Tpis 
4 & | tréooapes, téooapa | TéTapTos TETPAKLS 
5 e | mwévTe TELTTOS TEVTAKLS 
6 o | e€& EKTOS EEAKLS 
7 C | énra €Sdomos EMTAKLS 
8 | OKT@ oyOoos OKTAKLS 
9 O | evvéa e€varos EVAKLS 
10 u | déka O€xaros OeKAaKLs 
11 | «ta | evdexa évdéxaros EVOEKAKLS 
12 | 18’ | dadexa Owd€éxaTos Ow@dekdkis 
13 | ty -| tpevoxaidexa TpLoKALOEKATOS 
14 | WW | reccapeckaidexa | TEcoapakadéxaros 
15 ve | WevTeKaideka MTEVT EKALOEKATOS 
16 tc’ | €xxaidexa EKKQLOEKATOS 
17 | i’ | éwraxaidexa ETTAKALOEKATOS 
18 | uw | éxr@xaidexa GKT@KALOEKATOS 
19 | if | éveaxaidexa EVVEAKALOEKATOS 
20 K | etkoot(v) elKOOTOS elKOO-GKLS 
30 N | tpidkovra TplaKooTos TPLaKOVTAKLS 
40 pe | Tecoapaxovra TET oO apakoOTOS TET TApPaKovTAaKts 
50 y | wevTnkovra TEVTNKOOTOS TT €EVTNKOVTAKLS 
60 | & | é&nxovra éEnKOOTOS €&NKOVTAKLS 
70 | o° | €BdounKovta é3d5opunkoorTos €BSounKovrakis 
80 mw | dySonxovra oyoonkoaT os oyOonkovTakis 
90 G’ | eveyvnxovra EVEVNKOOTOS EVEVNKOVTAKLS 
100 p | €xarov EKATOOTOS EKATOVTAKLS 
300 a | dudkdcrot, -at, -a OtdKoo Log Tos OudKoowdKes 
000 T | TptaKdotot, -al, -a | TptdKooiocTos 
400 v TETPAKOG LOL, -At, -a | TeTPAKOGLOGTOS 
500 | pb | mevraxdorot, -at, -a | wevraxocioaTds 
600 | x’ | é€axdcro1, -at,-a | é€Eaxoovoards 
700 | wW' | émraxdotot, -at, -a | émtakootocrés 
800 | @ | OKTakdctoL, -at, -a | OKTAaKOGLOGTOS 
900 | DY | éevaxodcror, -at, -a EVAKOT LOGO TOS 
1,000 a | xtAvo1, -au, -a xthioeros xtAcaks 
2,000 B | Staxtrcot, -at, -a | SurxtAroaTds 
3,000 Yy | TptoxtALol, -at, -a | TpLTXtALogTds 
10,000. it | pupsot, -at, -a puptooros pupeakis 








Hd. has duddexa (Suwdéxaros), tprhkovra (tpinxorrds), dySéxovra, Sinxdoros 
(Sinkortocrds), tpryxdotor: for @varos he has eZvaros, and so eivdxis, eivaxdorot, 
elvakioXLALOL. 

Dor. eixati for etkoot.—Aecol. wéure for révre, cf. the ordinal wéurres. 


80 NUMERALS. [289 


289, Noration.—The letters from a’ to 6 denote units 1—9, ¢’ (for 
former f, vau) being inserted after e’ for the number 6. Those from 
«© to mw denote tens 10—80, G’ (koppa) being added after zm’ for 90. 
Those from p’ to w’ denote hundreds 100—800, D (sampi) being added 
for 900. For the thousands (1,000—900,000), the same characters are 
used again, but with the stroke under the letter. Thus Brpd’= 2344, 
jawvd’ = 1859. 

a. Sampi, like vaw and koppa (7), was a letter of the primitive Greek 
alphabet, which became obsolete except as a numeral sign. 

b. The letters of the alphabet are sometimes used in unbroken succession 
to denote the series of numbers from 1 to 24. Thus ¢ is used for 21, being 
the 21st letter of the alphabet. The books of the Iliad and Odyssey are 
numbered in this way. 


290. The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declinable: 


one two three four 
ets pla N. A. 800 Tpets Tela TET TOES Técoapa 
évds pas evos | G. D. Svotv TPLOV TET TO APWY 
eve ua ev tprot TéecoApoL 
tva play év TpEis Tela, Técoapas Téroapa 


a. Like eis, are declined ovdeis, ovdepia, ovdév, and pndeis, no one: 
these are found also in the plural. They may be written in two words 
for emphasis: ovdé eis not a soul; and dy or a preposition may be in- 
terposed: pnd ay eis, ovd€ map Evds. 

b. With a plural noun dvo is sometimes used without inflection. 
~The forms dveiy and dvai belong to late Greek. 

c. For oo in réocoapes and all its forms, rr is also used (48). 

d. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 199 are indeclinable. Those 
from 200 on, and all the ordinals, are regular adjectives of three 
endings. 


* 291, a. For 13 rpickaidexa also occurs. For the ordinals 18th—-19th 
separate forms are also found: rpiros kat d€ékaros, etc. 
b. For the union of 20, 30, etc., with units there are three forms: 


Cardinal. Ordinal. 
qwévTe Kal ELKOOL TéuTTOS Kat eiKOOTOS 
ElkOGL Kal TéVTE e(KOOTOS Kal Téu“TTOS 
ElKOOL TEVTE qwévte Kal eikooTOs 


Cf. r@ évi kal tpidxooT@ eres (uno et tricesimo anno). 


290 D. 1. Hm. has also fem. Za, ifs, if, tay, with D. 8. neut. ig. 

2. Hm. has d%0 and ddw, both indeclinable; also Du. dod, Pl. Sort, -ab, 
-d, D. do.tc1, A. So.0ds, -as, -d.—Hd. with dvo, dvotv, has G. P. duay, D. dvoter; 
also 6vo indeclinable. 

4. Hm. with réooapes has atlovpes (Aecol.).—Hd. tésoepes (so 14 Teage- 
peoxatdexa sometimes indeclinable, and 40 reocepdxovta).—Dor. réropes, D. 
TET pact. 7 

a. Of ovdels, undels, Hm. has only obd€v, under, ovdert. 


297] NUMERALS. 81 


292. The numbers 18, 19 are commonly expressed by évds (or dvoiv) 
Séovres elkoor twenty wanting one or two. So 28, 29, 38, 39, etc. ; vavol 


pias Seovoas mevrnxovra with 49 ships. So too the ordinals: dvoiy 


Oéoyte TpidxoaT@ eret in the 28th year. 


293, Examples of fractional expressions are: jjuirus (229 a) 43 quirddAavrov 
half a talent ;—fyidrAos 14; tTpla nurtddravra 14 talents ; rpitov jurtdrdavtov 24 
talents ;—rpitnpdptoy 4, Teraptnudpiov + ;—émitpitos 14 ;—ra& Bto pépn (duae 
partes) %; Ta Tpla wépn 2; Tay wévTE ai dvO potpa F. 


994, To the ordinal class belong roAdoords (many-cth, following many in 
a series) and the interrogative moords (how-many-eth, having what place in a 
series ?), with a corresponding indefinite relative éréo7os. 


295. From the numeral stems are formed several other classes of 
numeral words: 

a. Distributives, with avy: civdvo two together, two by two, ete. 

b. Multiplicatives, in -wAods (from -mAoos, Lat. -plex): amAovs simple, Simdods 
twofold, tpimrovs threefold, mevtamadovs fivefold, etc., moAAamAods manifold, 
Also dicods double, rpicods treble. 

_ Further, multiplicatives in -rAdowos: SimAaowos twice as much (8s toaotTes), 
tpimadotos three times as much, etc., roAAaTAdT1os many times as much, 

e. Adverbs of Division: povaxn (udvos alone) in one part, single, dixa or 
dixn in two parts, tpixn in three parts, etc., roAAaxh in many ways, TayTAaXh 
every way. 

d. Abstract Nouns of Number, in -ds: povds (uovad-os) the number one, unity, 
duds the number two, tpids, TeTpas, Teumds, Ekds, EBIouds, dydods, évveds, Sexds, 
eixds, ExaToyTdas, xiAtds, mupias: hence Tpels pipiddes = 30,000. 


296. Closely connected with numerals are such gencral expres- 
sions as 
éxarepos (with comparative ending) ezther (of two), 
éxaoros (with superlative ending) each (of any number), 
aude, G. D. apdou, both (Lat. ambo), for which ayddrepot, -at, -a 
is commonly used. 


297. Observe also the adverbs in -dxis, moAAdKis, many times, often, 
ExacTaKis cach time, rorautd«is so often, édcdnis as often as, mAeoTdKis very 
often, drvyanis seldom. 





295 D. b. Hd. d:tés, tpitds, for dioods, tpiogds ; also SimAhotos, TpirAHotos, 
etc., as if for -rAaouos. 

ce. Hm. has dixa and 8:x6d, tplxa and rpix6d, Tetpaxda; also rpimAf, 
TETpATAT. 

297 D, Adverbs in -dxts sometimes lose -s in poetry: éood«: Hm., see 
88 D. 


82 VERBS. MODES AND TENSES. [298 


VERBS. 


298, Voicrs.—The Greek verb has three voices, active, 
middle, and passive. 

a. Many verbs are used only in the active voice: and, on the other 
hand, many verbs—called deponent—are never used in the active, but 
only in the middle voice (or middle and passive). 


299. Moprs.—Each voice has six modes : 
the indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative ; 
the infinitive, and participle. 
a. The first four modes are called jinite modes. In their inflection 
they distinguish three nwmbers, singular, dual, and plural; and three 
persons, first, second, and third. 


b. The znfinetive and participle are essentially nouns, the infinitive being 
an indeclinable substantive, the participle an adjective of three endings; yet 
they both have some of the properties of the verb. 


c. The verbal adjectives in -rdés and -réos are like particu=s, though less 
clearly distinguished from ordinary adjectives. 


800. TensEs.—The tenses of the indicative mode are seven : 
the present, and imperfect (for continued action) ; 
the aorist, and future (for indefinite action) ; 
the pe feet , pluperfect, and future perfect (for completed 
action). 


The tenses of the other modes are three: 
the present (for continued action) ; 
the aorist (for indefinite action) ; 
the perfect (for completed action). 


The optative, infinitive, and participle have also the future 
and future perfect. 


301. The tenses of the indicative are also distinguished as 
1. Principal tenses: the present, future, perfect, and 
Suture perfect ; which express present or future time ; 
2. Past tenses: the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect ; 
which express past time. 


302, a. The passive voice has a distinct form only for the 
aorist and future. In the other tenses, the mddle form has 
both a middle and a passive meaning. 

b. The active has no future perfect (yet see 467). 


800 D, The future and future perfect optatives are never found in Hm, 


808] SYSTEMS. STEMS. THEMES. 83 


303, Trensre-Sysrems.—The different forms of the verb are 
divided-into the following systems of tenses : 


the present system including the Present and Lmperfect. 
the future system “ Future Active and Middle. 

the first aorist system “ Ist Aorist Active and Middle. 
the second aorist system “ 2d Aorist Active and Middle. 
the first perfect system “ Ist Perf. and 1st Plup. Act. 
the second perfect system “ 2d Perf. and 2d Plup. Act. 

the perfect middle system “ Perf., Plup.,and Lut. Perf. Mid. 
the first passive system ‘ Ist Aor. and Ist Jit. Pass. 
the second passive system “ 2d Aor. and 2d fut. Pass. 


2 >t Gr Se ae ee 


804, a. The tenses called second differ from the corresponding jirst 
tenses in form, but have like meaning. Very few verbs have both the 
Jirst and second form of the same tense. 

b. Most verbs, therefore, have only siz of the above systems. Many 
have less than six; and hardly any verb is used in all nine systems. 

ce. The ‘principal parts’ of a verb are the first person singular 
indicative of every system used init. Thus: 


hia, vow, ¢Adaa, AéAvKa, AéEAVpaL, EAVOyy (See 313). 


305, Strems.—Each tense-system has a separate stem, called 
a tensé-stem. 

a. The passive, perfect, and perfect middle systems have, besides 
the principal tense-stems, secondary tense-stems, for the future passive, 
the pluperfect, and the future perfect. 

b. Each subjunctive and optative has furthermore a stem of its 
own (mode-stem) derived from its proper tense-stem. 


306. Inrrucrion.—The forms of the verb are made by 
adding to its different stems certain endings (875-382) which, 
in the finite modes, mark the persons and numbers. Cf. 299 a. 


307. THemEs and Roots.—The various tense-stems of a 
verb are made from a common theme (sometimes called the 
verb-stem). ‘This may be either a root (543), or a longer 
formation consisting of a root with a derivative suffix added. 
Thus t- (present tiv honor) is a root ; tiwa- (present tiudw) 
is a longer theme. 


a. The longer themes are mostly noun-stems, slightly modified. They 
have two or more syllables, whereas roots are almost always of one syllable. 


308. Primitive AND DENOMINATIVE VEeRBs.—A Primitive verb 
forms its tense-stems from a root; a Denominative verb from a longer 
theme, originally a noun-stem. 


84. VARIABLE VOWEL. MI-FORM. [309 


Thus the primitive verbs Ave loose and rie honor are from the roots 
Av- and ri-; the denominative verbs @itéw love and ripaw honor are 
from the themes ¢dude-, tipa-, which are the stems dudo-, ripa- of the 
nouns didos dear and ripn honor, slightly modified. 

a. The following practical rule will generally serve to distinguish 
the two kinds of verbs. Primitive are verbs in -yz (811 c), and verbs 
in -w of two syllables in the present indicative active, as Aéyo speak 


(or three syllables in the middle, as payopa: jight, deponent). Others 
are denominative. 


309. Verbs are named mute-verbs, liguid-verbs, vowel-verbs, 
etc., according as their themes end in a mute, a liquid, a 
vowel, ete. 


310, VARIABLE VoweEt.—The final vowel of a tense-stem 
is sald to be variable when it is -o- in some of the forms and 
-e- in others. Thus Avo-pev we loose but Ave-re you loose. The 
sign for the variable vowel is -°c-. 


Thus \v°|-- means that the stem is sometimes \vo- and sometimes 
oe-. It may be read ‘Avo- or Nve-’. | 


a. The subjunctive has also a long variable vowel, -®|,-. 


811, Tue Mi-rorm.—There are two slightly different ways 
of inflecting tense-stems, called the common form of inflec- 
tion, and the pu-form. See 383 and 385. 

The Present and Second Aorist systems are inflected 
according. to the pi-form when the tense-stem does not end 
in a variable vowel. 


a. Otherwise they follow the common form. The rest of the 
tenses follow, some the one form, some the other. 


b. The pi-form is thus called, because when the present indicative 
active is so inflected, its first person singular ends in -p.. 


c. Verbs whose .present system has the pi-form are called ‘verbs 
in -4’; and those whose present system has the common form, ‘verbs 
in -.’ But it must be remembered that these designations refer only 
to the present system. 


312, In the following synopsis of the verb Av loose, the meanings 
of the indicative, infinitive, and participle are given for the active 
voice. The subjunctive and optative cannot be adequately rendered 
by any single English expressions: their various meanings must be 
learned from the Syntax. Meanwhile the following may serve as ex- 
amples: Subj. (eav) Av@ (7f) I loose ; Opt. (ei) Avoupe (77) L should loose. 

The meanings of the passtve may be inferred from those of the 
active: thus Avoyae I am loosed, etc. The middle of Av means to 
loose for one’s self (deliver, ransom): 80 Avopa I loose for myself, and 
so on. 


85 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS, 


313] 


313, 


Synopsis of the Verb Xiv-w loose. 





AORIST. 


trvora J loosed 
AVo-w 

Avorayie 

Adoov loose 

Ado-ar Zo loose 
hicas having loosed 


PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT, 


hédvKa LT have loosed 
éhedixy J had loosed 

heAdKo 

AeAVKOULL 


AcAvKévat to have loosed 
AeduKads having loosed 


—_—_—_—_—_— | OC rrr ne, | ee" 


VOICE. | MODE,| PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. FUTURE. 
Ind. | Avw J loose (or am loosing) | Wow J shall loose 
&vov I was loosing 

Sub. | Avo 

Active. | Opt. | Avouse Avoroune 
Imv. | Ate loose 
Inf. | Avew zo loose Avorewv to be about to loose 
Par. | Avowv loosing Avowv about to loose 
Ind. | Avopar J loose for myself | AWoropar 

eLvdpnyv 

Sub. | Avapar 

Middle. | Opt. | Avotunv Avoroluny 
Imv, | Avov 
Inf. | Aver Oar Avoreo Bar 
Par. | Avopevos Avo-dpevos 
Ind. AvdHocopat J shall be loosed 
Sub. | 

Passive, | OPt. like the middle pence? 
Imv. 
Inf. AvOjoer Bar 
Par. AvOynodpevos 





Fut. Perf. Pass. Ind. AeAvoropat (J shall have been loosed), Opt. NeAvooipny, Inf. NeAtoreo Oar, Par. NeAvo-dpevos. 


evo apy 
AVowpar 
Atoalyny 
Adora 
Avoac bat 
AVE-GpEVOS 


EAVOnY J was loosed 
Av0d 

Avdelny 

ALOyTe 

AvOFvar 

Av9els 


Verbal Adjectives: Avtds loosed or looseable, Nuréos (requiring) to be loosed. 





héAvpar 
eLeAtpny 

Aedupévos @ 

AeAvpévos elny 

éAvoro 

Aedvo- Bar 

AeAvLevos 


like the middle 






































86 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [314 
314, 
an Present System. 
loose 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
| Present. | Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
S. 1 | Ato &to-v Avo-paw é-hid-pyv 
2 | Aves ¢-NvE-$ é-AVov 
3 | Aver é-ie Ave-Tar é-\ve-To 
Indica- | D. 2 | Ave-rov é-\ve-TOV | Ave-o- Pov é-Ave-o- Boy 
tive, 3 | Ave-rov é-Avé-ryy Aue-o- ov é-vé-o Inv 
P. 1 | Avo-pev é-Avo-pev | hud-pe8a é-vo-peba 
2 | Nve-Te é-NveE-TeE Ave-o Bc é-L ve-o-9e 
3 | Avover ¢-Av0-v Avo-vrar é-\Vo-vTO 
Present. Present. 
Bit AV Vo-pouw 
yy) Avy-S hog 
3 vy Avy-TaL 
Z a p,.2 Auy-Tov vyn-o8ov 
junc- : 
3 vy-Tov Avy-o Fv 
tive. : —2 
eA AVw-pev Avd-je8a, 
2 Avy-TE vn-o Ge 
3 voor Avow-vrar 
“ae | Avow-pL Avol-pyv 
2 Avoi-s AWat-o 
3 Avou AVoL-TO 
Opta- | D. 2 Avou-Tov Aiou-oVov 
tive. 3 Avol-ryv Avol-cdnv 
Bet Avot-pev Avof-ye0a 
2 Avou-TeE Avou-o-Be 
8 Avowe-v AvVoOL-vTO 
S. 2 de vou 
5 AVE-Tw Avé-o ba 
Bes D. 2 AveE-Tov ve-cOov 
P é 3 Avé-TeV AvE-o Gav 
ative. A * 
| Bee Awe-re Ave-o Oe 
3 Avd-vTev Avé-c Pov 
or Avée-TwWOAV or Avée-cbwoay 
Infinitive. Ave Ave-o Bar 
Participle. AVwv, -ovca, -OV | vU6-pEvo-s, -7, “OV 











316] 
Future System. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Future. 
AVow hdoo-par 
Avoes Avore 
AVoret Avore-TaAL 
AVOE-TOV Avoe-o Dov 
Avoe-TOoV Avoe-c9ov 
AVoo-pev vo-d-e8 
AvCE-TE Avore-o Fe 
Avoover AUoo-vrat 
Atooupe Lvooluynv 
AVoroLs | AVorovo 
AVooL AvoouTo 
Avoourov Avoourbov 
Lucotrnyv Avooic bn 
Avorounev Averoipeda 
Avooure Avooir Pe 
AVorovev AUooLrTo 
Avorey Avorer Bar 


AUcav, -oved ) “Ov 


icdpevos, -y, -ov | AdoGs,-cEra,-wav) Avrdpevos,- q, -ov 


Pe 


ss | 
PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 





316. 


First Aorist System. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


First Aorist. 


t-dioa 
e-Avoa-S 
é-Avore 

s of. 
é-\vca-Tov 
> - ¢ 
é-Avod-Tyy 
€-AUTO-[LEV 
é-Avora-Te 
é-Avoa-y 








Areas, Avoaus 
Avorere, Adora 
Atoaroy 
Atoatryy 
Licoayev 
AUoare 
AtTeay, AdootEv 


Adoov 
Averarea 
AUorarTor 
AVTATeY 
Ntcrare 
Avoravroy 

or Adoerwcay 


Adora 








ee ee 


S td 
e-hvoa-pyv 
€-LtCw 

> ~£ 
€-LUTU-TO 
é-Ldora-cbov 
é-Atoa-cOynv 
é-dod-e0a 
éAvoa-cbe 
é-ALtoa-vTo 


Licopar 
ion 
hvoynTat 
hvoyno ov 
Avono bor 
Avoca 
Avoyo be 


AVoovrat 





Atoaluny 
| Avoao 
AvoaiTo 

AvoatoBov 
| AvoaloBny 
Avoalyeda, 
AtoaroVe 
AVoavTo 








Adora 
hioaoOn 
AVoac bey 
Avo dacbwv’ 
Atoar8e 
Avedo8ov 

or Avodcbwoay 


Nicaciar 


88 : PARADIGMS OF VERBS. * foe 


$17. 
rue First Perfect System. 
loose 
ACTIVE. 
Ist Perfect. | 1st Pluperfect. 
+S. 1 | Nuke é-heXUKN, -€ELY 
2 | MAvKa-sS E-AEAUKY-S, “ELS 
o 3 | N€XvKE €-LeAVKEL 
2 |D. 2 NeAUKA-TOV é-\eANUKEL-TOV 
= 3 | NeXtKa-rov | é-AeduKel-ryy 
=| P.1 | NeAdKa-pev é-LeAUKEL-peV 
2 | AeXvKa-Te é-AeAUKEL-TE 
3 | NeNUKGOL é-LeNUKE-CaY 
Ist Perfect. 
Ss. 1 LeATKO 
: 2 AeADK YS 
5 3 AeAVKH 
3 a hehiKyTov 
= , 
e. 3 heAdnynrov 
ei Pee AeATKwpEV 
2 hehixnre 
3 AeATKMOE 
a edikoupe 
ys AEADKOLS 
3 3 NeADKOL | 
= 1D. 2 AeXUKOLTOV 
fas} 
= 3 AcAvKolryy 
OP. 1 ediKousev 
2 AeAVKOLTE 
3 AeAVKoLEeV 
rue 9 
S 3 
i D3 
s 8 
a1 Pp, 2 
Bani 
a ) 
Infin. AeAvKevat 


Part. AeXuKdS, -KUTA, -KOS 


318, 
Perfect Middle 


MippLE (Passive). 


Perfect. Pluperfect. 
héXv-pae €-heXU-peqv 
éAv-oraL é-AéXu-co 
éXv-Taww €é-AéXu-TO 


NéAv-o- Dov é-A\éXv-o- Pov 
AéAv-o-Bov é-Aedd-o On 


Nedo-pe9a é-AeAU-p.e8a 
A€Av-o Be é-A€Xv-o- Be 
NéAv-vrar é-\éXu-vTO 
Perfect. 
dadupévos (-n, -ov) @ 
' 


66 
petits (-G, -w) ean 
iyrov 
sae wide (-a, -a) aopev 


re 


6c Oor 


sg ig (-1, -ov) etyy 
eins 
66 ely 
Aehupévw (-G, -w) elrov or eltnrov 
“ eryy = einrny 
AeAvévor (-a, -a) etey el’ nev 
as cite elnre 
S elev elynoay 


A€Xv-0-0 
AeAV-c 8 
A€Av-c-Vov 
Aedt-o9av 
A€Xv-0-e 
AceAv-obov 


or AeAl-cOwoay 
AcAt-oBar 


Nev-LEvos, ~1, Ov 


319] 


System. 


Mippxe (Pass.). 


Future Perfect. 


edie +}LOLL 


AeAiore 
Achioerar 
hedicre-o-Bov 
AeAvoe-oBov 
Achiod-peIa 
Aedioe-o0e 


AeNVoro-vTaL 


Achvcroluny 
AcAdoro10 
AcAUcoLTO 
Ackvooro- Gov 
Achvoolo-Ony 
Aco otnela 
AcAtooro-e 
AcAvo-owwro 


Acdvore-o Bar 


Ae T0-6-pevos, “N> =OV 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


319. 


89 


First Passive System. 





or AvOnTecay 


AvOF-var 


Avdeis, -etoa, -év 





PASSIVE. 

Ist Aorist. Ist Future. 
é-AVOn-v Avdqco-pat 
é-hvOn-s AvOhoe 
é-hbOy Avojoe-TaK 
é-Ai0n-Toy Avejoe-c boy 
€-AvOq-T HY AvOjc«-oBov 
€-00n-pey AvOyo-d-pe0a 
é-AVOy-re AvOqoe-o Be 
€-ALOn-cay AvoAToy-TaAL 
Av8a 
AvOFs 
Avo 
AvIjTov 
AvOFToy 
AvdGpev 
Avdire 
Av@Gor 
Avbeinyu Aveyooluny 
Avdetys AvdjooLo 
Avde(y AvdAootTo 

Avdetrov or Avoelyrov | AvoAcorfov 

Avveirny = Avlanrny | AvleyoolcOny 

Avbetey = AvOelnpey | Avoqoolpeda 

AvGeire Avdelnre AvOjcow be 

Avdetev AvOeincay | Avdforowro 
AbOy-Te 

AvIA-Tw 
Av6n-Tov 
Avbq-Tey 
Adbn-Te 
Aviée-vrov 


Avdqoe-o Par 


Avdno-O-pEvos, -1, -ov 





























PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


321, 


ee ae ae ee, a i 


[320 


Second Perfeet System. 


ACTIVE, 


2d Perfect. 
Aér\ourra 


NéXouTra-s 
AéXoutre 


XeXoltra-rov 
AceKOltra-Tov 


NeAoltra-pev 
NeXolrra-re 


AcKolr aor 


2d Pluperfect. 


é-NeXolarn, ~ew 


é-eXolarns, -es 
é-NeXoltret 
é-NeXoltret-Tov 
é-NeXoutrel-T HV 
é-AeAolzret-pev 
é-AcXoltre-TeE 
é-\eholie-cay 


2d Perfect. 


Aeholira 
Aeholarys 
hedoiwy 


Aeoiarnrov 
deholarnrov 
AeAolrrapev 
Aedolarynre 
AeAolrract 


AeAoltroune 
eXoltrots 
deXoltrov 
AeA olzroirov 
heXoutroiryy 
AeAolrrousev 
AeXolrrovre 
deXolsrovev 


eAoutré-var 


90 
320. 
Retro Seeond Aorist System. 
(Au7-) 
leave ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
| 2d Aorist. 
S. 1 | @Xuro-v é-urd-pnv 
2\ &ure-s é-Alcrov 
2 3 | €Avre é-\lire-TO 
& | D.2| &dbre-rov é-Alare-o-Jov 
= 3 | é-huré-ryy é-hitré-o On 
S| P.1| &Airro-pev é-humd-yeda, 
2 | é-Altre-re é-Alare-o- Ve 
3 | &Nuro-v é-\{aro-vTo 
|S. 1 1 Maro Maroon 
2| ACrys Alrry 
: 3 | Mary Arnras 
© | D.2)| Naryrov | Atarno-Bov 
a 4 
2 3 | Adarnrov Alrng Boy 
S| P.1! Atropey Aurayeba, 
oD) , id 
2| Marne MarnoBe 
3| Alrect Alravran 
S. 1] Afwous Aurrolynv 
2| Al{arous Meroe 
3 3 | Also. Narouto 
-— | D.2| Marourov | Marove Pov 
= 3 | Aurofrny | Aurrolo-Onv 
© | P.1| Alrowpev | AvirotjneGon 
2| Alrroure Nitrous Be 
3 | Mrovey | AGrowwTo 
— | | — | 
S. 2| Alsre | Avirot 
f 3 | Auré-rw | Luré-o 8a 
= D. 2 | Alare-rov | Atare-o-Gov 
s 3| duré-rav | Auré-cav 
} P. 2 | Alare-re Alare-o- Ge 
= 3 | Aswrd-vrey Arré-oBeov 
or Auwé-Twcay or Auré-clwoay 
Infin. | Avzetv Avrré-o- Baw 
Part. | Auray, -odc-a, -dv | Avird-pevos, -1, -ov 


Achourres, -via, -ds 























322] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 91 
322, 
atéh\hw Second Passive System. 
(ored-) 
send PASSIVE. 
2d Aorist. 2d Future. 
S. 1 é-oTaAN-V OTAAHCO-paL 
2 é-orady-s oTaAnoes 
3 é-or ay OTANHTE-TAL 
Indica- | D. 2 é-oTdAn-Tov oradhoe-o lov 
tive. 3 é-oTady-THY orahioe-o Gov 
{ome é-oTaAn-pev oradnod-nela 
2 é-oTaNy-Te oradnoe-o0e 
3 é-oTaAy-cav oTAdHoo-vTaL 
= 1 cTAAe 
2 oradys 
3 orahy 
ay D. 2 oTAATOV 
junc- 
8 oTAAHTOV 
tive. 
| ge | TTANOpLEV 
2 orahire 
3 oTrTaAhacr 
Bek oraletnyv oradknootuny 
2 oradelns orTahho ovo 
3 oraheln CTAAHTOLTO 
Opta- | D. 2 | oradetroy or otradelnrov oTayoou Joy 
tive. 3 | oradeityy oradenrny orahyocoliciny . 
P. 1 | oradetwev orakeinpev oradnooipeda 
2 | oradeire oraleinre orahyoou be 
3 | oTadetey oTadeinoay oTakhocowrTo 
S. 2 ordhy-be 
3 oTahh-Te 
Tipera- 2 orahny-rov 
a 3 oTadh-Tev 
Pp. 2 oTady-TE 
3 oTAAE-VTOV 
Or OTAANTwOay 
Infinitive. oTaAt-var oTakhnoe-o Gar 
Participle. oraActs, -eloa, -év oTAANCO-LEVOS, -y, -ov 























92 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [323 
323, 
Tipd-w Present System of Contract Verbs in -aw. 
honor 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
aN ae Tip aw)d érip(aov)ov Tip(do)@-par | értp(ad)o-pyv 
2| ttp(ders)s értp(aes)as TU(der)G érty( dou) 
3 | Tip(der)a@ er tp(ae)a Tip(de)a-ra. | értp(de)a-ro 
S| D.2| tip(de)a-rov éri(ae)a-rov | Tip(de)d-cboy | érty(de)a-cbov 
= 3 | Tip(de)a-rov éTi(ad)a-rny | tin(de)d-cBov | értp(ad)G-cOny 
| P.1| tip(do)d-pev ETTL(do)G-pev | TIy(ad)od-weba | ErTp(ad)d-ye0a 
2| Tip(de)a-Te er Tp.( de) a-Te Tiy(ce)a-o-0e eT Ty.(de )a-o-Be 
3] Tip(dov)dor érip(aov)ov Tip(do)O-vra. | érip(do)-vTo 
Present. Present. | 
S. 1 Tip dw)@ TT dw) O-poue 
pre TUp(ans)as Tip(dn)4 
ey; 8 Tin(dn)@ Tip(dn)a-row 
= 4). 2 Tiy.(dy)G-Tov Tip{dn)a-cbov 
| n = 
is 3 T1p.(an)a-Tov TU}L( cn) a-o- ov 
3 Pah T Ul dw )@-[.ev TTs( ad )o-e00, 
2 Tis(d7)a-Te TU( dn )a.-o- Oe 
3 TU dw )Gor TYL(dw)O-vToULL 
vas Tiu(aol)wn-v or Tip(dor)G-pe TU(aol)a-pyv 
2) rip(aol)an-s TU.(do1)@-0 
3 3) Ti(aol)an TUys(dor)@ TU do.)@-TO 
5 | D.2 TU(dor)@-Tov TUps(dor)q-c-Bov 
S 3 TUs(aol)w-THv TUp(aot )o-o-Oqy 
O|P.1 TUs( cor )Gu- eV TUy( aol )w-e8a, 
2 TU(cdor)@-Te TUp.( dor) @-o- Be 
3 T Yys(c.01) @E-V TUs( chor) @-vTO 
ager oe: Ti( ae)G TU(dov)@ 
3 3 Tiy(ad)a-rw Tip(ae)G-c bw 
— |D.2 Tiy(de)a-Tov Tip(de)a-o0ov 
5 3 Tip ad )G-Tev TT aé)a-c wv 
5 P. 2 Tip( de) O-Te Tip.( de)a-o Be 
4 3 Tipy(ad)o-vTov TU( ad )G-cBov 
or Tip(ac)a-Twoay or Tin(aé)a-cbwoay 
Infin. Tip dew )av Ti( de)a-o-Oar 
Part. | TIp(dwv)Gv, -do0, -dv TUp( ad )d-pEVvOS, -n, ~OV 





—< oe. 











824] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 93 
324, 
en omg Present System of Contract Verbs in -ew. 
ACTIVE. Mapper (PASSIVE), 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
orr(dw)d éptd(cov)ouv r(€e)ot-par Eped( cd )ov-pyy 
prr( ers ets EpiA(ces)eus prr(cer et Epid(ovod 
prr( cer )et EpiA( ec Jet pud(ee)et-rar Eptd(Ce)et-To 
rd(<e)et-rov EprX( ce )et~Tov pur(<e)et-oBov édpid(ce)et-o Dov 
@ir(ée)et-rov Edid(c€ )el-rHv pir(<e )et-o ov Eder(c€ )el-o Onv 
iA(<o)od-pev Edtd(€0)od-pev Pid(€d)ov-pe8a EtA(cd )ot-pe8a, 
ur(ce)et-re Epprd( ce )et-Te diX( ce)et-o Oe EdeA( cc et-o-0e 
prd(ov)otor ebiX(cov ouv pr(co)od-vrar édiX( co )od-vro 
Present. Present. 
pir( éw)d Pir( ew )B-par 
$i ens) bi &)e 
bX(G)A dud  én)fi-ran 
@Pur( én )fj-rov urd(€é7)f-o8ov 
~pud(en)f-Tov o@d(en)f-o8ov 
prd(ew)O-pev Pid(ew)d-p00. 
ur(én)f-Te pur( én) fj-o Ve 
Prr(éw)Gor Pir( €w)O-vTar 
iA(eol)oln-v or rd(<or)ot-pr otd(co!)of-wnv 
iA(col)oln-s @tX(€ois)ot-s ud(or)ot-o 
PiA( col )oly ir(<or)ot tX(<or)oi-To 
tX(€o1)ot-Tov @id(¢or)ot-o-Bov 
ouA(coi)ol-ryv drd(col)ot-rOnv 
iAX( €or )ot-ev, -oi7n-uev iA cot ol-peba 
@iA(€or)ot-TE, -ol7n-Te rr €or)ot-oVe 
ud( or )ote-v ptA(€or)ot-vro 
bir(ce)e pirX(€ov)od 
prr(e€ )el-rw prr(cé Jel-o- bw 
ud(<e)et-rov ir(e)et-c Gov 
oir(e€ el-Tav pir(ed)el-o Dav 
ur(e)et-Te er(<e)et-o- Be 
id(cd )ov-vrev prr(cé )el-oBav 
or piA(eé)el-Twoay or pir(cé)el-cOwoav 
pur(éexy)etv pur(éc )et-o- Bar 


PA(éwv)v, -otoa, -odv @A(cd)ov-wevos, -y, -OV 





[325 





























94 PARADIGUS OF VERBS, 
325, 
SyAd-w Present System of Contract Verbs in -ow. 
manifest 
ACTIVE. Minp_e (Passive). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
18. 1| 8yA(d0)o BAA(oovJoww | Syr(do)od-por | &qA(od)ov-pyv 
2| Syr(des)ots | HA(oes)ovs | SyA(der)ot eSyA(dov)od 
© 3 | ByA(der)ot éHX( 0c )ov SyrA(de)od-rar | éSnAX(de)od-To 
S | D.2| Syr(de)ad-rov | ESyA(de)od-rov | Syr(de}od-cGov | éSnA(de)od-c8ov 
= 3 | SyX(de)ot-rov | ESyA(o¢ )od-rTHY | SHA(de)od-c8ov | €6yA(0¢)ot-o- Oy 
| P. 1) Syd(do)od-pey | ESnA(do)od-pev | SyA(od)od-peIe, | ESyA(0d )od-pela. 
2| Snr(de)ot-re | &SyA(de)od-re | SyA(de)ot-cbe | ESnA(de)od-c0e 
3| SyA(dov)odor | SAX(oov)ovv | SyA(do)ot-vrar | €SnA(do)od-vro 
as 2 Present. Present. 
= Syd( dw) & SyA(dw)d-paw 
; 2 SyA(dys)ots SyA( dn )ot 
- 3 SyA( dn ot SyA(67n)d-Taw 
S D. 2 Syd(6n)d-rov Syd(dn)d-0-8ov 
= 3 SnX( dn )G~rov SyA(6n)O-c8ov 
Ss Pl Si(dwo)O-pev Syd(0d)d-peBa, 
2 SyA(dn)a-re Snr(67n)d-00e 
8 Syd(dw)dor SyA( dw) O-vTaw 
|S. 1] SqA(oofofm-v or Smd(dor)ot-pe Sn A(ool)ot-pnv 
2) Syd(ool)oin-s SyA(dors )ot-s | SyA(dor)ot-o 
5 | 3] SyA(oof)oiy  — SqA(dou)ot. | —- BAC dou)ot-ro 
&1D.2| — Snd(dor)ot-rov SqA(do1)ot-o-Bov 
S| 3 SnA(ool)ol-rny SyX(00l)ol-cOny 
oP. 1 SAA dor )ot-wev SyA(o0i)ol-pne8a, 
| 2 SyA(do1)ot-re SyA(do1)ot-o-Ge 
3 SyX( dor)ote-v SyA(do1)ot-vro 
S. 2 574A(o€)ov SyX(dov)od 
3 3 Syd(oe)od-Ta SyA(0¢)ot-c0w 
= | D.2 Sndr(de)ob-rov SyA{de)od-oGov 
Bi} 38]  SyA(od)od-rav Syd(0d)od-c0av 
a LP. 2 | dynA(de)od-re SynA(de)od-o Ve 
= 3 | SyA(od ot-vTav SyA(0¢)ot-o bay 
or SyA(0€)ou-Twcar or 8nA(0€)od-cbwoay 
Infin. SyA(deuv ody | SyA(de)od-c-Gar 





Part. SyA(dwr) dv, -otcoa, -odv | SnA(0d)ov-evos, =n, ~oV 





327] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 95 
326, 327, 
paivw Future System of First Aorist System of 


ACTIVE. 


(pav-) show Liquid Verbs. 


MIDDLE. 


Future (contracted). 


ava 
davets 
davet 
davetrov 
davetrov 
cavodpev 
gavetre 
davovsr 





eas SSS 
ee 


davolny, mavotpe 
davoins, davots 
gdavoly, davot 
davoiroy 
oavoirnyv 
davotpev 

davoire 

davotey 


davetv 


a Aas i eee SS Se EEE eee 
PavGv, -odca,-oty davotpevos,-y,-ov| divas, -Goa, -av 


davotpar 
pavet 
davetrar 
paveto ov 
pavetco ov 
pavoipeda 
paveto Ge 
pavodvvTar 


davoluny 
avoto 
pavoiro 


| bavotoGov 


pavolc ny 
pavolycda 
avoicGe 
@avotyro 


daveto Gar 


Liquid Verbs. 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Ist Aorist. 
é-dyva é-pyva-pyv 
e-byva-s é-pive 
é-byve é-pijva-To 
é-yVva-Tov €é-pyjva-o0ov 


é-byva-THV 
é-biyva-pev 
é-diva-Te 
é-oyva-v 


ojva 
dyvys 
pyvy 
oyvynrov 
pyvytrov 


Ojvarpr 
phveus, phvas 
Onvere, phvat 
divarrov 
pnvairny 
bjvarev 
dyvatre 


oyveay, pnvaey 


dijvov 
onvaro 
prvarov 
pyvatev 
bjvare 
pyvavTav 

or onvdtwcay 


pijvar 


é-pyva-oOnv 
é-pyva-neda 
é-prva-oGe 
é-iva-vTo 


Pyvapor 
onvy 
pyvyrar 
oyvno Gov 
ojvyo Gov 
pyvapeda 
onvarde 
PhvovTar 


oyvatuny 


dyvato 
pryvaito 


divaioGov 
dnvaledny 
pnvalpnela 
prvarobe 
ojvawtTo 


dijvar 
onvac dw 


oyvaclov 
onvacbwv 
ojvao-Ge 
pnvacGov 

or onvdcbwoay 


pyvacbar 


Pyvapevos, -1, -ov 





96 
328, 

MIDDLE 
(Passive). 
S. 1 
: 2 

oO 
S 3 
si D. 2 
= 3 
5 | Po 
Py y) 
3 
Ss. 1 
E 2 
= 3 

= 
a3 D. 2 
a 
eye, ak 
2 D 
3 
Perf. Sub 
Perf. Opt 
2 
Eby : 
phe 
Se 
| P.2 
Rai 3 


iia! 
oO !|1o 
= el Nal sae 4 
Kh | Fh 
2 a 
2 | 5 


h— 
Pe 
oS 


Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 
Par. 


Ist Aor. Pass. 


1 Fut. Ind. 





. 
e e 
a ES OC TO 


TENE-0-O TONAL 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Perfect Middle and 


Vowel-Verbs, 
with added o. 


Tehew (TEXE-) 


complete 


TETENE-T=[LOUL 
TETENE-T'AL 
TETENE-O-TOL 
TeTée-o- Gov 
Teréde-c Dov 
TeTehé-o--1.€00, 
TEeTENE-o-VE 
TeTENE-o-pLevor eLorl 
é-reTeh€-o-.V 
é-reTéXe-0-0 
€-TeTENE-0-TO 
é-reTéAe-o Gov 
é-rerehé-c Onv 
é-reredé-o-p.e00, 
é-reréde-o Ve 


TETENE-O-PEVOL OAV 


TETEAETPEVOS @ 
TETENELEVOS ElnV 


TETENE-0-O 
TEeTENE-0 Ow 
reréXe-o Dov 
rete é-o- Dav 
Ter ée-o Oe 
TETENE-o Boy 

or TeTEA€-cOwoay 


TETENE- aL 


. | Terede-o--p.EvOS 


é-reé-o--Oyv 
TEdE-0'-06 
vede-o--Belny 
TeNE-o-OyTL 
TeAE-o-OFVaL 
Tede-o--els 


Liquid Verbs. 


oté\Aw (ored-) 


send 


Corowa 
éoradoas 
EOTAATAL 
éorahGov 
éoradGov 
eoradpeda, 
torande 


eoradwévor etot 


éoTaduny 
éoradoo 
toTaATo 
éoradGov 
err aby 
éoradpeda, 
éoradde 


2 D 
éoTaApévor hoay 


éoTadpévos @ 


éoradpevos env 


éorahkoo 
éoraddw 
éorahGov 
éorad0ov 
éoradGe 
éorad0ov 
or éordAbwoay 

éorad Oar 


éorahpevos 


paivw (payv-) 
show 


TrEPAC OAL 
(répavom, 463 a) 
TEPAVTAL 
mépavbov 
méhavlov 
TmTepac pea 
Tmréepavie 
mepacpevor eat 
eTEpac ny 
(érépavoo) 
émépavTo 
érrésavlov 
erepavOnv 
érrepac peda 
émréeavde 
TEepacpevor Hrav 
TEPATPEVOS @ 
TEepacevos elyv 
(3wépavoo) 
Tepavw 
mépavbov 
TepavOwy 
méav0e 
tmepavOay 

or medavOwoay 
TepavOar 
EPA LEvos 
éepavOnyv 
hava 
pavGeinv 
pavOnre 
pavOijvar 
pavbels 


davijAcopar 


328] 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


First Passiwe Systems of 





Mute Verbs. 


pinto (pip-) |aArAdoow (adAay-) eéyxon (edeyx-) 


throw 


epptppar 
epptipar 

epptarrar 
epptp0ov 


2 Com 


me 
“Or “Or 
O- 

=! 

- 
<) 

m 


pTupévos @ 


Me | Me; Me 


prpPfvar 
PtPlels 


PIpoAcopar 


Epptupevor eio-l 
é 


bpTppevos inv 


exchange 


HAAaYpae 
HAAaEae 
HAAaKTaL 
HAAG Gov 
HAAaX Gov 
HAdYypcDa 
HAAG Ge 


HAAaypévor clot 


MAAC YpNV 
HAAaEo 
HANaKTO 
HAAaX Gov 
mAAGy Onv 
HAACYpcla 
HAAay Ge 


HAAaYpEvor To-av 


HAAaYypLEVvoS @ 


NAAaypEvos elqv 


HAAafo 
HAAGX Io 
HAAaX Gov 
HAAG X Cav 
HAAax Ge 
NAA X Gav 

or HAAGXOwoay 
HAAG aw 
HAAaypéevos 





nA X On 
adAax 0H 
a&AAax Gelnv 
GAA OnTe 
GAAAX OFvaL 
é&dAay Gels 


GAAaX OAcopaL 


convict 


eAfAcypae 
EHreyEar 
éAnAeyKTar 
eXfreyx Gov 
eXfreyx Gov 
eAnréyp.cda, 
eXifjreyx Ge 


eXnrcypevor elot 


eAnréypnv 
eXyArcyfo 
eXndeyKTo 
eXndeyyx ov 
eAnréyx Sqy 
eAnreypcda 
eXfjreyx Ge 


eXynreypevor Hoav 
eXnAcypevos @ 
éAnAcypévos elnv 


97 


welOw (z-) i 


persuade 


TETELC BOLL 
TETELO OL 
TETELO TOL 
métmrevo Gov 
qémero- Gov 
metrelope0o, 
awé7rero-Ge 


TemTeopevor etal 


érremrelopny 
€TréTrELO 

err é1rena-TO 
érrétreto- Gov 
> 

érrerre(o On 
érretre(o peda, 
érrémrevo-Ge 


TETELT EVOL OUY 


TETELT}LEVOS @ 


TEMELTLLEVOS EinY 





éAyAeyso TETELoO 
Enréyx 9a memelolw 
eXfjreyx Gov ar émevo- Gov 
Enréyx Gov TeTeioOwv 
ehnreyx Ge meémevo-Ge 
enr€éyx Gav Teme cQwy 
or €AnréyxOwray| or memeloOwoay 
eXnr€éyx Gar TemetoOat 
éXndeypevos TTETELO-HLEVOS 
HAEYX Onv érre(o- Ov 
eKeyX 9a Teo 0a 
éXeyyx Seinv mevoe(ny 
ehéyyx Onre tmetoOynte 
eheyx Ofjvan trevo-Ofjvan 
éXeyy Oels meo-Qels 
eheyx Propo =| rane Propar 


























98 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [3829 
329, Present System, 
tions (Be-) put. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (Passive). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
S. 1 | rl-Oy-pe é-(-8n-v Ti-Be-pcL é-7u-0é-pnv 
2 | rl-On-s, ribcts | €-Tl-Ders v(-Qe-orat é-ri-Be-co 
o 3 | tl-Oy-or é-ri-Ger r(-Oe-raw é-ri-0e-To 
B/D. 2 | rl-Ge-rov é-r(-Be-rov | ti-0e-cbov é-r(-Be-o-Boy 
= 8 | rl-Re-roy é-T1-0é-ryy | tl-Ge-oBov é-7-0é-0Ony 
SP. 1 | ri-Oe-pev é-7(-Be-pev T-Bé-we0a, é-7i-Bé-e8a, 
2 | rl-Ge-re é-ri-Ge-re t(-Be-00e é-rl-Be-o0e 
8 | r-8é-Ger é-rl-Be-cav | tl-Ge-vrar é-rl-Be-vro 
Present. Present. 
=. al T-08 TL-9G-pae 
: 2 T1-O7-s 71-07 
. @o Es a 
- 8 T-07 T-07-Tav 
2.) Di 71-9f-Tov T.-97]-0-Bov 
= 3 T.-O7j-Tov T-07-c90v 
2 i hel Ti-0G-jev T1-00-.e80 
| 2 Ti-Ofj-Te T.-07j-00e 
OG 3 T.-04-ct T-08-vrat 
S74 vi-Gely-v Ti-Qel-pyy or ti-Bol-nyv 
2 t-eln-s t.-Gel-o t\-Qoi-o 
3 3 Ti-Oely T.-Gel-To T.-Qot-To 
B D, 2 vi-Oel-rov or Tu-Geln-Tov ti-Qet-cov Ti-Ooi-cBov 
3 Ti-Oel-THy = Ti-Pery-T HY ti-Qel-obyy  Ti-Bol-cOnv 
ane Ae Soe | vTi-Gel-ev = T-Detn-pnev ti-Qel-ye0a = Tu-Got-pc8a 
2 v.-Qei-re vi-Geln-re t.-Qct-o Be T.-Got-oe 
3 vi-Qete-v T1-Oeln-cav Ti-Qel-y To vT.-9ot-vTo 
ee vt-Ber t{-0e-cro 
3 3 Ti-0é-7w Ti-Bé-0 Bw 
= | D. 2 r(-0e-rov 71-0¢-c-Bov 
E 3 T.-Gé-Tav T.-0é-c Pav 
e| P. 2 ri-Ge-re vl-Oe-0e 
= 3 Ti-0é-vT@V T1-9é-c0av 
or T1-0€-TwoaY or T1-0¢-cbwoay 
Infin. T.-9é-var ti-Qe-0-bar 
Part. Ti-Gels, -elora, -év T.-0é-evos, -7, -ov 





380] 
330, 
ACTIVE. 
Present. Imperfect. 
8(-Se-pe é-8(-Souv 
8-8-5 é-8/-Sovus 
8(-8a-o é-5(-Sou 
5(-50-Tov é-8(-50-rTov 
8(-50-rov é-81-56-T HV 
8(-S0-pev €-5/-50-ev 
5{-S0-re é-8(-50-re 
8-86-aoru é-(-50-cav 
Present. 

81-30 

$1-5G-s 

1-54 

$1-86-Tov 

$1-50-Tov 

$-8-pev 

$1-84-Te 

$1-84-o1 

$1-Sofn-v 

$.-S0ln-s 

1-Soiy 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


MI-form. 


didwpt (do0-) give. 


S-Sot-rov or §1-S0ln-rov 
Su-Sol-ryv «= 8-8 orq-T HV 


1-Sot-pev 


St-dolny-pev 


5:-Soi-re $-Soln-Te 
$u-Soite-v d1-doln-cay 


d(-Sov 
O.-0d-Tw 
5{-80-rTov 
S.-50-Tev 
5{-80-rTe 
&u-30-vTrev 

or 61-66-Twoay 
S.-50-var 


S-So0vs, -odcoa, -dv 


—_—_—————————— 


99 


MippLeE (Passtve). 


Present. 





8(-80-pow 
8(-80-cat 
d{-So-Ta 
d{-50-c0ov 
5{-80-c-bov 
$1-50-je80, 
d{-50-00e 
d(-50-vTar 


Imperfect. 


€-51-56-p.qv 
é-5{-S0-c0 
€é-5(-50-TO 
€é-6{-50-o-Jov 
é-81-50-c Onv 
é-81-50-p.e8a, 
é-8-80-0-0e 
é-8{-80-vTo 


Present. 
81-80-pa 
Si-d@ 
$i-9@-TaL 
$1-50-c-8ov 


' §t-30-c8ov 


$1-80-pe9a, 
51-54-00 
$1-50-vrar 
6u-Sol-pnv 
5t-Sot-o 
5.-S0t-To 
ou-Sot-c lov 
S1-S0f-oc8yv 
Su-Sof-j.e00, 
S.-501-c-0e 
$.-S0t-vro 
Si-S0-c-0 
81-30-00 
d(-50-c8ov 
Si-00-o-Bav 
d{-d0-08¢ 
Ot-00-cBwv 
or 81-66-clwoay 
S{-S0-c-8ar 


5t-80-eVv0S, -7, -OV 








100 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [331 
ool, Present System, 
tory (ora-) set. 
ACTIVE. MippLeE (Passive). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
S. 1 | t-ory-pe U-orn-v t-o-ra-poe t-oTd-nV 
2 | t-orn-s U-orn-s {-ora-caL U-oTa-co 
© 3 | t-ory-ou t-orn (-ora-TaL U-oTO-To 
S| D. 2 | t-ora-rov U-oTa-Tov {-ora-cboy U-ora-cboy 
1S) £ 
a 3 | t-ora-rov t-ord-ryy | t-cra-cbov t-ord-ocOny 
S| P. 1 | t-ora-pev t-ora-pev | t-ord-peba t-ord-.00, 
2 | t-ora-re C-oTa-Te {-ora-o-0e t-ora-oe 
8 | t-ord-on U-ocra-cay | t-cra-vrat U-0TO-VTO 
Present. Present. 
sae t-oT® -O-TO-pae 
e “ e ~ 
3 2 t-OT7}-S aiid - 
= 3 i-or} L-OTT-TAL 
s e a e a 
Ae ge Uae t-o-T7]-TOV t-o-Tfj]-o-Bov 
‘es 3 i-o-T7]-Tov t-o-rfj]-o oy 
fo e A e A 
cae aa t-oTG-ev t-oT-p.e8a, 
2 t-ori-Te t-o-rfj-o Be 
3 L-OTO-CU (-0TO-vrar 
a | t-oraly-v t-o-rat-uny 
2 i-orain-s t-orat-o 
© 3 t-oratn t-orai-To 
S| D. 2) t-orai-rov or i-craty-rov t-o-rai-c-Bov 
a 3 | toral-roy t-orain-THY t-oral-cOny 
©} PL 1) terat-pev t-oratn-pev t-orat-e0a 
2 | t-orat-re t-ora(n-re t-o-rai-o-0e 
3 t-o-rate-v i-oralyn-cay t-o-Tai-vTo 
». 2 t-or {-ora-co 
yl e ’ 
a 3 (-OTd-TO t-ord-o0w 
S 
arg | ws! 2 t-o0-Ta-Tov t-orra-cBoy 
= 8 e , e , ) 
Bs t-o-rd-Tav i-ora-o8wy 
ae {-orTa-TeE t-orra-oe 
oy 3 t-o-rd-vT@v t-ord-c Bw 
or i-ord-Twoav or i-ord-cbwoay 
Infin. t-oTG-VaL {-ora-o-Gar 
Part i-ords, -doa, -av {-o-TG.-[LeVOS, -1, -OV 





















































832] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
392, MI-Form. 
SelKV UPL (detk-) show. 
ACTIVE. MippLeE (PassIve). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
Selk-vo-pu é-Se(k-vu-v Selk-vu-pae é-Seuk-vi-pny 
Se(k-vu-s é-Selk-vu-s SelK-vu-coraL é-Sel(k-yu-c-0 
Selk-vv-ot €-Oe(K-vv Selk-vu-TaL é-Seik-vu-To 
Selk-vu-Tov é-Se(k-vu-Tov Seix-vu-c Boy é-Se(x-vu-c Gov 
Selx-vu-Tov é-Seuk-vi-T HV Selk-vu-cbov €-Serk-vi-oOnv 
Selk-vu-pev €-Selk-vu-pev Sevk-vv-e90, €-Serk-vd-pe0a, 
Selk-vu-re €-5e(u-vu-Te Selk-vu-o-Be é-Se(k-vu-o0e 
Seuk-vv-Goru é-SeiK-vu-cr av Selk-vu-vrar é-Se(K-vu-vTo 
Present. Present. 
Seukvow Serkviopar 
Secxviys Secxvin 
Secxvig Seukvoyntar 
Seuxvintoy Sexvino ov 
Sevcvinrov Seuxviyo Gov 
Serkviaev Sexvudp.cla 
Sexvinre Sexvino Ge 
Serxviacr Sekvi@vrar 
et Serle ede aaa 
Serxviousr Sekvuoluny 
Seuxvvors Seuxvioro 
Seuxvvou Seukviotro 
Seuxvvorrov SexviourIoyv 
Seuxvvolryy SexvuoloOny 
Sexvdowpev Sexvvolueda, 
SeuxvvorTe Serxvvoi Ge 
Seuxvvorev Seuxvvouvro 
Selk-vv Selk-vu-coro 
Seuk-vb-Tw OeLK-VU-c0w 
Sefk-vu-Tov Setk-vu-o boy 
Seuk-v0-Tev Seux-vt-cbov 
Selk-vu-Te de(k-vu-o- Oe 
SeuK-VvU-vTaV Seuk-yi-cbov 


/ 
or deik-vt-Twoay or beix-vt-cbwoav 








Seuk-vv-vat de(k-vu-c Oar 








Seuk-vus, -toa, ~iv Seux-vb-pevos, -1, -ov 
ECS COCR NOG ay pee Ne A eA RRM g eles 8 























Qci-re Oely-re | Oct-rOe (-Ooitc Se) | Sot-re 
Qete-v  Oein-cay| Cct-vTo (-Boivro) | Soite-v 


Sofy-re | Sot-o0e 
Soln-cay | §ot-vro 





102 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
333, 304, 
Second Aorist System, 
TiOnps (Ge-) put. didwpu (S0-) give. 
2 Aor Active. Middle. Active. Middle. 
S. | (€6y ca.) é-9é-pyv (xa) é-56-p.yv 
2 | (€0nkas) é-Qou (€axas) Sou 
© | 3 | (ene) é-Qe-To (éSaxKe) €-50-To 
S| D.| &e-rov é-9e-c- Pov é-80-Tov é-50-odov 
= | 8 | é-0érny é-0é-c-Onv é-§6-Tnv é-86-0Ony 
S P.| &0e-pev é-9é-.e00, é-So-pev é-56-pea, 
2| &0e-re ¢-Oc-o- Be e-d0-Te é-5o0-o0e 
3 | &Qe-ray €-0e-vTo ¢-80-cay é-S0-vTo 
FS. ig 0-jna0 Sa S@-pa0 
_ | 2 | Of-s 64 Sa-s d@ 
£ | 3 | 09 OF-Taw Sa 8a-TaL 
2 OD. | 0f-rov 04-c9ov $6-Tov Sa-o-Bov 
| 3 | Of-rov 67-08ov $4-Tov $6-o-8ov 
ef P. | @G-pev Ga-1.e80 Sa-pev §-nela 
2 | Of-re 07-0 Be 5a-Te §4-00€ 
3 | 0G-or 0-vrar 84-ot o8-vTau 
“ae. Gely-v Bel-pnv Soln-v Soi-pny 
“2 Qetn-s Qci-o Soin-s Sot-o 
Boi -8 Gely Gei-ro (-Botro) Soln Sot-ro 
=| D. | Get-rov eln-rov | Oet-o8ov Soi-roy Soln-rov | Sot-c0ov 
3 8 | Oel-rnv Cah-rnyy | el-o ony Sol-ryy Souj-THv | Sol-cOny 
© | P. | Gei-pev Geln-pev | Oel-pe8a, (-PolueOa) | Sot-pev Soln-pev | Sol-ne9a 
2 
5) 
'§. | és 00s | 86-s Sot 

g | 3 | 9€-Te 0é-c9w d6-Tw §6-o-9w 

= | D. | 0é-rov 0é-c-8ov 56-ToV 8d6-c-Bov 

= | 3 | 0é-tav 0é-c-Bav 86-Tay §6-c-bwv 

a‘ | P. Oé-re 9é-o8e dd-re 56-08 

| 8 | 0é-vrev 8é-c-8av 80-vTav $6-c0wy 

or 6é-Twoav or 6€-c0woay or 66-Twc ay or 66-cOwoav 
Infin. | Oei-var Bé-c- Bar Sod-var 86-oBat 


2 a. | ee 


Part. | Gels, Oetora, 8é-v | Bé-pevos, -n, -ov | Sods, Sota, Sd-v | S0-pevos, ~y, -ov 


nn aa anneal 


336] 


335, 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


336, 


103 





MI-Form. 





loTnp (oTa-). 





Active. 


é-orn-v stood 
€-oTN-S 
c-oT 
€-OTY-TOV 
€-OTH-THV 
€-0-T7}- EV 
é-oTH-TE 
-ory-oav 


ote 
oTT-S 
ah 
oT i-Tov 
| OTT-TOV 
OT O-EV 
oTH-Té 
TTO-Tt 
orain-v 
orTain-s 
orain 
_ orat-rov or oraln-Tov 
orat-Thy §86oTan-THY 
oTat-pev oTath-pev 
orai-re orain-Te 
oraie-y oTaln-cay 


ori-Ou 
oTH-Tw 
oTij-Tov 
OTh-Tav 
oT i-TeE 
OTa-VTwV 

Or oTh-Twcay 





OTi-var 


a a a 
oTds, TTATA, OTG-V 





dv-w enter. 


Active. 


€-OU-V 
é-50-S 
é-30 
€-3u-Tov 
é-30-T HV 
é-Su-juev 
€-5u-TE 
é-Dt-cav 


dia 
digs 
bin 
dSénTov 
Sinrov 
Sdapev 
Sinre 


SvMTL 


80-91 
80-Tw 
60-Tov 
Su-TaV 
30-T« 
$U-vTev 
or 0v-Twcay 


$0-var 


dts, Sica, Sv-y 


Second Perfect System with- 
out suffix (454). 


ioTnpt (oTa-) set. 


2d Perfect Act. 


(toryka) stand 


(toryKas) 

(tore) 
€-0'TO-TOV 
€-0-TO-TOV 
E-O'TO-}LEV 
€-0TU-TE 
€E-OTACL 


2d Plup. Act. 


(éorqKn) 

(eorqKns) 

(eornjKer) 
€-OTO-TOV 
E-OTG-THY 
E-O-TO-[LEV 
€-CTO-TE 
€-OTO-T OV 


2d Perfect Act. 


e€ ~ 


eoTW 


E-OTO-fLEV 


é-0 TO-C1 
é-orain-v 
é-oraty-s 
e-oralny 


€-0 TUE 


é-o-ra-Ou 
€-OTE-TH 
€-0'TA-TOV 
€-OTA-TOV 
€-O-TO-TE 
€-OTE-VTOV 

Or €-0Td-THOOV 
€-OTU-VAL 


— 


e vA = ~ e la 
E-TTWS, €E-TTWOAU, €-OTOS 


104 
807, 


Pr. Impf. Active. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 

Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf, 

Par. 


Ind. 
Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 
Par. 


338, 


Pr. Impf. Active. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imy. 
Tnf. 

Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 

Par. 


Ind. 
Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 

Par, 


TI 
ETULOV 
TID 
TILOMY, “qe 
TUG. 
TTUpOv 
TULOV 
Mor. 
TUL@par 
eTTLOLNY 
TULOPOL 
riwopny 
TIL® 
TiLaoGar 
T Uj. LEVOS 


4 


Verbals. 
TULNTOS 
TUpNTEOS 


Onpac Oar 
Onpaevos 


, 


Verbals. 
O@npards 
Onparéos 


Future Active. 
TILATw 


TIpHO OU 
TULNO-ELY 
TULAO OV 
Middle. 
TUN TONAL 


Tinooluny 
Tipnoer Oar 
TILT OMEVOS 
Passive. 
TipnOjorowar 
Tipnonoolunv 


Tin Ihrer Gar 
TIpnOyo-dpevos 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Synopsis of riud-w honor. 


Aorist Active. 


er iunora 
TULA O 
TUL O OLE 
TULNE OV 
TiO aL 
TULATAS 
Middle. 


ETTLNO APY 
TULAT OPAL 
TIpHoaipny 
TULNOAL 
Tingcaciar 
TINT ALEVOS 
Passive. 
erTpnonv 
TULNIa 
Tin Selny 
TipHOnre 
TynOFvar 
Tipndets 


Onpa-w hunt. 


Future Active. 


Onpacw 


Onpacoust 
Onpacew 
Onpacav 
Middle. 
Oypacopat 


Onpacoinny 
Onpacec ar 
Onpacopevos 


Passive. 


Onpadjcopar 
Onpasynooluny 


Onpadycec Bar 
Onpadynoopevos 


Aorist Active. 


eOnpaca 
Onpacw 
Onpacauue 
Onpacov 
Onpacar 
Onpards 
Middle, 


eOnpaoayny 
Onpacepar 
Onpacatpny 
Onpacar 
Oynpacac bar 
Oypacdpevos 
Passive. 
eOnpadnv 
Onpada 
Onpadeiny 
Oypadnrs 
Onpadfvar 
Onpadels 


tll 


[337 


Perf. Plup. Active. 
TETILNKO. 
eTETILAKH 
TETTLTKW 
TETTAMKOULL 


TETTLNKEVEL 
TETILNKOS 
M.E. 
TETULNP.CL 
éreTIpAny 
TETTBNEVOS @ 
TeTtpnpevos elny 
TETLLYTO 
TeTULAO Vat 
TETTPLNEVOS 
Fut. Perf. Pass. 
TETINMOOPAL 


TeTIENoOoluny 


TeTinnoer Oar 
TET TNO OM.EVOS 


Perf. Plup. Active. 
TeOnPGKa 
éreOnpaxy 
TeOnpaKka 
TeOnpakous 


TeOnpaKevar 
TeOnpaKes 
M. P. 

TeOpapat 

éreOnpapnv 
TeOnpapévos @ 
tTeOnpapévos etny 
TeOnpaco 
TteOnpac dar 
TeOnpapevos 


340] 


339, 


Pr. Impf. Active. 


TOuw 

érrolouv 
TOL 
mrovolny, -OtWLe 
motet 
TrOLety 
TOV 

mM, P. 

TrOLOUPLGLL 

éTrovoupny 
TOL@}.AL 
Trovotuny 
TOLOU 
troveto-Bat 
TOLOUMEVOS 


? 


Verbals. 
TOUnTSS 
TounTéos 


340, 


SPr. Impf. Active. 


TEAO 
éréXouy 

TEXO 

Tedolyy, -otpe 
Téder 

TedXetv 

TEAOV 

M. P. 


Teodor 
erchoupny 
TEAOPAL 
Teholuny 
Tehod 
Teheto Gar 
TEehOUpEVOS 


Verbals 
TENET TOS 
TENET TEOS 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


move-w Make. 


Future Active. 
Towjow 


TOUT OULL 
ToUnoe 
TOLNT WY 


Middle. 
TOUT Ope 


tToujooluny 


Toujo-eo Jar 
TOLNTOLEVOS 


Passive. 
TrounOijcopce 


trou onooluny 


mounOynoer Oar 
TmrounOnoopevos 


Aorist Active. 


érro(ynoa 
TOLTw 
TOLHOOLLL 
trolycov 
TOLH OAL 
TONTAS 
Middle. 


errorno any 
TOLAT OU 
Troujoatuny 
tro(no-ar 
Toujoac Gar 
TOLNTAL.EVOS 
Passive. 
érrounOnv 
Troinda 
trounQe(ny 
TrounOnte 
TrounOfvar 
trounQets 


TeX€-w complete. 


Future Active. 


TEN® (TENET, 423) 


TeRolyv, -otp 
Tedelv 
TENGV 

Middle. 
TELODpAL 


TeAolunv 


Tedeto Oar 
TENOUPEVOS 


Passive, 
Teer Oo opar 


Teer Oyoolyny 


Teer OHoer Bar 
TeAET ONT Op.EvOS 


Aorist Active. 


éeréXeoa 
TEXMETW 

, 
TENET ALLL 
TéNEO OV 
TENET AL 
TeAecas 


Middle. 


éreheo apy 
TENET OAL 
Teheoaipny 
TENET AL 
TeMerac at 
TENET ALEVOS 
Fassive. 
érehéc Onv 
Tehec 9G 
Teheo Gelny 
Ttehéo Ore 
Tedeo Oijvar 
Teer Oels 


105 


Perf. Plup. Active. 
TeTro(nKka 
€TreTTOLKY 
TETOLH KW 
TETOLHKOULL 


TETTOLNKEVAL 
TETOLAKOS 


MP. 


memroln cu 
€TETOLHLNY 
Fate uate @ 
TeToLnpevos elny 
mreTro(noo 
memounjo Oat 
TETOUNEVOS 


Fut. Perf. Pass. 
TETOLHOOLLAL 


metrounooluny 


Temounoer Oat 
TTETOLYT OMEVOS 


Perf. Plup. Active. 


TeTéENCKA 
- 
eTETEAEKY 
TETENEKW 
TETENEKOULL 


TETENEKEVOL 
TETENEKOS 


M. P. 


TETENET LAL 
érereAerpny 
TETENETPLEVOS @ 
TeTeLerwevos elyy 

TETEhETO 
TETENET OAL 
TETENETPLEVOS 


106 


341, 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 


Inf. 


Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imyv. 


Inf. 


Par: 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imyv. 


Inf. 


Par. 


Pr. Impf. Active. 
SyrO 
edqAOUV 
SHAG 
SyAoLyv, -otwe 
Shdov 
SnAodv 
SynAav 
M. P. 
SyAodpar 
eSnAovpyy 
SyAGpar 
onAoluny 
SnAod 
SynrotoGar 
Syndodpevos 


SyrAwTIS 
SyAwréos 


Verbals. 


342, 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 


Imv. 


Inf, 


Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imyv. 


Inf. 
Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 


Opt. 


Imy. 


Inf. 
Par. 


Pr. Impf. Active. 


oTéEAAW 
¢to-reAXov 
oTéAKw 
oréhouse 
OTEANE 
oréAXeuv 
oréAov 


E..P, 

oréhAopar 

éoredopny 
oTEANOPCL 
oredotpnv 
otéAXov 
oré\Xeo Oar 
oTeANopevos 


Verbals. 
OTANTOS 
CTANTEOS 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


dnrd-w manifest. 


Future Active. 


oynrA@o-w 


SyAdooune 

SydAaoev 

onAOC OV 
Middle. 


SyrAdoopar 
(as pass., 496) 


SnAwo-oluny 


SyAdo-eo Oar 
SnAwoOpevos 


Passive. 
SyAwOAc oper 
SyrwOnooluny 


SnAwWOHoeo Gar 
SnAWOyo-djsEvVOS 


Aorist Active. 


eShrora 
Sykoow 
SyAOoayr 
SfjAworov 
SnrAdorar 
SyrAoods 
Middle. 

(wanting) 


Passive. 
eSnAGOnY 
SyAw9S 
SyAwGelnv 
SHAGOyTe 
SyAwPFjvar 
SnAwVels 


oTeAAw (oreX-) send. 


Future Active. 
CTEAD 


ortehoiny, -otpe 
orehely 
oTeAGV 


Middle. 
orTchodpau 


oreholuny 


oredcio Gar 
oTENOVLEVOS 


2d Fut. Passive. 
oTAAHCOMAL 


oTadyooluny 


orahyioer Bar 
CTAAHTOOMEVOS 


Aorist Active. 


toreura 

g 
OTEAw 

lA 
ore(Aauyse 
OTéeitAov 
OTETAGL 

nQyQ= 
oreiNGs 


Middle. 


éorehapny 
ore(hopar 
oreNaipny 
oretNar 
oretAac Bar 


OTEAGHEVOS 
2d Aor. Passive. 


éeoradny 
CTAAS 
orahelnv 
ordre 
oraAtvar 
oradels 





Perf, Plup. Active. 
SeSqAoKa 
eSedyAOKY 
SeONAOKW 
SedNA@KOUE 


SeSyAKEvaL 
SeOyA@KaS 
MOE 
SebHA@paL 
ededyAGp HV 
SeSyA@pévos O 
SeSyAwpevos ely 
SeSHAwro 
SedNAdT Oar 
SednAwpevos 
Fut. Perf. Pass. 
SeSyADCopaL 


SedyA@r olny 


 SebnrAdoer Oar 


SeSyAwo-opevos 


Perf. Plup. Active. bad 
éoradka 
éoradky 
éo-Tanka 
éoradkouse 


3 
éo-radkévar 
ETTAAKOS 


M. P. 

ErraApoe 

éeoTadpny 
éorTahpéevos @ 
eoTadpevos elqy 
trrakoo 
éorad Gar 
ExTadwevos 


344] 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


107 


343, daivw (dav-) show (in second tenses, appear). 


Pr. Impf. Act. 
oatve 
epaivov 
palva 
afvou.t 
an 
epatverv 
oatvev 
nM P. 
atvopar 
éharvopny 
OLY @PLOLL 
ak aa 
oatvou 
oatver Bar 
Parvopevos 


Pr. Impf. Act. 


Aelrrea 

éXeutrov 
Aelarw 
Aelrrour 
Aettre 
Aelrrevy 
Aelrrav 

2 A Sg 

Nelzropar 

éhevrrdpnv 
Aeltrapaw 
Aevrroiuny 
Aettrou 
Aclrreo- Pat 
Aevrdpevos 


Verbals 
Neurros 
Xeurréos 


Future Active. 
ava 


pavoiny, -otue 
davety 
avav 

Middle. 
pavotpar 


pavoiuny 


daveto- Gar 

davotpevos 
2d Future P. 
dayycopar 


pavycoluny 


hayyjoec bar 
avyodjevos 


Aorist Active. 


epnva 
dfve 
DryVvare 
dijvov 
pivar 
oyvas 
Middle. 


epyvayny 
pyvopar 
yvatuny 
bijvar 
ojvac bar 
pnvapevos 
2d Aorist P- 
epayvny 
pave 
daveinv 
pavnbe 
dbavivar 
davels 


1st Perf. Plup. A. 


2d Perf. Plup. A. 


TéepayKa Téepyva. 
érrepayky érrepyvy 
TrEepayKo TEPHVve 
TEPayKouLe TrepyVvouse 
TepayKevan mTedbnvevar 
TEPAYKOS TEPYVAS 
Me. 
TEPAT HAL 
eTrepacpny 


TEpPacpevos @ 
TEPacwevos elyy 
(wépaveo) 
mrepavOar 
TEPATPLEVOS 


Ist Aorist P. 
epavOnv 
pavia 
avie(ny 
pavenre 
pavifvar 
pavGets 


Nelo (Aur-) leave. 


Future Active. 


2d Aorist Act. 


Aetiyw 
eXvTrov 
Alrrw 
Aefpouse Alrroupe 
Alte 
Aetivewv Aurety 
Achibav Aureay 
Middle. Middle. 
Acliopat 
eXurdunv 
Altrapar 
Aewbpoluny Aurotuny 
Autrod 
Neher Bar Auréo Oar 
Aeubopevos Autropevos 
Ist Future Pass. 1st Aorist Pass. 
Nebo ycopat ehelpOnv 
Acrp9a 
Aerhoyorolunv AerpVelnv. 
AclMOyte 
AaPOyjcer Oar erhOAvar 
AcubOno-dpevos AerhVets 


2d Perf. Plup. A. 


AéXoutra, 
eedolary 

Aedoitrw 

Achoimrouse 


AeNouTrévar 
AeXouTrdas 


M. P. 


AdAerppate 
eXeXe(uuny 
chee 28 @ 
Aederpevos elny 
éAcuvo 
AehethOar 
AcAeuppevos 


Fut. Perf. Pass. 


Aedelipouar 
AcAerolpny 


Aerelpeo- Bar 
AcKerpomevos 


108 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


345, 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 

Par. 


Ind. 


Sub. 
Opt. 


Imv. 


Inf. 
Par. 


Ind. 
Sub. 
Opt. 
Imv. 
Inf. 

Par. 


a. Less common are 2d aor. P. 


rr. Impf. Act. 
pirTre 
eépptrrov 


O2"O""O*"O""O* 
@-) e 
3 9°9 
a4 4 
as € 


ek ely 


a 
» 


TTOLAL 
epplrTopny 


O"O*"O*"O""D* 
el . 


TTOMEVOS 


el 


ai 


mrw (ptd-, prp-) throw. 


Future Active. 
pipe 
pliouse 
pipev 
pupev 


Middle. 
(wanting) 


Passive. 


ptpOncopar 
pipoycofpny 


pip Oyo dpevos 


33 ¢€ 


Aorist Active. 


eo 


"O2"O°O2"O2_ Ms 
ro &) eb el 
<--> 
=] 
@ 
= e 
ec 


-— 
° 
< 


pupas 
Middle. 
(wanting) 


Passive. 


[345 


2d Perf. Plup. Act. 


eppidny, etc., 2d fut. P. pupyoopat, etc. 


346, dANdoow (adAay-) exchange. 
Pr. Impf. Act. Future Active. Aorist Active. 2d Perf. Plup. Act. 
Ind. &AAAo-o-w édAaEw HrrAaXxa 
HA\Aaco-ov HAAaEa HAAAXN 
Sub. dddAdoow GAAGEW MAAAX@ 
Opt. dadAAdoooupe GAG Eouse GAG East HAAG ope 
Imv. GdAd\aooe &édAatov 
Inf. a&AAdo- orev a&drAaEev GAA Eat HAAAX Eva 
Par. add\aoowv ahhagov a&dd\abas _ HAAAX oS 
MP. Middle. Middle. M. ¥, 
Ind. ddAdAdooopar GAAGEOpae HrAaypoe 
jpAaco op PrAaeauny HArAaypHY 
Sub. ddAdoowpat add Eopar HAAaYypEvos @ 
Opt. dAdAaccoiunv dadda£oluny GdAagaipnv  AAaypévos ein 
Imv. daddAdooov dra Ea jAKaEO 
Inf. GN\Ado-o-eo Oat &AAA Eo Oa GrANdEacba,  AAAAY Gar 
Par. GAdAacoopevos adAAaEdpevos ddAaEdpevos HAAG ypEvos 
2d Future Pass. 2d Aorist Pass. 
Ind. wn GAAaYHOOpaL HAAG YHV 
Sub. now - addAays 
Opt. 3 2 Y arAAaynootuny addayelnv 
Imv. 5 33 GAG yy Se 
Inf. apes" GAdayjoerOa, addAayfvar 
Par. GAAaynospevos addAayels 


a. Less common are Ist aor. P. nAAAX Oy, etc., Ist fut. P. dAAax Pjoopar. 


348] 


347, 


Pr. Impf. A. 
arelOw 
tarevBov 
arelOw 
melOouse 
arecde 
me(Qew 
are(Qwv 


Pr. Impf. M. P. 


arel(Oopan 
érevQounv 
melQup.ar 
mevdotuny 
melQov 
mre(Qer Oar 
mevGop.evos 


Ld 


TELCO TOS 


, 


Verbals. 
TELOTEOS 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


meiw (wb-) persuade, Mid. obey. 


109 


Future A, Aorist A. 1st Perf. Plup. A. 2d Perf. Plup. A. 
Telow a ETreLKO, métrouWa trust 
errevra, évreTre(Ky érreTrolOn 
arelorw meTrelKo meTrolOw 
TmeloouLe amrelorcupue qremelKoune memolQouse 
Tete OV 
trelore Tetra TETELKEVLL memouleva 
trelowv TEeTaS TWETELKOS memos 
Future M. Middle. Perf. Plup. M. P. 
TET ONAL (wanting) TETELO POLL 
erremretor pny 5 
TEMELOLLEVOS W 
Tevo-OlLLNY Temerop.evos elnv 
TETFELT-O 
areloreo Gout amereto- aut 
TET OUEVOS TETELT PLEVOS 
Future P. Aorist P. 
Tero OHo-opae éerreo-Onv 
Teo Od 
TecOnooluny mea Oetnv 
melo Onte 
mevoOnoeo Gar Tevo-OFjvar 
Tee Ono OWLEVOS qevo-Qels 


a. Poetic are 2d aor. A. émvBov, etc., 2d aor. M. éridopny, ete. 


348, 


Pr. Impf. A. 
koulle 

exoplov 
Kop.tlo 
kop.(Coust 
Kou.ute 
kowlfev 
koulfav 

M, P. 
kopwtfonar 

ekomilopnv 
kop.(fwpae 
koprlotuny 
Kop(Lou 
koulleo Bar 
Kop.l ojuevos 


os 
é0s 


Verbals. 
KOMLO-T 
KOPLoT 


Kopilw (Kopud-) bring. 


Future A. 
Kouta (425) 


Kopolny, -ote 


KOW,LEety 
KOLLOY 
Middle. 
KO}LOUM.AL 


kouroluny 
Kopreto-Jar 
KOPLOULEVOS 
Passive. 
KouicOjoop.ce 
Kopto Ono oluny 


KopirOnoec Oar 
Kop.ic Ono opevos 


Aorist A, 


EKOLLOO, 
Kop.torw 
Koptoauie 
KOLLC OV 
Koptcar 
Kopulo-ds 
Middle. 


EKOPLO-AP.NV 
Koptowpar 
Kopiralnny 
KOpLo-ae 
Koploac bar 
KOMLO-GLEVOS 
Passive. 
exopio-dnv 
KopirOa 
Kozo Gelny 
koploOnre 
Kopo-OAvar 
Kopc-Gels 


Perf. Plup. A. 
KEKOMLKG, 

exeKoptky 
KeKop.LK@ 
KEKOL(KOLL 


KEKOPLUKEVOL 
KEKOPLKOS 
M. P. 

KEKOPLO-P.O 

cKekoplo pny — 
KEKOMLOPLEVOS @ 
KeKopropevos ein 
KEKOUALCO 
kexopio Bar 
KEKOMLGLEVOS 





_ [340 





110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
349, TiOnpe (Oe-) put. 
Pr. Impf. Act. Future Active. Aorist Active. 1st Perf. Plup. Act. 

Ind. TiOnpe Ohow TéGeuka 

er (nv eOnka ereBelxy 
Sub. 719d & TeBelkw 
Opt. riletny Ojos etn TeBelKouse 
Imv. ide Rés 
Inf. TUévaur Oqoew Getvoue TeBerkeva 
Par. wets Onorwy Gets TEVELK@S 

Pr. Impt MP. Future Mid, 2d Aorist Mid. Perf. Plup. M. P. 

Ind. Teno Oyoopat : TEBecuL 

ériBénny eBéuny ereBeluny 
Sub. —- TVGpaw Odpar Teeévos @ 
Opt.  rTiBelunv Oyooluny Betuny TeBeévos elny 
Imy. lero Gov Teleco 
Inf. TVer Oar Oyoeo Bar BéoBar TeGeto Bar 
Par.  tWépevos Onodp.evos Béevos TeBeuevos 

ist Fut. Pass. ist Aor. Pass. 
Ind. TART OUAL eréOny 
Sub. ie TED 
Opt. aS <3 Teno olny Teleiny 
Imv. suf TéOnTL 
Inf. ie teAnoer Sar TeOfvar 
Par. TEOn oC OLEVvOS TeVels 
350, didwpu (do-) give. 
Pr. Impf. Act. Future Active. Aorist Active. 1st Perf. Plup. Act. 

Ind. SS cope Sara Sé5aKa 

ed(do0uv twoKa ES5eS0KH 
Sub. 886 & Se8dKw 
Opt.  88olnv Sdooupe Sony SeScdcouse 
Imv. 8{80v Sds 
Inf. Siddvar Saorewv Sodvar SeSaxévar 
Par. SuS0vs Sdcav Sods ScSaxas 

Pr. Impf. M. P. Future Mid. 2d Aorist Mid Perf. Plup. M. P. 

Ind. S(Sopor Sdcvopar Sedona 

eSrddunv edounv ededounv 
Sub.  8Sdpar Sapar SeSopévos @ 
Opt. S8Sotpny Socoluny Sotunv Sedopnevos elny 
Imv. 88000 3 S00 Sé50c0 
Inf. dfSoc8ar Sacer Oar SdoGar ScSdr0ar 
Par. 8iSdpevos Sao dpevos Sdpevos SeSouevos 

Ist Fut. Pass. ist Aor. Pass. 

Ind. SolAropar eddOnv 
Sub. Poke 5004 
Opt. 3 $9 Sobeinv 
Imy. ae es Sobqooluny Sdbyte 
Inf. - Qe Sobqoer Gar Sobfjvar 
Par. Soyo dpevos So0Bels 





352] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 111 
851. tory (ora-) se¢ up (im perf. and 2d aor. stand). 
Pr. Impf. A Fut. Active. 1st Aor. Act. 2d Aer. Aet. Perf. Plup. Act. 
Loree oTHOW éornka, 
Lorn errno a torny err han 
ior e oTHow oTH ETTHKW, EOTH 
torainy TTHTOUN oTHTAYL orainy  téornkousn, éoralny 
tory OTiTov ornie torade 
toravar oTHoEy oTHrAaL orient ExTnkévar, Eordvar 
ioras oTHT ov oTioas oTas ETTHKOS, EOTAS 
Pr,Impf.M.P. Fut. Mid. 1st Aor. Mid. Fut. Perf. A. 
Vorrapcu TTHTOLAL éorngo 
tordpny errno apn 
Lo-TOp.cL TTHT WAL 
toratauny oTnroluny ornoalpny éornbouu 
{oraco oTHoa 
torac Bar orioer Oat ornocac bar eorncew 
lo-rdevos oTHOOMEvos TTHOAMEVOS eoTncgwy 
ist Future P. ist Aorist P. 
oTabyropar eoradyy 
aa’ oTa0e 
se oradyooluny oradeiny 
ses oradnr. 
PEE oradyoer Gar orabivar 
oTadyoopevos orabeis 
352, Seixvijpu (Setx-) show. 
Fr. Impf. A. Fut. Active. dst Aor. Act. ist Perf. Piup. A. 
Se(xvipt SeiEw SéSaxa 
eSelxvov earsa eSedelxq 
— Sexvio delEw dedelxo 
Serxvdoupe SelFouur SelEauur SedetyX ops 
Selkvu SetEov 
derkvivar Se(Ee Setar SeBery évar 
Seuxvis SelEwv SelEas SeSerx as 
ft, impf, M. P. Future Middle. ist Aor. Mid. Perf. Plup. M. 
Selkvupon SelSopar Sedevypou 
eSexvopny edaEapny SeSelypny _ 
Sexviapar SelEwpar SeScrypevos o 
Seuxvvolunv SaEolunv Sergatuny SeBerypevos ely 
Se{xvucro SeiEar 5é8 SéSabo 
Setkvuc dar SelEec Bar SefEacbar SeSe7x Oar 
Seuxvipevos SerESpevos SaFdpevos Sederypévos 
Future Pass. ist Aorist Pass. 
Serx OAoopar eSely Onv 
Bis dary 9H 
oe Sax Inooluny Sex Gelnv 
Kd a a Selk Oqre 
oe Sery OHoer Oar Sery OFvar 
Serx Iyo-dpevos derx Gels 


112 AUGMENT. [353 


FORMATIVE ELEMENTS OF THE VERB. 


353, The additions by which the different forms of a verb 
are made from the theme, are: 3 
1. The augment, 3. The tense and mode suffixes, 
2. The reduplication, 4. The endings. 


a. Of these, the suffixes and the reduplication form the stems; the 
endings and the augment injflect them. 


Augment. 


354, The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs, 
therefore, to the past tenses of the indicative—the imperfect, 
aorist, and pluperfect. It has two forms: 


1. Syilabic augment, made by prefixing «-. 
2. Temporal augment, made by lengthening an initial 
vowel. 3 


355. The syllabic augment belongs to verbs beginning 
with a consonant: vw loose, impf. €Avov 3 oréAAw send, impf. 
€-oTe\Xov. 

a. p 1s doubled after the syllabic augment (see 49): pizra throw, 
impf. ¢-ppimrop. 

b. Three verbs sometimes have n- as augment, especially in the 
later Attic: pé\X@ intend, Bovrdopa wish, Sivapa am able. Thus impf. 
-peAov, n-Bovdrcuyny, n-Ovvdpny. 


856, The temporal augment belongs to verbs beginning 
with a vowel: yravvov from éAatvw drive, dppwv from sépydw 
move, tkérevov from ixeredw supplicate, vBpilov from tBpilo 
insult.—The vowel a- becomes y-: jyov from dyw lead. 


a. The long vowels remain unchanged; only a- becomes 7n-: #6Aovp 
from aéd\éw contend. But diw hear makes dior. 


$54 D. In Hm., the augment, both syllabic and temporal, is often omitted. 
Ave, eAauve, éxe, for tAve, HAavve, exe. So also in lyric poets, and the lyric 
parts of tragic poetry; but seldom, if ever, in the tragic dialogue. 

3565 D, a. In Hm., initial A is sometimes doubled after the augment (47 D). 
€-AAlaoeto (Aloooua pray). Similarly, w is doubled in @puade learned, v in 
é-vveoy were swomming, o in the verbs cedw drive and oelw shake, and 6 in the 
root det-: &ooeva drove, ¢-ddece feared. 

b. The other dialects have only e- as augment in méAAw, etc.; so also, in 
general, the Attic tragedy. 

356 D, In Hd., the temporal augment is often omitted; the syllabic aug- 
ment, only in the pluperfect.—In the Doric, a- by the temporal augment 
becomes a: dyor. 


ee 


359] AUGMENT. 113 


357. Diphthongs lengthen their first vowel: yobavdyny from 
aicOdvopa. perceive, nxalov from eixdlw guess, wxtipov from 
oixtipw pity, yvgov from avgm increase, yipicxov from etpiocxw 
Jind. 

a. But ov- remains unchanged. And in the later Attic, e-, ev- and 
sometimes ou- remain: edpor for nipoy found. 

b. If a verb has the rough breathing, it is always retained in the 
augmented form. 


358. Augment of the Pluperfect.—The augment of the 
pluperfect is applied to the reduplicated theme: é-Aedv-xy. 
But when the reduplication consists of «- (865) or a- (366), 
the augment is omitted: perf. écradxa, plupf. éoraAxy (not 
yotavkyn) from orédXdw send. 


a. But €ornka stand makes both elornen (older Attic) and éorhin.—éorka 
am like (492) takes the augment on the second syllable, é@xn. 

b. The ‘ Attic reduplication’ (368) takes, as a rule, the augment in 
the pluperfect: dz-owdodn, perf. dz-cAwda am lost ; nknkon, perf. adxnxoa 
have heard. But perf. édndv6a (Epxopar come) has plupf. always éAnAvOn. 


ce. The omission of the pluperfect-augment in other cases than the above 
is not strictly Attic, yet forms like ax-oAdAn, aro-repevyn are still read in some 
editions. 


359. Syllabic Augment before Vowel-Initial.—A. few verbs 
beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment. This with 
e- 1s contracted to a-: eiyoy for «exyov. Here belong 


ayviju break, ga&a aor. €aw permit, eiov. 

GXickopar am taken, éddwv acr.,  €0i¢w accustom, etOrCov. 
but impf. nAcoKopnr. éENioow turn, eihiooov. 

dyOdvea please, €adov aor. Eko draw, eidxov. 

avoly® open, avéwyov. eropat follow, eimopny. 

Opaw see, Em@payr. epydfopat work, eipyaCouny. 

ovpém make water, éovpour. Epm@ Or épmrulw Creep, eiptrov. 

abéw push, éoOour. éotiaw entertain, ciatioy. 

a@véopa buy, éwvovpny. exo have, hold, etyoy. 


a. Here belong, further, the aorists eidov (aipéw take, 5389, 1), cioa 
I set (817 D, 7), and cirov etc., 2d aorist of tinue (476). Cf. also the 
plupf. eiornxn, 358 a. : 

b. Of these, épd sce and dy-oiyw open, in addition to the syllabic 
augment, lengthen o of the theme. 





358 D. b. In Hd., the ‘ Attic reduplication’ is never augmented: he has 
- even akhkoce ete. 
359 D. Hm. has édany from efAw press, etpvoa from éeptw draw, ewvoxdet 
from oivoxoéw pour out wine, fvdavoy and éhvdavoy from avddvw please. In 
Ad., ayvipu, Eanw, Eroua, Zxw are augmented as in Att.; avddvw has impf. 





114 AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. [360 


c. These verbs began originally with a consonant, F or o3 so &yvipt, 4 
originally Fdayviqs, aorist €Fata, tata; éprw, originally FeFem, impf. egepmov, — 
e€pioy, €ipirov. 

d. Irregularly, €oprd(w keep festival has the augment on the second vowel: 
édptacoy instead of jopracoy, cf. 36. 


AUGMENT OF CoMPOUND VERBS. 


360. Compounds, consisting of a preposition and a verb, 
take the augment after the preposition : cia-pepw bring in, 
cio-epepov; tpoo-cyw lead to, Tpog-1yyov. 

a. Prepositions ending ina vowel lose that vowel before e-: dro-pépo 
bear wway, ar-épepoyv. But wepi and zp retain the final vowel: apo is 
often contracted with e: oh yi cece advance, mpovBawoy for mpo-€Batvoy. 


b. The prepositions ¢&, ev, avy have their proper form before e-: 
exteiva extend, e&-érewov; épScdro invade, ev-_Baddov; gvdréyo collect, 
ovy-éeEa. 


361, In some cases the preposition has so far lost its separate force 
that the augment is placed before it: xaGevdm sleep, éxadevdor (yet also 
xabnvdov) ; kabilw sit, éxadifov. So some forms of adinu (476 a), caOnpae 
(484, 2), dudrévyduu (526, ‘oR 

a. Some verbs have two augments, one before and one after the 
preposition : dvéx opal endure, nverxopny;, avopOdw set right, nv@pbovy; 
evoxhéw ANNOY, nv@x ovr. 


362, Denominative verbs (308) derived from nouns already com- 
pounded are not properly compound verbs. Such take the augment 
at the beginning: oikodopéw build (from oiko-ddéuos house-builder), @Ko- 
Odour. 


a. This rule sometimes holds good when such verbs begin with a 
preposition: thus éevayridopar oppose (from évavrios opposite, not from 
ev and avyricopat), nvaytiotpjy; perewmpifo raise aloft (from peréwpos alofe), 
epetewpt(oy. But more commonly the augment comes after the prepo- 
sition: éxxkrnoid(w hold an assembly (éxxdyoi4), efexhnotacor ; UMOTTEV@ 
suspect (vmemros suspected), tmranrevor. —The verb tmapowew behave as 
drunken (mwdapowos) takes two augments: eémap@vour. 


b. The verb S:artdw arbitrate (from Siara arbitration) is augmented as if 
it were a compound of dia; Sujrnoa: and in compounds it takes two aug- 
menis ; kar-edinTnod. 

C. Neste beginning with ed weél and due- all have the augment after the 
adverb when the second part of the compound begins with a short vowel: 
duoapert ew am. displeased (Sugdpeoras), Suonpeatour ; evepyetew benefit (evepy rns), 
evnpyétouy, also evenyérouv. But ductuxéw am unlucky (Svaruxyhs), edusTvxour. 


édydavov, 20 aor. éadov: the rest usually (perhaps always) reject ¢, and take 
either the temporal augment (so aAlexoua, épdm), or none at all (so avotye, 
edw, epydCouat, a0éw, @veopat). 


367] REDUPLICATION. 115 


Reduplication. 


868. The reduplication is the sign of completed action. It 
belongs, therefore, to the perfect, pluiperfect, and future per- 
fect, through all the modes. It consists properly in a repeti- 
tion of the initial sound. 


864. Verbs beginning with a consonant repeat that conso- 
nant with ¢: Avo, perf. AéAvka. A rough mute becomes smooth 
in the reduplication (73 a); Ovw sacrifice, té-OuKa. 


865. In verbs beginning with a double consonant, two con- 
sonants, or p-, the reduplication omits the consonant and con- 
sists of «- only. f is doubled (49). 

Thus wWevdouo lie, perf. epevopat (not re-Wevopar); oré\Aw 
send, é-orahka; pitt throw, &ppida. | 

a. But before a mute and a liquid the reduplication has generally 
its full form : ypdde write, yé-ypapa. Still yv- takes e- only : yryvaoKko 
(yvo-) know, €-yvoxa. And rarely Bd-, yA- do the same. 

b. The perfects xé-xrnuar possess, wé-pynar remember, from roots kra- 
and pya-, are against the rule. So wé-rrwxa am fallen, wé-rTapar am 
spread (presents mimro and meravvipt). 


366, The reduplication has the form e«- in: 
ei-Anda from AapBava(AaB-) take. ei-paprat it 13 fated (yep-, 518, 26). 
€i-Anxa from Aayxdva(Aax-) get by lot. «i-hoxa from éyo gather. 
ei-pyxa have said (pe-, 5389, 8).. de-ei-Acypae from. dta-Aéyopat con- 
Er sé. 
But Aéyw speak has dé-Acypat. 


367. Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel. 
Thus the reduplication in these verbs has the same form as the 
temporal augment: éArilw hope, nrmika; Sppdw MOVE, OppNKa 5 
aropéw am at a loss, nrépyKa; aipéw take, ypyxa. 


368 D. The reduplication is recularly retained in Hm.; yet we find déxa- 
qo (for dcdéxara, pf. 3d pl. of Séxoua receive); cia, eora (orig. Féeoua, 
Féora, from evyoue clothe); Eoxarat, pxaro or éépxato (from épyw or éépyw 
shut); tvwya order. Cf. pf. ofa know in all dialects. The long & remains 
unchanged in the defective perfect participles, adnnés sated (aor. opt. adqjcese 
might be sated), and a&pnuévos distressed. 

In Hd., an initial vowel in some words remains short in the perfect. 


$65 D, Hm. has fepurwuevos soiled (for éppumwpévos); but, on the other 
hand, eupope (for ue-wope) from pelpoua receive part, Zrovua (for oe-cuuan) from 
gevw drive, like the verbs with initial p. In det-douca and det-dia fear (490 D 5), 
Sel-Seyuau greet (528 D 3), the reduplication is irregularly lengthened. 
_ b. The Ionic has é-«rnua regularly formed. 


116 REDUPLICATION. SUFFIXES. [368 


7%] rh 
scold 


pee 


868. ‘Attic Reduplication.’—Some verbs, beginning with a-, — 


e-, o-, followed by a single consonant, prefix that vowel and 
consonant : the vowel of the second syllable is then length- 
ened. This is called ‘ Attic reduplication.’ 


Thus dreidw (adip-) anoint, ad-ndupa, ad-nAiupar; dkovo hear, 
ax-jnkoa (but perf. mid. ixovcpar); dpvocw (opvy-) dig, 6p-epvxa, 
6p-apuypat; édavyw (eda-) drive, édh-1Aaka, €A-nAapar; edAéyxo convict, 
ed-nreypa, etc. Irregularly, eyeipw (eyep-) wake has eyp-nyopa, but 
the perf. mid. is regular: éy-nyeppa. 


369. E as reduplication before a vowel-initial.—The verbs mentioned 
in 359 have e- for the reduplication also, and this with initial e- is 
contracted to e-: dyvime break (orig. Fayvip, perf. FeFaya), eaya; 
eGif@ accustom, etOixa (from e€-eOtxa).—édpdw see makes émpixa; dy-olyo 
open, av-éwya OY av-€wxa.—The root eux- makes perf. ¢-ouw.a am like, 
appear, plup. é-@xyn. Similarly the root ¢«6- or n6é- makes ei-o6a am 
accustomed. 


370. In compound verbs, and verbs derived from compounds, the 
reduplication has the same place as the augment. See 360-362. 


871, REDUPLICATION IN THE PrEesENT.—A different kind of re- 
duplication is that which appears in the present system of about twenty 
verbs. The initial consonant is repeated with «: yi-yvacKk@ (yvo-) 
know ; ri-Onu (Oe-) put. In wip-rAnw fill and wip-mpnae burn this 
reduplication is strengthened by p. 


a. For reduplication in the second aorist, see 436. 


Tense and Mode Suffixes. 


3872, The tense-suffixes, which are added to the theme to 
form the tense-stems, are the following : 


For the Present System, -°|¢-, -7°lc-, -tle-, -v®le-, -aye-, -vele-, -va-, 
-yu-, -7k°|c, OF none. 


368 D. In Hm., more verbs receive the Attic redupl., and sometimes 
without lengthening the vowel after it: aA-dAnua wander from aAd-ouo, ar- 
adveTnua am distressed (cf. Hd. drvera(w am distressed), &p-npa am fitted from 
apaploxw (ap-), ép-épimro from épeimw (epim-) overthrow, 68-edvara is wroth (ddve-), 
dp-wpa am roused from dpvixe (op-) etc.—also the defective perfects, av-nvobe 
issues (or issued), ém-ev-nvobe is (or was) close upon. For ax-ax-mévos sharpened, 
see 53 D a.—Hd. has irregularly dpatpnxa from aipé-w take. 

869 D. For e7-w6a, Hm. has also @w6a (Hd. only @w6a): the orig. root was 
perhaps oF 76-, pf. e-oFw6-a (28 a).—Further, Hm. has éam-w (Feam-) cause to 
hope, pf. €orma hope, plup. ééAmea; and épdw (Fepy-, Eng. work) do, pf. opya, 
plup. édpyea; also é-epuevos from etpw join. 

872 D. For epic first aorist forms with suffix -7|<- see 428 D b.—For @ 


875] SUFFIXES. ENDINGS. 117 


Future system, -o°|.-. 

First aorist system, -ca-. 

Second aorist system, -°|¢-, or none. 

First perfect system, -xa- (plupf. -«y- or -xer-). 
Second perfect system, -a- (plupf. -7- or -e1-). 
Perfect middle system, none (future perfect -o|e-). 
First passive system, -@e- (future passive -@n0°|-). 
Second passive system, -e- (future passive -y0°|-). 


a. In these suffixes the variable vowel (|<) appears as o before p or 
y, and in the optative; otherwise as €: Avo-pev, Avo-t-yu1, AUe-Te. 


373, The Subjunctive puts the Jong variable vowel -»|,- in the 
place of the final vowel of the tense-suffix. But in the aorist passive 
-“|,- 1s added to the tense-stem. So too in the present and second 
aorist, when there is no tense-suffix (u-forms). 





374. The Optative adds the mode-suffix -1- or -iy- to the tense- 
stem: Avo-t-pt, do-in-v. 

a. The form -.- is used only before active endings. It is always 
employed in the singular of tenses which have the w-inflection (885) ; 
do-in-v, kvGe-in-v. In the dual and plural of these tenses, it sometimes 
occurs, but these forms belong to the later Attic and the common 
dialect; AvOeinre, Soinoay. It is also regularly used in the singular of 
contract forms: ripao-in-y, contr. ripeny. 

b. Before -y in the 3d plur. active, -ce- is always used: Avo-ve-v.—For -1a- 
as mode-suffix in the first aorist, see 434. 


Endings. 


375. There are two series of endings, one for the active 
voice, the other for the middle. The passive aorist has the 
endings of the active ; the passive future, those of the middle. 


a. The endings of the finite modes are called personal endings, be- 
cause they have different forms for the three persons, 


doubled in the future and first aorist see 420 D, 428 D a.—For ‘ Doric’ future 
with suffix -ve°|e- see 426. 

The suffix of the pluperfect was originally -xea-, -ea-, which appears in 
Some of the Ionic forms: see 458 D. 


373 D, Hm. often has -9|¢- instead of -|,- in the subjunctive; in the ac- 
tive before the endings -rov, -uev, -re, and in middle forms. This forma- 
tion occurs chiefly in the first aorist, the second aorist of the mi-form, and 
the second aorist passive. See these tenses severally, 483 D b, 444 D, 478 
Da. In other tenses this formation is less frequent. It is seldom found in 
the present indicative of verbs in -a. 


374 D, a. Hm. almost never has -r7- in the dual and plural. For contract 
optatives in Hm. and Hd. see 410 D a. 


118 ENDINGS. [76 


376, INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND OPTATIVE. 








ACTIVE. — MIDDLE. 
Principal tenses. Past tenses. | Principal tenses, Past tenses. 
Ss. i put -y ~pat =p 
Ds -s [-ce] -s -oat -0 
-§ -oi [-re] — -TaL -TO 
D. 2 ~Tov -Tov -o Gov -o boy 
4 -TOV -TnV -o Gov -o Ony 
Pog -pev [-pes] -pev [-pes | -peGa -y<ba 
9 ~TE -TE -~rGe -o Ge 
3 -yvot [-vre} -y, -Tav -yTaL -VTO 


a. The endings in brackets are earlier forms, not used in Attic Greek, but 
found in other dialects. For change of -r1, -yri, to -o1, -vot, see 69. 


877. The ending -cGa for -s (second person singular) is found in a 
few pu-forms: ¢pyn-oOa thou saidst. And in presents of the p-form 
the ending -dov 1s used for -yov: see 885, 7. 


378, The ending of the first person plural is also used for the first person 
dual.—A. special ending -uefov, for the middle first person dual, occurs only 
in Hom. ¥ 485, Soph. El, 950 and Phil. 1079, beside two instances cited by 
Athenaeus. 

a. -Tnv is sometimes used for -roy in the second person dual of the past 
tenses: eixéerny you had. 


379, The Subjunctive has the endings of the principal 
tenses ; the Optative those of the past tenses. 

a. But the ist sing. optative active takes -ys: Avor-pe; unless -u- is 
the mode-suffix. The 3d plural has -y after -1e-, -cay after -u-. 


b. Optatives in -ow for -ouue occur very rarely: tpépow Eur. frag. 895 
Nauck, audprow Cratin. Drapetides frag. 6 Meineke. 





876 D. a. The Dor. retains the earlier forms -r: for -o1, -vri for -vo1, -wes 
for -wev. It has -ray for -rny, -uay for -uny, -cOav for -cOnv. Thus tints, 
AvoyTi, AvowvTi, AeAdKaYTL, AVTOUES, EAVOMGY, EAeAVTOaY, for TiOnoL, AvouOL, 
Avowol, AcEAVKGTL, AVaouer, EAXDduNY, EXCAUT OND. 

b. Hm. sometimes has -rey for -rnv and -c@oy for -c@ny in the third person 
dual of the historical tenses. , 

ce. The poets have often -ueoda for -ueba: yryvduerba. 

d. The Ionic has also the endings -ara, -aro, for -vrat-yro in the perfect 
and pluperfect middle: see 464 a. Hd. sometimes has these in the present 
and imperfect of ui-forms: see 415 D c. 

e. In the optative, Hm. and Hd. always have -aro for -yro: yiyol-aro for 
ylyvoi-vro; though in the subjunctive they always have -vra: ytyvw-vra. 

877 D. In Hm. -c@a is more frequent ; Ti@naGa, S:d0i06a. He has it even 
in the subjunctive; e@€Anaéa for é@éAns (€0€Aw wish): rarely in the optative; 
KAdtois0a for Kratos (KAalw weep). 


333] USE OF THE ENDINGS. 119 


880, IMPERATIVE. 








ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
S2.-G. D.2.-rov P. 2. -re S.2. -co D. 2. -cOov P. 2. -cbe 
3. -T@ 3. -TOV 3. -VTOY 8. -00m 3.-cOov 3. -cOov 
Or -Tacav or -cdwcay 








a, The endings -rwoay and -cdwoar, if Attic at all, belong only to the later 
Attic. 


381. Inrrnitive.—The infinitive-endings are 


Active, -ev (contracted with preceding « to -ew), or -va. 
Middle, -c 6a. 


382. ParticirpLe.—The participle forms its stem by a special suffix 
added to the tense-stem. This is 
for the Active, -vr- (but for the perfect active -or-), 
for the Middle, -pevo-. | 


For the declension of the participles and the formation of the feminine, 
see 241-244. 


UsE oF THE ENDINGS. 


383, A. The Common Horm of Inflection. 


This belongs (1) to the present and imperfect and the second 
aorist active and middle, when the stem ends in a variable vowel; 
(2) to the future of all voices, the first aorist active and middle, the 
perfect active. 


1. The endings -ws and -ox are omitted: Avo, A€AuKe. 
a. Except -ue in the optative (379 a): Adou-w. 

2. The imperative ending -6& is omitted: Ave. 

3. The 3d plural of the past tenses has -y: €dvo-v. 

4. The middle endings -ca and -co drop o (71) and are contracted: 
Avec for Nve-(o)ar, Avy for Ady-(c)at, eAvov for eAve-(c)o, ehoow for 
edvoa-(o)o. But in the optative there is no contraction: Avoo for 
Avol-(T)o. 





380 D. a. The endings -rwoay and -c@woay do not occur in Hm. 


381 D. For -ev or -vat, Hm. often has -ueva: or -wev (also Dor.), with the 
accent always on the preceding syllable: méumeww or meumeuevon or meuméeuev to 
send. Hm. never uses -uey after a long syllable or -va: after a short one: 
hence orfpevat Or orjva, never orynuev, Sauhuevoar or Saujvar aor. pass. to be 
subdued, never Saunuev, Eorduevat or éotduev, never éotdva. Yet we have 
i€vat as well as tuevau, Zuev to go. 

883 D. 1. Hm. often retains -m1, -o: in the subjunctive: e0éAwu, ebéAnot 
(more correctly written é@éAno1) for €0éAw, €6€An. 

4, In Hm. and Hd. the vowels, after o is dropped, usually remain uncon- 
tracted: Avoea, éAveo, etc. Hd. contracts -ya: to -y and sometimes -eo to -ev: 


120 ACCENT OF THE VERB. [384 


5. The infinitive active has -ev (881): Ade. 
b. Except the first aorist and the perfect. 


6. Active participles with stems in -ovyr- make the nominative 
singular masculine in -wy (see 241): Adar. 


384, The 2d singular indicative middle has -e: in Attic, -y in all 
other dialects (except Ionic, see 8383 D 4). The Common dialect had 
-7 except in BovrAe, ote, from BovAopat wish and otopar think. 


385, B. The Mi-form of Inflection. 


This belongs (1) to the present and imperfect, and the second aorist 
active and middle, when the stem does not end in a variable vowel ; 
(2) to the pluperfect active, the perfect and pluperfect middle and the 
aorist passive. 

1. The endings -w: and -ou are retained in the indicative: ri@n-, 
TiOn-c. 

2. The imperative ending -@ is sometimes retained: da-6i, a77-01; 
sometimes not: forn. 

3. The 3d plural of the past tenses has -cay: éride-cap. 

4. The middle endings -ca: and -co usually retain o: ride-cat, 
\u-T0. 

- Not, however, in the subjunctive or optative; and usually not in the 
md aorist. 

5. The infinitive active has -vac: reOé-var, AvOy-vae. 

6. Active participles with stems in -ovr- make the nominative sing. 
masc. in -ovs (241): ddovs. 

7. The 3d plural present indicative active has generally the ending 


-acol. 










Accent of the Verb. 


886, As a general rule, the accent stands as far as possible 
from the end of the form (recessive accent, 104 b); on the 
penult, when the ultima is long by nature; otherwise, on the 
antepenult : Aicdcbwv, AvoacOe. 

Final -ae and -o. have the effect of short vowels on the accent 
(102): Avovrat, Adoat, AVOnodpevot. But not so in the optative: Avcat, 
eAvKOL. 

For contract forms, the accent is determined by the rules in 105. 





2d sing. sub. BovAn, imv. BotAeo or BovAev wish. Hm. contracts -ea: to -e 
only in der thou wilt see. 
5. For -ev Hm. has sometimes -uevar or -mev (881 D). 


385 D, 8. Hm. often has -v for -cav, always with a short vowel preceding: 
éBa-v, €pa-y for €By-cayv, Epy-cay. 

5. Hm. has also -weva: and -yev (381 D),. 

7. Hm. has -aor only in tao they go and @aor they are (477, 478 D). — 

8. For -arat, -aro in 3d plur. middle, see 376 D d. 


391] | ACCENT OF THE VERB. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


387. In the finite modes there are only the following exceptions: 
In the second aorist of the common form the imperative 2d sing. 
accents the end of the stem: 


a. uniformly in the middle: durod contracted from duré-(o)o. 
b. in the following active forms: ecimé say, EhOE come, evpé find, 
idé sce, NaBé take ; but not in their compounds: dz-eure. 


388, In optatives of the pu-inflection the accent can not go back 
of the mode-suflix -1-: iorai-re, dudoi-To, AvOetev. 


389. The infinitive and participle present several exceptions: 


a. In the second aorist active and middle they accent the end of 
the stem: umety (for Auwé-ev) Aumrav, Auré-c Oat. 

b. In the perfect middle they accent the penult: AckvcOa, reri- 
pnoOa, NeAvsévos. 

c. The first aorist active infinitive accents the penult: ripjoa. 

d. All infinitives in -va accent the penult: rudévai, NeAuKévar, AVOHvat. 

e. All third-declension participles in -s, except that of the first 
aorist active, are oxytone: dcdovs, AcAuKas, AvOeis, oTareis. 


390. In the first aorist, these three forms, which have the same 
letters, are often distinguished by the accent: 


8d Sing. Opt. Act. mré£a Tavoat Tehéoar SnrA@oat 
Inf. Act. md&£ac Tavoat Tehéoat OnA@oat 
2d Sing. Imv. Mid. wrééa Taveat TéNecat SnA@oa 


391. For compound verbs there are the following restrictions. 


a. The accent can only go back to the syllable next preceding the 
simple verb: emi-cyes hold on, avvéx-Sos give out together (not émoyxes, 
ouvekdos). 


b. The accent can never go back beyond the augment or reduplica- 
tion: am-ndée he went away, ap-ixra he has arrived, wap-nv he was there 
(not amndGe, apixra, mapnv). This is the case, even when the aug- 
ment, falling upon a long vowel or diphthong, makes no change in 
it: tm-eixe he was yielding, but Um-ecxe imperative, yield. 

ce. The middle imperative in -ov of the second aorist of the ui-form throws 
the accent back when compounded with a preposition of two syllables: amd-dou 


sell, kara-Oov put down ; but not when the preposition is of one syllable: év@0d 
stow away, mpoov abandon. 


389 D, a. In Hm., the infinitive of the 2d aor. mid. conforms in some 
words to the general rule: ayéperOa (&yelpw assemble), EpecOar (etpoucn ash), 
Ex GeoOa (exAdvouae am odious), éypecrbat (éyelpw arouse). 

b. In Hm., the perfects aAdAno@a, drartmevos (aAdouma wander), axadxno bat, 
Gicaxhuevos or axnxeuevos (Axvuuae am pained), éoodvucvos (oevw drive), con- 
form to the general rule, 


391 D. c. In uncontracted forms the accent always goes back: év@eo, avvGeco. 








PRESENT SYSTEM: CLASSES OF VERBS. [392 


FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF TENSE-SYSTEMS. 


PRESENT SYSTEM, or 


Present and Imperfect. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSE-STEM. CLASSES OF VERBS. 


392, The present stem of each verb is formed from the 
theme in one of seven ways. With reference to this we 
distinguish seven classes of verbs. 


a. All classes contain primitive verbs; denominative verbs are confined 
to classes 1, 4, 5 and 6. 


893, Wrest Crass (Variable Vowel Class).—The suffix -°|,- 
(variable vowel, 310) is added to the theme to form the present 
stem. ‘The Ist sing. indic. act. changes this to -o: 


déy-w speak present stem Aey-°|.- theme Xey-. 
dire-w love present stem quAc-°|.- theme ¢ur«-. 

a. In presents in -va the quantity of v wavers, but in Attic long o 
prevails: thus always Av loose, dt@ go under, rrvw spit, vw rain, and 
generally pio make grow, Gia sacrifice ; probably also Ev scrape, pie 
shut the eyes. So always d\vo am beside myself, aptiw prepare, Saxpvw 
weep, idpve establish, irytiw am strong, kaxtw lament, unviw divulge, and 
almost always ckoAvw hinder. On the other hand kdvo hear (poetic), 
and pedva am drunk. 

b. In ylyvouc become (for yi~yev-o-uat) and toxw hold (for ot-cex-w) the 
present has the reduplication (871). 


394, Seconp Crass (Strong-Vowel Class).—The suffix -°|,- 
is added, and the theme-vowel a, t, v takes the strong form 
n, €l, €v (32): tHK-w melt (present stem ryx-°|.-) theme tak-; 
Neizr-w leave, theme Auz-; devy-w flee, theme dvy-. 

a. Roots ending in -v- lose this vowel in the present (44): mAé@ sail 
\ for wAev-@ (7Av-), yéo pour for xev-@ (yv-). So 
| Géw (Ov-) run. mvéw (mvv-) blow, breathe. 
véw@ (vu-) swim. pew (pu-) flow. 


395, Turrp Crass ( Zau-class)—The suffix -r°|,- is added : 
Tuir-tTw strike (present stem tv7-r°|.-) from theme tuz- ; Baz-tw 
dip, theme Bad¢- ; kadvr-tw cover, theme xadvf-. 


a. The theme (always a root) ends in a labial mute. Whether this is z, 
B, or @ cannot be ascertained from the present, but only from the second 


893 D. a. Hm. has Adw (and Avw) dtw, iw, Om (and btw) mriw, kiw, vw. 
Theocr. has wréw. And GAvw, aptiw, idpvw, kwxtw occur in Hm., icxdw and 
wavew in Pind, 





401] CLASSES OF VERBS. 123 


vo 


aorist (if there be one) or some other word from the same root. Thus 2d 
aor. ¢-r’m-nv, ¢-Bad-nv, and the noun KadvB-n cover. 


396. Fourtu Crass (Lota-class).—The suffix -v°|,- is added ; 
this always occasions sound-changes, as follows : 


897. x, x, 7, 9, and sometimes y, unite with c to form oo 
(later Attic rr): see 67. Thus dvAdcow guard (present stem 
dvdaco|.-) for dvAax-ww, theme dvdAakx-; tapdcow disturb for 
Tapax-iw, theme tapay- 3 tdcow arrange for ray-ww, theme tay-. 

a. The final consonant must be determined as above, 395 a. The future, 


according as it ends in -w or -ow, will show whether the consonant is a pal- 
atal or lingual. 


b. In wécow (men-) cook, the present comes from an older form of the 
theme, 7ex-. 


398, 6, less often y, unites with « to form ¢ (68): dpaw tell 
for ¢pad-ww ; kpdlw cry for Kpay-w. 

a. Here also the future will show whether the stem ends in a lingual (6) 
or a palatal (+). 

b. Themes in -yy- drop y nasal before ¢: KAdw (KAayy-) shriek, mAdQw 
(mAayy-) cause to wander, cadrmifw (cadrmiyy-) sound the trumpet. 

ce. In vi¢w (B-) wash the present comes from an older form of the theme, 
wey-. 


399, A with « produces AA (66) : BadAdAw (for Badr-w) throw. 


a. Only dpetAw (for opeA-iw) am obliged follows the analogy of 400, being 
distinguished thus from dpéAdAw (also for opeA-iw) increase, 


400. v and p with c transpose it to the preceding syllable, 
where it unites with the vowel of the theme (65): daivw show 
for dav-w ; dbeipw destroy for dbep-ww. If the theme-vowel is 
t or v, it becomes long: xpivw distinguish for kpw-w 3; cipe 
drag for cvp-w. 


401. Two verbs with themes in -av- drop the v: kalo burn for 
kav-iw (44) and kdaiw weep for xrav-.w. The Attic prose, however, 
uses the forms xdo, kddw (85). 


398 D. Aeol. -cSw for -¢w, frequent in Theoc. (63 D): sipicdw for cipiqa 
pipe. In Dor., most verbs in -(w have themes in -y-: KouiGw take care of, aor. 
exduioa (for e-Koutd-oa), but Dor. éxdusta (for e-koury-ca). In Hm., too, these 
verbs have -y- much oftener than in Att.: so in drama (w lay waste, datCw di- 
vide, évapi(w slay, strip, mepunpi(w debate in mind, modreui(w war, oTrupedtw 
push, ete. 

399 D. a. Hm. has ciAw (€A-) press (not cAAw). But instead of dpetAw he 
commonly uses the form opéAdw. 

401 D. In Hm., some other vowel-themes annex -1w: Salw (Sav-) burn, 
Salou (Sa-) divide, vatw (va-) inhabit, matouat (ua-) reach after, ete. 


} 


124 PRESENT SYSTEM: CLASSES OF VERBS, [402 





402, Firra Crass (Wasal Class).—A suffix containing v is 
added. 

Qa. Ven: TEV cut (present stem rep-v°|,-), theme rep-. 

b. -av°le- : duapt-dvw err, theme dpapr-. 

C. -aV°|e~ with an inserted nasal: pav6-dvw learn, theme pab-; 
Aap B-avw take, theme AaB-; Aayx-dvw get by lot, theme Aax-. 

REM. -ay°|-- is used alone, if the theme-vowel is long by nature or 
position: if otherwise, a nasal is inserted in the theme (v, py y, accord- 
ing as it precedes a lingual, labial, or palatal mute). 

d. -ve°|.-: ix-véo-par come, theme ix-. 

e. -vu- (after a vowel -vvv-): deik-vi-y. show, theme dex- ; 
oBé-vv vp quench, theme ofe-. 

f, -va-: wép-vy-pu sell (present stem zep-va-), theme zep-. 


403, Stxru Crass (Inceptive Class).—The suffix -ox°|.- (or 
-iok®|.-) is added: dpé-cxw please, eae Jind. The vowel 
before -cxw is usually made long. 

a. This class is called ¢nceptive, because some verbs which belong 
to it have the sense of beginning or becoming: yapdake grow old. 

b. Several presents have the reduplication: yi-yvo-cKxw (yvo-) know. 


ec. A mute before -oxw is dropped: Adockw for Aak-crw speak. Quite 
irregular are uloyw for pry-cKw mix, and mdcxw for 1ad-cKw suffer. 


404, Seventu Cuass (oot-Class).—The theme itself, with 
or without reduplication, serves as present stem: dy-pi say, 
theme and present stem da-; ri-Oy-ws put, present stem Tie-, 
theme 6e-. 


405, Sometimes the present has a different theme from the other 
systems. Thus it may have a longer theme in -e-, while the other 
systems are formed from a shorter one without -e-: pres. doxéw (doxe-) 
seem, but future dd&@ (dox-). More often the present has the shorter 
theme, and the other systems (or some of them) come from a longer 
theme ending in -e-, or in -o-: present BovAopa (BovA-) wish, but 
future BovAncopar (Boure-). 


INFLECTION. 


406. A. THE Common Form (Presents in -w).—Present 
stems ending in a variable vowel (-*|.-) are inflected according 
to 383. Par adigm 314. 


407, The following points require notice: (a.) The 1st sing. pres. ind. act. 
lengthens the suffix-vowel o tow: Avw. (b.) In the 2d and 8d sing. -ers and -e 


407 D. (b.) The Doric (Theocr.) has sometimes -es for -ers in the 2d pers. 
(c.) The Doric has -ovrt, -wyt:; see 69 D. 


” \ 
\ 
\ 


409] PRESENT SYSTEM: INFLEOTION. — 125 


are perhaps due to epenthesis (cf. 65); Avers for Ave-ot, Aver (Ader) for Ade-T1. 
So, too, -ys -n in the subjunctive active. (c.) In the 8d plur. active -ova: is 
for -o-vor (55 d) and -wa: for -w-vor. (d.) For the middle forms of the second 
person, Aver, eAvou, etc., see 384 and 388, 4. 


408. The Subjunctive has -»|,- for -9|.-. The Optative has the 
mode-suflix -:-; for \vo-te-v, see 374 b. 


409, Contract PRrREsENTS.—Verbs in -aw, -ew, and -ow ¢con-- 
tract the final a, ¢, or o of the theme with the following vari- 
able vowel: ripa-w tind honor, pPrcew Piro love, dnrd-w dSyrAG 
manifest. Paradigms 323-825. 


a. The contraction follows the rules, 37, 89. In reading the para- 
digms, tke wncontracted form will be seen by omitting the syllable 
next after the parenthesis; the contract form, by omitting the letters 
in the parenthesis itself: thus in rip(do)@-wey the uncontracted form 
is tiudopev, the contract form ripaper. 


409 D. Contract PRESENTS IN THE DIALECTS. 


Usage of Homer.—a. Verbs in -aw are often contracted as in Attic: d6pa, 
épas, 6p. When uncontracted, they are subject to a peculiar assimilation of 
_ the concurrent vowels, which gives for ae, ay, a double a-sound, and for ao, aw, 
aov a double o-sound. One of the vowels is usually lengthened; rarely both. 


bpdw for épdw pevowdw for pevowdw 
épdwvTes épdovTes nBa@ovTes nBaovtes 
Spdw@pt Spaorue HBdotput NBdorue 

bpdwot dpdove'e nBdowoa nBaovaa 
dpaas épdets Mevowvag mevouvdet 
épdac Oat dpdeo Bat pvaac bat pvaco Oa. 


The second vowel must have stood (before the change) in a long syllable; 
otherwise the uncontracted form is not used: thus épéwuey (for dépdouer) is 
an impossible form. A single exception is uvwdéuevos. The former vowel is 
lengthened only when the word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric 
verse (exception yeAdorTes). 

Unecontracted forms without assimilation occur rarely : dotdider, vorerdovra: 
even with lengthening: weivdovra. In imperfects ao is sometimes changed to 
€0: fvreov (avTdw encounter), ducxAcouev (6uoxaAdw rebuke). Notice xpedmevos 
for xpadpuevos. 

b. Verbs in -ew are commonly uncontracted, but sometimes ee, ees go into 
€1; €0, cov, into ev: Tedder, TeAcovol, TeAceTAL, TEA€omeEvos, OF TEAEL, TEAEVOL, 
TeheiTa, TeAcYmevos. In the 2d sing. mid. -é-e-az, -¢-e-o may become -e7at, -€7o, 
by contraction of ce, or -éa, -éo, by rejection of one €: miOetae or midéa, for 
pode-c-ar thou sayest. An older form of these verbs was in -elw: so veucelo 
for verxéw quarrel, éredelero from redéw complete. 

e. Verbs in -ow are contracted as in Attic. But sometimes they have 
forms with a double o-sound, like verbs in -aw: dpéwor for apdovor (apdw 
plough), imvéovras (irvdw sleep). 


Usage of Herodotus.—d. Verbs in -aw commonly change a before an o-sound 
to e: Tiew, TiueovTa, Tiueduevos, Tiuéovet; Eo rarely goes into ev: éripmevy (Att. 
ériuwv). Otherwise they contract a with the following vowel as in Att.; 





f 
f 


f 


126 ' PRESENT SYSTEM: INFLECTION. [410 — 


410, a. In the optative active, contract verbs have generally -.- 
(874 a) in the singular, but very seldom in the dual and plural. 

b. In the infinitive active, -a-erv, -o-e give -ay, -ovv (not -ay, -o1v) because — 
-e. 1S a Spurious diphthong; see 40 a and 3881. 


411, Verbs in -ew of two syllables admit only the contraction into 
et. Wherever contraction would result in any other sound, the un- 
contracted form is used. Thus wAé-o said makes in the pres. ind. 
mAé-@, TAEts, TWAEt, dual mdetrov, plur. mAé-opev, mreiTe, wWAé-ovot. Ex- 
cept dé-o bind, which makes 70 dovy (for d€-ov), Soda (for dé-opar), 
etc., and is thus distinguished from 6é-@ want, require, which follows 
the rule, making 70 d€-op the requisite, déopa, I request. 


412, Seven verbs in -aw take 7 instead of &@ in the contract forms. 
Thus ¢d-o live, Gis (not (as), cn, Cire, (jv, etc. So also wewd-w hunger, 
dupa-o thirst, kvd-w scratch, opa-w wash, :Wda-o rub, and ypa-opar use. 

a. piyd-w am cold has w and » in contract forms, instead of ov and o: inf. 
pryay, opt. pryeny. 

b. Aov-w bathe sometimes drops v (44), and is then contracted as a verb in 
-ow: €Aou for €Ao(v)-e, Aoduae for Ao(v)-o-uaL, ete. 


413. B. Tue Mi-Form.—Present stems not ending in a 
variable vowel,—i. e., those of class 7 and those im -vv- and 


-va- of class 5,—are inflected according to 385. Paradigms 
329-332. 


Timas, Tiare, Tiudunv, Tiuacdar; So also mid. imv. tiv@, impf. éeriud. But 
Xpdoua changes ao to ew: xpéwmau. 

e. Verbs in -ew are uncontracted, except that eo, eov may go into ev: 
piréw, Pirer, Hrrgoiut, PiAcouar OF Pireduan, prAdeovar or Pircdor. But det w 
as necessary and its inf. de7y are usually contracted. Instead of 2d sing. mid. 
piré-e-0, eptré-e-o, we find forms with only one e, giAéo, epiréo. 

f. Verbs in -ow are contracted as in Att., but sometimes have -ev in- 
stead of -ov: SNAG, SnAot, SnAGuat, SnAciunv, SnAovor or SyAcvot, €dnAov or 
édnAev. 

Dorie Contraction —g. The Doric contracts « with o, w (not in the ultima) 
to & instead of w: it contracts a with e, 7, €1, n, to 7, n, instead of a, @: wewa- 
pes (for mewapev), wewavtTs (for meat), dp7te (for dpare), 6pm (for dpa), 
épiv (for dpav); see 37 D handi. The Ion. contraction of eo, eov to ev belongs 
also to the Doric. 

Acolic Inflection.—h. For -aw, -ew, -ow, the Aeolic (of Lesbos) has peculiar 
forms in -aut, -nut, -wpt, with the weinflection: piAnu, prrnpevos, Soxiuops 

410 D. a. In contract present optatives Homer scarcely ever has -ty-; Hd. 
uses.,’ for verbs in -aw (rijugnv), but not for those in -ew and -ow. 

412 D, Hm. has mewhueva, xvj; but d@ew. Hd. has (jy, dibjv, but 
Xpacbat, Kay, TMEV. 

c. Other irregular contractions in Hm, are: mpocavdnrny (abddw speak), 
ouveyThrny (aytdw encounter), ameAhtny (areiréw threaten), wevOhuevan (mevOew 
mourn), robhuevou (ro0ew Miss), Pophmeva and pophvat (pogew bear). Cf. 409 Dh, 


- 


[419 PRESENT SYSTEM: MI-FORM. 127 


414, The end-vowel of the stem is made long in tthe singu- 
lar of the indicative active: ri@y-y, stem Tife- 3 edeixdv-v, stem 
SeKvu-. 


415, a. Stems in -a- contract -a-aou in the 3d plur. pres.: (oraot. 
b. In the present imperative -@ is omitted, and the stem-vowel 


lengthened: torn, deikvi. 


416. The forms in -oo rarely drop o and are contracted : so in 

oetry Tidov, toro for rideco, iaraco. But in dvvawa can and ériorapa 

understand, this is generally the case: édvve, nriara. We have even 
poetic dvvy for Sivaca, and épiea for épieras. 


417. The subjunctive adds the mode-suffix -»|,-, and contracts it 
with final a, ¢, o of the stem : 7166 for re6é ; but not with vu: devi. 
In contraction, an, ay, on give n, n, » (contrary to 87 d, 39 c): iorjra 
for iorénra, dudes for dudons. 

a. But in three verbs -#!,- takes the place of the stem-vowel, so 
there is no contraction. These are dvva-ya can, émiora-pa understand, 
kpépa-par hang ; subj. dvvw-pat, émigTw-pat, Kpépo-pat, 


418. a. The optative mode-suffix is -1- or -w- according to 874 a. 
For decxviiouut, Teoiuny, see 419 b and c. 

b. The accent of the optative follows 388: icrairo. But the verbs 
mentioned in 417 a are exceptions: dvyairo, émicrairo, kpépatro. 


419. In some forms the pu-verbs take the inflection of presents in -o, 
a variable vowel being added to the stem. This is the case in: 


a. The imperfect forms edidovv, edidous, édidov; ériders, érier (used 
for edidwv, -ws, -w; ériOns, -n). So in the present riGeis (more Attic 
than ridns) and in the imperative rides and Sidov. These forms are 
made as if from ridew and d:d0. 

b. The optative of verbs in -vipe: Secxvd-oun, like Avo. 

c. The optative ri@oipny, cf. didoipny. 


414 D. In Hm. the stem-vowel is sometimes long in other forms: as 
TiOnucvat, TLOnmevos, ajvor to blow: di¢nua seek. 


415 D. a. Hm. and Hd. always have 3d plur. riéetor, did0t001, pryyvict, etc., 
but both have ido: they go and Hm. has éao they are. 

b. Hm. sometimes retains -6:: d45w0 give, duvuds swear. 

ec. Hd. has forms with -ara, -aro in the 3d plur. of the middle: 7:@éara, 
éridéaro, even éduvéato for édtvayTo, etc. 


417 D. a. So in Hm. and Hd. the pres. subj. active of fui, according to 
most editions: % (Hd.) fyo. (Hm.) for if. 

419 D. a. The Ionic has other forms of this sort in the active. Hm. has 
did0ts (cf. SnAots for SnAd-ers) and d.doteGa, Sid07 (and Sidwor), Te? (and TtOyor), 
_ ters (with irregular accent), te: (and for). Also xaOlora (= -iora-e), imv. In 
Hd. tet, ridets, Ti8e?, S:d00s, 51507, iorG, are perhaps always used. So, too, Hd. 
has impf. 3d sing. fora for torn. 

b. But Hm. has opt. Saviro for daivu-i-ro from datvuuou feast. 


& 
128 FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [420 
/ FUTURE SYSTEM, or 
/ Future Active and Middle. 
ay The future. stem is formed by adding -o°|.- to the 


theme, and is inflected like the present of the common form 
(406) : -cw, -ceas, -ce etc. Paradigm 315.. 


421, a. Mute Verbs.—A labial or palatal mute at the end 
of the theme unites with o, forming y or é: a lingual mute is 
dropped before o (54). 


Komr@ (Kom-) cut Kowa Taco® (ray-) arrange ra&o 

Brarre (BAaB-) hurt Bravo épvccw (opvx-) dig dpv&e 

ypap-w write ypavro ppagw (ppad-) tell dpdocw 
whéx-@ twist THEE@ omévd-@ Pour omeiow (55 d). 


For rpép-w nourish, Opéyro, and the like, see 74 c. 


b. Vowel Verbs.—A short vowel at the end of the theme 
becomes long before o (33). 


€d-@ permit €dow mové-@ make Tomjo@ 
Tipa-w honor Tipnow Sovdrd-w enslave dovAog@ 


For exceptions, see 503. 


c. Verbs of the second class (394) have the strong form of the theme 
in the future: weiA (m6-) persuade, weiaw; mvéw (mvv-) breathe, mvevoo- 


pat. 


422, Liquid Future.—The future of liquid verbs ends in 
-ew instead of -cw; € is contracted with the following vowel, 
as in the present of drew: daivw (dav-) show, davé-w, contracted 
gavo. Paradigm 326. 

a. -ew is for -eow: o« is dropped between two vowels (71). 

b. KéAAw (KeA-) land, nipw (kup-) fall in with, dpvips rouse make kéAow, 
kipow, pow, with o. 


Contract Future from Vowel and Mute Verbs. 


423. Some verbs in -ew drop o in the future, and contract: redé-@ 
complete, fut. rehéow, TeAé-w, TeA@; 1st plur. reAodper, etc. The future 
thus made has the same form as the present. 


420 D. In Hm. o of the future is often doubled after a short vowel : éAecow 
for dAécw (bAADUL destroy), aviccw for avicw (aviw achieve). 

421 a. For fut. in -§w from pres. in -¢w, frequent in Hm., see 898 D. 

422 D, The future in -ew has in the dialects the same forms, contracted 
and uncontracted, as the present in -ew (409 D b and e). 

b. Hm. has other exceptions: O€pcouam (O€pw warm); cf. 481 D «. 


429] FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 1929 


424, Verbs in -a¢w (themes in -ad-) sometimes do the same : BiBdtw 
cause to go, fut. BiBacw, BiBd-w, BiB. Similarly eAavyw (eda-) drive, 
edd(o)@, eda, eas, eda, etc. 


425, Verbs in -1¢w (themes in -.d-) make their future in -vew instead 
of -1c@, and contract: Kopifw (Kopud-) convey, Kopi-éw, Kopi; 1st plur. 
Kopuovpey, etc.; fut. mid. xkouiotlpa. The name Attic Puture has been 
given to this formation. 


426. Some verbs have a future in -ceoua, contracted -cotpa, in- 
stead of -copa: mvé-w (mvv-, mvev-) breathe, mvevoé-opa, mvevoodpat } 
dhevy-w (pry-) jiee, pevEotpa. Here -ce|e- is the tense-suffix. This 
formation is found only in the future middle, and only when it has an 
active meaning. It is called the Doric Future (426 D). The same 
verbs have also the ordinary future in -copa. 


427, A few verbs have futures with the form of a present: yéo 
(xv-) pour, fut. yéw. So the irregular futures ¢dopar shall eat (539, 3), 
triopa shall drink (521, 3). | 


First AORIST SYSTEM, or 
Kirst Aorist Active and Middle. 


428, Formation.—The first aorist stem is formed by add- 
ing -oa- to the theme: Av-ca- (first person ¢€-Av-ca). 


429. The rules in 421, for the future of mute verbs, vowel 
verbs and verbs of the second class, apply also to the first 
aorist. 


Kom-To  exoiva Tavow (ray-)  €rak&a Tipda-o eTiunoa 
Brar-re ¢Brava 6pvcow (opvx-) epvEa TOLe-@ eToinoa 
yoap-o eypaia ppalw (ppad-) eppaca dovAd-o edovAoca 
TéK-@ emeEa omévo-@ €omerca  TreiOw (mO-) ereioa 
tpep-w Opera €d-® eldoa mvéw (TyU-) emvevTa 


424 D. The future in -aw has in Hm. the same variety of forms as the 
present in -aw (409 Da): thus éAdw, éAdds, Ada. In Hd. it is contracted as 
in Att. 


_ 426 D. In Doric the future is regularly formed in -cew, -ceouat contracted: 
Avo@, UTES, AUOEL, ATELTOY, AioEDpMES, AUGEITE, AVGEvYTL; Mid. AvoEvpaL, 
Avon, AvoEiTAL, etc., AvoEicOaL, ADOEdpEVoS. 

427 D. Similarly, Hm. has fut. Belouor or Béouce shall live connected with 
Bidw live, Shw shall find connected with 2d aor. pass. é-3d-nv learned, keiw or 


kéw shall lic from netua.—He also uses avtw achieve, épiw draw, ravbw stretch, 
as futures. 


428 D. a. Hm. often doubles o of the first aorist after a short vowel ; 
eyeAaooa for éyéraca (yeAdw laugh). Cf. 420 D. 

b. Hm. has forms of the first aorist with a variable vowel in the place of 
a: €Bnoero went (Balyw), édvcero set (S0w), ite, tov came (ixw). So especially 





130 — FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [430 


430, yéo (xv-) pour makes ¢yea (for exeva) without o, correspond- 
ing to the future yéo (427). i 


431, Liquid Verbs.—These reject o in the first aorist, and 
lengthen the theme-vowel in compensation for it (84): daive 
(pav-), épyva (for ehavoa); pév-w remain, ewewa (for epevoa) 5 
kpivw (kpiv-) decide, expiva (for expwoa). Paradigm 327. 

a. The lengthened form of a is n, except afterx or p: epnva, but 
emépava (repaivo finish). 

b. The verbs atpw (dp-) raise and GAAouar (aA-) leap make dp- and aa- 
in the first aorist, except in the indicative, which has 7- on account of 
the augment: #pa, jAdunv, but apas, adrduevos. Even a few other verbs 
have & where the rule requires 4: Kepdatvw gain, éxépdava; dpyatyw enrage, 
wpyava. 

C. KéAAW, KUpw, pvigt (422 b) make ExeAoa, Exupoa, Spoa. 


432. Three first aorists have the suffix -xa-; ¢Onxa from riOnu (Oe-) 
put, éoxa from didops (do-) give, and Axa from tn (€é-) send. These 
are confinea to the indicative, and are used chiefly in the singular 
active (see paradigms 333, 334, 476) in place of the defective second 
aorist. Plural forms, like édaxapev, ¢dwxare, eSwxay, are rare and 
poetic. 


433. Inrrection.—The first aorist is inflected according to 
the Common form, 383. Paradigm 316. 


a. The 1st sing. ind. act. omits the ending -v, édvdoa; and the 3d sing. 
changes -a to -e, ZAvoe. The imv. Atoov, Atoa and infin. Adoa: are irregular. 
For the middle forms éAvow, Avan, AVeaio See 383, 4. 

b. The subjunctive has -©|y- in place of -a-: Avow. 


434, In the optative, besides the regular forms with mode-suffix 
-t-, there are three irregular forms in -ce-ua-s, -oe-te, -ce-ta-v. These 
are much more used than those in -cas, -ca, -oatev. 


in the imperative : dpaco, dpaeu rise (dp-vign), atere lead (%yw), oie bring (pepw), 
rekeo lay thyself (Aéyw), meAaooeTov draw near (meAdw). 

430 D, For éxea, Hm. has commonly éyeva. Similarly, Hm. makes Ist aor. 
éxn-a (Att. €xavon) from Kalw (Kav-) burn, érceva from cevw (ov-) drive, hrAeduny 
and jAevduny from dAdoua or addevoua avoid, and the defective aor. déaro 
scemed. Hes. has daréacOu from Saréoua divide. 


431 D. c. Homer has also éxepoa (elpw shear), pipow aor. subj. (pupw mix), 
édoa (ctAw press), defective ard-epoa took away. 

d. The Aeolic (Lesbian) assimilates o to the foregoing liquid: €pavva for 
épavoa. So Hm. in one word; &épedda, from dpéeAdAw increase. 

433 D. b. In Hm., first aorist subjunctives with short vowels -o|e- (373 D) 
often occur: veueoho-ere for veueono-nre (veuerd-w resent), épap-ear for (epa- 
nar) epaln (epdmroua touch wpoon). These forms are often liable to be con- 
founded with those of the future indicative. 


a 
at 
th; 
rt 


:: 


439] SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. - 181 


Seconp Aorist SysTEM, or 


Second Aorist Active and Middle. 


Srconp Aorist oF THE Common Form. 


435. The second aorist stem adds -°|.- to the theme: Auz-°|,- ; 
indic. éArov, present Acirw (Ai7-). It has the inflection of 
the present system (406), the second aorist indicative being 
inflected like the imperfect. Paradigm 320. 

a. As a rule, only primitive verbs (308) have second aorists. The 
root takes its shortest, or weak, form (82). A few second aorists 
have a for ¢« of the root: €-rpan-oy from rpém-o turn. 

b. For the accent of the 2d sing. imperative, the infinitive and par- 
ticiple, see 387, 389. 


436, The second aorist of dy-o lead has a reduplicated stem: ijyayor, 
ayayeiv. 

a. eimov said is also reduplicated: it is contracted from e-eemov (¢-FeFemoyr, 
root Fem-, 72 D). 


437. The root-vowel is dropped (syncope, 43) in ée-mr-duny (wér-opar 
Sly), ¢-cx-ov (for e-cex-ov, pres. €xo have), é-om-dpnv (for e-cem-opny, 
pres. €ropac follow), and some others. 


438, Two second aorists, efrov said and #veyxoy bore (589, 8 and 6), 
have also forms with stems in -a-, eiwa, jveyxa, with the inflection of 
the first aorist. 

SEcoND AoRIST OF THE M.-Form. 


439, The second aorist of the p:-form has the simple theme 


as its stem: @ory-v (cra-) stood. This is inflected according 


to 385. Paradigms 333, 334, 335. 


435 D. In Hm., a few roots which end in a mute after p, suffer transposi- 
tion as well as variation of vowel in the second aorist: 5€px-oua see, €Spaxor ; 
mep0-w destroy, émrpafov. 

b. Hm. and Hd. often have -éery for -e in the 2d aor. inf. : Auréew, Badge. 

436 D. In Hm., a good many verbs have reduplicated stems in the 2d aor. : 
e-meppad-ov (ppa¢w declare), wémi0-ov (mel0w persuade), rerapméuny (répr-w de- 
light), wepid-ecOat (peldoucu spare), etc. So Hpap-ov (ap-, pr. apapicxw fit), épop-ov 
(ép-vour rousc).—Reduplicated and syncopated are é-KexA-duny (KéA-omau com- 
mand), %AadK-ov (aArex-, pr. dAeéw ward off). Not used in the pres. are méqv-ov 
(pev-) killed, rérp-ov (reu-) came up to, Tetary-ev (tary-, Lat. tango) having seized. 
—Two verbs, épix-w draw, évin-trw chide, reduplicate the final consonant of 
the theme, with a as a connective: ipix-ax-ov, nvim-an-ov (also évévir-ov). 

437 D. Of syncopated stems, Hm. has also éyp-éunv awoke (found even in 
Att., from éeyelpw, evyep-), dyp-duevor assembled (inf. a&yép-eoOar, 889 D a, pr. 
Gyelpw), é-mA-dunv (meA-oua am). 


182. | SECOND AORIST OF THE Mi-FORM. [440 


440, The end-vowel of the stem is made long in the act- 

wve before a single consonant: ¢or7-v, Gorn-pev, oTH-var3 but 
lee / 

OTA-\NV, OTA-VTWV. 

a. The 3d sing. €or comes under this rule because it stands for e-orn-r. 
—So does ordy neuter participle, for ora-vr. 

b. avijuny, aor. of dvivnut (ova-) benefit, follows the same rule in the middle: 
avnucda (but &vacbe). 


441, The middle ending -co drops x (385, 4 a): €-Oov (not €-Ge-co), 
mpio buy (yet also mpiaco). But not after a long vowel: évyco. . 


449, In compounds -é and -ora occur for 87-6: and oT7-01: KaTaBa come 
down, mapacra stand by, used only in poetry. 


443, The second aorists of three verbs, ri@nus, SiS@pe and fn, are 
peculiar in these respects (paradigms 333, 334, 476): 


a. They do not lengthen the stem-vowel: ¢-Oe-pep. 

b. The 2d sing. imper. active has -s for -6:. 

c. The infinitive active, Oetva:, Sotvat, eivar (for Oe-evar etc.), has an 
irregular ending -evau. 

d. The singular of the indicative is wanting, and supplied by the 
first aorist in -xa (482). 


444, The subjunctive adds -»|,- and is contracted as in the present 
(417): 6 for 6é-@, dos for dd-ns; but dv-@ uncontracted. 


a, The aorist empiduny bought puts -|,- %n place of the stem-vowel 
(cf. 417 a): mpiopat. 


445, The optative mode-suffix is -1- or -u- according to 374a. But 
stems in -v- (€-dv-v) have no optative in Attic. 


a. The optative is accented according to 388. But mpiaiuny (from 
empiauny bought) and dvaiuny (from eynpny received profit) are excedtions: 
MpiaiTo, ovairo. 


a a 

440 D, Exceptions, the poetic aorist €-«ra-y killed (489, 4) and Hm. odra 
wounded, otduevar to wound.—On the other hand, like ayfunvy Hm. has zAjro 
approached, €BAnto was hit, and other middle forms. 


444 PD. In Hm., the second aorist subj. of the mi-form usually remains un- 
contracted: Oéwuev, ad-én. The root-vowel is then almost always made long, 
a and e becoming e before an o-sound, and 7 before an e-sound. Thus yvda, 
Belw (for Baw, B&), Ociw (for Ow, 0), Onns (for Oéns, Ons), Sénor (for Sdn, 56). 
And before the endings -roy, -yev, -re, the mode-vowel is short (8738 D): ornerov 
(for ordnrov, or7jTov), Oelouerv (for Oéwuev, OGuev): So also in the middle forms 
Peloucn (for Oéwuc, PGuo), BAhera. Hm. has subj. dv, with long o. 

In Hd., only aw and ew remain uncontracted in the subjunctive; aw he 
changes to ew: oréwuev (for crdwuev, orGuev). The same change is found 
in Hm. 


445 D, Hm. has opt. S07, Sduey (contracted from dv-r7, du-t-uev). So also 
Otro (for pO-1T0) 2d aor. opt. of POtvw perish. 





450] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 133 


b. The compounds of rl@nus and imu have in the second aorist optative 
-Sotro and -oiro, besides the regular Oe?ro and eito; so too in the plural -Golueba, 
-oiueda etc. These are sometimes written with recessive accent: mpdéa6orr9, 
mpdolTo. 


PerFEcT ACTIVE SYSTEMS, or 


Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 


446, Formation oF THE First Prrrect.—To form the 
stem of the first perfect, the theme is reduplicated (363 ff) 
and -xa- is added: Ac-Av-xa-; Ist sing. indic. A€AvKa. 

a. The first perfect belongs (1) to vowel-verbs, (2) to many liquid 


verbs, (3) to many mute verbs with lingual themes, especially those in 
-.(@ (-.d-) and -a¢w (-ad-). 


447, a. A lingual mute is dropped before -xa-; meiOw (m6-), mémre- 
Ka; KouiC@ (kop.0-), KEKOpt-Ka. 

b. Vowel-verbs usually lengthen the vowel before -xa-, and verbs 
of the second class have the strong form of the theme with e or ev. 
€d-@  €id-kKa Tou-@ TeTroin-Ka TweiOw (mi6-) mére-Ka 
Tipd-@ TeTipy-Ka SovAd-@ dedovA@-Ka amvéw (mvu-) mémvev-Ka 


448, a. Liquid themes of one syllable change e to a: aréAdw (cTed-) 
send, orarka; Pbcipw (pbep-) destroy, épOapxa. 

b. v is rejected in a few verbs : xpivw (kpu-) distinguish, Kéxpi-Ka; 
reiva (rev-) extend, réra-xa, etc. (519). If not rejected, it must be 
changed to y nasal: dhaive (par-), wépayka. 

c. Several liquid roots suffer transposition (64), and thus become 
vowel-roots : BadAw (Bad-) throw, Bé-BAn-Ka 3 Kdp-vw am weary, ké- 
KUn-Ka. 


449. The stem of the first pluperfect is the same as that of the first 
perfect, with -xy- (in some forms -xe:-) substituted for -xa-. 


450, ForMaTION OF THE SECOND PERFEcT.—The stem of 
the second perfect reduplicates the theme and adds -a-: ye- 
ypa-a-, Ist sing. indic. yéypada; from ypddw (ypad-) write. 

a. In general, only consonant-verbs form a second perfect. Yet 
the vowel-verb dxovw hear makes the second perf. dxnxoa. 


b. Hd. has -6éo:To for -Oe?ro in compounds, 


__ 446 D. In Hm. only vowel-themes (or such as become so by transposition) 

form a first perfect; and even these often have a second perfect form: 
mepv-dor Att. medixdor (pt-w produce), kexun-ds Att. Kexunnds (kdu-vw am 
weary), TeTin-ws troubled, 


134 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. [41 


451, Vowel changes.—a. An « of the root becomes o in the 
second perfect ; 

otpep-o turn, €-aTpop-a. Tixt@ (rex-) bring forth, ré-rok-a. 

b. Verbs of the second class have the strong form of the theme, 
but take oz instead of ex (29). 

Nelm@ (Aur-) leave, Xé-owr-a. pevyw (pry-) flee, mé-pevy-a. 

THk@ (rak-) melt, Té-Tyk-a. | | 

c. In other verbs a is often lengthened : kpd¢w (kpay-) ery, Kéxpaya ; 
ay-vipu break, eaya ; paivw (pav-), wépyva. | 

d. But the theme-vowel remains short after the Attic reduplication 
(868): areipeo (adi-) anoint, adnruha. 


e. Cases that stand by themselves are épswya from phyvips (pay-) break, 
and eiw0a am accustomed from root €6- or 76-. | 


452, Perfects with Aspiration.—Some verbs aspirate a labial 
or palatal mute at the end of the theme, changing 7, £, to ¢, 
and x, y, to x: KAértw (kXer-) steal, Kékhoga; dAAdoow (adXay-) 
exchange, nAAaxa. 

a. A few verbs have two forms, aspirate and unaspirate : thus 


mpaco (mpay-) do, mémpaya and rémpaxa have done ; wémpaya is oftener 
intransitive, have done ( fared) well or ill. 


453, The second pluperfect stem is the same as that of the second 
perfect, with -y- (in some forms -e.-) substituted for -a-. 


454, SHortreR Prrrect Forms.—A few second perfects 
have forms without any suffix, the endings being added 
directly to the root: éora-pev we stand, re-Ovd-var to be dead. 
Paradigm 336. For a list of such forms see 490 ff. 


455. InrLEction.—The first and second perfect systems 
are alike in their inflection. Paradigms 317, 321. 


a. The perfect follows the common form (383). The 8d sing. indic. changes 
-a to -e: AéAuee. The 3d plur. -ador is for -a-var. The -a- of the stem changes 


451 D. c. In Hm., the feminine of the participle sometimes keeps short a, 
when the other forms of the tense have n: apnpes fitted, fem. apapvia, ind. 
&pnpa (apapicxw); TeOnrAds blooming, fem. TeOadvia (OdAAw). 


452 D, The aspiration of a smooth or middle mute in the perfect active is 
unknown to Hm, 


455 D. a. In the Doric (Theocr.) the perfect sometimes ends in -w, -els, -€t 
like the present, instead of -a, -as, -e: Sedotxw I fear, mepixer has sprung Up. 
So the infin., 5eddxew to have set, and the participles (in Pindar), wepptkoyTas, 
Kexaddovras. Cf. in Hm. rexajyovres (from Kad w shriek). 





“et 
* 


460] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 135 


to the variable vowel in the subjunctive and optative, and disappears before 


_-és (suffix -or-) of the participle. For -va in the infinitive see 383, 5 b, For 


the accent of the infinitive and participle see 389 d and e. 
b. The participle re@veds, gen. reOve@Tos, dead (490, 4) arises from reOva-ws 
aebva-oros by transfer of quantity (36). 


456. An imperative of the perfect active is lacking, except in 
perfects which have a present meaning, and even here it is nearly 
confined to the shorter perfects mentioned in 454: éara&i stand, 
rebvaro let him die the death. Yet we have xexpayere yell and xeynvere 
stand agape in Aristophanes. 


457, The singular of the optative has rare poetic forms in -omp, 
-olns, -01n: memololn. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative cap be 
expressed by the perfect participle with a form of eiul am: AeAuKas &, eLny, 
oO. 


458. The pluperfect follows the j:-form (885): before -cay in the 
8d plural, ¢ is used instead of ec. 

a. The first and second person singular of the pluperfect have -n, 
-ns in the older Attic and in Plato, but -evy, -evs in the later Attic. 


PrerFect Mippite System, or 


Perfect, Pluperfect, Fut. Perf., Middle (Passive). 


459. Formation.—The tense-stem of the perfect and plu. 
perfect middle is the reduplicated theme. There is no suffix. 
Thus stem Xe-Av-, 1st sing. indic. AeAvpau. 


460, In vowel-changes of the theme and the rejection of v, the 
perfect middle agrees with the first perfect active: see 447 b, 448 
i 0, Cc. 


€d-@ €id-prat welOw (m0-) mémeo-par Kpive (kpiv-) Kéxpt-pat 
Tipa-@ TeTipn-par mAéw (wAv-) WémAevo-pat Telvw (Tev-) TéTa-pat 
Toe-@ TeToin-wat orTéd\Aw(aTeA-) Eotad-pat PdadAdw (Bad-) BEBAn-pat 
Sovdd-w deSovrAw-pa Pbcipw (Pbep-) EpOap-war 


b. Hm. has re@ynds, re@vndros. In other second perf. participles, too, he 
has -wr- for -or-: BeBasros, yeyaeTos. 


458 D. Hd. has in the pluperfect active -ea, -ea-s, -ee, -ea-re; in the 3d 
plur. only -eca-v.—Hm. has -ea, -ea-s (also contracted ~y-s), -e: or -e-y (con- 
tracted from -ee, -ee-v): ereOhea was astonished, éreOhmeas, SeSermvqjrew he had 
Jeasted. The uncontracted 3d sing. is seen only in #dee, commonly 75n he 
knew.—In two or three words, Hm. forms a pluperfect with the suffix -°|e-, 
after the analogy of the imperfect: #vwy-o-v (also jvdy-ea) plup. of avwya 
command, éuéunx-o-v plup. of péunta bleat, éyéywv-e (also éyeyeéy-er) plup. of 
yéyeva shout. Still more irregular are 3d pl. #véy-evy, yeyav-evy (contracted 
from -eo-v). 


ak. 


136 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. [461 


a. The verbs rpé-o nourish, rpém-w turn, and otpép-w turn, change 
e toa: ré6paypa (74 c, d), rérpappa, €orpappa. 


461, Addition of o.—Many vowel-verbs add o to the stem of 
the perfect middle: reAé-w complete, rTe-TéAc-o-pat, ere-TEeAE-0-TO. 
But the added o falls away before endings that begat with o 
(62): re-rde-cau, ére-TéAc-oFe. Paradigm 328. 

a. This o is almost always added to the perfect middle of vowel-verbs 
which retain a short theme-vowel in the future, aorist, and perfect: €-o7ma-o-wat 
from omd-w draw. Other verbs in which it occurs are enumerated in 505; 
some have both forms, with and without o: kAel-w close, KnéxAeiouor and 
KkékAeyuot: in such eases the form without @ is the older. 


462, Inrtection.—The perfect and pluperfect middle are 
inflected according to 385. Paradigm 318. 


a. For the accent of the infinitive and participle, see 389 b. 


463. Liquid Verbs and Mute Verbs.—The concurrence of 
consonants in the stem and endings gives occasion to a num- 
ber of changes. ‘These are shown in the Paradigms, 328. 
They take place according to the rules in 51-54, 61. 

a. Stems in -y- (unless they reject v, 460) change it to o before p: 
paiva (pav-), téhao-pa; but. sometimes to p: d€vvw (o&vy-) sharpen, 
@Evppa. The succession v-r remains; v-od drops o (61). The forms 
which would have v-o (répavoa etc.) are avoided altogether ; for 
these, it is likely that rehacpévos ei, joa, io G1, were used. 

b. When py or yy would be brought before yp, the first consonant.is 
rejected : méur-w to send, mwé-meu-par (for me-mepp-par), edhéyx-@ tO con-, 
vict, éd-ney-pat (for ed- heyy pat). 

c. omévd-w pour makes éoreropa: (for eorevo-pa, for ermevd-pat). 


464, Third Person Plural of the Indicative.-—The endings 
-vTat, -vro can only stand after a vowel. When the tense-stem 
ends in a consonant, the 3d plur. indic. is made by using the 
perfect participle, with the auxiliary verb cioi they are for the 
perfect, and joay they were for the pluperfect. See Paradigm 
328. 

a. The Ionic endings -ara:, -aro (before which 7, B, x, y are aspi- 
rated) sometimes appear in Attic, after a consonant : rerdyarat, ereTd- 
xaro, for reraypévor eici, noav, from Tracom (ray-) arrange. 





462 D. Hm. sometimes drops o in the 2d sing.: pwéuvy-m for wéurn-cat, 
also contracted péuvn. So in Hd. the imperative péeuveo remember, with ¢ 
for 7. 

464 D, a. The use of -ara:, -aro is much more common in Hm. and Hd.; 
see 376 Dd. Hm. has reredx-arar, -aro (1st sing. réruyyou, revxw make) with 


tt 





467] FUTURE PERFECT. 137 


465. Subjunctive and Optative.—The perfect middle sub- 
junctive and optative are made by using the perfect participle 
with the subjunctive and optative of eiué am. 


a. A few vowel-verbs form these modes directly from the stem : 
Krd-owa. acquire, pert. Kéxrn-par possess, SUD}. KexT@pal, KEKTN, KEKTHTAL 
(contracted from xexrn-wpai, etc.), Opt. kexr@pny, KexT@o, kexT@To (from 
KexTy-oyinv, etc.), OF KexTypNv, KEKTHO, KexTHTO (from KeEKTH-yunV, etc). 
So pypvnoke (jva-) remind, perf. wépyn-par remember. 


466. Furure Perrecr.—The future perfect stem adds -o°|,- 
to the tense-stem of the perfect middle. It has the inflection 
of the future middle, -copat, -ca, -cerar, etc., from which tense 
it differs in form only by having a reduplication. Paradigm 
318. 

a. The vowel before -coua: must be long, even when it is short in 
the perfect middle: dedj-copa (déw bind), Aedv-gopar; but déde-par, 
Aédv-pat. 

b. The meaning of this tense is almost always passive. The chief 
exceptions are peyyvnooua shall remember (530, 6), Kextnoopa shall 

possess, memavoona. shall have ceased. Very many verbs have no future 
perfect. 


ce. The participle of the future perfect occurs very rarely. The only 
instance in classic Greek is S:areroAcunoduevoy in Thue. vii 25. 


467. Two verbs have a future perfect active, formed from 
the first perfect active. It ends in -&w (-x-cw). 


torn setup perf. éornka stand fut. perf. éornEo shall stand. 
Ovnrke die TéOvnxa am dead reOynEo shall be dead. 


a. In other verbs the. place of a future perfect active may be sup- 
plied by using the perfect active participle with gconza shall be: 
 eyvaxores eodpeOa we shall have recognized. Even the passive future 
Bt may be similarly formed: eyrevopévor egovrat they will have been 
eceived. 


ev for v, eépnped-aro (1st sing. épnpetouny, épeidw support) with e for e,—the 
change of quantity in each case being required by the hexameter verse. He 
has even -ata -aro after vowels: Sedai-ata: (Satouat divide), BeBAH-aro (BaddAAw 
throw). Before these endings he inserts & in dx-nxé-d-aros (part. ax-nxé- 
Kevos pained), éd-nd€-5-aro (for eA-nAa-d-aro, theme eAa-, pres. éAadtyw drive). 
Hd. usually has -arat -ato even after vowels; a preceding a or 7 becomes e: 
oixéara: for oknvtTa (oikéw inhabit). Yn wap-ecxevdd-atat (wapacKkeva lw prepare), 
and like forms from verbs in -(w, 6 belong to the theme. In 4m-tk-arat, -aTo 
(Hd.) = Att. adiypuévor eict, joav, « is not changed to x. 


465 D, Hm. has subjunctive peuvducba (Hd. peuvedueda), optative weuryjuny, 
“envéwro (ew for not, 36); also opt. 3d plur. AcAdvro (for AeAv-t-yTO). 


138 AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE. 





Passive SYSTEMS, or 


Aorist and Future Passive. 


468, FormMATION oF THE AorRIsT PasstvE.—To form the 
stem, the suffix -e- for the first aorist, or -e- for the second, 
is added to the theme. These become -6y- and -y- before a 
single consonant. ‘Thus stems Av-Ge-, orad-e-; Ist sing. indice. 
EAVOnV, EoTdAny. 


Remarks on the First Aorist Passive. 


469, In modifications of the theme, the first aorist passive agrees in 
general with the perfect middle (460, 461). 


€a-@ eid-Onv meiOw (mt0-) émeia-Onv Bad-Aw €BAN-Ony 
Tipd-@ erTipy-Onv TrEW (TAV-) EneVT-Onv  ond-w éeomdo-Onv 
move-@ emrotn-Onv reivo (rev-) €rd-Ony Tehé-@ €reéo-Onv 
dovdd-@ €dovd@-Ony Kptva (kpiv-) expi-Ony akov-@ nKovo-Ony 
a. But orpépo, rpéra, and wpédo@ (460 a) have e in the first aorist 
passive : earpéPOny, erpéepOny, eOpepeny. 7 


410, Mute Verbs.—Before 6, a labial or palatal mute (z, 8, x, y) 
becomes rough (¢, x); a lingual mute (7, 6, 6) becomes a; see 51, 52, 
and Paradigms 328. 

For €Opép@nv, etc., see 74d. For éré@ny, érvOny, see 73 c. 


Remarks on the Second Aorist Passive. 


471, An e of the root becomes a: aréd-do send, éorddny. 


a. wAhrow (wAay-) strike makes émAjynyv; yet in composition with ée and 
xard, it takes the form -exAdynp. 


472, No verb has both a second aorist active and a second aorist 
passive. The chief exception is rpérw turn, érpamoy and erpdmny. 

a. Some verbs have both passive aorists in use: BAdmrw@ (BAaB-) 
harm, €BrapOnv and é€BraBnv. So rpéwa, rpépo, orpépw ; but the 
second aorist is more used. 


473, InrLection.—The first and second aorists passive are 
inflected alike. Paradigms 319, 322. They take active end- 
ings, and follow the pe-form (385). 


469 D, Hm. adds » before 6 to some vowel-themes: fSpv-v-Onv took my seat 
({Spt-w), du-rvi-v-Onv revived, root mvu- breathe. In padvOnv (dactyw shine, = 
gaivw) he changes paev- to paay- (cf. 409 D a). 

473 D, Hm. sometimes has -y for -cay in the 3d plur. indie.; see 385 D 3; 
also -wevae for -ya: in the infinitive; see 385 D 5. 


476] VERBAL ADJECTIVES. IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 139 


a. The subjunctive adds the mode-suffix -#|,- and contracts : vbd 
for \vOéo. The optative has the mode-suffix -cy- or -c- according to 


_ 874 a: Avbe-in-v, AvOe-i-re. For the ending -r: instead of -é in the 


first aorist imperative, see 73 b. For the accent of the infinitive and 
participle, see 389 d and e. 


474, Furure Passtve.—The stem adds -o°|.- to the aorist 
passive stem; and is inflected like the future middle. ‘he 
first future passive ends in -Oycopa, the second future passive 
in -noopa: AvOncopa, cTaAnTOmaL. 


Verbal Adjectives. 


475, The verbal adjectives are analogous to passive parti- 
ciples. Their stems are formed by annexing -ro- or -reo- (nom. 
-r0s, -teos) to the theme. 


1. Av-7ds, -7, -dv loosed, looseable (solutus, solubilis). 
2. Av-réos, -a, -ov (requiring) to be loosed (solvendus). 


The theme assumes the same form as in the first aorist passive, 
except that a mute before -rds and -réos must be smooth (51). 


€d-@ €aTos, -Téos weiOm Teioros, -Téos Baddow BAnTos, -Téos 
Tipd-@ Tipntds, -réos mwAé@ MAEvoTds, -Téos MAEKW TeEKTOS, -TéOS 
TeNé-@ TeEAEOTOS, -TéOS TEiVw TATOS, -TéOS TdoG@ TAKTOS, -Téos 
Gkov- dxkovoTds, -Téos Kpiv@ kKpirds, -Téos tpépo Openros, -réos 


THE IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 


476, tne (€-) send; inflected nearly like r/Oypu. 

Fut. jow, Aor. Ka (<irov etc., 443), Perf. etka, cio, Aor. P. eiOnv 
The aorists and perfect occur almost entirely in compounds. 
The tenses which have the ,ui-form are inflected as follows: 


a. The subjunctive of the second aorist passive has in Hm. the same 
peculiar forms as the second aorist active of the si-form (444 D): davfn (for 
paven, pavi), dauetere (for Sauéenre, Saute), Tpamelouev (for Tparéwpev, Tparapev) 
with transposition, from érdprny (réprw delight). | 

Hd. in the subjunctive contracts ey, but not ew: Avdéw, AvOjs, AvOD. 

474 D, In Hm., the first future passive is never found; the second future 
only in dajcoua (2d aor. pass. eddnv learned), prryhoouat (jty-vime mix). 

476 D. Hm. has usually fm, with short . He has impf. 1st sg. few, 1st 
aor. nKa and enka (359): from dy-fnus he has a fu. dvécw, ao. &vera.—H ad. pf. 
ind. 3d pl. dv-€wyra irreg. for av-civra, and pf. par. me-uer-t-mévos very irreg. 








140 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. [476 
Present and Imperfect. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
Pres. type Impf. tnv Pres. (epar Impf. téunv 
Lys, vets ves Vera vero 
tno Leu vero tero 
teTov LeTOV vedo teoOov 
Leroy térny veoBoy véoOnv 
Uepev Uewev véeBa, Céne0a, 
vere vere U LeoOe 
taou veray vevTau LevTo 
Pres. Subj. © Pres, Subj. COpar 
Uys ete. tq ete. 


Pres. Opt. ceinv or vous 


teins 





Pres. Impv. ve 


Pres. Infin. 





tous ete. 





Pres. Opt. telyny or colpny 


icto Coto etc. 





Pres. Impv. teoo 


Pres. Infin. rer@ar 


Part. ‘els, tetra, cév Part. Céwevos, -n, -ov 
Second Aorist. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 

Indicative. Indicative. 
(nKa) eipev elunv elpeda, 
(qKas) eitov eire €ioo eto Gov elo Be 
(nKe) elrny elora cito elo Oqv eivTo 
F Subjunctive. mot Subjunctive. 
o i ope Opar opeda, 
nS 1TOV nTe n no Sov no-0e 
0 nToV @OU Ta no-Oov Qvrat 

Optative. Optative. 
ely eipev, elqev |  etpnv (pcb, (-ofne8a) 
elys cirov, elnrov _ etre, elnre elo elrBov eioe (-cic Be) 
ely etryy, elnryny elev, einoav | eiro (-oiro) eto8yy eivro (-oivro) 





ci a> 
—o 
e f 








417] IRREGULAR VERBS IN -my, 141 
ACTIVE. MiIppDLeE. 
Imperative. Imperative. 
ts érov ére ov éofov éo Qe 
era érav évrav érbw toQav toBov 
or eTwoay or Ec @woav 
Infin. civat Infin, €ofar 
Part. els, cioa, &y Part.  €evos, -n, -ov 


Verbals érds, éréos. 


The impf. of apinus sometimes takes the augment before the 
Be déition: npter. 


477. «iw (t-; Latin 7-re) go has only the present system. 





Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. 
ele ipev qo or Hew THEY 
él irov — ire qeus or jaocla yrov qre 
elo irov =—s Laon qe or Tew qTyy 8 8=©6 Foav or Terav 
Present Subjunctive. Present Optative. 
Yo Yopev to{mv or Youse Vousev 
ys iyrov tyre Yous Yoirov = toure 
ty ijroy twor You tofryny —tovev 
Present Imperative. Present Infinitive tévar 
VO trov Ure Participle tov, totoa, tov 
ire Urev idvTwv 
or trwoav Verbals irds, tréos (also iryréos) 





a. The present has a future meaning, especially in the indicative 


ets Tam going, i. e., about to go. 


7) ar — 
aaa 


b. Rare, and neha not Attic, are the forms jeer, necre, in the 
plural of the imperfect. 

c. The participle has the accent of the second aorist (889 a), and 
sometimes its meaning. 


477 D, Hm. pr. ind. 2d sg. eie@a; impf. fia or jiov, 3 sg. hie or je, 1 pl. 
Hower, 3 pl jiov, iioay, or hoay. Hm. has also an impf. with simple: 3 sg. 
te, 3 du. irny, 1 pl. quer, 3 pl. icay.—Hd. has in impf. 1 sg. ia, 3 sg. Hie, 3 pl. 
jicav.—Compounds have rarely -<t for -1: in Attic poets ; as e€et. 

Hm. sub. 2 sg. inoOa, 3 Sg. inot, 1 pl. dopey or Zouev, opt. 8 sg. for or ieln, 
inf. iévou, tuevas or tev; fu. elooua, ao. eioduny, irreg. éercoduny. 






142 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -Mt. [eae 


478, cit (eo-; Lat. es-sc) am; has only the present and fu- 
ture systems. | 


Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. 
elpl éopev Hor jy Apev 
et éordy = tore Asa HoToy or Wrov = 7Tre or Hore 
éorl éorov = eto ay Yorny or Wrnv = oav . 
Present Subjunctive. Present Optative. 
o OPEV elyy etpey OF elqpey 
7S qrov ATE eins etrov or etnrov ere or elnre 
7 7Tov Orr ein arny or eiqryy elev or eltgoav 
Present Imperative. Present Infinitive ¢fvar 
tor tcrov tore Participle Ov, ovca, dp 
éorwm totrav torwv dvTos, etc. 


or éorwoay 


Future éropar (3d sg. torar), éroluny, torer9ar, Eoopevos. 


479, In the pres. indic. epi is for eo-ys (84); ef is for eax (origi- 
nally éo-ci): €o-ri retains the original ending 7. The subj. ois for 
ew (lon.) from eo-w : the opt. ei is for ev-in-v. The inf. eva: is for 
eo-va: the part. av is for émy (Ion.) from ec-or. 


480, The forms of the present indicative are all enclitic, except the 
2d sing. ef (1138 c). After a paroxytone, they have an accent on the 
ultima, by 116. But the 3d sing. takes the regular accent, go7:, 


1. when it expresses existence or possibility : 
2. when it stands at the beginning of a sentence: 
3. when it follows ov, yn, ei, as, Kal. 


Thus tobro 0 €gTt that which exists, €ore por BovAopev@ it is according 
to my wish, «i gaTrw ovtas Uf tt 18 80. 


478 D, Hm. has many peculiar forms : 
Pr, ind. 2d Sg. éoot and es, 1st pl. elev, 3d pl. (eiot, and) & aot not enclitic; 
Impf. fa, €a, ov, 2d sg. (Fiabe and) éyo@a, 3d sg. (Av and) Hey, Env, Any, 

3d pl. (oav and) & écay ; iterative (493) é gonoy (for eo-cKov) ; 

Subj. €w, efw, 3d sg. en, zno, not, 3d pl. war (once da) ; 
Opt. (cinv ete. , also) @ gous, €or; Imy. 2d SB éo-o0 (middle ending) ; 
Inf. (eivou and) 2 éumevat (for eo-pevan), Euuev, also éuevau, ev ; 
Part. édv, éotoa, édv, etc. Fut. often with oc: Ero opan ; 
Fut. 3d sg. (€vera, ora: and) EToeT at, also eooeiras (as in Dor.). 

Hd. has pr. ind. 2d sg. els, Ist pl. elmer ; impf. Ea, 2d sg. das, 2d pl. éare; 
iterative €oxov; sub. ew, wor ; opt. once év-€0t; part. cov. 

Dor. pr. ind. 2d Sg, eval, ist pl. clues, 3d pl. evti ; impf. 3d sg. ‘hs, Ist pl. Hues 3 
inf. eiueyv, juev ; part. eav. Fut. éooetua:, -7, -etTa, etc. 








ke 4b 


482] 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN -MI. 


143 


a. The participle éy retains its accent in composition: mapwy, mapotoa; so 


also the 8d sing. of the future éora (for €vera:): mapéora. 


The retention of 


the accent in several other compound forms is not irregular: aapijv (391 b), 
map@ (-€w, 479), mapecev (388), mapetvat (389 d), 


481. dypi (fa-, Lat. fa-ri) say: 


Fut. djco, 





Present Indicative. 


ppt Payev 
ons arov daré 
gyol 9 pardcy pact 

Present Subjunctive. 
@ etc. 


Present Imperative. 
pabl or padr 


bare etc. 


Aor. épyca, 


Vb. dards, haréos. 


Imperfect Indicative. 





epyv eapev 

ehyo8a or epyns &parov ehare 

ey éeparyny  thacav 
Present Optative. 

dalny etc. 


Present Infinitive ¢ddvar 
Participle Gs, paca, pav 


a. The forms of the present indicative are all enclitic except the 2d 


sing. dys (113 c). 


The participle gas is never used in Attic prose, 


which takes ddoxwy instead: cf. 530, 8. 


482, ketwor (xet-) Lie, am laid. 


Fut. xetoopat. 


Present Indicative. 


Kelpar Kelj.e0a, 
KELL KEeto-Sov Keio-Be 
KEtTaL Keto Gov KELV TOL 


Present Subjunctive. 
kéwpar etc. 


Present Imperative. 
Keio 
Ke(oOw cic. 


Imperfect Indicative. 


> > iy 
éxeluny exelcOa, 
eKELTO dere Vov dxeroGe 
ekerTo exelonv  exewwTo 


Present Optative. 
Keoluny etc. 


Present Infinitive KetoG$ar 
Participle kelyevos 


481 D, Middle forms of pnyui are rare in Att. (thus in Plato, pf. imv. 3d sg. 
xepacdw), but common in other dialects; yet the pres. indicative middle is ~ 


rare. 
pacba, part. dauevos. 


Hm. has impf. edduny, €pato or aro, etc., imv. gdo, pacbw, etc., inf. 


482 D. Hm. pr. ind. 3d pl. neivra, nefara: (876 D d), xéara: (44); impf. 3d 
pl. Exevro, xetato, kéaro; subj. 3d sg. KiTru; iterative (493) 38d sg. néoxero; fu. 


\ 


wa a 
<x 


144 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -M1. [483 


a. The infinitive xeioOa retains its accent in composition: xara- 
keira, contrary to 386. 


b. The only forms of the subjunctive and optative which occur are xénrau, 
Kenobe, KewyTaL; KéoLTO, KéoLTO. 


483, 7jpyat (jo-) sit: used only in the present system. The 
-c- of the root is retained only before the endings -ra 
and -ro. 





Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative. 
@ ¢ ¢ 
npc ‘ Fipeda, fn Hpeda 
Hoar qo 9ov no0e 1o0 no Sov no-0e 
yor noSov nvr qo°TO Ho Onv nVTO 
Subjunctive wanting. ae Optative wanting. 
Present Imperative. Present Infinitive no@ar 
70 Participle fjpevos 
qo etc. 





484, For ja, the Attic prose almost always uses the compound 
xadOnua (properly sit down). 

Pr. Ind. xdO@npar, nd@noa, xaénra, etc. 

Impf. éexaénpny, exa€noo, éxdOnro, etc. (861) 

or xaOnuny, kabjoo, Kabjaro, etc. 

Pr. Subj. xa0apat, xaby, KaOnra, etc. 

Opt. KaGoiuny, xaOoio, xaBoiro, etc. 

Imv. xdaénoo, canoe, etc. Inf. xabjo@u. Part. caOnpevos. 


a. kaOnoOa irregularly keeps the accent of jada: cf. caraxeiobat 
(482 a). 


485, je (cf. Lat. a-io) say, used only in pres. 1st sing. ju: and impf. 
Ist and 8d sing. jy, 7 (qv S éyw said I, 7 8 ds said he). 


486. xpn (xpa-, xpe-) it behoves, impf. expay or xpiv; 
Pr. sub. yp7, opt. ypein, inf. xpjva, p. ypewy (only neut., for ypaoy 36). 
Fu. ypjoe. A compound of this is : 
am6-xpn it is enough, 3d pl. (contract) aroxpaor, impf. améypn; 


kelw or Kéw (427 D).—Hd. has ee for ex in some forms: Kéera, éxéero, reeabe, 
réeoOat (but not before pw, as keeuou, Keewevos). In the ind. 3d pl. he has xéarau, 
éxéaro. 

483 D. Hm. has ind. 3d pl. etara, efaro (376 D d), with irregular change of 
n to e, rarely €arat, €aro, only once jvTo. Hd. always €ara, éaro. 


486 D. Hd. has xpnh, xpiiv, xpiivat, but amoxps (nataxpa, ratéxpa), dmoxpav. 


: 


489] ENUMERATION OF MI-FPORMS. 145 


Pr. inf. droxpiy, part. droxpay, -Goa, -@y, both contract. 
Fu. amoxpioe:, aroxpicovet, aor. améxpyoe. 


487. The deponents dvvapyai can, ériorapa understand, and kpépapa 
hang are inflected in the present like the middle of torn (831), except 
in the following forms: 

1. The 2d sing. imperfect and imperative: édvve, nricta ; Siva, 
eriata (416). 

2. Subjunctive dvvopa, émicropa, kpgu@pa, proparoxytone (417 a). 

8. Optative dvvao, éemiaraio, Kpéwaio, etc., with recessive accent 
(418 b). 

For their principal parts, see 535, 5, 6, 8. 


ENUMERATION OF MI-FORMS. 
Presents of the pu-form. 


488, The verbs whose presents have the su-form belong to 
the seventh and the fifth classes (404, 402 e, f). 

The presents in -ye of the seventh class are enumerated in 
the verb-list 534-538. For the complete inflection of tiny, 
didwps, tornpe see 329-331 ; of typ, ety, cipi, Pypt, Kelp, Huae 
see 476-484. 

The presents in -w of the fi/th class are enumerated in the 
verb-list, 525-529. Those in -vvpe are inflected like defkvips, 
302; the few in -vyy like torn. 

a. Verbs in -vyuju, in the later Attic and common dialect, often have 
another form in -vve, inflected like Avo : decviw Secxvvecs, etc. 


Second Aorists of the p-form. 


489, For the second aorists of riOnus, dSideps, torus, see 833-835; 
of imu, see 476. 


Themes in -a-. 
1. Baivw (Ba-) go (519, 7). 
2d ao. €Bnv, Ba, Bainv, Bj, Bva, Bas. 
2. ynpa-oKw grow old (580, 1). 2d ao. inf. ynpava (poetic). 
3. dudpadcKkw (Spa-) run (530, 2), used only in compounds. 
2d ao. ao edpas, edpa, etc. ; dpa, dpas, dpa, etc. ; dpainv, dpaG, dpavat, 
pas. 


489 D, Hm. has 3d pl. goray, inf. Oéuev, Oguevau, Sduev, Sduevar, oTHMEva. 

1. Hm. ind. 3d dual BArnv and Bdrny, 3d pl. EBnoay, and Bay, Bdv, once 
EBacay, subj. Betw (444 D), 8d sg. Bin, 1st pl. Belowey (Hd. Béwuer), inf. Bijvas 
and Bhueva. 

2. Hm. part. ynpas. 8. Hd. @pny, inf. Spfvat, but part. Spas. 





146 SECOND AORISTS OF THE Mi-FORM. 


4. xreivw (krev-, xra-) kill (519, 4). 
2d ao. (poetic) ekray, exras, ékra ; part. xrds, mid. xrdpevos. 
5. ovivnpt (ova-) benefit (534, 6). 
2d ao. mid. aynpuny (440 b) dvaipny (445 a) dvnco, dvacba, dvnpevos. 
6. méropat (mer- also mra-) fly (508, 23). 
2d ao. act. (only poetic) émrnv, mrainv, mrnva, mras. 
mid. (also in prose) emrdpnyv, wracOa, TTdpevos. 
7. Root rAa- endure, fut. rAnoopa, perf. rérAnka. 
2d ao. erAnv, TAG, TAainv, TANOL, TAHvaL, Tras. 
8. dédava (pba-) anticipate (521, 2). 
2d ao. ehOnv, HOG, POainv, POnva, Pas. 
9. Theme zpia-, used for aor. of avéouar buy (539, 7). 
2d ao. empiduny, mpiapat, mpraipny (445 a), mpiaco and mpio, mpiacba, 
7 pLajevos. 


Themes in -e-. 
10. cBévvin (cBe-) put out, extinguish (526, 8). 
2d ao. ga Bny went out (500, 5), inf. cBjvat. 
11. cxéd\A@ (oKed-, oxdre-) dry trans. (518, 15). 
2d ao. goxAnv became dry (500, 6), inf. oxAjvat. 
12. €yw (vey, oxe-) have, hold (508, 16). 
2d ao. imv. oxés (448 b). 


Themes in -o-. 
13. ddicKopa (dd-, Go-) am taken (5838, 1). 
2d ao. éddoy or F@v, GAO, dAoiny, dhévat, Gdovs. 
14. B.d-@ live (507, 2). 
2d ao. €Biev, Bid, Bioiny, Bi@vat, Brovs. 
15. yeyyacke (yvo-) know (581, 4). 
2d ao. eyvar, ye, yvoinv, ya, yvavat, yvovs. 


Themes in -i- and -v-. 
16. wivw (m-) drink (521, 3). 2d ao. imv. wide (poet. wie). 
17. d0-w pass under, take on (507, 3). 
2d ao. doy (500, 4), dda, S06, Stvat, dus. 


4, Hm. 3 pl. éerav, subj. xréwuev, inf. erdpevat, erdwev; mid. 3 sg. éxtaTo 
was killed, inf. nrac@a. 

6. Dor. érray (in chorus of Att. tragedy). 

7. Hm. 3 pl. éraay. 

8. Hm. 3 pl. pédv, subj. 3 sg. dOyn or POja1 (once map-pPOjnet), 1 pl. Pbew- 
uev, 8 pl. P0éwar. 

13. The form with e- is not found in Hm. and Hd. Hm. has subj. 3 sg. 
aren (444 D), inf. addvar and Gadmevar. 

14. Hm. subj. 3 sg. yrén and yv@, inf. yrdueva and yv@vat. Pind. ind. 3 
pl. éyvov. 

17. Hm. 3 pl. guy and @dtcay, opt. 3 sg. Sdn (for Sv-in, 445 D), 1 pl. ddpev 
(for dv-imev), inf. dduevar and diva; iterative d¥cxov. 


_ i 
Cs 


-. 489] SECOND AORISTS OF THE Mi-FORM. 147 


18. dho-w produce (507, 4). 
2d ao. epov (was produced, born, 500, 8), pra, diva, pis. 


18. Hm. 3 pl. uv. 


The following second aorists of the mi-form are peculiar to the Epic 
dialect : 

19. &-w satiate, 2 ao. became sated, sub. 1 pl. Zwuev, inf. duevar. 

20. damaupd-w take away, 2 ao. part. amovpas (mid. &movpauevos Hes.). 

21. BadrrAw (Bar-, BAa-) throw at (518, 4), 2 ao. 8 du. Evp-BAntny encountered, 
inf. fuypBAhmevar; mid. 3 sg. EBAnto was hit, wounded, sub. 3 sg. BAhera (373 D), 
opt. 2 sg. Bacio (for BAn-10), inf. BA7jcOa, par. BAnpevos. 

22. ovrTd-w wound (507 D, 5), 2 ao. 8 sg. obra, inf. ovTduevor, ovTduev, mid. 
par. ovrduevos wounded, 

23. mlumrnur (arAa-) fill (534, 7), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. rAjTo, 3 pl. rAjvro, became 
full (in Aristoph. opt. éu-rAjunv, imv. EumAnoo, par. éumAnpevos). 

24, meAd(w (meAad-) come near (514 D, 21). From cognate theme zaAa- 
come 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. ARTO, €mAnTo, 3 pl. émanvro, TAjyTO. 

25. mrnoow (wrnx-) crouch (514, 7). From cognate theme mra- come 2 ao, 
3 du. Kata-nT)THy. 

26. BiBpaoKw (Bop-, Bpo-) eat (531, 3), 2 a0. EBpwr. 

27. mA@-w Ion. and poet. for mAéw (mAv-) sail (512, 3), 2 ao. (in comp.) 
émAwy, par. TAds. 

28. Kri¢w (K718-) found. From shorter root «tt- comes 2 ao. mid. par. 
Ktivevos founded. 

29. pOi-vw perish (521, 5), 2 ao. mid. épOiuny, sub. 3 sg. POlera:, 1-pl. pAd- 


 pecOa, opt. POtunv (for PO-yuny, 445 D), 3 sg. pOtro, inf. Peicbat, par. Peiwevos. 


Ping 
amd 


ei 


30. KAd-w hear (512 D, 8), 2 ao. &xAvoy heard, imv. KAt6, 2 pl. KAdTe, also 
kekAv0t, KéxAvre (436 D). 

31. Av-w loose, 2 ao. mid. Adunv, 8 sg. AUTO and AtTo, 8 pl. AvyTo. 

32. mvéw (avv-) breathe (512, 4), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. &uemvvTo recovered breath. 

33. cedw (av-) drive (512 D, 9), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. otro, par. cdmevos (Trag.). 

34. xéw (xu-) pour (512, 6), 2 ao. mid. 3 sg. xvTo, 3 pl. xdvTo, par. xvmevos. 

Also the following (all in the middle) from verbs with consonant themes : 

35. GAAopat (GA-) leap (518, 3), 2 ao. 2, 3 sg. GAco, ATO (é-GATO), Sub. 8 sg. 
GAeTai, dAnrat, par. ém-dApevos (also éamt-dApevos). 

36. apapiokw (ap-) join (533 D, 14), 2 ao. mid. par. apuevos fitting. 

37. Root yev-, only in 2 ao. 8 sg. yévro he grasped. 

38. déx-ouo receive, 2 ao. édéyunv, 8 sg. déxro, imv. Séto, inf. 5¢xOa1, par. 
déyuevos. 

39. Aéy-w speak, 2 ao. éréyunv counted myself, 3 sg. Aé€xTo counted (for him- 
self). . . 

40. Root Aex- (no Pres.), 2 ao. 3 sg. Zrexro laid himself to rest, imv. A€éto 
(as to Acéeo, see 428 D b), inf. cara-AéxOa, par. rara-Aéypevos. 

41. uby-vipu mix (528, 7), 2 ao. 3 sg. Zuikro, miro. 

42. dp-vius rouse (528, 11), 2 ao. 3 sg. dpro, imv. tpoo (as to dpaeo, see 428 
D b), inf. dp@a, par. dppevos. 

43. ahy-viws fix (528, 12), 2 ao. 3 sg. nar-érnkto stuck. 

44, maddw (rad-) shake (518 D, 27), 2 ao. 3 sg. mdaro dashed himself. 

45. wép0-w destroy, 2 ao. inf. répOa (for wepé-cOat) to be destroyed. 

Here belong also two adjectives, originally participles of the 2 ao. mid. : 

46. topevos well-pleased, glad (root a8-, pr. avddvw please, 523, 1). 

47. ixuevos favorable (root ik-, pr. tkdvw, come, 524 D, 2). 


Ae 
A. 


os ae SHORTER SECOND PERFECT FORMS. [490 | 


Shorter Second Perfect Forms without -a-. 


490, See 454. In the indicative these forms are confined to the 
dual and plural: the singular always has the suffix -a-. See para- 
digm 336. 

1. tornps (ora) set, 1st pf. eoTnka (for oe-otnxa) stand (500, 1), with 
regular inflection ; 2d pf. dual gorarov, etc. Paradigm 336. 

"9. Batya (Ba-) go (319, 7), Ist pf. BéBnxa have gone, stand fast (500, 
2), regular; 2d pf. 3 pl. BeBaor, sub. 3 pl. BeBaor, inf. BeBava, part. 
BeBos, BeBooa, gen. BeB@ros REY, from BeBaas). 

3. yiyvopas (yer-, ya-) become (506, 1), 2d pf. yéyova regular; 2d pf. 
part. Shas yeyaoa, gen. yey@ros (contracted from vejenen 

Oynoxw (Gay-, Ova-) die (530, 4), Ist pf. réOvnxa am dead regular; 
2d pf. pl. réOvapev, teOvaor, 2d plup. 3 pl. éréOvacay, pf. opt. reGvainy, 
imv. ré6vai, inf. reOvava, part. reOvews, -@oa, -ds, Zen. -@Tos. 

5. ist pf. déd0cxa (root d:-, dec-) fear, aor. eoa. 2d pf. dédva, pl. 
d€éduev, Sedidor, 2d plup. 8 du. ededirnv, 3 pl. edédvcay, pf. sub. dedia, 
opt. dSedueiny, imv. débc6, inf. dedievar, part. dedios. 


491, 6. ofda (18-, d-) know. a perfect without reduplication 
and with present meaning. Fut. eicoua, verbal ioréov. 





Perfect Indicative. Pluperfect Indicative. 
oida iopev Hon, TSew NO PEV, HOetuer 
oicla icrovy tore noyn70a, WSac8a Yorov ore, #derTe 
oide icrov  ioaor mdeu(v) Horny Yoav, woecav 
Perfect Subjunctive. Perfect Optative. 
eda cldapev eideinv eidSeinev, -efnpev 
elds  cldfjrov eid ijre eide(ns eiSctroy eidetre, -elyre 
edz] eldfrov eldacr eden elde(rny eidetev, -elnoay 
Perfect Imperative. 
VorOu icrov lore Perfect Infinitive  eiSévar 
iorw iorov  iorav Participle iSdés, etSvia, etdds 
or toTwcay eiSdtos etc. 


490 D. 1. Hm. pf. 2 pl. €ornre, inf. éordueval, Eorduev, part. Eorads, érra- 
dros.—Hd. part. éoreds, Ecredoa, etc. 

2. Hm. pf. 3 pl. BeBdao., part. BeBads, BeBavia, gen. BeBadros. 

3. Hm. pf. 3 pl. yeydaor, plup. 3 du. yeydrny, inf. yeyduer, part. yeyaws, 
yeyavia, gen. YVEYAOTOS. 

4, Hm. imv. ré0vahi, reOvdrw, inf. reOvdmevan, Tebvduey, part. gen. Tebyn@TOos, 
also reOvydtos, fem. rebynulns ; only once TreOve@ri, as in Att. 

5. Hm. has de- for the redupl., Sela, SelSoixa (once dedido.), and doubles 
5 after the augment, €d8eica, as well as after a short vowel in composition, 


492] SHORTER SECOND PERFECT FORMS. 149 
a. The forms 7dns and 7des are also used for 7dy06a and 7deca. 
Rare and poetic are ndepnev, 7Sere: colloquial ofa@as. Rare and mostly 


late are oidas, otdapev, oidare, otdaor. 


492. 7. Zoixa (ix-, ecx-) am like, appear, pluperf. éwxn (858 a): 


besides the regular inflection, has the forms 1 pl. govypev (poetic), 3 


pl. etSaou (cf. todou), inf. eixévar, part. eikws, eikvia, eixds. Fut. eiéo 
rare. 

8. kpatw (xkpay-) cry (514, 13), 2d pf. kéxpaya as present; 2d pf. imv. 
Kexpay&. 





mepiddclaas (once trodeicare). The original root was 5fi-: hence pf. 5¢6Fia, 


ao. €dFerca, which, after F was lost, were changed to Seldia, €Sde1ca, to pre- 
serve the long quantity of the first syllable. For delé:a, Hm. has also deidw 
with present form, but only in the first person sing. He has also a future 
Selgerat, SelcecOa, and an impf. dle, diov, feared, fled. 


491 D, 6. Hm. has pf. 1 pl. ev (53 D a), plup. 2, 3 sg. 7dnoGa, 75n, or 
noee, also very irreg. jeldns, jeldn (perhaps for eFesdns, eFerdn); plup. 3 pl. 
tcay (for 15-cav); pf. sub. eidéw, pl. eidouev, eldere, cid@or; inf. YSucvau, tduev, 
part. fem. eidvia and idvia; fu. efcoua: and cidjow. 

Hd. has pf. 1 pl. %uev and otdquev, plup. 1, 3 sg. 7dea, Hee, 2 pl. #d€are; 
fu. eidjow. 

The Dor., with ofda, has a peculiar pres. todm, toas, toari, pl. toaper, 
trav. 

492 D, 7. Hm. impf. 3 sg. efke, 2d pf. 3 du. @ixroy, 2 plup. 8 du. éterny, 
plup. mid. 3 sg. #ixro or éix7o.—Hd. has pf. ofa, part. olds. 

Add further for Homer, 

9. patouat (ua-, wev-) reach after, seek for, 2 pf. press on, desire eagerly ; 2 
pf. sg. ueuova, -as, -<, du. ueuarov, pl. ucuamer, weuare, weuddor, plup. 8 pl. 
peuacay, pf. imv. 8 se. weudtw, part. weuads, -via, gen. weuadros or peuadros. 

10. Pf. rérAnka (tAa-) am patient (489, 7); 24 pf. 1 pl. rérAauer, opt. Te- 
TArainv, imv. TérAaht, inf. rerAduer(ae), part. TeTANSs, -via, gen. -dTos. 

11. 2d pf. dvwya, -as, -e (avwy-) command, 1 pl. dvwypev, imv. tywx1, 8 se. 
avaxOw (with middle ending; so), 2 pl. avwxGe: sub. avdyw, opt. avdyom, 
rare imv. aywye, inf. dvwyeuev. Plup. qvwyea, 3 sg. jvoye(v), commonly 
aveyet. For irreg. plup. qvwyov (or aywyov), 3 sg. qvwye, 3 pl. jvdyeur, see 


458 D. For pf. 3 sg. aywye he commands, avéyer is sometimes used: 2 du. 


aveyetov for dvdéyarov. Fu. avdtw, ao. jvwta. 
12. éyeipw (eyep-) wake (518, 5), 2d pf. éyphryopa am awake, 8 pl. éypnydpbact 
wholly irreg., imv. 2 pl. eyphyop9_ (middle ending), inf. éyphyop@a (middle 


ending, but accent irreg.). Hence pr. part. éypnyopdwr. 


13. Epxouce come (539, 2), 2d pf. eanavoa, etc.; also eiAfAouOa, 1 pl. eiAg- 
AovOuev (29 D). 

14, rdoxw (a0-, rev0-) suffer (533, 18), 2d pf. rérovOa, 2 pl. wérocbe (better 
mémacde, for mema-re), part. fem. memadvia. 

15. mei0w (mi0-) persuade (511, 8), 2d pf. mémoda trust, 2d plup. 1 pl. 
érémOuev (imv. wémero6s Aesch.). 

e BiBpdokw (Bpo-) eat (5381, 3), pf. BéBpwra (part. nom. pl. BeBpares 

oph.). 


17. rtwrw (mer-, re-, rro-) fall (506, 4), pf. rémrwxa, part. acc. pl. remred- 
tas (wemT@s, mewT@ros, Soph.). 


150 DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. 





DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. 


Some formations, which are unknown in Attic prose, occur more or 
less frequently in other dialects. 


493. IreRATIVE FORMATION. 


The iterative imperfect represents a continued past action as repeated 
or usual: mépmeoke he was sending (repeatedly), used to be sending. 'The 
iterative aorist has the same force in reference to indefinite past action, 
marking it as repeated or usual: édacacke he drove (repeatedly), used to 
drive.—Both are confined to the indicative ; and are generally found 
without the augment (in Hd. always so). The iterative aorist is found 
only in poetry. | 

They are formed from the tense-stem of the imperfect or aorist, by 
adding the tterative-sign -ok°|--, and are inflected like the imperfect: 
act. -oKko-v, -oKe-s, -oke, etc., mid. “TKO-MNV, -TKE-0, ~TKE-TO, etc. ‘Thus 
pe€ve-oKOv (weve remaw), piye-oxe (pevyw fice), épytrica-cxe (€pntv@ 
restrain), otda-oKe Stood (torn set, €arnv stood). 


a. A very few iterative imperfects have a before -croy, Kpvrra-cKoy (KpUTT@ 
hide), ptwra-crov (pirrw throw). 

b. In contract verbs, ¢ either remains without contraction: radé-e-cKov (Kakew 
call); or is dropped : 9e-cKkov (w0éw push). Verbs in -aw sometimes change 
ae tO aa: varetdackoy (vaerdw inhabit), cf. verde (409 D a), 


494, FoRMATION WITH -6-. 


Several verbs annex -6°|,- to the tense-stem of the present or second 
aorist. A variable vowel before this suffix sometimes changes to -a-. 
This formation does not modify the meaning: it is mostly poetic, 
occurring very seldom in prose. It is often difficult to tell whether 
the meaning is that of the aorist or the present (or imperfect). The 
following are the most important of these forms. 


OLOK@ PUPSUE eSioxabes, Suwxadw (subj.) -Oeu. 

exo yield eikaOn, -Goupt, -Govra. 

apive ward off ayovdabov, -Oere, -Oerv. 

eipyo shut out eépyaber, atro-épyabe, kareipyadou, etc. 
deipw lift up nepéOovrat float in air. 

ayeipa assemble nyepeBovrat, -OvTo. 

préyo burn preyeder, -oiaro, -Ooy. 

Ppbive perish POivvOover, -Oov, -Oewv. 

éxo hold exxeOoy aor., inf. cxebéew, Att. cyxeOeiv. 
€xcoy went, aOr. jeer-extaGow) 


a. The first three are regarded by most editors as aorists, and their infini- 
tive and participle are written accordingly: Siwxadety, cixabdvTa, anivadety. 


IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 151 





IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 


A. Forms of one voice in the sense of another. 


495. In many verbs the active voice has no future, the 
future middle being used instead: pavOavw learn, pabyoopot 
(not pabnow) shall learn. 

a. This is the case with a large proportion of the verbs of the fifth 
and sixth classes (see the verb-list, 521-533); also with many others, 
as hevyw flee, Oavpatw wonder ; especially such as express an action of 
the body, as dkovw hear, ade sing, amavraw meet, amohavw enjoy, Badite 
(fut. Badiotpa) walk, Brémw see, Bodw cry, yehaw laugh, kaw weep, 
oiualo wail, ctydw and ciwmaw am silent, cmovdatw am busy. 


496. In many verbs the future middle has the meaning of a 
future passive: A«irw leave, eipopat (= AaPhOjoopar) shall be left. 


a. This is always the case with the following verbs, which have no 
future passive: ddiucéw wrong, dpyw rule, diddoKw teach, cipyw shut out, 
éxa have, corto hinder, oixéw inhabit, dporoyéw acknowledge, rapacow 
disturb, tpépw nourish, rnpéw watch, piréw love, purtacow guard. So 
nearly always ripaw honor, rptPo crush, orepéw deprive. 


497. In many deponent verbs the aorist passive is used 
instead of the aorist middle: thus BovrAonar wish, future Bov- 
Ajcopat, but aorist —BovdAqgInv (not «—Bovlycapnv) wished. These 

are called passive deponents; and the rest, in distinction from 
them, are called middle deponents. 

a. Of passive deponents, the most important are the following: those 
which in the future have a passive form as well as a middle, are marked 
with *: thus *dcakéyopar converse, aor. duehéxOnv conversed, fut. diadéE- 
opat and diarexOnocopua shall converse. But 7dona has only yoOjoopa. 


dyapat admire (535, 4) *7Soua. am pleased 
*aidéopat feel shame (5038, 7) evOvpéopar consider 
ahaoua wander *roo80pméouar Win eager 
GuihAdopat contend *Suahéyouat converse (508, 19) 
apyéona deny emipéhouae care for (510, 12) 
*Gy dopa: am grieved (510, 2) perapéeAouae regret 
BovAopat wish (510, 4) amrovoéopat despair 
déoua want (510, 5) *Stavogouar meditate 
dépxoua see (508 D, 31) evvoéouas think on 
Suvapar am able (585, 5) mpovoeoua foresce, provide 
EvayTLoopaL Oppose olopat think (510, 16) 
emioraua understand (535, 6) oéBopat revere 
evAaBéopar am cautious pidoripeowa am ambitious 





. 496 D. In Hm. a few second aorists middle have a passive meaning: 
eBAnto he was hit, nréuevos slain. 


Me 


| 
"me 1 


152 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. [498 
b. Some of these verbs, beside the aorist passive, have an aorist of 
the middle form: thus dyapa, aor. usually nyda Any, but also nyacayny. 


498, Even in some verbs which are not deponent the aorist passive 
has a middle meaning: eidpaivw gladden, nippavbny rejoiced ; arpépa 
turn, €otpadny turned (myself); paive show, épdynyv showed myself, 
appeared (but épavOnv generally was shown). 


499, Several deponent verbs have a passive aorist and future with 
passive meaning: tdoua heal, tdcayny healed, but iaOnv was healed ; 
déxouar recewe, edeEdunv recewed, but edéxOnv was received. 

a. In some, the middle forms of the present or perfect systems may have 
both an active and a passive meaning: piucopa: imitate, weutpnua have imi- 
tated or have been imitated. 


BL. Mixture of transitive and intransitive senses. 


500. In some verbs, the forms of the active voice are 
divided between a transitive and an intransitive sense. The 
future and first aorist are then transitive; the second aorist 
and the perfect are intransitive. The most important cases 
are the following : 

1. tornp (ata-) set, place ; 
trans., fut. orjo@ shall set, Ist aor. gornoa set ; 
intrans., 2d aor. garny (set myself) stood, pf. éornka (have set myself) 

am standing, éarnkn was standing, fut. pf. éorné@ shall stand. 


a. The same important distinction prevails in the numerous com- 
pounds of this verb:—adiatnp set off, cause to revolt, améatnv stood 
off, revolted, apéornxa am distant, am in revolt,—épiornur set over, 
exéatny set myself over, epéatnxa am set over,—xabiornps set down, 
establish, xatéorny established myself, became established, nabéornka am 
established. The aorist middle has a different meaning: kareornaaro 
established for himself. 

2. Baivw (Ba-) go; 

(trans., fut. Bnow shall cause to go, 1st aor. €8ynoa, Ion. and poet.) 
intrans., 2d aor. ¢8nv went, pf. BéBnxa have gone, stand fast. 

3. pu-w bring forth, produce; so hice, éhioa; intrans., épiv was 
produced, came into being, wépixa am by nature. 

4. dv-w pass under, take on ; xatadiw submerge trans. ; so trans. dvca, 
educa, Oéduxa, but intrans. ¢dvv dived, set, SédvKa have entered, set. 

a. evédvoa means put on and dmrédvea or €fédtca took off another’s clothes ; 
évéduy and amrédiv, etédiv are used of one’s own clothes. 

5. cPé-vvips put out, extinguish » 2d aor. €oBnv went out, pf. eo Bnka 
am extinguished. 

6. oxéANo (oxed-) dry trans.; intrans., 2d aor. ¢aoKAnv became dry, 
pf. goxrAnka am dry. 

VY. mtv (m-) drink, 2d aor. émiov drank ; 1st aor. értaa caused to drink. 

8. yetvowat (yev-) ain born, poetic; Ist aor. eyewdpny begat, brought forth. 





/ 


B03] OLASSIFIED LIST OF VERBS. 153 


501. In several verbs, only the second perfect is intransitive. 


dyvips break 2d pf. gaya am broken 

eyeipw wake trans. eypyyopa am awake 

dAAU pu destroy — dAwAa am ruined (dd@dexa have ruined) 
melOw persuade métro.ba trust (wémetxa have persuaded) 
THyvope fix némnya am fixed 

pryyvops break éppaya am broken 

ante cause to rot céontra am rotien 

Thka cause to melt rérynka am melted 

dhaiva show mépnva have shown myself, appeared 


CLASSIFIED LIST OF VERBS. 


502. The following list exhibits the principal parts of all the most 
important Greek verbs, excepting such verbs of the first and fourth 
classes as are entirely regular. They are arranged according to the 
formation of the present, in seven classes (see 892). For convenience, 
the few verbs which have different tenses formed from themes essen- 
tially different are put by themselves as an ezghth class. 

Full-faced type (as yeAdw) distinguishes forms of the Attic spoken 
language ; here are included tenses found in Attic prose; also, in 
general, those found in the colloquial parts of Attic comedy. 

In ordinary type (as rpé) are printed forms of Attic poetry, espe- 
cially those found in the dialogue parts of the tragedy. 

Forms in brackets, [ ], or marked date, (1.), belong to the period of 
the Common dialect (8 e). Other abbreviations are 7. (rare), r. A. 
(rare in Attic), 7. pr. (rare in prose), fr. (frequent). 

Dialectic forms, including those which occur only in the lyrical parts 
of tragedy, are given at the foot of the page. Occasionally, tenses 
found only in [onic writers, and so marked, are included in the main 
list, when it is likely that their non-occurrence in Attic is accidental. 

Verbal adjectives in -ros and -reos are seldom given when the verb 
has a first passive system, as they are easily inferred from that. 


First Cuass (Variable-Vowel Class, 393). 


003. The theme assumes -|,- in the present. This is much 
the most numerous of all the classes. We notice here only 
those verbs of it which have peculiarities of formation. 


I. Vowel-verbs in which the final theme-vowel remains short 
before a consonant. 


a. The following retain the short vowel in all the forms : 


Future. Aorist. Perfect. Passive. 
1. yedaw laugh. 


yAdoopor éyéhaca, éyeAdoOnv 


a : 


154 


2. 


Fu. p. épacOjocoua as act. 


VERBS: FIRST CLASS. [x08 


épdiw love; also poetic pres. Zpaum, class 7. 


HpdoOnv as act. — 


3. [xAdw] break. 
[Kado | ekNao-a, Keka pan éxAdo-Onyv 
4, ord draw. 
ondow COW LT a tomaKka, toracpar éomacOny 
5. padw bruise ; (collateral form @Adw) [ao. p. e6AdoOnv] 
6. xadae loosen. 
[xardow | éx dAaora éxahacOny 
7. aiS€opor (ade-) feel shame ; also atSoua poet. 
aidécopce qoerduny repr. derma qoéo On 
8. akéopar heal. 
[ axéooua | HKET ONY '[aéaOnv] 
9. Gdéw grind. 
Hrera GAHAcopar, GAnAEuOL 
10, apKéw suffice. 
apxéow HjpKeo-a, [ipréeoOny | 
11. énéw vomit. ao. Hera. | 
12. fé boil. fu. Céow, ao. era. 
13. Eéw scrape. ao. ekeoa, pf. tEeopau. 
14. rehéw complete. | 
TEMS, TENET W éréheoa, reréheka, TeTeAECo par eTeEo On 
15. tpéw tremble. ao. érpera. 
16. apdw plough. 
[ apérw | Hjpooa npdeny 
17. aviw accomplish, also avira. 
aviow vue HVUKa, TVVopaL [ qvdoOny] 
18. dptw draw water, Attic apite. 
ipuce Apsenv [hpdcOnr] 
19. dxw (EAk-, EAnv-) draw. 
érEw elAkvora elAkuka,, elAKUoPOL elAkioOny 


a. The forms éArtw, EdAxdow, cidAéa, efAxOnv are late. 

503 D. 1. Hm. also yeAodw. 2. Hm. ao. m. jpacduny. 

5. Theoe. fu. dAacod, Hm. ao. €0Aaca, Pind. @praca, Theoe. pf. p. ré0Aac pat. 

6. Pind. ao. part. xaAdéas. 8. Hm. dxetouat 

12. Hipp. ECeo mau. 16. Hm. pf. m. apnpouat. 

17,.-The form ¢ aviw is commoner in poetry, aviTw in Attic prose. Hm. has 
also a fu. dviw. Hes. has ém-nvvoon. Theoc. has &vuues, and Hm. fvuro, as if 
from a pr. &vupt. vw (also avw) is poetic, though it occurs once in Plato. 

19. Hm. has imp. €Akeov, fu. EAKHow, a0. EAKNOA, 


a 


505] FIRST CLASS. 155 


20. mrvw spit (see 393 a). 
[ariow, -coua] emrruca 


504, b. The following retain the short vowel in a part of the forms. 
The first three make it long before o. 


1. Séw bend. 

Syow yoo SéSexa, SéSepar edeOny 
2. Ow (dv-) sacrifice (see 393 a). 

bio ura TéduKa, TEvpOL eruOny 
8. Avw loose (see 393 a). 

hicw voce A€AvKa, AEAYLaAL ehuOny 


4, aivéw praise. 


3? 


aivérw qjvera qveca, Tynan qvednv 
In Att. prose used mostly in compounds. 


5. Kadéw (Kare-, KAn-) call, 
KaN@ (423) éxddeoo KékAnKa, KéeKAnOL = KARO VY 
6. pvw shut the lips or eyes (see 398 a). : 
[urow] euvoa, pénvKa am shut. 
7. Sv enter (see 507, 3). 


8. woéw miss is inflected regularly with y, but has e occasionally in the 
future and first aorist systems. 


Il. Vowel-verbs with added o after a long vowel. 


505, The forms in which o is added to the theme (461) are the 
perfect middle and first passive systems, with the verbals. The verbs 
which add this o after a short vowel have been enumerated in 503. 
There remain the following in which the theme-vowel is either long, 
or if short, is lengthened in these tenses. 


21. Ion. and poet. veucdw (or vexelw) quarrel, fu. veixéow, a0. evelkera. 


504 D. 3. Hm. 2d ao, m. éAvuny, as pass. 

4. Hm. fu. aivnow, ao. Hvnou; pr. also aivi¢oua (in Hes. atynut). 

5. Hm. also mpo-ckariCoua, poet. nixaAnokw cl. 6. 

9. Hm. adw harm, mislead, pr. m. 3d sg. dara, ao. &aoa or &aoa, con- 
tracted doa, ao. p. ddc@ny. The first a may become @ by augment. V. 
@-Garos or a-adaros. 

10. Hm. roréw (also koréoua) am angry, ao. éxdreca, 2d pf. par. Keko- 
THOS. 

11. Ion. and poet. épdw draw, fu. éptow (Hm. also éptw, 427 D), ao. etpuca, 
pt. epiuct (kareipvoum). Hes. pr. inf. (us-form) eiptueva (33 D). Hm. has 
etpu- only as result of augm. or redupl. (359 D). Different are épiopa, promas 
(also with short v), preserve (538 D, 6 and 7). 7 





156 VERBS; FIRST CLASS, 
1, Spaw do. 
Space paca SéSpaxa, SéSpapar Spacbnv 
2. Kvaw scrape. 
kvnow Hipp. exvynoa exvyjo8nv 
3. Xpae give oracle, 
xphow expyoa Kéexpnopat Hd. expqoOnv 
4, véw heap up, pr. only Hd. 
vArw évyoa vévyat, vévrnopor [evnOny, -oOnr] 
5. KvAtw, more fr. kvAlvSa, voll. 
exvAioa KekvATo mat exvAtoOnv 
6. mpta sav. 
erpira TEMPTS LOL empiaOny 
7. xpiw anoint. 
Xpiow expioa KéexpTpaL, KEX PTO paL expt bnu 
8. Xow heap up. 
Koow exon KEX OKO, KEX OOPOL exao-Onv 
9. Evw polish (see 393 a). 
devo [ettouar] edo Onv 
10, vw rain (see 398 a). 
vow Soa Sopar iOnv Hd. 
11. kvatw scratch. 
Kvalow EKVALOO, Kéxvatka, Kékvaropar  éxvatoOny 
12. mato strike. 
Tratow emraoa méTorKa, | rémao pau | eral Onv 
TOL TW 
13, madalw wrestle. 
rovtatro Hm. émradatoa éranaladnv 
14. kAHo shut, later Attic krelo. 
KAqoo ecAyora KéekAnka, KEKAT OL exdyoOqv 
KAclow exevora, [xérAerea] Kéxdeypar éxdeloOny 
| later Kékeropar 
15. oelw shake. 
rela €orerora, CETELKO, TET ELO LON éoelo ony 
16. Bpadw break. 
bpaiow eOpavo-a Tépavpar, TEpavepar elpadoOnv 





605 D, 14. Ion. naniw, ao. éxAhioa, pf. m. KexAhino, ao. p. exanloOny, v 
KAniords. 


Dor, also fu. KAzE@, a0. ExAgEa. 
| 


\ 





FIRST CLASS. 157 


17. matw make cease ; middle cease. 
TraAvow travoo TETAUKG, TETAUPAL érravOny 
| 3 v. maveréos [éraicbny] 


18. Kededw order. 
KeAedow éxéevora, kekédevka, KeKéXevoepan éxehedoOny 


19. Aevbw stone. 
hevorw ehevora, éLedo Onv 


20. akotw hear, see 507, 1. 


21. Kpotw beat. 
Kpovow expovoa KéKpoUKa expovoOny 
KEKPOUPLAL, KEKPOVE PCL 


III. Verbs with Reduplicated Presents. 


506. The theme assumes a reduplication in the present. For pi- 
verbs of this kind, see 534 ; for reduplicated verbs of the sixth class, 
see 530. There remain : 


1, ylyvopat (yev-, 393 b) become: also ytvou in Hd. and late writers. 
yev ropa eyevounv yéyova (490, 3) [ ever hOnv] 
yeyevnpcwe . 
2. toy (cex-, 393 b) hold, another form of @xw (508, 16; cf. 524, 4). 
8. pluvw (uev-) remain, poetic form of pévw (510, 14). 


4, wlrte (mer-, wro-) fall: cf. ritvw cl. 5 (521, 10), poetic. 
TET ODpPAL erecov TETTOKO 
a. emegov is for orig. and Dor. éreroy (69 a). 


5. tlerw (for tirkw, root rex-) bring forth, beget. 
TéEonaL erekov TETOKEL 
rééw less fr. [réreyua ] [ éréxOnv] 
a. Mid. rixrowat rare and poetic. Ao. @reta doubtful in Attic. 


6. [rerpdw]} (rpa-) bore: also rerpatyw (rerpav-, cl. 4). 
[rpicw] eTpyoo TéTpnicr 


[ erérpava] 


22. Poet. palw shatter, fu. patow, ao. p. éppalcOny. 


506 D. 1. 2d ao. 8d sg. &yevro Dor. (and Hes.), different from yévro seized 
(489 D, 37). From root yev- comes also poet. yelvoum cl. 4, am born, ao. éye- 
vduny trans. begot, bore (of yewduevor the parents, also in prose). ‘yéyaa etc., 
490 D, 8. 2. Epic also icxdvw, icxavdw. 

4. Hm. 2d pf. par. rerre@ras, Soph. memrés, -@ros (492 D, 17). 

6. Ion. fu. Terpavéw, ao. Térpnva, V. TenTdés. Late poets érerpdvénv. 

% kim, 7 (av-, ave-, ae-) sleep, a0. eon or aeoa, Once contr. drauer. 


158 VERBS: FIRST CLASS. 


IV. Verbs which form second tenses. 


507. a. Themes ending in a vowel. 





1. aKkotw hear. 


BKOVTOLAL iKovee axjkoa (44, 368) HkoveOnv (461) 
[ Hrovopat | | 
2. Brow live. Cf. ava-BidoKopat cl. 6 (531, 1). 
Brdcopar éBlwv (489, 14) BeBioxa 
[ Bidow | éBlwoa rarer BeBlopar v. Biwrds, -réos 
3. Siw enler, cause to enter (500, 4): also duvw cl. 5. 
Svcw tr. ioe tr. SéduKa tr., Sé8vKa intr. dd0nv 
ev (489, 17) Sed upc v. Sutéos 
4, dvw produce (500, 3). 
pice tpoura mépuKe, intr. [epinr] 
epov (489, 18) [v. purds] 


508, b. Themes ending in a consonant. 


The first five of these verbs have the root-vowel long in some tenses 
and short in others. 


1. 6ATBe (0A78-, 6A1B-) press. 


OAT Wo COrATbo [ré6Arha, -Tupar | eOrthOnv [e6alBny] 
2. mviye (aviy-, rvvy-) choke. 
Tvtee dorvita mémviypou erviynv 
8. tptBw (rpiB-, TprB-) rub. 
tptipw (496 a) erptpa rérpipa erp(Bnv 
TETOULOL erptpOny less fr. 


4, tide (TIp-, TUP-) raise smoke, rare in prose. 
TeOuppar (74 c) éropny 
5. oye (Wox-, Wux-) cool. 
Wuse ebota epoypce &pox Any, also 
epoxy [epeyny] 


607 D, 2. Hm. fu. Befouca or Béoua (427 D). 

3. Hm. has pr. impf. act. only dive (yet dpe Sdwy late setting), mid. only 
Svoua, both with same meaning. For édvcero, diceo, Sicduevos, see 428 Db. 

4, Hm. 2d pf. 3d pl. repdaor, par. repuds, -@Tos (446 D, 456 D b); plup. 3d 
pl. éwépixoy Hes. (458 D). 

5. Hm. ordw wound, ao. 8d sg. o¥rynoe, comm. 2d ao. otra (489 D, 22), 2d 
a0. m. par. ovrduevos wounded. Also pr. odrd(w, a0. otraca freq., pf. m. 3d 
Sg. ofragTa, par. o’TaTMEVoS. 


vo 
a 
Lag 






508] FIRST CLASS. 159 


6. &yw lead. 

bbw Hyayov (436) Axe [ayhoxa] Axenv 

&£ouar m. and p. 7§a rare Fypae ax PAcopar 
7. &pxw rule, begin, middle begin. 

Upto (496 a) = HipEa Lipxa] aipyuae tipx Pqv 
8. BrErrw look, sec. 

Prépo eprepa [BéBArema, BEBAcupar] | eBAcpOnr] 
9. Bpéxw wet. 

[Boctw] eBpefo BeBpeypar eBpéxOny [eBpdxnv] 

10. Bpt8w am heavy, only once in Att. prose. 
Bptow eBpioe BéBpi0a 


11. ypadw write. 


Yparbe eypaapa yéypada, yéypappar eypadny 


a. Ist pf. yeypapnxa and Ist ao. p. éypddOny are late. 
12. Sépw flay: also Selpw ci. 4. 
Sepa Sepa SéSappar eSapny 
13. tropa follow ; impf. eardpny (359). 
evopan éoropny (ordpar, oroluny, oot, omréobar, omdpevos) 
a. The orig. root was oer-. 2d ao. éomduny is for e-o(e)7-ouny (43) 
with irregular breathing brought in from the pr. Emoua: (70). 
14. Zpouar ask. Pr. impf. epic only, supplied in Attic from épwrdw. 
époopar (510, 6) Apopny 
15. épixw hold back ; chiefly poetic. Ao. fpvga. See D. 
16. xo have, hold ; impf. etxov (359): also tox 506, 2. 


to, ox Aro éo-X ov CoX ka, tox nae [eax 6nv] 
a. V. éxrds, -réos, and oxerds, -réos. The modes of the 2d ao. are 


608 D. 6. Hm. also ayivéw; ao. imv. téere (428 D b). 

9. Hm. has also theme fpex- rattle, only in 2d ao. 3d sg. @Bpaxe: also 
Bpox- swallow, only in Ist ao. opt. 3d sg. ava-(kara-)Bpdtere and 2d. ao. p. par. 
aiyaBpoxets. 

12. Hm. has verbal Sparés. 

13. Ion. and poet. act. (only once as simple) érw to be busy, fu. Ebw, 2d ao. 
eomov (ér-éorov), par. orév, 2d ao.m.as in Att. The forms €omwuat, Eoroluny, 
etc., in Hm. should prob. be changed to or@uat, omoluny, etc., the preceding 
word being read without elision: &ua oméc6w, not aw éorécOw, Hm. imv. 
omeio for oméo. Hd. ao. p. rept-epOny. 

14. Ton. pr. efpouat, fu. eiphoouo. Hm. also pr. épéoua: (less freq. act. épéw) 
and épectyw. He has irreg. accent in pr. imv. €peco (for épeto, from epeco, 409 





D b) and 2d ao. inf. Zpec@a (889 D a), 


15. Hm. has fu. éputw and 2d ao. jpixaxoy (486 D), also pr. épixdyw and 
épikavaw. | 

16. Hm. 2d pf. dxwka (for oxwxa), plup. m. 3d pl. ér-éxaro irreg. For 
poet. érxeGov, see 494, 


160 © VERBS: FIRST CLASS. 





eaXOr, oxe, oxotny (in comp. TopdoX orp, etc.), oxés (489, 12), 

oxelv, ox@v. In the pr. éxw is for € EX (73 e), and that for oeX-0 
(70). The root vex- is syncopated in éoxov (43), beside which it — 
assumes ¢ in oxhow, ete. 


17. Bépop.or become warm ; in prose only present. 


18. Adprrew shine, middle Naparopans id. 


Aduw Dopba AAQquIrE 
19. a. héyw gather ; used by Attic writers only in compounds. 
rAééw Hm, ehetos eMALoxa (366) éLéynv 


elheypor, AéAeypor r. eAeXOny r. A, 
b. A€yo speak. 
AéEw tefo, (pyka, 539, 8) eéx Onv 
éAeypar 
But Siaréyoua: makes &1-elAeypat (366). 


20. dv-olyw open ; impf. dvéwyov (359 b): also av-olyvops cl. 5. 


dvolEw dvéwea, dvewya, aVEWXA, avewy On 
Evewypor V. GvoLKTéos 


a. In late Greek dvéyya was used intransitively = dvéewypot. The 
forms #voryoy and #vorta are doubtful in Attic. A comp. d:-olyo 
is also used, and in poetry the simple verb is found, but without 
the syllabic augment, 


21. wéurrw send. 


area erepaba, méroupa, mémempa.  eméudOny 
22. mépSoper, Lat. pedo. 

TAS} Op émapSov TéTONDA. 
23. méropar (rer-, meTe-, Wra-) fly. 

TTYTOLAL érTounv 

WETHTOLAL emT any 
24, whéxw twist. 

[wrctw | emdeEa wet eypor érAaKny 


éwhéxOny r. A. 
25. orépyw love. 
rrépto to-repta éoropya Hd. V. OTEPKTOS, -TéOS 


17. Hm. fu. 0épcouc (422 D b), 2d ao. p. sub. Bepew. 

19. Hm. and Hd. have no pf. act., in PE. m. only AéAeypau, in ao. p. andy Ony 
(Hd. also éAdynv). For ao. m. éadyuny, eAexTo, see 489 D, 39. 

20. Poet. and Ion. Ist ao. Sika, Sta and oita. Hm, impf. m. 3d pl. 
@lyvuyTo. 

23. Poet. ao. @rrny (489, 6). Poetic also are trraum and méraua; also 
woTdouas:, TOTéOMAL, WOTHTOMAL, WeTMOTH UAL, EmOTHONY. , 


FIRST CLASS. 161 





26. orpéw turn. 


orpépo torpeba grrpoda éorpadyy 
EoTpapi.ar éotpepOny r. A. 
27. téprrw delight. 
répio ereppa  éréppOny 
28. tpétra turn. 
Tpepo —- erpeba vétpoda [rérpapa] erpamny 
TETPAPLP.OUL érpépOny r. A. 
29. tpépw nourish. 
Opépo (496 a) epeFa retpopa | rérpada| érpadny 
TéOpapar ebpépOny r. A. 


_V. Verbs which assume -e- in the present. 


509. The following verbs form the present from themes of two 
syllables ending in -e-, but the other tenses (or a part of them) from 
the root. See 408. 

1, yopéw (yap-, yape-) marry (act. uxorem duco, mid. nubo). 


yop eynpo. yeyapnea, par = [eyauOyv] 
a. Late forms yaujow, éydunoa, éyaueOny Theoc. 





27. Hm. 2d ao. m. érapréunv, and with redupl. (4386 D) rerapréuny, ao. p. 
erappOny and érépdOny, also 2d ao. érdpmny, sub. Ist pl. tpawelouery (473 D a). 

28. Hd. has pr. rpdmw, ao. p. erpapény (also in Hm.), but tpdébw, erpewa. 
Hm. has also tparéw, tporéw. For retpddarat, see 464 D a. 

29. Dor. rpadw. Hm. has an intrans. 2d ao. érpapev was nourished, grew, 
and uses the 2d pf. rérpoda as intransitive. 

30. Root yowv-. Hm. has 2d pf. yéywva shout, plup. 3d sg. éyeydéver (and 
éyeywve, also Ist sg. yeydveuv, 458 D), inf. yeywveuev, irreg. yeywveiv, part. 
yeyoves (not in Hm. are sub. yeydéve, imv. yéywve; fu. yeywrvhow, a0. eyeya- 
vnoa). Poet. pr. yeywvioxw or yeywréw, found even in Att. prose. 

31, Poet. Séprouat sce, 2d ao. @paroy (435 D), 2d pf. dédcpxa see, ao. p. 
ebepxOnv saw (2d ao. édpdxny Pind.). 

32. Hm. €Amw cause to hope, €rmowa or é€Arouee (72 D a) hope (= Att. 
éeami(@ cl. 4), 2d pf. ZorAma hope, plup. édbamea (369 D), v. &eAmros. 

38. Poet. idxw and iayéw sound ; Hm. 2d pf. par. fem. aud-taxvia. 

34, Poet. KkérAouat command, fu. cedhooua (cf. 510), ao. éxeAnoduny rare, 
usu. 2d ao. exexAduny (436 D). 

35. Poet. méAouat (move) be, 2d ao. érdounv (487 D) often used as pres. 
Less freq. act. réAw, 2d ao. 3d sg. @rre. 

36. Poet. rép0w destroy (in prose mopGéw), fu. wépow, a0. repoa. Hm. 2d 
a0. ExpaGoy (435 D), 2d ao. m. inf. wépOat (489 D, 45). 

37. Poet. root, wop-, 2d ao. @xopoy imparted, pf. m. 3d sg. wémpwrat (64) éé 
ts allotted, destined, part. wempomévos. 

38. Ion. and poet. répaouae become dry, 2d ao. p. érépanv. Hence act. 
Tepoaive, a0. eréponva (late érepra) made dry. 


609 D. Hm. fu. m. 3d sg. yauésoera: will cause (a woman) to marry, 
- doubtful. 


ie 


a 
i" 
A 


162 VERBS: FIRST CLASS. 


2. ynbew (ynd-, ynbe-) rejoice. 
ynbnow eynOnca yéeyn8a am glad. 





3. SoKxéw (Sox-, Soxe-) seem, think. 
Sdfw eSofa déSoypar €56x Ony r. 
a. Soxjow, eddxnoa, Seddnnxa, Seddxnucu, eSoxnOny are poetic or late. 


4, kupéw (xup-, kupe-) hit upon, happen, Ion. and poet.: also «épw, cl. 4, 
Kuphow, KUpow  éxupoa, exipnoa. 2 


paprupéw (uaprupe-) bear witness, inflected regularly, but 
' ( paprupopan (uaprup-) cl. 4, call witnesses, 20. epaptupapny. 


6. mweKtéw (wex-, mexre-) comb, shear. ao. p. éméx Ony 
7. ptrréa throw = pimrw (513, 13), only pr. and impf. 


8. @Béw (wO-, whe-) push ; impf. CH0ovv (359). 
aCw, weiow toon [ewrxa] Eaorpar edo Ony 
a. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Attic. 


6. mefS and emeta Theocr. Hm. pr. welxo. 

9. Poet. Sovréw sound heavily, ao. €Sotvmnoa (even in Xen.), éydovrnaa (ef. 
éplydoumos loud thundering), 2d pf. d€éSovma. 

10. Poet. rerAadéw roar, fu. KeAadiow, Hm. pr. part. ceraddwv. 

11. Jon. and poet. xevréw prick, fu. nevthow, ete,, reg.; but Hm. ao. inf. 
Kéevoa (= KeyT-cat), v. xeaTds (= kevT-Tos). 

12. Poet. xrurew crash, clatter, rare in prose, 2d ao. éxruvmov; in Trag. also 
Ist a0. éxtirnoa. 

13. Ion. and poet. rar éouat, ect, a0. eracdyiny, pf. mera [a, Vv. &-raoTos. 

14. Poet. pryéw shudder, fu. piyhow, ao. éppiynoa, 2d pf. épprya used as a 
present. Different is prybeo am cold (412 a). 

15. Ion. and poet. oruyew dread, hate, fu. oTUYNT OMA, a0. éorvynaa, etc., 
reg. Hm. has Ist ao. toruta made dr cadjul, 2d ao. éoruyov dreaded, 

1: Pr. Pireeo love, inflected reg. as a verb of cl. 1, see Paradigm 324; but 
Hm. oe m. epirduny (g1r-). 

17. Hm. (xpacpéw help, ward off, pr. impf. rare and late) fu. xpucphow, 
a0. expalaunoa, 2d ao. Expatopov. 


Add the following, which form the present from themes in -e-. 

18. Pr. Boixdouat roar, ao. éBpixyngdynv. In Hm., only 2d pf. BéBpixa 
used as a present, 

19. Poet. youu bewail, fu. yonooua, Hm. 2d ao. éyoov. 

20. Hm. Snpidoueu quarrel (fu. Onptoopat Theoc.), 20. ednpicduny, ao. Pp. 
ednpivOnv (469 D). Pind. Snptomar, Spd. 

21. Poet. Aryude, -ouou, lick, fu. Arxuhooun, 2d pf. part. irregular AeAerx- 
pdtes Hes. 

22. Hm. undouat (uax-, unr) bleat, 2d ao. part. uardy, 2d pf. part. peunids, 
fem. pepaxvia (451 D c), plup. éudunxov (458 D). 

23. Hm. pnytidw, -owa, plan, fu. pynticoua, ao. eunriodunrv. Pind. 
unrioua. 

24, Pr. poxdopat (ndn-, puK-) low (used in Att. prose). Poet. ao. éuinnoduny 
Hm. 2d ao. guveoyv, 2d pf. uéuixa used as a present. ; 


x 
4 


meee 
+4) i) t 


610] FIRST CLASS. 163 





VI. Verbs which assume -e- in other tenses. 


510, The following verbs form their presents from the root, but 
the other tenses (or a part of them) from longer themes ending 
in -e-. See 405. 


1. &déEw (GArcé-, GAeK-, GAn-) ward of. Act. rare in prose. 
GESouae HACEG PNY 
a. grdetfjoouce and ddctnoduny are probably not Attic. 


2. &xBowar am displeased. 


ax Véropar [#xOnucx | HX Go Gy (497 a) 
8. Booka feed. 
Bookjrw [eBdonjnoa| { €BooxnOnyv | 


v. BooKknréos. 
4, Botdopatr wish. Augment, see 355 b. 


Bovhyropat BeSodAnpar éBovdryOny (497 a) 
5. Séw need, middle want, entreat. 
Seqrw edseqnoa SeSequa, Sedeqwar eSeHOnv (497 a) 


a. Impersonal Set it is necessary, impf. Me, fu. Seqorer, ao. énoe. 
6. Zpouat ask, see 508, 14; fu. époropar. 
7. pw go (to harm). 


iyo Apimora abimica 
8. ef5w sleep, usually in comp. kaSev6o. Augment, 361. 

Kadevdsyow v. KadevSytéov 
9. Eve boil. 

apire ippnoa. Linbnuat] Livheny, ipOnv] 


V. é0és (for éy-ros) and épnrds. 


10. 8X and @éAw wish: impf. #9eXov (never efeAor). 
(e)PeAHo-w nleXyoo HVéEANKO [TEDEAHKA| 
a. The Attic poets in the Iambic trimeter have 6éAw (not é6éAw) ; but 
é6éAw is the usual form in Attic prose, in Hm. and Pind. The 


augmented forms in Att. always have 7: thus ao. 70¢Anca, but 
sub. €GeAfow or OeAjow, etc. 


11. paxopar fight. 
paxodpar (423) ehaxerduny PEUX T]PLCLL V. BaXETEOS, -1TéOS 


610 D. 1. Ion. and poet. fu. drctjow, -nroua, ao. nACEnoa, 2d ao. &AaAKov 
(436 D), dakabety (494). 

4, Hm. pr. inf. BércecOa, 2d pf. apo- -BéBovaa. 

5. Hm. has i in act. Sjoc¢ and edednge ; in middle always detouat. Cf. 44. 

4. Hm. MAX OMAL, also Max Comat, part. paxerduevos or pax covpevos (83 D), 
fu. ax couct usu. HaxnToud, ao. eMaxerdny or euaxnoduny, Vv. waxntds. 
Hd, fu. waxéoopar. 


oe 
4 





164 | VERBS: SECOND CLASS. [511 


12. pédo care for. 
PART O enéAqora PEREANK, =O emer Ony 
a. The Att. prose has the act. only as an impersonal verb, péAex @ con- 


cerns, fu. ueAhoes, etc. ; and in the mid. uses the comp, émpéAopat 
(also émimeAgouar) passive deponent (497 a). 


13, pélAw am about. Augment 355 b. 


peadrARoo énéhanoa ° V. MEAANT Eos 
14. pévw remain: also pluvw (506, 3) poetic. 

peva pera, peRevyKa V. PeVETOS, -TéoS 
15. vépw distribute. 

VELa veya, VEVELTKG, -NILOL even Onv 
16. otopat, more fr. otuar think ; impf. downy (opqy). 

oljoop.at [Snodunv] wiv (497 a) 
17. otxopar am gone ; impf. @xdopyv was gone or went. 

ox joropar [exnpar] 


18. mépSopar, see 508, 22; fu. mapSqcopan. 
19. wéropar fly, see 508, 23; fu. rrqropar, wéryoope 


SEcoND Crass (Strong-Vowel Class, 394). 
511, The theme-vowel a, 1, v takes the strong form y, «, ev. 
a. Mute themes. 
1. An8w (Aad-) rare in prose, = Aav8ave cl. 5, lie hid. 


2. one (can-) vot, trans. 


onbw [eonba] otonma (501) ledonuua] éodarnv 
3. THKe (TaK-) melt, trans. 
Thi ernga TéeryKe (501) éraKny 
[rérnypau | évHxX Env rare 
4, spay (for tpnyw, root tpay-) gnaw. 
TpaEopar erpayov TETPWY POL V. TPWKTOS 


12. Hm. 2d pf. uéunaa, pf. m. 8d sg. wéuBrAerau (for pe-ure-rat, 60 D), plup. 
meuBAeTo. 

16. Hm. act. of or éfw, middle almost always with diaeresis dtoua, ao. 
wioduny, 20. p. atcOny. 

17. Hm. also pr. oixvéw cl. 5, pf. map-dynra. Hd. ofywka (for orx-wx-a, 73). 

20. Hm. @A@ouat am healed, fu. drA@hooua. 

21. Hm. nhdw trouble, fu. cndhew, ao. exhinoca (2d pf. xéenda, not in Hm., 
intrans. =) m. chdoua am troubled, irreg. fu. pf. cexadjooua, different from 
fu. pf. of xd(w (514 D, 18). 

22. Hm. médouat attend to, fu. wedhooum. Cf. Hm. pédwv (-vr-), medewr (-vt-) 
guardian. Cf. also phdopuat intend, contrive, fu. whoomat, a0. eunodunr. 


SHCOND CLASS. 165 





5. édeldpo (aAup-) anoint, 


drelipo Hrcuba aAHALHS (368) hAclponv 
GAHAYL LCL [narlpnv] 
6. épelaw (epix-) overthrow ; chiefly Ion. and poet. 
épetiyco [ Hpenpa| [ ephprmpat | npelpon 
7. Nelar@ (Au-) leave: also Ausmrdve cl. 5, rare, 
* Nebo é\utrov A€Aoutra, AEAerppcr ehelOny 
8. melOw (a0-) persuade, 
melow trea, TETEKA, TETELC LAL éxeloOny 
emBoy -  qvétrov8e, trust r. A. pr. 


9. orelBw (c718-) tread, chiefly used in pr. impf.; rare in prose. 
eorea, eo iBnuat Vv. oreimTds 


10, orelxw (arix-) march, go, chiefly in pr. impf.; Ion. and poet. 


11. HefSopar (pi5-) spare. 
geloropar eharapny 


12. KevOw (xvd-) hide, poetic. 
kevow éxevoa Hm. Kékevla as pres. 


13. mevdouct (rvd-) poetic for muvOavopar cl. 5, inguire, learn. 


14, redxw (Tux-, TuK-) make ready, make, poetic. 


reviw erevia TeTUY MAL 

15. hevyw (puy-) fice; also puyyave cl. 5. 
gevfoucan or  epvyov TEEVYO, V. HevkTds, -Téos 
evgoduar (426) 





; he D. 6. Ion. 2d ao. fpemov fell, 2d pf. épipima am fallen; Pind. 2d ao. p. 
plarnv. 

8. Hm. 2d ao. rémiGov (436 D) perswaded, whence fu. wemi6qow shall per- 
suade ; but méjow (405) shall obey, ao. par. miOhoas trusting, 2d plup. 1st pl. 
exémtOuey trusted (492 D, 15). Aesch. 2d pf. imv. mémero6t. 

10, Ep. ao. goreita and Zerixov. 

11, Hm. 2d ao. repidéuny (486 D), fu. redidhoopat. 

12, Hm. pr. cevOdvw cl. 5; 2d ao. 3d sg. xdOe, sub. 3d pl. kexdOwor (436 D). 
In Trag. rev0w, néxevOa, may mean am hidden. 

14. Hm. ao. p. éerdxOnv, 2d pf. part. rerevyds, fu. pf. terevtouar, 2d ao. 
TéTuKoy, TeTuKdunv (486 D) prepared. Also pr. rirdcxoucu (for Ti-TuK-cKouA!) 
prepare, aim. For rerevxatat, -ato, see 464 D a. 

15. Hm. 2d pf. par. wepu(dres (cf. Hm. gifa= guyh flight), pf. m. par. 
meguyuevos, V. puxtds. 

16. Ion. and poet. theme ra¢- or @ar- (cf. 74), 2d pf. ré6nra wonder, 2d ao. 
par. rapdr. | 

17. Hm. tyhyw (Tyay-) cut = réuyw cl. 5 (521, 8), ao. Erunta, 2d ao. &rparyor, 
2d ao. p. érucyny. 


. 
a 


166 VERBS: THIRD CLASS. 
512, b. Themes in -v-. 


1. Béw (Ov-) run. Fu. Getoropar. 


2. véw (vu-) swim. 


yevrodpor (426)  evevora, vévevKa Vv. veuorréos 
3. wAéw (wAv-) sail. 
mrcboopar or dirdkevre, aeTACUKG [emrcdabny] 
trevor odpar [ rAcvow | Témwevo por (461) Vv. wAevo-réos 
4, awvéw (mvv-) breathe, blow. 
mvevoouat OF erveuoe TETVEUKO, [emvedodny] 
TVEVTOUAAL 
5. péw (pu-) flow. 
ocicopar or [Zspevca] eppinka éppiny as act. 
puyAcopar fu. p. as act. Vv. purds 
6. Kew (xu-) pour. 
x%éa (427) éxea, (430) KEXVKG, KEX ULEL éx bOny 


Tuirp Crass (Zau-Class, 395). 


513, The theme assumes -7°|.- in the present. Verbs of this 
class have themes ending in a labial mute. 


18, Ion. and poet. épetxw (epir-) rend, ao. Hperta, 2d ao. Hpixoy intrans, shiv. 
ered, pf. m. éptiprypa. 

19. Epic and Lon. épev-youa: spew (Att. épuyydvw cl. 5), fu. épedtouat, 2d ao. 
hpuyoy roared. 

20. Hm. épet@w (epud-) make red, ao. inf. éepetoa. Also pr. épudatvoua 
grow red. 


512 D. 2. Hm. has also vaxw, vnxoua, fu. vatoua (freq. in late prose). 
Dor. vaxw, vaxouat. Hm. évveoy (355 D a). 

8. Ion. and poet. rAdw, fu. rAdcomal, a0. €rAwoa, also 2d ao. ¢xAwy (489 
D, 27), pf. mérAwka, V. TAwTSs. 

4, Hm. 2d ao. imv. &u-mvve, 2d ao. m. 3d sg. &u-mvito (489 D, 32), ao. p. 
du-rvivOny (469 D), pf. m. wérvipat am animated, intelligent: connected with 
this is pr. mivdonw (mivv-) Aesch. make wise, Hm. ao. éemlyvoca. 

6. Hm. also xelw (409 D b), ao. usu. Exeva (4380 D), 2d ao. m. 3d sg. xvro 
(489 D, 34). 

7. Hm. aadoua: and dAedoua: (adv-) avoid (act. dredw avert, Aesch.), ao. 
HrAeduny and jAevduny (480 D). Pr. also dAcetva. 

8. Poet. KrAéw (xAv-) celebrate (i. e. make men hear of), Hm. narelw. Also 
pr. eAdw hear. 2d ao. dAvoy heard, imv. KAO or KéKAvOL, KAUTE OY KEKAUTE 
(489 D, 80), also «Ave, xAdere, par. m. KAvpevos = V. KAUTSs, KAETOs celebrated. 

9. Poet. cevw (ov-) drive (also in late prose), ao. @oaeva (355 D a, 430 D), 
pf. m. Zocupoe hasten (865 D, 389 D b), ao. p. eoodOnv or eovOny, 2d ao. m. 
3d sg. stro (489 D, 33). The Att. drama has irreg. forms of a pr. m., 3d sg 
cedrat, 3d pl. codvrat, imv. cod, covcbw, covode. 








THIRD CLASS. 


1. dare (ap-) fasten, kindle, middle touch. 
diapo myo TREO 
2. Pamre (Bap-) dip, dye. 
Bepo eBaa BéBappour 
8. BAdarre (BAap-) hurt. 
Brdipo eBraya BéEBAada 
BéBrap par 
4, barre (rap-, ‘74 c) bury. 
Bao apa TeOopLce 
5. @ptarw (tpud-, 74 c) break down, weaken. 
Opie €Opupa Hipp.  répyppar 
6. Kadtatw (KadvB-) cover. 
Kadinpo éxadupa KeKGA UP LOL 
7. Kauarre (xaym-) bend, 
Kduarpeo exoipa, Kékappa (463 b) 
8. KAémrr@ (KAer-) steal. 
Krébo ekAeipa Kéxopa 
Keep poe 
9. Komre (Kkor-) cut. 
Koyo exowpa Kéxoda, KéKopinct 
10. Kpbartw (Kpud-) hide. 
Kpipo éxpuba KEKPUPL.AL 
11. Kiara (Kip-) stoop. 
Kio tkoa Kéxiga 
| 12, parr (sap-) sew. 
parpo epparbo. eppappar 
18. pire (Sip-, fid-) throw. 
pipe pupa Esta, EBSTapaw 
14, sxamra (cxad-) dig. 
oKapo trkaba ErKaha, ErKapiuar 
15. okémropar (oxem-) view. 
wkepopcn éoxebauny Eorkepnp.cut 


167 


Hpenv 
éBadny, éBdpOny r. 


éBXadOny and 
éprAaBnyv 


érapyy, Vv. Oarréos 
[edpupOny] 
exahidOny 
éxapbOyy 


éxAarnv 
exrepOny 


b] ld if 
€KOTTHV, V. KOTTOS 


expipOny 
exptony [éxpuBnv] 


eppadny 


[eoxepOny] 
a. Instead of oxémrouat, the Attic writers almost always use the 


kindred oxoréw in the present and imperfect; but the other 
tenses of oxoméw are found only in late writers. 





613 D. 3. Hm. pr. m. 8d sg. BAdBerau. 


4. Hm. 


5. Hm. 2d ao. p. érpipny. 
9. Hm. 2d pf. part. xexords. 


pf. m. 3d pl. Tebdparan (864 D a); Hd. ao. p. e0dpénr. 


168 VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. 





16. oxqrre (cKnT-) prop. 


cK po —— berxyba [Zonnpa] toxnpper éoxyp yy 
17. oxdate (cKwT-) jeer. 

TKO Popar trkopa [eorwppas | _éokapOny 
18. timre (tuT-, also Tumte-) strike. 

TUTTHOW érumnv 


a. erurTnoa is found in Aristotle; rerdarnka, terdatnua, runny 
are late. The aorist, perfect, and passive systems are unknown 
to Attic prose, the aorist system being supplied from mraracow 
(waray-), the perfect and passive systems from mAhoow (514, 5). 


Fourtu Crass (Jota-Class, 396 ff), 


The theme assumes -.°|,- in the present, always with sound- 
changes. ‘The verbs of this class are very numerous. We 
notice only those which have peculiarities of formation, espe- 
cially all those which form second tenses. 


I. Verbs in -cow and -lw which form second tenses. 


514, 1. d\Adoow (adaay-) exchange. 


GAAGEW raga HrAaxa, HAAwypae HAAGYyHY 
HAAG Ov 
2. Knpveow (xnpix-) proclaim. 
KnpUS® éxnpita KEKYPUK A, ~ypour exnpuxOnv 
3. pacoe (uay-) knead, 
patw tata, PELOK OL, EMC Y LOL epayny, eudxOny 
4. épteaw (opux-) dig. 
6pvegw apvta Spopvxa, ~ypat apty ony 


a. Pf. m. épuyuou (for dépdpuvypar) late, 2d ao. p. wpdxnv doubvful. 
5. wARSow (TAay-, wAny-) strike. (éx@dHyvvoG8at cl. 5, Thuc.) 
TAIto tmAnga TéeTAN YS éexdnynv 
TETANY Par eTANKXOnv 
a. exmrAhoow, KkatatAjoow make -erAdynv (471 a). Attic writers use 
the simple verb only in the perfect and passive systems, the 


other active tenses being supplied from rardcow (waray-), which 
in Att. is confined to the active, or from rérrw (513, 18). 


— 


18. Ion. and Lyric 1st ao. éruwa, pf. m. Térupua, poet. 2d ao. @rumor. 

19. Poet. yuduarrw (yvayr-) bend, fu. yraubw, ao. éyvamiba, ao. p. eyvdupbnv. 

20. Hm. évimrw (evir-) chide, also évicow cl. 4 (515 D, 3), 2d ao. jvimamop 
and évéviroy (436 D). 

21. Poet. udprrw (wapm-) seize, fu. udppw, ao. Euappa. In Hes. 2d ao, 
péuaprov (486 D), opt. weudmorer, inf. pare, 2d pf. weuapra. 

514 D, 5. Hm. 2d ao. (é)memanyor (436 D), 2d ao. p. éx-wAhynv, kar-erAnyny. 





514] FOURTH CLASS. 169 


6. mpacow (mpary-) do. 


mpatw trpata mémpaya, wémpaxa (452 a) erpax Inv 
TETPAY POL 
1. wrqooe (rrne-) cower: also rrécow Ion. and poet. 
[arhio | trrnga erty Ke 
8, rapkoow (tapax-) disturb: also Opdaow (Tpax-) mostly poet. 
Tapate érapata TETAPAY LLL érapax Onv 
pata (74 c) eOpaxOny Yr. 
9. racow (Tay-) arrange. 
hbo erago TETAXA, TETAYLOL eraxOny, erdyny r 


10. potrow (ppix-) am rough. 
[ppttw] eppita mépptxa bristle, shudder, 

11. pvddoow (puaan-) guard, middle guard (one’s self) against. 
pvdrate épirata TEPUAAXA, ~YP.OU épvdAax Ony 

12. Kadcw (Kawyy-, 898 b) make a loud noise, mostly poet. 
Kadyiw ekaayta KéxAayya as pr., fu. pf. kexAdyfopas 

13, Kpafe (kpay-) cry; pr. impf. rare. 

expayov Kéxpaya, as pr., fu. pf. Kexpagopnar 
a. «pdtw, xpata, late. Pf. imv. néxpaxés, see 492, 8. 
14, pew (pey-) do, poet. and Ion.: also &pdw (for ep{w, root epy-). 


petw peta, eppeta épexOny 
Epiw Epta 

15, edatw (cpay-) slay, in Attic prose usu. chatro. 
opago topata tordaypae eroayny 


16. tpi¢w (Tpry-) squeak, poet. and Ion. 2d pf. rérpiya as pres. 
17. dpatw (ppad-) declare. 
opace thpaca TEPPAKA, TEPPAT LCL eppacOnv 
18. xalw (xa5-) make retire ; middle retire ; chiefly poetic. 
eXardpnyv 


7. Hm. has from kindred root mra-, 2d ao. 3 du. kata-mrirny (489 D, 25) 
and pf. part. wemrnds, -@Tos (446 D, 455 Db). 

8. Hm. 2d pf. rérpnxa, am troubled. 

10. Pind. pf. par. repptxovras, see 455 D a. 

12, Poet. 2d ao. éxAayov. Hm. 2d pf. par. xexAnyds, gen. -ovros (455 D a). 

14, Ion. pf. Zopya, plup. edépyea (869 D). 

Hd. pr. impf. epiw instead of epdw. 

15. Ion. and poet. Ist ao. p. éopdxOnv. 

17. Hm. 2d ao. éméppadov (486 D). Hes. pf. m. part. redpaduévos. 

18. Hm. fu. xdocowm, 2d ao. m. irreg. Kexaddunv (436 D) retired, but act. 
«éxadoy deprived, fu. kexadjow shall deprive. Cf. 510 D, 21. 


170 _ VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. 


19. xéL@ (xe5-) aluum exonero. 
Xerodpar (426) exera, xerovr. KéXoda, KéeXeopar 


Il. Verbs in -cow and -lw with other peculiarities. 
515, a. Labial themes (897 b, 398 c). 


1, wéoow (rex-, formerly wex-) cook: [wrérrw later]. 
repo Crea, TETTELL LOW érépOnv — 
2. vite (wB-, formerly vry-), wash hands or feet: [vtarw later]. 
viipo evipo VEVULNLOLL évipOnv Hipp. 


516, b. Lingual themes which make -oco (-rro). 
1. Gppdrre jit together: also apudw poet. 
Gpido-w Hpp.ocra Tppoo par tippoo Oy 
2. BrAlrre take the honey (uéru, wéArt-os, 60 D). ao. tBAuoa. 
3. Bpdoow boil. [ao. EBpaca, pf. m. BéBpacpou. | 
4. épécow (eper-) row. Only pr. impf. in Att. 
5. macow sprinkle. 
TAT trac [wéracpat | era ny 
6. whdooew mould. 
mwAdow Hipp. dace TETAAC LAL érAdo nv 


7. wrlrow pound. 
entioa Hd. CTU POLL [erricény | 


20. Poet. npi(w creak; 2d ao. 3d sg. xplke (or xplye) Hm., 2d pf. xéxprya 
Aristoph. 

21. Poet. weAd(w (aedad-, meAa-, TAa-) bring near, mid. come near, pr. and ao. 
act. also in prose, intrans., fu. meAdow, weA@ (424), ao. éwéAaca, pf. m. rérA7- 
pat, a0. p. ereAdoOny and Trag. éwAabny, 2d ao. m. 3d sg. rAfro, 8d pl. 2xAnvre 
(489 D, 24). Pr. also weAdw, Ep. wlAvaya: or maAvdw cl. 5 (529 D, 6), Trag. 
meAdOw, TAROW (494). 

5615 D, 2. Hm. virroua. 

3. Hm. évicow (evm-) = évintw cl. 8, chide (513 D, 20). 

4, Hm. docoucn (o7-) foresee, only pr. impf.; cf. 5389, 4. 

5. Hm. AdCouo (AaB-) = AauBayw cl. 5, take (523, 5). Attic poets have 
AdCupar. 

516 D, 4. Hm. ao. Hpeoa and jpeooa. 

8. Hd. apdoow = apdw feel, 20. Hpaca. 

9. Poet. iudoocw lash, Hm. ao. fuaca; cf. iuas lash, gen. indvr-os. 

10. Poet. xoptoow (kopu0-) equip, a0. m. Kopvocduevos, pf. m. rexopu0ucvos 
53 D a). 

11. Poet. (rare in prose) Alowoum (Art-) pray, also Afroua cl. 1. Hm. ao. 
eAAtodunv (855 D a), 2d ao. inf. Arréc Oa. 

12. Poet. viccoum go, fu. vicoum. Also pr. véowat, usu. with future meaning, 





ee 








B17] FOURTH CLASS. 171 


517. c. Themes of variable form. 


1. Gomdfw (aprad-, also apmary- not Att.) seize. 


apTrace (-on.ar) praca Hpmwaka, Hotracpar jerac8nv 
[apmdge | Lijpraga] [iproypat] Lnpraxeny, nprdyny] 


2. Barra w (Bacrad-, late Bacray-) carry, poet. (late in prose). 
Barracw éBdoraca [-ta] [BeBdoraypar | [eBaardxOnv] 


8. [vdoow| (vay- and vad-) press close. pf. m. vévacpat 


4, matte (rad- and may-) sport. 
moargotpar (426) erawa TETOULT POL V. WALTTEOS 


a. €maka, wemoxXa, wemoryuar, ewalxOny are late: so also fu. mattoua 
and maiko. 


5. cate, later cdfw (ow-, owd-) save. 
race trace céiowka, céorwpcn er dOnv 
TET WT LOL V. CoOTEOS 


6. Xpaleo (xpwd-, xpoid-) color, also xpoi(w poet.; [xpdvvixe late]. 
[expwoa| [xéxpwra] Kexpwopat expdoOny 


7. ‘Le (i5-, i(e-) sit, seat, middle YLoper, also ECouas (€5-), sit: found chiefly 
in comp. with card. Hence 
Kadlifo, impf. exdOrLov (361): also tLave, kabiLava, cl. 5. 
Kad (425) exddioa and kafioa, 
Kabitjoopar exadiordauny 
KaGeLonar, impf. exadeLopny and KaleCdunv. 
KaGedodpar (for cafedecouct, cf. 423). [exabécOnv] 


a. Pr. ind. €(ouat, na0éCouct, is rare in classic Greek, and the pr. inf. 
and part. and the impf. have usually an aorist meaning. The 
root of both these verbs was originally oed- (Lat. sed-co). 


8. Sf (05-, o¢e-) smell. 
oChow atyoa 


617 D, 1. Hm. aprdiw and fiprata. 

3. Hm. and Hd. évaka. 

5. Hm. pr. od(w and edw (shortened in subj. odns, adn, cdwor), fu. cadow, 
20. eodwoa, a0. p. éoadOyy. The orig. theme was oao- (cf. 227 D), from which 
comes also a 2d ao. (u:-form) odw he saved and save thou. 

7. Hm. ao. eioa (= e-ced-ca) seated, imv. eisoy (better Eocov), inf. grou, 
par. €ods (avéods), Hd. efcds; middle trans. 3d sg. ééocato (ctoaro Eur., €ocayro 
Pind.), par. éooduevos, Hd. cicduevos; fu. Eocowa: (= oed-cowa). In comp. 
Hm. has ao. kadeion and nda. 

8. Hm. pf. d6wda as pr. 

9. Pr. wi w (uiy-, wiCe-), Hm. ao. éud(nea. 

= Hm. apioow (apuy-, apvd-) draw out, fu. apviw, ao. fipuoa. Also once 
pr. advw. 





172 VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. 


Ill. Liquid themes which form second tenses. 
518, 1. dyeipw (ayep-) gather. 


i}yapa [ayhyepra, -mar | 
2. alpw (dp-) lift; contracted from delpw (aep-). 
dpa tipo. (431 b) Fpka, Fppow pny 
3. GANopar (aA-) leap. 
GAodpat jrdpny (431 b, 2d ao. 7ACuny doubtful in Att., cf. 489 D, 35). 
4, BaddAw (Badr-, BAa-, 64) throw. 
Bore €Badov BEBAnKa, BEBAnpaL eBrHOnv 
5. éyslow (evep-) rouse, wake trans., 2d pf. and mid. wake intrans. 
éyepd Hyerpa, éypnyopa (3868, 501) Hyepenv 


Aypspny (437 D)  eéytyyeppow 
a. A poetic pr. éypw, &ypouat is also found. 
6. OdAAw (Oadr-) flourish. 2d pf. réOyra. 


7. watvw (xav-) kill, fu. avd, 2d ao. Exavoy: other tenses doubtful. In 
prose only as compound, katakatve, 


8. Kelow (Kep-) shear. 
Kepd eretpa [xéxapra] Kékappar [éxdpny] v. kapréos 
9. KAtve (xAw-) make incline, see 519, 1. 
10. xrelvw (xrev-) kill, see 519, 4. 
11, patvopar (uav-) am mad: poet. ualvw madden, ao. Eunva. 


pavovpa Hd. meunva am mad éuavny 
12. ddetho am obliged. 2d a0. Opedov. From theme ope:Ac- come 
Spahjncw adethynoa adelAnka aperninv 
13. aeipw (wep-) pierce (pr. Epic only). 
emrepa. méTmapuat 


518 D, 1. Hm. pr. impf. 3d pl. #yepeOovrat, -ovro (494), 2d ao. 3d pl. &yép- 
ovro, inf. ayéeperOa (389 D a), part. aypduevos (437 D), ao. p. HyépOnv. 

2. Hm. has only ao. m. jpduny, p. part. apdefs. He commonly uses Ion. 
and poet. delpw (aep-), a0. Hepa, ao. p. HépOnv, plup. 3d sg. &wpro (for opto): 
pr. impf. 3d pl. jepebovra, -ovro (494). 

4, Hm. pf. 2d sg. BéBana (462 D), 8d pl. BeBaharat, -aro (376 D d), also 
BeBoAharo, part. BeBoAnuévos; 2d ao. m. 3d sg. eBAnro, etc. (489 D, 21); fu. 
once cuuBAnoomat. 

6. Hm. pf. part. fem. reOadrvia (451 D c), 2d ao. 3d sg. OdAc. Hm. pr. Onréw, 
fu. OnAtow, pr. part. Oardbwy (494), rnArAcOdwr. 

8. Hm. ao. éxepoa (431 Dc). Hd. has ao. p. éxdpny, Pind. éep@ny. 

11. Hm. ao. éunvdunv, Theoe. pf. m. pmeudynuat. 

12, Hm. in pr. impf. almost always épéAAw (different from dpeAAw tire 
crease, 20. opt. épéAAere, 431 D d). 

13. Hd. ao. p. éwapny. 





519] FOURTH CLASS. 173 


14. calpw (cap-) sweep. 
conpa céionpa grin 
15. [oxéAdrw] (oKed-, oxre-) dry (500, 6). 
[onahooua | écxaAnv (489, 11) 


16. omelpw (c7mep-) sow. Vv. omapTdés 
oxrepe tome ermrappar éorapny 
17. oré\Xo (ored-) send. 
OTEAD toretha trrakka, torahpar éoradny 
18. eddddo trip up, deceive. 
TPars topnia [Zaparka] todadrpor éopadny 
19. datvw, show, middle appear. 
gave tbyva TEPAYKA, TEAC LAL épaveny r. pr. 
wépyva, intr. ebay 
20. pbelpw (pbep-) corrupt, destroy. 
pied epPerpa epbapka, Eplappar épbapny 
&pOopa [v. pOaprds | 
21. xalow (xap-, also xape-, xatpe-) rejoice. 
Karphow [ exaipnoa] KeX dpyKa éxapny as act. 
[xaphoouat | KEXapNMAL, KEXapMAL Vv. KapTos 


IV. Liquid themes which reject v. 


519, A few liquid verbs reject the final » of the theme in some of 
the systems (the first six only in the perfect and passive systems). 


15. Hm. ist ao. irreg. Zéoxnaa made dry. Ion. pf. éoxanna am dry. 

19. Hm. 2d ao. act. iter. pdverxe appeared, From shorter root pa- he has 
impf. dd (morn) appeared, fu. pf. rephoeta will appear. For dactyw, ao. p. 
gpadvOny, see 469 D. For intensive taudaivwv, maupavdwy, see 574. 

20. Hm. fu. d:a-p0épow (422 D b), 2d pf. 5:-€pOopa am ruined (in Att. poets 
trans. and intr.). Hd. fu. m. d1a-p@apéouan intr. 

21. Hm. ao. m. éxnpduny, 2d ao. cexapdunv (436 D), fu. rexapjow, -ouat, pf. 
part. kexapnds (446 D). 

22. Poet. ardatvw (ardav-) nowrish, 2d ao. HAdavov. 

23. Hm. etAw (ed-, Fea-) press, ao. (€)eAoa, pf. m. ZeAuau, 2d ao. p. edany, 
inf. GAjva:. Pind. has 2d plup. 3d sg. ébaez. In pr. impf. act., Hm. has only 
etAéw. Even Attic writers have pr. impf. efAéw or eiAdw, also efAAw: TAAw is 
old and poetic. 

24. Poet. évaipw (evap-) slay, 2d ao. Hvapov, ado. m. 8d sg. évhpare. 

25. Poet. Oeivw (Oev-) smite, fu. Oeva, ao. Zea, 2d ao. eevor. 

26. Hm. pelpoua: (uep-) receive as my part, 2d pf. 8d sg. Eupope (365 D), pf. 
m. 3d sg. eluapror (366) 2 ts fated used even in Att. prose, part. eiuappuévos. 
In later poets, wepdpnxe, meudpnta, wenopnévos. 

27. Poet. méAAw (mad-) shake, ao. érnda; Hm. 2d ao. part. du-wemaddy 
(436 D), 2d ao. m. 3d sg. mdaro (489 D, 44). 





174. VERBS: FOURTH CLASS. 





1. «Atv (KAw-, KAL-) make incline. 


KAW e&kAtva [ KéxArka.]| éxA(Onv and — 
KéKAULO kat-exAlyyy 

2. Kptve (Kpu-, Kpi-) judge. 

KpWd éxptva KEKPLKG, KEKPLPLOLL exp lOny 
8. wAUve (wAvy-, TAv-) wash clothes. 

TVA drdova TréTAUPLOL érAvOny Hipp. 
4. xrelvw (krev-, xta-) kill: also aaro-krivvipn, -bo cl. 5. 

KTEevd exTeva, ar-eKTOVa 

EXT AVYOV [éxreyKa, &erara| 


a. For 2d ao. poet. &eray, see 489, 4. For the perf. m. and ao. p. the 
Attic uses TéOvnxa and e0avov from O@vhexw (530, 4). 


5. telve (rev-, ta-) extend. 


TEVA tree, TETUKA, TETO[OL éerabny 
6. Kepdatvw (epdav-, repda-) gain. 
Kepdava exépdava (431 b) Kexépdyxa 
7. Batve (Bay-, Ba-) go. 
BAcopat eByv (489, 1) BeByxa (490, 2) éBabyyv in comp. 
Bhow (500, 2) eByoa BéBapar in comp. v. Bards, Baréos 


8. ooppatvopar (orppay-, or ppa-, orpp-) smell. 
doppjocoua arppounv Loropnoduny | awoppaveny 


V. Vowel-themes of the fourth class. 


520, 1. xatw (xav-) burn ; Att. prose ki uncontracted. 


Kadow deavora KEKGUKO, KEKOULOL éxatOnv 
2. KAalw (KAav-) weep ; Att. prose KAGw uncontracted. 

KAatooper exAavon KeKAaupat Vv. KAauTés 

kAavoodpat (426) later kAavords 


also KAaRTw 
a. KeKAavopmat, exradaOny are late. 


5619 D, 1. Hm. ao. p. éxalvOny and éxaldnv, pf. m. 8d pl. kexAlarau (464 D a), 

2. Hm. ao. p. éxpivény (so Hd.) and éxplény. 

4, Hm. fu. crevéw and rravéw, ao. p. exTaenv. 

5. From root ra-, Hm. makes also pr. ravtw (once with mwi-form, pr. m. 8d 
sg. TdvuTat), fu. Tavdow, ao. éravuoa, pf. mM. TeTdvUTMaL, AO. p. eTavdaOnv. Also 
pr. TiTalyw, ao. eritnva. 6. Hd. fu. cepdjcomat, ao. éxépdnea. » 

7, Hm. ao. m. 8d sg. éBhoero (428 Db). Pr. also Bdoxw cl. 6; 580 D, 11. 
Pr. part. BiBas, as if from BiBnu, also BiB (as if from PBiBaw). Dor. fu. 
Bacovpo, Theoc. Bnoedua. 8. Hd. ao. 3d pl. décgpavro. 

9. Hm. root gev-, da-, 2d ao. éxepvov, mépvov (486 D) killed, pf. m. wepapmat, 
fu. pf. wephooua. 

520 D, 1. Hm. ao. cna, Attic poets have part. xéds (shortened from rfas). 
Hm. ao. p. éxanv. 


oo Slade 





J 





oh 
BAS! hg 


621] FIFTH CLASS. 1% 


FirruH Crass (Wasal Class, 402). 


The theme assumes a syllable containing v. 


I. Themes which assume -v°|.-. 
521, 1. édadve (eda-) drive: also é€Adw poetic. 
€&o (Ado, 424) Haare éXyAaka, EXAApAL HAGIyV [HAdcOnv | 
a. éAavyw is probably for eAa-vu-w; see 525 and 488 a. 
2. p8davea (p0a-) anticipate. 


PIAropar ehOnv (489, 8) [dara] [epddoOnv | 
Place ehdaca 
8. wiv (m-, also mo-) drink. 
artopar (427)  ervov (489, 16) améraka, méropan émrdOnv 
or miopoar [rota | v. miotés, moTds, TOTEOS 
4, tivw (t1-) pay back, middle obtain payment. 
rise erica, TETTKO, TETLT LOL eric Onv 
5. Pdlvw (p6-) perish. 
p0icw trans. ZpGioa trans. epic v. patés 


a. Late ébOtynca épéivnka. 
6. Sdaxve (dax-) bite. 
SHEopor eSaKov SéSyypar e574 Onv 
7. Kauye (xap-, Kua-) am weary, sick. 
Kodo KOLO KEKLUKO Vv. Giro-KEnTEov 
8. Ténvo (Teu-, TueE-) cut. 
TEND trewov, Erauoy TETPNKA, TETUNUGL érpneyy 
9. witvw (ret-) fall. Cf. mtrrw, 506, 4. 


& Poet. Saiw (Sa-) burn trans., mid. intr., 2d pf. S€5ya intr., 2d ao. m. sub. 
3d sg. Sanrat. 

4, Poet. daloua: (Sa-) divide, fu. Sdovouon, ao. édacduny, pf. 3d sg. déacra, 3d 
pl. (irreg.) dedaiara:. Also pr. daréoua (Hes. ao. inf. irreg. daréaca, 430 D). 

5. Poet. watoua (ua-, wev-) reach after, seek for, fu. pacoua, ao, éuacduny, 
2d pf. ucuova press on, desire cagerly, pl. ueuapev, etc. (492 D, 9), v. waords. In 
the sense of the pf., Hm. has intensive pamdw (574), ao. walunoe. In Att. 
Trag. we find pr. part. udmevos (= pa-opuevos), 

6. Poet. vatw (va-) inhabit, ao. évacoa caused to inhabit, m. évacoduny be- 
came settled in, = ao. p. éevdcOnv. Pf. m. vévacpar late. 

7. Hm. érviw (omv-) take to wife, fu. éricw Aristoph. 


5621 D. 1. Hm. fu. éAdw, éadas, etc. (424 D); plup. m. 3d sg. éAfjAaro, once 
HAnAato, 8d p. éAndddaro (464 Da). Hipp. éanrAacua. 2. Hm. pres. P0ave. 

4, Hm. trévw. Hm. and Hd. have also pr. rivimi, Tivumou, v. TiTés. 

5. Hm. POtvw, P0tow, €pPioa; 2d ao. ZPOov, m. POiuny, éPOlAnv (489 D, 29). 
Pr. also pOiv0w (494). 7. Hm. pf. part. rexunds, -@Tos (446 D, 455 D b). 
8. Ton. tdéuvw, 2d ao. érauov. Hm, has pr. réuyw once, téuw once; alse 
Tunyeo (Tuay-) cl. 2 (511 D, 17). 


176 | VERBS: FIFTH CLASS. 





Il. Themes which assume -av° 





ee 


522, 1. aicbdvopar (acd-) perceive: also atoPouat rare. 


aicinrona, joddpnv Hoonpar v. aloOnrds 
2. anaptavea (auapt-) err. 

GUAPTHT ONAL  THLaApTOV HPAPTHKG, -NLOL hap hiyy 
8. avgdve (avi-) increase: also aife. 

avejore nvenoa nbsnka, nbEnpor nvénonv 
4, Brarrave (BAacr-) sprout: [also BAaoréw late]. 

BAraorhiow eBAacrov (B)eBAdornKe (365 a). 

[ €BAdornoa| 


5. Sap9ave (Sapé-) sleep, in comp. except in 2d ao. 
eSapIov Seba 0nka [ eddpOny | 
6. dar-exSavopar (ex0-) am hated. | 
Gmrex0jropa,  aarnxOdpnv a&ryy Ona 
The forms €x0w hate, €x@ouo am hated are poetic. 
7. oiddvw (015-) and otSé cl. 1, swell ; [later oiddw, ofSatve. | 
woyoa gonna 
8. ddtrPave (oAc-) slip » [later 6ArcOaivw | 
[ dArcOjow | Ato bov (@AicOnKka and wAlcOnoa Hipp.) 


9. éprAtoKave (opA-, opAicr-) incur judgment. 
dprAqoo apAov SpAynka, SpAnpar 


523. The following have an inserted nasal. 
1. avidvw (&8-) please, only the present in Attic. 


2. Oryydvw (Giy-) touch. 
Gitouat euyov Vv. &-OuKTos 


10. Hm. ddvw (Hes. bivéw) = Ou-w rush. 


522 D. 2. Hm. 2d ao. #uBporoy (for nuparoy, nuporoy, 60 D). 

3. Hm. dééw. 

5. Hm. 2d ao. e5paborv (435 D). 

10. Eur. dagdvw (arg-) procure. Hm. 2d. ao. jAgor. 

The following two add -alvyw to the theme. 

11. Hes. darratvw (arcr-) offend. Hm, 2d ao. #Arrov, m. HArTéuny, pf. part. 
irreg. GAithuevos (cf. 389 D b). 

12. Hm. épidaivw (epid-) contend (= épi(w cl. 4), ao. m. inf. epdjoarba. Pr. 
also éptduatyw provoke. 

523 D. 1. Hm. impf. fvdavoy, Eqvdavoy (Hd. édvdavov) see 359 D; 2d ao. &dov 


or evadov (= eFFador, cf. 355 D a), 2d pf. €dda. Hd. 2d ao. Eadoy, fut. adjow. 
For aopevos, see 489 D, 46. 


oe: 


524] FIFTH CLASS. | v7 


3. Kvyxdvw (Kix-) come up to, 
KIX hoomat €xLXov Vv. &-KiXnTOS 
4, Aayxave (Aax-) obtain by lot. 
Anopar éhaxov elAnxa, etAnypar EXqxOnv 
5. NapBave (AaB-) take. 
Anpopar éhaBov elAnpa, etAnpmar AApenv 
ACANMMAL 
6. AavOave (Aad-) le hid, middle forget: also APw cl. 2 (511, 1). 
Agro "  &aSov AAAnPa, AEANo paw Vv. &Aagros 


a. The simple middle is rare in prose, ém-Aav@dvoua (seldom éx-Aay- 
Odvoua) being used instead. 


7. pavOdve (uaé-) learn. 


pabycopar EpaOov pepabnka V. padntds; -Téos 
8. muvddvopar (av0-) inquire, learn: also wevOoua: cl. 2, poet. 
TECTOLAL érvddpnv TETUTPLAL V. TEVOTEOS 
9. TVyXave (Tvx-) hit, happen. 
TEvEOL.CL eruxov TETUXNKA, TETEVKS [eredxOnv] 
[rérevypat] 


Ill. Themes which assume -ve|.-. 


524, 1. Bivéw (6u-) stop up; [also Bbw]. 
Biow eBioa BéBuopar [eBvcbny] v. Buords 
2. ixvéowar (fx-) come. 
VEopcn tomy Eypoae 
a. &p-ixvéouae is commonly used in prose. 


3. Hm. niyavw, ao. nxhoaro. For pi-forms from theme rixe-, see 538 D, 4. 

4, Hd. fu. Adfount. Hm. 2d ao. 2Aaxov obtained by lot, but AéAaxov (436 D) 
made partaker. Ion. and poet. 2d pf. AéAoyxa. 

5. Hd. fu. Adupoua, pf. AeAdByKa, pf. m. A€Aaupar (463 b), ao. p. EAduUPOny, 
V. Aqumreos. Hm. 2d ao. m. inf. AcAaBéoba (486 D). 

6. Hm. 2d ao. @radov lay hid, but AéAadoy (4386 D) caused to forget, m. 
AcAabecOa to forget, pf. m. AéAacua have forgotten. The meaning cause to 
forget is found also in rare pr. AnOdvw, ao, éx-éAnga, and sometimes in pr. 
act. émiAnéw. Dor. ao. p. éAdaOnv. 

8. Hm. 2d ao. m. opt. wemvOorro (436 D), v. &auoros. 

3. Tim. has also 1st ao. érdxnoa, and often uses Téruypau, ervxOnv (from 
Tevxw cl. 2, 511, 14) in the sense of reriynna, @rvxov. 

10. Poet. xavSdvw (xad-, xavd-, xev5-) contain, fu. xeloouor (= xevd-copa), 
2d ao. éxadov, 2d pf. Kéxavda. 

624 D, 2. Hm. has pr. impf. ixvéouot only twice, often fkavw (also ixdvo- 
yor) and txw, 1st ao. ite, tov (428 Db). For 2d ao. part. txuevos, see 489 D, 

47, Hd. pf. m, 3d pl. arixarat, amixaro (464 D a). 


1'78 VERBS: FIFTH CLASS. 





3. Kuvéw (xu-) kiss. ao. éxvoa. c 
a. The simple verb is poetic; but mpocxuvéw do homage is frequent — 
in prose; it makes mpooxuvjow, mpooekvynoa. 
4. dumioxvéoua (apm-ex-) = dpréxopar, have on: active dumexo, aum- 
toxw, put on. Impf. hprexopyy (861 a). 
dupetw Hpirio-Kov, inf. aparvo-xety 

Gpésopae HTLo XK Opyy or hyreoxopnv (3861 a) 
a, dumioxveoua is for aud(t)-.cx-veo-ma. For change of ¢ to 7, ef. 
73d. wrx. is for icx, and that for oi-c(e)x, a reduplicated theme 


of zxw (cex-) have (508, 16; cf. 506, 2). The 2d ao. must be 
divided ijum-ocxov; + here belongs to the preposition. ° 


5. brvoxvéouay (ir-ex-) promise; also tmloxoua. See 4 a above and 
508, 16. 


troox roar brer yx ounv Deo YX Hae 


IV. Themes which assume -vv- (after a vowel -vvv-). 
525, Themes in -a-. 


1. kepdvvipe (Kepa-, Kpa-) mex. 
[Kepdow | éxépaca KEeKpaLaL éxpaOny or 
Vv. KOG@TEOS [ Kexépac nau | éxepaoOnv 
2. KpeLavvope (Kpeua-) hang trans.: [also xpeudw late]. 
Kpeua (-dow424) expéuaca [ kexpepacpat | éxpenaoOny 
a. For middle xpéuapa: hang intrans., fu. cpewhoowa, see 535, 8. 
3. mweravvupr (era-) expand: [also werdw late]. 
mevTa (-dow 424) eréraca mérrayar [memeracuc] emerdoOny 


4. oxedavvipe (oxeda-) scatter: also oxlSvyme r. A., [oreddw late]. 
TKEdD (-dow 424) eoxédSaca EoKedac por éoxedacOny 


526, Themes in -e-. 
1. Evviju (€-, orig. Feo-, Lat. ves-tio) clothe: in prose a&porévvope. 


Gpprd (-€7w423) jpdlera (361) Apdplerpar 
&phrécopar 


625 D. 1. Hm. also pr. repdw, kepalw, ao. inf. ém-npfoa, v. &Kpyros. For 
kipynu, see 529 D, 2. 

4, Hm. ao. also without o, éxédacca, éxeddrOnv; cf. nidvnus (529 D, 8). 

5. Poet. ydavuya (ya-) am glad, fu. yaviocoun, late pf. yeydvina. Cf. 
yaiw cl. 4, only in pr. part. yalwy. 

5626 D. 1. Hm. impf. kara-elyvoy (= Feo-vvov), cf. Hd. éa-civurOa, fu. Eoow, 
20. €ooa, ao. m. 3d sg. e(c)earo or é€ooaro, pf. m. eiua (= Feo-uat), Eooat, 
eira (€ora?), plup. 2d, 3d sg. €oao, €oro or Eero, 38d du. EaOny, 3d pl. eiaro, 
part. eiuévos. 


i ig 
a 


es 


528] FIFTH CLASS. 179 

2. [kopévvipu] (Kope-) satiate, chiefly poetic. 
KEKOPET PLL exopécOnv 

8. oPévvips (cBe-) extinguish (500, 5). 

opéocw to Bera tr Bnxo, 

oPpycopar toPyv (489, 10) [eoBeouar] eo PéoOny 

527. Themes in -w-. 

1. Lavvopu (Cw-) gird. 

[dow | tLaca [eaxa] Lopar, Loopar  [eldodnv] 
2. [pavvigus] (pw-) strengthen. 

[pdow | epoca eppapar am strong eppdooOnv 


8. oTpavvipe (oTpw-) spread out = ordpvigt, 528, 15, 
TTPHTW eoTpwoa ETTPapar eo pwobny 


528, Themes ending in a consonant. 
1, &yvipe (ay-, orig. Fay-) break. 


&fo data (359) tayo (501) [aypar] éaynv 
2. &pvupar (ap-) win, chiefly poetic. 

apovpuat npouny 
3. Selkvope (Secx-) show. 

Selo Seasa SéSaya, SéSerypar eSelx Ony 
4, dpyvipe (eipy-) shut in: (also etpyw). 

elpEw eipfa, p. ofas eipypar elpx Snv 


a. The forms of epyw shut out are distinguished from these by their 
smooth breathing. 


5. Ledyvops (Cuy-, Cevy-) joi. 
(eviw tLevga eLevypar eLoynyv, eLedxOnv r. A. 


2. Hm. fu. xopéw (423), ao. éxdpeca, éxdpeooa, pf. part. Kexopnds (446 D), 
pf. m. rexdpnuc (also Hd.), v. a-xdpyros. Hd. fu. xopéow. 

Add the following with themes in -:-: 

4, Poet. kivumor (Ki-) move intrans., 2d ao. @xioy went, part. Kkidv. For 
éxiaboy, see 494. 

5. Epic atvuwat (a-) take away, in comp. droatyuyma: and amalvumas. 

6. Ion. and poet. Saivims (Sau-) fcast trans., mid. intr., opt. 3d sg. Savdro 
(419 D b), 8d pl. Saviiaro: fu. daicw, ao. Zara, a0. p. edalaOnv, v. &-darTos. 


528 D. 1. Hm. ao. gata, rare jta (Hes. opt. 2d sg. ravdtais, = caF Fotos = 
kata-Fatots, 84 D), ao. p. édynv with short a. Hd. pf. nya. 

3. Hd. has root Sex- in défw, deta, Sé5eyucu, edéxOnv. Hm. pf. m. defdeypar 
greet (for Sederyua), 8d pl. decSéxarat, -ato (464 Da). In the same sense of 
greeting, he has pr. part. deuvduevos, as also pr. deccavdowar and Sedioxoua 
(= 6el-Bik-oKomat). 

_ 4. Hm. has only forms with smooth breathing, even in the sense of shutting 
m. As theme, he has epy- or eepy- instead of espy-. For épxarar, (é)épxaro, 
see 363 D. For poet. etpyabov, Hm. (€)épyadov, see 494. 





180 VERBS: FIFTH CLASS. 





6. amro-Krlyvipe (Krev-) Kill = wretvw (519, 4). 


7. plyvipe (uey-, wiy-) miz: also plo-yw cl. 6, less freq. in Att. 


pte tia [udurxa] éptx @yv and 
| PENT BOLL éeplynv 
8. SAAD (for odAvipu, theme oA-, oAe-) destroy, lose. 
ONG (-€ow 422) areoa od\@AeKe, 
ododper @Aounv brAwda (501) 


a. In prose, the compound am-dAAdm is always used. 


9. Spvvue (ou-, ouo-) swear. 


Opodpar (422) dpooa 6p.opoka (368) epo@nv and 
[oudow, -onci | OP-OOPL, Op.dpOo-p.cLL On.ooOny 


10. dudpyvips (ouopy-) wipe off. Pres. and impf. only Epic. 
opdptomat apopsa [ dmopypat | epdpxOnv 
11. dpvipu (op-) rouse, middle rouse one’s self, rise. 
Upow (422 b) dpaa(431c) dpwpa intrans. (368 D). 
12. whyvups (ray-, wny-) fix, fasten: [also rhoow late]. 


e 


anto Hm. tanga wérnye (501) érayny, Vv. mKrds 
[ rémnypat | emhxOnv 
13. mrapyvupar (wrap-) sneeze. 
arap® Hipp. émrrapov [érrapa] 
14, phyvope (pay-, pny-, pwy-) break. 
paige eppnga éppaya (501) eppayny 
15. erdopvups (orop-, orope-) spread out: cf. orpdyvipn, 5217, 8. 
oropd (422)  éorrdpera [eordpecpar| [ eoropécOny] 


16. ppdyvinn (ppay-) also pace cl. 4, enclose. 


[ppdtw] eppaga, Teppary pow eppaxOnv [eppdynr] 
a. The forms ddpyvim, epapta, medbapypat, epdpxeny, etc., are certainly 
Attic, and are preferred by many editors. 


7. Tim. and Hd. have only pfoyw in pr. impf.: Hm. once pryd¢ouat. Hm. 
2d ao. m. 3d sg. Zuikro, utero (489 D, 41), 2d fu. p. mryhoomar. 

8. Poetic also pr. éAékw; 2d ao. m. part. odAduevos (33 D). 

11. Hm. fu. m. dpotuat, a0. Spoa, oftener d&popoy (436 D), pf. m. dpdperat, 
sub. 3d sg. dpdépyrat, ao. m. &pro (oftener than pero), dpoo, dpOa1, Uppevos (489 
D, 42). For dpaeo, see 428 D b. Connected with dpvius are dptvw rouse, ao, 
épiva, a0. p. wplvOny; and dpodw rush, ao. &povaa. 

12. Hm. 2d ao. m. 3d sg. nat-¢arnxto (489 D, 48). 

13. Hipp. ao. p. éwrrapny. 

14. Hm. pf. p. @pnxra, Hipp. ao. p. éppnxonv. 

17. Hm. &xvupat (ax-) am pained (rare &xouat, draxtCouat); 2d ao. axdxovTo 
(436 D), pf. axdxnuat (368 D), 3d pl. axnxédara (464 D a) plup. 3d pl. axaxelaro 
(for axaxynaro), inf. dkdxynoOau, part. axaxhuevos, axnxeuevn (389 D b).—Act. 
dxaxl(w pain, ao. Zraxov and axdxnou—Pr. part. intrans. axéwv, axetor. 


530] SIXTH CLASS. 181 


Sixtu Crass (Inceptive Class, 403). 


530. The theme assumes -ox°|.- (or -irx?|.-) in the present. 
Several verbs which belong here prefix a reduplication. Only 
a few show an inceptive meaning. 

Themes in -a- and -e-. 

1. ynpdoKw = yypd-w grow old. 2d ao. inf. ynpava: (489, 2). 


Ypacw, -opa. eyfpaca yeynpaka 
2. Si8pGcoxKe (Spa-) run, used only in composition, 
Spacopar tpav (489, 3)  SéSpaxa 


3. NBaoKe (7Ba-) come to puberty: HBaw am at puberty. 
APhce HByoo AByKa 


4, OvioKe, older OvqrKw (dav-, Ova-) die. 
Bavodpar e€avov Tévyka am dead (490, 4) 


a. Fu. pf. teOvntw, see 467 a. For fu. Bavoipat, 2d ao. @@avoy, the Att. 
prose always uses amofavovpat, améOavoy (never found in Trag.), 
but in the pf. ré6vynKa, not amo-ré6ynka. 


5. tAdoKopuar (iAa-) propitiate. 
tAdoopcr CLacdpnv tAdoOnv 


18. Poet. kalyupat (for kad-vuya) surpass, pf. néxacua, part. Kexaopuévos 
(Pind. KeKadpevos). 

19. Hm. dpéyvip (opey-), = dpéyw cl 1, reach, pf. m. 3d pl. dpwpéxara (368 
D, 464 D a). 


629 D. In the Epic language, several themes, which for the most part 
show a final a in other forms, assume -va- instead of it in the present. This 
is accompanied in most instances by a change of vowel, and by inflection 
according to the w-form. 

1. Sauynpue or dauvdw (Sau-, Saua-) overcome, fu. Saudw (cf. 424), ao. eduaca, 
pf. m. dé5unuo, fu. pf. Sedunooua, ao. p. eSaudotay or édunOnv, more freq. 2d 
ao. edduny. Pr. also Saua¢w. The forms édauacduny and édautcOnv are even 
found in Att. prose.—The same perf. m. Sé5unua: belongs also to the Ion. 
and poet. déuw (Att. joixoBopew) build, ao. @e.ua. 

2. klpynut or xipydw (Kkepa-), = Kepavvipr mix (525, 1). 

3. Kphuvayor (Kpeua-), = Kpeuayoa hang (535, 8; of 525, 2). Active k«pf- 
pynut very rare. 

4, ptpvayat (uapa-) fight, used only in the present. 

5. mépynut (mepa-), = = mimpacrw sell (530, 7), fu. mepaw (cf. 424), ao. émépaca, 
pf. m. part. mwemepnuevos. 

6. mlAvauct (meAa-) draw near, also mydeco = = meddlw bring near (514 D, 21). 

7. alrynus or mitvdw (mera-), = = metdvvip spread (525, 3). 

8. oxliynus (ocxeda-), = oxedavvims scaticr (525, 4): also without o, cldvnu. 


530 D. 2. Hd. d:8phcxa, dphoouat, Zdpnyv (30 D). 
5. Hm. also iadouat, pf. TAnka; see 535 D, 10. 
9 





182 VERBS: SIXTH CLASS. [531 


6. pipvqoke, older pipvpoKe (uva-) remind, mid. remember, mention. 
pvqoo duyynoa pepvnpar (865 b, 465 a) epvqodnv 
Fu. pf. pepvqcopnar will bear in mind. 7 
a. The fu. and ao. m. are poetic; the fu. and ao. p. take their place. 
The pf. m. weuynuat is present in meaning, = Lat. memini. 
7. [merpackw] (apa-) sell ; wanting in fu. and ao. act. 
(GmroSacopar) (a&reSdunv) TETPAKA, TéMTPApCLL érpadny 
8. padoKw (pa-) = pyul (535, 1) say ; used chiefly in the part., see 481 a, 
9. XdoKw (xa-, xav-) gape; [xatvw late] 
Xavotpar ex avov KEexnva stand agape 
10. apéokw (ape-) please. 
é.péo-w Hpera [aphpera] npéaOnv 


531, Themes in -o-. 
1. dva-Brdckomar (Bi0-) trans. ve-animate, intr. revive. 
ao. dveBiwy (489, 14) intrans., dveBtwodpny trans. Cf. Bidw (507, 2). 
2. BrAdoKw (uoA-, MAo-, BAo-, 60 D) go, poetic. Pr. impf. only Epic. 
MoAovmaL €woAov peuBAwKa (60 D) 
3. BiBpwokw (Bpo-) eat ; pres. Hipp. and late. 
| Bpdoopat | [€Bpwora. | BeBpwxa, BéEBpapatr eBpodny Hd. 
a. The defective parts are supplied by forms of éo@fw cl. 8 (539, 3). 
4, yuyvackw (yvo-) know: also yivéoxw Ionic and late Att. 
Yooropar éyvoy (489, 15) etyvexa, éyvwopar eyvao-Onv 
5. Opdaxw (Oop-, Opo-) leap, poet.: also Odpyupa cl. 5. 
dopovmat €Oopov 
6. TuTpdoKw (Tpo-) wound. 
TOOTH erpwoa TETPOLLOL érpadyv 


532, Themes in -1- and -v-. 
1. kutoKopar (Ku-) conceive, ao. éxioa impregnated. 
a. KUw, Kvéw Mean am pregnant. 





6. Hm. pf. m. 2d sg. wéuvnat, weurvy (imv. weuveo Hd.), see 462 D; sub. Ist 
pl. peuvdueda (Hd. peuvedueba), opt. weurnuny, 3d sg. weuvewro, see 465 D. 

11. Poet. Backw (Ba-) = Batyw go (519, 7), chiefly in imv. Back’ 70 haste ; 
once émiBarKeuev cause to go upon. 

12. Poet. xucanonw (KAyn-) = Kadéw cl. 1, call (504, 5). 

5381 D, 3. Hm. BeBpddw. Ep. 2d ao. 2Bpwy (489, 26; not in Hm.). Soph. 
2d pf. part. BeBp@res (492 D, 16). 

4, Hd. 1st ao. dvéyvwoa persuaded. Poet. v. yywrds (for yvwards). 

6. Hm. tpdw; v. tpwrds. 


533] SIXTH CLASS. 183 


2. peOdorkw (uebu-) intoxicate, 
é.€0ve0 [meuedvonas | épeOicOnyv 
a. Mid. weOvoxopc get drunk ; but weddw (only pr. impf.) am drunk. 


533, Themes ending in a consonant. 


1. aXlokopar (GA-, GAo-) am taken, used as passive to aipéw cl. 8. 
aaocropat eGov or eGAoKka, or V. GAwrds 
HAwv (489, 13) HrAoKa 
2. av-GAloKw (aA-, GAo-) expend: also avGdu. 
BVEAG Tw aivirooa avHAoKA, AVAAWPAL avnrobnv 
a. Rare forms, jvaAwoa, hvad@pat (361). The forms dvadAwoa, avidwxa, 
avarA@ny etc., are un-Attic. 


8. duBAlokw (auBA-, auBAo-) miscarry: also éf-auBadw. 


[auBrocw | 4pBrAwoa HpProka, HpBrAopar [7uBAOny | 
4, én-auploKkouat (avp-) enjoy, also émavpicxw, émavpéw: pres. Ionic only. 
emaupngouat exnipoy, émnupduny [érnupauny | 
5. ebplokw (edp-) find. 
eiphow nupov nipnka, nuphpar nopédny v. eiperds 
a. For 2d ao. imv. efpé, see 387 b. For later Attic edpoyv, efpnra, ete., 
see 357 a. 
6. oreploKw (orep-) = orepew deprive. 
oTEP|TH éorépyoa éoTepyka, -NpaL exrepnOnyv, corépnr 


a. Pass. oreploxoua, orepoduat am deprived ; but orépoua am necdy. 
7. advonw (for advx-oxw, theme adux-) avord, poet.; pr. impf. rare. 
aaviw HrvEa 
8. Si8doKw (for didax-crxw, theme d:dax-) teach. 


$185 e5(Sata SeS(Saxa, -ypar Say Onv 
9. Adoxw (for Aak-cxw, theme Aax-) speak, poetic. 
Aakhooun éAdknoa A€AGKA 
éhakov 


10. plo-yw (for pry-cKw, theme pry-) mix, = ptyvins cl. 5 (528, 7). 





632 D. 3. Ion. and poet. mmloxw (m-) give to drink (cf. wivw, 521, 3), fu. 
Tigw, ao. erica. 
4, Hm. moavonw (pav-) declare. Hd. Stapatoxw, or -pdcxw shine, dawn. 


633 D. 6. Hm. ao. inf. orepéou. 

7. Hm. has also advond(w cl. 4 and davordyw cl. 5. 

8. Ep. ao. éd:Sdaennoa (not in Hm.). <A shorter theme is da-, Hm. fu. dw 
shall find (427 D), 2d ao. déSaov (436 D, also %8aov) taught, 2d ao. m. inf. de- 
Odacba (for SedaccOau), pf. deSdnxa have learned, 2d pf. part. dedads, pf. m. 
part. dedanuevos, 2d ao. p. edanv learned, fu. p. danvoua. 

9. Hm, Annéw, 2d pf. AéAnka, part. fem. AcAaxvia (451 D c). 


184 VERBS: SEVENTH CLASS. [534 


11. waoyxo (for 7a6-cnw, theme mad-, mev6-), suffer. 
meloopar (56)  e&mradov wétrovoa [v. radnrds | 


SEVENTH Crass (Jtoot-Class, 404). 


534, The theme itself, with or without reduplication, serves 
as present stem. ‘These are all verbs in -u. 
I. With reduplication. 


1. rlOnps (Ge-) put. See 329, 333, 349, 
8how enka TéQeKa éeréOny (73 c) 
du. @erov etc. TéBear r. 
2. SlSnpr (Se-) bind, rare form for déw (504, 1). 


3. Unpe (é-) send; see 476. 


iow "KO elk, elOnv 
du. etrov ete. elp.cue 
4, SSmur (5o-) give. See 330, 334, 350. 
Saou Wwxa SeSaKxa eSdOnv 


du. €orov etc. SéSop.c 
5. tornue (ora-) set up. See 331, 335, 336, 351, and 500, 1. 
orhow shall set torynce set torynka stand éotadny was set 
torn stood toraparr. fu. pf. éorngw shall stand 
6. dvlynue (ova-) benefit (for ov-ovn-pt). 
é6vqTw avynoa, avnpyv (489, 5) avnonv 








11. Hm. 2d pf. 2d p. wéroaGe (492 D, 14), part. fem. wemrabvia (451 D ec). 

12. Poet. dumraxioxw (apmdak-) miss, err. 2d ao. Humdaxov, pf. m. 3d sg. 
NUTAAKNT OL. 

13. Hm. drapioxw (ap-) deceive, 2d ao. Hmapov (486 D), rare 1st ao. nrdpyoa. 

14. Poet. dpaptoxw (ap-) join, jit, trans., lst ao. jpoa (cf. 431 D c), 2d ao. 
Rpapoy (436 D) twice intrans., 2d pf. &papa am joined, fitted (found even in 
Xen.), Ion. &pnpa, Hm. part. fem. apaputa (451 D c), pf. m. aphpeuot, ao. p. 3d 
pl. ap9ev (885 D, 3), 2d ao. m. part. &puevos (489 D, 36), 

15, Hm. tonw (= Fir-oxnw) and éioxw (72 D a) liken ; cf. Zouxa (492, 7). 

16. Hm. titicxowat (= ti-TuK-cKopa) prepare, aim (cf. 511, 14; 523, 9). 

634 D, 1. Hm. has pr. ind. 2d sg. rl@no6a, 3d sg. rTiOe?, 3d pl. TiOetar (also 
wpo-Qeovor), inf. TiOjwevat, part. TIOHwevos. Hd. pr. TiOe?, TiOetor: impf. Ist sg. 
é7iOe-a. irregular, 2d ao. opt. mpoo-OéorTo, inf. Oéuev, Oguevau. 

3. For dialectic forms of nu see 476 D. 

4, Hm. has pr. ind. 2d sing. Sid0¢s and d{Sa.00a, 3d sg. 1807, imv. S{5w61, inf. 
S:do00va; 2d ao. inf. Sduey and Sduevar; iterative d5écxov.—Hd. did07s, Sid08 
S:d0001. Hm. has a fu. with reduplication 6:dé0w. 

5. Hm. Ist ao. 8d pl. €oracay as well as éornoay, 2d ao. ind. 3d pl. érray, 
inf. orhueva, pf. inf. éorduer, Eotduevat, part. éorads and éoreds, iterative 
toracKke and ordoxe,—Hd. pr. 3d sg. ford. 


536] SEVENTH CLASS. 185 


{. wlprdnpe (wra-) fill ; also rand am full. 
aryow trlnoo mTréTAHKO errno ony 
TETAHMAL, -O7P.OLL 
a. In this verb and the next, the reduplication is strengthened by the 


nasal w. This, however, often falls away in the compounds, if 
the preposition has uw: éu-rlrAnui, but impf. 3d pl. év-erfuaAacay. 


8. aluapyur (rpa-) set on fire, burn. | 
Tphrw erpyoa [ aémrpna.| érpyo ony 
rérpnpa. [réempnopuat| 
9. «lxpypr (xpa-) lend, mid. borrow. 
xphow Hd. ex pyoa Kéxpyka, Kéxonpar 


I. Without Reduplication. 

535, a. Themes in -a-. 
1. pypl (pa-) say ; see 481. 

ojnrw thbynoa 

2. tyr (a-) say ; defective present; see 485. 
3. xph (xpa-, xpe-) it behoves ; impersonal; see 486. fu. xpyoe. 
4, &yapar(aya-) admire. ao. rarely }yardpyy, usually HyaoOnv (497 b). 
5. Stvapar (Suva-) can, am able; see 487. 


Suvqropar SeSivypar ESuvyoyv, SvvacOny r. A. 
6. érl-orapar (cra-) understand (impf. yrvetrapyny) ; see 487. 
EMOTO ONAL Ayrvor On 


7. papa (epa-) love ; poetic for épdw (503, 2). 
8. Kpéuapar (xpeua-) hang, intr. (cf. 525, 2); see 487. fu. Kpepyoopar 


5386. b. Themes in --. 


1. etus (c-) go ; only pres. and impf.; see 477. 
2. Ketpo (ec-) te; see 482. fu. keloropar. 


7. Hm. pr. m. also muumAdvera, 2d ao. m. wAiTo, rARYTO; see 489 D, 23. 
mAN@w is chiefly poetic, 2d pf. méawAnéa. 8. Hm. mpnéw. 

10. Hm. pr. part. BiBas, from root Ba-, common pr. Balyw go (519, 7). 

535 D, 1 and 3. For dialectic forms of gnui and xph, see 481 D, 486 D. 

4, Besides ayauot admire, Hm. has aydopa: and éyatoua envy, fu. ayaooouas, 
A0. Wyacdunv, V. aynrds. 

5. Hm. and Hd. have in ao. p. only éduvdc@ny. Hm. has also ao, m. 
eduvnodunv. 6. Hd. pr. ind. 2d sg. éf-ertoreot for ékerioracat. 

9. Hm. pr. act. inf. dpjpeva (Gpa-) pray; common present apaouat. 

10. Ep. tAqua: propitiate, rare; also in act., imv. AnO: Hm. (faa Theoc.) 
be propitious. The quantity of i- wavers. Common present iAdgxouat (580, 5). 





186 | VERBS: EIGHTH CLASS. [537 
5387. c. Themes in -o-. 


1. eipl (eo-) am; see 478. fu. rope. 
2. hua (7ja-) sit, also KdOnpar; see 483, 484. 


KicutH Cuass (Mixed Class, 502). 


639, Different parts of the verb may be derived from themes 
essentially different ;: compare Eng. go, went. Here belong 


1. aipéw (aipe-, EA-, 359 a), take, mid. choose. 
aipqow etXov (Xo etc.) Henke, fpnjar Tee8nv 
a. Fu. €Ad, ao. eiAduny are late. 


2. tpxopor (epx-, eAv8-, eAO-) yo, come. 
érevoomat Aov éAHAvOe (367 b) 
a. For 2d ao. imv. eae, see 387 b. For éActocoua the Attic prose has 
elut, Hiw, or adliioua:; for ipxdéunv, tpx@pai, epxolunv, Epxov, 
epxecOat, épxdueves, the Attic prose generally has ja, tw, tom, 101, 
iévat, iby. 


536-7 D. For dialectic forms of efu:, see 477 D; of xetuar, 482 D; of eit, 
478 D; of fat, 483 D. 


538 D, Hm. has also the following pi-verbs of the seventh class: 

1. &yut (ae-) blow, 2d du. &nrov, impf. 3d sg. &y or Het, inf. aijveu or aqmevat, 
part. defs; mid. impf. 3d sg. &yTo, part. ahpevos. 

2. Theme oie- make fice (in mid., also flee), impf. 8d pl. év-Sleoay; m. pr. 
3d pl. dtevra:, sub. Stouat, opt. 8d sg. dtorre (cf. 417 a, 418 b), inf. dterOat. 

3. SiCnuat (d1¢e-) seek, 2d se. StCnar, part. duCnuevos; fu. diCjoopas. 

4, Theme xxe- (from xx-, common pr. Kvyxdvw come up to, 523, 3), impf. 
2d sg. éxtxers, 3d du. kexjtny, sub. xixelo, opt. xxetny, inf. xix ijvos OF KiXTMEVAL, 
part. xixyels, mM. Kixhmevos. 

5. dvo-ucr find fault with, 2d sg. dvoca, opt. 3d sg. dvorro (cf. 418 b); fu. 
évéccoua, 20. avocdunv (Hd. dvécOnv).—Hm, has also from root op-, pr. 2d 
pl. obveoGe and ao. dSvaro. 

6. épvouce or epvoucs (epu-, etpu-) guard, preserve, Ton. and poet. The pr- 
forms are pr. ind. 3d pl. eipvara, impf. 2d sg. epico, 3d sg. Epiro, etpito, 3d 
pl. ezpuyto, cipdaro, inf. gpveba, etpvcdu. Fu. épiocoum (epvecdu, cf. 427 D), 
eipvooouat, a0. eipu(o)oduny. 

7. From piouct or pioucn (fv-) = epvopat come pi-forms, impf. 3d pl. puaro, 
inf. picda. Fu. picouce (Hd.), ao. éspioduny and pioauny (once puoduny). 

8. Root orev-, promise, threaten, pr. impf. erevra, cTevTO, OTEUYTAL. 

9. From 2-w (539 D, 3) eat, pr. inf. @-uevar; cf. Lat. esse for ed-se. 

10. From $ép-w (539, 6) bea, pr. imv. 2d pl. pép-re; cf. Lat. fer-te. 


539 D, 1. Hd. pf. apalpnra (3868 D). 

2. Poet. 2d ao. #AvGoy with v (but only in ind., Ist, 2d, 8d sg. and 3d 
pl.), Dor. (not Pind.) #vOov. Hm. 2d pf. eiafAovOa, Ist pl. elAnAovOuer (492 

13), | 


’ 


539] EIGHTH CLASS. 187 
3. eo Blu (e00-, €d-, edec-, 50-, hay-) cat. 
Uopar (427) epayov éS75oKka HdéoOnv 
edydeop.a1 v. eords, -Téos 
4. dpdw (dpa-, 15-, o-) see, impf. édpwv (359 b). 
Spopar elSov (tw etc.) édpGKa, EdpHxa, Edpapar ahOny [ Ewpabqv] 
imv. i8€ (387 b) Yarwia, Oppo V. OpGrds, orréos 


a. The middle is generally poetic, but occurs in Att. prose in compo- 
sition with mpd, td, wept. Imv. i500, but as exclamation (dou /o / 


B. tpéx@ (tpex-, Spap-, Spape-) run. 


Spapodtpar eSpaj.ov SeSpapnka v. Opexréov (74 c) 
Opetoucn YOpeta (74 c)  SeSpapnpor in comp. 

6. hépw (hep-, ot-, ever-, eveyk-) bear. 
oto-w iiveyxa (438)  evqvoxa qvex Onv 
olcopar (as veyKov EvYVey [Lae évex Ojoopar 
mid. and pass.). qveykapny v. oiords, -Téos oto bho opat 


1. dvéopar (wve-, mpia-) buy, impf. ewvodpmy (359). 
@VRT OPAL erprduny (489, 9) edynpor éovn inv 
a. éwvnodunv is late. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Att. 
édvnua may have, éwvnPnv always has, a passive meaning (499). 


8. elarov (em-, ep-, pe-) sacd. 


épa elrrov (436 a) — elpyxa (366) éppnonv, Vv. pyTOS 
elara (438) elonpar | €65€@nv | 
imv. elwé (887 b) _— fu. pf. eipforopar pnojropar 


a. The pr. impf. are supplied by Aéyw, myuf, and (especially in comp.) 
by ayopetw discourse, aS arayopevw forbid, ao. ametrov. The root 
of eciroy was originally Fem-; cf. éros, orig. Feros, word. The 
root of ép@ was orig. Fep- (cf. Lat. verbum); hence etpnxa for 

Fe-Fpn-xa, éppnony for eFpnOnv, pnrds for Fpnros. 


8. Hm. has pres. @o0@w (for €3-6w, 52) and 2w; also pr. inf. @duevar (538 
D, 9), 2d pf. par. é5ydas, pf. m. edndoua. 

4. Hm. fu. émdWoua shall choose, but éréWoua shall look on; so Pind. Ist 
ao. érdWato looked at, but Att. (rare) émwdunv chose. Hd. impf. épwv. <Aeol. 
pr. dpnut Theoc. For docopua (on-), see 515 D, 4. Poetic is also pr. m. eidomau 
appear, appear like, ao. eiodunv. 

5. Doric tpaxw. Hm. pf. déSpoua. 

6. Hm. pr. imv. pre (538 D 10), ao. ffveua (rarely jveucov), m. Averkduny ; 
ao. imv. ove (428 D b), inf. oicguer(at), v. peptds. Hd. has ao. vena, inf. 
oloa (once), pf. m. évjverymat, ao. p. HvelxOnv. 

8. Hm. pr. eZpw rare, fu. épéw, ao. efroy and in ind. (uncontracted) éezmoy = 
e-FeFerov). From root oer-, ém- (70), comes év-émw or évvérw, 2d ao. Eu-oror, 
imy. évi-ome or €viames (2d pl. Zorere for ev-orere), fu. évivw (= evi-on-cw) OF 
évi-omhow, V. &-ometos. Hd. makes ao, usu. cima, ao. p. eipéOnv. 





PART THIRD. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 


540, SimpLe anD CompounD Worps.—A word is either simple, i.e., 
containing a single stem: Adyo-s speech, ypapw write ; or compound, 
1. €., containing two or more stems: Aoyo-ypado-s speech-writer. 


FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 


541, PRmMITIvVES AND DENOMINATIVES.—Words formed immedi- 
ately from a root (or the theme of any verb) are called primitives: 
apx-n beginning, from apx-, root of dpy-w begin.—Those formed im- 
mediately from a noun-stem are called denominatives: dpyxa-io-s of the 
beginning, original, from the stem of dpyn (apxa-) beginning. 


642. Surrrxrs.—Nouns (substantive or adjective) are formed by 
means of certain added elements called suffixes. Thus Xédy-o-s is 
formed from the root Aey- by means of the suffix -o-; dpya-io-s from 
the noun-stem apya- by means of the suffix -vo-. 


a. By different suffixes, different words are formed from the same root, 
theme, or noun-stem: thus from theme zro:e- (roréw) make, compose, are formed 
Toin-TH-s composer, poet, moln-ci-s act or art of composing, motn-ua (ao1n-marT-) 
thing composed, poem. 

b. There are many suffixes, and their uses are very complicated. Only the 
most important can be noticed here. 


543, Roors.—A root is the fundamental part of a word. It is what 
remains after removing all inflectional endings (including the augment. 
and reduplication of verbs) and all sufiixes and prefixes. 


a. Not all Greek words can be referred to known roots. The origin of 
many is obscure. 

b. Roots are properly of one syllable. The few exceptions are due to pro- 
thetic vowels (45 a) and vowels developed inside a root (45 b): thus o-pux-, 
eAv@- (also €A@-) are roots. 

ce. A root is sometimes increased by the addition of a consonant at the 
end, generally without appreciable difference in meaning. Thus root ota- 
(tornut) becomes orad- in crab-ud-s station, The consonants most commonly 
added are @¢,v and o. o appears not only with roots, as oma-o-uds twitching 
from oma- (ord-w), but sometimes with other verb-themes: «eAeu-c-T]s com- 
mander from keAev-w. Cf. the perfect middle, 461. 


544, CHANGES OF THE Root-VowEL.—The vowel of the root may 
be changed in the process of word-formation. Thus: 


548] FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 189 


a. It may take the strong form (82): ¢edy-os yoke, pair, from root ¢uy-. 

b. A vowel at the end of a root is commonly made long before a conson- 
ant: da-poy gift, root 50-; dpa-ua action, root dpa-. This applies also to other 
verb-themes: woln-ots composition from theme more- (woré-w). But this rule 
has many exceptions: 06-o1s gift, Av-rhp looser, yéve-or-s birth. 

c. ¢€ may become o (28), and e (strong form of :) may become o: (29). Thus 
Tpdn-o-s turning from tTper- (rpém-w turn), Aown-d-s left from Aum-, Acu- (AclT-w 
leave). Compare apwy-d-s helper, and aphy-w help. 


545. OrnerR CHancEs.—The addition of suffixes gives occasion to 
many sound-changes. 

a. Vowels brought together are often contracted: apxatos for apxa-to-s, 
Bactrela kingdom for Bacirc(v)-1a, GAnGea truth for adndeo)-1a (71) from 
GAnohs (adndeo-) true, aidotos venerable for ado(c)-10-s from aidés reverence. 

pb. A noun-stem may change its final syllable before a suffix: oixé-rys 
house-slave from olko-s house, cwppo-ctvy discretion from stem owppov- (cdppwv 
discreet). 

ce. A noun-stem often drops its final vowel (especially -o-) before a suffix be- 
ginning with a vowel: im7-1o-s equine from trmo-s horse ; odpay-.o-s heavenly from 
ovpayd-s heaven. Even a diphthong may be dropped: BactA-1d-s from BaotAev-s. 

d. Lastly, consonants, when they come together, are subject to the usual 
changes: ypay-ua writing for ypad-ua, A€éis speaking for Aey-ct-s, Sinac-Th-s 
judge for dixad-ry-s from Sixd{w judge, etc. 


546, Accent.—As a rule, neuter substantives take the accent as 
far as possible from the end (recesswe accent). For exceptions see 
558, 1; 561, 1 b. 

Many masculine and feminine suffixes are regularly accompanied by 
recessive accent. Those which are not so will be specially noticed in 
the following enumeration. 


I, FoRMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 


A, Primitives. 
547, A few substantives are formed from roots without any suffix: padt 
(paoy-) flame from pacy- (pAdy-w burn): dp (o7-) voice from en- (eimoy said). 


548, Many substantives are formed from roots by the suffixes: 


-o-, nom. -o-s masc. fem., -o-y neut.; -a-, nom. -a or -7 fem. 
In the root, e becomes o, and ec becomes ox (544 c). 


Ady-o-s speech from Aéy-w speak pax-n fight from udy-oua fight 
aT dA-o-s sending ateA-(aTéAAw send) op-& bearing pép-w bear 
Tpop-d-s Nurse Tpép-w nourish Tpop-n nurture Tpep-w nourish 
(uy-d-v yoke Cuy- (Cevyvims join) AoiB-h pouring AciB-w pour 


a. In like manner ev changes to ov in omovd-h haste from omevd-w hasten 
(29). For the same reason we have wAdos (for wAov-ss) voyage from mAéw 


(for rAev-w, root mAv-) sail; mvonh (for mvov-n) blast from mvéw (for mvev-w, root 
mvv-) blow. 





190 PRIMITIVE SUBSTANTIVES. [549 


b. These substantives have a wide range of meaning. Most in -a or -7 are 
oxytone, especially those which have a change of root-vowel. So too those 
in -os which denote an agent: dy-0-s leader, 


549, Sufix --.—This forms a few substantives: tpdx-1-s runner from 
Tpéx-w run; mér-.-s city. Many original s-stems have added 6 at the end 
and become consonant-stems: éAmi-s (eAm-16-) hope from €Am-ouat hope ; koml-s 
(xor-15-) cleaver from kom- (xén-Tw chop). 


550, The agent is expressed by the following suffixes: 


-Tnp- NOM. -77p -Teipa- NOM. -Teipa 
-Top- -TOp > Mase. ; < -Tpa- -rTpia ~ fem. 
-Ta- -TN-S -TpLd- -Tpi-s 
Tw-Thp savior 
o@-Teipa fem. 
ph-Twp (-Top-) orator pe- (€p@, 539, 8) 
Kpi-r7n-s (-Ta-) Judge Kpt- (kptvw decide) 
moin-Ti-s (~Ta-) poet 
mown-rpia fem. 
avaAn-Th-s (-ra-) flute-player ner 
avAn-tpl-s (-rp15-) fem. ae 2a 

a. Accent.—Words in -rnp and -rpis are always oxytone: so also most of 
those in -rys, especially when the penult is long by nature or position. 
Words in -rwp, -reipa, -rpia, have recessive accent. 


from cw- (ag (w save) 


Wo.e-w» COMpose 


651, The action is expressed by the following suffixes: 


1. -ri- nom, -ti-s ) ’ 
-ol- -oi-s > feminine. 
-o1.d- -old 
-o1- is for -ri- by 69, cf. Lat. -ti-o. * 
alo-ri-s faith © from 76- (aelOw persuade) 
piun-o-s imitation Mine-ouar imitate 
mpaki-s action mpary- (rpacow act) 
yéve-ci-s origin ryev-, yeve- (yiyvoua become) 
Soxia-ola examination Soxipad- (Soxiudtw examine) 
2. -po-, nom. -ywo-s, masc. and oxytone. 
ddup-ud-s wailing from 6dup- (d8vp-ouat wail) 
Aoyio-pd-s calculation Aoyid- (AoylCouat calculate) 
ona-c-nd-s twitching ond-w draw 
pu-0-ud-s (movement) rhythm pu- (pew flow) 


a. The corresponding feminine suffix -yud- is seen in yvw-uh opinion from 
yvo- (yryvécKw know), ti-un honor from tl-w honor. 


8. -ru-, nom. -rTvs, feminine and oxytone; chiefly Homeric (cf. Lat. -tw- in 
can-tu-s, or-tu-s): Bpw-ri-s food from Bpo- (BiBpwcKw eat), Bon-ti-s shouting 
from Bod-w shout. 


552, From verbs in -evw are formed substantives in -ed (for -ev-sa) 
which express the action; they are all feminine and paroxytone: 
maweia education, from maidevo educate, 


es 


.. 1h 
> 
*. 





io 


556] DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. 191 


553, The resuur of an action is expressed by the suffixes: 
1. -par-, nom. -wa, neuter. 
mpary-wa (-wat-) thing done, affair from mpay- (rpacow do) 


p7-ua (pnuar-) word pe- (€p@ shall say) 
TUn-wa (Tunwar-) section TEu-, THE- (TEU Cut) 
2. -eo-, NOM. -os, neuter. 
Adx-os (Anxeo-) lot from Aax- (Aayxdvw get by lot) 
€0-os (e9ea-) custom €0- (eZw0a am accustomed 
réx-os (rexea-) child tTek- (tiktw bring forth) 
a, The same suffix may express quality: 
OdAm-os (OaATrec-) warmth from O0d¢An-w heat 
Bap-os (Bapeo-) weight Bap- (Bap-ts heavy) 
Bd0-os (Babeo-) depth Bad- (Bad-vs deep) 


554, The INSTRUMENT or MEANS of an action is expressed by 
-Tpo-, nom. -rpo-v, neuter (cf. Lat. -irwm). 


&po-rpo-v plough (aratrum) from apd-w plough 
Av-Tpo-v ransom Av- (Av-w loose) 
5iSax-rpo-v teacher's hire didax- (SidacKw teach) 


a. The kindred feminine suffix -rpa- is less definite: tv-o-rpa flesh scraper 
from ti-w scrape, épxh-o-Tpa place of dancing from épxé-ouar dance, wadal-o-7 pa. 
wrestling-ground from madal-w wrestle, 


555, Other suffixes are: 


-ov-, -wy-: eix-dy (exov-) image from eix- (Zona am like); navd-wy (-wy-) 
billow from Kavi- (KAvw splash). 

-avo-: orép-avo-s wreath (arép-w crown). 

-ova-: 75-ovn pleasure (78-oua am glad). 


B. Denominatives. 


556. Substantives expressing quaLity are formed from adjective- 
stems by the following suffixes: 


1. -ryt-, nom. -rns, feminine (Lat. -at-, nom. -tas-). 


mTaxv-Tns (-rnT-) thickness from maxv-s thick 

ved-Tns (-TnT-) youth véo-s young 

iod-rns (-rnT-) equality tco-s equal 
2. -cvva-, Nom. -cvvyn, feminine. 

Sixao-coyn justice from Siraio-s just 

acwppo-cuvn discretion cHppwy (cwppor-) discreet 
3. -vG-, nom. -cd or -ca (139), feminine. 

soo-ia wisdom from codd-s wise 

evdauov-id, happiness evdaiuwy (evdaimov-) happy 

GANVE-1a, (aAnBea-ia) truth GANOHS (adndec-) true 


evvo-1a good-will evvous (evvoo-) well-disposed 


192 DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. [557 


557. The person who has to do with an object is denoted by the 
following suffixes: , 


1. -ev-, Nom. -ev-s, masc., always oxytone; denotes a person with 
reference to his function. 


immev-s horseman from trmo-s horse 
mopOuev-s ferryman mwopOud-s ferry 
iepev-s priest iepd-s sacred 
ypapev-s scribe ypaph writing 
yovev-s parent | yovh procreation 


b. Several masculines in -evs have corresponding feminines in -ea (for 
-ev-ia) proparoxytone: BagtAevs king, Bastrewa queen. 


2. -ra-, NOM. -Tys, masc., paroxytone. 


-715-, -ris fem., paroxytone or properispomenon. 
qoAt-TNn-s (-Ta-) citizen from méar-s city 
oTparid-Tn-s (-ra-) soldier oTparia army 


5 / = 
-Tn-s (-Ta-) house-servant > 
oixé-T7-s (-7a-) / oiko-s house 


oixé-Ti-s (-718-) house-maid 


558, DiminuTIvEs are formed from substantive-stems by the fol- 
lowing suffixes: 


1. -10o-, nom. -vo-y, neuter. 


matd-to-y little child from mais (maid-) child 
Knt-to-v little garden Kijto-s garden 
axdyt-to-y javelin &Kwv (akovr-) lance 


Those of three syllables are paroxytone, if the first syllable is long by 
nature or position: madiov. 


2. Other forms connected with -o- are 


-di0- : oix-ld10-v little house from ofko-s house 
-apio : maid-dp.o-v little child mais (mad-) child 
-vopio-: ueA-vdpio-v little song HéAos (weAeo-) song 

3. -\OKO-, -LOKG-, NOM. -.oKo-s MAsc., -icxyn fem., paroxytone. 
veay-toxo-s Lat. adulescentulus from veay young man 
maid-toKn lass 7 wats (maud-) girl 
orepay-toko-s little wreath arépavo-s wreath 


559, PaTRonyMics (proper names which express descent from a 
Sather or ancestor) are formed from proper names of persons by add- 
ing the suffixes: 

-.8a- or -54-, nom. -sdys or -dys, masculine, paroxytone; 

-8- or -5- -is or-s, feminine, oxytone. 

a. The forms -da- and -8- are applied to masculine stems in -a- and -10-: -@ 
is then changed to -a-, and -10- to -1a-: 


masc. Boped-5y-s, fem. Boped-s (-d8-os) from Bopéa-s 
’Apyed-Sy-s "Apyéd-s 
@corid-57-s, Oearid-s (-d5-0s) @€oT10-s 
Mevorrid-87-s Mevotrio-s 


b. All other stems take -:5a- and -18-, before which -o- of the 2d decl. is 
dropped. Those in -ev- lose v (44). 


562] DENOMINATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. 193 


mase. Kexpom-l5n-s fem. Kexporr-i-s (-l8-os) | from Kéxpoy (-o7-) 
TayvTar-lin-s TayvTad-l-s (-18-os) TdyTado-s 
Kpoy-idn-s Kpdvo-s 
Tinde-lin-s (epic Tinactdns) TinAed-s 
Nype-t-s, Nnpn-ts Nypev-s 
Anro-ldn-s Anté (AntoF-) 


Sometimes -:d5ns is used: InAn-1ddns from InAev-s. 
ce. A rarer suffix for patronymics is -wwv- or -tov-: Kpov-iwy (genit. Kpovt- 
wyos or Kpovtovos) son of Kpédvo-s. 


560, Gentines (substantives which designate a person as belong- 
ing to some people or country) have the following suffixes : 

1. -ev-, nom. ev-s, oxytone : cf. 557, 1. 

Meyap-ev-s a Megarian from Méyapa (2d decl. pl.) 
’Epetpi-ev-s an Lretrian ’Epérpia (1st decl.) 

2. -rd-, nom. -r7y-s, paroxytone: cf. 557, 2. 

Teyea-ry-s from Teyéd, Aivivh-rn-s from Avyiva, "Hreipd-rn-s from “Hmerpo-s, 
SikeArw-T7-s from SiKeAla. 

3. The corresponding feminine stems end in -18- and -r\8-, nom. -:s, 
-Tis: Meyapis (Meyapid-) a Megarian woman, Teyearis (-10-), SixeeOris 
(-.d-). The accent falls on the same syllable as in the corresponding 
masculine. 


4, For gentiles in -zos see 564 a. 


561. The Puacz is expressed by the suffixes: 


1. -vo- in neuters, The words thus formed end in: 
a. -rnp-to-y, from substantives in -rnp (mostly obsolete forms of 
those in -rns, 550). 


dixacrhp-rov court of justice from (Sixacrhp) Sicaorhs judge 

&Kkpoarhp-roy auditoriwmn (axpoarhp) axpoarns hearer 
b. -e-vo-v, properispomenon. 

Aoye-to-yv speaker's platform from Adyo-s speech 

koupe-to-v (for roupev-to-v) barbers shop koupev-s barber 

Bouse-io-v seat of the muses Bove muse 
2. -wv-, nom. -wy, masculine and oxytone. 

dmred-oy vineyard from &urredo-s vine 

oiv-oy wine-cellar oivo-s wine 

map0ev-av maiden’s room mapbévo-s maid 


II. Formation oF ADJECTIVES. 


A. Primitives. 


662, Important suffixes forming primitive adjectives are: 
1, -v-, nom. -v-s, -era, -v, oxytone; added only to roots. 


n8-0-s sweet from 78- (Hdouc an pleased} 
Bap-v-s heavy Bap- (Bdp-os weeght) 


TAX-U-s swift Tax- (Tax-05 swiftness} 


194 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 





2. -er-, nom. -ns, -es (cf. 553, 2); used especially in compounds (578), 


Wevd-ns false from Wevd- (Wevdoua lie) 
cap-ns clear gap- 

3. “POv-, NOM. -woy, -pov. * 
TAN-ywov suffering, daring from rAa- (€rany endured) 
emt-Aho-pov forgetful Aad- (ém-AavOdvouan forget) 


563, Here belong also all participles: suffixes -vr-, -or-, -pevo- (see 382) ; 
and the verbal adjectives in -ro-s and -reo-s (see 475), 


B. Denominatives. 


564, The suffix -to-, nom. -10-s, -va, -vo-v OF -to-s, -to-y expresses that 
which pertains in any way to the noun from which the adjective is 
formed: 


ovpay-to-s heavenly from obpayd-s heaven 
mAova-to-s wealthy (for mAovt-10-s) mwAovTo-s wealth 
oixeto-s domestic (for otke-to-s) oiko-s house 

Gyopato-s forensis (for ayopa-to-s) ayopa forum 

Opeuo-s of the summer (for Pepea-t0-s) pos (Oepea-) summer 
aidoio-s venerable (for adSoa-to-s) aidés (adoc-) shame 
Bactareo-s kingly (for BactAev-10-s) Baoiret-s king — 


a. This suffix often serves to form adjectives denoting country or people 
(gentiles), which may be used also as substantives: MtAna-to-s (for MiAnt-10-s) 
Milesian from MtAnto-s, ’"A@nvato-s Athenian from ’A@jva Athens. 


b. Adjectives in -ao-s, -o1o-s are generally properispomena (-atos, -otos). 


565, -uxo0-, NOM. -sKo-s, -1x7, -tKo-v, always oxytone. It expresses that 
which pertains to the noun, often with a notion of jitness or ability. 


povoe-iKd-s musical from povca muse 
apx-ixd-s capable of governing apxd-s ruler 


After s-stems -xo- is used: gvat-xd-s natural from pvar-s nature. 


a. Such adjectives may be formed directly from a verb-theme by the suffix 
-riKo-: aisOn-tixd-s capable of feeling, mpax-rixd-s suited for action. 


566, -eo-, nom. -eo-s contracted -ous (224). 
“LVO-, =-lLVO-S 

These denote the material: xpicco-s, xpicovs golden from xpiad-s gold ; 
Al-.vo-s of stone from Aibo-s stone, tvA-tvo-s wooden from kbAo-v wood. 

a. The older form of -eo-s is -e1o-s, in which the suffix is really -1o-, the e 
belonging to the stem of the noun: thus xpiee-1o-s (Hm.) formed like oire-to-s, 
564. ; 

b. -tvo-, nom. -ivo-s oxytone, forms adjectives denoting time: xOea-wd-s be- 
longing to yesterday, hesternus ; vurrep-ivd-s noclurnus, éap-wwd-s vernus. 


567. -evr-, nom. -ers, -eooa, -ev. 


These denote fulness or abundance: xapi-e-s graceful from xdpi-s, bAN-e1-s 
woody from vAn, ixOv-d-ers full of fish from ix@u-s. They are mostly poetic. 


571] DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 195 


568. The comparative and superlative suffixes -repo- and -raro- (248) be- 
long here, The suffixes -tov- and -toro- (253), on the other hand, are added, 
with very few exceptions, directly to the root. 


569, Other adjective-suffixes, which cannot be so distinctly classed as 
forming primitives or denominatives, are: 

‘¥ itl nom, -imo-s, active: &AK-muo-s brave (GAKh prowess), udx-tmo-s War- 
like, dot5-.no-s to be sung of. And akin to this: 

2. -upo-, nom. -o1uo-s: xph-oruo-s useful, pvkiuos (puy-cuuo-s) avoidable or 
able to avoid, immd-oo-s fit for riding (imma Cowa ride). 

a, Both these classes were originally denominative. The words in -oipo-s 
came at first from nouns in -ov-s (551, 1): xphot-pwos useful from xpijat-s use ; 
but afterwards -c.o-, considered as a single suffix, was employed to form 
other adjectives directly from verbs. 

3. -THpLo-, nom. -rnpro-s, forms adjectives from verbs: meio-rhpio-s per- 
suasive from mel@-w. These are properly denominatives from nouns in -rnp 
(cwrnp-to-s preserving from ow-rhp) or in -rys (cf. 561, 1 a), and in most cases 
the corresponding noun exists. 

4, -yo-, nom. -vo-s, oxytone. 

a. In verbals, passive: Seu-vd-s fearful (to be feared), ceu-vd-s (¢€B-ouar) to 
be revered. 

b. In denominatives: aAyewd-s (aryeo-vo-s) painful from &A-yos (adyeo-) 
pain, dpewvd-s (opec-vo-s) mountainous from dpos (opec-) mountain. 

5. -po-, nom. -po-s, mostly oxytone and active: Aaum-pd-s bright (Adum-w 
Shine), p0ove-pd-s envious (pOdvo-s envy), AdTN-pd-s annoying (AVN annoyance). 

6. -Ao-, nom. Ao-s, mostly oxytone and active: de:-Ad-s timid, amarn-Ad-s de- 
ceitful (amarn deceit). 


III. DENoOMINATIVE VERBS. 4 


570, Denominative verbs were originally formed by adding, in the pres- 
ent, the suffix -10|¢- (1st sg. indic. -1w) to a noun-stem, usually somewhat modi- 
fied. The « then disappeared (as in reAé-w finish, older teAe-lw) or combined 
with the preceding sound (as in wal(w sport for mad-1w, from mats child). So 
arose several types of denominative verbs, each of which was afterwards ex- 
tended in use beyond its original limits. 


a. In respect to their meaning, these classes are not all clearly distin- 
guished from each other. Yet see 571, 1, 4, 7, 8. 


571, The most important endings are the following; they are given 
as seen in the present. 


1. -o-w dovAd-w enslave from SovAo-s slave 
xpiad-w gild xpiad-s gold 
Cnutd-w punish Cnuta penalty 


Verbs in -ow are causative ; that is, they signify to make or cause what is 
expressed by the noun. 


2. ~C-0 Tiud-co honor from tiuh honor 
GUT Lc Opucut accuse aitla fault 
.  Yod-w lament ydo-s wail 


196 DENOMINATIVE VERBS. [572 
3. -€-@ dprOne-w number from &pi0ud-s number 
evTuxe-w am fortunate evruxns fortunate 
ioropé-w know by inquiry torwp (icrop-) knowing 
4, -€v-@ Bactred-w am king from BactAed-s king 
Bovaev-w take counsel Bovan counsel 
dAnded-w speak truth arnOns true 


This class of verbs arose first from nouns in -ev-s, and signified the exer- 
cising of the function implied in the noun (557, 1). But afterwards many 
were formed from other nouns. Most are intransitive. 


5. -uLo éAmiCw (eAm5-1w) hope from éAmts (eAm5-) hope 
EAAHViCw speak Greek “EAAnv Greek 
pirinmivw favor Philip idkurmo-s 


The theme of these verbs ends in -16-, and the type arose from nouns with 
stems in -:- or -16-, but was extended to other nouns. 


6. -alw Sixadw (Sixad-1w) gudge from dln justice 
epyacoua work Epyo-v work 
BidCoua use force Bla force 


The theme of these verbs ends in -ad-. They are in origin closely allied to 
those in -aw, both classes being derived, for the most part, from noun-stems 
in -d-. 


7. -a1ve onualyw (onnav-1w) signify from o7jua (onuar-) sign 
peAalvoun grow black méeAas (wedav-) black 
Xaretraivw am angry xaremd-s hard, angry 
8. -tvw novvw (jdvv-1w) sweeten nov-s sweet 
Aapmpivw brighten Acumpd-s bright 
aicxivoua an ashamed aicxuvn shame 


The verbs in -aiyw and -ivw have themes in -ay- and -vy-. They come from 
a great variety of nouns, but -a:vw comes especially from stems in -ar-, and 
-vyw from stems in -v-. Most of them are causative. 


9. Less frequent endings are seen in papripowa: (uaptup-touo) call to witness 
from paprus (uaprup-) witness, KaSalpw (Kabap-.w) cleanse from kadapéd-s clean, 


inelpw (iuep-tw) desire from ipepo-s longing, ayyéAAw (ayyedA-iw) announce from — 


tyyedo-s messenger, TTwWUVAAW (TTwpVA-Lw) babble from oTwpdac-s talkative. 


572, Sometimes several verbs with different meanings are formed from 
the same noun: thus from dovAo-s slave, 5ovAd-w enslave, SovrAced-w am a slave ; 
from méAcuo-s war, ToAcué-w and mroAeul(w wage war, moAcud-w make hostile. 


573, DrestpERATIVES.—Verbs expressing desire are formed most frequently 
with the ending -ceww: yeAacelw desire to laugh, dpacelw have a mind to do ; 
also in -aw, -1aw: povdw am eager for murder, rravoidw long to weep.—Some 
verbs in -aw, -taw express an affection of the body: wxpidw am pallid, 6p0arpidw 
have sore eyes. 


| 574, Inrensrves (almost entirely poetic) are formed from primitive verbs, 
by a more or less complete repetition of the stem, generally with some change 
of vowel: pamd-w reach after, long for, from patoua (ua-) reach, moppip-w boil 
(of the sea) from $ip-w mix, roirvi-w puff from mvéw (mvv-) breathe. 





578] FORM OF COMPOUND WORDS. 


COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 


I Form or Compound Worps. 


575, When a noun stands as the jirst part of a compound word, 
only its stem is used : vav-rnyds ship-builder (vav-s), xopo-dudaoKaXos 
chorus-teacher (yops-s). 

a. Stems of the first decl. change -d- to -o-, appearing thus like stems of 
the second decl.: Avpo-moids lyre-maker (Avpa&). Stems of both these declen- 
sions drop their final vowel when a vowel follows: xop-nyés chorus-leader 
(xopé-s). It is retained, however, when the second part of the compound 
began originally with F: Hm. Snuso-epyds artisan, Att. dnusovpyéds. 

Stems of the third declension commonly assume o before a consonant: 
dySpiavt-o-rotds image-maker, warp-o-ntovos parricide, vat-o-Adyos natural 
philosopher, ix@v-0-payos fish-eating. 

b. But there are many exceptions to these rules. Thus, stems in -o- 
often change to o-stems: tipo-nrdvos (Eidos, st. Eupec-) slaying with the sword, 
Teixo-paxia (st. terxeo-) battle at the wall—Stems of the first declension 
sometimes retain the final -a- (as & or n): xon-pdpos libation-bringer. 

ce. When an inflected case is used instead of a stem, the word is not prop- 
erly a compound, but only a close union of two words: veda-orxos ship-house, 
TeAordy-vnoos (for MeAoros-vnoos) Pelops’s island, Sopt-Anmros won by the spear. 
In a few words, however, an inflected case appears in a real compound: vavot- 
mopos traversed by ships (-ropos not being used separately in this sense). 


576, When a noun stands as the las¢ part of a compound, its final 
syllable is often changed : dudd-ripo-s (rin) honor-loving. 


a. Neuters in -ua (-uat-) make adjectives in -uwyv: woAdu-mpiryyov (mpaypua) 
busy. phy becomes -dpwy, as ed-ppwy merry-hearted. 

b. An abstract word cannot stand unchanged as the last part of a com: 
pound, but a new abstract in -.4 is formed from a (real or imaginary) com- 
pound adjective: thus Boay throwing, but aerpo-BoAla sione-thr owing (from 
metpo-Béro-s stone-thrower); So vav-maxid (udxn) ship-fight, eb-mpatia (pats) 
good success. Only after a preposition can the abstract word remain un- 
changed: mpo-BovAn forethought. 7 


577. The last part of a compound is often a word not in use as a 
separate noun: thus Avpo-roids lyre-maker, vav-paxos fighter in we 
though -ro.os maker, -paxos jighter, are not used separately. 


078. A very frequent ending of compound adjectives is -ns, -es (stem 
-eo-). This is found: 


a. Oftenest in adjectives of which the last part is a neuter substantive- 
stem in -eg- (nom. -os): ed-yevhs (yéevos) of good birth, dexa-erhs (éros) of ten 
years. 

b. Less often when the last part is a noun with some other ending: 
ev-Tuxhs (rdxn) fortunate, Oeo-piAhs (piro-s) dear to the gods. 

ec. When the last part is an adjective not in actual use (57 1); but formed 
for the occasion from a verb: d-payhs invisible (pay-, paivw), huu-Oavns half- 
dead (Gav-, OvhaKw). 







FORM OF COMPOUND WORDS. [579 


579, Compounds in which the first part is made directly from a 
verb-theme,* are used chiefly in poetry. They are formed in two 
ways: 

a. The theme (sometimes with a vowel added), or the present stem, ap- 
pears as the first part: dax-€-Odpuos (Sdn-vw bite) heart-corroding, apx-t-réxtwv 
master-builder, uio-d-yuvos woman-hater, mel0-apxos obedient to command. 

b. The verb-theme has -o1- added to it: this becomes -o- before a vowel: 
Av-ct-mrovos releasing from toil, épv-o-dpyares (nom. pl., Hm.) chariot-drawing, 
mAnE-wmTos (TANy-, TAHTOw) horse-driving, orpepi-dixos (orpedp-w) perverter of 
justice. 


580, CompounD VERBS are formed by prefixing a preposition to a 
simple verb: ém-Badd@ throw on. 

a. Originally the prefix was a mere adverb, qualifying the verb. Hence 
the augment was applied to the, latter, not to the preposition (860). In the 
early language, as in Homer, the preposition was often separated from the 
verb by intermediate words, and even placed after the verb. This separation 
of the preposition from the verb is called ¢imesis (ryjois cutting). 


581, Verbs cannot be compounded with nouns, nor with anything 
but prepositions. Where verbs of such meaning are required, they 
are formed indirectly, as denominatives from compound nouns. 

Thus vav-s and wdxouo cannot form vav-waxoua, but from vav-udxos fight- 
ing in ships is made vavpaxéw fight in ships ; véuo-s and rlOnu cannot unite, 
but from vouo-9érns lawgiver is formed vouoderéw make laws. So wetOouat obey, 
but disobey is not a-meBouat, but ameOéw from ameOns disobedient. 


582, AccENT oF Compounps.—In general, compounds have reces- 
sive accent. But there are many exceptions to this rule. Thus: 


a. Compounds of the first declension, and some of the third, keep the 
accent of the second part: amo-cToAn sending away, mAovto-dornp wealih-giver, 
pov-ey one-eyed, 

b. Most compounds in -7s, -es are oxytone: for examples, see 578. 

ce. Determinative compounds (585 a) of the second declension, when the 
last part has a passive or intransitive sense, follow the rule: A:@6-BoAos thrown 
at with stones, untpd-Krovos slain by a mother, But when the last part is active 
(denoting the agent), and is made from a root by suffix -o- (nom. -os), they 
accent the penult if it is short; if long, the wltima: Ar00-BdéAos throwing 
stones, untpo-Ktdovos matricide, 58po-pdpos water-carrier ; oTpat-nyds army-leader, 
general, Noryo-moids story-maker, Woxo-roumds conductor of souls. 

But compounds in -oxos (€x-w) and -apyos (&px-w), with some others, 
follow the general rule: 7vl-oxos (rein-holder) charioteer, Sa800x0s (contr. 
from 645d-ox0s) torch-holder, imm-apxos commander of horse. 


583, Words formed from compound verbs should be distinguished 
from actual compounds. They are commonly accented like simple 
words with the same suffixes: avAAoyio-pd-s reckoning from avAdoyt- 
Copa reckon, amodo-réo-s from amobidape give back. 





* Compare in English ‘ breakwater,’ ‘ dreadnought,’ and the like. 


aa 


pir 


587] MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS. 199 


Il Mraninc oF Comrpounp Worbs. 


584, As regards their meaning, compound nouns (substantive and 
adjective) may be divided into two principal classes. 


585, DETERMINATIVE Compounps.—In these, the first part defines 
or determines the second, and the whole compound denotes the same 
erson or thing as that denoted by the second part: thus oixo-pvAak 
Be runrdian is a particular kind of dvAagé or guardian. 
Of these there are two kinds: 


a. The first part may define the second in a sense which might be 
separately expressed by an oblique case (with or without a preposi- 
tion). 

Aoyo-ypdgos speech-writer = writer of speeches 
xetpo-roinros hand-made = made with hands 
Oe-naatos god-sent = sent by a god 


Here may be put the verbal compounds mentioned in 579; as Seot-daluwv 
spirit-fearing, fearing spirits ; although in these the second part defines the 
jirst. 


b. Much less often, the first part defines the second in the sense of 
an adjective or an adverb. 


apd-moAts upper city, citadel = &xpa méAts 
Wevdo-nijpvé false herald = Wevdis Kijpvé 
6u6-5ovaos fellow-slave 


586, Possessive Compounps.—In these, also, the first part defines 
the second, but the whole compound is an adjective describing the 
possessor, some such idea as ‘having’ being supplied in thought. In 
English such compounds generally end in -ed.* 


parpd-xetp long-armed = having long arms 

yAaun-omis bright-eyed = having bright eyes 

&pyupd-roto-s with silver bow 

66-r potro-s of like character 

mixpo-ryayuo-s bitter-wedded = having an unhappy marriage 
Sexa-erys (having) lasting ten years 


a. Here belong the numerous adjectives in -o-e:5fs, or contracted -ddns: 
opatpo-crdns having the appearance of a ball, ball-like ; tepardins monster-like, 
monstrous. 


587. Prepositions may be connected with substantives in each of the 
above-described relations: 
a. DETERMINATIVE: 


mpo-Bovah forethought, planning beforehand 
aupi-putos flowed around, sea-girt 





* Yet compare such names as ‘ Greatheart,’ ‘ Bluebeard.’ 


200 | MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS. [588 


b. POSSESSIVE: 
evOceos having a god in him, inspired 
dudixtwy having pillars round it 


588. Compound adjectives of a peculiar sort arise from prepositional 
phrases, and are equivalent to those phrases with ‘ beimg’ understood. 
Thus: 

from é¢’ évria comes épéatuos (being) on the hearth 
ep tinr@ eplamos pertaining to (being on) a horse 
ev XMPa eyxepios native = (being) in the country. 


589, AupHA Privative.—The prefix dy- (Lat. in-, Eng. un-), be- 
fore consonants a-, is called on account of its meaning alpha privative. 
Compounds formed with it are possessive, when the second part is a 
substantive ; when it is an adjective, or a formation with adjective 
meaning directly from a verb, they are determinative. 


av-aidhs shameless (aidés shame) 

a-mas childless (mats child ) 

a-divaros unable, impossible (Suvards able, possible) 
a-pavhs invisible (pav-, palyw show) 


a. Determinative compounds formed with this prefix from substantives, are 
rare and poetic: uArnp auhtwp an unmotherly mother = unrnp cb prnp ode. 

b. Words, which began originally with F, have a-, not dy-: d-éxwv, akwy, 
unwilling, a-euns, aixhs, unseemly (root tk-, €ouxa). 


590, The inseparable prefix Svc- ill is the opposite of 8 well, and ex- 
presses something bad, unfortunate, or difficult: dvc-Bovados ill-advised (posses- 
sive) = having evil counsels, dvo-dperros (determinative) al-pleased, Suc-dAwTos 
hard to be caught. Here, too, determinative compounds formed from sub- 
stantives are very rare: Hm. Avo-rapis wretched Paris. 


PART FOURTH. 


SYNTAX. 


DEFINITIONS. 


691, Syntax (cvvtaéis arranging together) shows how words 
are combined in sentences. 


592. The essential parts of a sentence are 
the Sunsect, of which something is said, and 
the PrepicaTE, which is said of the subject. 
The subject of a sentence is a substantive (or substantive pronoun) 
in the nominative case. The predicate of a sentence is either a jinite 
verb or a finite verb with a predicate-noun. 


593, Opsect.—A verb may have an object on which its 
action is exerted. The object is a substantive in an oblique 
case: it is either direct (in the accusative case) or indirect 
(in the dative ; sometimes also in the genitive, see 735 ff). 


a. Verbs capable of taking a direct object are called transitive ; 
others are ¢ntransitive. 


ATTRIBUTIVE, APPOSITIVE, AND PrepicaTE-Nown. 


694, An adjective qualifying a substantive is called : 


a. An Attributive, when it is directly joined with the sub- 
stantive, without any assertion: as 6 dyads dvyp the good 
man. 

b. A Predicate-Adjective, when it forms part of the predi- 
cate, and is asserted of the substantive: as 6 dvyp dyabds éore 
the man is good, ayabov vopuilovor tov avopa they think the man 
good. 

Rremu.—The term predicate-adjective includes all adjectives and participles 
which are not attributive: thus in mp@ros TodTo éxolnoey he was the first to do 
this, ovAA€tds oTpdrevua emopetOn having collected an army he set out, Widais 


Tais Kepadais uaxovra they fight with their heads bare, mp@ros, avAdekas, and 
Widais are called predicate-adjectives. 





202 DEFINITIONS. [595 


595. A substantive qualifying another substantive may be: 


a. An Appositive, when it is simply added to the sub- 
stantive to explain it: as MuAtiddys 6 orparnyds Miltiades the 
general. 


b. A Predicate-Substantive, when it is a part of the predi- 
cate, and is asserted of its substantive: as MiAriddns otparnyes 
éot. Miltiades is general, rovotor MiAriadyv otpatnyov they make 
Miltiades general. 

Rem.—So also in xadlerara Bacireds he becomes established as king, fires 
por cwrthp thou art come as my savior, Bactheds and owthp are regarded as 
predicate-substantives. 


596. CopuLATIVE VEeRBS.—The verb ciui am, when it serves 
simply to connect a predicate-noun with the subject of the 
sentence, 1s called a copula. Some other verbs, as yiyvopuae 
become, and those meaning to appear, to be called, chosen, 
considered, and the like, have a similar use. 


a. Yet all these verbs, even eiul, may be used without a predicate-noun, 
as complete predicates. 


PRONOUNS OF REFERENCE. 


597, Pronouns of reference are either relative or demon- 
strative: 


598, Relative-—A substantive may be qualified by a sentence: 
avijp ov mavres ditovaor a man whom all love. The sentence is then 
introduced by a relative pronoun. The substantive, as it commonly 
goes before the relative, is called its antecedent. 


599, Demonstrative.—A substantive, once used, may be recalled or 
referred to by a demonstrative pronoun. 


EQUIVALENTS OF THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 


600. Other words may take the place of the substantive and adjec- 
tive in the above constructions. Thus the adjective may be replaced 
by an adjective pronoun, article, or participle; or by a genitive, an 
adverb, or a preposition with its case, especially when these are placed 
directly after the article (666 a, b, c). 

A substantive may be replaced by the adjective (or any of its 
equivalents), by a personal or reflexive pronoun, an infinitive or a 
clause. 

a. Any word or phrase viewed merely as a thing may be used as a sub- 
stantive: Td yrat. ceavrdéy kal Td cwopdver eat ravrdy the “know thyself” 
and the “be wise” are the same thing (PCharm.164°). 

b. A preposition with a numeral may take the place of a substantive: dme- 
Oavov abtay rep) tpidaxoatous there died of them about three hundred (XH.4.6"). 


ae by Som 0 ce OO aes 
Ded. > o. , ¥ ae < 
: : [- wwrhet F Wr The 


GENERAL RULES@GE THIS ISEN TEN CEL [NO 
The Subject. 


601. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case: 
Kipos Bacireta Cyrus is king. 


602. Omission or THE SuBJECT.—The subject is often omitted: 


a. When it is a pronoun of the first and second person: rAéyo I 
speak, adxovaate hear ye. 

But the pronoun is not omitted, if there is an emphasis upon it: & dy éya 
Aéyw, vuets axovcate whatever I may say, do you hear. 

b. When it is implied in the context: 

Kipos tas vais weremeupato, Srws émAiTtas amoBiBdcoere Cyrus sent for the 
ships, that he (Cyrus) might land troops (XA.1.4°). * 

c. When it isa general idea of person: daai they (men, people) say. 


Less often in the singular: éodAmyte the trumpet sounded, literally (one) 
sounded the trumpet (XA.1.2!"). 

So originally such verbs as vee it rains, viper it snows, dotpamre: it lightens, 
oeler (it shakes) there is an earthquake, etc.; these operations of nature being 
regarded by the Greeks as actions of a divine person, Zevs, or 0eds (which are 
sometimes expressed). 

d. When the subject is indeterminate ; that is, thought of as wholly 
vague and general. The verb is then said to be ¢mpersonal: dé jy 
at was late. 

So juwépa evyévero it became day, nadas exer it is well, Set? paxns there is need 
of a battle, nro? (something makes clear) it és clear. 

The same construction is seen in passive verbs, especially in the perfect 
and pluperfect: mapecxevaorat wor (things have been prepared by me) J have 
made preparation. 

REMARK.—The term impersonal is also less correctly applied to 
verbs whose subject is an i/finitive or a sentence: eEeatw evdapoveiv 
it is possible to be happy, Sndrov qv ote éyyvs tov 6 Bacwevs Ay it was 
plain that the king was somewhere near (XA.2.3°).  ~ 


The Verb. 


603, A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in 
number and person : 7ets erawvotpev we approve. 


a. The only nominatives of the first person are éyé, vd, nuets; of the 
second person, ob, od, vets; all other nominatives are of the third person. 


604, But a neuter plural subject has its verb in the singu- 
lar: 1a mpaypara radra Sewd éore these things are dreadful. 


a. A neuter plural subject denoting persons, may have a verb in the 
plural: roodde pera "AOnvalwy 20vn éotpdtevoy so many nations were warring 


_ on the side of the Athenians (T.7.58). 


ray 


y, 


204 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB. [605 


b. Other exceptions to this rule, though rare in Attic, are frequent in the 
other dialects: thus Hm. omdpra AdAuyrat the cables are loosed (B 135). 


605, Very seldom a masculine or feminine plural subject has a verb in 
the singular. In such cases the verb stands first: Soxovvr: Sixalw eivar ylyve- 
Tat amd Tis Sdins apxal Te Kal yduor to a man reputed to be just, there comes, 
in consequence of his reputation, both offices and nuptials (PRp.363*). So 
with the dual: éort TodTw Sitrw Tw Biw there are these two different ways of 
living (PGo.500%). 


AGREEMENT WITH Two oR MoRE SUBJECTS. 


606. With two or more subjects connected by and, the verb is in 
the plural. If the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the 
first person rather than the second or third, and in the second person 
rather than the third: 


Evpuuddwy Kat Sopoxrjs éotparevoay Hurymedon and Sophocles set out on a 
campaign (T.4.46), Sevol nat copol eye Te kal ob jer both I and thou were skil- 
ful and wise (PTheaet.1544), ob ob ob5€ of ol Piro mp@ra Tadrny Sdkav EoxeTE 
"twas not you and not your friends who first conceived this opinion (PLg.888°). 

a. With two singular subjects, the dual may be used: 750vy kal Avan ev TH 
moAet Bacthevoerov pleasure and pain will bear sway in the city (PRp.6074). 


607. Often, however, the verb agrees with one of the subjects (the 
nearest, or the most important), and is understood with the rest. 
Especially so, when the predicate stands before all the subjects, or 
directly after the first of them: 

Bastkeds Kal of ody adt@ ciowinre eis Tb orpatdmedoy the king and his fol- 
lowers break into the camp (XA.1.10!), of révynres Kad 6 Simos wAdov xer the 
poor and the common people have superior power (XRa.1°), éreupé we *"Apratos 
Kal "Aprdo(os Ariacus and Artaozus sent me (XA.2.41%), éyd Aéyw Kal SevOns Ta 
astd IT and Seuthes say the same (XA.7.7'°), 


608, A plural verb is rarely used, when singular subjects are connected 
by # or, ovre nor: ei EuehAov arordoyhoacba Aewxdpyns 2) Aucauoyerns if Leo- 
chares or Dicaeogenes were about to make a defence (Isae.5°). 

a. A singular subject followed by the preposition with, rarely takes a plural 
verb: Aynpoodévns peta TaY GvoTpaTHYyav orévSovTat Maytiwevar Demosthenes 
with his associate-generals make a treaty with the Mantineans (T.3.109). 


609. CotLtectIvE SuBsEcT.—The subject is sometimes a collective 
noun, expressing more than one in the singular: éaOns clothing 
(clothes), wAivOos brick (= bricks), 7 tmmos the horse (cavalry), 4 aomis 
the heavy armed. 

A collective subject denoting persons, may have its verb in the 
plural: 

"AOnvatwy Td mAs otovTa “Immapxov TUpavvoy byTa amobaveiv the mass of 
the Athenians believe that Hipparchus was tyrant when he died (T.1.20). 

a. Such words as €xaoros each, tls any one, mas Tis every one, ovdels no one, 
may have the construction of collectives, on account of the plural which 


they imply: rév éavTod Exaoros Kal maldwy ai oixeray tpxovoww each man rules 
his own, both children and servants (XRI.6'), 


613] 5 VERB OMITTED. 905 


AGREEMENT WITH A PREDICATE-NOUN. 


610, A verb may agree with the predicate-noun, when this stands 
nearer than the subject, or is viewed as more important: 


ai xopnylat ikavdy eddamorlas onucidy eo his chorus-payments are a sufficient 
sign of prosperity (Ant.27°), 7d xwploy mpdrepov ’Evvéa 650i éxadotvro the place 
was before called Nine Ways (T.4.102). So, also, participles of such verbs: 
bmetebevto Tas Ouyatépas maidla bvTa they conveyed away their daughters being 
children (D.191**), 


a. With a predicate-adjective in the neuter plural, the verb is regularly in 
the singular: o#re cduaros KddAos Kat ioxUs SerAG EvvoixotyTa mpémovta pulvera 
nor do beauty and strength of body, when dwelling with a coward, appear seemly 
qualities (P Menex.246°). 


OMISSION OF THE VERB. 


611, The copula ecivi am is often omitted, especially the forms 
eort and cici: Gedy Suvayis peyiotn the power of the gods is greatest 
(EAIlc.219). 

a. The omission is the rule with certain words; as dpa lime, avayrn neccs- 
sity, 5éov and xpewv needful, ppovdos gone ; and is frequent also with verbals 
in -réos (988): TS vouw meoréov the law must be obeyed (PAp.19*), Spa rAévyew 
"tis time to tell (XA.1.3!*). 

b. The omission of other forms of eiuf is comparatively rare: @iAhKoos 
eywye (se. eiul) I for my part am fond of hearing (PEuthyd.304°), éws (se. 
eoré) er ev aoparet, puadtacbe while you are yet in safety, beware (D.19?°), 


612. Some common verbs of being, doing, saying, going, coming, may 
be omitted in brief and pointed expressions, especialiy questions and 
commands: 


tva tt (se. yévntra); to what end? literally, that what may happen? (PAp.26%), 
tl BAAO ovTOL (SC. éroinoav) 4) émeBotvAcvoay ; what else did these men than plot 
against us ? (T.3.39), ovdev BAN 7 cvpBovdcvovow juiv they do nothing else than 
advise us (1.8°"), kalro: cal TovTo (sc. A€yw) though this also I say (D.4"!), gan 
oimw mep) tovtwy but not yet about this will I speak (D.18%), um por piptious 
Eévous (sc. Adyere) tell me not of ten thousand mercenaries (D.4'°), & pire 
aidpe, mot 5H (sc. ef), ral wdGev (sc. Hees); dear Phaedrus, whither, I pray are 
you going, and whence are you come? (PPhaedr.227*). 


a. Here belongs the phrase xa) tavra and that: d&ypiwrépous abrods arépnye, 
kal tadra eis aitév he rendered them wilder, and that (he did) toward himself 
(PGo.516°); kad radra is especially used with concessive participles (969 e): 
Soke’s jor od mpocexXe, Kal TadTa Topds ay you seem to me not to observe, and 
that (you do) though you are wise (PGo.5088), 


613, Any verb may be omitted, where it is readily supplied from a 
verb in the context: 


ov Te yapEAAnpy el, kal jucis (sc. éouty “EAAnves) for you are a Greek, and 
80 are we (XA.2.1'°), 7d caés oddels ore TéTE (Sc. elxev) OTE Viv ExeL Eimety 
the certain fact no one either then was able or now is able to state (T.6.60). Cf. 
905 and 1006. i 
; 10 


"tl oe 
7%. 

. vag 

Aa 


206 AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE-NOUNS. [614 


Predicate- Nouns. 


614, A predicate-substantive must agree in case with the 
substantive to which it refers: a predicate-adjective must 
agree in case, number, and gender. 

For examples, see 594 b, 595 b. 

a. A predicate-substantive usually agrees in number also: but sometimes 
the sense will not permit this: obra: ye pavepa eats AdBn TaY CvYyyryvomevev 
these men are a manifest bane to their associates (PMen.91°). 


615. With two or more substantives, a predicate-adjective, like the 
verb (606), is generally plural: “Aya@wyv kai Swxpdrns owrot Agathon 
and Socrates are left (PSym.193°). 


With substantives of different genders: 

(1) If they denote persons, the predicate-adjective is masculine 
(cf. 639), unless the persons are all women; 

(2) If they denote things, it is neuter (cf. 617); 

(8) If they denote persons and things together, it takes the gender 
of the persons: 

(1) érav 8) of éwynuevor kal af éwynudvar pydey jrtov érevOepor Gor TOV 
mpiauevwv when bought men and bought women are no less free than ther 
buyers (PRp.563°).—{2) vots kat réxvn mpdrepa ay ety mind and art must have 
been pre-existent (PLg.892>).—(3) 4 réxn Kal birurmos joay Tay epywy KupioL 
fortune and Philip had control over the actions (Ae.2"*), 

a. A collective also (cf. 609) may have a plural predicate-adjective. 


616. But the predicate-adjective, like the verb (607), may agree 
with one substantive and be understood with the rest: kai yap poBos 
Kal vopos ikavos épwta Kohvew for fear and law are capable of restraining 
love (XC.5.1""): 


617. Nevrer Prepicate-Apsective. —A_ predicate-adjective is 
_ often neuter when its substantive is masculine or feminine: xaddv 7 
dAndera beautiful is truth ; properly a beautiful thing (PLg.663°): 


a. This construction is the rule with substantives of different genders de- 
noting things (615, 2), but it is allowed in other cases: ebyéveial Te kal duvdpers 
kal Tiwal SnAd eorw ayaa yTa high birth and power and honor are manifestly 
good things (PEuthyd.279>), % KaAAlorn modirela kal 6 KdAALoTOS avnp Aoima 
ay nuiv ein SteAGeiv the noblest polity and the noblest man would be left for us to 
consider (PRp.562), o@adrepdy iryeucv Opacis dangerous is a daring guide 
(ESupp.508), Se.vdv of moAAol, kaxovoyous Stay €xwor mpootaras formidable are 
the many, when they have rogues jor leaders (KOr.772). 


SPECIAL Usks oF PREDICATE-NOUNS. 


618, A predicate-adjective or substantive is often a brief equivalent 
for one clause of a compound sentence: 

aOdvarov Thy prhuny KkaradrelWover (they will leave the memory deathless) 
the memory which they leave will be deathless (1.9°), ovx amAovy TovTO. épwTas 
(not being a simple thing, do you ask this) this is no simple thing that you ask 


621] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. 207 


(PGo.5088), olay exdvay rhv® Epioas (being what sort of a viper hast thou 
begotten her) what a viper is this woman whom thou hast begotien (Elon1262), 
mécov Ti wyet TO OTparevua; (how large is he leading the army) how large is the 
army which he leads? (XC.2.1*), év émoig tH yh Set puredew oida I know in 
what kind of soil one must plant, i. e., of what kind the soil is, in which, ete. 
(X0.19?), wap’ Exdvtay trav uuudxov Thy ijryemoviay EAaBoy they received the 
leadership from their allies (being willing) who were willing to confer it (1.7). 
Of. 670 a and 1012 a. 


619. The Greek often uses a predicate-adjective where other lan- 
guages use an adverb, or a preposition with its case: adcxvotyrat 
tpiraio: they arrive on the third day (XA.5.8"), vorepor atxovro they 
came afterward (PLg.698°), dpxios d€ cou Aéyw and under oath I speak 
to thee (SAnt.305). 


a. So especially adjectives denoting ¢ime or order: Sevrepaios on the second 
day, bpOpios at dawn, sKxotates in the dark, xpdrepos, mpatos first, botepos bora- 
Tos, TeAevtaios last, etc. So also éxay willingly, drwy unwillingly. 

b. In some such cases, the adverb, used in Greek, would give a different 
meaning: mp@ros Myndvuvn mpoodBare he first (before any one else) attacked 
Methymna ; xpérn MnOiuvyn mpooéBare he attacked Methymna first (before any 
other place); but with the adverb, mparov MnOduvn mpocéBare first (before 
doing any thing else) he attacked Methymna. 


Attributives. 


620. An adjective agrees with its substantive in case, num- 
ber, and gender: dikatos dvyip a gust man. 


a. An attributive belonging to more than one substantive agrees with the 
nearest: Tov KaAddby Kayabby a&vdpa nad yuvatka evdaluova eivat pny the perfect 
man and woman I say are happy (PGo.470°), Otherwise it must be repeated 
with each substantive. 


621, ADJECTIVE usED Atonzt.—The substantive to which 
an attributive belongs is often omitted : 


_ a. When it is the general idea of man or woman: 6 codes the wise 
man, oi OnBatoa the Thebans. y 


So 7 Karn the beautiful woman, of woAdol the many, the mass of the people, 
exkAnotdovca women holding assembly. 


b. When it is the general idea of thing, the attributive is then 
neuter: ayafa good things, Sometimes quality, essence, space, time, or 
other words, may be used in English to express the omitted idea: 


7) Acyduevoy (the thing said) the common saying, ra Tis méAews the affairs 
of the city, ro tupavvixdy the condition or character of tyrant, él modv (over 
much space or time) fo a great extent or for a long time, év wécw (in the midst) 
in public, rd ard Todde (the time from this time) henceforth, 7d vavtixdy the 
(naval force) navy, 7d BapBapicdy the barbarian world, 7d Kowdy the common- 
wealth, ta Arovicra the festival of Dionysus. 


_ Rem.—rd kaddy is abstract, the (quality) beautiful ; ra Kkadd, concrete, bear- 
tiful things, whatever is beautiful. 


ih 


. 
4 


is. 
ak | 


aa 


208 APPOSITIVES. | [622 


c. When, as in many common expressions, it can be readily under- 
stood from the attributive itself, as 7 defca the right hand. In this 
way, the masculine xéAmos gulf, oivos wine, and a number of feminines, 
such as jpéepa day, yn land, xapa country, 6d6s way, xeip hand, réxvn 
art, and some others, are often omitted. 

Thus 6 *Idvos the Jonian gulf, 6 axparos unmixed wine, 7 mporepala the day 
before, 7 émiotca the coming day, 7 avpiov the morrow, 7 euavTod my own coun- 
try (7.5.26), BadiGe Thy evdciay walk the straight way (MMon.62), Aye thy em 
Méyapa he was leading on the way toward Megara (XH.4.4!%), pnropiuch rhetoric 
(oratorical art), kara Thy euny (Sc. ywouny) according to my judgment (PPhil. 
41>), épnuny (sc. diknv) karnyopover they bring as plaintiffs a deserted suit, the 
defendant not appearing (PAp.18°) eixoorn (uepts) a twentieth part (T.6.54), 
n wempwpuevn (wotpa) the allotted portion, destiny (1.1%), rodrov dAtyas %mrace 
(sc. wAnyas) he struck this man few blows (XA.5.8"), as Babdy éxomnhOns (se. 
trvov) how deep a sleep you slept (Luc.Marin.293), Oepud (sc. Sart) AodeOm to 
bathe in warm water (ArNub.1044). 


d. When it is expressed in the context: 

ei TOV piploy éAmidwy pla Tis (Sc. éAmis) vuly éort if out of ten thousand 
chances you have a single one (XA.2.1)°), weréxet Tis KadAloTns (Sc. TExvNs) 
tay texvav he shares in the fairest of arts (PGo.448°). 


622, Feminine adjectives without a substantive are often used to express 
direction, manner, or condition. These uses may have grown out of an orig- 
inal omission of 656s way: ef evaytlas from an opposite direction, in front 
(XHier.65), waxpay a long way off (EPhoen.906), és paxpay at a long remove in 
time (D.18**), jew tiv taxtorny to come (the quickest way) most quickly 
(X11.4.58), Anorevew dvdynn Thy mpetny we must needs plunder (as the first 
course) at first (D.4°?), Thy GAAws adorAccx@ I am prating to no purpose, i. e., 
the way that leads astray (D.6**). 


Appositives. 


623. The appositive agrees in case with its substantive: 
MiAriddns 6 otparnyos Miltiades the general. 


a. The appositive ordinarily agrees in number also, but this is sometimes 
impossible: eis TéArds, wéAw oikoupévyy to Peltae, an inhabited city (XA.1.2"), 


b. An appositive belonging to two or more substantives is usually plural 
or dual; cf. 606 and a: @adpos kal PdBos, &ppove EvuBovAw daring and terror, 
unintelligent advisers (PTim.694). 


624, Apposition is of several kinds: “ 


a. ATTRIBUTIVE APPOSITION: the appositive has the force of an attributive: 
dricbopvaAakes Aoxayol rear-guard captains (XA.4.77°). Such an appositive may 
be placed between the article and its substantive (666 a): 6 Evgparns mora- 
uds the river Huphrates (XA.1.41!), of “EAAnves weatacral the Greck targeteers 
(XA.6.52), 

b. Descriptive ApposiTioN: the appositive describes something just 


named: 7 tperépa wéALs, 1) Kow) KaTapuyh Tov ‘EAAHYwy our city, the common 
refuge of the Greeks (Ae.3'4), 


oa 


626] ( APPOSITIVES. 209 


ce. DEFINITIVE APPOSITION: the appositive definitely expresses something 
which has been vaguely indicated: 6 @dvatos tuyxdvet dy dvoiy mparyudrow 


SidAvois, THS Wox7s kal TOD Gdpatos death is a separation of two things, the soul 
and the body (PGo.524°). 


d. Partit1vE APppositIon: the appositive is related to its substantive as 
the part to the whole: Adra at wey xpnorat elouy, ae be movnpat pains are, 
some good, others evil (PG0.499°), ai réxvar Td adtijs Exdorn Epyov eprydceras 
the arts work each one its own work (PRp.3464), odtor HAAos BAAa Adve: these 
say, one one thing another another (XA.2.1"°). 


625. The following are peculiar uses of appositives : 


a. Words denoting station or condition are often connected with avnp man 
or avOpwros person, the former implying respect, the latter contempt: a&yvdpes 
Sixavrai judges, liter. juror-men, cf. gentlemen of the jury (D.20!), av@pwiros 

—ydns a mountebank fellow (Ae.2}*?). 


b. In Homer, the demonstrative 6 5¢, used at the beginning of a sentence, 
is often explained at the close by adding as an appositive the object referred 
to: of & ayrio: éyxe herpay Tpaes but they in opposition raised their spears, the 
Trojans (€ 373), 7b ® bnéprraro XdAKEOY eyxos but tt flew over him, the brazen 
spear (X 275). With 6 uéy, this is much less often the case. 


ce. Homeric CoNSTRUCTION OF THE WHOLE AND Part.—To words denoting 
person, in the accusative or dative, Homer often adds an appositive denoting 
the part (head, hand, heart, mind, shield, etc.) which is specially affected by 
the action: Anioniray ob acev pov he wounded Deiopites in the shoulder 
(A 420), Ka5 8 a&xos of xvTO piptoy OpGar motor excessive grief o’erspread (him 
the eyes) his eyes (Y 282), wotdy oe eros b pase Epkos OddyT ey ; what manner of 
saying has escaped the fence of thy teeth? (A 350), &50s Té pay ikeTo Oiudy and 
satiety came to his spirit (A 88). 


626. AprosrTion To A SENTENCE.—When a word and a sentence 
are in apposition, the word may stand either in the nominative or the 
accusative : 


eucdvov, ixavy mpdpacis I was drunk—a sufficient exeuse (Philem.iv.62), 


evdaimovoins, micbdy Ndictay Adywv mayst thou be happy, a reward for sweetest 
words (HEI.231). 


a. The word is put in the nominative, as not depending in construction 
upon any other word (708). When put in the accusative, tt is brought into a 
kind of dependence on the verb of the sentence, as if in apposition with a 
cognate-accusative (715) supplied after the verb: evdaiovotns (evdatuoviar), 
pia Bor, ete. 


b. Neuter words often used in apposition » with a sentence, are onpetoy sign, 
Tek UNpLOY evidence, kepddraov chief point, Td méeyiaoror the greatest thing, Td 
évaytioy the contrar Y, Td Acyduevoy the common saying, To THs “Traporulas the 
expression of the proverb, adr rodto this very thing, tavts tTotto this same 
thing, Svoiy Oarepov onc of two things, dupdr epov or aupdtepa both, ete. Such 
words commonly precede the sentence: kal Td péeyioTov, epoPetto btt bpOjce- 
gOa éueAr¢ and—more than ali—he was afr aid, because he was likely to be 
seen (XC.3.1!), rd Acyduevoy, kaTémivy eopThs jKouev; are we come too late for 
a feast, as the sa ying is? (PGo.4774), Svoty Oarepov, 7) ovdauod Ect KTHoacba 
7d cidéva 4 Tercurhods one or the other must be true, either nowhere can we 

_ altain to knowledge, or after we are dead (PPhaed.66°). 


; 


e 





210 AGREEMENT OF RELATIVES. 


Pronouns of Reference. 


627. The relative agrees with its antecedent in number and 
gender : 


évravda hv phn, ed F Aéyerar Mapavas rv sdrupoy Onpedom here was a 
spring, by which Marsyas is said to have caught the satyr (XA.1.2!%), 


a. If the relative is subject of a sentence, its verb takes the person 
of the antecedent : npeis of rovTo Aéyopev we who say this. 


For omission of the antecedent, incorporation, etc., see 994-996. 


628. A relative referring to two or more antecedents, follows the 
rules for the number and gender of the predicate-adjective (615, 616): 

qep) moA€uou Kal eipnyns, & Exer peylorny Siva év TS Ble Tov avOparev con- 
cerning war and peace, which have the greatest power m the life of men (1.8’),. 
GraAAayéerres ToAcuwr Kal Kivdivey Kal Tapaxijs, cis HY vuy mpds aAATAOUS Kabe- 
otauey delivered from wars and dangers and trouble, in which we have now 
become involved with one another (1.8?°). 


629, A relative, referring to a collective, may be in the plural: 

mapéorat wperdia of Tavde nxpetagous cict an auxiliary foree will be at hand, 
who are more effective than these (T.6.80), rd "Apradixdy dmAiricdy, Gy ipxe 
KAcavep the Arcadian heavy-armed force, whom Cleanor led (XA.4,8!*). 


a, A singular antecedent may suggest a class of persons, and may thus 
have a relative in the plural: @noauporards aynp, ods 8h Kal emrosvet Td TAROOS a 
money-making man, just those whom the multitude praise (PRp.554). 


b. Conversely, when the antecedent is plural, the relative is sometimes 
singular, referring to an individual of the number: éomd(era: mayras, 6 av 
mepituyxavn he embraces all men, whatsoever one he falls in with (PRp.566*). 


630. So, too, a relative may be neuter when the antecedent is masculine 
or feminine: tupavrlia Onpay, 6 wANGe: xphuaciv & aricnera to pursue despotic 
power, (a thing) which as captured through numbers and wealth (SOt.542). 

* 601, A relative pronoun, used as a subject, instead of agreeing with 
its antecedent, may agree with its predicatenoun: 7 Tov fevpatos éxetvov 
any, ov imepoy Zebs @vopade the fountain of that stream whieh Zeus named 
Desire (PPhaedr.255°), 

a. The relative may even agree with a predicate-noun belonging to the 
antecedent: ovdémor ay ein Hh pyrapinh &dicoyv wpdyua, 6 7 ced wept Siearoovyns 
Tous Adyous tTaeita rhetoric can never be an unjust thing, sinee it (rhetoric) és 
always making is diseowrses about justice (PGo.460°). 


632, The rules in 627-630 apply also to the demonstrative pronoun 
of reference (599). 


a. A demonstrative pronoun, which would properly be neuter, as signify- 
ing the idea of thong, may be masculine or feminine to agree with a predicate- 
noun: afrn ésrly avo (for rovTd cori avon) this is folly, nde apxh Tis éuodo- 
ylas, épéoOat juas avtovs this is a beginning of agreement, to question one 
another (PRp.462*). | 


636] NUMBER AND GENDER. 211 


OTHER PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF 
NUMBER AND GENDER. 


633, ConstRucTIO AD SENSUM (kara ctvecw).—A word in agree- 
ment often conforms to the real gender or number of the word with 
which it agrees, instead of the grammatical. 


Thus, a predicate-participle: 7b orpdrevya émopi(ero ciroy KémrovTes Tovs 
Bows the army provided food for itself, by slaughtering the oxen (XA.2.1°), rad?’ 
eAeyev  glapa airy Kepadr, eteAnAvdds thus spake this abominable person, 
having come out (D.21'"); or a pronoun of reference: davdytwy éwra yevvatwy 
Tekvev ovs mor “Apyelwy avat “Adpactos iyarye seven noble children having 
fallen, whom once Adrastus, chief of Argives, led (ESupp.12). So, in poetry, 
an attributive: @ mepicod Tiundels Téxvoy O greatly honored child (ETro.740). 


a. Here belong also the constructions with collectives ; see 609, 615 a, 629. 


b. An adjective may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of refer- 
ence, agreeing with a substantive implied in it: ’A@nvatos dy, méAEws Tis 
ueylorns being (an Athenian) a man of Athens, a city the greatest (PAp.29%), 
oikia 7 vuerepa of xpyjade (your house) the house of you, who use, etc. (XC.5.2)°). 

e. A word denoting place may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun 
of reference, belonging to the inhabitants of that place: &pixovto eis Koruwpa, 
Swwréwy amotkovs they came to Cotyora, colonists of the Sinopeans (XA.5.5°), 
OcuicroKars pevyet és Képxipay, dy avtav evepyérns Themistocles fices to Cor- 
cyra, being a benefactor of them, i. e., of the Corcyreans (T.1.136). 


634, Duan anp PLrurayu.—lIn speaking of two, the dual and plural 
are freely united or interchanged with each other: 
mpooétpexov Sto vedvionw two young men ran up (XA.4.3”), éyeraodrny 


&udw BAehbayres eis GAAhAous they both burst into laughter on looking at one 
another (PEuthyd.273°). 


635, Piura ror SrncuraR.—The Greek often uses the plural of 
neuter pronouns where in English the singular is preferred: tavra 
(these things) this. 


a. In émpersonal constructions (602 d) a predicate-adjective may stand in 
the neuter plural: woAcunréa jy (things were to be done in war) zt was neces- 
sary to make war, wAoinérepa éyévero (things became more favorable to navi- 
gation) navigation became more advanced (7.1.8), advvata jv Tovs Aoxpovs 
GuvverOau it was impossible to keep off the Locrians (T.4.1). 


636, The plural of abstract substantives expresses repeated instances of 
the quality: é€uol af oad edruxiat ove dpéoxovar to me thy (often repeated) good 
fortune is not pleasing (Hd.3.40). 
_ a. Hm. often uses the plural of abstract words to express the various ways 
in which a quality is manifested: immootvas edldatay they taught him (the arts 
of) horsemanship (¥ 307). 

_ b. Even in concrete words, the poets sometimes use the plural for the 
Singular, to give the expression a more general turn (generalizing plural): 


 XGAG ToKedow cikdtws Oiuovmévas forgive a parent justly indignant, as all such 


have a claim to indulgence (EHec.408). 


» 


a 


ry. 


212 COMPARATIVE DEGREE. [63” 


637, A speaker sometimes uses the first person plural of himself 
(we for J) as a more modest form of expression: jpeis Sewvot ta Tovadra 
huey I was (we were) skilled in such practices (XM.1.2*°). 

a. This occurs frequently in poetry, sometimes with abrupt change of 
number: /Asov papripdueda, Spac0° & Spay ov BovdAoucu I call the sun to witness, 
doing what [would fain not do (KHF.858), 

b. In this construction an adjective when plural is masculine, even though 
a woman is speaking (cf. 639): mecotpc?’, et xp}, warp Tiuwpotmevor J (Electra) 
will fall, if need be, in avenging my father (SE1399). 


638, Srncutar ror Piurat.—In dramatic poetry, a chorus is commonly 
treated as an individual, the Coryphaeus being regarded as speaking and act- 
ing for the whole body; so that the singular is often used in reference to it. 


639, MAscuLINE FoR PERSON IN GENERAL.—The masculine is used 
in speaking of persons, if sex is not thought of, or if both sexes are 
meant: 

Tay evTUXOUYTwY TavTES ei cvyyeveis all (persons) are kinsfolk of the pros- 
perous (MMon.510), érétepos dv 7 BeATiwv, ei? 6 avhp, el@ 7H yuvh, ooTos Kad 
mAEtov pepeTar TOU ayalod whichever is the better, whether the man or the woman, 
he receives also more of the good (X0.7?"). 


ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 


640, For agreement of the attributive adjective see 620; of the predicate- 
adjective see 614. For the use of the adjective as substantive, see 621: as 
adverb, see 719 b. For neuter adjective used as cognate-accusative, see 716 b. 


641, Adverbs are used to qualify verbs, adjectives, or other 
adverbs: et zovets thow dost well, roAd KadAductos much the hand- 
somest, par dopevos right gladly. 

a. In the attributive position (666 a) an adverb may serve as an adjec- 
tive; see 600. 


Degrees of Comparison. 


642, The positive is sometimes used with an idea of disproportion, which 
in English might be expressed by too. This is most frequent before an in- 


finitive with ds or dare: Td vdwp Yoxpdy doTe Aovoacbai eotiw the water is 
(too) cold for bathing (XM.3.18°). 


648, ComparatTivE.—The comparative degree may be fol- 
lowed by 7 than, or by the genitive: peLuv } eyo or peilov 
énov taller than J. 

a. When # is used, the objects compared are usually in the same case: 


xXphuara wep) wAclovos moretcOcu 2) pidous to consider money of more value than 
friends (PCr.44°); and this is always so when they are connected with the 


648] COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 213 


same verb. The word after # may, however, be the subject of a new verb, 
expressed or understood: avdpbs duvatwrépov } eyw vids son of a man more 
powerful than I am (X€.5.2"°); yet even this is sometimes attracted into 
the case of the preceding word: é« Sevotépwy 7) Tadvde eowOnoay they have 
been rescued from greater perils than these (V.7.77). 


b. The genitive is freely used in cases where #, if used, would be followed 
by a nominative or accusative: vedrepos cov ciws (= 7 ov) Lam younger than 
you; much less freely, where #4 would be followed by some other case, or by 
a preposition: @eor: F jyiv padrdov érépwv (= 2 érépors) it is permitted to us 
rather than to others (T.1.85), BAéwew eis Thy eumerplav padrAov Tis dpeTis (= }} 
eis THY apeTHy) to look at skill more than at courage (Arist.Pol.5.9), 

ec. For shortness’ sake, the possessor, instead of the object possessed, is 
sometimes put in the genitive after a comparative: ei & jets immxdy nrycal- 
pela wh xEtpoy Tovtwy if we should raise a cavalry-force not worse than theirs 
(XC.4.3"), mapolknots émixivdvvoTepa ETepway a proximity more dangerous than 
that of other men (T.4.92). 


644, The genitive of a reflexive pronoun is used after comparatives with 
a peculiar force when something is compared with itself wnder other circum- 
stances. The subject is generally strengthened by aités. Thus dvvararepar 
avrol éavtav eytiyvovto they grew more powerful than before (1.3.11), abros 
EwuToU peet TOAAG brodeéorepos it (the Nile in winter) runs with a much less 
stream than at other tumes (Hd.2.25). 

a. The same use occurs after superlatives: & abrds aitod tuyxdver BéA- 
tiotos wy where he is (best of himself) at his best (EFr.183), 7H edputarn earl 
ait EwuTis where it (the Caspian) zs at its widest (Hd.1.2038). 


645, When the comparison is between two adjectives (or adverbs) 
7 is always used, and doth are put in the comparative : orparnyot 
mrcloves 7) Bedttoves generals more numerous than good (ArAch.1078), 


gvyTopatepoy i) capéatepoy SiatexOnvae to discourse more briefly than 
clearly (1.6**). 


646, The comparative has a peculiar use before 4 xard (quam pro) 
with the accusative: vopobérns Bedtioy 7 Kar avOpwroy a lawgiver better 
(than according to man) than consists with man’s nature (XM.4.4"*), 


pei(o 7 Kata Oaxpva memovOdres having suffered misfortunes too great 
Jor tears (T.7.75). : 


A a 


a. For 7) éore etc., with infinitive after a comparative, see 954. 


647, # is sometimes omitted when the neuter rAdov (wiciv) more or 2Aar- 
tov (ueiov) less is followed by a numeral: dmoxretvove: tay avdpav ov petov 
mevtakoctous they kill not less than 500 of the men (XA.6.4%), In this con- 
struction mAéoy, €AarToy, etc., remain unchanged for case and number: “AaAus 
ov petoy duvotv oradiow the Halys a river of not less than two stadia (XA.5.6°) ; 
so sometimes even when # is retained: év mAéov (= mAelooiv) 7 didkootos 
éreot in more than 200 years (D.24"*!), 


648, Instead of the genitive or the particle #, a preposition is some- 
times used with the comparative: 


kareipydoato aiperétepoy elvar toy Kaddy Odvatov avtl Tov aicxpod Biou 
ke made a noble death more desirable than (lit. instead of) a shameful life 


ie 
ra 
Reig... y 


214 SUPERLATIVE DEGREE, | [e190 


(XRI1.9!), uh watdas wep) wrelovos rood mpd Tod Sixatov do not consider children 
of more account than (lit. before) justice (PCr.54°), xemdv pelCwv mapa Thy 
Kabeornkuiay &pav a cold more severe than (lit. in comparison with) the actual 
time of year (1.4.6). 


649. The comparative may be used alone, the second part of the 
comparison being implied: x 

oi copmétepat the wiser (those wiser than the rest), &uewdv éors bard Oclov Kad 
gpoviuov &pxecOa it is better to be governed by a divine and intelligent being 
(PRp.5904). Note also vewrepoy something new (more recent than we know 
already); often in a bad sense, a calamity. 


a. The comparative alone often denotes simply an ezcess (more than 
is usual or proper), and so may be rendered by too or very: meio 
AéXexrat too much has been told (KAlc.706). So 6acaoy too soon, paddov 
too much, ete. 


b. But often it gives the force of rather, somewhat: yedoudrepov rather 
Sunny (PAp.30°), irouapydrepos a litile out of his head (Hd.6.75). 


650, SurERLATIVE.—The superlative represents a quality as be- 
longing to some individual of a class in a higher degree than to the 
rest. The class may be designated by a genitive partitive (729 e): 
6 copetaros Tay ‘“EdAnvey the wisest of the Greeks, 


a. But the highest degree among two is expressed by the com- 
parative: so mpdrepos and mparos, vatepos and veraros, éxdrepos and 
exaoros, are carefully distinguished: mérepos AéEe mporepos which (of 
the two) is to speak jirst (ArNub.940). 


b. The superlative may express simply a very high degree of the quality: 
avinp copaétatos a very wise man. In this sense it never has the article. 


651. Strengthened Forms.—The superlative is strengthened by a 
prefixed ws or dri, less often » (in poetry also écoy and draws): dydpes 
OTe TAEiaTOL (Guam plurimt) as many men as possible. 


So &s éAaxylorwy Setacbat to have the very smallest wants, 671 wdrAwrra as much 
as possible, j paora in the easiest manner. Sometimes os and 6tx are used 
together: éué ws bri BéATicToy yevécbu that I should become as good as may 
be (PSym.218¢), The adjective pronoun ojos has a similar use: 6p@ Ta mpay- 
para ovx ola BéAtiota bvta I see that our affairs are not in the very best 
condition (Lys.137°). 


a. Sometimes fuller forms of expression are used: thus with &s and other 
relatives (but not with 871) the verb of possibility may be expressed: 8:nyf- 
coun ws dy Sivwma did Bpayutdrwy I will state in the briefest terms Iam able 
(1.21°), ras Képais cite % avvordy petpiwrdre tpépovor they feed their girls 
with an amount of bread as moderate as possible (XRI1.15), Hye crpariay bony 
wArelaTny edvvato he brought as large an army as he could (T.7.21). 


652, a. év rots is sometimes prefixed to the superlative to strengthen it: 
év Tots mp@ror Se "A@nvaicr roy oldnpoyv narébevto the Athenians were the first to 
cease carrying weapons (T.1.6). It is used indifferently before all genders and 
numbers :. €v Tots mpwtos, €v Tots WAELOT AL. 


654] ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 215 


b. The superlative may receive emphasis from the numeral eis: mAciora 
eis avinp Suvducvos wpedcty being able to render (most aid as one man) aid 
beyond any other one man (T.8.68). 


c. Sometimes pddAiora, or mAciorov, uéyioroy is added to the superlative: 
of wddcota dvontétata the very stupidest (PTim.92%). So maAdov is sometimes 
found with the comparative: aicxuvtnpotépw padrdAov tov Séovtos bashful 

more than they ought to be (PGo.487*). 


For comparison by means of waAAov and pdAota sce 256, 


THE ARTICLE. 
‘O in Poetry. 


653. The word 6, 4, ré was at first a demonstrative pronoun, which after- 
wards, by gradual weakening of its force, became an article. In Homer, 
it is wswally a demonstrative: eios 6 7TH moreule while he fought with him 
(0 539). Still in many places it approaches nearly to its later use as an article: 


of &Adax the others, ra eoodpueva the things about to be, ro mpty formerly. 


a. The lyric poets conform nearly to the epic usage; so too the Attic 
drama in its lyric parts. Even in the tragic dialogue, the article is more 
Sparingly used than in Attic prose. 

For 6, 7, 76 as a relative pronoun, in Homer, Herodotus, and Attic tragedy, 
see 275 D. 


‘OC as a Demonstrative. 


654, Even in prose, the word sometimes retains its primitive power 
asademonstrative. Thus before péy and dé; and usually in contrasted 
expression, 0 pév... 0 d¢ this... that, the one... the other: 


ot wev emopevoyto, ot 8 etmovro these (the Greeks) marched on, and those (the 
Persians) followed (XA.3.4'°), 


a. Often no particular person is meant: one... another, some... some ; 
in this use rls may be added: gAeyov tod Kipov, 6 pév Tis Thy copiay, d Se Thy 
Kapteptay, 6 St Thy mpadryta, 6 5é Tis Kal Td KaAAOS they were speaking, one of 
Cyrus's wisdom, another of his fortitude, another of his mildness, yet another 
of his beauty (XC.3.14"), 

b. As adverbs, 7d mév... 7d 5, TX ev... Ta SE (also TOTO ev... TOUTO 
5¢), mean on the one hand... on the other, partly ... partly. 


ce. After a preposition, the order is usually changed: év meéy Tois, eis 5€ Ta. 

d. In late writers (even in Demosthenes), the relative is sometimes so 
used, but only in oblique cases: wéAets, ds pev avaipav, eis as 5é Tods Huyddas 
xaraywv destroying some cities, into others bringing back their exiles (D.18"). 

e. Very often 6 S¢ (without preceding 6 pév) means but he ; in the 
nominative this almost always refers to a different subject from that 
of the preceding sentence: “Ivdpws ’A@nvaious émnydayeto: ot & AAGov 
Inaros called in the Athenians ; and they came (T.1.104). 


216 ARTICLE. [655 


655, In a few other phrases 8 is demonstrative: . 


a. In nad rév, xa rhv, before an infinitive: kal roy dmoxptvacOa Aéyerat 
and it is said that he answered (XC.4.2!%), In the nom., we have kal Gs, xa 4, 
kat of (275 b): Kal of ipdrwy and they asked (XC.4.2'%). So 4 & bs, 4 ® H (485). 


b. In rov nad rév, 7d nal 76, TA Kal TA, TA 7} TA: CSEr yap TO Kal Td TOLHCoAL, 
kal 7d py troijoau for this and that we ought to have done, and this not to have 
done (D.9°°), The nom. ds xa 8s occurs in Hd. 


e 


c. Rarely before a relative: dpéyera Tod & éotwy ivov he aims at that which 
ts equal (PPhaed.75»). 

d. In mpd tod (also written mporod) before this (time). Also in a few other 
cases of very rare occurrence. For év rots with the superlative, see 652 a, 


‘O as an Article. 


656. Used as an article, 6 is either restrictive or generic. 


A. Restrictive Articte.—The restrictive article marks a 
particular object (or objects) as distinguished from others of 
the same class: thus 6 avOpwros the man (distinguished from 
other men). 


So of dyaol wvdpes, the (particular) good men, distinguished from other 
good men, # dixatoctvn Kipou the justice of Cyrus, distinguished from justice 
in other men. 


The following are special uses of the restrictive article. 


657. The article may distinguish an object: 


a. As well known: of Tpdes Ta Séxa ern dvretxov the Trojans held out during 
the ten years, the well known duration of the siege (T.1.11). 


b. As the usual or proper thing under the circumstances: yévorrd pot Tas 
xXapitas amrodotvar marpi be it mine to return the (proper) thanks to a father 
(Chaer.Fr.34). 


c. As a specimen of its class, selected at pleasure. In this use, the article 
may often be rendered by a or each: wre tpla nusdapeud Tov unvos TO oTpa- 
Tiétn he gave three half-darics a month to each soldier, lit. the month to the 
soldier (XA.1.37!). This use approaches very closely to the generic article. 


658. The article regularly takes the place of an unemphatic posses- 
sive pronoun: 


Kipos kararndnods amd Tov &pyaros Toy Odpana éevédd Cyrus leaped down from 
his chariot, and put on his breastplate (XA.1.8°). 


659. B. Generic Articte.—The generic article. marks a 
whole class of objects as distinguished from other classes : 
thus 6 av@pwiros man as such, distinguished from other beings, 
oi yepovtes the old. It must often be left untranslated in Eng- 
lish. 


So of ayabot &vdpes good men as a class, distinguished from bad men, 4 
Sixaoctyyn justice, n pntopich rhetoric. 


664] | ARTICLE OMITTED. 217 


a, So when a single object forms a class by itself: 4 yj the earth, 5 haros 
the sun, 6 Bopéas the north wind, etc. These, however, often omit the article, 
like proper names, 


660. ArticLE OmrrreD.—The article is often omitted where it 
could have been used with propriety. So oftenest the generic article, 
especially with abstract nouns: Pd8os pynuny exmrAnooe fear drives out 
recollection (‘T.2.87). 


a. Often, too, in copulative expressions, which gain thus in emphasis: as 
yuvaines Kal matdes women and children, otre marpds ovre uyntpos peidera he 
spares neither father nor mother (PPhil.15°), more forcible than his father, his 
mother. 


b. For the divinity in general eds is used, but 6 eds the (particular) god. 


c. BaoiAevs, used almost as a proper name for the king of Persia, may omit 
the article, so mputdveis the prytanes (officers in Athens), 


661, The article is omitted in many common designations of place and 
time, made by such words as &orv, méAus, city, &xpdmoAts citadel, eyopa markct- 
place, tetxos wall, orpardmedov camp, a&ypds country, yj land, @ddAacoa sea,— 
Seta, apiotepa, right, left hand, Sekidv, eddvupov (Képas), right, left wing, uécov 
cenler—nyepa day, vt night, Ews morn, bpbpos day-break, dein afternoon, érmépa. 
evening, éap spring, and the like. 

Thus eis aoru to town, kara yiv by land, él dédpu to the (spear-side) right, 
wap aomida to. the (shield-side) left, evdvupoy efxov they held the left wing, Gua 
nuepa at day-break, vunréds by night, id’ €w just before day-light.—These should 
perhaps be regarded as relics of earlier usage, which remained unaffected by 
the developed use of the article. 


662. When the first of two or more substantives connected by and has 
the article, it may be understood with the others: 6 wéAeuos Tay TleAorovynoiwy 
kal ’A@nvalwv the war of the Peloponnesians and Athenians (7.1.1), rods ® 
&ypovs Tovs EavTod Ka) oiklas his own lands and houses (T.2.13). 


663. ArricLE with Proper Names.— Names of persons and 
places, being individual in their nature, are usually without the arti- 
cle: EvBo.a dwéotn Huboea revolted (T.1.114). Yet they often take it, 
to mark them as before mentioned or well known: 


TOUS OTPATLOTas avTaY mapa& KAéapyov amedOdvras cla Kdpos Toy KAéapxov 
exe their soldiers, who had gone to Clearchus, Cyrus allowed (the said) Cle- 
archus to retain (XA.1.4"); 6 TlAdrwy (the celebrated) Plato, in plural with 
generic article of MAdtwyves the Plato’s, philosophers like Plato. 


a. Plural proper names of nations or families generally have the article: of 
Kopiv6ior the Corinthians ; but sometimes omit it: dmocgtdvtes Mndouvs having 
withstood the Medes (T.1.144). 


664, A numeran may have the article: 


a. When it is distinguished as a part from the whole number (expressed 
or understood) to which it belongs: amfoay Tav Adxwy, SHdexa tvTwy, of TpEis 
of the companies, being twelve in number, there were absent (the part) three 
(XH.7.51°), Ta dbo wépn two thirds, i. e. two parts out of three (7.2.47). 


218 ARTICLE WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. [665 : 


b. When it is merely a number as such, without reference to any thing num- 
bered: mi épets Ort Ta SHdexd eore Sts EE; will you say that (the) twelve is twice 
six ? (PRp.337°), 

c. When it is an approximate round number: Eueway juépds aul ras 
tpiaxovta they staid about thirty days (XA.4.87”), 


665, Note the phrases of wAetaro: the most numerous part, the largest num- 
ber, oi wAcioves (the more numerous part) the majority, and with much the 
same meaning of woAAol (the numerous part) the larger number, often used for 
the democratic mass; cf. of dAtyot the oligarchs. Also 7b odd the great part. 


666, ArticLe witn ATTRIBUTIVES.— When the article and 
an attributive belong together to a substantive, the article is 
always placed before the attributive. 


a. This rule applies to adjectives, participles, adverbs, and (usually) 
prepositions with their cases, when used as attributives. Such words, 
when following the article, are said to have the Attributiwe Position. 


b. The attributive genitive may or may not follow this rule: thus 7 Tod 
marpos oikiaé and 7 oikia 7 Tov matpds the father’s house, yet often 7 oixla Tob 
wat pos. 


ce. In general, any word or group of words standing between the article and 
its substantive, has the force of an attributive (600). Except, however, the 
particles pév, dé, yé, Té, yep, 54, odv, and in Herodotus, tls: rap Tis Meprewy 
one of the Persians (Hd.1.85). 


667. Usually, as in English, the article and attribute precede 
the substantive : 6 dyafos dvjp the good man. 


So 7 mporépa dAuyapyxta the earlier oligarchy (followed by another oligarchy), 
i mwpdrepoy ddvyapxia the earlier oligarchy (followed by a different form of 
government), 7 Kal’ nucpay tpoph the daily food. 

a. When an attributive participle has other words depending on it, either 
these words or the participle may follow the substantive: ai imdb tovrov 
Bracdnulo eipnucva the slanders uttered by this man (D.18"*), 6 KareiAnoas 
kiydovos Thy méAw the danger which has overtaken the state (D.18°*). 


b. If the attributive participle has a predicate-word connected with it, this 


is commonly put before it: 7d KordAqov dvoua¢duevoy dpos the mountain called 
Cotylacum (Ae.3*), 


668. Less often, the article and attribute follow the sub- 
stantive, which then takes another article before it: 6 dv7p o 
ayads. | 

of Xio: +d Tetxos mepteiAoy To Kawwdy the Chians threw down their wall, the 
new one (1.4.51), év 7H dvaBdoes TH meTa Kupov in the expedition with Cyrus 
(XA. 1°). 

a. But the substantive takes no article before it, when it would have 
none if the attributive were dropped: rf diaddper avOpwros axparhs Onptov Tov 


duadectdtov; how does an intemperate man differ from a wild beast of the most 
brutish sort ? (XM.4,51"). 


— 
- , 
a ‘ 


ae 


FY 
7 


673] ARTICLE WITH ADJECTIVES. 219 


669. ArticLE witH PrepicaTe-Nouns. — The predicate-noun, in 
general, is without the article : dyOpomos ei thou art aman. Hence 


we may distinguish subject and predicate in sentences such as mpoddrns 


jv 6 otparnyos the general was a traitor. 

a. But if the predicate-noun is definite, meaning the individual or the class, 
it has the article: Tov Adéimmov dvaxudovvtes thy mpoddérny calling Dexippus 
the (notorious) traitor (XA.6.6"), of TiWguevor Tobs vduous of aodeveis byIpwrol 
eiot Kad of mwoAAot the enactors of the laws are the weak menand the multitude 
(PGo.483°). 


670, PrepicaTE Positron or ApsEctTIvEs.—A predicate-adjective 
can never stand between an article and its substantive, but must pre- 
cede or follow both of them : dyads 6 aynp or 6 avinp ayabds the man is 
good. This is called the predicate position (cf. 666 a). 

a. So in all expressions in which the adjective has predicate force, that is, 
implies an assertion (594 rem.): WiAhy éxwy tiv neparny having his head bare 
(XA.1.8°), iSpotvr: 7G trmm with his horse sweating (XA.1.81), did pidrlas Tijs 
xapas amdte: he will conduct us back (through the country being friendly) 
through the country which will then be friendly (XA.1.3'*), For other examples 
see 618. 


671, Articte wita ADJECTIVES oF PLAcE.—The adjectives pécos, 
axpos, €xxaros, used in the predicate position, refer to a part of the 
subject : 

neon ) xaépa or H Xwpa uéon the middle of the country, but 7 péon xdpa. the 
middle country (between other countries); €cxarov Tb dpos or Td bpos EcxaTov 
the end of the mountain, but 7d éoxaroy dpos the last mountain (of several 
mountains); apa 7 xelp or 7 xelp axpa the point of the hand.—In like manner, 
uous 6 Bios or 6 Bios jusovs half of the life. 


672. ARTICLE WITH mas AND 8A0s.—The adjective was (strengthened é&ras, 
ovuras) all, has usually the predicate position; but it takes the attributive 
position when it means the sum total, the collective body: maytes oi wodtTat all 
the citizens, individually, but of mavres moAtrau the whole body of citizens. 


a. With numerals of mdavres is used, meaning in all: d:éBynoay és Thy voor 
éfaxdotor waddtoTa of mavres there crossed over to the island about six hundred in 
all (T.3.85). 


b. Without the article, rdvres modtram all citizens, maon mpoboula with all 
zeal. But was in the singular without the article often means every: was avip 
every man. 


¢e. Similarly, dAos whole: An 4 wéAts or 7H wéALs GAN the city as a whole, h 
8An worus the whole city ; without article, 6An méAis a whole city. 


673. ARTICLE WITH Pronouns. — Substantives with 06x, 
ovros, éxeitvos, require the article in prose, and the pronoun 
takes the predicate position (670): dd« 6 dvyp this man, ta 
mpaypata tara these affairs. 

a. The same is true of Gudw, dupdrepos both, éxdrepos each (of two), éxac- 


_ Tos cach (of several): éxdorn 4% apxn each magistracy. But with €kacros the 
_ article may be omitted: ka® Exdorny juéepay every day. 


220 ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS. [674 


b. Genitives of personal pronouns (ov, a’rov etc.), connected with the 
article and substantive, take the predicate position; genitives of reflexive pro- 
nouns (€uavrov etc.) the attributive position, See 689, 690, and 692, 3. 

c. Yet if the article is followed by an attributive, most of the above pro- 
nouns may stand between the attributive and substantive: Cnt éov THY May 
exelyny mwoAirelay we must seek ae that one polity (PPol.297°), 4 mdAq jou 
pvots our old nature (PSym.189*) 


674, With 8c, odros, and éxetvos, substantives omit the article in certain 
cases; thus often proper names: KadAlorparos éxetvos that well-known Callis- 
tratus (D. 187!*); and when the pronoun means ‘here,’ ‘there,’ pointing out an 
object in Sight (see 695 a). And always, when the substantive is a predicate : 
Kiynois altn peylorn 8) Tots “EAAnow éyévero this was the greatest uprising 
which ever took place among the Greeks (T.1.1). In poetry, also, the article is 
often lacking: ulacua TovTo this stain (SAnt.1042). 


For the article with aids, see 679, 680. 


675. ‘The PossESssIVE pronouns take the article, only when 
a particular object is referred to: éuds didros a friend of mine, 
6 ends pidos my friend (the particular one). 


676, An INTERROGATIVE pronoun may take the article, when it relates to 
an object before mentioned: maoxet d¢ Oavpaordy: Td Ti; A. A queer thing 
is happening to him. B. (The what) What is at ? (ArPax 696).—So even a 
personal pronoun: Sevpo 5) eb0) judy: mapa Tivas Tobs vuas; A. Come hither 
straight to us. B. (To the you being whom) Who are you, that I must come 
to? (PLys.2038>). 


PRONOUNS. 


677. The Prrsonat Pronouns, when they stand in the 
nominative, are emphatic: cal od ope aitov thou also wilt see 
him. When there would be no emphasis on them, they are 
omitted (602 a). 

a. The pronoun oi, oi, etc., of the third person, is in Attic always 
reflexive (685); instead of it, the oblique cases of avrds are used as a 
personal pronoun (682). 


INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 


678, The intensive pronoun airds has three meanings, (1) same, 
(2) self, (3) him, her, tt. 


679, With preceding article (attributive position, 666 a) 


autos means the same, Lat. idem: 6 aitds avyp the same man. 


a. In Homer, aités without the article may mean the same: jpxe 5& TE 
avTiy dddv jvmep of &AA and he led him the same way that the others had gone 
(6 107). 


683] INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 221 


680, Ards is emphatic (himself, myself, etc., Lat. tpse) : 

1. In the predicate position (670) with a substantive : avros 
® avyp OY 6 avyp aitds the man himself. 

a. So, too, when the substantive has no article: a’rds Mévwy Meno himself. 


2. When standing alone in the nominative: airot ryv yhv 
exxov they seized the land themselves ('T.1.114). 


- 8. Less often when standing alone in an oblique case : 

Bpacldas Ti Seooudray yh Kal adtots (sc. Tots Oecoadois) plaos jv Brasidas 
was a friend to the country of the Thessalians and to (the people) themselves 
(7.4.78), ef oidv Té oti GucdR avrody bya &AAous motety emmedreis if it is possible 
for one who is careless himself to make others careful (XO.12"). 


681. The emphatic aités has various shades of meaning: émorhun ath 
knowledge in itself (in its own nature); 7 yewpyla woAAd Kad abTh SiddoKer 
agriculture itself also (as well as other pursuits) affords much instruction 
(X0.19!°), jyotuat thy juetépiy wédw avtiy woAd Kpetoow civa I believe our 
city by itseif (alone) to be much superior in strength (T.6.37), hte: yap abta for 
this will come to light of itself = of its own accord (SOt.341). For abrots rots 
SmAos and Jike expressions, see 774 a. 


a. Plato uses the neuter aird, even with masculines or feminines, to denote 
the abstract idea of a thing: abrd Sixaoctyn justice in the abstract (PRp.363*). 
b. Adrés is used, by a peculiar idiom, with ordinal numerals: éorparnyet 
Nixids tpitos avrds Nicias was general (himself third) with two associates (T.4.42). 


c. Adtés is said of the master by a slave or a pupil: adtds &pn the master 
(Pythagoras) said it, dvovryérw tis ddpar’+ avtds épxeta open the house some- 
body ; master is coming (ArFrag.ii.1056). 


682. Usually the oblique cases, airoi, aire, airév, etc., stand- 
ing alone, serve merely as personal pronouns: him, her, it: 
eyo airov eidov TL saw him. 

Kupy waphoay ai éx TeAomovyhoov vies, Kal én’ abrats TliOaydpas the ships 
Jrom Peloponnesus joined Cyrus, and Pythagoras in command of them (XA.1.4”). 


a. In this sense they cannot stand at the beginning of a sentence, 
nor in an emphatic position. ) 


REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 


683. The reflexive pronouns éuavrot, ceavtod, éavrod, et, 
usually refer to the subject of the sentence: yv@G. ceavrov 
know thyself. 


a. In a dependent clause, they often refer to the subject, not of the 
dependent, but of the principal verb; they are then said to be indirect 
reflexwes : 

Te vavaryia, Soa mpds TH EavTay (yf) Fv, avelAovto they took up the wrecks, as 
many as were close to their own land (T.2.92), éBovAeTo &rav Td oTpdTevwa mpds 
eauToy exew Thy ywaouny he wished the whole army to be devoted to himself 


222 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 


(XA.2.5%°), rovrey jpte Kipos ovx Eavtg buoyAdrrwv bvtwy Cyrus became ruler 


of these, though they were not of the same tongue with him (XC.1.1°), nye? abras 
emi(nuious elvar ceavT@ you think that they are hurtful to you (XM.2.7°), 

b. Sometimes, however, the reflexive pronouns do not refer to the subject, 
but to a dependent word: ard cavtod *ya oe didatw from yourself I will in- 
struct you (ArNub.385), Tov kwoudpxny @xeTO Zevopay &ywy mpds Tovs EavTod 
oixéras Xenophon went conducting the governor of the village to his own people, 
the governor’s, not Xenophon’s (XA.4.5%°). The real office of the reflexives is 
to emphasize the identity of the person with some one named in the sentence. 


684, The personal pronouns are sometimes used instead of the re- 
flexive: Sox® pou advvaros etvas J (seem to myself to be) think that I 
am unable (PRp.368°). 

a. SO avrov, avr, etc., may take the place of €avrov, éavra, etc., 
as indirect reflexives, but not as direct: Aéyovow dri perapédoe avrois 
they said that they were sorry, liter., that it repented them (XA.5.6**), 


b. As subject of the infinitive, éud, oé, are commonly used, not the re- 


flexives : éyw oluat Kat éut Kad o€ Td GdiKxety TOD Gdixciobau KdKiov jyetcOau I dare 
say that both you and I think it worse to wrong than to be wronged (PGo.474). 


685, The personal pronouns of the third person (0%, of, etc.) are in Attic 
almost always used as indirect reflexives; but of and € are rare in Attic 
prose, and of is seldom emphatic: éyxAnuata trotodmevol, Orws opto ott peyloTH 
mpdpacis «in TOV ToAcuey bringing charges, that they might have the greatest 
possible color for making war (T.1.126), Aéyerar “AmdéAAwy éxdeipar Mapaovay 
épi(ovra of wept copids Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, when contending 
with him (Apollo) in skill (XA.1.28). 

a. In Homer, €e, of, etc., when used as personal pronouns (= Att. abroi, 
av’T@, etc.), are enclitic; when direct reflexives (= éavroi, etc), they are ortho- 
tone: aitéuatos dé of HAGE MeveaAdos but Menelaus of his own accord came to 
him (B 408); but rdv kpidy amd Eo wéewre Odpace the ram he sent from himself 
out at the door (1 461). As indirect reflexives, both forms are used. 

b. The same rule applies to Herodotus, but with him the singular forms 
ed, of are never direct reflexives nor orthotone. For odie: and cdi, see 261 Da. 


686. a. The reflexive pronoun of the third person is sometimes used for 
that of the first and second: de7 quads avepéoOou Eavrovs we must question our- 
selves (PPhaed.78"). In Hm. the possessive pronoun és (éés) has a similar 
use: oro. @ywye js (for euijs) yalns Sdvaua: yAuKepmoTepoy GAA idecOu I can 
look on nothing sweeter than mine own land (1 28). 

b. The reflexive pronoun, in the plural forms, is often used for the recip- 
rocal, dAAHAwY, GAATAats, etc.: huty avrots SiarcEducba we shall converse (with 
ourselves) with one another (D.48°). 


687. The forms épé adroy, adroy pe, o€é advtov, adrdv oe, and the like, 
are emphatic only, not reflexive: 

Tovs Taidas Tovs euovs KaTHoxXivE Kal eue abrdy UBpice he disgraced my chil- 
dren, and insulted me myself (Lys.14), abr tadTa col Stdwur to thee thyself do I 
give these things (KHec.1276). 

a. Instead of € avrdy, etc., in the third person, abtéy alone is used: Ate 
Weron abtoy Kad yuvaira he will take the man himself and his wife (XA.'7.8°). 





/ 


ee ‘ 
692] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 223 


b. In the plural, judy avtady, etc., may be either reflexive or emphatic; 
avTav nua, etc., emphatic only: but copay avr@y is only reflexive, and avTar 
opay is never used. 

e. But in Hm., to whom the compound reflexives are unknown (266 D), 
such forms as € avrdy, of a’T@, god avrg, etc., are sometimes reflexive and 
sometimes emphatic. 


688. The reflexive pronoun may be made to receive emphasis by 
prefixing to it avrds in agreement with the subject: 

avtol éd’ éavtay éxdpovy they marched by themselves (XA.2.4"°), rov copdy 
avToY aiT@ udAtora Set copdy civa the wise man must be wise especially for him- 
self (PHipp.Maj.283>). 

a. The two pronouns are separated by a preposition: dalverat Ta wey adTi 
&” aitis H Woxy emioxorety some things the soul appears to survey by itself 
(PTheaet.185¢); but not, usually, by the article: karadéAuke tiv a’Tds adtod 
duvaoretay he has overthrown his own dominion (Ae.3**?), 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 


For the article with a possessive pronoun, see 675. For the article used 
instead of an unemphatic possessive pronoun, see 658. 


689. Instead of the possessives éuds, ods, the genitives of the per- 
sonal pronouns pov, cov (enclitic, not €uov, gov) are often used; less 
often nov, viuadv, for nuérepos, twérepos. These genitives take the predi- 
cate position (670): eidov rod vidy wou or eiSov cov Tov viov I saw thy son. 


690. For the third person, his, her, its, their, the genitives avroi, 
avuTns, avt@y (682), in the predicate position, are always used in Attic 
(6s and odérepos being reflexive): mapa tiv Sd&av airod contrary to his 
expectation (XA.2.1**). 

a. In Ionic e6 and céwy can be used. And in Hm. §s (or éés), though 
usually reflexive, is sometimes a simple possessive: thy mote NnAevs yijpev 
edy dia KaAAOs whom of yore Neleus wedded by reason of her beauty (r 282). 


691. The possessive, being thus nearly equivalent to the genitive of a 
personal pronoun, may have an-adjective or appositive connected with it 
in the genitive: 4 uuerépa Tay copicray téxvn the art of you the sophists 
(PHipp.Maj.281°), rauda dvorhvov Kard the ills of me, unhappy one (SOc.344), 
Uuerepos ef pevy Oouds veueot(eTa adtay if your own mind ts offended (B 138). 


692. Possessive pronouns are reflexive (my own, his own, etc.) when 
the possessor is the same as the subject of the sentence. As such may 
be used: 


1. The simple possessive pronouns in reflexive sense. This is the 
regular use of ds and oérepos, but és is poetic only: 


TOV XpnuaTwv co. Tov euay Kixpnut I lend to thee of my own property (D.53!), 
Bowtol uépos Td opérepov mapetxovto the Bocotians furnished their contingent 
(7.2.12), patods duavpais xepaly dv raldwy having caressed his daughters with 
groping hands (SOc.1639). 


294 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [698 


2. The possessives strengthened by avrov, airs, avrav (691); but 
with the singular possessives eds, ods, ds, this is poetic only: 

moA€usol eopev Tots HmeTepois avTay pidas we are foes to our own friends 
=nostris ipsorum amicis (KA.7.1°°), r& odérep adtav ed TiWecOcu to get their 
own affairs into good condition (1.201%), 

3. The genitives of the reflexive pronouns, éuavrov, -7s, weavTov, -78, 
€avTov, -7s, €avToy, in the attributive position: peremépyaro tiv EavTov 
Ovyarépa he sent for his own daughter (XO0.1.3'). 

a. This is the only way of expressing Ais own in prose. Observe that the 
forms 7juey avToy, etc., are hardly ever so used. Thucydides has occasionally 
copay (in the predicate position) for éavray. 


b. The reflexive possessives may, like the reflexive pronouns (683 b), refer 
to some other word than the subject of the sentence. 


693, Summary of Possessive Forms (those in parentheses are poetic). 
I. Not reflexive. 


my éuds uov our NMEeTEpos Nea@v 

thy ods cou your UMeTEpos UMa@V 

his, her (6s Hm., rare) avrod, -fs their avTa@Y 

(ed Hm., rare) (apéwy Ionic) 

II. Reflexive. 

my own éuds (éuds ado, -js) EMQUTOD, -7S 

thy own ods (cbs abTov, -jjs) OEavToV, -7s 

his, her own (és (ds abou, -7s) €avTov, -~7s 

our own NET EOS NMETEPOS AUT OY 

your own UMETEDOS UMETEpos avTOY 

their own operepos OPeTEpos avTaY EauT@v 


odor, rare 


694, A possessive pronoun is sometimes equivalent to an objective geni- 
tive: edvoia H éuh their good-will to me (XC.3.1%8); so ony xapw (as a favor to 
thee) for thy sake (PSoph.2424), 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 


695. The ordinary demonstrative is otros this, that. “Ode 
this (here) is used of something near or present ; éxetvos that 
(yonder), of something remote. 


a. These pronouns, and especially 85e, sometimes mean here, there, lo, be- 
hold, calling attention to an object in sight: viv re d5¢ éatt and now here he 
is / (Hd.1.111), 6p@ Thvd ex Séuwy oreixovoay “loxdarny lo, I see Locaste coming 
from the house ! (SOt.631), obros dmiaGev mporepxetau there he comes behind us ! 
(PRp.327>), vijes exetvan émimdgovor yonder are ships sailing towards us (1.1.51). 
‘Those ships’ would be af vijes éxetvat; see 673, 674. 


696, In referring back, to an object already mentioned, odros is 
used; but dd, in referring forward, to an object yet to be mentioned: 
éreEay radra they said this (before stated), €deEav rade they spoke as fol- 


102] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 995 


lows. The same distinction exists between ro.odros such, rocovros 30 
much, many, tndxovros so old, large, and the corresponding forms in 
-de, Toldade, Toadade, THALKOG OE. 

a. Yet ovros—especially the neuter rodvro—sometimes refers forward to a 
word or sentence in apposition: as wi TovTO udvoy evvodyTa, TL mweloovra that 
they may not think of this alone, what they shall suffer (XA.3.1*'). More rarely, 
6de refers back to something before mentioned. 

b. ’Exetvos, like odros, refers back (rarely forward), but implies remoteness, 
either in space or in thought: Kipos kaOopg BactrAéa nal Td dud’ exeivoy oTipos 
Cyrus observes the king and the band around him, some way off, as leader of 
the opposite army (XA.1.9?°). 

ce. Noteworthy is the colloquial phrase tod7’ éxeivo, 768 éxetvo that’s it! 
there it is / (literally this is that already spoken of or understood). 


697. Oiros sometimes repeats the subject or object of a sentence with 
emphatic force: 6 Td omépua mapacxay, obTos TOV piyTwy aitios the man who 
Surnished the seed, he is responsible for what grew from it (D.181*), 


For kal tadta and that with omitted verb, see 612 a, 


698. OSros is sometimes used in addressing a person: odros, Tt motels ; 
you there, what are you doing? (ArRan.198). 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 


699. The ordinary relatives (és, dcos, oios, etc.) are often used where 
the antecedent is indefinite: meiOovra ods av (= ovotwas ay) iyOvrat 
BeAriotous civa: they obey (those, any) whom they think to be best. 

a. But the indefinite relatives (@or1s, éadco0s, dmotos, etc.) are not used 
where the antecedent is definite. Where the antecedent seems to be of this 
nature, an indefinite idea is really connected with it: éme@vunoe TloAuKpdrea 
amorecai, 8¢ byTiva Kax@s Hrovce he desired to destroy Polycrates, (as being a 
person) on whose account he had been ill spoken of (Hd.8.120). Yet in late 
writers, doris, etc., are sometimes used without any indefinite idea. 

For agreement of relative and antecedent, see 627. For peculiarities of 
relative sentences, see 993 ff. For indefinite relatives used as (dependent) in- 
terrogatives, see 700; also 1011 and a. For the relative in exclamations, see 
1001 a. For és demonstrative, see 275 b and 655 a and b. 


100, InrERROGATIVES.—The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 
282-3) are used both in direct and in indirect questions. But in in- 
direct questions, the indefinite relatives are commonly used instead 
(see 1011 a): npwra 6 re BovAowro he asked what they wanted (XA.2.3*). 


For peculiarities of interrogative sentences, see 1010 ff. 


101, InpEeFrrntrE Pronouns.—The pronoun ris, rt, is used either 
substantively (Lat. guidam) or adjectively (Lat. aliquis), Being en- 
clitic, it can never stand at the beginning of a sentence. 


102. Tis may express indefiniteness of nature ; ‘a sort of’: 6 coduce 


TNs nup€éOn eumopds tis the sophist has been found to be a sort of trader 
(PSoph. 2314). 


~~ 


226 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. [703 


a. So with adjectives and numerals it implies hesitancy or reservation: 
ph BAGE Tis kal HALO.0s yévoucr lest I should come to be a sort of dull and simple 
fellow (XC.1.4"), so toatr’ arta things of some such kind (PSym.174%), uévyas 
tis of some magnitude (PGo.481>), & tut Bpaxet xpdvw in a pretty short time 
(PLg.698%), rpraxovrd twas dréxreway they killed some thirty (7.8.78), drAtyor 
Twés some few (XH.6.1°). 

b. So 7) with adverbs: ocxeddv Tt pretty nearly (T.3.68), ob wavy Tt doparés 
not altogether safe (XA.6.17°). 


703, Tas vis, €xaords tis, denote every one, each one, taken at pleasure. 
Tis in the singular has sometimes a general pluralising sense, like French on 


cf 


or German man: xp) dermvetv 6 Tt Tis Exer Whatever (every) one has, he must 
make a dinner of it (XA.2.2*). 

a. Tis sometimes means somebody (or something) of importance: nixers 
tis elvat thou didst vaunt thyself to be somebody (EEI.989), A€éyeww ru to say some- 
thing (to the point); so ovdey Aéyewv to say nothing (sensible). 


104, ”AdAos other, rest, is often put first, the particular thing to 
which it is in contrast being named afterwards: 

Td Te HAAG eTIunoe Kal piplovs ZOwKe Sapeixovs he gave me ten thousand 
darics, besides honoring me in other ways (XA.1.3°), 7 wév GAA OTpaTe jodbxa- 
(ev, Exaroyv 5¢ meATaotas mpomeutrer with the rest of the army he kept quiet, but 
sends forward a hundred peltasts (T.4.111). 


a. “AAAos &AAo and similar expressions are used like alius aliud in Latin. 
For an example, see 624 d. 


705, “AAdos and érepos have sometimes an appositive relation to their sub- 
stantives, in which they may be rendered besides: of woAtrau rat of &AAOL E€vot 
the citizens and (the others, foreigners) the foreigners beside (PGo.473°), yépav 
xwpet we® Ergpov veaviov an old man comes with (a second person, a young 
man) a young man beside (ArEccl.849). 


THE CASES. 


NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. 


706, The chief uses of the nominative are : 

a. As subject of a finite verb (601): Kidpos Bacwetar Cyrus 
ts king. 

b. As Predicate-Nominative, when a predicate-noun (614) 
belongs to the subject : éy® orparnyds cius Lam general. 


707. NoMINATIVE FoR VocATIvE.—The nominative is often used 
for the vocative in address, especially in connection with odros (698): 
6 AmoAAddwpos ovTos, od Tepmreveis ; You Apollodorus there, will you not 
stay ? (PSym.172*). 


J ete 


pam 
Puy oe 


vg’ 


712] ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT. 227 


a. A nominative with the article may be used as appositive to a vocative: 
& tvdpes of mapdyres you gentlemen who are present (PProt.337°). 

b. The nominative is used in exclamations about a person (not addressed 
to him): oxéraAuos rash man! (E 403), & pa@pos O foolish woman ! (EMed.61). 


708. Nominative InpEPENDENT.—The nominative is used for names and 
titles, which form no part of a sentence: Kipov ’AvdBaois Hxpedition of Cy- 
rus ; and sometimes even when they are part of a sentence: mpeoelAnge Tijy 
TOV Tovnpayv. Kowhy éemwvuplay, cixopayrns he obtained the common appellation 
of the vile, ‘sycophant’ (Ae.2%), rapnyyta 6 Kipos ctvOnua, Zevs Evuuaxos Ka 
nyenov Cyrus gave out, as pass-word, ‘ Zeus, our ally and leader’ (XC.3.3°°), 


709. The person (or thing) addressed is put in the vocative. 


a. In Attic prose, é is usually prefixed, but sometimes it is wanting: py 
BopuBetre, & &ydpes "APnvaio: make no noise, men of Athens (PAp.30°), axovets, 
Aicxivyn; hearest thou, Aeschines? (D.184). 


ACCUSATIVE. 


710, The accusative properly denotes the direct object of an action, and 
belongs with transitive verbs. But in some of its uses it has the office of an 
adverbial modifier. 


We distinguish: 

1. Accusative of the direct object. 

2. Cognate accusative. 

8. Accusative of specification and Adverbial accusative. 
4. Accusative of extent, and of the Object of motion. 
5. Accusative with adverbs of swearing. 


For the accusative as subject of the infinitive, see 939. 
For the accusative absolute, see 9738. 


711, The Direct Oxssect of a transitive verb is put in the 
accusative : tov avdpa op® TL see the man. 


712, Many Greek verbs are transitive and take a direct object, 
when the verbs commonly used to render them in English are intran- 
sitive and followed by a preposition. Note especially the following: 


ed (kak@s) moveivy Tiva to do good (ill) to one, eb (Kax@s) A€yeww Tivd to speak 
well (ill) of one, duvdyvar Tobs Oeods to swear by the gods, mévery tTivd to wait for 
one, pevyew twa to flee from one, AavOdvew tivd to escape the notice of one, 
gvdAdrrecbal tiva to guard against one (act. guddrtrew tiva to guard one), 
aideicbar, aicxivverOar toy warépa to feel shame before his father, Oappety twa 
to rely on one, Oappew ras puaxas to have no fear of the batiles, mrciy thy 
OdrAaccav to sail over the sea, ciyav, cwwmay ti to keep silence about something. 

a. Conversely, many Greek verbs are intransitive and followed by a geni- 


tive or dative, when the verbs commonly used for them in English are transi- 
tive; see 735-743 and 764, 2. 


298 COGNATE-ACCUSATIVE. [713 


b. In many cases, the Greek itself varies, using the same verb at 
different times as transitive and intransitive: 


aicddveoOat Tt or Tivos to perceive something, évOipciobal tives, te to consider 
something, évoxrcty tiva, tint to trouble one, péuperbal tiva, Twn to blame one, 
emiotpateve Tivd, Tut lo war against one (so, too, other compounds of ént), 
det pot twos I have need of something, poet. det (xph) wé tiwos. Especially in 
poetry, verbs usually intransitive sometimes take a direct object: jo@a or 
dace (Ketoba, wndav) témov twa to sit (lie, leap) in a place, xopevew Tov Bedy 
to celebrate the god by choral dance, ros evoeBets Ceol OvjaKkovTas ov xalpouss 
the gods rejoice not in the death of the pious (HHipp.1339). 


c. Many intransitive verbs become transitive from being compound- 
ed with a preposition: 

SiaBaive Thy motapudy to cross the river, éxBalvew thy nArkiay to pass out of 
the age, wapaBatvew Tovs vduous to transgress the laws, amwodedpaxdtes mat épas 
having run away from their fathers. 


713, In rare cases, an intransitive verb in connection with a verbal noun, 
forms a transitive phrase which takes an object-accusative: émornuoves hoav 
Ta mpoonKovTa they were acquainted with their duties (XC.3.3°), ort Ta pmeTewpe 
dpovricrhs he is a student of things above the earth (PAp.18>), cuvOhnas eEapvos 
yiyvera he denies the agreement (D.23'"), redvavar TG PdBq@ OnBatous to be 
mortally afraid of the Thebans (D.19°!), c& pvétuos (orl) 2s able to escape thee 
(SAnt.787), «i 5€ w @5 ael Adyous eEjpxes if you always thus begun your 
addresses to me (SHI.556), Seomdray yéos kardptw I will begin with lamentations 
jor my master (EAnd.1198). 


714, AccusaTIvE or Errrect.—Many transitive verbs have, 
as direct object, the thing effected or produced by their action: 
ypape éeriotoAnv he writes a letter. 


a. Compare in English break a hole, as-opposed to break the ice. So in 
Greek Sidpuxa Teuvew to cut a canal, dpria téuvew foedus ferire (hostiam feri- 
endo foedus efficere), but réuvew rhv yi to lay waste the land. 


b. Some verbs, not properly transitive, take an accusative of the effect, de- 
noting that which is made to exist or appear by their action: mpeoBevew 
eiphyny to negotiate a peace, i.e. form a peace by acting as embassador (1.4!"), 
Xopnyav mad Avovicia celebrating the Dionysia by furnishing a chorus of 
boys (D.21°*), 48€ tpomas Karapphyvier this (anarchy) causes routs by breaking 
ranks, liter. breaks routs (SAnt.675). 


715, CocnaTE-AccusaTIVE.—This repeats the meaning of 
the verb in the form of a noun: dpopov dpapety to run a race. 
It has commonly an attributive connected with it. 


The cognate-accusative is sometimes called the implied object, as being 
already contained in the verb. Here belong: 


a. ACCUSATIVE OF KINDRED ForMATION: Thy ad’rhy uaxnv udxerOa to fight the 
same battle (XAges.5°), thy moumhy wéumewv to conduct the procession (Lys.13*), 
SovAevey Sovrciay aicxpav to be subject to an infamous servitude (XM.1.5%), 
ds Kev dplarny BovrAhv Bovaetan whoever may give the best counsel (1 75), érépav 
vécov vooeiv to be sick with another disease (PAlc.ii.189°), éxpivero thy mept 





718] ACOUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. 229 


*Apwrod Kplow he was tried in the suit about Oropus (D.21), cvvépuye thy 
guy tavrny he shared in that banishment (PAp.21*). 


b. Accusative or Kinprep MEANING: (hoes Bloy Kpdtiotoy you will lead 
the best life (MMon.186), e&7jA0ov &AAGS efd5ous they went on other expeditions 
(XH.1.2!"), wacds vécouvs nduvovor they are sick with all diseases (PRp.408°), 
Tov tepoy KaAotuevoy méAcuoy eatparevoay they engaged in the so-called Sacred 
war (T.1.112), weyddrds ypadas SieKew to prosecute important suits (Ant.2a°). 

Remark.—The attributive is in general necessary with the cognate-accusa- 
tive, as otherwise its use would in most cases be mere tautology. But if the 
kindred noun has in itself a meaning more definite than the verb, it may be 
used without an attributive: thus puAakas pudAdrrew to stand sentry, pdpov 
dépe to pay tribute, apxhv apta to hold an office. 


716, Some times the place of the kindred noun is taken by a guali- 
Sying substantive, or neuter adjectwe. Hence two more forms of the 
cognate-accusative. 


a. QuALIFYING SusBstaNntTIve.—The kindred noun is replaced by another 
substantive» which defines more exactly the meaning of the verb. Thus (on 
the model of vikay vixnv) is said vikay payny to conquer in a battle, vinay 
*OAvumia to win a victory at the Olympian games, and even vikay Sikny to win 
a suit and vikay yvéunv to carry a resolution. Similarly 7rrac@a to be beaten. 
So also (like dywvriCecOa: &ywva), aywrifer@ar madny (arddiov) to contend in 
wrestling (a race). Also mip opOarpotor Sedopxds looking (a look of) fire with 
his eyes (r 446). In some of these cases, the substantive may be regarded as 
standing in apposition to the omitted kindred noun, 


RemMark.—Still freer is the poetic phrase Balvew mé8a step the foot (on the 
analogy of Baivew Bdaow step a footstep): éxBas TeOpinmay apudtwy 7déda having 
stepped from the four-horse chariot (KHeracl.802). So also wepay, éeraccew and 
other verbs. 

b. Neuter ApJrective.—The kindred noun is replaced by a neuter adjec- 
tive: ueya Yevdera: (= méeya Wevdos Wevderar) he utters a great falschood, mavra 
meicouca I shall obey in all things (render all acts of obedience), rait& ADrei- 
cba Kal TavTda xalpew Tots ToAAOLs to have the same pains and the same pleasures 
with the multitude (D.18?), cuixpdv tt dope LT am in some little perplexity 
(PTheaet.145%), ri xphoera adre ; what use will he make of him? (ArAch.935), 
gepvoyv Bréeras you look grave (WAlc.773). 


(17. The cognate-accusative is also used in connection with ad- 
Jjectives: xaxoi macav xaxiav bad with all badness (PRp.4904). 


118. Accusative or SpEciFication.—The accusative is 
connected with verbs, adjectives, and substantives, to specify 
the part, property, or sphere, to which they apply: dAyev 
Tous wddas to have pain in the feet, Micds 75 vevos a Mysian 
by birth. 

This accusative specifies: 


a. The part: 7a odpara ed exovtes being well in our bodies (XM.3.12"), 
Tuprss Ta 7 Sta Toy Te vow TAT Bupar’ ~ blind thou art in ears, and mind, 


and eyes (SOt.371). 


-_ 





“r= oe 
ae 
rs 


*s 


930 <ACCUSATIVE: ADVERBIAL AND OF EXTENT. [119 


b. The property (nature, form, size, name, number, etc.): eidos KéAAtoTos 
most beautiful in form (XC.1.2'), worauds edpos 500 TA€Opwy a river of twe 
plethra in breadth (XA.1.2"*), areipov rb wATOos infinite in its extent (PPar.143*), 
mpaos To HOos mild in disposition (PPhaedr.248°). 

e. The sphere: Tovxeivov pev edtuxets épos happy thou art, so far as in 
him lies, liter. as to his part (EHec.989), ob kwrvw Td Kar’ éué on my part I 
make no objection (XH.1.6°), Ta wept rods Oeods evoeBoduen in our relations te 
the gods we are devout (1.87). 


ReMARK.—The accusative of specification belongs exclusively to predicate 
words and modifiers. It can never be connected with the subject of a sen 
tence. 


719, ApverpiAL AccusATiIvE.—The accusative is used, in 
many words and phrases, with the force of an adverb: réAos 
dé eize but at last (as the end) he said. 


a. Note especially the following common phrases: révde (rodTov) rdv 
tpémov in this manner, rayra tTpdmov in every manner, dv Tpdmov in. which man- 


ner.—Tiv Taxlorny in the quickest way, thy edOciay (in the straight way) straight- . 


forward, ete.; cf. 622.—(riv) apxhy at all, always with a negative: dpxihy 5& 
Onpay ov mpéwer Taunxava it is not meet to chase wmpossibilities at all, i. e. not 
to make even a beginning of it (SAnt.92).—ydow for the sake of, with a geni- 
tive: Tod Adyou xdpi for the sake of the argument, éuhv xapw for my sake.— 
Stxny like (in the fashion of): wewAnpa@oOau Sixny dyyelou to be filled lke a pail 
(PPhaedr. 2354), 


b. Many neuter adjectives are used in this way: péya, peydda greatly, 


TOA, TOAAG much, Tb wWoAV, TH WoAAd for the most part, mpétepov before, Tb 


mpotepoy the former time, mporov at first, ro mperov the first time, Td dovmdv 
for the rest, for the future (but Tod Aouwod at some time in the future), ruxdv 
perhaps, obdév, undév not at all, rocovrov so much, bcov as far as, tt somewhat 
(éyyus tt pretty near). Cf. adverbs of the comparative and superlative de- 
grees (259). 

c. Especially important are ti why, Todro, tara therefore: rl dates; why 
art thou weeping ? (A 362), a’rda Tatra viv ijkw for this very reason am I now 


come (PProt.310°), ravr’ ap’ épuddrrov ah, that’s why you were so cautious! 
(ArEq.125). 


720, AccusaTIVE oF Extrrent.—The extent of time and 
space 1s put in the accusative. 


a. TIME: évrat0a Zuewev huépas mévre there he remained five days (XA.1.2"), 
af omovdal éviavtdy ~covTa the truce will be for a year (T.4.118), pevddmevos 
— oddels AavOdver moAby xpdvov no one who Lies escapes detection long (MMon.547). 

b. Space: .Kopos ekeAadver did THs Avdlas cTaQuovs Tpeis, mapacdyyas etkoot 
kat dto Cyrus advances through Lydia three days’ marches, twenty-two parasangs 
(XA.1.2°), Méyapa daréxer Supaxoveady ote wAody wordy ovte 6d6v Megara ts 
not far distant from Syracuse, either by sea or by land, liter. no long voyage 
or journey (T.6.49). 


721, The accusative singular is used with an ordinal numeral, to show 
the number of days (months, years) since a particular event, including the 
day (month, year) of the event itself: €Bddunv nuépay n Ouydrnp erereAeuThKel 


724] TWO ACCUSATIVES. 231 


his daughter had died the seventh day (i. e. six days) before (Ae.3™). The pro- 
noun ovrost is often added: e&fAouey Eros Tovtt tplrov és Mdvaxroy we went 
out two years ago (this, as third year) to Panactum (D.54*). 


722. Opsect or Morion.—The poets often use the accusative without a 
preposition, to denote the object towards which motion is directed: 70 kotAov 
“Aopyos Bas having gone to hollow Argos (SOc.378), Kal wev KdAéos odpavdy 
tker my fame reaches to heaven (t 20), wynoripas apikero she came to the 
suitors (a 332), v& T6d eAHAVOE way Kpatos this whole power has come to thee 
(SPhil.141). 

a. The accusative of a person is used after the conjunction @s in its mean- 
ing to: mopevera ws Bacirda he goes to the king (XA.1.2*). See 784 a on im- 
proper prepositions. 


123, ADVERBS OF SWEARING.—Ny and pa are followed by the 
accusative (perhaps on account of duvips understood): vy is always 
affirmative; pa, unless vai precedes it, is always negative: vj) Aia by 
Zeus, vai pa Aia yea, by Zeus, pa Aia or ov pa Aia no, by Zeus. 

a. Sometimes the name of the god is suppressed with humorous effect: 
pa tTov—ov ov ye not you, by — (PGo.466°). Rarely is wa omitted after a 
negative: ov, tév8 “OAuuroy no, by this Olympus (SAnt.758). 

b. The accusative is sometimes found in other exclamations: odros, 
@ oé To. you there, ho! you, I mean (ArAv.274). 


Two Accusatives with One Verb. 


724, DousLe OpsEect.—Many transitive verbs may have a 
double object, usually a person and a thing, both in the accusa- 


tive. Thus verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, hiding, de- 





priving, and others: Ktpov aireiy wAota to ask Cyrus for 
vessels. 


Such verbs are aira, epore ash, diddoxw teach, weiOw convince, ava- 
pywwnoka remind, apdrévvips, evdtw clothe, éxdvw strip, kpimra hide, 
apaipotpuat, atoorep@ deprive, avrA® despoil, mpadrrowa (also mpadrre or 
eiompdrTa) exact. : 

Thus od rodT’ épwrd oe that’s not what I ask you (ArNub.641), Hptaré ce 
diddoKkey Thy orparnylay he began to teach you military science (XM.8.1°), eBoy 
ovder’ ovdev I convinced no one of aught (AAg.1212), cunpaxiay avaulurjoKovres 
tous °A@nvaiouvs reminding the Athenians of the alliance (1.6.6), Toy wey EavTov 
Xitwva exetvoy judlese his own tunic he put on the other boy (X0.1.3""), éxddwv 
eue xpnornplay écOjjra stripping me of the oracular garment (AAg.1269), rhv 
Ouyarépa expurte Toy Odvatov tov avdpds he hid from his daughter her hus- 
band’s death (Lys.82"), abaipetoOat Tos “EAAnvas tiv yi to deprive the Greeks 
of their land (XA.1.3"), rovs vnoidras é&hKovta Tddayta ciaémparroy they exacted 
Jrom the islanders sixty talents (Ae.2"). 


a. The passive of these verbs retains the accusative of the thing: 
wovotkny madevbeis having been taught music (PMenex.236*), ray oyu 
apapeira he is deprived of his sight (XM.4.3"). 





232 TWO ACCUSATIVES. GENITIVE. [725 


725, OpsEcT AND CoGNnaTE-AccusATIVE.—Many transitive 
verbs may have, beside the object, a cognate-accusative : 

MéAntés pe eypaaro Thy ypapiy tavtny Meletus brought this impeachment 
against me (PAp.19°), &Spxwoav rovs orpatiétas tovs peyiotous opKous they 
made the soldiers swear the greatest oaths (T.8.75), éue 6 matip thy tay ralSev 
madelay erpedev my father reared me with the training of the boys (XC.8.3%), 
Hm. dy mepl wijpe pire: Zeds wavrolny pirdrynta for whom Zeus felt in his heart 

ll manner of love (o 245). 

a. Here are included verbs meaning to do anything to a person and 
say anything of a person: ravra rovtoy eroinaa this I did to him (Hd. 
1.115), rovs KopivOiovs modda Te Kai Kaka édeye he said many bad things 
of the Corinthians (Hd.8.61). 

b. Verbs of dividing may take this construction: Kipos 7d otparevpya 
Karévere Swdexa wepyn Cyrus divided his army into twelve divisions (XC.7.5}*), 

ce. Such verbs in the passive may retain the -cognate-accusative: 
kptOnvar audorépds tas kpicets to undergo both the trials (D.24"*), run- 
tecOa mevrnkovta mAnyas to be struck jifty blows (Ae.1**), od BrXawovrat 
d&va Adyou they will not suffer injuries worth mentioning (T.6.64). 


726, OBJECT AND PREDICATE-ACCUSATIVE.—A_ predicate- 
noun, when it belongs to the object of a transitive verb, is 
put in the accusative. This occurs especially with verbs which 
mean to make, show, choose, call, consider, and the like. 

mowdpal tia dtrov I make one my friend, aipeicbal twa otparnydv to choose 
one as general, mapéxew éavtoy evrer07 to show himself ready to obey (XC.2.1%), 
Karodot TavTynv Siduerpov they call this a diagonal (PMen.85>), cwripa Tov 
Gihizrov jyovvto they regarded Philip as their preserver (D.18*), €6wxa Swpeav 
7a AUTpa I gave him his ransom as a gift (D.19!"). 

a. The predicate-accusative is often distinguished from the object by the 
absence of the article (669): T& mwepitT& xphuara rpayyata exouor they have 
their superfluous wealth for a vexation (XC.8.27!). 

b. In the passive construction, both of these accusatives become 
nominatives (706 b): 6 morayds Kadeirar Mapovas the river is called 
Marsyas (XA.1.2°). Cf. 596. 


GENITIVE. 


727. The genitive in general denotes relations expressed in English 
by the prepositions ef and from. In the latter use, it corresponds to 
the Latin ablative. 

We distinguish: 

1. Genitive with substantives. 

(a) Attributive. (b) Predicate. 

2. Genitive with verbs. 

(a) As Subject. (b) As Object. (e) Of cause, crime, value. (d) Of sepa 
vation, distinction, source. (ce) With compound verbs, 


. 


729] ATTRIBUTIVE GENITIVE. 233 


3. Genitive with adjectives and adverbs. 


4. Genitive in looser relations. 
(a) Time. (b) Place. (ce) In exclamation. 


For the genitive absolute, see 970 ff; for the infinitive with rod 
expressing purpose, see 960. 


Genitive with Substantives. 


128, One substantive may have another depending on it in 
the genitive: d@fadpos Bactréws the king’s eye. 
a. This is the Attiributive Genitive: cf. 600. 


729, This genitive may be of several kinds; as: 

a. Genitive of Possession or belonging: oixia warpés a father’s house, 
Kopara THs Oaddoons waves of the sea, dpa apiotov breakfast-time. 

Remark.—It may express merely origin or connection: ‘Oufpov “IAuds 
Homer’s Iliad, ypaph krowijs an indictment for theft. 


b. Genitive Subjective, showing the subject of an action: 6 dofos 
toy Todeniwy the fear of the enemy (which they feel), 7 epodos rov 
orparevparos the approach of the army (XA.2.2**). 


c. Genitive Objective, showing the object of an action: 6 dd8os rav 
Tohewioy the fear of the enemy (which is felt toward them), 6 ddeOpos 
Tov cvotpatioray the destruction of their fellow-soldiers (XA.1.27°). 


ReMArK.—Other prepositions are often to be used in translating this geni- 
tive: OeGy edxai prayers to the gods (PPhaedr.244°), 4 trav Kpevoodvwy Sovarcta 
servitude to the stronger (T.1.8), 6 Oe@y médAepos the war with the gods (XA.2.5"), 
’AOnvatwy etvowa affection for the Athenians (1.7.57), éyxpdre:a 7Sovis modera- 
tion in pleasure (1.1?'), aradAayh Tov Blov departure from life (XC.5.118), xpdros 
Tis Oadacons power over the sea (1.8.76), weydrAwy adicnudtwy dpyh anger at 
great wrongs (Lys.12”°), ardBacts tis yns a descent upon the land (T.1.108), 

_ Bia Téy TwoAITGy (With violence toward) in spite of the citizens (XH.3.1"'). 

d. Genitive of Measure (extent, duration, value): morapds etpos 
TAEOpov a river of one plethrum in breath (XA.1.4*), pucOds retrdpav 
pnvav four months’ pay (XA.1.2"), xthiov dpaypav Sikn a suit for a 
thousand drachmae (D.55**). 


e. Genitive Partitive, denoting the whole, of which the other sub- 
stantive is a part: moddot ray AOnvaiov many of the Athenians, avip 
Tov Onuov a man of the people (XC.2.2°"), wécov nucpas the middle of 
the day (XA.1.8°). 


f. Genitive of Material: radavrov xpicod a talent of gold, ésaka 
atrov wagons (wagon loads) of corn (XC.2.4*). 


g. Genitive of Designation, taking the place of an appositive: fds ‘ypijua 
Méeya a (great affair) monster of a wild boar (Hd.1.36). This construction 
is chiefly poetic: Tpoins mroAleOpcy city of Troy (a 2), @avdroio TéAos end of 
(life, i. e.) death (T 309). 





x 


234 - PREDICATE-GENITIVE. [730 


Rem.—In a—d the things denoted by the two words are distinct ; in e—g 
they are more or less the same. The above classes by no means represent 
all possible relations of the genitive; many of these are hard to classify. 


730, The following are peculiarities of the attributive genitive: 


a. With the genitive, vids son and otkos house are often omitted: 
"AdéEavSpos 6 Bidinmov Alexander the son of Philip, eis TAar@vos to 
Plato’s (house), év “AtSov im the abode of Hades, év Atovicov in the 
temple of Dionysus, eis tivos 6iSacKkadov ; to what teacher’s (school) ? 


b. Especially frequent is the genitive after the neuler article: Ta Tis 
médews the affairs of the city, state-affairs, r tev Zupakociwy the resources of 
the Syracusans, Set pépew Ta TaV Oe@y we must bear the ordering of the gods 
(EPhoen.382), 7rd rhs Téxvns mepalvorro ay Kad did cis the function of the 
art can be performed even in silence (PGo.450°). Often this is merely a vaguer 
expression for the thing itself: ra ris Woxijs the soul (with all that belongs 
to it) nearly the same as 7 Wox7, 7d Tis TUXns luck, 7d Tis ddAvyapxtas the 
oligarchy. So rd rovde, meaning nearly he, and even vad J. 

c. The genitive partitive with neuter pronouns and adjectives often denotes 
degree: eis tocovTov avolas éAdety to come to this extent of folly (PGo.514°), 
ém) péya Suvduews exdpynoay they advanced to a great degree of power (T.1.118), 
éy mavT) Kaxov in extremity of evil (PRp.579>). 

d. The partitive genitive does not take the attributive position (666 a): 
thus ’A@nvalwy 6 Sjuos the lower elass of the Athenians (but 6 "A@nvatwy Siuos 
the Athenian people, the whole mass). 


e. Adjectives which have a partitive genitive, usually conform to it in 
gender, so as often to appear in the mase. or fem., where we might expect 
er 


the neuter: 6 ijusavs (6 Aourds, 6 wAEioTos) TOV xpdvov the half (rest, most part) 
of the time, woAAH Tis Xapas (also woAd Tis xadpas) much of the country. 


731, Two Genittves with OnE Supsrantive.—The same substantive may 
have two genitives depending on it, usually in different relations: trav avOpé- 
mov déos Tov Oavarov men’s fear of death, 5% tThv Tod dvéuov arwow Tov vavarylov 
because of the wind’s driving the wrecks out to sea (T.7.84), trmov Spomos nmepas 
a day's run for a horse (D.197"), Atovicov mpecBitay xopdés a Dionysiac chorus 
of old men (PLig.665°). 


732, PrepicaTE-GENITIVE.—The genitive may take the 
place of a predicate-noun: 6 vopos otros Apdxovrdés éore this 
law is Draco’s. 

a. The predicate-genitive usually refers to the subject of the sentence, 


and its different uses correspond in general with those of the attributive 
genitive (729). Thus: : 


Genitive of Possession, Belonging, Origin: Bowrav 4) wédts ora the city 


will belong to the Boeotians (Lys.12°), oixids weydans hv he was of an influential 
house (PMen.94°), rovodtwy éoré rpoyovey from such ancestors are ye (XA.3.2"4). 

Objective: od Tey Kakobpywr oikTos, GAAA THs Slens compassion is not for the 
evil-dgers, but for justice (EF rag.272). 


Of Measure: jv érav ws tTpiakovra he was about thirty years old (XA.2.6°°), — 


Td Tiunud eats TH THS xdpas EkaxicxIAlwy Tadrdvtwy the rateable property of 
the country ts (of) six thousand talents (D.14"%). 


* 


-¥ 


‘a 





rr. 735] GENITIVE AS SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 235 


Partitive: Sdrwv tay Era copirrav exrnen Solon was called one of the seven 
wise men (1.15°*°), Trav AauBavdvtwy eicly ot wavOdvovtes learners are among the 
receivers (PEuthyd.277°). 

Of Material: of crépava podwv joay the wreaths were of roses (D.22"), 


b. It may, however, refer to the object of a sentence: eué Os T&v memeic- 
péevey count me one of the believers (PRp.424°). 


c. A predicate-genitive is often connected with an infinitive, and denotes 
one whose nature, habit, or duty, is to do something: ds ekauapreiy Taito ovK 
avdpos copod tis not the nature of a wise man twice to err in the same thing 
(MMon.121), ofxovéuov ayabod éeorw ed oixety Tov EavTod olkoy ’tis the business 
of a good husbandman to manage his estate well (XO.1?). 


d. The genitive of characteristic so frequent in Latin (vir summae pruden- 
tiae) is used in Greek only as a predicate-genitive: éywye tovTov Tod Tpdmou 
mos ctw del Tam always of about this character (ArPlut.246), ris abris yrouns 
joay they were of the same opinion (T.1.113). 


Genitive with Verbs. 


733. The genitive sometimes seems to be connected with a verb, 
when it really belongs to a neuter pronoun or a dependent clause: 


eywye uddroTa Oavuaca avrod tovto I admired this especially in him, liter- 
ally I admired most this of him (PPhaed.89*), & SidKer Tod Wndicparos TadT’ 
esti the points which he impeaches in the decree, are these, literally which points 


of the decree (D.18°°), a-yvooduey GAAHAwY 6 TL Aéyouev we misunderstand each 
other’s language (PGo.517°). 


a. By an extension of this usage, the genitive sometimes means simply 
about, concerning: tt 5¢ trmwy oter; but of horses, what think you? (PRp.459°), 
Tov olkade TAU StecKkdmovy brn KomsOjoovTa touching their homeward voyage, 
they were considering by what course they should return (T.1.52). 


734, GeniTrIvE as SupsEcT.—The genitive (used partitively) some- 
times does duty as the subject of an intransitive verb: 


éuol ovdaudbey mpoohker Tov moayuatos I have no part whatever in the matter, 
literally to me belongs in no way of the matter (Andoc.4*), woAguov kab 
waxns od peTiv avTa of war and fighting she had no share (XC.7.278), emipiryyvivat 
epacav ahav mpos éxelvovs they said that some of their number had intercourse 
uith them (XA.3.5!*),—In these cases the genitive may be regarded as depend- 
ing on an omitted form of tls some one. 


GENITIVE AS OBJECT. 


735, Nore.—Many verbs, which in Latin or English would take the 
accusative, have the genitive in Greek, because the action is regarded as 
belonging to the object, rather than as falling directly upon it. In some of 
these constructions (as in that of 736) the genitive appears to depend on an 
omitted accusative of rls some. In others, it may be understood as depending 
on the idea of a noun implied in the verb: thus xpare?y (kpdtos) Tis Oaddoons 
(see 741) to exercise control over the sea, 





~ 


236 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [736 


736, The genitive is used with verbs whose action affects the 
object only in part (compare genitive partitive, 729 e; also 734). 
Almost any transitive verb may be occasionally so used: ) 

Tay vuetépwv éuol S:ddyam to give me some of your property (Lys.21"), 
AaBdvTes Tov BapBapixod orpatod having taken part of the barbarian army 
(XA.1.5"), apiels Tay aixuardTtwv releasing some of the prisoners (XA.7.4°), 
THs ys éreuov they ravaged part of the land (7.1.30). So aivew oivoy to 
drink wine, but mtvewv oivov to drink some wine. 

a. But this principle applies especially to verbs of sharing (having, etc., part 
of something), touching (the surface of something), atming (seeking to touch), 
enjoying (more or less of something). Hence the following rules (737-740). 


137. Verbs of sharing take the genitive: dvOpamrov Woy Tod 
Ociov peréxee man’s soul has part in the divine. 

Such are peradkapBdave receive part, peradidam give part, Kowavéo 
participate, etc. RAayydvew Tivos means to get by lot a share in some- 
thing, Kayxdve ti to get (the whole of) something by lot. 


138. Verbs of touching, taking hold of, beginning, take the 
genitive : AaBéoba THs xetpds to take hold of the hand. 

Such are daropat, \rava, Ovyyavw touch, éxona hold on to, dvréxopat, 
emdap Savona take hold of, dpxopat begin, wetpdopat make trial of. 


mupos tot: Ovydyta wy evOds KaerOat it is possible that one touching fire should 
not be burned immediately (XC.5.1"°), Tod Adyou St HpxeTo @de and he began his 


speech thus (XA.3.2"), wetpduevor TavTns Ths Tatews trying this order of march — 


(XA.3.2°9), 

a. The same verb may have an accusative of the person, and a genitive of 
the part, touched: raBoy tis Céyns Toy ’Opdyrny they took hold of Orontes by 
the girdle (XA.1.6!°), 

b. So, too, verbs in which touching is only ¢mplied: yew tis qvtas Tov 
trmov to lead the horse by the bridle (XEq.6°), Hm. éue Atooéoxeto yovvwy she 
besought me clasping my knees (1 451). So even xareayéva: or ouvTpiBivar THs 
Kedarijs to have one’s head broken or bruiscd (ArAch.1180, Pax 71). 


139, Verbs of aiming, reaching, and attaining, take the 
genitive: dvOparwy oroxalecbar to aim at men, ovyyvepys 
Tuyxavew to obtain pardon. | 

Such are croyd(opat aim at, dpéyopa reach after, epiepar long, strive 
Sor, e&txvéowar, epixvéoua arrive at, attain, rvyxavo hit upon, obtain, In 
poetry kupéw light upon, and others. (For verbs of missing, see 748.) 

HKLoTa Tay dAAOTplwy dpéyovTm they are furthest from reaching for other 
men's goods (XSym.4"), épi€uevos THs ‘EAAnKAs apxijis longing for the control 
of Greece (T.1.128). 

a. Here belong verbs of claiming and disputing, which take the object of 
the dispute in the genitive: ovx dyrTimototpeba Bacire? Tis apxns we do not 


pretend to the sovereignty against the king (XA.2.37%), nudisBhtnoev "Epex et 


Tis moAews he disputed with Hrechtheus the possession of the city (1.1a**). 


di ws 
F 


742] - GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 237 


740. Verbs of enjoying take the genitive: dmodavev trav 
ayabav to enjoy the good things. 

Such are droNava, ovivauar, evoxéoua, répTrec Oat. 

evwxod Tod Adyou feast on the discourse (PRp.352>), Evds avdpds ed ppovh- 


gavros amaytes bv amodavoeiay from one man who has thought well, all may 
receive profit (1.4°). 


741, The genitive is used with verbs of ruling and leading - 
as dpxev Tov viow to rule the islands. 

“Epws Tav Oedv Bacireder Love is king of the gods (PSym.195°), TloAukpdarns 
Sduov érupdvver Polycrates was tyrant of Samos (T.1.18), imméwy Adxns éorpa- 
thyet Laches was general of cavalry (1.5.61), Mivws tijs Oaddocons expdrnce 
Minos became master of the sea (T.1.4), Xeuploopos jryetro Tod orparevuaros 
Chirisophus led the arny (XA.4.1°). 


742, The genitive is used with many verbs which signify 
an action of the senses or the mind ; particularly those mean- 
ing to hear, taste, smell, to remember and forget, to care for 
and neglect, to spare and desire: dwvyns axotw L hear a voice, 
Tov diruov péeuvynco remember your friends. 


Such verbs are dxova, dxpodoua hear, yevoua taste (also yevo cause 
to taste), doppaivopa smell, airOdvoua perceive, pupynoKkopar remember 
(also piyyyoK@ remunt), emtAavOavoua forget, pédet por [ am concerned, 
perapeder poe I repent, emipséhopar take care of, evrpémopat regard, auedéw 
neglect, dhuyopéw think little of, peidopat spare, ahewdéo am wasteful, 
epaw love, emibipéw desire, wewaw hunger, Supaw thirst.—mvvOavopa 
am informed of more commonly takes the accusative. 

THs Kpavyjs nodovro they perceived the shouting (XH.4.4*), 5€501na wh émaAa- 
Oducba THs olkade 6500 [ am afraid we may forget the way home (XA.3.2”), 
Tols GTovdalols OVX oidy TE THS ApETHS ameAety carnest men cannot neglect virtue 
(1.148), ore Tod cHparos ote TaY byTwY epeicduny I spared neither my person 


nor my property (Andoc.2"'), rodtav Tay wadnudtwy mérdar éemi9iue I have long 


a 
; 


desired this learning (XM.2.6*°), meweor Tod eraivov eviat Tav pioewy some 
natures hunger for praise (X0.13°). 


a. With wéAew and petraueAew the object of the feeling is sometimes 
(rarely in prose) nominative instead of genitive: todrd wot uéAet, instead of 
TOUTOU [OL [LEAEl). 

b. Verbs of remembering and forgetting may take the accusative 
instead of the genitive: rovs ddsxodytas penvncba to remember those 
who harm you (D.6"); and always do when the object is a neuter 


pronoun. So verbs of reminding may take two accusatives, instead 
of accusative and genitive. 


C. akovw and axpodoua: usually have the thing heard in the accusative, the 
person heard in the genitive: axovew tov Adyov to hear the discourse, but 
Gxovety Tov SidacKdAov to hear the teacher. This is always the case when both 


are expressed: 7Soua: axovwy cov ppovivous Adyous J am glad to hear from you 
sensible words (XA.2.5'°). | 





238 GENITIVE OF CAUSE, CRIME, VALUE. [748 


743, The genitive is used with verbs of plenty and want: 
A / eld la i : 5 
yewew Tovtwy Tov Aoywv to be full of such tatk. | 

Thus tipmAnut, TAnpd@ fill, TANO®, yéuo am full, Séopar want, ete. 

TA @Ta mov everAnoe Satuovias copias he filled my ears with divine wisdom 
(PCrat.396¢), xpnudctwv eimdpa he had abundance of treasure (D.18?%), ob 
xpuctov mAauTEiv, GAAG CwAs aryabijs to be rich, not in gold, but in a good life 
(PRp.521*), seoayyévos wAovtov Thy Woxhv having his soul glutted with wealth 
(XSym.4™), 6 undév adic ovdévos Setrau vduov who does no wrong needs no law 
(Antiph.iii.148), ématvov obmore oravicere you never lack praise (XHier.114). 

Here belong expressions such as peOvabels Tov véxrapos intoxicated with the 
nectar (PSym.203>), 7 anyh pet uddra Woxpod Bdaros the spring runs with very 
cold water (PPhaedr.230?), 

a. When déona: means request, it may take a genitive of the person, | 
and a (cognate) accusative of the thing asked for: rotvto tpay Séopar 
I ask this of you (PAp.17°). 

b. The active Séw, as a personal verb, is found only with genitives of 
quantity, roAAod much, oAtyou, pixpod, little, reoobTov (also TacovTo) so much: 
togovTouv Séw Karappovely I am so far from despising (1.12°*); also imperson- 
ally, moAAod Set obTws Exew it wants much of being so (PAp.354), With 
omitted Sez, é6Atyouv and pixpov have the force of adverbs, meaning almost: 
6Alyou mavtes nearly all (PRp.552¢). The phrases ovd éAlyou Set (nor does 
it want little) and o¥5é moAAod Sez (nor does it want much, but rather every- 
thing) both mean far from zt (D.191*4, 54*°). For déwy with numbers, see 292. 


GENITIVE OF CausE, CRIME, VALUE. 


744, Many verbs of emotion take a genitive of the cause: 
TovTou pev ov Gavpalo Lam not surprised at this. 


Such verbs are Oavydtw, dyapa wonder, admire, (nrow, POovéw envy, 
oixtipw pity, evdapovita think happy, etc. 

ovyxalpw tay yeyeynuevev I share the joy for what has occurred (D.15"*), 
ToUTOUS OiKTIPw THs wyay xader}s vécou I pity these for their very severe dis- 
ease (XSym.4*"), (yA® oe Tov vou, Tis Se Setdtas orvye I envy thee for thy wis- 
dom, but detest thee for thy cowardice (SE1.1027), xwduevos yuvaikds angry because 
of a woman (A 429).—Here belong also Eévov Sixaoy aivéocat mpobdmlas *tis right 
to praise the stranger for his zeal (E1a.1871), ovmor’ avdpt TGde KnpoKevpaTwv 
weuber never wilt thou blame me for my tidings (ASept.651), cuyyryveone 
avrots xph THs émiboplas it is right to forgive them for the desire (PEuthyd.306°). 


745, Verbs of judicial action take a genitive of the crime: 
dhovov dudKev to prosecute for murder. 

So the legal phrases ypdpopa: indict, Saxo prosecute, pevyo am 
prosecuted, aropevyo am acquitted, aipéw convict, addicxopar am con- 
victed, 6ptoKkayw lose a suit, etc. 

Sidkw piv Kaxnyoplas, TH 8 adth Whow ddvov pebyw I am prosecuting for 
slander, and at the same trial am on my defence for murder (Lys.11™), pevdouap- 
rupiav addoecbau mpocdonay expecting to be convicted of false testimony (D.39"*). 

a. The genitive with these verbs depends on an omitted cognate-accusa — 
tive, dixnv, ypaphy or the like; this may be expressed, as Aesch. Ag. 534, 


748] GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 239 


b. Oavdrov, with such verbs, is a genitive of value (cf. 746 b): tov Spodplay 
bwfyov.Oavarou they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (XI1.5.4%), 


746, The genitive of value is used with verbs of buying, 
selling, valuing, and sometimes with other verbs : 


SpaxuAs mplac0a to buy for a drachme (PAp.26°), obk by ameddunyv woAAod 
ras éAmtdas IL would not have sold my hopes for a great price (PPhaed.98°), 
uy tiwhon wActovos let him not set a greater price on it (PLg.917°). 

aécov SiddoKer; wéevte pva@av for how much does he teach? for five minae 
(PAp.20°), of tupavvor pro0od pbaAakas Exover the tyrants keep guards for pay 
(XHier.6”), mpowémora THs wapavrixa xdpitos TA Tis méAEws mparypara the in- 
terests of the city have been sacrificed for immediate popularity (D.8”*), thy 
mopautixa édmida ovdevds dy HAAdtavto they would not have exchanged the hope 
of the moment for anything (T.8.82). 


a. With verbs of valuing, wep) zroAAov (803, 1 b) is usually said instead of 
moAAov ; and so vrep) mAclovos, €AaTTovos, etc., unless an exact price is meant. 


b. Note the phrase tivay tut tivos to fix one’s penalty at something, said of 
the judge, tivacOat tivi twos to propose something as a penalty for some one, 
said of the contending parties: tiara F ody mot 6 avnp Oavdrou the man 
proposes death as my penalty (PAp.36°). , 


c. The thing bargained for is rarely put in the genitive (of cause): ovdéva 
THs guvovolds apylpiov mparret (724) for your society you demand money of no 
one (XM.1.6"), rod Séddexa pvas Macia (sc. dpeiAw); for what do I owe twelve 
minae to Pasias ? (ArNub.22). 


GENITIVE OF SEPARATION, DISTINCTION, SOURCE. 


747, As an ablative case, the genitive denotes that from which anything 
is separated, is distinguished, or proceeds. Accordingly : 


748, The genitive is used with verbs of separation ; that is, 
those which imply removing, restraining, releasing, ceasing, 
failing, differing, yielding (receding from), and many others: 

) vijcos ov woAd Siexer THs iwelpov the island is not far distant from the 
mainland (1.3.51), et @adrarrns eipyowrto if they should be excluded from the 
sea (XH.7.1°), xpe@v nrAevdepwoe he freed (men) from debt (PRp.566°), ef kata- 
Avew mweipaoerbe TovToy THs dpxijs Uf ye shall try to put this man out of his com- 
mand (XC.8.574), Awhd Tijs ddvvns Kal yéynbe it rests from its pain and rejoices 
(PPhaedr.251¢), ovdels hudptavey avdpds no one missed his man (XA.3.4"), odk 
epevobn THs eAtidos he was not disappointed of his expectation (XH.7.5*4), ovdev 
Sioicvers Xapepavros thy mvow you will not differ at all from Chaerephon in 


nature (ArNub.503), ris tev ‘EAAjvwr éAevdeplas mapaxwpioa birlmmy to sur- 
render the freedom of the Creeks to Philip (D.18°°). 


a. Verbs of depriving sometimes take a genitive (instead of the accusative, 
724): Ty BAAwY ahatpolmevor xphuata taking away property from the rest 
(XM.1.5°), mécwy ameotépynabe ; of how much have you been bereft? (D.8°°). 


b. In poetry this genitive is used with verbs of simple motion, where in 
prose a preposition would be required: Bd@pwy toracbe rise from the steps 
(SOt.142), Mw@avos Bas from Pytho art thou come (SOt.152). 


240 GENITIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS. [749 


749, Verbs of superiority and inferiority take the genitive, 
because of the comparative idea which they contain : zepryevé- 
ola Tav €x9pav to get the better of one’s enemies. 


So mepiylyvoua overcome, Aclrouce am inferior, and especially verbs de- 
rived from comparative adjectives, as jrTdoua am worsted: avip tiverw 
ovdevds Aecrduevos a man (left away from) second to no one in understanding 
(1.6.72), e@ Tis Erépov mpodéper emiathun if one is more advanced than another 
in knowledge (T.7.64), rovrov obk HrTnodbucba ed wovodyTes we shall not be out- 
done by him in kind offices (XA.2.3?), rivats TovTwy émAcoverteite in honore 
you had the advantage over these men (XA.3.1°"), berepiCover Tay mpdrypdrev 
they are too late for the crisis (1.3!°).—vixaoOa to be vanquished has the same 
constructions as 7TTao Oa. 


150. Many verbs take a genitive of the source: 


TavTa Gov TUXdvTEs Obtaining this of you (XA.6.6*), udbe 5é wou kal rade but 
learn of me this also (XC.1.6%), érvvOavovto of ’Apkddes trav dud) Zevodavta, tt 
Ta Tupa KatacBéceay the Arcadians sought to learn from Xenophon’s party, 
why they extinguished the fires (XA.6.3”°). 

So verbs meaning (fo be born: Adpeiov kal Tlapycaridos yiyvovtat aides S00 
of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons (XA.1.1}). 

a. In poetry, the genitive of the source is sometimes used with passive 
participles and verbals, to denote the agent: oas addxouv cpayets slain by thine 
own spouse (HEI.123), dwrds nrarnuevn deceived by\a husband (SAj.807), Ketvns 
Oidaxrd taught by her (SE1.348). | 


GENITIVE witH CompouND VERBS. 


751, Many verbs compounded with a preposition take the 
genitive when the preposition, used by itself in the same 
sense, would have that case : 

mpdoKelTat THs xdpas tpn peyara in front of the country lie great mountains 
(XM.3.5), ériBas Tov Teixous having mounted the wall (T.4.116), drepepdvnoav 
Tov Addov they appearcd over the ridge (T.4.938). So verbs derived from com- 
pounds: dmepdixeiy tov Adyovu to plead for the principle (PPhaed.86°). 


752, Especially many compounds of xard, which have the sense of 
feeling or acting against, take the genitive of the person: xarayeAacat 
cpav to laugh at you. 

xp) wh Katappoveiy Tod TANCovs we should not contemn the multitude (1.5™), 


8° 2xOpav Karapevdovral pou through enmity they attack me with falsehood 
(D.21335), 


a. Some take, beside, an accusative of the thing: thus of the erime, aytt- 


Bor® wh Katayvevar SwpodoKxtay euod I beg you not to pronounce me guilty of 
bribery (ys.212!), r& rév TpidkovTa Guapthuata euod Karnydpour they charged 
on me the offences of the thirty (Lys.25°); or of the punishment, éviwvy Eremoay 
iuas axptrwv Odvarov karabnploacba they persuaded you to pass sentence of death 
on some without trial (Lys.25**). 

So with an additional genitive of the crime, 7oAA@y ot marépes pundicpov 
Odvarov karéyvwcay our fathers passed sentence of death against many for favor 
ing the Persians (1.41%), 


oe 


754] _ GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 241 


Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 


753. The genitive is used with adjectives which correspond, 
in derivation or meaning, to verbs that take the genitive. 
Thus it is used with adjectives 

a. Or SHARING: péroxos coplas partaking in wisdom (PLg.689%), iaduorpos 
ray tatppwv having an equal part of the patrimony (Isae.6”). 

b. Or Power: kipios ravtwy master of everything (Ae.2'*!), nSovay éyxpari)s 
able to control indulgenecs (XM.1.2'*). 


c. Or PLenty orn WAntT: peords karay full of evils (MMon.334), mAovctos 
dpovngews rich in good sense (PPol.261°), xpnudtwy mévns poor in treasure 
(HEI.37), émearhuns Kevds void of knowledge (PRp.486°). So the adverb Gaus 
enough. 

Many compounds of alpha privative take a genitive of the thing wanted: 
&mais appevwy tatdwy childless as to male children (XC.4.6"), &dwpos xpnudtov 
taking no bribes of money (T.2.65). 

d. Or SENSATION on Menta Action.—Thus compounds in -fKoos from 
axovw: Adywv Kadav éewhxoos listening to excellent discourses (PRp.499*), émfjxoos 
Tay yovewy obedient to one’s parents (PRp.4634%). So rudaAbs tov wéAdovtos blind 
to the future (Plut.Sol.12), duyquav trav Kkwddvev unmindjul of the dangers 
(Ant.2a"), émierhs ouixpay attentive to litle things (PLg.900°). 


e. Or ACCOUNTABILITY : alttos ToUTwy accountable for this (PGo.447"), évoxos 
detAlds liable to a charge of cowardice (Lys.14°), pdvov brddixos subject to a trial 
jor murder (D.54*°), tis a&pxis tmevOvvos bound to give account of lis office 
(D.18'!"), droreAns pdpov subject to payment of tribute (T.1.19). 


f. Or VALUE: &twos ératvov worthy of praise (PLg.762°), avdtios Tijs wéAcws 
unworthy of the city (Lys.20*°), a@vytds xpnudtwy purchasable for money (1.2°?), 


-g. Or SEPARATION AND DIsTiNcTION: dpdayvés avipayv bereft of men (Lys.2%), 
€AevIepos aidovs free from shame (PLg.699°), KaSapds wivtTwy Tay Kaxev clear 
Jrom all things evil (PCrat.403°), yuuyds rod céuaros stripped of the body 
(PCrat.403°), Suapopos tay &AAwy distinct from the rest (PParm.160%), %AAa 
Tav Sixaiwy things other than the just (XM.4.4%), Erepov 7d 75¥ Tod ayadod the 
pleasant is different from the good PGo.5004). 


154, The genitive is also used with other adjectives: 


a. With adjectives of transitive action, where the corresponding verbs 
would have the accusative: dfuadhs rhs aducids late in learning injustice 
(PRp.409°), kaxodpyos trav &%AdAwy doing evil to the others (XM.1.53), émorhuwy 
Ths TEXUNS Skilled in the art (PG0.448"); especially 

b. With adjectives of capacity in -ixés: mapacnevartixds T&v cis Tov TéAcUO¥ 
qualified to provide the requisites for the war (XM.3.15), Sidackardukds Tis aitod 
gopias fitted to teach his own science (PEuthyph.8°). 


e. With adjectives of possession, to denote the possessor: kowds mdyTov 
avOpdrev common to all men (PSym.205*), 110s aitaey belonging to themselves 
alone (Ae.3°), Exdorou oikeios peculiar to each (PGo0.506°), fepds Tis "Apréusdos 
sacred to Artemis (XA.5.3!%), These, however, sometimes take the dative. 

d. With some adjectives of connection: tuyyevhs abtod akin to him (XC. 
4.1”), axdrovda arAAhAwy consistent with one another (XO.111”), dudvumes Swxpd- 


r W 
ia 
| 


242 GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS. [66 


tous a namesake of Socrates (PSoph.218>). But these oftener take the dative 
(772 b). 

e. With some adjectives derived from substantives, where the genitive may 
be regarded as depending on the zncluded substantive: wpata ydpou ripe for 
marriage (X0.4.6%), like Spa yduou age for marriage, TéXe1os THs apeTAs perfect 
in virtue (PLg.6484), like réAos dperis perfection of virtue. 

f. With some adjectives of place (cf. 757), but seldom in Attic prose: Hm. 
evavtiar éorav “Axady they stood opposite to the Greeks (P 343), Hd. éemucdporat 
tov Udvrov at right angles to the Pontus (Hd.7.36). 


155, Adjectives of the comparative degree take the genitive 
(see 643): peilwv Tod ddeAgod taller than his brother. 


toTepor amikduevor TS TuuBoAts coming (later than) too late for the engage- 
ment {Hd.6.120), similarly rH torepala ths waxns on the day after the battle 
(PMenex.240°), oddevds dedtepos second to no one (Hd.1.28), Aevkorépa Tov dvyTos, 
dpboTépa Tis prvcews fairer than (reality) her real complexion, straighter than 
(nature) her real figure (XM.2.1?*), naradceorépay thy Sdtav Tis éAmides EdaBe 
the reputation he obtained came short of his expectation (1.2"), défa KpeitTwy Tay 
plovoiytwy a reputation (greater than the envious) superior to envy (D.3*). 


a. Multiplicatives in -rAdoios and -mAovs have the same construction: 
&AAols moAAaAaclos Uma@y eToAcuHnoapey we engaged in war with others many 
times more numerous than you (XA.5.5??). 


b. The superlative often takes a partitive genitive (see 650). Inexact 
expressions like kaAA:oTtos Tay &AAwY (B 673), for KaAAtTwy Tov %AAwy or 
KaAALOTOS mévTwv, are frequent. Similarly pévos Tay GAAwY = pdvos wayTwY 
alone of all (Lycurg.’*”). 


GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS. 


756. Adverbs derived from the foregoing adjectives, may 
have the genitive: dvagiws aitav in a manner unworthy of 
themselves, diapepovtTws Tov drAAwv avOpuTwv differently from 
the rest of men. 


157. The genitive is also used with other adverbs, especially 
those of place: as rod yns; where on earth ? 


So of mpocAhAvdey aoeryelas avOpwros to what a pitch of profligacy the man 
has come (D.4°), wéxpt Sedpo Tod Adyou to this point of the discussion (PSym. 
217°), réphw copids jKet he is far advanced in wisdom (PEuthyd.294°), ékros 
dpwy outside of the boundaries (T.2.12), so évrés inside, exapouv ew Tov Telxous 
they came without the wall (7.3.22), so etew within, werath Tod morapod Kat THs 
tappod between the river and the ditch (XA.1.7)°), wAnctov Tod Seouwrnptiov near 
the prison (PPhaed.59¢), mpéc0ev, Zumporbevy Tod arparomédou in front of the 
camp (XH.4.1??,XC.3.3”), so dmabev behind, aupotépwlev tis 6500 on both sides 
of the way (XH.5.2°), so Exarépwbev on each side, évOev kad evOev on this side 
and that, wépay tod morauod across the river (T.6.101), edb tis SaonaArdos 
straight towards Phaselis (T.8.88). 


a. So of time: mwnvixa Tis hucpas at what time of the day? (ArAv.1498), 
ope Tis Bpas late in the day (D.21*4). 


7 


ae 
* 
‘] 
2 


. 


— =. 


761] GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 243 


Of condition or degree: mas Exes Sdéns; in what state of mind are you? 
(PRp.456°), axoraciay heveréov &s txer moda ExaoTos Huav we must flee from 
license, as fast as we can, each one of us, liter. according to that condition of 
feet in which each one is (PG0.507%), ikavés émaornuns Eker he will be well 
enough off for knowledge (PPhil.62). 

Of separation: xwp!s Tod céHparos apart from the body (PPhaed.66°), kpida 
Tay “A@nvaiwy (in concealment from) without knowledge of the Athenians 
(7 .1,101). 


158, The adverbs avev without, rAnv except, axpt, péxpe until, 
evexa for the sake of, as regards, often called improper prepo- 
sitions (784 a), take the genitive : 

avev TAolwy without boats (XA.2.23), éAevbepias Evera for the sake of freedom 
(D.18'), wéexpe tis wdxns as far as the place of batile (XA.2.2°), 

a. “Evexa has also the forms éevexey and poet. eivexa. mAfhy is often used 
without a genitive, as a conjunction: ovK ap ’Axaots avdpes cial mAhy Ode 


(with the same meaning as mAnv Tovde) have the Achaeans no men save this ? 
(SAj. 1238). 


Genitive in Looser Relations. 


759, GENITIVE oF Time.—The genitive is used to denote 
the time to which an action belongs: yyépas by day, vuKrds 
by night. 

The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of time, but as 
occupying more or less of it: Tov avrod xeuadvos (at some time in) the same 
winter (1.8.30), déka erav ovx ‘over they will not come (any time in) for ten 
years (PLg.642°), ovre tis E€vos adixta xpdvov ovxvod nor has any stranger 
come within a long time (PPhaed.57*), tpia jidapenda tod unvds three half- 
darics each month (XA.1.37!), rod Aomod (at any time) in the future, but 7d 
Aundy for the future (for all future time). 


760, GenrtrvE or Piace.—The genitive is used in poetry to 
denote the place to which, or within which, an action belongs: 


végos § ov dalveto maons yalns but no cloud appeared over (any part of) the 
whole land (P 372), iCev totxou Tod érépoto he was sitting by the other wall (1 218), 
H ove “Apyeos fev "Axouikov ; was he not (any where) in Achaean Argos? (y 251), 
Ogew medio to run on the plain (Z 507), Aover Oar motapoto to bathe in the river 
(Z 508). Still more singularly mpjcat wupds to burn with (within) fire (B 415). 


a. In prose, this construction appears only in a few phrases: émerdxovoy 
THs 6500 they hurried them on the way (7.4.47), i&vat Tod mpdow to go forward 
(XA.1.3!). But compare the adverbs of place which end in -ov: rod where, 
etc. (283), abrod there, 6uod (in the same place) together. 


161, The genitive is used in exclamations, with or without inter- 
jections, to show the cause of the feeling: 

ged Tod avdpds alas for the man! (XC.8.1%), & MWdéceSov, Sevdv Adyov 
O Poseidon, what fearful words ! (PEuthyd.303*), ris tuxns my ill luck! 
(XC.2.23). It is often joined to an adjective: & duaTrdAava Tis éuns avéadlas 
O unhappy me, for my self-awill ! (EMed.1027). 


244 DATIVE OF INDIRECT OBJEOT. [762 


DATIVE. 


762, The dative is commonly connected with verbs and adjectives. It 
denotes properly the relations expressed in English by ¢o and for; but be- 
sides this, it has the uses of an instrumental and a locative case, which in 
Latin belong mostly to the ablative. 


We distinguish: 

1., Dative of the Indirect Object (that to which). 

2.’ Dative of Interest (that for which). 

3. Dative of Association and Likeness (that with which). 

4. Dative of Instrument, Means, Cause, Manner (that by which). 
5. Dative of Time and Place (that at or mm which). 


Dative of the Indirect Object. 


763. The indirect object of an action is put in the dative: 
céowxe Kipw xpyyata he gave money to Cyrus, doxet pot it seems 
to Mé. 


764, The indirect object is generally indicated in English by fo. 
It is used: 


1. With many transitive verbs, along with the direct object in the 
accusative ; especially those meaning to give, send, entrust, promise, 
say, advise and the like: 

TH oTpaTia arédwre Kipos pucOdov tetrtdpwy unvav Cyrus paid the army four 
months’ wages (XA.1.2!"), dpetAew OG bvctas to owe sacrifices toa god (PRp. 
331°), Aéyew Tad’Ta Tots oTpaTidras to tell this to the soldiers (XA.1.41). 


a. With the passive, the direct object of the action becomes the subject 
of the verb, while the dative remains unchanged: éxelym airy h xa@pa edd0n 
to him this country had been given (XH.3.15), 


2. With many intransitive verbs, as those of seeming, belonging, 
yielding, etc. Here belong verbs signifying to please, profit, trust, 
aid, obey, serve, befit, and their contraries; also verbs denoting disposi- 
tion toward any one, as anger, envy, favor, threats ; although the cor- 
responding English verbs are for the most part transitive (712 a). 


tuupopais qooov ET épov etxouer we yield to misfortunes less than others (T. LE 84), 
XapiCduevos TH emOvula gratifying his desire (PRp. 561°), énligtevoy avT@ at 
morets the cities trusted him (XA.1.98), e5dxet avrois Dmoup yey Tots Svpanoctois 
it seemed to them best to aid the Syracusans (T.6.88), T@ voy TQ UpeT epyp 
metcouat I will obey your law (XA.7. 3°), 7d pndev aSiucciy mao avOperots 
mperet to do no wrong beseems all men (M.iv.293), of 5& orpari@tra eéxadémauvov 
tois otparnyors but the soldiers were enraged at the generals (XA.1.4'*), p0ovotow 
EauTots uaAAov 7) Tols GAAOLs avOpwmois they envy each other rather than the rest 
of mankind (XM.3.51°), 


b. Note the following constructions: éveidi¢ew tiwl (or tiwd) reproach some 


& 


one, often dverdicew Th Ti cast something in one’s teeth ; so émtipay (evade) 


j 4 
j 


BH 


468] DATIVE OF INTEREST. O45; 

gl rim. Aodopety Tie and AoidopetoOal Tit both mean revile some one ; Tiuwpeiy 
(rarely tTiuwpetcOa) Tit Means avenge some one, Tiuwpetcbal (rarely Tiuwpety) 
riva take vengeance on, punish some one, Cf. also 712 b. 


765. The dative is used with adjectives kindred in meaning to 
verbs which take the dative of the indirect object: 


taroxos Tots Oeots subject to the gods (XA.2.5"), ampemhs pirat unbecoming 
to guardians (PRp.398°), véuots evayvtios in opposition to the laws (D.6*>), 
dtros Bactre? friendly to the king (XA.2.1°), Sucwevns vuiv hostile lo you 
(XH.2.3°9). 

a. Even some substantives expressing action may take this dative: 5apa 
tots Geos gifts to the gods (PEuthyph.15*), 7 €uh TQ Oe@ taypecia my service 
to the divinity (PAp.8U*). The same substantive may have also a genitive: 
KaTadovAwols THY “EAAHvwy “AOnvaios subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians 
(T.3.10). 


Dative of Interest. 


766. The dative denotes, in general, that for which something is, 
orisdone. Of this dative there are several kinds, as follows: 


767. Dative oF ADVANTAGE OR DisADVANTAGE.—The per- 
son or thing to whose advantage or disadvantage anything 
tends is put in the dative: yeyevjoGa: 7H warpids to be born for 
one’s country. 


So with verbs and adjectives: af BaAavor Tév howtKwy Tots oikéras aré- 
Kewro the dates were laid aside for the slaves (XA.2.3'°), crepavotcba Th Oe to 
be crowned in honor of the god (XH.4.3"!), weydAwy mpdryudtwv Katpot mpoetyras 
77 wodet opportunities for great deeds have been thrown away for (to the detri- 
ment of) the city (D.19°), eomdvifov tpopijs tots woAAots they lacked provisions 
for the most (7.4.6), ait@ copds wise jor himself (MMon.332), xpnoios avOpd- 
mots useful for men (PRp.389°). 

a. Such a dative is sometimes used where in English from would be said. 
Thus in poetry with 5€xoua: SéaTd of oxjmrpov he took from him the staff 
(B 186). And regularly with éuivw ward of; which is even used with dative 
alone, a8 duivew 7H wédre. to defend the city. 


768. Dative or THE PossEssor.—With ciyi, yiyvouat, and similar 
verbs, the possessor is expressed by the dative: 


&AAos xphuara eats others have treasure (T.1.86), mpoydvwv pipiddes éxdore 
yeyovacr every man has had myriads of ancestors (PTheaet.175*). The verb 
may be omitted: 76 warp) MupiAdumns dvoua (sc. éori, the father has Pyri- 
lampes as his name) the father’s name is Pyrilampes (PPar.126°), 


a. The possessor is more properly expressed by the genitive (732 a): the 
dative denotes rather one who has something for his use and service. 


_ b. The dative, in this use, is sometimes found in connection with swbstan- 
tives: ot opt Bées their catile (Hd.1.31), of avOpwro ty Tay KTHudTwY Tos Beois 
elo men are one of the possessions belonging to the gods (PPhaed.62%), 





246 DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION. [769 


769, Dative or THE AGENT.—With the perfect and pluperfect 
passive, the agent is sometimes expressed by the dative (instead of 
vd with the genitive); the dative implies that the person has the 
thing done, as for himself: 


Ta ToUT® memparyueva the things done by him (D.29'), ereid) abrots mapecred- 
aoro when their preparations had been made (T.1.46). 


a. With other passive tenses this dative is much less frequent: taAnéés 
avOparoow ovx etplaxetat the truth is not found by men (MMon.511). 


b. With verbals in -réos, the agent is regularly expressed by the dative, 
see 991. 


770. Eratcan DatrvE.—The personal pronouns, implying a remote 
interest, are used in colloquial language to impart a lively and familiar 
tone to the sentence: 

TovTw mdvu mor mpocexeTe Ty vody to this attend carefully (for me) I pray 
you (D.18""5), rt cor pabjcoum ; (what shall I learn for you) what would you 
have me learn? (ArNub.111), auovedrepor yevnoovta vuiy of veo. your young 
men will become ruder, i. e., you will find them becoming so (PRp.546°). 


771. Dative or INTEREST IN LOOSER RELATIONS.—The dative may 
denote one in whose view, or in relation to whom, something is true: 

6 wey yap eoOAbs evyevyns euol y avnp the honest man is noble in my view, 
(EF rag.345), droAauBavew def TS ToLovT@ re edHOns earl in the case of such a 
man, one must suppose that he is simple (PRp.598*), ré0ynx? vuivy woda I am 
long since dead to you (SPhil.1030), Swxparns eddxer Ttiuhs Béios elvar TH wéAeL 
Socrates seemed to be worthy of honor (in relation to) from the city (XM.1.2°). 

a. In these constructions a participle in the dative is frequently used: éze 
qv quepa méumtyn emimAéovar Tots “APnvators when, (it was the fifth day for the 
Athenians sailing out) the Athenians sailed out for battle for the fifth day 
(XH.2.1"), A feeling is often so expressed: ei éxelyw Bovdomerm tavT’ early 
if that is according to his wish (XH.4.11!), éravéA@wpev, ef vor jdouevp earl let 
us go back, if it is your pleasure to do so (PPhaed.78>). 

b. Such a participle may be used without a substantive; thus in expres- 
sions of place: ’Ewidauyds éori médts ev Sekia eomAdovTit Tov *Idviov KéATov 
Epidamnus is a city on the right (to one sailing) as you sail into the Ionian gulf 
(T.1.24). So the phrase ouveAdyti (or @s cuveAdvte) eimety to say it briefly (lit. 
for one to say it, having brought the matter to a point). 


Dative of Association and Likeness. 


772, The dative is used with words of association or oppo- 
sition to denote that with which something is, or is done: 
thus optArcty tots Kaxots to associate with the bad, paxerOar TvxXH 
to fight with fortune. 

Here are included verbs of approaching, meeting, accompanying, fol- 
en, communicating, mixing, reconciling ; warring, quarrelling, and 
like ideas: ) 


“4 
pA 


a 





DATIVE OF LIKENESS. 247 


ovdt mweAdoa oidy 7 jv TH cicddw it was impossible even to get near the 
entrance (XA.4.2°), dmayvta TG Hevopadvte Eveactins Luclides meets Xenophon 
(XA.7.8!), erecOat duiv Bovrdoua I am willing to follow you (XA.3.1"°), kowwveiv 
G@AAHAas mévwv to participate with one another in toils (PLg.686*), duodoyety 
@AAhAots to agree with one another (PCrat.436%), SuereyéoOny arAAhAow they 
were talking with each other (PEuthyd.273°), nepdoa tiv Kphynv otvy to mingle 
the spring with wine (XA.1.2'%), xph KaradAayivat méaw more city must be 
reconciled with city (1.4.61), moAcucty Ticcadépver to be at war with Tissa- 
phernes (XA.1.18), dupieBytovor wiv BV civoray oi laos rots plrois, epiCovar 5é 
oi éxOpol GAAhAaS friends dispute goodnaturedly with friends, but enemies quar- 
rel with one another (PProt.337>), rots movypots Siapeperba to be at variance 
with the bad (XM.2.9°). 


a. So with phrases: BovAcvducba adrois 51a PiAtads iévar we intend to be on 
friendly terms with them (XA.3.28), eis Adyous (Xetpas) EpxecOat ti to come 
to words (blows) with any one (T.8.48 ; 7.44). 


b. Also with adjectives of like meaning, and even substantives: ddéAovOos 
06 conformable to God (PLg.716°), rowwvia trois avipdor participation with men 
(PRp.466°). Sidpopos with dative means at variance, with genitive different. 


c. Here belong the adverbs Gua at the same time, duo together, epetjs next 
in order: dua th nuépa at day-break (XA.2.1°), 7d dwp ewivero duod TH HAG 
the water was drunk along with the mud (7.7.84), r& TovTos epettis july Ackréov 
we must say what comes next to this (PTim.30°). 


173. Words of likeness or unlikeness take the dative: ootos 
To adeApo like his brother. 


Except @oxa am like, these are chiefly adjectives, or words derived from 
adjectives: GAAa pircadpy olkas, & vedvione why, you seem like a philosopher, 
young man (XA.2.113), ob Set trov Exew Tovs Kakovs Tots ayabots the bad must 
not have equality with the good (XC.2.3°), Sexe? rodTo mapamAnady Ti eivat TE 
*Acruavarte this name seems to be similar to Astyanax (PCrat.393*), 6 mammros 
Te Kal dudvuuos euol my grandfather, and of the same name with me (PRp.330°), 
7) 6uototy EauTdy BAAW miwetoOal eat to make one’s self like to another is to 
imitate (PRp.393°), aAAnAoS avouolws in a way unlike each other (PTim.364), 


a. On this principle 6 avrds the same takes the dative: 7d avré To 
niOio the same thing as foolishness (XA.2.6), amtALopEvor Hoay Tots 
avtois Kvpw omdas they were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus 
(XC.7.17). 


b. The comparison is often abridged (cf. 643 c): éuolay tats SovAas efxe 
Thy eo0ijTa (for duoidy TH Tav SovrAay eaO7T1) she had her dress like (the dress 
of) the slave-girls (XC.5.1*). Cf. the second example in a. 


_ 14, With other words a dative of accompaniment is used, chiefly 
in statements of military forces: nuets Kat immos Tois Suvarwraros Kat 


avSpaot Topevapeda let us go with horses the most powerful and with men 
(XC.5.3%), 

a. Like this is the use of the dative with atrds: rérrapas vais ZAaBov abtots 
avdpdor they took four ships, erews and all, literally, with the crews themselves 
(XH.1.2)?), wordrods ZAcyov abtois tots tmmois KaraxpnunicOjvar they said that 

many had been thrown over precipices, horses and all (XC.1.4"). 


rt 


248 DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS. 





Dative with Compound Verbs. 


775. Many verbs compounded with év, ctv, éri, and some 
compounded with zpos, wapd, wept, dd, take a dative depend- 
ing on the preposition : | 

emioThunv eurroiv tH oxy to produce knowledge in the soul (XM.2.1%), 
ouveTorcuer Kipw mpos avtdv he joined Cyrus in the war against him (XA.1.4?), 
emixetoOat Tots StaBatvovor to press hard upon them while crossing (XA.4.3"), 
mpoceAGeiv TH Shuw to come before the people (D.18"*), maptcracOa aAdAhAois 
to stand by one another (XH.6.5**), mapeouév cor we are with you (XA.6.4) 
nepiminrew Evupopais to (fall about) be involved in misfortunes (PLg.877°), 
dmoketcOa TH &pxovTe to be subject to the ruler (PGo.510°). 

a. Sometimes the same preposition is repeated before the object: mdpeort 
map qjucv (SPhil.1056). 

b. Distinct from these are the compounds which take the dative on 
account of their general meaning, according to the foregoing rules. 


Dative of Instrument, Means, Cause, Manner. 


776, The dative is used to denote the means or instrument, 
the cause, and the manner: as épav tots 6dGadrpots to see with 
the eyes, piya drokecba to perish by cold, xupeiv Spdpym to ad- 
vance at a run. 

Further examples: 


MEANS OR INSTRUMENT: ovdels Exaivoy jdovais éxtheato no one gets praise 
by pleasures (Care.fr.7), xp} wep) Trav wedAAdvTwy TexpalperOat Tots HON yeyevnue- 
vors we must judge of the future by what has already happened (1.6°°), yuwabevres 
Ti oKevn TaY BrArwy recognized by the fashion of their arms (7.1.8), bavar@e 
(nusovv to punish by death (XC.6.3°"), AlBors EBadrAov they pelted them with 
stones (XA.5.4°°), 

CAUSE: ayvoig éetauaprdvovar they err by reason of ignorance (XC.3.1°%), 
nyouvra juas PdBw ov emevar they think we do not attack them through fear 
(T.5.97), oddels obdty mevig Spacer none will do aught because of want (ArKecl.605). 

MANNER: TovTw TS Tpdmw eropevOnoay in this way they proceeded (XA.3.4”%), - 
Kpavyn WoAAT ewido they advance with loud outery (XA.1.74), arede? TH viK 
aveetnoay they retired with their victory incomplete (1.8.27), tuxn ayab7 Karap- 
xétw let him begin (with good luck) and may fortune favor at (PSym.177°). 
So Bia by force, forcibly, otyh silently, cwovd hastily, earnestly. | 


The following are special uses of this dative: 


(77. The verb ypdoua use (properly serve myself) takes the dative 
(of means), as in Latin wtor takes the ablative: Ady@ xpavrar they use 
reason (XM.3.3"). 


a. A predicate-noun is often added in the same case: Tovrois xpa@vrat 
Sopupédpors these they use as body-gquards (XHier.5*). The accusative of a neuter — 
pronoun specifies the use made of an object (cf. 716 b): ri BovAerar may 
xejcba; for what does he want to use us? (XA.1.318). a 


at, ‘ 4 
tet Sr 
ee 


DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT, MEANS, ETC. Q49 





78. The dative of cause is used with many verbs of feeling ; thus 
dopa, xaipw am pleased, &xOopac am vexed, dyavaxtéw am indignant, 
| xaderaive am angry, ainxivopa am ashamed : 

| gbdev) oftw xXalpets ds plrois ayabois you delight in nothing so much as in 
good friends (XM.2.6%), axGeobels TH avaBor7 vexed at the delay (XH.1.6"), 7 
| Exarovip xXadewalvoyres Tois cipnucvors angry with Hecatonymus for what he 
had said (XA.5.5"*), aicxivouat ror tais mpdtepov duaptias J am ashamed of 
‘my former errors (ArEq.1355), éyaravres 7H owrnpla being content with their 
safety (Lys.2"), xarew@s pepw Tots mapovar mpayyuact 1 am distressed at the 
| present occurrences (XA.1.3°). 

» a. But all these verbs take also émt with the dative (799, 2 d). For the 
' genitive with some similar verbs, see 744. 


| 779, a. As dative of manner are used several feminine forms with omitted 
substantive (cf. 622 and 283): tabrn (exelyn, , wh) in this (that, which, what) 
| way or manner, id(a (Snuoola, Kor) by individual (public, common) action or 
expense. 

bp. This dative often means according to: robte 7G Ady according to this 
statement, TH ent youn in iny judgment, 7H bAndela in truth, + byte in reality, 
epyy in act, in fact, Adyy in word, in profession, mpopacer ti pretence. 


: 
i 
i 
i 


i 


__ ¢. Note the peculiar dative with déxoua: Tay médewv ov Sexouevwy avTous 
| GryopS obd8 Hore, USart dt Kad Spuw as the cities did not admit them to market 
( nor town, but (only) to water and anchorage ('T.6.44). 

: 

780, Dative or Resprcr.—The dative of manner is used to show in what 
| particular point or respect something is true: Suapepew aperh to be distin- 
_ guished in virtue (PCharm.157°), icxvew Tots cdpact to be strong in their bodies 
‘ (XM.2.7"), rats Woxats epiwuerveorepa firmer in their spirit (XA.3.1%), 7d 
“ mporrey Tov Agyew borepov ov TH Taker mpdTepov TH Svyduet éort action, though 
' after speech in order, is before it in power (D.3"°), This use of the dative is 
‘ very like the accusative of specification (718). 

‘a. So even with predicate or appositive substantives : wéAts Odwaxos ovduare 
a city Thapsacus by name (XA.1.4"). 


ar 





| 781, Dartve or Decres or Dirrerence.—The dative of manner 
_ is used, especially with the comparative, to show the degree by which 
' one thing differs from another: 


TH Kepary melCwv (taller by the head) @ head taller (PPhaed.101*), woAAats 
_yeveats forepa tay Tpwikay many generations later than the Trojan war 
(9.1.14), Sdka Zreot mpd THs ev Sadrapiv vavyaxias ten years before the sea-fight 
at Salamis (PLg.698°). 

| a. So, very often, the dative of neuter adjectives: moAA@ by much, waxp@ 
| by far, ortye by little, ete., oAAG xelpwy much worse, TP mayT) KpetrTwy (better 
_ by all odds) injinitely better, who war2dov dy picoiobe ; how much more would you 
be hated? (D.192), rocobte Hdiov (@ Bow TAclw Kéxtnpat L live more pleasantly 
i (by that degree, by which) the more J possess (XC.8.3"°).—But the accusatives 
| tl, ovdév, undév are always used instead of their datives; and sometimes woAd, 
| @ALyor. 

|b. The dative occurs also with the superlative, waxpe dpiotos best by far. 












250 PREPOSITIONS. [782 


Dative of Time and Place. 


782, Dative or Time.—The dative is used to denote the 


time at which something is, or is done: ty torepaia on the 


following day. 

This applies to statements of the particular day, night, month, year ; an 
attributive, therefore, must always be used with the substantive : T QuTy 
nepa the same day Y, TH9¢ Ti} vuKTi to-night, TQ emidyTt pvt in the coming “month 
(PLg.767°), rerdptw ever in the fourth year (T1. 108) ;—also to Spa: xemdvos 
dpa in time of winter (Andoc.1!*") ;—further to festival times : @ecpopopiors 
at the Thesmophoria (ArAv.1519). 

a. To other words, év is added: év rovTw TG xpdvey at this time, év 7} mapdvte 
at the present time. This is rarely omitted : TH TpoT pa axxanola at the time 
of the former assembly (T.1.44), xemuepl@ vdtw at the time of the wintry south 
wind (SAnt.335). 


783, Dative or PLace.—In poetry, the dative is often used with- 
out a preposition, to denote the place iz which something is, or is done: 


‘EAAGOL otkia vatwy in Hellas inhabiting dwellings (11 595), thv 7° ovpeor 
réxtoves &vdpes ekérayoy which on the mountains builders felled (N 390), ebde 
pox Kasroins he slumbered in the corner of the tent (1 663), T6& dpoiow exov 
bearing the bow on his shoulders (A 45), 

a, Here belongs the poetical dative with verbs of ruling: Hm. Tatoo 
pianpeTpoow avadcow among the oar-loving Taphians I reign (a 181). 

b. In prose, the names of Attic demes, and very rarely those of other 
places, are thus used in the dative: Meafrn at Melite (Isae.11*"), 7a tpdmaa 
rd, te Mapaddu kad Sadrauive kal TAaraais the trophies at Marathon, Salamis, 
and Plataea (PMenex.2454), 


c. The dative in this use has the office of the old locative case. For the 
surviving forms of the locative itself, see 220. 


PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASES. 


784, The prepositions have a twofold use: 
1. In composition with verbs, they define the action of the verb. 


2. As separate words, connected with particular cases, they show | 


the relations of words in a sentence, more distinctly than the cases 
alone could do it. 

a. The name preposition (apdé0ecis) is derived from the former use. Such 
words, therefore, as aveuv without, wAhv except, etc., which are not compounded 
with verbs, are not really prepositions at all. They are sometimes called 
improper prepositions. They. all take the genitive (758), except as, which 
takes the accusative (722 a). 


785, All the prepositions were originally adver bs. Many of them are still 
used as such in poetry, especially in Hm.: mepi rownd about, exceedingly (in 


5 





t4 


ait | 
as. 
a 


788] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 251 


the sense exccedingly some write mép:); oly 5€ and therewith. Hd. has em) 6é 


and thereupon, wera 5é and next, év 6€ and among the nuinber ; also mpbs dé, 


kat mpds and besides, which occur even in Attic prose. 
a. The preposition may belong to éori or eiol (rarely eiul) understood, and 


- may thus stand for a compound verb: so, even in Attic prose, @ for éveort 


tt is possible ; in Attic poetry, mépa for mdpeors is at hand, wapeu 1 am here. 
Hm. has also @m, péra, for éreoti, wéreor:, etc. For retraction of the accent 


- (anastrophe) in this case, see 109 b, 


786. On account of this origin, the prepositions in Hm. are very free as 
regards their position, being often separated from the verbs (¢mesis, 580 a) 
or substantives to which they belong: év & a’rds educeTo vdpoma xadrndy und 
he himself put on the shining brass (B 578), aul 5& xatrat buors atooovra and 
round their shoulders wave the manes (Z 509). 


a. In Attic prose, the preposition is separated from its substantive only 
by words that qualify the substantive: but particles such as meéy, 6é, yé, té, 


_ yap, ovv, may be interposed after the preposition; other words very rarely: 


mapa yap oiuat Tovs vduous for contrary, I suppose, to the laws (PPol.30U°). 

b. The regular order of words rdy uév &vdpa (666 c) generally changes with 
a preposition to mpbs méy Toy dopa or mpds Tdy avSpa per. 

Use of different cases with the prepositions. 


787. In general, the dative is used with prepositions, to express 


being mm a particular situation; the accusative, for coming to it; the 


genitive, for passing from it: péver mapa ro Baowet he remains (by the 
side of) in the presence of the king, nxet map avrov he is come to his pres- 
ence, oixeTar map avtod he is gone from his presence. 

a. But there are exceptions to this: thus the accusative sometimes ex- 


presses extension over an object: kara Oettadlay throughout Thessaly ; and 


the genitive sometimes mere belonging to or connection with an object: mpd 


_ tav tvday before the gates. 


188, Verbs of motion sometimes have a preposition with the dative, 
to denote a state of rest following the action of the verb: ev r@ worayo 
emecov they fell (into, and were) in the river (XAges.1**). So too, with 
verbs of rest, we sometimes have a preposition with the accusative 


or genitive, because of an implied idea of motion: ortds eis pécor 


(lit. standing into the midst) coming into the midst and standing there 


_(Hd.3.62), cadnued? axpwv ex maywy we sat (and looked down) from the 
top of a hill (SAnt.411). This is called constructio praegnans. 


“sy 


=, 





a. Similarly 6 ex is often said for 5 év when the verb of the sentence im- 
plies removal: of ék tijs &yopas KatadumdyTes TA Bia Epvyov the market-people 
(those in the market) left their goods and fled (XA.1.2}*), 

__b. These principles apply to adverbs: Smo nabéotrauey whither (arrived) we 
stand (SOc.23), ayvoet roy excidev wérAcuov Sedpo jjtovra (for Toy exe? wéAEuov) 
he knows not that the war in that region will come hither (D.1"). 

ce. Phrases meaning from are used (as in Latin) to denote position with 

respect to the observer: éx detias (a dextra) on the right, éxarépwbey on either 


hand, %v0ev nat %vbev on this side and on that. 





259 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [789 


General View of the Prepositions. 


189. In Attic prose the prepositions are used as follows: 
With the Accusative only: ava, eis. 

With the Genitive only: dyvri, dzd, ég, mpd. 

With the Dative only: & and ov. 

With the Accusative and Genitive: dui, did, xard, werd, trép. 


With the Accusative, Genitive and Dative: én, zapd, zepi, 
TOS, U7. 

a. In poetry, avd, audi and mera are also used with the dative; and dud 
is so used by Herodotus, 


190, The meaning of the prepositions with the different cases is explained 
in sections 791-808. The beginner, however, should note especially the fol- 
lowing 


COMMONEST DISTINCTIONS OF MBANING. 


aypi and wepi: with genitive concerning ; with accus. around, about. 

dud: with genitive through ; with accus. on account of. 

kara: with genitive against ; with accus. along, over, according to. 

pera: with genitive with ; with accus. after. 

umep: with genitive above, in behalf of ; with accus. over, beyond. 

emi: With genitive and dative on; with accus. to, toward, for. 

mapa: with genitive from, with dative with, near; with accus. fo, 
contrary to. 

apds: With gen. on the side of ; with dat. at, besides ; with acc. to, toward. 

two: With genitive by, under ; with dative and accus wnder. 


Ose of the Prepositions. 


apol. 
191, audi (Lat. amb-) properly on both sides of (ci. appw both), 
hence about (cf. mepi, 803). 


1, Wirn GENITIVE, about, concerning, rare in prose: aud) ay elxov Siapepe- 
pevar guarrelling about what they had (XA.4.51"). 

Very rarely of place: aug) tatrys ris wéAsos (about) in the neighborhood 
of this city (Hd.8.104). 


2. Wira pativE, only Tonie and poetic, about, and hence concerning, on 
account of: ipdaoet rerAaudy dd orhOecor the shield-strap will sweat about 
his breast (B 388), dup) arddy 7H eu metcoual tor concerning my departure, 
1 will obey you (Hd.5.19), aud) déBe by reason of fear (HOr.825). 


3. Witu accusative, about, of place, time, etc.: dud) 7a Spia (about) elose 
to the boundaries (XO.2.4"), dug) uécov fuépas about midday (XA.4.4!), dup 7a 
mevtiiKovtTa. about fifty (XA.2.6"), dul detrvoy eixev he was busy about dinner 
(XC.5.544), r) 


a 


195] PREPOSITIONS WITH CASES. 253 


Phrases: oi dudt tia a person with those about him, his friends, followers, 
soldiers, etc. 
IN CoMPOSITION : about, on both sides. 


ava. 
792. dvd originally wp (opposed to xara). 


1. WirH DATIVE, only in Epic and lyric poetry, upon: ava Tapydpw a&xpw 
on the summit of Gargarus (0 152), xpicép ava oxnmrtpy upon a golden staff 
(A 15). 


2. WITH ACCUSATIVE, wp along ; passing over, through (cf. kard with acc., 
800, 2): 

a. bf place: ava macay Thy yi over the whole land (XAges.9"), ava orpardv 
through the camp (A 10), ava Tov motaudy up the river (Hd.2.96). 

b. Of time: ava macay huécpay every day (XC.1.2°), Hm. ava vinta through 
the night (= 80). 

ce. In distributive expressions: dvd éxardy by hundreds (XA.5.4!"). 

Phrases: ava xpdtos (up to his power) with all his might (XA.1.10"), ava 
Adyov according to proportion (PPhaed.110*), ava ordua exew to have in one’s 
mouth, to talk about (B 250). 


In composition: up, back, again. 


avrt. 
1938, dyri instead of, for. 
WITH GENITIVE only: avr) ris apxiis SovAclav arAAdéarOu in exchange for 
empire, to get slavery (Andoc.2”"). 
a. The original meaning, facing, opposite to, was lost, except in composition. 
IN COMPOSITION : against, in opposition to, in return. 


ard. 

194, dd (Lat. ab) from, off, away from (properly from a position 
on something). : 

WITH GENITIVE only: 

a. Of place: Hm. af’ trmwy dato xauace from the (horses) car he sprang 
to the ground (11 733), a@ trou Onpevew to hunt (from a horse) on horseback 
(XA.1.27). 

b. Of time: ard TovTov Tov xpdvov (from) since that time (XA.7.5°). 

ce. Of cause: amd ~vuuaxlas abrévouor independent from the terms of an 
alliance (T.7.57), amd EvvOjuaros jret he ts come by agreement (T.6.61). 

Phrases: dmb cxorov away from the mark, amiss (PTheaet.179°), amd tavto- 
parov (from self-moved action) without occasion, of itself (Ae.1!""), aad oréuatos 
eimety to repeat by heart, lit., from mouth (XSym.8°). 

IN COMPOSITION: from, away. 


dud. 
195. dua (Lat. di-, dis-) through (originally between, asunder). 


1, WITH GENITIVE: 
a. Of place: Hm. dia mev domldos HAGE Hacivijs bBpyuoy éyxos through the 
ining shield passed the stout spear (H 251), 

12 


254 PREPOSITIONS WITH CASES. [796 


b. Of time: 6:0 vuerds through the night (XA.4.6?). 

c. Of means: dv Epunvéws Aéyety to speak by an interpreter (XA.2.3"), 

d. Of a state of action or feeling: avrozs 51a moA€uou iévat to proceed (in the 
way of war) in a hostile manner toward them (XA.38.28), dia pdBov ylyverOa 
to come to be in a state of alarm (PLg.791>), 

e. dé with the genitive often denotes an inferval of space or time: 5d 
Marpod aster a long interval (T.6.15), dia rerpaxoclwy eray after (an interval of) 
400 years (1.6°"), bia S€xa emdrkewy mipyor joay at intervals of’ ten battlements, 
there were towers (T.3.21). 


Phrases: 514 otduaros éxew to have in one’s mouth, i. e., passing through 


the mouth (XC.1.4"), d:& xempds exew to have in hand (7.2.18), dia tTaxéwv 
(by quick ways) quickly (XA.1.5°), 51a TéAous completely (SAj.685). 


2. WITH ACCUSATIVE : 

a. Regularly, on account of: 8 vdcov Tod tarpod laos on account of sick- 
ness he is fond of the physician (PLys.218°). 

b. Through, during, mostly poetic: Hm. 514, déuara through the halls (A 600), 
dia vinta during the night (7 66). 


Phrases: abtds 80 éavrdy by and for himself (PRp.8679), dia rl; why, where- 
fore? 


In composition: through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-): Siapépw = differo. 
eis. 


196, eis (also és) into, to (properly to a position in something, op- 
posed to e& out of) = Lat. im with accusative. 

WITH ACCUSATIVE only: 

a. Of place: Sucedo) e& *ItaAlds S:eBnoay és Suneatay the Siculi passed over 
from Italy into Sicily (1.6.2), eis avipas eyypapew to enrol among men, i. e., 
write into the list of men (D.19°*°°). 

b. Of time: és 7& till dawn (A 875), és eué to my time (Hd.1.92), eis 
éviautéy (to the end of a year) for a whole year (x 467). An action may be 
thought of as taking place when a certain time is come to ; hence eis is also 
used for the time when, especially a fixed or expected time: €ddxee yap eis 
Thy éemovoay ew jkew Bacirda for it was thought that on the next morning the 
king would arrive (XA.1.7'). 

e. Of other relations: eis tetpaxoctovs to the number of 400, about 400 
(XA.3.3°), eis é6x7d to the depth of eight men, eight deep (XA.7.17%), eis Stvauw 
to the extent of one’s power (XA.2.87*), maiSever avOpemous eis aperhy to train 
men with a view to virtue (PGo.519°), és réAos finally (EIon 1261). 


IN COMPOSITION : into, in, to. 


Norr.—In Attic prose, eis is the common form: only Thucydides (like Hd.) 
has és. The poets use either form at pleasure. 


év. 
797. év (Am. evi) in, = Lat. in with the ablative. 


WITH DATIVE only: 

a. Of place: év Smaprn in Sparta (T.1.128) :—with a word implying num- 
ber, it has the sense of among: év tots pidois among their friends (XA.5.4°*). 

b. Of time: év T@ xem in the winter (XOec.17°). 

ce. Of other relations: év T@ Oe@ Td TéAos jv (in the power of) with God, 
was the issue (D.18'%), éy mapackevg elvat to be ix preparation (T.2.80), 





¥ 


¢ 


799) PREPOSITIONS WITH CASES. 255 


Phrases: év émdo1s eiva to be under arms (XA.5.9"'), ev airiag Exew twa to 
hold one (in blame) responsible (T.1.35), meipdooua ev koup@ cor elvar I will 
try to be (in good time) useful to you (XH.3.4°). 

IN COMPOSITION : 2”, On. 

Notr.—Rare poetic forms are «iy, eivt. 


é§. 

798. é& (before consonants éxk: Lat. ex, ¢) out of, from (properly 
From a position im something). 

WITH GENITIVE only: 

a. Of place: é« Smrdprns pevyet he is banished from Sparta. 

b. Of time: é« maddés (from a child) since childhood (XC.5.1*). Hence of 
immediate succession: Adyov é« Adyou Aéyew to make one speech after another 
.18?!*). 
: c. 0} origin: éx tay Gedy yevoydres born of the gods (1.1281), Hence with 
passive verbs (instead of id with the gen.): tivaic@a &x tives to be honored 
by some one: the agent is then viewed as the source of the action; this con- 
struction is rare in Attic, but frequent in other dialects. 

d. Of inference: é« Tay mapdvtwy (judging from) according to the present 
circumstances (T.4.17). 

Phrases: éx deétas on the right hand (788 c), é« wodAov at a great distance, 
ever since a remote time, ef icov on an equality, Bical (kpeuaoa) Te x Tivos to 
bind (hang) one thing on another. 


In composition: out of, from, away. 


199, emi on, upon. ig 

1, WITH GENITIVE: 

a. Of the place where: mpodpatvero 6 Kipos ép’ &puaros Cyrus appeared upon 
a chariot (XC.8.3'%), éml rov edwvimou (sc. Képws) on the left wing (XA.1.8°). 

b. Of the place whither: em) Sdwou macty to sail toward Samos (T.1.116). 

c. Of time: em tev mpoydvwy in our forefathers’ time (Ae.3""8), 

d. In other relations: Aéyeiw emt tivos to speak with reference to some one 
(PCharm.155%), ep Eavrod oixety to live by himself (T.2.63), éw oAlywv TeTay- 
pevor drawn up few men deep (XA.4.811), él ywouns yevérOau to take a resolu- 


thon (D.4°), et tivos KexAjoba to be named after some one (Hd.4.45). 


j 
is. 
‘ 





2. WITH DATIVE: 

a. Of place: Hm. em x@ovi otrov eovres eating bread upon the earth (@ 222), 
em TH Oaddoon oiketcOat to be situated (close upon) by the sea (XA.1.4'). 

b. Of time: éml rovrots after this, thereupon (XC.5.5"!), 

ce. Of aim or condition: ém) maidela totTo euabes in order to an education 
hast thow learned this (PProt.812>), ém rékw SavelCew to lend on interest 
(Plig.742°), em rotcde on these conditions (T.3.114). 

d. In other relations: ém! rots mpayyaow eiva to be at the head of affairs 
(D.9°), em) rots moAepiows ctv to be in the power of the enemy (XA.5.8""), ext 
Tit xatpewy to rejoice (on the ground of) at something (XM.2.6*°). 


3. WITH ACCUSATIVE: 

a. Of place: Zo, upon, against: dvaBaivery ép trmov to mount on horseback 
(XA.1.8%), em Seid toward the right (XA.6.4!), ém) Baotréa igvar to march 
against the king (XA.1.3), 


206 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [800 


b. Of extension over place or time: én) macay Evpéwrny throughout all Eu- 
rope (PCriti.112°), ém rpets nucpas for (during) three days (XA.6.6*), 

ce. Of an object sought: tpéxw ’m ropuvyy I run to fetch a ladle (ArAy.'79). 

Phrases: éx wort to a great extent (1.1.6), ds ém +b word for the most part 
(T.2.13), 7d én’ eué so far as I am coneerned (EOr.1345). 

IN COMPOSITION: upon, over, after, toward, unto. Often it cannot well be 
translated. 


KATO. 
800. xara (cf. adv. xarw below) originally down (opposed to dvd). 


1. WITH GENITIVE: 

a. Down from: Hm. BH 8€ nat’ OvdAvuroio Kaphyvey he went down from the 
heights of Olympus (A 44). 

b. Underneath: nara yijs underground (PPhaedr.2498), 

c. Down upon: pipov kata Tis Kepadijs Kataxéo to pour ointment over the 
head (PRp.398?). 

d. Against a person (of speaking, etc.): Pevdeo0ar ard tivos to speak falsely 
against one (PEuthyd.284*). Rarely in a good sense: concerning, respecting. 

Phrases: wéAw nar’ &xpas éretv to take a city completely, i. e., from its 
highest point down (T.4.112), xara verou in the rear of an army (T.4.33). 


2. WITH ACCUSATIVE, down along; passing over, through; pertaining to, 
according to, opposite: 3 

a. Of place: xara pdoy down stream (Hd.2.96), kara Oerrartav throughout 
Thessaly (POr.45°), nara yiv nal nara OddraTrray (over) by land and by sea 
(XA.3.2!%), 7d Ka® aitovs the part opposite them (XA.1.87'). 

b. Of time: kar’ éxeivoy roy xpdvoy at that time (T.1.139), of ka? juas our 
contemporaries (D.20"), 

ce. Of other relations: nara troy adtdy tpdmov (according to) in the same 
manner (XC.8,2°), kara mwdvra in all respects (D.24'"5), nara Stivauw according 
to ability (Hd.3.142), nara rods vduous according to the laws (D.8*), rd Kar’ ene 
as regards me (D.18*4"). 

d. In distributive expressions: Hm. rata piaa by clans, each clan by itself 
(B 362), kard dv0 by twos, two by two (D.20"), Kal nucpay day by day (T.1.2). 

IN composition: down, against. Often it serves only to strengthen the 
meaning of the simple verb, and in many such cases it cannot be translated. 


WET O. 
801, perd amid, among. 
1. With GENITIVE, with, implying participation (cf. ctv, 806): werd tvupd- 
xev Kwdvvedvery to mect the dangers of battle in common with allies (1.8.24), 
ueTa TOAA@Y Saxpvwv with (amid) many tears (PAp.34°). 


2. WirH Dative, poetic, chiefly Epic: Hm. °Exropa ds Oeds ake per” avdpaor 
Flector who was a god among men (0 258). 


3. WITH ACCUSATIVE : 

a. Usually after, in time or order: pera rovrov tov xpovov after this time 
(PRp.537>), werd Beods Woxh Oedtaroy next to the gods, the soul is most divine 
(PLg.726?). 

b. Zo (a position) among or along with, poetic: Hm. idy pera eOvos Eralpwv 
going among the multitude of his friends (H 115), 


Dy 
J r 


et 


q 


ag 
» 
i. ] 
t 
ql ae 


803 | PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 257 


c. After (in quest of), poetic: Hm. Sijvat werd marpds axovhy to go in quest 
of tidings of a father (B 308). 

Phrases: peta xetpas éxew to have in hand, properly, to take between 
the hands and hold there (Ae.1"), we@ jucpay by day (Ant,5**). 


IN composition: with (of sharing), among, between, after, from one place to 
another (werarievan to put in a new place). 


TOPO. 
802. mapa (Hm. also mdp, rapai) alongside of, by, near. 


1, WitH GENITIVE, from beside, from: Hm. rapa vndv bb amovoorhoey to 
return from the ships (M 115), AawBdvery mapa morculwy to take from the enemy 
(XHier.1*). Very rarely, and only in poetry, simply alongside of: vaserav 
map "Iounvod pelOpwy dwelling by the eurrents of Ismenus (SAnt.1123). 


2. WitH DATIVE: with, beside: mapa T@ SidacKddw otretabau to dine with 
the teacher (XC.1.2°), Hm. uid ew mapa vnvol copwrice to remain by the curved 
ships (B 392). Figuratively: aap’ éuei in my opinion (Hd.1.32). 


3. WITH ACCUSATIVE, 0 (a position) beside, unto: also along by: 

a. Of place: Hm. ta & adres trny mapa vijas but they two went again to the 
ships (A 347), Bn & axéwv rapa Civa morAvprcio Boo Saracons he went sorrowing 
along the shore of the roaring sea (A 34). 

b. Of time: wap’ Gdrov roy Bioy (along by) during his whole life (MMon.131). 

c. Of comparison: mapa rods %AAous evTaxTay obedient in comparison with 
the others (XM.4.4'). 

d. Of cause: mapa rhy nuerépay aucdrciay Sidimmos eantinta through our 
neglect Philip is becoming great (D.4!'), properly, by it, in connection with it. 

e. Of exception or opposition: @xw mapa Tata &AAO Tt Aéyew beside this I 
have another thing to say (PPhaed.107*), mapa tobs vduous contrary to the laws 
(XM.4.4*), properly, passing by or beyond them, trans-gressing them, the 
opposite of kara with acc. (800, 2 c). 

Phrases: map pixpdv by little, within a little, mapa pixpdsy 7AOov arobavely 
LI came near dying (1.19°), mapa mod’ viray to be (victorious by much) com- 
pletely victorious (T.1.29), map’ dAtyoy moteto Oa to esteem lightly (XA.6.611). 


In composition: beside, along by or past, aside, amiss. 


qrept. 
803. wepi arownd (on all sides, cf. audi 791). 


1. With GENITIVE: 

a. Chiefly in derived sense, about, concerning (Lat. de): tiva ywdunv éxes 
mepl Tis Topetas ; what opinion have you about the march ? (XA.2.2)°). 

b. In Hm. surpassing, mere than: rep wdytov Eupevar %AAwy to be superior 
to all others (A 287). Hence, in prose, such phrases as rep) toAAov Troreto Oa 
to consider as (more than much) very important (PAp.46°), wept cddevds hryetabas 
to esteem (just above nothing) very low, think little of (Lys.31*"). Cf. 746 a. 


2. With pative, not frequent in Attic prose: 

a. Of place: OapaKa Exer wept Tots oTépyois he wears a cuirass round his 
breast {XC.1.2'), 

b. Of cause: dedudres wep) TH Xwplw being alarmed for the place (T.1.60). 


258 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [804 


8. WITH ACCUSATIVE, nearly the same as audi: mep) ‘EAAhomovroy about 
the Hellespont, in the region of the Hellespont (D.8*); and in derived sense, 
omovdace wep) Thy ToriTrelay to be busily engaged about the government (1.8°), 
Tu wep Thy yewpylav what pertains to husbandry (X0.20'). 


IN COMPOSITION: around (remaining) over, surpassing (with adjectives = 
Lat. per- in permagnus). 
For Hm. wept as adverb exceedingly, see '785. 


2 


TPO. 


804, apo (Lat. pro) before. 


WITH GENITIVE only: 

a. Of place: apd Trav muddy before the gates (XH.2.4*). 

b. Of time: mpd ris udyns before the batile (XA.1.7}8), 

c. Of preference: apd Todrov TeOvdvat Edro:ro before this he would rather 
choose death (PSym.179). 

d. Of protection or care: pdxerba mpd maliwy to fight for one’s children, 
properly, in front of them (© 57), mpd vuay aypumvety to watch in your behalf 
Px. 16°"). 

Phrases: wp woddod trovetc Oa (to esteem in preference to much) ¢o consider 
as valuable, important (1.5'4), Hm. apd 6800 further on the way (A 382). 


In composition: before, forward, forth. 


TPS. 
805. apdés (Hm. also mpori, mori) at or by (properly confronting). 


1. WITH GENITIVE: 

a. In front of, looking towards, on the side of: mpbs Opakns KetoOu to be 
situated over against Thrace (D.23'*), +k apds Eomépas TeTxos the westward wall 
(XH.4.418), 

Similarly in swearing: mpds Oey before the gods, by the gods (XA.5.7°). So 
mpos marpds on the father’s side, pbs untpds on the mother’s side (D.21). 

b. To express what is natural or appropriate on the part of some one: 
mpos yuvaikds jy it was the way of a.woman (AAg.1636), ob jv mpds Tod Kipou 
Tpdmou it was not according to the character of Cyrus (XA.1.2"), 

c. From: emavov éxav mpbs vuav having praise from you (XA.7.6*). 
Sometimes used with passive verbs (instead of tmd, 808, 1 b): mpds Seay 
épdmevos scen by the gods (AKum.411): cf. éx, 798 ¢. 


2. WITH DATIVE: 

a. At: 6 Kipos iv mpds BaBvadu Cyrus was at Babylon (XC.7.5'). Also in 
derived sense, engaged in: mpds Epyw eivou to be busied with a work (XH.4.8?*), 

b. In addition to: mpbs tovrors besides this, furthermore (XC.1.2°). 


3. WITH ACCUSATIVE : 

a. To: &pxevras mpds nuas they come to us (XA.5.7°°), Adéare mpds me speak 
to me (XA.3.8”). Also against : iévat mpds Tobs ToAeutous to march against the 
enemy (XA.2.61°), } 

b. Towards: apds Boppay towards the north (T.6.2). Especially of disposi- 
tion or relation toward some one: oikelws SiaxetoOar wpds tiva to be confiden- 
tially disposed towards one (XA.7.5"°), crovdas morncacba mpds tiva to make a 
truce with one (T.4.15). 


808] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 259 


c. In reference to, with a view to: mpds ratta in view of this, therefore 
(APr.915), Siapdpery mpds apernv to have the advantage in respect to virtue 
(PAp.35°), mpds ti we abr’ epwrds ; to what end do you ask me this? (XM.3.7°), 
mpos TO apyvpiov Thy evdaimovidy Kpivery to Judge of happiness (by reference 
to) according to money (1.4"°). 

Phrases: mpds ndoviv, xdpw with a view to please, gratify (APr.494, SPhil. 
1155), mpds Blay by force, forcibly (APr.208), mpbs dpyhy in anger, angrily 
(SEI.369), ovdéy mpds cue at rs nothing to me (D.18"'). 

In composition : to, towards, in addition. 


ov. 
806. civ (also £év) with, i. e. in company with, in connection with 
= Lat. cum (cf. pera with the gen., 801, 1): 


WITH DATIVE only: 

eraidevero oly TO GdeAPH he was educated with his brother (XA.1.97), civ 
Oeois with the help of the gods (XC.6.4'°), civ 7G vou in conformity with the 
law (XC.1.31"), 


IN CompPosITION : with, together. 


trrép. 
807. inép (Hm. also imeip) over = Lat. super. 


1. WITH GENITIVE : 

a. Of place: 6 HAos trép judy wopevera the sun journeys above us (XM.3.8°). 

b. In derived sense, for, in behalf of: wdxeobat brép tios to fight for one, 
orig. over him, standing over to defend (PLg.642°), movety iwtp cov to labor 
in your behalf (XA.7.3°!). Also on account of: trip ris éAcvOepids vuas 
evdaimoviCw I congratulate you on account of your freedom (XA.1.7°), 

c. Concerning (= mept), rarely found before Demosthenes: rihy tiép tod 
mMoheuov ywounv ToavTny exe to have such an opinion concerning the war (D.2'). 


2. WiTu AccUSATIVE, over, beyond, of place and measure: Hm. trép odddv 
éBnaero he passed over the threshold (v 63), of trép ‘EAAhomovtov otkodvtes those 
who dwell beyond the Hellespont (XA.1.1°), drép Sbvauy beyond one’s ability(D.21). 


In composition : over, beyond, exceedingly, an behalf of. 


bd. 
808. iad (Hm. also trai) under = Lat. sub. 


1, WiTH GENITIVE : 

a. Less often under, of place: tmd yijs under the earth (PAp.18>). Hence 
in some expressions of dependence: ém adAntav xwpeiy to march under the 
lead of flute-players (T.5.70). 

b. Much more frequently, by, of agency, with passive verbs: ériuaro id 
tov Shuov he was honored by the people (XH.2.3"), bird trav SovAwy dréCavov 
they were slain by the slaves (XHier.10*). Cf. 820. 

c. Of cause: trd amdAolds évdierpiver through bad weather he delayed (T.2.85). 


2. With Dative, under: id tS ovpavg@ under the heavens (PPhaed.110°), 
id TH axpowérAa at the foot of the acropolis (XA.1.28), iad Bacirct civau to be 
under (the power of) the king (XC.8.1°). 


260 VOICES: ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. [s09 


3. WITH ACCUSATIVE : 

a. Of place, properly éo (a position) wnder: Hm. tmd wévrov édvceTo Kipmat- 
vovta he dived under the surging sea (A 253). Hence, in derived sense, of 
subjection: méAceis Te kal vn bp EavTovs moeioOa to bring cities and nations 
under their power (PRp.348°%). 

b. Of time (either impending or in progress) : imd vinta just before night 
(T.1.115), cf. Lat. sub noctem ; tmd thy vinta during the night (Hd.9.58). 

IN compPosiTION : under, secretly, slightly, gradually. It is sometimes used 
where the idea under is foreign to our conceptions, and in many such cases 
can hardly be translated. 


THE VOICES. 


ACTIVE. 


809. The active voice represents the subject as acting: 
thus tizrw L strike. 


810, The active voice of some verbs has both a transitive (598 a) 
and an intransitive meaning: 


eave tr. to drive, intr. to ride, march ; mparrewy tr. to do, intr. ed 
(kakés) mparrew to do or Sare well (all) ; exew tr. to have, hold, intr. 
Kahas exer Lat. bene se habet, it is well, éxe Sn stop now, €x npéua keep 
still.—In English, this 1s still more common, as in the verbs move, 
turn, break, melt, increase, etc. 

In some verbs, the two meanings belong to different tenses, see 500, 501. 

a. Some transitive verbs become intransitive in compounds: BddAAew to 
throw, cicBdddcw and éupdrrcw to make an invasion, also (of rivers) to empty 


Biddvar to give, évdiSdvar to give in, surrender, emididdvou to advance, By 
kémrew to cut, mpoxrdrrew to make progress. 


For intransitive verbs which become transitive in composition, see 712 c¢. 


MIDDLE. 


811, The middle voice represents the subject as acting on 
himself, or more exactly, as affected by his own action. 


The subject may be variously affected by the action. Hence we distinguish 
the following three uses of the middle. 


812, The Drrect Mipptz represents the subject as acting 
directly on himself: AoverPar to wash one’s self, bathe. 
So Tpemeo Bas to turn one’s self, émideixvvc0a to show one’s self, trracba to 


set one’s self, kaddm@reaOa to cover one’s self. The subject is also the direct 
object of the action. 





816] MIDDLE VOICE. 261 


a. In English, instead of the reflexive pronoun, an intransitive verb 
is often to be used: mavew to stop, maverGa (to stop one’s self) to cease ; 
daive to show, paiverOa (to show one’s self) to appear; weibew to 
persuade, weidecOa (to persuade one’s self) to trust, comply. 


b. The direct middle is much less frequent than the indirect ; instead of 
it, the active voice is generally used with a reflexive pronoun. Even with the 
middle voice a reflexive pronoun is sometimes used for the sake of clearness 
or emphasis: } Kaxk@oa Nuas ) oobas avtovs BeBardcacba either to harm us or 
to secure themselves (T.1.33). 


813. The Inprrect Mrippixz represents the subject as acting 
for himself, or on something belonging to himself : ropileoGat 
xpypata to provide money for one’s self, crdcacbar 70 Eidos 
to draw one’s (own) sword. 


So &yerOa yuvaira to take a wife (to one’s own house), moetobal tiva plaov 
to (make some one a friend) gain some one’s friendship (for one’s self), wera- 
méeumouat twa l send for one (that he may come to me), Tl0ecOar thy Wijpor to 
deposit one’s (own) vote. Sometimes the middle means ¢o, rather than for, 
one’s self: Hm. épéAnera: &vipa ofdnpos the iron draws the man to itself (aw 294), 


a. With ‘ward off’ ete. the middle is translated from (cf. 767 a): duive- 
g9a Kivdovoy to ward off danger (for, i. e.) from one’s self, rpémecOan Tos wode- 
tlous to turn the enemy from ourselves, put them to fight. 


$14, The SussectivE Mippte represents the subject as act- 
ing with his own means and powers, and differs but slightly 
from the active: 

mapéexew to furnish in any way, mapéxeoOa to afford from one’s own property $ 
tot méAcuov to make war simply, moretoOar mércuov to make war with one’s 
own resources ; AauBavew tt to take something, AapBdaveoOal tivos to take hold of 


something with one’s own hand; oxorety to view, cxoveicOa to take one’s own 
view, consider in his mind. 


a. Hence some intransitive verbs form a middle, which gives special promi- 
nence to the subject, as acting in his own sphere: BovAevew to take counsel, 
BovacvecOa to take one’s own counsel, form his own plan; modjirevew to be a 
citizen, act as such, modireverOa to perform one’s civic duties, to conduct public 
ajjairs ; mpecBevew to be an embassador, negotiator, mpexBeverOa (used of the 
State) to conduct its negotiations, by sending embassadors. 


815, In some verbs, the indirect middle has a causative use: 


diddcroua toy vidy I have my son taught (make others teach him for me), 
mapatlOeuct Setrvoy I have a meal served up to me (make others serve it for me). 
Cf. PMen.934, T.1.130. 


_ 816. The following verbs should be especially noted, as showing 
Important differences of meaning between active and middle: 
1. aipeiv to take ; aipeia Oa to choose. 


2. amodovva: to give back ; dmwodcaba to sell (give it away for one’s 
self, for value received). 


262 VOICES: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 7 [817 


4 


Ye 


4 = 


3. anew to attach ; drreocbai twos to touch something (attach one’s 


self to it). 


4. dpxew to begin (in advance of others, opposed to tarepeiy to be 
behind); dpxeoOa to begin (one’s own work, without reference to others, 
opposed to maveo Oa to cease). 


d. yapetv tomarry (of the man); yapetcOa to marry (of the woman). 
6. ypapew vopuov to write or propose a law ; ypadecbai twa to bring 


suit against some one (have him written down in the magistrate’s 
book). 


7. daveige to lend; SaveiteaOa to borrow (make another lend to 
one). 

8. duxagew to give judgment; SixdtecOa to maintain a suit at law 
(make another give judgment for one). 

9. €xew to hold ; e€xecOai twos to hold on to, hence be close to some- 
thing. 

10. pucbory to let for hire; pucbotcba to hire (make another let to 
one). 

11. riOévat vopovs to make laws for others (said of the lawgiver); 
TiGec Oat vopovs to make laws for itself (said of the people). 


12. ripwpeiy tur to avenge some one ; Tipwpeiabai twa to avenge one’s 
self on some one. 


13. gvAdrrew twa to watch (guard) some one; dvAdrrecOai twa to 
be on one’s guard against some one (watch him for one’s interest). 


a. The same verb may have different uses of the middle voice: thus 6:dd- 
gKoua indirect middle with causative meaning (815); but also as direct middle, 
L teach myself, learn. 


817, DEPONENT VERBS show the same uses of the middle voice, 
and differ from the verbs already given only in having no active: 


Thus direct middle, émoxveio@a (to hold one’s self under) to wndertake, 
promise ; indirect, SéxearOa to receive (to one’s self), nracOa to acquire (for 
one’s self), advaBimocacOa causative, to (make live again) 7e-animate ; subjective, 
aywviCerba to contend (with one’s own powers), oleo@a to think (in one’s own 
mind).—For passive deponents, see 497. 


For future middle used in passive sense, see 496. 


PASSIVE. 


818, The passive voice represents the subject as acted on, 
or suffering an action: tvarouat L am struck. 


a. Hence the object of the active verb becomes the subject of the 
passive. The subject of the active verb (the agent) is variously ex- 
pressed with the passive: usually by iad with the genitive (808, 1 b); 
coe by other prepositions (798 c, 805, 1c); sometimes by the dative 

769). 


Vs 
id 
: 4 


s 


820] PASSIVE VOICE. 263 


819. The passive is used in Greek more freely than in Latin, espe- 
cially in these particulars: 


a. Many intransitive verbs form a passive voice, the indirect ob- 
ject (genitive or dative) of the active becoming the subject of the 
passive. Thus in particular ¢pay love, dpyew rule, karappoveiy despise 
(which take the genitive); morevew trust, amoreiv distrust, pOoveiv 
envy, emBovrervew plot against, worepety war against (which take the 
dative) : 

pavOdvouciv upxew Te Kal &pxeoOa they learn to govern and to be governed 
(XA.1.94), Spa jyiy BovrdcterOar wh Katappovndapuer 'tis time for us to beware 
lest we be despised (XA.5.7"), murredeoOu tm tis matplios to be trusted by one’s 
country (XSym.4), nets im’ ’AOnvalwy émBovrevducda we are plotted against 
by the Athenians (1.1.82), p0ovndels td Tod ’Odvacews envied by Odysseus 
(XM.4. 288), 

b. With verbs of entrusting and enjoining, the dative sometimes becomes 
thus the subject of the passive verb, while the accusative, which would prop- 
erly become the subject, remains unchanged: of émiretpaupévor Thy puvdakhy 


(for éxetvor ois émitérpamta 4) duvdakn) those entrusted with the guard (T.1.126), 


&AAo te peiCov emitaxOhoedbe (for BAAO Te petCov emitaxOhaeTu vuiv) ye will 
have some other greater command imposed on you (T.1.140). 

ce. Neuter passive participles, representing the cognate accusative of the 
active (716 b), are formed from intransitive verbs: T& otparnyotpeva the 
things done in commanding, strategic operations (D.4*"), r& euol memoAtTreupeva 
my political course or conduct (D.18°°). 


d. Deponent verbs (though properly middle, 817) are sometimes used with 


passive meaning: in this use, the aorist and future take the passive form: 


; 


BidCecOa to do violence, aor. Bidcacu; but also pass. to suffer violence, aor. 
BiacOjva (cf. 499). So too in other verbs, a passive meaning may arise from 
that of the middle: aipeiy to take ; middle aipetr@m, aor. éAdaOae to choose ; 
passive aipetoba, aor. aipeOijva to be taken, also to be chosen. 


REMARK.—On the other hand, the Latin impersonal passive from intransi- 
tive verbs (curritur, ventum est, etc.) is unknown to the Greek. 


For the aorist passive with middle sense, see 498. 


820. The active of one verb sometimes serves as the passive of 
another. Thus dkovew, poet. Kdvew, (properly ‘hear’) in the sense of 
to be called or to be well or ill spoken of takes the place of the passive 
of Aéyerv. So ed macyxew (‘suffer well’) means to be treated well as 
passive of ed moceiv; dmoOvfcKew (‘die’) to be killed as passive of azo- 
kreive; pevyew (‘ flee’) to be banished or prosecuted as passive of dake; 
eximre (‘fall out’) to be cast out as passive of ékBddAXev; and often 
keto Oat (‘lie’) to be put replaces the rare perfect passive of ri@nu. 

Thus péya ed adxovew bmd ékaxirxirAlwy avOpérwy tis a great thing to be well 
spoken of by siz thousand men (XA.7.77°), viv néAakes kad Oeots éxOpol axovover 
now they are called fawners and god-hated (D.18**), év Opaxn yap amébavey tard 
Nikavdpou for he was slain by Nicander in Thrace (XA.5.1"), of wapaBatvovtes 
Tovs ind Tav Oedy Ketuevovs vduous those who transgress the laws appointed b 
the gods (XM.4.4"!), uh mws eyo iad MeAhrou toca’tas Slkds pbyore may 7 
never be prosecuted on such grave charges by Meletus (PAp.19°). 


4 


264 TENSES. ; [821 


THE TENSES. 


821, The tenses in Greek do not merely distinguish time, as in 
English. Besides doing this, they have another office; that of dis- 
tinguishing the action in relation to its own progress, as continued, 
completed, or simply brought to pass. 

This distinction of action pertains to all the modes, while the dis- 
tinction of time is nearly confined to the indicative. 


822, The present and imperfect represent the action as 
continued ; the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect as 
completed ; the aorist and future as indefinite, that is, as 
simply brought to pass. 

The difference will be best understood on comparing the meanings 
of the aorist, present, and perfect infinitives of several verbs: 


Aorist. Present. Perfect. 
moujoa to do. qovety to be doing, memonxéva to have done. 
be engaged in. 
amoOavey to die. amoOvnaokew to be teOvnxéva to be dead. 
dying. 
dvyeiv to flee, runaway, evyew tobe fleeing, mepevyéva to have got 
take flight, be banished. or im exile. safe off, be out of dan- 
ger. 
hoBnOnva to take fright, poBeicOa to fear, mepoBnaba to be terror- 
be frightened. be afraid. stricken. 
avOnca to blossom forth, avbeiv to bloom, be nvOnkéva to be in flower. 
burst into flower. blooming. 
miotrevoca, to put one’s mortevew to trust.  memorevkéva to have a 
trust. settled confidence. 


a. It is often hard to express these distinctions in English, and recourse 
must be had, sometimes to the ‘ progressive forms’ of the tenses, sometimes 
to other phrases, as shown above. Observe that the simple English verb is 
not always the same in this respect: thus ¢o sleep expresses continued action, 
to take, action brought to pass. 


b. The name of the aorist tense (adpioros indefinite) has reference to this 
characteristic of its meaning. 


ce. It is often said that the aorist expresses momentary action, and this 
is usually true. Nevertheless a prolonged action, when conceived as a single 
fact, may be expressed by the aorist. See 841 b. 


823, The tenses of the indicative also express time. The 
present and perfect express present time; the imperfect, aorist, 
and pluperfect express past time; the future and future per- 
fect express future time. This may be shown as follows: 


4 


? 


826] PRESENT INDICATIVE. 265 


ACTION Sire TO | ACTION CONTINUED. | ACTION COMPLETED. 


Pres. ypapo Perf. yéypapa 


PRESENT TIME, ah , 
am writing. hawe written. 


a Aor. éypavra Impf. e€ypapov | Plupf. éeyeypady 


wrote. was writing. had written. 
Fut. ypdrro Fut. to ee 
FUTURE TIME. Cae Wera wt will have 


been written. 


a. It will be observed that there is no tense for action brought to pass at 
the present time, or action continued at a future time. But the former is 
seldom or never needed, and for the latter the future may be used: ypdayw 
shall be writing. 


I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 


Present. 


824, The present represents an action as going on at the 
present time: ypadw J write or am writing. 


a. Customary actions and general truths are also expressed by the 
present: otros pev vdwp, éya & oivoy mtvw he drinks water, but I wine 
(D.19*°), rikres kdpos vBpw satiety begets insolence (Solon 8). 

b. But a general truth is sometimes expressed by the perfect or the future, 
as that which has been or will be true: woAAol 51a Sdtav peydAa Kaka memdv- 
Oao1 many on account of glory have suffered great evils (XM.4.2*°), avhp émenkys 
Gmovcoas Tt paota otce a reasonable man, when he has lost anything, will bear 
a very easily (PRp.603°).—For a similar use of the aorist, see 838. 


825, PRESENT OF ATTEMPTED AcTION.—The present may represent 
an action as attempted merely, not accomplished: thus did. may 
mean I offer, weidw I try to persuade. 

eLeAatvere Huas ex THs xdpas you are trying to drive us out of the country 
(XA.7.77). The same use is found in the other modes: Hm. répmovres muxivas 
akaxhuevov* ovdé Tt Ovu@ TépreTo seeking to cheer him in his grievous sorrow ; 

but not at all in spirit was he checred (T 312). 


826, With wdAa and other expressions of past time, the present is 
used, where in English the perfect would be required: mada ¢nrovpev 
we have long been seeking (SOt.1112). The imperfect is in like manner 
used for the English pluperfect. 


1 


266 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [827 


827. The present of some verbs may be used nearly in the sense 
of the perfect, to express the continued result of a completed action. 
Thus dxovw (I hear) may mean J (have heard) am informed ; vixaw (I 
conquer) may mean J (have conquered) am victorious; pevyw (I fice) 
may mean JI (have fled) am in exile; ddixéw (I do wrong) may mean 
J (have done wrong) am a wrong-doer. The presents 7x I am come, 
otxyona: IT am gone, are always used in this way. | | 


a. The imperfect of these verbs has a corresponding use: évixay I was 
victorious, etc. 


828, HistoricAL Present.—In vivid narration, a past event is 
often thought of and expressed as present : 


Adpeiov nal Tlapucaridos ylyvovra maides S00 of Darius and Parysatis are 
born two sons (XA.1.1'). The present in this use is freely interchanged with 
the past tenses: émel nyeiro “Apxldduos emt robs dyTimdAous, evTava ovK ede- 
tayro, GAN éyxAivovor when Archidamus led against the enemy, they did not 
abide the attack, but turn to flee (XH.7.5!"). 

a. Even a future event, when thought of as immediate or certain, may 
be expressed by the present: ei airy  méAis AndOnoeTra, exeTa Kal ) mada 
Succerta if this city shall be taken, the whole of Sicily is (i. e., will be) am their 
hands (T.6.91). This is the general use of eju: J (am going, i. e.) am about 
to go (477 a). 


Imperfect. 


829, The imperfect represents an action as going on at a 
past time: eypadov L was writing. — 

a. The imperfect is especially common where different past actions 
are represented as going on at the same time: 

Hm. appa pev jos iv nad aeteto tepdy juap, Téppa war dudotepwy Bere 
qmrTeTo, mimte de Adds while it was morning and the sacred day was waxing, so 


long the weapons of both hosts did clash, and people fell (© 66). 


830, The imperfect is regularly used to denote a customary 
or frequently repeated past action : 


Swxpatns owep eylyvwokev otTws ereye as Socrates thought, so he (always) 
spoke (XM.1.14), eAéyero it was (repeatedly) said, the talk was (XA.1.2!%), 


831, In narration the imperfect is sometimes employed where the aorist 
would seem to us more natural; this is especially frequent with verbs imply- 
ing speech (saying, commanding, asking, etc.): €Aeye Tots mpoedpois Ott EeoBoAN 
éaTat he told the magistraies that there would be an attack (T.8.25). 


832, IMPERFECT OF ATTEMPTED ACTION.—The imperfect, like the 
present (825), often denotes an attempted action: 

KAéapxos Tovs otparidéras éBid¢ero idvars of & abtov EBadAorv, ered Hptaro 
mpoiévar Clearchus (was forcing) tried to force his soldiers to march ; but they 
kept throwing stones at him, when he began to go forward (XA.1.3'). 


4 





J 
. 


' 


4 





als 
* 


al IMPERFECT AND AORIST. 267 


833, The imperfect is often used, instead of the present, to denote a 
present fact or truth which has been just recognized, although true before: 
ov TOUT Hv evdapovid, Kakov amaddrAayh this—deliverance from evil—is not 
happiness, as we before supposed it to be (PG0.478°), ob ob pdvos tip jo? 
tro; aren’t you then the only epops, as I supposed? (ArAv.280). 





834, Verbs of obligation are used in the imperfect, with reference 
to present time, to express that which ought to be, but is not: thus 
get we TOTO Tovety May Mean you ought to be doing this (but are not). 

feu ToVs A€yovTas unre Tpds exOpay ToreicOa Adyov undeva unTe mpbs xdpw 
the speakers ought not to make any discourse with reference either to enmity or 
to favor, implying that they do (D.8'). Thus also xpiy i were proper, eixds jv 
it were fitting. 

a. This must not be confounded with the normal use of the imperfect to 
express past obligation: thus @5e: oe TotdTo moety may also mean you were 
under obligation to do this, without any implication of non-fulfillment. 


835, The imperfect is sometimes used with dy, to express a custom- 
ary past action; that is, an action which took place, if occasion 
served, at various past times: 

avarapBavey avTav T& Tovnuata Sinpwtav by zl Aéyoev taking up their poems, 
L would (often) ask what they meant (PAp.22°). 

a. The aorist indicative with dy has a similar use: Spaxyds by Ato’ elxoow 
eis iudziov J would (=used to) ask for twenty drachmae for a cloak (ArPlut.982). 

b. This use must be carefully distinguished from the hypothetical indicative 


with ay; see 895. 


Aorist. 


836. The aorist indicative represents an action simply as 
brought to pass or done at a past time: éypawva I wrote. 


a. The action is thought of merely as an event or single fact, with- 
out regard to the time it occupied. In this its ordinary use, the aorist 
may be called the factitive aorist : 


Tokiuchy Kal tarpiuchy Kad paytinhy “AmédAdwv dvniipe Apollo invented archery 
and medicine and divination (PSym.197), Hm. rhv 8& woAd mparos ie Tyré- 
waxos Geoedhs, BH S 10s mpobdpoo her much the first godlike Telemachus espied, 
and went straight toward the door-way (a 118). 


837, The aorist indicative is often used where the perfect or plu- 
perfect might be looked for: 


TOY oikeT@Y Ovdéva KaTeALTEV, GAN EmayTas méempare Of his servants he (léft) 
has left no one, but has sold them all (Ae.1*), Kipov metaméumerar (828) amd 
THs apxjs hs ad’tby carpdawyy éemoince he sends for Cyrus from the government 
of which he (made) had made him satrap (XA.1.1°). 


838, Eristoary Aorist.—In letters a writer sometimes puts himself in 
the position of the reader, and views the moment of writing as a past time: 
ket *AptaBd Cov, by cot ereula, mpacce negotiate with Artabazus, whom I (sent) 
send to thee (T.1.129). The perfect may also be so used. 


‘| 
— 


968 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [839 


839, In questions with cf od, containing a proposal, the aorist is often 
used, instead of the present: ri od od mor &yevou ovvOnparnhs ; why (didn’t you) 
don’t you become my fellow-hunter ? (XM.3.11"). } 


840, GNomic Aorist.—General truths are often expressed 
by the aorist indicative, as having proved true in past in- 
stances. Such aorists are naturally translated by the English 
present : 

Tas Tav pavthwy ouyndelas ddrlyos xpdvos SiéAdce the associations of the bad a 
little tome dissolves (1.1'), uP jyépa Tov uty Kadetrer ipdbev, roy F fp’ kw a single 
day drags one man down from high estate, and lifts another up (EFrag.424). 


a, This is called gnomic aorist, as being especially frequent in proverbs or — 
maxims (yvaua). By Hm. it is often used in siméles or comparisons. 


841, IncrrTivE Aorist.—If the present of a verb denotes a 
continued state, the aorist commonly expresses the beginning — 
of that state: thus évdonce he fell ill (pres. vor am ill), 


So €xw have, €oxov got, got possession of ; tpyw rule, npéa attained 
dominion ; Barevo am king, €Bacirevoa became king ; xoadpar sleep, 
exoynOny went to sleep; icxtw am strong, icxvoa grew strong; ciye 
am silent, éotynoa became silent; Saxpvw weep, eddxptaa burst into 
tears ; ep@ love, npacOnv fell in love ; xuvddveto am in danger, éxuvddvevoa 
incurred risk. So €arnyv took my stand (perf. éotnxa am standing). 

a. This use is found in all the modes of the aorist: voojaa to fall 
all, ete. : 

b. The inceptive meaning is not inseparable from these aorists: they are 
sometimes used in the ordinary factitive sense (836 a): éBactrdevoe Séxa ern 
he reigned ten years, the whole reign being conceived as one act. 


842, The aorist is sometimes used, in the first person singular, to denote 
a feeling, or an act expressive of it, which began to be, just before the moment 
of speaking. In English the present is used: éyéAaca I can’t help laughing, 
liter., I laughed (ArEq.696), émyjveo’ Epyov kal mpdvoray hy ov I praise the 
deed, and forethought which you exercised (SAj.536). 


For the aorist indicative with &, expressing occasional action, see 835 a. 


Future. 


843, The future denotes an action that will take place at 
a future time: ypdfw L shall write. 


a. The future action may be understood either as brought to pass or as 
continued (cf. 828 a): thus apt may denote either J shall attain to rule (cf. 
aor. jpta, 841) or J shall rule (be ruler): mpdrywarevovra 6rws %ptovor they take 
measures to attain to power (XRI1.14°), Siaperéov oftives dptovol re Kat &ptovTa 
we nust distinguish who are to rule and who to be ruled (PRp.412°). 


844, The second person of the future is used as a softened form of com- 
mand: mdyrws 5& TovTo Spacers but this you shall do by all means (ArNub.1352). 


- 849] FUTURE, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT. 269 





With negatives, it expresses prohibition: od todTo Aoytetcbe you will not (are 
\ not to) consider this (Lycurg.®™). 
a. But in negative questions, it forms a lively expression for urgent de- 
‘mand: ov qepimevets; wilt thow not wait? (PSym.172*), For od uf with the 
future, see 1032 a. 
4 : 
_ 845, With the future indicative Homer sometimes joins «é or &y, without 
‘materially modifying the meaning: Kal Ké tis GF épéer and thus some one will 
say(A 176). In Attic writers this construction is very rare, and even doubtful. 


846, Prrtenrastic Furure.—To represent a future action 
as immediately expected or intended, the verb péedAAw am about 
is used with the infinitive of the future or present, or (more 
rarely) the aorist : 

MéAAw Uuas Siddtew Oey wor 7 SiaBory yéeyove J am about to teach you whence 
this calumny has arisen against me (PAp.21), éy& duds méeAAw ayew cis Pacw 
I am going to lead you to Phasis (XA.5.7°), wéAAovTos AaBety advrod when he is 
on the point of seizing it (ArAch.1159). 

a. Other tenses of wéAAw are used in a similar way: wAnotov Hdn jv 6 
erabuds, va Euedre Katadvoew the station was now near, where he was about to 
stop for the night (XA.1.8'). Cf. Lat. ducturus sum, eram, ero, ete. 

b. The phrase més od wéAAw or Ti ov wéAAw has a peculiar meaning, how 
(why) should I not—? was od pérdArer Td copdrepov KdAAIOv HatvecOa; why 
should not that which is wiser appear nobler ? (PProt.309°). 


Perfect and Pluperfect. 


847. The perfect represents an action as completed at the 
present time; the pluperfect, as completed at a past time: 
yeypapa L have written, éyeypady I had written. 


848, A future action is sometimes vividly expressed by the perfect : 
dAwAas, ef oe Tabr’ ephooua édw thou art a dead man, if I ask thee this again 
(S0t.1166). Cf. 828 a. Even the aorist can be thus used: see Eur. Ale. 386. 


849, PERFECT WITH PRESENT MEANING.—Several perfects 
express a continued state, the result of a completed action, 
and thus have a present meaning : 


pepynpwac (from pipyyokw), properly, have recalled to mind, and so 
remember, Lat. memini. 

KékAnpat (kadéw) have received a name, am called. 

kéxTnpat (kTdopat) have acquired, possess. 

nepliecpa (audcévvipr) have dressed myself in, have on. 

mémro.Ga (meiOw) have put confidence, have confidence in. 

mépuxa (pi) have been produced, am by nature. 

éatnka (tornu) have set myself, stand. 

BéBnxa (Baivw) have stepped, stand, also am gone. 

eyvoxa (ytyyooxw) have recognized, know. 


270 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [880 


a. When the present of a verb denotes a state or condition, the perfect 
denotes merely a more settled condition: see the last three examples in 822. 

b. Here belong also several perfects which have no presents: as ofda 
know, €oixa am like, eiw0a am accustomed, dé6o1xa am afraid, and others; — 
furthermore the perfects of several verbs signifying to make a noise: Kéxparya 
(paw) bawl, Kéxpirya (Kpi(w) shriek, nékaayya (KAd¢w) bay; also Kéxpyuat 
(xpy¢w) need and others. In these the perfect seems never to have expressed 
completed action. 

c. In all these verbs, the pluperfect has the meaning of an zmper- 
Sect: éxextnpny was im possession of, éxtnkn was standing ;—and the 
Suture perfect has the meaning of a simple future: éxrné@ shall stand, 
pepvycopa shall remember, xexpa&opat shall bal. 


Future Perfect. 


850, The future perfect denotes an action which will be completed | 
at a future time: yeypayeras vt will have been written. 

For the forms (chiefly passive) of this tense see 466, 467. For the peri- 
phrastic future perfect with éooua see 467 a. 

a. But often the future perfect differs very little from the ordinary future 
in meaning. In some verbs, it regularly takes the place of the future passive: 
thus mempacoua shall be sold, kexdpoua shall be cut are the regular Attic forms, 
instead of mpaOjcouat, Komjoouc; and dedjaoum shall be bound, wematcoua 
shall be quiet are oftener said than deOjoouc, mavOjooum. Cf. also 849 c. 


II. TENSES IN OTHER MODES. 


GENERAL RULE. 


851, In the subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, 
the tenses do not of themselves designate time. 

The present in these modes denotes an action simply as 
continued: thus oev to be doing (at any time). 

The aorist denotes an action simply as brought to pass: 
moujoat to do (at any time). 

The perfect denotes an action simply as completed: qwemown- 
xévat to have done (at any time). 


a. The time of the action, when time is thought of at all, is amplied in the 
connection, not expressed by the form of the verb. Thus: 


PRESENT TIME: ov BovAcverOa Spa, GAAX BeBovrcdabat zt is time, not to be 
planning, but to have a plan formed (PCr.46*), wovducda maytes dmdrav dpyi(a- 
peda we all are mad whenever we are angered (Philem.iv.54). Here BovAever Oat, 
BeBovarcioba, dpyiCéyeba are understood, from the connection merely, to refer 
to present time. 








a 


ies4] lt TENSES IN OTHER MODES. 271 


_ Furure TIME: tls €OeAqoe: kjput iévar; who will be willing to go as herald? 
XA.5.7°°), éméray dmiwyev, epovra whenever we go away, they will follow 


 (XA.6.5"). Here the connection shows that iévat, amiwucv refer to the future. 


PAST TIME: é€BovAeTo TH waide aupotépw mapeivar he wanted both his sons to 
be with him (XA.1.1!), Ktpos eaeume Birovs otvov éméte wavy jdvy AdBor Cyrus 
sent jars of wine whenever he got any very good (XA.1.9*%). Here mapetva, 
AdBo: are seen from the context to refer to the past. 
b. The imperative, though expressing no time, necessarily implies the 
future. So even the perfect imperative; this expresses permanence or 
finality: terdx@w let him (have been placed) have his station (PRp.562*). 


OPTATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN InNprREcT DiscouRSE. 


852. The optative and infinitive, when they stand in indirect 
discourse representing an indicative of the direct discourse, 
do denote time, relatively to that of the leading verb. 


853, The present and perfect optative and infinitive in these cir- 
cumstances (852) represent respectively the present and perfect in- 
dicative, and so denote time relatively present: that is, the same 
time as the leading verb: ypddew noi he says that he is writing 


(now); €byn ypapew or edeyev Ore ypapa he said that he was writing 
(th 


en). 

So yeypahevac dyad thy éemisrorhy he says that he has the letter written (now), 
nkacov mpocAnararéevar they guessed that he had ridden ahead, i. e., that the action 
was then already completed (XA.1.10!°), jKev &yyeAos Aéywy OTL Svevveois 
AeroiTws ely TX BKpa there came a messenger saying that Syennesis had left the 
heights, i. e., was then gone from them (XA.2.1?), 


a. But sometimes they represent the imperfect and pluperfect in- 
dicative, and so-denote time relatively past : 


Téemecua ard THS SKVAANS Sia TOTO hevyew Tos dvOpdmovs I am persuaded 
that men used to run away from Scylla for this reason (XM.2.6*1), Here 
gevye represents @pevyov. The aorist @vyeiy would mean that they ran 


away on some one occasion. With the perfect infin., Aéyera &vdpa tive 


éxmremAHXOa “tis said that a certain man had been fascinated (XC.1.4*"); here 
ekmemAH XO represents eferémAnxto.—The optative in this construction is 
much less frequent than the infinitive: for an example, see 935 b. 


854, The aorist optative and infinitive in the same circumstances 
(852) represent the aorist indicative, and so denote time relatively ° 
past: ypaba pnoi he says that he wrote, épn ypaya or €deyev Gre 
ypavrete he said that he had written. 

of *Ivdol Zrctay Ore méubere odas 6 “Ivdav Bactreds (indic. @reupe) the 
Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent them (XC.2.4"), Aéyovra ev 
mépe: Tw) THs xwpas KuxAwmes oikjoa the Cyclopes are said to have lived in a 
part of the country (T.6.2). | 

a. Observe that ypdWar, aorist infinitive, when in indirect discourse means 
to have written, but when not in indirect discourse it means éo write. 


r 


272 TENSES OF PARTICIPLES. ~— Te55 


855. The future optative and infinitive represent the future indica- 
tive, and so denote time relatively future: ypapew pyai he says that he 
will write, pn ypavew or €deyev ore ypawot he said that he would write. 


6 Te 5€ morhoot, ov Steanunve but what he would do, he did not indicate 
(XA.2.1%), raira brioxvetto mornoew he promised that he would do this (1.5°), 


a. The future optative is never used otherwise than in indirect discourse; 
nor is the future infinitive, except in the construction with wéAdAw (846), and 
with 76 (959): 7d éxpoBhoew the expectation of frightening (T.4.12°). 


b. The future perfect optative and infinitive differ from the future only 
in expressing completed action. See Xen. Anab. 1. 5. 16. 


PARTICIPLES. 


856. The participles denote time relatively to that of the 
verb on which they depend. The present and perfect parti- 
ciples denote time relatively present, the aorist participle time 
relatively past, the future participle time relatively future. 
Thus: 


Present participle: of ypddovres those who write (now), of Se:Ao) Kbves Tovs 
wey mapiyvtas Sdxvovcl, Tovs 5& SimKovtas pevyovaw cowardly dogs bite the 
passers-by, but run from those who pursue them (XA.3.2*), éruxov ev TH aryopa 
Kabevdovres they happened to be sleeping in the market-place (T.4.118). 


Perfect participle: of yeypapéres those who have written (have the writing 
now done), ddayeis ém rots cuuBeOnkdow, Aisxivn you are vexed at what has 
resulted, Aeschines (D.18*'), €Aeyov mayta Ta yeyevnucva they told all that had 
happened, i. e., was at that time completed (XA.6.3!). | 


Aorist participle: of ypapayres those who wrote, radra movhods di¢Bave 
having done this he went across (XA.1.4"), Kpotoos “AAvy SiaBas meydAnv apxhv 
karadvcet Croesus, the Halys crossed, a mighty empire will destroy (Oracle, Arist. 
Rhet.3.5). 


Future participle: of ypabovres those who will write, ob cvvhASopev @s Baciret 
modeunoovtes we did not come together to make war (as about to make war) on 
the king (XA.2.37'). | 


a. The present participle may, however, like the present infinitive 
(853 a), stand for an imperfect indicative, and so denote time rela- 
tively past: “A@nvaioe of mpdrepoy tropOotrres Thy Borwriay the Athenians 
who formerly used to ravage Bocotia (XM.3.5*). Here mopdovvres = ot 
émdpOovv. In like manner the perfect participle may represent a 
pluperfect: see Soph. Phil. 778 (kexrnpéva). 


b. The aorist participle, when joined to a principal verb in the aorist, is 
sometimes used without the idea of past time, to denote an action coinciding 
in time with the other: ed ye émoinoas dvauvnods ue thou didst well in remind- 
ing me (PPhaed.60°). So especially the supplementary aorist participle with 
the aorists of p0dvw, Tuyxdvw, AavOdvw (984): as eruxev eAddv he chanced to 
come (T.7.2), Bovrotuny dy Aabeiy abroyv ameAOev I should like to get away with- 
out his knowledge (XA.1 31"); rarely with other tenses of the same verbs: 
Ahoouey emumerdvtes we shall fall on them unawares (XA.7.3**). ? 


860] THE ADVERB AN. 273 


THE MODES. 
The Adverb av. 


The uses of ay (Homeric «é) are so important for the syntax of the modes 
that the following summary is in place here. 


857. The adverb av has two distinct uses : 

1. In independent clauses, 
(a) with the indicative (past tenses), . 
(b) with the optative. 

2. In dependent clauses, with the subjunctive. 


a. There is no adequate translation for ay, taken by itself. In its 
use with the indicative and optative, its effect is given in English by 
the words ‘would,’ ‘should,’ or ‘may.’ With the subjunctive it is 
untranslatable. ) 


”Av IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES. 


858. With the past tenses of the indicative, dv marks an 
action as contingent on an unfulfilled supposition, and there- 
fore contrary to fact (hypothetical indicative, 895): ewKev av, 
et tt ciyev he would have given, if he had had anything. 


a. “Ay is never used with the principal tenses of the indicative, except 
in the Homeric use with the future indicative (845). 


859, With the optative, dv forms an expression of possibility 
(potential optative, 872): rotro yévoto av this may (might, 
would ) happen. 


a. In Hm. &y may be joined to the subjunctive in the sense of the future 
indicative (868). . 


"Av IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 


860. All relative and conditional clauses which have the 
subjunctive, must also have dv; but this dy is attached to the 
introductory word of the clause, and belongs less closely with 
the verb: 6 7 dv BovAnra whatever he may choose, drov av 7 
wherever he be. 

With <i, ore, éwdre, éref and éreidy, dv unites to form édav 
(jv, av) drav, drdrav, érqv or érav (Hd. éredy), éredav. 

a. For the omission of &y in such sentences, see 894 b, 898 b, 914 a and b, 
921 a. For the rare xé with optative in dependent clauses, see 900 b. 


q 





O74 FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. [s61 


861. “Av is used with the infinitive and participle, when either. 
stands in the place of an indicative or optative which would take dd; 
see 964 and 987. 


862. Position or éy.—In clauses with the indicative and optative 
(858, 859) ay is not always placed next the verb to which it belongs. 
It often attaches itself to negatives (ovx dy), or interrogatives (7as 
ay), or emphatic words (uddor av), or to the principal verb instead of 
a subordinate one (ov« ofS dy ei meioays for odk oida ef meioaype dy, 


EMed.941). 


863, “Av sometimes stands alone, its verb being understood: of 8 oixéras 
péyxovolv* GAN ob dy mpd Tod (sc. Eppeyxov) the slaves are snoring ; well, they 
wouldn't have done so before (ArNub.5). So mas yap ay (se. en); how can it be? 
For éomep dy ei, see 905. 


864, “Ay REPEATED.—This may occur when the sentence is very long, or 
when it contains more than one prominent word to which ay might naturally 
attach itself (862): més dy ody ovk dy Seiwa macxomev; how then should we not 
be outrageously treated ? (Lys.20!°), 


A. FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 


Indicative. 


865, The indicative expresses that which és, was, or will be. 
It is used when the reality of the action is affirmed, denied, 
or questioned: ‘he went; he did not stay; will he return ?’ 

For the indicative in conditional sentences (with or without av), see 893, 


895; in expressions of wishing, see 871. For the indicative (imperfect or 
aorist) with ay to denote customary action, see 835 and a. 


Subjunctive. 


866. The subjunctive has three common uses in simple 
sentences : 

1. The first person is used to express a request or proposal 
(hortative subjunctive): twuev let us go, dépe On, wepala come 
now, let me try. 

a. So negatively with py: pi pawapeba let us not be mad (XA.7.1”). 

2. The second and third persons are used. with ay in prohi- 


bitions: ph romoys tadra do not do this. This use is confined 
to the aorist: see 874. 





870] _ SUBJUNOTIVE AND OPTATIVE. Q75 


3. The first person is used in questions as to what may be 
done with propriety or advantage (subjunctive of delibera- 
tion): ri 63; what shall L say ? 

The meaning is not ‘what am I going to say’ as a future fact, but ‘ what 
had I best say.’ So défeo0e cuumdrny, 7) amiwuey; will you receive a fellow- 
reveller, or shall we go away? (PSym.212°). Only the question ti md@w; what 
will become of me? is an exception; the subjunctive here being equivalent 
to the future indicative; cf. 868. 

b. Often BovAe: do you wish is prefixed to this subjunctive; the two ques- 
tions, though closely connected, being independent of each other: BovAe: car 
eirw ; do you wish me to tell you? (PGo.521*), properly, ‘do you wish—shall I 
tell you?’ as two separate questions. 


c. Questions of this sort are sometimes asked in the third person with 7s, 
instead of the first person: mot tis ody puyn; whither can one flee? (SAj.463). 


867. The subjunctive is also used with uf, in expressions of anxiety or 
apprehension: anh dypoixdrepov 7 Td aAnOes cimety I am afraid it may be too 
rude to say what is true (PGo.462°). In strictness, the sentence here expresses 
something desired: ‘may it not be too rude.’ If the object of apprehension 
is negative, uy ov is used: Hm. ph vd To ov xpaloun oxnwrpdy Kal oreupa Oeoto 
(there is danger) indeed that the staff and wreath of the god may not avail thee 
(A 28), wh ov Oeuitdy 7 I fear it is not right (PPhaed.67°). 


868, In Hm., the subjunctive is sometimes used to denote future events, 
nearly like the future indicative: od ydp mw Tolovs Wor avépas, ovdé Bwucu for 
never yet saw I such men, nor shall I see (A 262). To the subjunctive in this 
use, ay or Kké is sometimes added: ov« &y Tor xpaicun Kidapis nought will the 
lyre avail thee (T 54). Cf. 845. 


Optative. 


869. The optative has two uses in simple sentences; one without 
ay, in wishes; and one with dy, in assertions and questions. 


870. Oprative or Wisutne.—The optative is used without 
av, to express a wish that something may happen: dzéXorro 
may he perish. 

So tovtous of Oo) amoticavro may the gods requite them (XA.3.2°), & mai, 
yevolo TaTpos evTuvxéaTepos mayst thou, my son, be happier than thy sire 
(SAj.550), un pot yevor? & BotrAow’, GAN & cuudéper may not what I would fain, 
but what is best, be mine (MMon.366). From this use comes the name optative. 

a. This optative may be introduced by the particles of wishing, 
eiJe or ef yap: thus eife od didos jyiv yévouo O that thou wouldst be 
our friend (XH.4.1**), The sentence is then strictly a condition with 
omitted conclusion, as in English ‘O if this would happen.’ 

b. In poetry, simple ei occurs; for instance Eur. Hec. 836. Hm. some- 
times has o%@e and at ydp. 

_, ¢. Wishes are also introduced by as: Hm. és pis & re Gedy x 7° avOpdrrov 
_ &rdAgito would that discord from among both gods and men might perish (% 107). 








276 FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. [871 


d. A wish expressed by the optative refers to the future. Very rarely, 
however, an aorist optative is used of the future realization of a past event: 
at yap edacalaro uwvuxas tmous O that they may (prove to) have driven off the 
hoofed steeds (K 5386). 


e. Another form of wishing is més &y with the optative, strictly a question. 
This occurs chiefly in dramatic poetry: mas &y dAotuay; (how can I perish ?) 
would that I might die (EMed.97). 


871. UNATTAINABLE WisH.—A wish past realization, that is, in- 
consistent with a known reality, refers either to the present or the 
past. It is expressed, like a condition contrary to fact (895), by a 
past tense of the indicative with ei@e or ei yap. The imperfect, aorist, 
or pluperfect 1s used, according as the contrary reality would be ex- 
pressed by a present, an aorist, or a perfect : 


ei yap tocavrny Sivauy eixov O that I had so much pouer, implying, ‘I have 
not’ (EAlc.1072), «fe co téte cuveyevdunv O that 1 had been with thee then, 
implying, ‘but I was not’ (XM.1.2*), 


a. Such wishes are expressed also by dderor (ought) with the pres- 
ent or aorist infinitive: pede pev Kdpos (nv would that Cyrus were 
alive, liter., ‘Cyrus ought to be alive’ (XA.2.1‘). 


The particles of wishing may be prefixed: 16 Sedov, ef yap Bperov. The 
negative is wh, not ob as might be supposed: phot’ &Spedov Auweiy would that 
L had never left (SPhil.969). 


872, PorentiaL Oprative.—The optative is used with av 
as a less positive expression for the future (or present) indica- 
tive, and is translated with may, might, would, etc.: tovro 
yor av this may (or might) happen. 


mokAas dy e¥pors unxavas many devices thou mayst find (EAnd.85), ovk dy 
apundelny I would not (= will not) deny it (D.21!*!), €vOa worrAhv cwppoodvny 
car auabot TEs ay where one may notice many an instance of self-control (XA.1.9?), 
noews dv epoiuny J (would gladly ask) should like to ask (D.18%). 


a. The potential optative is frequently used in the conclusion of a condi- 
tional sentence (900); and even where no condition is expressed, as in the 
above cases, one may usually be supplied in thought. Thus ‘this might take 
place’ (if circumstances should favor), ‘you would find’ (should you search). 


b. Properly the potential optative refers to the future. When it seems to 
refer to the present, it denotes in strictness the future realization of a present 
fact: mov 897° dy elev of Eevor; where, pray, may the strangers be? i. e., where 
would they be found if sought (SEL. 1450), dpa by etn A€yew tt (would be, 
will be) probably is time to say “(XM.3.57), 


c. Very rarely it is used, in like manner, of a past event: eljoav 8 by 
ovTor Kpares these were probably Cretans, i. e., would prove on examination to 
have been so (Hd.1.2). 


d. The potential optative may be used for the zmperative, expressing a 
command as a permission: A¢yos by as TAXIOTS speak at once, liter., ‘you 
may speak’ (ASept.261). 


876] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 207 


e. In poetry, the potential asa is used without ay, though very seldom: 
ovk tori btw pelCova poipay veluaw 7) ool there's none to whom a higher rank 
I would award than thee (APr.291). 


f. The future optative is never used with ay. See 855 a, 


Imperative. 


873. The imperative represents the action as commanded: 
heye speak, watagov pév, dxovaoov o€ strike, but listen. 

For the tenses of the imperative, see 851 and b. For the infinitive instead 
of an imperative, see 957. 


874, Prohibitions, that is, negative commands, are expressed 
by py with the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive: 
pn A€ye TovTO OY pn AEeENS TovTO do not say this. 

a. The present imperative is used if continuance is thought of, otherwise 
the aorist subjunctive. For instance, the present is used in telling any one 
not to go on with what he is doing : thus “y) xadémawe do not persist an your 
present anger (Y 133), but wh xadrerhyys do not take offence ; wh Bpadove unt 
emuvnoins ert Tpotas linger not (as you are now doing), nor mention Troy 
again (SPhil.1400). 

b. The aorist imperative is sometimes used with muy in the third person, 
but almost never in the second: aAAa yap wh Opivdy tis TovTov Toy Adyoy 
vouisarw but let no one regard this discourse as a lamentation (XAges.10°), 
The present subjunctive is never used in prohibitions. 


875, The imperative is idiomatically used in dramatic poetry after 
oic6 6 and like questions, where we should expect de with the infini- 
tive: cic 6 dSpacoy; do you know what you are to do? liter., ‘do—do 
you know lat 2? (ArAv.54). So oic® ws roingor ; (SOt. 543). 


B. FINITE MODES IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 


876, SuBoRDINATION.—A sentence may enter as a subordi- 
nate part into another sentence. ‘The whole is then called a 
compound sentence: it consists of a principal, and a dependent 
or subordinate, sentence or clause. 


o? 6& amrexpivayTo (principal clause) dt: ovK evTatba ein (dependent clause) 
but they answered that he was not there (XA.4.5!); ef Ocol Te SpHow aioxpdv 
(dependent), od cioly Geol (principal) if gods do aught that’s base, they are not 
gods (HF rag.294). 


a. Co-oRDINATION.—On the cther hand, connected sentences are said to be 
co-ordinate, when they are mutually independent : Kow) h TUX, Kal TO WEAAOV 
adparov for tune is fickle, and the future is unseen (1.1°°). Such sentences are 
not called compound. The co-ordination of sentences, as opposed to their 
subordination, is relatively more frequent in early Greek, especially in Homer. 

13 





278 MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. (sty 


877, A dependent clause may have another clause depending on it, — 
to which it stands as principal. ! 

Thus in the compound sentence jpdéunyv “AgoBov ef Tives mapjoay OT ameAdp- 
Bove thy mooika I asked Aphobus whether any persons had been present when 
he received the dowry (D.30”°), 67 dareAduBave Thy mpocxa depends on e tives 
mapjoay, and this again depends on jpdunv “AdoBor. | 


878, Pro.epsts.—A substantive which properly belongs to the 
dependent clause, is often transferred (usually with change of case) | 
to the principal clause. The object is to give it a more emphatic 
position. When the substantive is thus brought in before its proper 
place, the arrangement is called prolepsis (mpornWis anticipation). 

Thus édpa& robs avOpmmous ds eixov Seas (= Edpa ws of avOpwror cixov 
Seivds) he saw that the men were in sad plight (XA.6.4**), Hm. Tudetinv & ove 
ay yvoins morépoot petein Tydides thou wouldst not have known, in which of 
armies twain was he (E 85), kat trav BapBapwy émeucrctro ws TmoAcuety ikavol 
etnoav he took care also that the barbarians should be in condition to make war 
(XA.1.15), 3 | 


879, Prorasis, Apoposis.—A subordinate clause which has the 
special office of preparing the way for its principal clause is called a 
protasis, and the principal clause is called the apodosis. All condi- 
tional clauses are protases, and so are many relative clauses: thus 
eret yobero O1a8eBnkdras (protasis), 7a9n (apodosis) when he saw that 
they had crossed, he was pleased (XA.1.4*°). 

The protasis naturally precedes the apodosis, though this order is 
occasionally reversed. On the other hand, other subordinate clauses 
ordinarily follow their principal clauses. 


I. MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. , 


880, Final clauses are of three kinds: A. Clauses of pure 
purpose; B. Clauses with orws after verbs of effort, ete.; C. 
Clauses with py after verbs of fearing. 


A. PurE PuRPOSE. 


881, Clauses expressing purpose are introduced by tva, os, 
érws (and Hm. édpa) that, in order that, and py, iva pn, os pa, 
~ éras py that not ; and take the subjunctive: ¢pxopo tva tw 
LI come to see. 

But if the clause depends on a past tense, the optative may 
be used instead of the subjunctive: 7AGov iva Woy (or dw) 
L came to see. | 


kivas Tpédets va Tos AUKOUS GmrepiKwow you rear dogs, that they may keep 
off the wolves (XM.2.9°), Siavoctrar Thy yépipay Adoal, ds ph diaBire he intends 
to destroy the bridge, that you may not cross (XA.2.4""), 








885] MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. 279 


KabetAKov Tas Tpinpeis, Os ev Ta’Tats ow CowTo they were launching the tri- 
vemces, that in these they might save themselves (XA.7.1)*), eddnee amévar, wy 
émlOects yévolro Tots KaTadeAcyupevas if was thought best to return, lest an attack 
should be made on those who were left behind (XA.4.4°*). 


a. The optative is used on the principle of «mplied indirect discourse 
(see 937). It is therefore permitted only, not required; the subjunc- 
tive after past tenses being freely used: ra mdota ABpoxdpas xaréxavoey, 
wa py Kipos dta87 Abrocomas burned the vessels, that Cyrus (may not) 
might not cross (XA.1.4?°). 

b. The optative may be used by attraction, when the clause depends on an 
optative: BagiAeds iuas amodéoa wepl wayTds ay Tovhoato, iva Kal Tois AAOLS 
“EAAnot bdBos ein the king would like exceedingly to destroy us, that the other 
Greeks might be afraid (XA.2.4%).—Very rarely the optative occurs after a 
principal tense of the indicative: Iliad A 344. 

c. “Orws with the future indicative is rarely used in pure final clauses: 
TpépoyTa: Omws waxotvta they are kept that they may fight (XC.2.17'), 


882. With as, émews (and in Hm. édpa), the particle dv (Hm. xé)} 
is sometimes used before the subjunctive. It adds nothing to the 
meaning: ws ay pans, avrdxovoov hear me in turn, that you may learn 
(XA.2.5**). Homer and Herodotus use this dy even before the optative. 


883. In some elliptical expressions, the principal clause is omitted: és 
5é cuvréuw but to be brief, sc. I say only this (ETro.441); t é« rovrwy tptwuat 
to begin with this (D.21?°). 


884, UNATTAINABLE PurposE.—A purpose which could only be 
attained in an imagined case, contrary to reality, is expressed by a 
past tense of the indicative. Such a clause must depend on a con- 
clusion contrary to fact (895), a wish past attainment (871), or some 
other expression implying non-reality: 

el yap @deAor oiol 7 civar TA méyiora Kaxd ekepyd(ecOa, tva ool 7 Hoa ad 
Kal ayaba Ta meyrora I wish they were able to work the greatest mischief, that 
they might be able to work the gicatest good, implying ‘ but as it is, they cannot’ 
(PCr.44°), (ayti er BonOety, Oaws Ste Sixadtaros By en they ought to have 
aided him while living, that he might have lived most justly (PLg.959>). 


B. VeErsgs oF Errort. 


885, After verbs which signify attention, care, or effort, the 
object of the endeavor is expressed by dws or dzws wy with 
the future indicative: cxdre drws wapéeca sce to it that you 
are on hand. 

Such verbs are oxorety, opav, émyséXea Oa, eiAaReiobat, mpdocery, etc. 


Gmws Kal vuets ut emauvérete euol peahoe it shall be my care that you too 
shall praise me (XA.1.4!°), dpdvrile Orws undev avdztov Tis Tiuijs TabTns mpakes 
beware that you do nought unworthy of that rank (1.23"), 

a. Even after a past tense, the future indicative usually remains: émrpacoev 
Smws tis BonOera iter they negotiated for the sending of' succor (1.8.4). Occa- 






280 MODES IN FINAL CLAUSES. [386 


sionally it gives place to the future optative: éemweueActro Saws wh &oirol wore 
EcowTo he took care that they never should be without food (XC.8.14), 

b. The subjunctive or optative of the present or aorist (cf. 881) is 
sometimes used, instead of the future indicative: é¢mrpacocey éras 
modepos yévnra he was striving that a war might be brought about 
CE ivr). | 

c. In Homer this is almost always the case; ws may also be used for ézws, 
and xé may be added before the subjunctive: g¢pdoceta &s xe vénra he will 
devise that he shall homeward come (a 205), welpa Omws kev 5) chy warplda yaiay 
ixnat try to reach at last thy native land (8 545). 


886, Before és with the future, in earnest commands and warn- 
ings, the principal verb is often omitted: émaws ayip eves (SC. cKxomer be 
sure to) be a man (ECycl.595), omws wept rod modgwou pnder epeis (se. 
vdadrrov take heed to) say nothing about the war (D.19°?). 


©. VeEerRss or FEARING. 


887, After verbs of fearing and kindred ideas, the object 
of the fear is expressed by py that, lest, or py od that not, lest 
not, with the subjunctive : doPodpor pia yévytar LT fear that wt 
may happen. 

After a past tense, the optative may be used (as in pure 
purpose, 881): éfoBovpyy pa yévorro (or yevynra) L feared that 
tt might happen. . 

déSoura pi) emiAabducba THs oikade 6500 Tam afraid we may forget the way 
home (XA.3.2), 3€5:uev wh ob BéBauor ite we fear you may not be steadfast 
(7.3.57), Av 6 bidunmos ev o6Bw wh expdyot Ta mpaypata Philip was in alarm 
lest his objects might escape him (D.18*), robs cuupaxovs ebedicay wh arooTaot 
they were afraid that their allies (may) might revolt (T.5.14). 

a. Rarely érws uh is used for wh: ov poBet bras mh avdctov mpaypya TUYXa- 
yns mpattwy; are you not afraid that you may be doing something impious ? 
(PEuthyph.4°). The future indicative may then be used: d€50:x’ bmws pi) 
revioua I fear I shall find (ArEq.112). The verb of fearing here takes the 
construction of 885. , | 

b. Even uf alone rarely takes the future indicative: doBodua ph Fdovas 
siphoouev evaytlas I fear that we shall find opposite pleasures (PPhil.134). 

c. After such words as épay and cxomety, uh often introduces something 
suspected as probable, i. e. conjectured (rather than feared): G@pet uy ov TovTO 
9 7) ayaddv take heed lest this may not be the real good (PGo.495°). 


888. When the fear relates to something past or present, the 
indicative is used after pi and py ov: 

doBobueba wh dudorépwy huaprhxapev we are afraid that we have failed of 
both (1.3.53), delSw wh 5) wdvra Oed vynueptéa eimev I fear that all the goddess 
said was true (€ 300). 

a. The subjunctive (aorist or present) in such cases is rare: Sewas abipa 
uh Barérov 6 udytis # sore am I troubled lest the prophet (prove to) be clear 
sighted (SOt.747); cf. the first example in 887 a. See Iliad A 505. 





891} MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 281 


II. MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


889. A conditional clause is one containing a supposition. 
It is introduced by a word meaning #/f: either «i, or édv (860) 
contracted nv, av (Homeric «i xe). 

The conditional clause ( protasis, condition) together with 
its principal clause (apodosis, conclusion) forms a conditional 
sentence or period. 


890. Conditional sentences are either particular or general. 
- In a particular conditional sentence, the supposition relates 
to a definite act or acts. In a general conditional sentence, it 
relates to any one of a series of acts; and this may be indi- 
cated by the use of ‘if ever’ in the condition and ‘always’ 
in the conclusion (‘if ever’ being nearly equivalent to ‘ when- 
ever’). 

Thys : if he wishes (now) to go, he has leave, is a particular 
conditional sentence; but ¢f he (ever) wishes to go, his master 
(always) gives him leave, is a general conditional sentence. 

Particular and general conditions are not distinguished in 
form, except in the first of the following four classes. 


891. There are four classes of conditional sentences. Two 
are for present and past suppositions, and two for future 
suppositions. 

The first class has three forms, one for particular conditions 
and two for general. Altogether, then, there are six forms, 
as shown in the following 


TABLE OF CONDITIONAL FORMS. 


I. Simple present or past supposition: 
A. Particular: _e¢ with pres. or past indic. . . indicative. 
) 4) cay with subjunetive .... 2... pres. indicative. 
ao 2. et With optative......... imperf. indicative. 
Il. Present or past supposition, contrary to reality: 
ei with past indicative .. . past indicative with day. 


Il. Huture supposition with more probability : 
edy with subjunctive .... future indicative, or imperative. 


IV. Future supposition with less probability : 
ei with optative....... optative with ap. 


982 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [302 


First Class. 


892. Semple Present or Past Supposition—We have here 
two distinct cases, Particular Suppositions and General Sup- 
positions. 


893, A. Parricutar.—The condition assumes something, 
without implying any judgment as to its reality. We have 
then : 

in the condition, ef with present or past indicative ; 
in the conclusion, any tense of the mdicative : 


ei ToUTO Totes, érawd tf you are doing this, I approve. 


ei Geol Tt Spec aio rxpév, obte cioly Beat tf gods do aught that’s base, they are 
not gods (EF r.294), «i Ocovd jv, ovK ay aig xporcepins if he was a god's son, he 
was not greedy of gain (PRp.408°), ef mapa robs Spkous Ave Tas oTovdas, why 
Binny Exe Uf contrary to his oaths he broke the truce, he has his due (XA. 2. ’541), 
simep ye Adpetou reo Tlapvodridés €OTL Tats, OVK fnae TAaUT eyo AnWeuat so 
sure as he is a son of Darius and Parysatis, I shall not win this prize without a 
struggle (XA.1.7°%). 

a. Observe that condition and conclusion may be in different tenses; and 
that the conclusion may refer to the future, and so have the future indica- 
tive. See the last two examples. 

b. The imperative, or the optative of wishing, may also be used in 
the conclusion: oot ef my Gdn Sédoxra, Eye a didacKe of you have 
come to a different view, speak and instruct me (PCr.49°). 


ce. Rarely a future indicati ive, Be vgs a present entention, is used in the 
condition : aipe TARKTpov ef maxer (= ef weAAEs maxetoOar) raise your spur if 
you are going to fight (ArAv.759), This must not be mistaken for a- future 
condition: cf. 899. 


894, B. Genrrat.—The occasional reality of the condition 
1s implied, and the conclusion states what happens (or hap- 
pened) ¢f ever the condition is (or was) fulfilled. There are 
here different forms for present and past time. 


1. For present time : 
in the condition, éév with the subjunctive (any tense); 
in the conclusion, the present indicative: 
éiy todto romon, érawe if he (ever) does this, I (always) 
approve. 


2. For past time: 
in the condition, ei with the optative (pres., aor., or perf.) ; 
m the conclusion, the imperfect indicative : 


ei Toro roujoee, exrnvovy tf he (ever) did ie L (always) 
approved. 


: — 
a. in tia PS 





: 





895] MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 283 


ju & éyybs 2A0n Odvaros, oddeis BovAeTa Ovycxew if death draws near, no 
one desires to die (KAlc.671), mavr’ Exrw ékevpety, cay un Toy mévoy pevyn Tis 
one may find out all things, if one shun not the toil (Philem.iv.13). 

el mov éteAavval, ep immov xpiaoxaArivou mepiivye Thy Ktpoy as often as he 
rode out, he took Cyrus about on a horse with golden bridle (XC.1.8°), et tov 
plrawy Brdperev oiket@y Séuas, Exdaey 7) SvoTHVOS civopwyevy if Cer she saw the 
form of one of her beloved slaves, she wept, unhappy lady, at beholding him 
(STr.908), The future optative is never used: see 855 a. 


a. As the conclusion of general suppositions implies habitual or repeated 
action, equivalent forms may be used. Thus for the present may be used 
the gnomic aorist (840); for the imperfect may occur the imperfect or aorist 
with ay (835): trmos evyevhs, kav H yépwy, ev Totcr Sewvois Oiudy oun amdrcoev 
a steed of noble breed, though he be old, in danger loses not his mettle (SE1.25) 


, 


ef Tis avT@ Soxoln BAadkedeiv, exrAeydmevos Thy emiTHdELoy Emarey ty if any one 


seemed to him ta be lagging, he would single out the offender and strike him 
(XA.2.3!), So even the simple aorist with ‘ often,’ ‘never,’ etc.: see XA.1.9}8, 


b. Homer usually has ei alone, instead of édv, in general suppositions. In 
the Attic poets this is very rare: GAA’ avdpa, Ket Tis FH copds, T) mavOdvew 
MOAN aicxpdry ovdéy but for a man, though he be wise, aye to be learning much 
is no disgrace (SAnt.710). 

ce. Occasionally the indicative with ef is used in the condition, the particu- 
lar form (893) being used in a general sense: «% tis Te emnp@Td, darexptvovTo 
if any one asked any thing, they answered (1.7.10). 


Second Class. 


895, Present or Past Supposition contrary to reality.— 
The supposition is understood to be past fulfilment, and con- 
trary to fact. We have then: 

in the condition, «i with a past tense of the indicative ; 
in the conclusion, a past tense of the indicative with dv. 


The imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect is used, according as 
the contrary reality would be expressed by a present, an aorist, 
ora perfect. Accordingly the imperfect and pluperfect denote 
present time, and the aorist past time. 

Thus «i totro érole, érnvovwy av if he were doing this, I 
should approve (but he is not doing it, and I do not approve), 
ei ToUTO éroinoey, eryvera av tf he had done this, I should have 
approved (but he did not do it and I did not approve). 

ef Edpwy GmopouvTas Umas, TOUT ay eoxdtovy if I saw you in distress, I should 
be considering this (XA.5.6°), od« dy erolnoey “Ayaolas Tatra, ei wh eye abroy 
exchevoa Agasias would not have done this, if I had not bidden him (XA.6.6"), 
ei wh vets FAVeTE, eropevducda av mpds Baotrda if you had not come, we should 
be marching against the king (XA.2.14), ef éxexthuny odotav, em aorpaBns ky 
a@xovuunv if I possessed a fortune, I should ride on a saddle (Lys.24"), et abrdprn 
Ta Whdiopara Hv, biAurmos ovK dy UBpiker TocodTOv xpdvoy if your decrees were 
sufficient, Philip would not have insulted you so long, implying ‘but they are 


insufficient, and he has insulted you’ (D.3"4). 





284 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [s96 


Notr.—The indicative with day, thus used in the conclusion, is 
called the hypothetical indicative. 


a. The imperfect is sometimes used where the contrary reality 
would be expressed by an imperfect ; it then refers to the past: ovx 
dy vngwy exparet, ei pn Te Kal vavutexdy eixe he would not have been master 
of any islands, if he had not been possessor of a naval force, implying 
‘but he was possessor of a navy, and was master of islands’ (T.1.9). 

b. In the conclusion, the aorist sometimes refers to present time, being 
used of the inception or bringing to pass of the action (822): e éeyé ce 
ervyxavoy avepwray, Ti &y mot amexpivw; if I happened to be asking you, what 
would you (proceed to) answer? (PTheag.123"), but rl av amexpivov; what 
would you be answering ? 


896. In Homer the conclusion is sometimes expressed by the optative 
(instead of the past indicative) with av; this makes no difference in meaning: 
kal vb Kev &v® darddoito avat avopav Aivelas, ct wh ap dtd vdnoe Aids Ovydrnp 
"Adpodirn and here Acneas, lord of men, had perished quite, of Aphrodite, child 
of Zeus, had not observed him keenly (E 311). 


897. The particle dy is omitted, when the conclusion consists of an 
imperfect of wnfulfilled obligation (834), as ede, ypyy, etc., with the 
infinitive; so that the contrary reality is the non-fulfilment of the 
obligation: ef wopos nada, ypyv oe TovTO Totty Uf You were Wise, YOu 
ought to do this (but you do not do it). We might say that the real 
conclusion, kal emotes av and you would be doing it, is omitted: 

xXpiv oa, eimep Hoda wh Kaxds, weloavTa pe yauerv yauov tévd thou oughtest, 
if thou wert not base, with my consent this wedlock to be forming (EMed.586). 

a. But xpiv dy, @5ec ay are used, when the contrary reality is the non- 
existence of the obligation: ei wAovcios ja0a, xpiv &y oe TOvTO Tolely if you 
were rich, you would be under obligation to do this (but now you are not under 
obligation to do it): ef #aoay wemadevmevor, der dy waPdyTa Kal aoxyjocayTa iévat 
as éw a0AnTtas if they were trained, one would have to learn and practice, and 
meet them as one does athictes (PAlc.i.119>). 

b. Some other imperfects, particularly éBovaAduny, roxivdunv, are occasion- 
ally used without ay: zjoxivduny, «i bd wAculcu ye bvTos éEnmaThOny I should 
be ashamed, if I had been deceived by one who was an enemy (XA.7.67}), ~ 


Third Class. 


898, Luture Supposition with more probability.—The sup- 
position relates to the future, and some expectation that it 
may be realized is implied. We have then: 

in the condition, éav with the subjunctive (any tense); 
in the conclusion, the future indicative, or the imperative: 


éav TOUTO Ton NS, erawveropat tf you do this, I shall approve. 


hy tis avOioTHTal, Teipacducba Xeipotoba if any one resists, we shall try to 
subdue him (XA.17.3!), Rv yap TodTo AdBwpuev, oF Suvhoovra pévery for if we 
take this, they will not be able to remain (XA.3.4"), iv wéAcuov aipja@e, unkeTs 


900] MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 285 


fixere Seipo dvev Oadwy tf you choose war, do not come here again unarmed 
(XC.3.2!%). 

a. Equivalent expressions may be used for the future indicative and the 
imperative in the conclusion. Thus the hortative and prohibitive subjunctive 
(866, 1 and 2). In Homer the subjunctive, with or without &y or xé, (868) is 
found: ef 5¢ ke wh Sdnat, eym 5 Kev adTds EAwpat if he restore her not, then 
I myself will seize her (A 324). 

b. Poets, especially Homer, sometimes use simple ei for édv or e@ ke (cf. 
894 b): ef F avd tis palnor Oe@y emt otvor: révTw, TAnGoua ev oTHPecorv but if 
some god shall wreck me on the wine-hued deep, I will endure in soul (€ 221). 

c. The aorist subjunctive in the condition is often nearly equivalent to 
the Latin future perfect: véos av movhans, ynpas €kers evOarés si juvenis labo- 
raveris, senectutem habebis gucundam, i. e., if young you tod (shall bave toiled), 
a thriving age you will enjoy (MMon.388). 


899, Very often, the condition is expressed by e? with the future 
indicative (instead of éay with the subjunctive). This makes no 
essential difference in meaning: 


ef ti melcovTar Mido, és Tlépods 7d Sewdy ite if anything shall happen to 
the Medes, the danger will come to the Persians (XC.2.1°), ef tinwphoe:s Matpd- 
KAw Tov ddvoy Kat “Exropa Gmoxtevets, avTos amobavet if you shall avenge the 
murder of Patroclus and slay Hector, you will yourself be slain (PAp.28°). 


Fourth Class. 


900, Future Supposition with less probability—The sup- 
position relates to the future, but no expectation of its being 
realized is implied. We have then: 


in the condition, «i with the optative (pres., aor., or perf.) 


in the conclusion, the optative with dy (pres., aor., or perf.): 


ei TOUTO TounoeLas, érawvecayu av 7f you should do (or were to 
do) this, I should approve. 


ei Gravtes piunoaiuela thy Aakedaoviwy mAcovetiav, evOs by amoAolucba 
if we should all imitate the rapacity of the Lacedaemonians, we should perish 
forthwith (1.11%), & tis Kexrnuévos ein TAodTOY, xp@TO Sé adITS wh, ap dy 
evdaimovol; 277 a man should possess wealth, but make no use of it, would he be 
happy? (PEuthyd.280%). The future opt. is never used: see 855 a. 


Nore.—tThe optative with ay is the Potential Optative: see 872. 


a. Quite distinct from this are cases in which the verb of the condition is 
itself a potential optative with &y, conclusion to another condition expressed 
or implied: eZrep AAW Tw TreOoluny dy, Kal got TelBowar as surely as I would 
trust any one else (if he were to give me his word), J trust you (PProt.329°). 

b. Homer sometimes uses e¥ ke with the optative instead of simple é€: 
el x duets ye ddyolte, TAX’ &v Tore Kal tlots etn should you devour, perchance 
hereafter I should get redress (B 76). 

e. Things contrary to fact are sometimes conceived as if possible, and 
expressed by a condition of the fourth class, instead of the second: ov® ay 


av pains, ef oe wh xviCor Aéxos nor wouldst thou say so, did thy couch disgraced 
not irk thee (EMed.568). 





286 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences. 


901, Mixep Forms.—The form of the conclusion does not always 
correspond to that of the condition. Especially frequent are: 


a. A condition of the third class and a conclusion of the fourth: 
eav €Ochnonte mparrew aéias vuav aitav, tows av péya te xrnoaobe 
ayabdy if you will consent to act ina manner worthy ef yourselves, you 
could perhaps gain some great good (D.3**), 


b. A condition of the jirst class (particular) and a conclusion of 
the fourth (cf. 893 a): ef undéva Tay GhAwv immevery etacay, ork dv Sixaios 
xapiCotrbe avrois a they allowed none of the others to serve as horsemen, 
you will not justly show them any favor (Lys.15*). 

c. One conclusion may have two conditions of different classes; in which 
case it conforms to one of them. : 


902, SupstiruTions For Conprrion.—The place of a condition — 


may be taken by a participle (969 d), a preposition with its case, an 
imperative, or other form of expression: 

ov dt KAdwy eloe Tdxa but if you listen, you will quickly know (ArAv.1890), 
did YY vas avTovs wddrat By GroAdAciTe by yourselves (i. e. if you had been left 
to yourselves) ye would have perished long ago (D.18*), ratdes yevéoOwoar- 


ppovtibav dn mdévra wAéa let children be born (= if they are born), everything 
now is full of cares (Ant.ap.Stob.flor.68°"), : 


903, Conprrion OmirreD.—This occurs especially in the second 
and fourth classes of supposition. Thus nBovddpunv av I should wish 
(ci eOvvdpny if I had the power, as I have not); Bovdoipyy ay I should 
wish (ei Svvaipny if I should have the power, as possibly I might have). 
‘The potential optative with dy, in simple sentences, may be explained 
in this way (cf. 872 a). 


904, Concitustion OmiTTEeD.—This occurs when ei, eiOe, ef ydp are 
used in expressions of wishing with the optative or indicative (870 a, 
871). 

a. When two opposite suppositions are expressed, the second by ei 5€ ph 
(906), the conclusion of the first is sometimes omitted altogether, as suffici- 
ently obvious: ef péy ody ey tas ixavds diddoKw: ef 5€ wh, kal mapa Tov Tpo- 
yeyevnucvev mavOavere if then I instruct you well enough, so be it; but if not, 
learn from the men of former times (XC.8.7"), 


905, Versp Omirrep.—The verb of the condition or the conclusion 
may be omitted, in cases where it may be readily supplied (611-618). 
Especially when the same verb belongs to condition and conclusion, 
it is often omitted with one of them: 

ef tis Kod HAAS avhp, Kal Kipos déids eore OavudCeoOm tf any other man is 
worthy to be admired, Cyrus also is worthy (XC.5.1°), et 89 Tw copmrepos 


galny civai, roUTw kv (sc. patny, etc.) if in any respect I should say that f was — 


wiser, in this I should say it (PAp.29°). 


op 
- 


[901 


909] MODES IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 287 


a. So arise the following special phrases: 

1. eb pq except: od yap dpduer, et wy GAlyous TodTous for we see none (if not) 
except these few (XA.4.7°). 

2. et pr) Sud except for, explained by supplying an idea of hindrance: €3éxouv 
by mayra KaTadaBety, et wy Sid Thy éxelvou wedAAnow it seemed that they would 
have taken everything, (if not prevented by) except for his delay (T.2.18). 

8. Gomep dv el as, like: poBotpevos, domwep dy ef mais, Td TéuverOu fearing, 
like a boy, to be cut (PGo.479*), properly, décmep &yv oBotro, ei mats ein as he 
might fear, if he were a boy. 


906, A supposition directly contrary to something just before sup- 
posed, asserted, or demanded, is expressed by e7 d€ pip: 

Gare. TH Xphuara: ef SE uh, woreuhoew epy adrors he bade them restore the 
property ; but tf not (if they should not restore it, ef 4H amodotev), he sued he 
would make war upon them (XH.1.8°). 

a. ef d& uh is sometimes found where éay 8 un would be more regular: 
édy pev upiv Sond Aéyew GAnOEs, Evvowordoyhaare* ef 5 wh, avTitetvete if [ secm 
to you to speak truth, agree with me ; bui if not, oppose (PPhaed.91°). 

b. ef 5€ uh is often used after negative sentences, where we might expect 
ei 5€: thus ph ottw Adye: ef SE uN, ov OapsovvTa we Ekers do nol speak thus ; 
but (if otherwise) ¢f you do, you will not jind me confident (XC.3.1%°). So too 
ei S¢ is sometimes used where we might expect ef 5 uh: ef wev BovAeTa, 
everw: cf &, 8 Tt BovdrcTat, TOVTO TaLeiTw if he wishes, lek him boil me; but if 
he wishes something else, let him do what he wishes (PEuthyd.285°). 


907. A peculiar class of clauses, having the form of conditions, 
are those in which e? or édy has the force of 7f perchance or on the 
chance that. The clause expresses a contingency or possibility—either 
desired or apprehended—which serves as a motive for the action or 
feeling expressed by the principal verb: 


&xovoov Kal euov, edy cor TadTa Sony listen to me too, if perchance you may 
arrive at the same conclusion (PRp.358°), mpds thy wéAw, et emiBonbotey, exdpovy 
they advanced towards the city, on the chance that they (the citizens) should make 
a sally (T.6.100). 


For ef after Oavud¢w, etc., see 926. 


Ili. MODES IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 


908, Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns, 
or by relative adverbs (conjunctions) of time, place or manner. 


909, Orprinary Retative Crauses.—In these the modes 
are used just as in simple sentences. 

Such clauses have a definite antecedent; that is, refer to 
pome definite person, thing, time or place. If negative they 

ave ov. 


288 MODES IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. [910 


a. Commonly the indicative is used: tadr’ early & ey tudy Séoua it is this 
that I ask of you (XA.7.2%4), But any form of expression may occur, which is 
admissible in an independent sentence. Thus the hortative subjunctive: ~Avv- 
Tos Ode mapexabeeTo, @ peTad@uey THs CyThaews Anytus has sat down here, to 
whom let us give a part in the investigation (PMen.89°); or the optative of wish- 
ing: oluat yap ay nuads ToLadTa mabey, ola Tos exOpods of Ocol morhoetay for I 
think we should be so treated as I pray the gods may treat our enemies (XA.3.2°) ; 
or even the imperative: &ov moretoa TH xpdvm, bv Tucts cabéotaroy ErAeyxov 
TOU GAnbovs voulcate you must trust time, which I bid you consider as the surest 
test of the truth (Lys.19°').—For oic® 6 Spacov, see 875. 


910, A relative clause may express a cause, or a result. This 
has no effect upon the mode used : 

Cause, Oavpacrdy motets, Os Huiv oddev Sldws you behave strangely in that you 
give us nothing (XM.2.7'*); Result, tis oftws einOns éortv, Satis Gyvoet Toy 
éxeldev wéAcuov Sevpo Hiovta; who is so foolish, as not to know that the war in 
that quarter will come hither ? (D.1!°).—For wh sometimes used in such sen- 
tences, instead of ov, see 1021 b. 


911, Finan RELATIVE CLausEes.—Relative clauses express- 
ing purpose take the future indicative; and if negative, have 

, 
ed Me 

mpeo Belay méumev Hris TadT epet to send an embassy to say this (D.1?), @arda- 
gov éexpivar’, tv0a phot cicdyec@ ert cast me out into the sea, where ye may 
mever see me more (SOt.1411).—The use of Gmws in final clauses (885) is a 
development of this. | 


Conditional Relative Clauses. 


912. A relative clause may have a conditional force, the 
relative word implying the idea of ‘2/’; so that ‘whatever 
person’ (thing, place, etc.) 1s nearly equivalent to ‘éf any 
person’ (thing, place, etc.). The relative has then an indeft- 
nite antecedent; that is, refers to an uncertain or undeter- 
mined person or thing, place or time. 


913, Conditional relative clauses have forms corresponding 
to all the forms of conditional clauses, the principal clause 
taking in each case the form of the proper conclusion. ‘The’ 
particle ay is attached to the relative word when the sub- 
junctive follows (860): thus ds dv, érdfev av etc. With ore, 
OwoTe, eet, and éreidy, it unites to form orav, é7érav, éryv OF 
érav, éreddv. If negative, the relative clause has ju. 


914, First Ciass.—Simple present or past relative clauses. 


A. Particular (cf. 893).—Relative with present or past indicative 
- . . indicative: 


v9 
> 
4 
“ 


918] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES. 289 


& wh oida, ovde ofouae cidévar what Ido not know (= ef twa ph oida if I do 


not know anything), J don’t think that I know (PAp.21%), obs un etpicroyr, 


Kevotadiov avrots érolovy whomever they did not find (= el twas wh etpirroy if 
they failed to find any), they made a cenotaph for them (XA.6.4%). 


B. General (cf. 894).—Either: 
(1) relative with & and subjunctive . . . present indicative; or 
(2) relative with optative . . . imperfect indicative: 


2 > 


veos & amdAdut’ Gytw ay piadf Oeds he dieth young whome’er a god doth love, 
i. e., if a god loves any one (Hypsaeus ap.Stob.flor.120'*), emedav aptducba 
Rpoctevat, pépovrat of Al@oe moddAol whenever we begin to approach, the stones fly 
in great numbers (XA.4.7"), mdvtas, Boovs AdBotey ev TH Ourddoon, SiépOerpov 
they destroyed all, as many as they took on the sea (T.2.67), €@hpevery dab trou 
émdTe yuuvdaoa BovaAoito éautdy Te Kat Tovs tous he hunted on horseback when- 
ever he wanted to exercise himself and his horses (XA.1.2°). 


a. The omission of &y with the subjunctive (cf. 894 b) is frequent in 
Homer, and occurs even in Attic poetry: Tay 5¢ wnuovGy wadiota AiToUG al 


davao avOalperor but of woes those cause most pain which come self-sought 
(SOt.1231). 


b. Analogous to the conditional relative is the Homeric use of the sub- 
junctive, generally without «é or ay, in similes after as, és 6re, and the like: 


ws 5& Acwy év Bova Oopwy e& abxéva tin méptios HE Bods, . . . &s Tods dudore- 


e 
- 





pous kTA. and asa lion, ’mongst the cattle leaping, breaks a heifer’s or an ox’s 
neck, so these two etc. (E 161). 


c. The optative occurs in place of the subjunctive, depending on an ex- 
pression of necessity or possibility in the present tense: ard’ dy wéALs ori ceLE, 
Tovoe xpy KAvEew but whom the stale appointeth, him we must obey (SAnt.666). 


915, Szeconp Ciass.—Present or past, contrary to reality (cf. 895). 
Relative with past indicative .. . past indicative with av: 


ob yap ay avTol émexetpotmey mpatTtew & wi Amictdueba for we should not 
ourselves be undertaking (as we are) to do what we did not understand (PCharm. 
171°). 


916, Turrp Ciass.—Future with more probability (cf. 898). Rela- 
tive with ay and subjunctive ... future indicative, or imperative: 


iA 


8 te av dé€y, welcouc whatever may be needful, I will undergo (XA.1.35), 


émeday Siampatwpar & Sé€ouat, j~w as soon as I shall have accomplished what I 
desire, I will come (XA.2.3°), 


917. Fourtn Cuass.—Future with less probability (cf. 900). Rela 
tive with optative . . . optative with a: 


ovK &y ody Opebats aySpa Batis CB€AoL amepixety Tos emixeELpotYTas AdiKEiY GE; 
would you not support a man who should be willing to keep off those who are 
trying to injure you ? (XM.2.9°). 


918, In general the same freedoms and substitutions which occur 


_ in conditional sentences, are allowed in the corresponding conditional 
_ relative sentences. 


= 


296 MODES IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 


CONGRUENCE OF Mops. 


919, a. When a conditional relative clause depends on any sub- 
junctive or optative, its verb commonly takes the same mode: 


émeiday Oy &y mpinrar KUpios yévnTa as soon as he becomes master of what he 


bargains for (D.184"), Hm. &s arddorto kad GAAS Otis ToLadTd ye peor as may 
another perish too, whoe’er such deeds shall do (a 47). 

b. When a conditional relative clause depends on any past tense of 
the indicative implying non-reality (895, 871, 884), its verb is likewise 
put in a past tense of the indicative: | 

tvveyvyvéonete Simov ay pou, ei ev exelyn TH hava Te Kal TH Tpdmw EAeyor, 
év oiatrep eTeOpaupnv you would doubtless pardon me if I spoke in that language 
and manner, in which I had been brought up (PAp.174). 


Relative Clauses introduced by ‘until.’ 


920, The relative adverbs éas, gore, dypt, péxpt (Hm. appa, ciodxev), 
when they mean while, as long as, have nothing peculiar in their con- 
struction; but when they mean wnt, the clauses introduced by them 
require special treatment. 


921, “Ews and other words signifying until, when they im- 
ply expectation, take dv and the subjunctive; but after a past 
tense the optative (without dv) may be used: 

mepysevete trT dy ZAPw wait till I come (XA.5.14), odk dyauevonev ews by 7 





@ 
4 
g 

a 


* 


Hustépa xapa Kanara we are not wailing for our own country to be ravaged — 


(XC.3.3'5), mepieueve péexpt AO he waited for him to come (XH.1.3"), eSotev 
oly mooiévar ws Kupy cuputteray they resolved therefore to go forward until they 
should come up with Cyrus (XA.2.1°), 

a. The omission of a is frequent in poetry, and occurs even in prose: 
KaraTidera. és Tévedov, méxpt ov Tots "APnvalois ti Sd&n he deposits them m 
Tenedos, until the Athenians shall have come to some decision (T.3.28). 


b. The optative is used in dependence on the optative; and a past indica- 
tive in dependence on a past indicative implying non-reality. Thus déoTd ¥ 
dv a’rod mévery Ews GrédAOas he would beg him to stay until you should retire 
(XC.5.3), obk dy éemavdunv Ews amemeipadny I should not stop till I had made 
trial (PCrat.396°). 


Remark.—These clauses have much analogy to clauses of purpose, and it 


will be observed that they follow the same rules (881-884), save that the 


omission of av before the subjunctive is here the exception, not the rule. 
The forms of expression which thus arise often correspond with those of 
conditional relative sentences of the second, third, and fourth classes (915— 
917); yet they sometimes differ from them, as in the use of the subjunctive 
depending upon a present indicative, and of the optative (of implied indirect 
discourse, 987): see the last three examples in 921, and that in 921 a. 


922, When these words imply, not expectation, but actual 


occurrence at a particular past time, they take the indicative: 


~ 





926] CLAUSES OF CAUSE AND RESULT. 291 


cavr’ émotouy wéxpe oxdtos eyéveto they kept on with this till it became dark 
{XA.4.24), The clause is then an ordinary relative clause (909). 


923. When the clause implies customary occurrence, in 
present or past time, it takes the construction of a general 
conditional relative clause of the first class (914 B): 

mAavatat ews dy Oh Ties xpdvar yévwvTa it wanders until certain periods 
have been fulfilled (PPhaed.108°), avéuevey abtods tore eupdyoer tt he (always) 
waited till they had eaten a bit (XC.8.1"). In these, the form does not show 
whether actual occurrence or expectation is implied. 


924, IIptv before, until, may either take the same construc- 
tions as ews, or be joined with the infinitive (955): 

ov xph pe aaredOcivy mply ay 5& dixyny I do not deserve to depart till I have 
been punished (XA.5.7°), ob mpétepoyv ematoavto mply etéBadroy avtovs they did 
not cease until they had driven them out (1.12%). 

a. In general wpivy takes the infinitive when depending on an 
affirmative sentence, and a finite mode when depending on a negative 
sentence. But exceptions occur on both sides, and in Homer the 
infinitive is almost always employed. 


IV. MODES IN CLAUSES OF CAUSE AND RESULT. 


925. Causat Crauses.—Clauses expressing cause or reason 
are introduced by ort, dudre because, as as, éret since, and other 
words, and take the indicative: 

evouilov jocacbat, Ste ov ToAd éevixwy they thought they were worsted, because 
they were not signally victorious (T.7.34). 

a. When the sense requires, the potential optative (872) or hypothetical 
indicative (895) may be used. 

b. After a past tense, the optative may be used on the principle of 
implied indirect discourse (937), to show that the reason was another’s, 
not the speaker’s: €@avyatov drt Ktpos ovre GAXov Téptroe ovTEe avTos 
aivoiro they wondered that Cyrus neither sent any one else nor appeared 
himself (XA.2.1?). 


c. For relative clauses with causal force, see 910, 


926. After expressions of wonder, indignation, delight, and 
like emotions (as Gavydlw, dyavaktd, Savdv éott, ayaa), the 
cause is often expressed by «i with the indicative, as if it were 
& mere supposition : 
Oaupdtw F eywye ef pndels tuady wht evOductrae wht dpytCera but [ am 
surprised for my part that no one of you is either concerned or angry (D.4*), 


dyavakT®@ et oStwot & vod ph olds 7 eid ciety Tam vexed that Iam so unable 
to express what I mean (PLach.194). 








292 MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [oor 


927, Crauses oF Resutt.—These are introduced by dore 
so that, which takes the indicative when stress is laid on the ~ 
actual occurrence of the result, otherwise the infinitive (953) : 

emIMINTEL Xia UWAETOS, GoTE ameKpupe TA OTA Kal TOs avOpadrous there comes 
a tremendous fall of snow, so that it buried the arms and the men (XA.4.4"), 


a. In reality, the indicative after éc7e is co-ordinate, not subordinate (é0re 
meaning and so); it can be replaced by any expression used in simple sen- 
tences. Thus the potential optative: mAota uuty mdpectw, bore etalovyns by 
émmecorre you have ships, and so can make a sudden attack (XA.5.6"°). 


b. For relative clauses of result, see 910. 


s V. MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


928. The words or thoughts of another are often quoted 
indirectly ; that is, their substance is given in the form of 
a dependent sentence. ‘They are then said to be in indirect 
discourse (oratio obliqua); and in distinction from this, the 
original words themselves are called direct discourse (oratio 
recta). 

Thus indirect discourse dmexptvayro ért otk ecideiev they answered 
that they did not know, direct discourse ovk iopev we do not know. 

Indirect discourse ov evvoet Ti weioerae he does not consider what he 
shall suffer, direct discourse ri weicopat; what shall I suffer ? 


a. A speaker may state his own words or thoughts, like those of another, 
in indirect discourse. 

b. A direct quotation is sometimes introduced by 6érz, as if it were 
indirect: ot dé etmov ru ixavol éopev but they said (that) ‘‘ we are able” 
(XA.5.4"°), as if it were ixavol elev or eioi they were able. 


929, Indirect discourse follows verbs of thinking and saying (verba 
sentiendi et declarandi): these include all implying knowledge or its 
expression; as perceiving, showing, hoping, asking; and even expres- 
sions like doxet it seems, SyjAdv €are it is evident. The indirect sentence 
is the object of the principal verb; or, if that is passive or intransi.- 
tive, its subject. 


Rules of Indirect Discourse. 


930, SimpLE SenTENcES.—Indirect assertions are either 

\ (1) introduced by oz: or ws that, or 

133 turned into the infinitive (see 946). 

Indirect questions are introduced by «i whether, worepov ..- 
n whether ...or, and other interrogatives or indefinite rela 
tives (1011, 1016). 


= 
ARS 


933] MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 293 


931. CompounpD SENTENCES.— When a compound sentence 
is quoted indirectly, its principal clause is treated like a simple 
sentence (930), and the subordinate clauses remain dependent 
on it. 


932. Usr or Moprs.—1. In general (except where the in- 
finitive is employed, 930), the same modes are used in indirect 
discourse that would be used in the direct. This is always 
so when the leading verb, on which the quotation depends, 
denotes present or future time: épwra ti rots he asks what 
you are doing. : 


2. But if the leading verb denotes past time, any indicative 
or subjunctive of the direct discourse may be changed, in the 
indirect, to the optative of the same tense: 7pero ti zovoins he 
asked what you were doing. 


a. This applies equally to subordinate clauses of the quotation: see 
the last two examples but one below. 


b. This optative is called the optative of indirect discourse, and must 
be carefully distinguished from all other uses of the optative. 


Exampies.—Mode unchanged: Adye: és bBpiorhs eis he says that I am 
insolent (Lys.24"), direct tBpicrhs ef you are insolent; ove oid 8 Ti &y TiS 
xpiaarto avtois [ don’t know what any one can do with them (XA.3.1*), direct 
Tl ay Tis xphrato; what can one do with them?; Bovrcvouo Srws ce arodpa 
Lam considering how I can run away from you (XC.1.4!8), direct was darodpa ; 
deliberative subjunctive, 866, 3. 


Optative: (1) for indicative: @yywoav of orpari@rar bri Kevds 6 PédBos ein 
the soldiers perccived that their fear was groundless (XA.2.271), direct nevds 6 
680s éori the fear is groundless ; Ktpos €Aeyev Ste 7) 65ds Exorto mpds Pactra 
Cyrus said that their march would be against the king (XA.1.4"), direct 4 68bs 
éxtat the march will be; npdta ri wdPorev he asked what had befallen them 
(XC.2.319), direct ri éemddere; what has befallen you?; Erxeyov Ott wAnyelev Tais 
Boras they said that they had been struck by the clods (XC.2.3!%), direct éxan- 
ynuev we were struck ; €reyov Sri Tis éml BaBvdA@va ein OC jomep irorey they 


said that ié belonged to the road to habylon, by which they had come (XA.3.5"), 


direct éo7) it belongs, jixete you have come ; eimev Ort A€ktmroy ovK emaivoly et 
TOUTO TeToinKws ein he said that he did not approve Dexippus if he had done this 
(XA.6.675), direct ob éravad I do not approve, ei rerolnne if he has done. 

(2) For subjunctive: of ’EmSduvior tov Ocdy erhpovto ei mapadotey Kopivbios 
thy mor the Epidamnians inquired of the god whether they should give up their 
city to the Corinthians (T.1.25), direct wapadauev; shall we give up ? 


933, This change to optative is never obligatory ; the mode of the 
direct discourse may remain unchanged even after a past tense, the 
past thought being vividly conceived as if present: ijpero ti movets he 


asked what you (are) were doing. 


Thus jKev ayyéAAwy Tis ws “EAdteia KarelAnmra there came some one an- 
nouncing that Elaiea (has been) had been taken (D.18'®), roadyv xpdvov imépouy 


294 MODES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 





tl mote Neyer for a long time I was in doubt what he (means) meant (PAp. 20). 


Mixed forms are common: éAeyoy bt: Kipos pev Té9vnkev, “Aptatos de Tepev yas 
ein they said that Cyrus was dead and that Ariaeus had fled (XA.2.13), 


a. As the optative may represent either indicative or subjunctive, a cer. 
tain ambiguity sometimes arises; thus jyvdovy 8 Tt mowotev (nesciebant quia 
facerent) may mean either they knew not what they y were doing, or they knew 
not what to do. 


934, When a subjunctive introduced by a relative with dy (860) is | 
turned into optative, the a is of course dropped. So cay, dray, emeay, 
etc. become ei, Gre, aa etc. 


amexptvato Ott BovAevooTo a. avTav 8 Tt divato ayabdv he answered that 
he would provide Sor them whatever advantage he could (XA.7.1%), direct 
Bovacdooua 6 Te av Sbyvwua I will provide whatever I can; stmioxvetro, et 
SiaBatev, proPopopav erecOa he promised that, if they should go across, they 
should receive wages (XA.7.1°), direct édy daBare, tora tf you go across, you 
shall receive. 


935, a. The hypothetical indicative with é, and the indicative in a con- 
dition contrary to reality (895) never change to optative: dmeAoyovyTo ws ouK 
ty wote oTw pwpol joa, as, ei Hecav xaTarauBavduevoy toy Teipaa, ev TO 
tore: av broxetplovs abrovs mapecxoy they said in defence that they would not 
have been so foolish, ¢f they had known that the Piraeus was just being seized, as 
“to have put themselves in their power in the city (XH.5.4°?). 

b. The imperfect and pluperfect generally remain unchanged ; but rarely — 
they become the present and perfect optative (cf. 853 a): Sinyodvro Sts avTol — 
ém) robs toAculovs mAcorey they declared that they had themselves been sailing 
against the enemy (XH.1.7°), direct émAéouer we were sailing. 

e. So too the aorist indicative remains unchanged in a subordinate clause 
of indirect discourse: €Aeyov ws 6 Zevopay ofxoito mpds SevOny & bwéaxeTo 
amroAnwomevos they said that Xenophon had gone to Seuthes to receive what he 
had promised him (XA.7.7°°). 


936. Very rarely the present indicative becomes imperfect indicative (in- 
stead of optative): éret0ovro, dpavTes STi wdvos eppdver oia Set Thy apxovTa they 
obeyed him, seeing that he alone had the mind which a commander ought to have 
(XA.2.2°), direct udvos ppovet he alone has the mind. 


937, IuextieD InprrEct Discoursr.—The rule for the 
change to optative (932, 2) applies also to various dependent 
clauses which, though not formally in indirect discourse, con- 
tain the thoughts of another person. Such may be, for in- 
stance, causal clauses containing another's reason (925 b), 
clauses depending on the infinitive with verbs of command- 
ing, wishing, etc., or on a final clause : 

Tov TlepixaAda exaniCov, OTe ovK ebdryou they reviled Pericles, because (as they 
said) he did not lead forth (T.2.21), éréorenev, ef Tt waOo1, avadeivar 6 Te olorTO 


xantetrba TH Oe@ he charged him, if anything should happen to him, to dedicate 
whatever he thought would please the goddess (XA.5.8°), eropevdunv, ta, et Tt 


940] 









‘Béorr0, &pedrolny avtdv I y INFINITIVE. 295 
need of it (XA.1.3*), pr¢ 
a. On this princi 
(881) and after ews 
thought. 






ras going, that I might aid him, if he should have any 
Mont mopevouat, Wa, eav Te SenTaAl, WPEAD. 

le depends the use of the optative in final clauses 
hintil etc. (921), since both punpose and expectation imply 



































938, Thy CG, INFINITIVE. 


an adjecti 
being DP ots oe : 
5 sete b infinitive and participle are verbal nouns—a substantive and 
Thus: | : ; tee 
a >, But they are unlike other nouns derived from verbs (541), 
voices anda: more nearly related, in form and construction, to the finite verb. 
b. They en 
" The -are made from all verbs, and with different forms for the different 
} tenses. 
y may take an object, direct or indirect (598), like the finite verb. 
y are modified by adverbs (not adjectives). 
939 % J ° e ° } A e ° 
BT st Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive. 
9 G 
ing to JM The subject of the infinitive, when it is expressed at 
Zrovd@ends in the accusative case. A predicate-noun, belong- 
Bic ccfmthe subject of the infinitive, stands in the same case: 
v0.44 mn ; ; i : 
1 ge AOnvatoy eivee I heard that you were an Athenian (XA.3.1"), Tov 


wai yabdy tvSpa evdaluova cival dna I assert that the virtuous man is happy 


KEL 3 0°) 

from E ° ° oe ° °,@ - / 

ay The subject of the infinitive may be another infinitive: diamempayywcvos 
apa Baciréws Sobijvai ot cd ew rovs “EAAnvas he is come having obtained 


325 


E the king that it should be granted him to rescue the Greeks (XA.2. 
j Pre cdCew is the subject of dofjvat. 

1s 
N40, The subject of the infinitive 1s not expressed, when it 
he same as the subject of the principal verb. A predicate- 
n with the infinitive is then put in the nominative. 

pn ebérew he said he was willing (X.A.4.12"), in Latin, on the other hand, 
dizit se velle; @dixetoOar voulCer he thinks he is wronged (XA.1.3°), Mépons Epn 
civan he said he was a Persian (XA.4.4""), eyo odx duoroyhrw a&KAnTos iKELy, 
BAN bard cod Kexanucvos I shall not admit that [ have come unbidden, but bidden 
by thee (PSym.174*). 

a. If the infinitive with omitted subject depends on another infinitive, the 
predicate-noun of course takes the case of this infinitive’s subject; and if it 
depends on a participle, it takes the case of the participle: motor Soxeiv opas 
_gaytodamovs patverda they contrive it so that they scem to appear in manifold 

shapes (PRp.3€1°), amakAayels TOV parkdytwy SikacTay eivan being rid of those 
who profess to be judges (PAp.41?). 

b. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis or contrast, the subject of the 
principal verb is also expressed with the infinitive; it may then stand either 


<= 















296 





SUBJECT AND PREDICATE WI 


in the nominative or the accusative (but abtds is u inative) : 
mpe ameven pyoty he says that he will himself depart ¢ rly (XA.2.2!), et oteade 
Xadiadéds thy ‘EAAdSa cdoEW, tues & anodpicecOau +t 







TMpayuata, ovK op0as 
re, but that you will 


escape the trouble, you are mistaken (D.9%4), ofuae eut mrcf - xphuara eipydoban 
4 &dovs obvdvo T believe that I have earned more money 


(PHipp. Maj.282¢), 






















941, The subject of the infinitive is also omitted vw 
Same as the object of the principal verb. A predica? 
usually takes the case of this object, even when it is 
dative; but sometimes stands in the accusative, in agre, 
the omitted subject: 


Kupov éd€orTo dis mpoOvuordrov yevéabat they besought Cyrus to show himself as 
Javorable as possible (X1.1.5?), wayr} koxovTt mpochker Ppoviuw eva it becomes 
every ruler to be prudent (XHipp.7!) ;—oumpeper adrois dlarous elva padAov 7) 
ToAeEuious it is advantageous for them to be Jriends rather than enemies (X0.11?8), 


942, An indefinite subject of the infinitive (as rig any one) is com- 
monly unexpressed; but a predicate-noun referring to it stand; 
accusative: didvOpwroyv elvan der (sc. teva) kab hiddrodw one 
be humane and patriotic (I.2"), dpdvras FStov Oaveiy tis swee! 
men) to die acting (EH Hel.814), 


943, The construction of the accusative with the infinitive 
began with transitive verbs, the accusative being simply the objec 
verb: thus #yyeav Kvpoyv vikay meant at first ‘they reported Cyr 
conquering.’ Afterward the accusative attached itself more closelt 
infinitive, and the construction was extended to cases where the pl 
verb was intransitive or passive. 


PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION FOR IMPERSONAL. 


944, Instead of using an impersonal verb with the accusative 2 
infinitive as its subject, the Greek often puts the subject of the 
finitive in the nominative case, and joins it as a subject with 
principal verb. Thus it Says Kupos héyerar vixnoa Cyrus is said 
have conquered, instead of Aéyerar Kipoy viknoa tt ts said that Cyra 
conquered. 


a. This change regularly oceurs with Ooxet, €orxe it seems, Set in the 
sense of 2¢ lacks (much or little); and usually with oupBalver it happens, 
Oixardy é€ore it ¢s just, dvaykaidy ere it is NECESSATY, ETrUTHSELOY eae tt és 
Jitting, and some similar phrases, and with Aéyerac and other passive 
verbs of saying and thinking : 

OoKotvmev wor KadAcba it seems to me that we are encamped ( XA.1.8!"), rovAod 
d€w eye imtp euaurod amodoyeioba Tam jar from speaking in my own defence 
(PAp.502), Sikaos ef Bonbeiy TG avdpt (you are Just to take) é¢ és right for you 
to take the man’s part ( PProt.339°), 6 "Agadpuos els Thy xdpav éuBareiy dyyéer- 
Acta it is announced that the Assyrian is abou! to make an inroad into the 
country (XC.5.38%), 


48] INFINITIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE. 297 


‘ INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
' 945, The infinitive commonly stands either as the object or the sub- 
‘ect of averb. As such it has two distinct uses, according as it is, or 
‘3 not, in indirect discourse. 

i a. An essential difference is that the infinitive in indirect discourse de- 
‘otes time (852), while the other does not. Cf. 854 a. 

Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. 

/ 946. The infinitive in indirect discourse is used as the 
rbject of verbs of thinking and saying (see 929); and repre- 
‘ents an indicative (or optative) of the direct discourse (930): 
| olopa BéAtiotoy civou I think it is best (XA.5.18), dxodw tivd diaBarrew ewe 
hear that some one is slandering me (XA.5.7°), duwpdxate Sindoew ye have 
‘worn that ye will give judgment (D.39*°), pnul ratta pavaplas eivar I say that 
as is nonsense (XA.1.3""). 

_ a. With the passive of these verbs, and with Soxei it seems, paiverat 
t is plain, and like expressions, the infinitive stands as subject : 

~ Aéyerat kal Tos Oeods bd Tod Aids BaciAebeoOat ’tis said that cven the gods 
wre ruled by Zeus (1.3°5), eddie Oetov eivar kal bwoxwpijoa Tov ToTapdy il seemed 
hat i was a special providence and that the river had receded (XA.1.4'®).—But 
the change to personal construction (see 944) is very common in these cases. 


' pb. Of these verbs, observe that 
‘  qnpi and otoza: almost always take the infinitive, 
‘ _ etrrov takes 6rt or os, 
Aéeyw takes either. 
Exceptions are very rare (XH.6.37; 1.67; XM.3.3!4). Ezwov with the infini- | 
ive commonly means commanded. In general, verbs of thinking take the ~ 
nfinitive much oftener than ort or as. tigi i 


| 9477, A subordinate verb, depending on an infinitive in indirect discourse, 
‘$ sometimes attracted into the infinitive, when the clause in which it stands 
sa part of the quotation: Toatr arta cas pn SiarexOévtras iévars eed de 
yeviosar emt TH oiKld, avewyuevny KaTadauBdvew Thy Odpay “after such conver- 
ation,” he said, “they went away: but when they came to the house, they found 
he door open” (PSym.1744), 


Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse. 







948. As object, the infinitive is used especially with verbs 
which imply power or fitness, feeling or purpose, effort or in- 
wence, to produce (or prevent) an action: 

ov duviceta Bidcacba he will not be able to force them (XA.1.8°), Exw yap 
IT@ paptupjoa for I can testify in his behalf (XA.7.6°°), wepindow aravres 
waprdverv all men are prone to err (1.3.45), HOeAov axovew they were willing to 
sten (XA.2.6"1), BovrAcTa kaTaueivan Thy otpariay he wishes the army to remain 
XA.5.61"), poBoiuny ay exeoOa I should be afraid to follow (XA.1.3""), rupayvety 


i 


298 INFINITIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE. 







émivoet he intends to rule (ArThesm.338), obk éxérAve Bactdeds Td Kipov ope 
Teuua dtaBaivew the king did not hinder Cyrus's army from crossing (XA.1,7"), 
émeipavto ciaBddrew they tried to enter (XA.1.2"!), Hptaro mpoiévar he began to 
go forward (XA.1.8!), robs émAtras éxéAcvoev avtod peivan he bade the hoplites 
remain on the spot (XA.1.518), Emredev avrdy mopevecOa he urged him to miata, 

(XA.6.2!%), ay 


a. Verbs of hoping and promising are construed in two ways. If 
felt as implying indirect discourse, they take the future infinitive: 
otherwise, the present or aorist. Thus we may say tmoyxveira doce 
he promises that he will give (as in Latin, se daturum esse), or tmuryveira 
Sovvat (or diddvar) he promises to gwe. Cf. XA.1.37 and 2.379, 


949, As subject, the infinitive is used chiefly with imper- 
sonal expressions like doxet it seems good, det, ypy it is neces- 
sary, éore it is possible, tear it is permitted, tpére, poojke 
it is fitting, xadov €or tt is honorable, and many others: 


macw adety xademdr (sc. éotl) to please all men is hard (Solon 7), ear 
dpav ’tis permitted to see (XA.3.4°"), ESokev adtots mpoiévar it seemed best to 

* @ 2 > y YA a > oe — = 
them to proceed (XA.2.1°), ob Simov Thy apxovTa Tav dpxXouevwy movnpdTEpoy — 
mpoonke eivar surely it is not right that the ruler should be wickeder than the 
ruled (XC.7.55?)—For the change to a personal construction in some ex- 


pressions of this kind, when the infinitive has a subject, see 944 anda. 


a ee! 


950, The infinitive may also stand as the predicate: 7d pavOdvew em-— 
othuny ott AauBdvew learning is getting knowledge (PEuthyd.277°); or in — 
apposition with the subject or object: airy udvn éeot) Kanh mpakis, erioTnuns F 
orepndivat this alone is evil fortune, to be deprived of knowledge (PProt.345>). ; 


951, The infinitive is often used (as an indirect object) to 
. F 


denote the purpose of an action : gg 
Eevopav To fucuv Tod orpareduatos KaréAuTe duddtTey To OTpaTomEedOY 


ake 


Xenophon left half the army to guard the camp (XA.5.2!), ralrny thy xapay 
émétpewe Siapmaca Tots “EAAnow this country he gave over to the Greeks to 
plunder (XA.1.2"), wapéxer Eautdy epwray he gives himself up (to question) to 
be questioned (PMen.70°), miety GSwxd vor Fgave thee to drink (ECycl.520). 


952, The infinitive may depend on adjectives or substantives, 
especially such as denote ability or fitness, or are otherwise 
analogous in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive (948): 


Adjectives: ixayds vikay able to conquer (XM.38.7'), dewds A€vew skilful in 
speaking, eloquent (PAp.17°), Eromos udxeoba ready to sight (XC.4.1'), agus 
tpxew worthy to govern (XA.1.9'), yarerd edpety hard to find (PRp.412°), yurn 
evmpemys idety a woman comely to look on (XM.2.1”), oixia 7dtoTrn evdiaTaabas 
a house very pleasant to live in (XM.3.88), 6 xpdvos Bpaxds ear dinyhoacda the 
time is short for relating it (PMenex.2389°). : 

Substantives: ody Bea nabeddew "tis not a time to be sleeping (XA.1.3"), 
ovvoeiy cixev Haiclay she was of an age to be married (Isae.88), dxvos Hy 
avicracba there was a reluctance to vise up (XA.4.4"1), avdyrn relOecOa there 
is need to obey (XH.1.68), Oaijua kat &xodoa a wonder even to hear of (PLg.656%). — 


Z 


bs 


' 956] INFINITIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE. 299 


a. The active infinitive is generally employed in these expressions, even 
where we might expect the passive: &f:os @avudoa ‘worthy to admire,’ i. e., 
that one should admire him, worthy to be admired (T.1.138). 


9538. The infinitive is used with dare to denote the result: 


Tos NAMKLOTULS TuVEKEKPaTO, bore oikelws SiaxetoOa he had mingled with those 
of his own age, so as to be on familiar terms with them (XC.1.4'), jAavvev ém 
Tous Mevwyos, Sote éxelvous éxmetAnxOa he charged on Menon’s soldiers, so that 

they were terror-stricken (XA.1.51*).—For @s used instead of are, see 1054, 1 f. 


a. The infinitive with é0re may also denote the purpose (as a result to be 


attained): may mootow, dare Stxny py Siddva they do everything, in order not 
to suffer punishment (PGo.479°). 


b. éore with the infinitive sometimes means on condition that: é&jv aborts 
Tay AoTaY Upxew ‘EAATVwv, ore advtovs brakovew Bacire? it was in their power 
to be leaders of the rest of the Greeks, on condition of being themselves subject to 
the king (D.6!!).—¥or é@’ ‘@7e in the same sense, see 999 a. 


954, After comparative words, # écre (less often #, or #) os) is used 
with the infinitive: ; 


nobovto avToy édAaTTw Siva exovtTa }) bore Tos pidrous were they per- 
ecived that he had too small a force to assist his friends (XH.4.8°), liter., ‘smaller 
than so as to assist them’; vdonua pet(oy 2 pépew a disease too great to be 
borne (SOt.1293). 


955. The infinitive is often used after zpiv before ; see 924, 
and a: 


SueBnoav mply Tovs &Adous daroxpivacba they crossed before the others answered 
(XA.1.4!°), ex) rovrois eOvero mply Tin eimeiy TGY oTpatiwtdv about this he made 
sacrifice before telling any of the soldiers (XA.5.6"), 

a. Hm. uses mdpos in a similar way: mdpos Ttade epya yevéocba before these 
deeds were done (Z 348).—Instead of mpiv alone, we often find mpdrepey. . . mpiy, 
or mpdcbey... mpiv (and in Hm. mpiv...ampiv, or mdpos... piv): mporepov 
€xeivos éTeAevTnoE mply TL euol SrevexOjvar he died before ever having any 

- difference with me (PLach.180°). 

b. Instead of apiy alone, we should expect amply # (prius quam); and this 

occurs, oftenest in Hd., twice in Hm., but perhaps never in Attic. 


956, InrrniTrvE 1x Loose Construction.—The infinitive, with or 
without the particle os, is used in several phrases with loose construc- 
tion, somewhat like the adverbial accusative (719): as eizeiy or os 
emos eizety 80 to speak, (ws) cuvedovte eizvety (sc. ti, cf. 771 b) to speak 
concisely, €ot Soxety as it seems to me, in my view, dAlyou Sew or pixpod 
dety almost, liter., ‘so as to want little of it.’ 


a. So eivat is used in several phrases, where it may be translated at any 
rate, or not translated at all: éxay eiva willingly (so as to be willing), 7d voy 
_eivan for the present, 7d Katd TovToy civa so far as this man is concerned: thus 
 €kay eivar oddity Wevtcoua I will tell no falsehood (willingly at any rate) ¢f J can 
_ help it (PSym.215?). 





300 INFINITIVE WITH ARTICLE. [957 


957. INFINITIVE FOR ImMPERATIVE.—The infinitive is sometimes 
used to express a command in the second person; the subject, if 
expressed, is nominate. This is rare in Attic prose: 


Oapoay viv, Atdundes, em) Tpweror pdxeoba with courage, Diomed, now 
against the Trojans fight (E 124), ob, KAeapida, ras mwtAds dvoltas émexOeiv do 
thou, Clearidas, open the gates and sally forth (T.5.9). 


a. With a subject-accusative, the infinitive may express a wish or prayer; 
and also (in proclamations and decrees) a command in the third person: 
Geo) moAtrat, wn pe Sovdclas Tuxety gods of our country, may not bondage be my 
lot (ASept.253), axovere Aew: Tods yewpyovs ameva hear ye pecple; let the 
husbandmen depart (ArPax 551). 


For the infinitive in exclamations, see 962. 


INFINITIVE witH NEvuTER ARTICLE. 


958, The neuter article, prefixed to the infinitive, gives it more distinctly 
the character of a substantive. Its different cases are used just like the cases 
of substantives: thus for instance the oblique cases may depend on prepo- 
sitions. The subject, predicate, and object of the infinitive are expressed in 
the same way, whether it has or has not the article. Hence the rules in 939- 
942 and 988 b are applicable here. 


959, The infinitive with the neuter article prefixed may 
stand as a substantive in any case: thus 
Nom. and Ace. 76 ¢urcty (the act of) loving, 
Gen. Tov dircty of loving, 
Dat. ro dircty to, for, by, loving. 


NOMINATIVE: 7) gpovety evdaovlis mpOrov bmdpxe: to be wise is the first 
law of happiness (SAnt.1347). 


ACCUSATIVE: avTd 7d dmodvioKe ovdels hoBetrar mere dying nobody ts 
_ afraid of (PGo.522°), dia 1d Edvos elva otk by oler adixnOiivar; do you think 
you would not be injured on account of being a foreigner ? (XM.2.115), axpos 7d 
petploy detodo memusdevuevos trained to having only moderate wants (XM.1.2!). 


GENITIVE: Tov mety emiBoula desire of drinking (T.7.84), ahOns Tod KaTakovelv 
tTwds unaccustomed io obeying any one (D.1°*), éuod ovSev mpeaButepoy Tov Ort 
BéATiotov eue yevécOu to me there is nothing more important than to become as 
good as possible (PSym.218*), aptayres Tod SiaBalvew having taken the lead in 
crossing (XA.1.41°), ayrl rod ém) Kaplay igvar ebdds én) bovyias émopevero instead 
of going against Caria he marched straight toward Phrygia (XH.3.4'"), exrds 
el TOD méAAELY arobvijcKel adpioy you are in no danger of dying to-morrow 
(PCr.46°). 


DATIVE: kexpdtrynke TH mpdtepos mpds Tots mpayuact ylyvecOau he has tri- 
umphed by being more prompt in action (D.8!"), Mévay nyddAdAeto TQ ekorraray 
dvvacba Afenon delighted in being able to deceive (XA.2.6"), év tT povely 
yap pundevy HdicTos Bios in knowing nought consists the happiest life (SAj.554), 
€Oavudero em) TG evOiuws te Kal edxddaws Civ he was admired for his living 
cheerfully and contentedly (XM.4.8?). 


964] INFINITIVE WITH “AN. 301 


960, The infinitive with rod is often used, without a preposition, 
to denote the purpose, especially a negative purpose: 

érecxlaOn “ATaddyTn i) vijoos, Tov mi AnoTas KaKoupyeiy Thy EvBoiw the 
island Atalante was fortified, that pirates might not ravage Euboea (T.2.32), 
Mivws Td AnoriKdy KaOjper ex Tis OaAaocons, TOU Tas mpocddous MaAAoy idvat 
avt@ Minos swept piracy from the sea, for the better coming in to him of his 
revenues (T.1.4). 


961. The infinitive with 7é is sometimes found in loose construction, 
analogous to the accusative of specification: 7d mpcoraramwpeiy ovdels mpddi- 
uos jv as to enduring hardships no one was zealous (T.2.53). 


a. In this way 7d wf with the infinitive often expresses a negative result: 


Tis Mndwy cov amedcipOn, Td wh oor akodrovbetv; what one of the Mcdes remained 
away from you, so as not to follow you ? (XC.5.1*). 


962, INFINITIVE IN ExcLAMATIOoNS.—The infinitive with 7d is used 
as an exclamation of surprise or indignation: rhs pepiads: ro Aia 
vopitew what folly! to believe in Zeus! (ArNub.819). 


a. In poetry ré is sometimes lacking: eué mabeiy tdde that I should come 
to this ! (AEKum.837), 


963, Verbs of hindering and kindred meaning take either (1) the 
simple infinitive, or (2) the infinitive with rov: furthermore, in accord- 
ance with 1029, they may take (8) the infinitive with py or (4) with 
Tov pn, or (5) with 7d py (961). All these forms mean exactly the 
same. Thus for he hinders me from speaking, may be said xoAveu pe 
héyewv, KohvEL pe TOU AEyery, KHAVEL pre Jur) A€yelv, KOATEL pe TOD py A€yeLY, 
K@hvet pe TO jury AEyery. 


INFINITIVE WITH av. 


964, The infinitive takes dv when it stands in the place of 
a finite verb which would take it. Thus the infinitive with 
av corresponds 
(a) to the potential optative with dv (872), and 
(b) to the hypothetical indicative with dv (895): 


(a) Aéyer swrnplas avy tvxety (independent construction &y tdxor) he says 
that he should attain safety (XA.3.1°), Soxetré por word BéAtiov Sy wept Tod 
moheuov Bovrevoorba (indep. BérxTiov ay Bovrctoucbe), ci Thy Térov Tis Xépas 
evOoundeinre at appears to me that you would take much better counsel concerning 
the war, if you should consider the situation of the country (D.4*!). 


(b) Kipos, ef éBiwoev, &piotos by Bonet tpxwy yevéoba (indep. apioros dy 
éyéveto) it scems probable that Cyrus, if he had lived, would have proved a most 
excellent ruler (XO.4'8), &vev 5€ ceicpod cdK &y pot Soxet Td ToodTo kuuBiva 
yevécOar (indep. od ky tuvéBn) cacept for an earthquake, it seems to me that 
such a thing would not have happened (7.3.89). 


a. The future infinitive is not used with ay: cf. 855 a and 872 f. 


302 | PARTICIPLE. [es 


“D. - PARTICIPLE: 


For the nature of the participle, see 938. For the agreement of the parti- 
ciple with its substantive, see 620, 614-617. For the time denoted by the 
tenses of the participle, see 856. 


ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE. 


965, The participle, like any adjective, may qualify a sub- 
stantive as an attributive : woAus oikoupevyn an inhabited city. 


So always when it follows the article (666): 6 mapwyv koipds the present 
occasion (D.3*), 6 tepds kaAovpevos wéAepos the so-called Sacred war (T.1.112). 


966, The attributive participle is often used alone, its substantive 
being omitted (621): 

of mapdvres the persons present, 6 ruxwv whoever happens, érreu ew) odds 
vavs KexTnuevous he sailed against men who possessed many ships (XH.5.11). 

Such participles are often to be translated by substantives: 6 Spacds the 
doer, of Aéyorres the speakers, mpoonkovtés Tives some relatives, méAts TOACMOUYT WY 
a city of belligerents, ra Séovra the duties, ro médAdoy the future, 7 TeAEuTGIoY 
éxBay the final issue. 

a. Participles thus used sometimes take a genitive, like substantives, espe- 
cially in poetry: Ta cuupéepovra Tijs wéAews the advantages of the state (D.18”*), 
6 éxelvov Texav his parent (EEI.3835). 


b. The participle with the neuter article is rarely used in an abstract sense, 
like the infinitive: 7d wh pedretav the not-exercising, failure to exereise (T.1.142), 
= 7d wh peaetay. In prose, this is nearly confined to Thucydides. 


PREDICATE-PARTICIPLE. 


967. All participles which are not attributive, are called predicate- 
participles. See 594 rem. The predicate-participle is either cereum- 
stantial or supplementary ; being in the latter case more closely related 
to the principal verb. These two classes are not in all cases clearly 
distinguished, but run into each other. 


Circumstantial Participle. 


968. The circumstantial participle adds a circumstance con- 
nected with the action of the principal verb: ratra eirav dayjew 
having said this, he went away. 

So yeaa emvece he praised them laughing (XC.2.21!), éddxpie morby xpévov 
éotds he wept a long time standing (XA.1.8°), @rt wats dy mdvtwy Kparioros 
évoulCero while yet a boy, he was thought to excel all (XA.1.9*), axodoaor Trois 


orparnyors Tatlra eote To oTpdrevpa ouvayaye when the generals heard this, 
they resolved to collect their forces (XA.4.4"°), Often the participle must be 


4 oe mS 


ae 
at; 


a 


969] OIRCUUSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE. 303 


translated by a clause with when or some similar word, as in the last two 
examples. Sometimes it is best rendered by a separate finite verb: katawn- 
Shods awd Tod apuaros Toy Odpaxa éevedu he sprang from his chariot and put on 
his cuirass (XA.1.8%), In cases like the third example above, ay cannot be 
omitted. 


a. The following participles are idiomatically used for adverbs 
(cf. 619 and a): dpyduevos at first, rehevray at last, diadimav xpdvoy 
after an interval of time. So éywy means persistently, avicds quickly, 
Gappay boldiy, Kabwy secretly, xaipov with impunity : 

TedevTay obv emt Tos xetporéxvas ja at last, then, I went to the artisans 
(PAp.22°), pavapets exw you keep trifling, i. e., ‘holding on to it’ (PGo.490°), 
dyoy avicas make haste and open (ArNub.181), od xatpovres by a&madAdtate 
you will not get off scot-free (XA.5.6*), 


la 


b. The participles €yav, dyav, pépov, haBav, xpopevos may often 
be rendered with: Swcias wapnv ¢yav omXtras tprdxociovs Sosias was 
there with 300 hoplites (XA.1.2°), Bon ypopeva with a shout (T.2.84). 


ce. The phrases rf radéy; (‘having suffered what ?’) and vi paddy ; (‘having 
learned what ?’) signify why, asked in a tone of surprise or severity: ri yap 
waddyres Tovs Ocods UBpl(ere; why the deuce did you insult the gods? (ArNub. 
1506). 


969. Most commonly, the circumstantial participle denotes merely 
an attendant circumstance. But it may also imply means, manner, 
cause, purpose, condition, or concession. Thus: 


a. Means OR MANNER: An(duevor (Gor they live by plundering (XC.3.2”), 
KEL TR XaAETA hepducva the troubles are come with a rush (XC.2.83). 


b. Cause: Mapicarrs tripye TS Kipy, pirotoa adrov madrdov 2 rov BactAed- 
ovta “Aotatepiny Parysatis favored Cyrus, because she loved him more than the 
reigning Artaxerxes (XA.1.14). 

c. Purpose: the participle is then usually future: mapeAhavba cupBovrevowy 
I have come forward to advise (1.61), érewpé tie. épotyta ort cuvyyevérOa adTa 
xprcer he sent a man to say that he wished to mect him (XA.2.5?). The present 
also occurs, though seldom: wéureiv kwAvovras to send persons lo hinder (T.6.88). 


d. ConpDITION: ob 5€ KAdav ceiver taxa but if you listen, you will quickly 
know (ArAv.1390). The conditional participle with u4 can often be rendered 
by without: ovx eoriw apxewv wh SddvTa picOdy it is not possible to command 
without giving pay (D.4*4). 

e. CONCESSION: 7d B5wp edwvdraroy apictov by water is the cheapest of 
things, though it is the best (PEuthyd.304), duets spopduevor Ta wemparyyeva 
cal durxepatvovtes ryere Thy ciphuyny Suws you, though you were suspicious as to 
what had been done, and were dissatisfied, continued to observe the peace notwith- 
standing (D.18**), 


Remark.—It must be remembered that the Greek participle, while it 
stands in all these relations, does not express them definitely and distinctly. 
Hence the different uses run into each other, and cases occur in which more 
than one might be assigned: thus tobs dfrous ebepyerotyres kal Tods éxOpods 
Suvjcerbe Kord ew by benefiting your friends (means), or if you benefit your 
Sriends (condition), you will be able also to chastise your enemies (XC.8.7°8). 


' 
e &. 


304 GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. [970 


Participle with Case Absolute. ; 


970, GrenitivE AxssoLuTeE.—The circumstantial participle 
may be joined with a genitive not immediately dependent 
on any word in the sentence. The two are then said to be 
in the Genitive Absolute: tovtwv AexXP&vTwv avéoryoay this said, 
they rose up. 

imopalvoyvtos Tov ipos, 6 “AynolAdos KAivometins jv when spring was just 
peeping, Agesilaus was bed-ridden (XH.5.4°°), ratra éempixOn Kévevos orpatn- 
yoovtos this was done while Conon was general (1.9°°), avéBy emt Ta tpn ovdevds 
xwAvovtos he ascended the mountains, no one hindering (XA.1,2°?), 


971, The genitive absolute, besides denoting merely time or atten- 
dant circumstances (as in the above examples}, may imply other rela- 
tions (cf. 969). Thus: | 

a. CAUSE: Tay cwpdtwy OnrdvouEVwY, Kal ai Woxal adpwordrepa yiyvovTra 
(the body being enfeebled) by the enfeebling of the body, the spirit also is made 
weaker (X0.4’). 

b. ConpITION : Oedv CcAdytav dy & adrnbetoaw eye if the gods will it, I will 
speak the truth (ASept.562). 

c. CONCESSION: PBonPjca, TOAAGY ivTwy Tépay, Ovdels adTOLs SuynaeTar though 


there be many on the opposite bank, no one will be able to come to their aid 
(XA.2.4°°), 


972, The Greek construction of the genitive absolute differs from 
the Latin ablative absolute in several respects: 


a. The noun is often omitted, when it can be easily supplied: evretdev 
mpoidytwy (sc. adtav), édatveto ixvia trmwy as they were proceeding thence, there 
appeared tracks of horses (XA.1.6'), voyros (Zeus raining, cf. 602 c) whele i 
was raining {ArVesp.774). 

b. The participle &yv being cannot be omitted: maldwy tvrwy juay when we 
were boys {but Lat. nobis pucris), Except with the adjectives éxéy and axwy, 
which closely resemble participles: éuot éxdvros with my consent, éuod akovTos 
against my will, 

c. The Greek, as it has perfect and aorist participles in the active voice, 
uses the construction of the case absolute much less often than the Latin: 
Ktpos auykadéoas Tous otpatnyous cimev Cyrus, convocatis ducibus, dixit (KA. 
1.48), 

d. The genitive absolute is. sometimes needlessly used, when the noun 
denotes something mentioned in the main clause: tad7’ eirdvtos adrov, Soke 
Tt Aéyew TH *AoTudyet (= Tad7 elmev ote) when he had said this, he seemed 
to Astyages to say something important (XC.1.4°), diaBeBnrdtos Tepixdéous, 
nyyeAraon ate (= dtaBeBynndti Tepicre? jyyéan) when Pericles had crossed 
over, word was brought to him (T.1.114). 


9738, Accusative AspsoLuTEe.—Instead of the genitive abso- 
lute, the accusative is used when the participle is impersonal : 
thus éfdy (it being permitted) since it is permitted. — 


976] ADJUNCTS OF THE PARTICIPLE 305 


GAAG TL Bh, Uuas etdy amordom, ovK em) TodTO HABouev; but why, when it was 
in our power to destroy you, did we not proceed to do so? (XA.2.5**), mporrax bev 
por Mévwra wyew cis “EAAhomovTov, Sxduny 51a Taxous (it being commanded) 
when a command was given me to convey Menon to the Hellespont, [ went in haste 

(D.50"), mapexeAcvovTo Kpavyn ovK OAlyn xpdéueva, adbvaToY ov ev vuKT) HAAG 
ty onuives they cheered cach other on with no little outery, (it being impossible) 
as it was empossible in the nighi to give signals by any other means (T.7.44). 


a. Usually the participle belongs to an injindtive, as in the above examples. 
But sometimes it stands quite alone, as the participle of a verb with indeter- 
minate subject (602 d): SjAov yap Sri oicOa, werdov yé aor for of course you 
must know, (it being a care to you) since you take an interest in it (PAp. 244), — 
Yet in this case the participle is commonly put in the genitive, if the corre- 
sponding verb is not ordinarily impersonal: oftws @xovTos or exdvTev (it being 
thus, things being thus) in this state of things (PRp.381°,XA.3 3.1%). So, also, 
when the noun is replaced by a dependent sentence : enpav6lirecp TO ‘Aorudeyet 
Ore WoAeuiol eiow ev TH XOpt when it was reported to Astyages that enemies were 
én the land (XC.1.4'8); for‘the plural, cf. 635 a. 


974. After as (978) and Sczep, the accusative absolute is sometimes 
found, even when the participle is not impersonal: 

SwrpaTys nixero mpos Tous Geods amwA@s TAayA0u Giddvee, Gs Tobs Peovs KdA- 
Mota <idé6Tas émota ayabd éeors Socrates prayed to the gods simply to bestow 
good, thinking that the gods know best what things are good (XM.1.37), cvwmy 
édeitvouv, domep TovTe mpootetaypevoy avTots they were dining in silence, just 
as if thas had been enjoined upon them (XSym.i?!). 


a. Rarely so, without preceding @s or domep: mpooijkoy avT@ Tov KAT pov 
fepos since a part of the inheritance belonged to him (Isae.5 5”), ddéavra 8€ Tatra 
but this having been resolved on (XH.3.2'9); even Sdéfay ratra (XA.4.1'%), on 
the analogy of edote taira. 


Adjuncts of the Participle. 


975, The relations of the circumstantial participle to the principal 
verb are rendered more distinct by certain particles, which may be 
called adjuncts of the participle. Thus: 


976, The adverbs et6ts straightway and airixa forthwith, prefixed 
to the participle, denote that the action of the principal verb imme- 
diately succeeds that of the participle; dua at the same time and peraku 
between, prefixed (rarely appended), represent the two actions as con- 
temporancous : : 

| T@ Seki népar edObs a&roBeBnxdrt emenewvTo they fell upon the right wing 
immediately after tts landing (T.4.43), avrixa yevd|uevov és Toy unpoy eveppaaro 
Zcvs as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh (Hd.2.146), éudxovro 
&ua Topevojzevoe ot “BAAMVES the Greeks fought while upon the march (XA.6. 3°), 
Mevétevos perati malfev eisépxera Menexenus, sporting the while, comes in 
(PLys.2079). 

a. Strictly speaking the above adverbs, though closely connected with the 
participle, modify the principal verb. And sometimes they are joined with 
this verb, not with the participle. So also 


306 “ADJUNCTS OF THE PARTIOCIPLE. 





b. rére, era, %rerra, o}rws are often used with the principal verb after — 
participles: tmép weylstwy cal KarAlotwy KivddvedoayTes, OUTw Toy Bloy érEAEeU- 
tnoay they risked all for a great and noble cause, and so ended ther lives 
(Lys.2”°). 


977, The adverb Gre (also ofor, ofa) with the participle gives a 
causal meaning : 


Kipos, @re mats ev, jdeTo TH oToAn Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, was 
delighted with the equipage (XC.1.8°), én Karadap0ciy mdvu woAv, &re maxpor 
tay vuxTav ovoav he said that he slept a long while, because the nights were long 
(PSym.223°). 


978. The conjunction 4s as, as if, with the participle, represents 
its action sometimes as seeming or pretended, but oftener merely as 
thought or asserted by some other person than the speaker. Thus os 
yixoy (‘as conquering’) may mean either pretending to be victorious 
or thinking himself victorious. 

Tipdievoy éxérevre wapayevéoOai, ws és TMlerotdas BovAduevos orpareverOat, Os 
mpiyuata mapexdvTwy Meoiday TH €avtov xadpe he bade Proxenus report himself — 
for duty, on the pretence that he wanted to march against the Pisidians, because 
the Pisidians (as he alleged) were harassing his territory (XA.1.1").—rabrnv 
Thy xdoay erérpebe Siaprdoa tois “EAAnoW, Gs morculdy odoay this country he 
gave over to the Greeks to be plundered, since it was (as he considered) hostile 
(XA.1.2!°), Gavud(ovra &s copol re Kal evruxels avipes yeyernucvo: they are 
admired as having been (in the view of their admirers) both wise and fortunate 
men (XC.1.1'), @s ESaxrod otcys THs doeTHS Réyer he speaks in the belief that 
virtue is a thing that can be taught (PMen.95°), ameBrebare mpus GAAHAouS, ws 
avTds pev ExacTos ov mojowy, Toy Sé wAnoioy mpatovra (974) ye looked to one 
another, expecting each that he himself would not do it, but that his neighbor 
would accomplish it (D.14'°), cvAAapBaver Kipov ws aroxrevay he seizes Cyrus, 
meaning (as he declared) to put him to death (XA.1.1°). 


a. Bomep as, as tf, on the other hand, implies simply resemblance or com- 
parison: apxodvro épiotducvor Somwep HArats emdecxvipevar they slopped and 
danced, as if exhibiting for others (XA.5.4**), 


979, kaimep (less often xai) with the participle gives a concessive 
meaning and is rendered though: cupBovd<d@ cot kaimep vewrepos Ov 
LT advise you, although I am younger (XC.4.5°*?). 


a. In Hm., the nat and wép are often separated: o? 5é kat axvipevol wep er 
alte nob yérAacoay but they, though troubled, gleefully at him did laugh (B 270); 
or wép alone is used in the same sense: &xvdmuevol wep (x 174). 


b. Guws yet, nevertheless may be added to the principal verb, whether ratmep 
igs expressed or not: 7d wA700s wuetpov dpdivres, Suws eroAuhoare ievoan em 
avtous though seeing that thetr number was immense, you still had the courage 
to charge on them (XA.3.2'5)—Sometimes 6buws is separated from its verb by 
the concessive clause: oby ool Suws rod év TH modeula dvres Oappoduer with 
you, though in the enemy's country, we are not afraid (XC.5.1%), éojropas 
Kal Kak@s mdoxove Buws but I, though wronged, will ask thee none the less 
(EMed.280). 


c For nal raitra, and that with concessive participles, see 612 a. 


“eh 
7 4 
ay 
:: 
t 


1% 
| 4 
4 


\ 
\ 
4 
4 


982] SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 307 


Supplementary Participle. 


980. The supplementary participle is closely connected with 
the verb, and supplies an essential part of the predicate. It 
may belong either to the subject or to the object of the prin- 
cipal verb. 

Thus: (subject) to: Avrnpos av know that you are offensive ; 
(object) oda aitov Avrypov ovta L know that he is offensive. 


981. The supplementary participle is used with verbs of 
being, appearing, and showing, and of beginning, continuing, 
and ceasing to be. 


So eipui, vrdpyo am, daivowa appear, pavepos (d7nAos) cfu am mani- 
Jest, orca seem, Seixvip, dnrOw, awopaiva show, rovéw represent, eEehéyx@ 
convict, dyyéhiw announce, époroyéw acknowledge ;—dpxopa begin, d.a- 
Tehéw continue, mavw make cease, mavopat, Anyw cease, Oradeitr@, emEiT@ 
leave off, also amayopeva give over, éhrcitra fail. 

Thus ef rots mAcloow apécxovtés eopey if we are acceptable to the majority 
(T.1.38), d9A0s Fv auidpmevos it was clear that he was distressed (XA.1.2!!), amo- 
gaivover Tovs pevyovTas mada: Tovnpovs tvtas they show that the exiles were long 
ago bad (Lys.80°), mavra €vexa éxvtod mwoidy ekeAnAeyntat he has been convicted 
of doing everytiing for his own advantage (D.2°). 

Ente huépas pax dpevor dieréAeoay seven days they (continued fighting) fought 
without stepping (XA.4.3°), rovs BapBdpous Emavoey bBplCovras he made the bar- 
barians cease behaving insolently (1.12%), ov« dmetre peydaAnv kat radhv édieuevos 
ddtav he did not give up aiming at a great and noble reputation (XAges.11"*). 


a. Here belongs the construction of @yw with the aorist (seldom the per- 
fect) participle, as a circumlocution for the perfect; this is chiefly found in 
dramatic poetry: knpitas éxw I have proclaimed (SAnt.192) liter. ‘having 
proclaimed I hold myself thus,’ adeapyy thy euhy yhuas exerts; hast thou my 
sister as thy wedded wife? (SOt.577). 


982, Verbs of knowing, perceiving, remembering, and the 
contrary, take the supplementary participle. 


Such are oda, yryyooxa know, ériorapa understand, déyvodw am igno- 
rant,—aicOavoua perceive, vopitw consider, dpaw see, weptopaw (overlook) 
allow, axove hear, pavOave learn, ruvOdvopa learn by inquiry, ebpicxo 
Jind, \apBdve (catch) detect, ddicxopa, peopdopa am detected,—péuynpat 
remember, émudavOdavopa forget. 

Thus of5¢ ve Aéyovra det I know that you are always saying (XC.1.6°), to6t 
pévTot avdntos éy know, however, that you are foolish (XA.2.1!8), ayvoe? rdv 


e€xeidev TéAcuov Sevpo iiovra he knows not that the war which is raging there will 
come hither (D.1}»). 


eldov abrods medd(ovtas they saw them approaching (XC.1.4%), épa yey 
étapaptdavev, yivar I sce indeed, woman, that J do err (HMed.350), 7Sées axotw 
Zonparous Siareyouevov I like to hear Socrates discourse (P.Sym.1944), 4p 
emBovredwy aArtcnntat if he be detected in laying plots (XAges.8°). 


f 


at. a 


308 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. [oss 


peuynua Kpitiz tede Evvdvta oe I remember that you were in company with 
Critias here (PCharm.156*), émaAcatopel id€ws yépovtes ivres we have forgot 
with joy that we are old (KBacch.188). | 


a. The phrase cdvoida por (or éuavrd) may take the participle either in the 
nominative or in the dative: odvoida euavtg sopds Sv or cop@ tyts I am con- 
scious of being wise (see PAp.21>; 224), 


983, The supplementary participle is further used with 
verbs of endurance and emotion. 

So with dépw bear, avéxouar support, kaprepéw endure,—yaipa, FSopat, 
TépTopar am pleased, ayaraw am content, ayavakTéo, ax Popa, xaderas 
pépa am vexed, displeased, dpyiCopa am angry, aicxtvopa am ashamed, 
peTapédopal, perapedret pou repent: also xdurw am weary. 

Thus ov« avetouar (aoa I shall not endure to live (EHipp.854), 78oua bq’ 
vpav Tinepuevos Iam pleased to be honored by you (XA.6.1%8), of por metapéret 


ovTws amoroynoapevy L do not repent of having made such a defence (PAp.38°), 
pavOdvoy pn Kduve be not weary in learning (Stob.Flor.3*°), 


984, With rvyxdvw (poet. xvpéw) happen, AavOdvw escape no- 
tice, plavw anticipate, the supplementary participle contains 
the main idea. In translating, it often becomes the verb, 
while the verb becomes an adverbial modifier : érvye Oidpevos 
he happened to be sacrificing or by chance he was sacrificing. 

Thus éruxoyv év tH ayop% dbrAtra Kabevdovres hoplites, as it chanced, were 
slecping in the market-place (T.4.113), €rabov eyyis mpoocA@dyres they ap- 
proached unperceived (XA.4.2"), Bovarociuny av Aabeivy abtdy amerbdv I should 
like to go away without his knowledge (XA.1.3"), gpovéd érdvOave Béonwy (sc. 
éautév he entertained a murderer unawares (Hd.1.44), pbdvovcw em 7@ tiKpw 
yevouevor Tovs ToAEuLous they arrive at the summit before the enemy do(XA.3.4%), 


a. With rvyxdvw, the participle, especially av, is sometimes omitted: eZ tus 
etyous Tuyxdve if any one chances to be friendly {ArEccl.1141). 


985, Some other verbs, especially those meaning to do well or ill 
(ed or kakds Trotéw, adixéw, duaptavw), to surpass or be inferior (vixaa, 
nTTdopar) may take a supplementary participle to express the manner: 

ev Y eroinoas dvapyvncds pe you have done well to remind me (PPhaed.60°), 
Gdiket Tovs véous SiapGelewy he is guilty of corrupting the young (XM.1.1'). 


986, GenrRAL ReEMARK.—With many of these verbs, an infinitive 


eo, Re — 


may be used in the same sense; but often there is a difference of. 


meaning. 

Thus gatvera: tAovTay means he is manifestly rich, but patverat wAoureiv he 
appears (perhaps deceptively) to be rich. 

aicxivoua Aéywv I speak with shame, but atoxvvoua Aéyew I am ashamed 
to speak (and therefore do not speak). 

oide (uavOdver) virev he knows (learns) that he is victorious, but oide (uavOdver) 
vikay he knows (learns) how to be victorious. 

peuynua eis Kivdovov €rAQdv I remember that I came into danger, but peuenmas 
Toy klydovoy pevyew [am mindful to shun the danger. 


Mg 
F 


990] VERBALS IN -TEOS. 309 


ee PARTICIPLE WITH av. 


987. The participle takes év when it represents a finite verb 
which would take it. Thus the participle with av corresponds 

(a) to the potential optative with dv (872), and 

(b) to the hypothetical indicative with dv (895). 

(a) aire? tévous, &s odrw mepryerduevos dy TaY avTicTaciwTay (independent 
construction mepyyevoluny av) he asks for mercenaries, saying that thus he 
should be able to overcome his adversaries (XA.1.1"°), éyé eiut Tov Ti Hdéws ov 
ereyxdevrwy, ef Tr py GAnbEs A€yw, News F by ereykdvtwy, ei tls Te wh GANOEs 
Agyo: (indep. of dv eAeyxOetev, eA€yEerav) Tam one of those who would gladly be 
confuted, if I say anything untrue, but would gladly confute another, if he should 
say anything untrue (PGo.458*). 

(b) TorefSaay Eddy kal Svvndels dv abros Exe, ef EBovanOn, wapedwxe (indep. 
eduvhOn uv) when he had taken Potidaea, and would have been able to keep tt him- 
self, if he had wished, he gave it up (D.23'"). 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -TEOS. 


988, The verbal adjective in -réos has a passive meaning, 
like the Latin participle in -dus (cf. 475). Used as a predi- 
cate with <i/, it has two constructions—a personal and an im- 
personal, ‘The copula «iui is very often omitted, see 611 a. 


989, In the personal construction the verbal agrees with the 
subject of the sentence, like any predicate-adjective : érucrod7 
yparréa éeoriv (epistula scribenda est) a letter must be written. 

ov mpd ye Tis GAnOclas Tiuntéos avnp a man is not to be honored before the 

truth (PRp.595°), apeAnréa oor 7 médrts ort the state must be aided by you 


(XM.3.6°), & tots €AcvPépois HryouvTo civ mpantéa things which they thought were 
to be done by freemen (Ae.1}**), 


990. In the impersonal construction the verbal stands in the 
neuter (-réov or -réa, see 635 a); and, although still passive, it 
takes an object in an oblique case, the same which the active 
voice of the verb would take: ypamréov éoriv érurtoAjy one 
must write a letter. 

Thy woAwW apeantéoy one must aid the state (XM.2.1°8), trav Booknudtev 
emimeAnteoy one must take care of his fiocks and herds (XM.2.1°8), ond dh 


BonOnréov eivar Tots mpaypaow vuiv I say that you must come to the rescue of the 
interests at stake (D.1!"), ovs ob mapadoréa eori whom we must not surrender 

_ (7.1.86). 
a. Observe that the subject of the personal construction becomes the 
object of the impersonal. Verbals of transitive verbs admit either con- 
_ struction, those of intransitive verbs the impersonal construction only. 


os 
2 

4 ae 
. 


tw 


310 RELATIVE SENTENCES. Toon 





4 

cm 

v4 
/ 


In Latin, the impersonal construction is confined to intransitives: thus _ 
parendum est legi mearéov rH vice, but not scribendum est epistulam. 


991, The verbal in -réos takes the agent, or doer of the | 
action, in the dative (cf. 769 b). For examples, see the 
sentences given above. 


a. With the impersonal construction, the agent is sometimes put in the 
accusative, perhaps because the verbal was thought of as equivalent to de 


v 


with the infinitive: od SovAeuréov rods vody éxovtas Tots KaKas ppovotory “tis 
not right that the wise should be subject to the foolish (1.97). 


992, The verbal in -réos sometimes shows the meaning of the middle voice: 
meioTeoy one must obey (mwelOw persuade, mid. obey), pudanréov one must guard 
against (pvddaccw watch, mid. guard against), dwréov one must take hold of 
(Grrw aitach, mid. touch). 


PECULIARITIES IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF 
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 


Attraction, Incorporation, ete. 


993, A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in nwmber and gender 
(627), but stands in any case required by the construction of its own clause. 
Yet we often find an irregular agreement in case (altraction), and sometimes 
a peculiar arrangement of the words (incorporation). Both these changes 
have the effect of bringing the relative clause into closer connection with its 
antecedent. 


994, Atrraction.—The relative is often attracted into the 
case of its antecedent, especially from the accusative to the 
genitive or dative: 

Ececbe aydpes Bitor THs edAevOeplas hs néxTyobe (instead of fv KexTnaOe) you 
will be men worthy of the freedom which you possess (XA.1.7°), 76 tryeudut 
miotevoouey @ &y Kopos 615@ (for dy dy 815g) we shall trust the guide whom 
Cyrus shall give us (XA.1.31°). 

a. Other varieties of attraction are nearly confined to instances of incorpo- 
ration-and omitted antecedent: see below, 995, 996. 


995, IncorPoraTion.—The antecedent is often incorpo- 
rated, or taken up, into the relative clause. The relative and 
antecedent must then be in the same case : 

ovk amexpinteto hy elxe yudunv (for thy yvounv Hy exe) he did not conceal . 
the opinion he had (XM.4.4"), uh adbéancbe tpav adtady hy aed Sdtay néxTrnobe 
(for rhy ddétav Hv Kextnobe) do not deprive yourselves of the reputation which 
you have always possessed (D.20!4"), 3 


997] ATTRACTION, INCORPORATION, ETC. 311 


a. A nominative or accusative antecedent, when incorporated, con: 
forms to the case of the relative; but a genitive or dative antecedent 
commonly attracts the relative to its own case, unless the relative is 
nominative, or depended, before the incorporation, on a preposition 
(cf. 996 a): 

el tiva dpdn xatacKkevddovTa js &pxor xdpas (for Tiy xdpay hs apxor) if he 
saw any one improving the district of which he was governor (XA.1.9'*).— 
CmopeveTo aby 7 cixe Suvdmer (for cby TH Suvdmer Hv cixe) he marched with what 
force he had (XH.4.1°), rovrous dpxovras emoler hs katectpépeto xapas (for rijs 
xdpas hv kareor.) he made them governors of the country he subdued (XA.1.9"4). 
But ob Avdiort, GAN wep pdvn ‘EAAnuiKh: éorw apyovla (for TH apuovia ‘jrep) 
not in the Lydian key, but in that key which alone is Greek (PLach.188*). 

b. The relative may also keep its case when a demonstrative pronoun rep- 
resents the antecedent in the main clause: see $ 441, SOc.907. 


c. Observe that the antecedent, when incorporated, loses its article. 


996. Omission oF ANTECEDENT.—The antecedent is often 
entirely omitted, where it is implied in the context, or is 
merely the general idea of person or thing : 

vavuaxia markotdrn ay icpev (for Tay vavuaxiay as) a sea-fight the most 
ancient (of the sea-fights) that we know of (7.1.13), eyytyvera evoia mpds ods 


dv broddBw evvoinas @xew (for mpds tovtovs obs) L conceive good-will toward 
those whom I believe to be kindly disposed (XM.2.6**). 


a. The relative: (1) keeps its own case when the omitted antece- 
dent is nominative or accusative; but (2) it usually takes the case of 
the omitted antecedent when that is genitive or dative. A relative 
in the nominative masculine or feminine, or depending on a preposi- 
tion, remains, however, unchanged: 

(1) NoMINATIVE: eyo kal dy eym kpaTe pevotduey (for odro: dv) I and those 
whom I command will stay (XC.5.17*),—AccusaTIVE: orvyav wey Hw erinrey 
(for éxefyny }) hating her who bore me (EAl\c.3838). 

(2) GENITIVE: 7 7oAIs Huey ov ZAaBevy Gmrdor peTédwie (for TolTwy &) OUr city 
gave to all a share of (those things which) what she took (1.4%), av évruyxdvw 
pdrdicra wyaual oe (for rovtwy ois) of those whom I meet with, I admire thee 
most (PProt.361°). But 4 Oiya 570 of w epioar; (for todrwy of) shall I touch 
iff6se who begot me? (Klon 560).—DatiIveE: deiral cov tottoyv éxmety aby ois 
uddora pireis (for ody TovTos ods) he requests you to drink this (wine) with 
those whom you best love (XA.1.97°), éuuévery ois dpri ed0kev Huiv (for rovTots 
&) to abide by what we agreed just now (PProt.353"). But dvaykxatoy abrots 
SiadkeyerOar map av dy AdBoey Toy wicOdv (for TovTos Tap wv) they are obliged 
to give lessons to those from whom they expect to receive their fee (XM.1.2°). 


b. The omitted antecedent may be afterwards supplied by an emphatic 
demonstrative: a~ av mpocaret, amd TovTwy Bidyer on what he begs, on that 
he subsists (D.8°°). 


997, OrneR RELATIVES.—The peculiarities just described (994- 


_ 996) are not confined to os, but apply also to the other relatives, écos, 


oios, nAikos, Satis, etc. : 
dioikety Tas WdAEIs ToOLOVTOLS HOcoW oles Evaydpds efxe (for ofa) to govern 
the cities with such manners as Huagoras had (1.9%), rdvras eiopépew ad’ Baer 


312 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [998 


exaotos éxet (for amd tocovTwy boa) that all shall contribute from such means — 
as each man has (D.2°"). 


a. The same peculiarities extend to relative adverbs: tiw tuas Fv0a rd 
mparywa eyéveto (for éxetoe EvOa) J will take you to the place where the affair 
oceurred (XC.5.4!), amoxActovtes O0ev ay Tr AaBety 7 (for exeiBev O0ev) excluding 
them from places whence it may be possible lo take anything (XM.2.1'*). Often 
we may supply a pronoun as the antecedent: aoxe: drd0ev Sdéers ppovety (for 
tovTo érddev) practise that from which you will appear to be wise (PGo.486°), 
An instance of atiraction is seen in 8rexouiCovro evéds Obey twetébevTo Tmatdas 
kal yuvatkas (for éxet@ev ot) they immediately brought over their children and 
women from the places to which they had withdrawn them (T.1.89). 


SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 


998, "Ear of.—The frequent phrase éaruy of (‘there are those who’) 
means some: it is used in all cases, éorw Ov, gory ois, oT ovs: 

akwy eat ods eyw PiA@® some men I love in spite of myself (PProt.346°), 
TAHY -Axaay Kal toTiv wy BAAwY eOvay execpt the Achaeans and some other 
peoples (1.3.92), bromrot eyévovto at ev ois they came to be suspected in some 
things (T.5.25). 

a. For the singular tori, see 605. In the nominative, eZoww of often occurs. 

b. Similar expressions are @orw 8re sometimes, Eat ov or Grou somewhere, 
éotiy OTws somehow, etc. 

ce. In questions, éorw ofrwes is common: éorw ofotwas avOpérwy Tebad- 


paxas em) copia; hast thou admired any among men on account of wisdom ? 
(XM.1.4?). 


999, The neuter relative, with omitted antecedent, is sometimes 
loosely used in place of a conjunction, as 67: or éore. In this way 
av@ Sy and é& Sy mean because (cf. ovvexa, d0ovvexa, 1050): 

mpoohke: xapi abvtovs exew av eodOnoa ip ipuav it becomes them to be 
grateful for this, that they were saved by you (D.16!%), Sodvon Sixny av? av eue 
(nteiroy évOevd apavioo penance to pay, because ye sought to drive me hence 
(ArPlut.434). 

a. So also ef dre (= ml Tovt@ Sore) on condition that, often used 
with the infinitive: aipeOévres eh wre cvyypayra vopovs having been 
chosen on the condition that they should draw up laws (XH.2.3"). ~ 

b. Similar are €€ of and aq’ 06 since, év 6 while, eis 6 till, wéxps (&xpt) oF 
until, also to where (to that point of space at which), and like expressions. 


1000. Ofos (full form rovodros oios) is often used with the infinitive, 
and means of such sort as to, proper for. And so otds te in such condi- 
tion as to, able to; écos of such amount as to, enough to. 

Thus ob jv dpa ota 7d wediov apdeww it was not the proper season for watering 
the plain (XA.2.8!"), gupBovrcdew oiol 7° écducba, we shall be able to give advice 
(PGo0.455%), veuduevor Sorov amo liv tilling the land enough to live (T.1.2). 


1001. Ofos and does are sometimes used where we must supply an idea 
of ‘thinking,’ ‘considering’: améxAdov Thy éuavtod Tixnv, olov avdpbs ETatpou 
éorepnuévos einv I bewailed my own fortune (considering what kind of man} 


1004] OTHER PECULIARITIES. 313 


in that I had been deprived of such a man as a companion (PPhaed.117°). 
Similarly eddatuwy moe avinp epatvero, ws yevvalws éerededTa the man appeared 
to me happy (considering how) in that he died so nobly (PPhaed.58°). 

a. The same relatives, cies, aos, and as, are used in exclamations: & wdare, 
boa mpaypara exes ev TH Seitvy O grandfather, how much trouble you have in 
your dinner, liter. ‘oh! the amount of trouble which you have’ (XC.1.34), ds 
Kadds wot 6 wdmmos how handsome my grandfather is ! (XC.1.37). 


1002. In saying ‘such as J,’ ‘such as he,’ etc., not only otos but 
the following nominative is attracted into the case of the antecedent: 

xapr(duevos of» cor avdpl (for towovT® oios ov el) gratifying a man such as 
thow art (XM.2.93), mpbs a&vSpas ToAunpovs otovs ka *A@nvatovs (for oiot Kar 
*"AOnvatoi eiowv) against bold men such as the Athenians (T.7.21).—To this con- 
struction the article may be prefixed: rots otois nuiy to such as we are. Rarely 
the attraction is neglected. 


a. By a similar attraction do7:s, and especially é6aTi:codv, are used in all the 
cases with the meaning of any whatsocver: torw tpa Sikalov avipos BAdmTew 
évtwovv ayOpearwy ; (for Tiva dboTicovy €oTs any One whoever he is) és zt the part 
of a gust man to injure any person whatsoever ? (PRp.3835"), The same idiom 
extends to other indefinite relatives. 


b. A peculiar incorporation is seen in the phrases, doo: wives monthly (as 
if TocavTdxis S001 jves eiot aS Many times as there are months), dca 7uépas 
(also é60nmépar) daily, etc. 


1003. Inverse ATTRACTION.—The antecedent, without being in- 
corporated into the relative clause, is sometimes attracted to the case 
of the relative. 


In most instances of this kind, the relative sentence comes between the 
antecedent and the word on which it depends: thy ovctay hy karéAurev ov 
mAclovos atia éort (for 7 odcta Hy) the property which he left is of no more value 
(Lys.19%"). So with adverbs: kal @AAocwe Sra dy adixn ayanhsovat ce (for 
&AAoN) and in other places, wherever you may go, they will love you (PCr.45°). 

a. In this way, ovdels is attracted by a following devs ov: and the whole 
phrase (declined throughout: oddels Saris ov, ovdevds Stov ov, etc.) has the 
meaning every one: ovdevr Sty ov amoxptvera (for ovdels eat OTH OdK am. 
there is no one whom he does not answer) he answers every one (PMen.70°). 

b. By a somewhat similar change, @avuacrdv eat bos, Scov, etc., passes 
into Oavpactds bcos, Pavuacrod beou, etc.; and in like manner, Oavuastdy éeotiv 
@s, into Oavuaotws ws. A few other adjectives show the same idiom. Thus 
Gavmacriv danv wept o€ mpodvuiay exe he has a wonderful degree of devotion for 
you (PAlc.ii.151*), ireppuds as xalpw I am prodigiously pleased (PSym.173°). 


Other Peculiarities. 


1004, ReLative with SuBoRDINATE VERB.—A relative properly 
belonging with the main verb of the relative clause, is sometimes 
made to depend on a participle, or on a subordinate verb: 


KaTadauBdvovor Tetxos, 6 Teirxioduevol mote “Akapvaves Kow@ SikaoTypl 
éxpavro (properly @ éxpavro) they take a fortress, which the Acarnanians, having 






soa 
Vo Mae 
i, Ka 


at 4 


814 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [1005 


once fortified it were using as a common place of gudgment (T.3.105), avOpémous 
dckodmev, ois dmdtav Tis 018G wAclw mioOdy, mer” exelvwy G&KoAovOjcovar (prop. 
ot axorovOjaovet) we are training men who, whenever any one offers them larger 
pay, will follow those (1.8%). 


1005, ReLativE CLAUSE CONTINUED BY DEMONSTRATIVE.—When 
a relative clause is continued by a clause co-ordinate with it, the rela- 
tive word is hardly ever repeated. Where this would be necessary, 
the relative construction is abandoned in the second clause, and the 
relative word is sometimes entirely omitted, and sometimes, if in an 
oblique case, replaced by a personal or demonstrative pronoun. 

’Apiatos, dv jucts NO¢Aouey BaoirAda Kabiordval, Kal edéxapev Kat éAdBouev 
mora (for @ edékauev, ap of eAdBouev) Ariacus, whom we wished to make king, 
and to whom we gave, and from whom we received pledges (XA.3.2°), tvwxO 
O€ puy youdeoOau TH OTew Te TaTHp KeAeTaL, Kal avddver adTH (for Boris avddver) 
and bid her marry him whomeer her sire commandeth, and (who, literally he) 
is pleasing to herself (B 114). 

€xeivot Tolvur, ois ove exapiCov@ of A€éyovTes, odd epiAouy avTovs those there- 
fore, whom the speakers did not try to please, and did not caress them (D.3*4), 
avTideov ToAvpnuov, dou Kpatos éot) méyiorov mac KuxAdérecot, Odaca 5é mw 
téxe vinepn Polyphemus, peer of gods, whose might *mongst all Cyclopes is the 
greatest, and the nymph Thoosa bare him (a 70). 


a. Yet the relative is occasionally repeated: see XA.1.73, 7.2.43. 


1006. Vers Omrrrep.—When the same verb belongs to both 
clauses, antecedent and relative, it is sometimes omitted in one of 
them, especially in the relative clause: 


pirous voutCous’ otamep ay wéo1s oéOev (Sc. voul(n pirous) counting as friends 
those whom thy husband counts so (HMed.1153), 7a yap aAAa Goomep Kal vpmeis 
emovetre (Sc. emoler) for the rest he did just what you also were doing (XC.4.1°), 
@s éuod idvros bmn by pets (sc. inte), ofTw Thy yvdunv ExeTe understanding 
that Iam going wherever you go, so make up your mind (XA.1.3°). 


1007. Preposirion Omirtep.—When the antecedent stands before the 
relative, a preposition belonging to both usually appears only with the first: 
éy Tpial Kad Sea odX SAas Erect ois emiroAd ce: (for ev ois) in not quite thirteen 
years, in which he has been uppermost (D.9?°), ard THs abtis ayvolas jawep TOAAG 
mpotecbe Tay Koway from the same apathy from which you sacrifice many pub- 
lie interests (D.181*4). 


1008, TrRaNsFER TO RELATIVE CLAUSE.—Designations, especially 
superlatives, which belong most properly to the antecedent, are some- 
times taken into the relative clause: 

eis “Apueviay jkew, 7s "OpdvTas 7pxe ToAATs Kat evdaiuovos (for moAATY Kal 
evdaluova) they would come to Armenia, of which Orontas was governor, an 
extensive and prosperous country (XA.38.51"), Hywyov éadcous wAclorous eSuvapny 
I have brought (the largest number which) as many as I could (XC.4.5?°). 


a. In this way arise expressions like éze) (as, dre) TdxtoTa as soon as; als¢ 
bs TaXLTTA as soon as possible, etc. (see 651). 


a 
‘ 


4 
+ 
‘ 


* 





1011] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 315 


1009. Inrropucrory ReLarive CLause.—A clause beginning with a neuter 
relative is sometimes loosely prefixed to another sentence, either—(a) to 
suggest the matier to which it pertains: & 8 elev, ds éyd eis ofos del more 
petaBdrAdcoOau, Karavohoare but as to what he said, that I am one who is always 
changing, consider, etc. (XH.2.3*); or—(b) with appositive force: 6 tprt 
Zreyov, (ntrntéov tives &piotor pvaanes as I just said, we must inquire who are 
the best guards (PRp.418°). 


a. After such a clause, the principal clause is sometimes irregularly intro- 
duced by Or: or ydp: 0 mev mavTwy OavpaoTdTaroy aKovoal, OTL ev ExagTOY ay 
emnverapey amrddArvot Thy Wixnv what is strangest of all to hear, (that) each one 
of the things which we approved ruins the soul (PRp.491"). In like manner, 
after phrases such as @s Aéyovat, ws Eoxe, etc., the principal clause is some- 
times expressed as dependent: &s yap jkoved Twos, Ott KAéavdpos éx Buayttou 
perre ijkew for as I heard from some one, (that) Cleander is about to come 
Jrom Byzantium (XA.6.4!°). 

For relative clauses signifying cause and result, see 910; signifying pur- 
pose, 911; signifying condition, 912. 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


1010. There are two kinds of questions : 


1. Sentence-Questions : these relate to the action itself: they 
ask whether a given thing is or is done, and can be answered 
by yes or no. 


2. Word-Questions: these relate to something connected 
with the action: they ask, for instance, who, what, where, 
when, how, etc., and they cannot be answered by yes or no. 


W orRD-QUESTIONS. 


1011. These are expressed by means of pronouns or adverbs, 
—hby interrogatives, if the question is direct,—by interroga- 
tives or indefinite relatives, if it is indirect (700). 


tis héyer; who is speaking? ri héyer; what does he say? woOev nrOev ; 
whence came he? 

npopny Tis (or doTts) Néyou I asked who was speaking, npopny woOev (or 
omdGev) €AGot LI asked whence he had come. 


a. Strictly speaking, the indefinite relatives have no interrogative force: 
they are properly relatives (‘I asked about that which he said’); it is the 
eonnection only which gives the idea of a question. Accordingly the simple 
relatives are sometimes used in their place, though never after verbs of asking: 
Snaot bs cori he explains who he is (T.1.136), dpdGovow & Aéyer they make known 
what he says (XA.2.4'5). Such clauses are not properly indirect questions. 


316 INTERROGATIVEH SENTENCES. [1012 


1012. The interrogative word often depends, not on the principal 
verb of the interrogative sentence, but on a participle or other depend- 
ent word. This cannot be imitated in English. 


Tl abdixndels em:Bovdévers wor; (having been wronged in what, do you plot) 
in what have you been wronged, that you plot against me? (XA.1.68), mére & xp7 
mpatere; emedav Th yéynta; when will you do your duty? (when what has 
happened?) what are you waiting for? (D.4*°), roy éx molds méAews oTparnyov 
mposdoK@ TavTa matey ; (the general from what sort of city do I expect) from 
what sort of city must the general be, whom I expect to do this? (XA.3.114), 
Tl ideay moodyTa TadTa KaTéyvwKas avrov; (having seen him doing what, have 
you brought) what have you seen him do, that you have brought these charges 
against him? (XM.1.3"), ame:Ady odk émavero, kal ti Kaxdy ov mapéxav he did 
not cease threatening, and (what evil not causing?) causing every evil (D.25°°). 
For iva ri, see 612. For ri maddy and ti paddy, see 968 c. 

a. The interrogative often stands as predicate-adjective with a demonstra- 
tive pronoun, in the construction described in 618: ti Tovr’ EArcetas; (being 
what, hast thou said this?) what is this that thou hast said? (KBacch.1033), 
tlvas tovad eicopa; who are these I sce? (HOr.1347), ris ® otros Epxeat oios ; 
who art thou who comest alone? (K 82). So with a substantive: ris 6 mé0os 
avtovs iketo; what is this longing which has come upon them? (SPhil.601). 


1013, Two interrogative words, without connective, are sometimes 
found in the same sentence: 

tivas otv bmd Tivwy eUpomey dy melCova evnpyernuevous; whom then can we 
Jind more benefited, and by whom? (XM.2.2°), wota éiotov Biov piuhwara, ovK 
éxw Aéyew what kinds (of numbers) are imitations of what sort of life, I can- 
not say (PRp.400?), ris, médev eis avdpay; who, from whence of men art thou? 
(a 170). 

For interrogative pronouns with the article, see 676. 


1014, When the respondent repeats the question before answering it, he 
uses the indefinite relatives: &AAQ Tis yap el; Boris; moATTHs xpnordés A. but 
who are you, pray? B. who am L? an honest burgher (ArAch.594). 


SENTENCE-QUESTIONS. 


1015, Direct sentence-questions are usually introduced by 
one of the following particles : 
dpa, 7, expecting neither yes nor no, 
ov, ap ov, ovKodv, expecting the answer yes, 
py, apa wy, pov, expecting the answer no: 
Gp ciut udytis; an Ia prophet ? (SAnt.1212), 4 otro: moAguol cior; are these 
enemics ? (XC.1.4!9), a 
ovx elcopis; do you not sec? (SHI.997), ap obx BPpis Tdde; rs not this inso- 
lence ? (SOc.883), ovxovy cor Sore? ; do you not then think ? (KC.2.4"). 
eh tt cor Sox@ tapBety; seem TI to thee afraid? implying ‘surely not’ 
(APr.959), dpa wh diaBdrAAcoOu Sdéters; you will not think yourself slandered, 


will you? (XM.2.6%4), wav th ce ddinet; surely he has not wronged you, has he? 
(PProt.3104). . | 


a oe 


1017] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 317 


a. Sometimes there is no interrogative word at all, the question being 
indicated by the tone of voice: “EAAnves ivtes BapBdpois SovActcouey; shall 
we, who are Hellenes, serve barbarians ? (EF r.717). 


b. An interrogative expression which distinctly expects the answer 
yes, iS Go te H (for GAXo Te €otw 7) 18 anything else true than = is it 
not certainly true that ?—also, with 7 omitted, a\Ao ri: in the same 
sense : 


&dAOo Te i) Guodroyodmer ; do we not acknowledge ? (PGo.470"), GAAO Tt pidetras 
ind Tay Oeay; ts it not beloved by the gods ? (PKuthyphr.10%). 


1016. Indirect sentence-questions are introduced by 4d 
whether; less often by dpa: 


npatnoey ci Hdn amoxerpysevor elev he asked whether they had already made 
answer (XA.2.115), Swuer ap oStwot ylyverar Gmrayra let us see whether every: 
thing is so produced (PPhaed.70°), 


a. In Homer 7 (Hé) is sometimes used: SxeTo wevaduevos meTa TOY KAEOS, 
mov &r eins he went to ask for news of thee, if thow wert yet alive (v 415). 


b. This use of ez is closely connected with its use in conditions: thus 
examples like efwé mot ef eredv ye plany és marpid ixavw tell me whether Iam 
really come to mine own land (vy 328) can be understood as tel me, if, ete. 
(‘if I am come, tell me so’). 


c. édy never really introduces an indirect question. Cases like onébas 
éay kal god ~Evydoxn consider if you too agree (PPhaed.64°) are best referred te 
907. Hm. uses ef xe after ‘see’ and ‘know’ (cf. b above), but not after ‘ask.’ 


1017, Alternative sentence-questions, if direct, are intro- 
duced by wérepov (wétepa)... 7 (uérum...an) whether... or. 
Indirect alternative questions are introduced by the same 


particles, or by ef... 7 or cire... etre: 

méTepoy eds &pxew % &AAov Kabiorns; do you let him go on governing, or 
appoint another ? (XC.3.1"). 

Sinpora morepoyv Bovdrorro ever 2 amtevas she asked whether he wanted to stay 
or go away {XC.1.3'), éBovAcvero ef méumorey Tivas 4 waytes tovey he consulted 
whether they should send some, or all should go (XA.1.10°), ot1w tore etre dyaGor 
etre Kaol nBhoavTes yevnoovTa you do not yet know whether they will turn out 
good or bad when they grow up (Lys.20**). 


a. méTepoy is often omitted: eyphyopas }) Kabevders ; are you awake or asleep ? 
(PProt.310).. So even in indirect questions: Odyss.6 110. Properly rérepoy 
is a neuter pronoun; see 278: thus mérepoy Sé5parcey 7) od ; (D.23"°) originally 
meant ‘ which of the two (is true), has he done it, or not (done it)?’ 


b. Hm. does not use mérepcy. For direct disjunctive questions he has 
i (jie)... % (He); for indirect, 4 (HE)... H (He): HF pd te Tuev evi dpecty, je 
rad odki; do we know aught in heart, or do we not? (8 632}, wetvat’ émd xpdvov, 
dpa Sawer 7) éredy KddAxas wayTeverat He Kal odni wait for a lime, that we may 
know if Calchas truly prophesies or not (B 299). 

For the use of the modes in indirect questions, see 932-5. For the sub- 


ject of the indirect question drawn into the principal sentence (prolcpsis), 
see 878. 


318 NEGATIVE SENTENCES. [1018 


NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 


1018. There are two negative particles, od} and py. Od 
expresses negation absolutely ; pw expresses it as willed or 
thought of. ‘The same difference appears in their compounds, 
AS OUTE, pATE; ovdeis, uNdeis; Ovdapas, wydayos; and many others. 


1019. The Subjunctive and Imperative, in all their uses, 
take py: 

Thus in independent clauses (874, 866): uh Oavud (ere be not surprised 
(XA.1.33), wh exdaré we do not give me up (XA.6.6!8), uh areaH tov Adyov 
katadimwmey let us not leave the discussion unfinished (PGo.505*), Adyete, cial 
} ph; say, shall I go in or not ? (PSym.213?). 

In dependent clauses: thus final clauses, mapaxadets tatpovs, Orws ph 
amobdvn you call in physicians, that he may not die (XM.2.10*); conditions, 
ovk éxi(nTovvTal, cay mh mpoppnOn mapetva they are not required, unless orders 
have been issued for their presence (XC.1.2*); conditional relative clauses, 
Oray ph Tovs adiKovvTas AdBYTE, TOs evTvyXavoyTas KoAd ere when you do not 
catch the offenders, you punish the first comers (I.18*°), 


a. But the subjunctive in its epic use for the future indicative (868) has ov. 


1020, Independent clauses with the Indicative and Opta- 
tive have py in expressions of wishing (870, 871); but other- 
wise, ov: : 

fuaptev, as pnmot dere (sc. duapretv) he missed, as I would he had never 
done (XC.4.6*), wh Conv pet’ dpovatas let me not live in grossness (EHf.676). 

ovx oda I know not (ArNub.761), ode dy a&mrodolny tovs téxous I should not — 
pay the interest (ArNub.755). 

For the force of ov and uh in questions, see 1015. 


1021. Dependent clauses with the Indicative and Optative 
have py when they express a purpose or a condition; but 
otherwise, oi: 


Thus wf in final clauses: AaBdv pe Fyev, va wh PbéyyorTo pndeis he seized 
me and dragged me away, that no one might raise his voice (XA.6.6"), pudakréov 
Srrws undty cuuBhoeral cor ToodTov you must take care that nothing of this sort 
befalls you (1.5°°). 

uh in conditions: ef wh Te KwAver, COéAw abTots SiarexOjva if nothing 
hinders, I wish to confer with them (XA.4.8*), ef mi ratdTn Sdvawro, GAAR 
éreipavro if they did not succeed in this way, they tried in another (XA.4.2*). 

uh in conditional relative clauses: & ph ofa odd ofouc eidévar what I do 
not know (= ef te wh o1da) I do not even suppose that I know (PAp.21*), émrere 
uh te Setcetay, ov tvvnoay when they had no fear of anything, they did not come 
together (T.2.15). 

ob in others: mpoonuatvouow & Te xp) woeiv Kal & ov xph they signify before. 
hand what one must do, and what not do (XC.1.6*°). 


a. So, too, relative clauses expressing purpose take uj: see 911. 








; 
, 
, 


1024] NEGATIVE SENTENCES. | 319 


b. Relative clauses expressing cause and result (910), though properly 
taking oJ, sometimes have wf, when the cause or result is to be characterized 


r 


as thought of rather than real: tadalmwpos ov ye avOpwros el, & mnte Ocol 
matpgol cic phte iepd a wretched being art thou, who hast neither ancestral 
gods nor shrines (PHuthyd.302>), eva yap év modAdots trws etipors by OoTis Earl 
a xelpwy matpds for one perchance mongst many thow mayst find, who ts not 


meaner than his sire (EHeracl.327): here doris means ‘such as to be.’ 
? 


c. ei ov may be used for ef uy when the clause has a causal force (926): 
ph Oavudons ei ToAAG THY cipnucvwy od mpémes cor be not surprised that much of 
what has been said is not suited to you (I.1"*). 


1022, Sentences in indirect discourse take the same nega- 
tives that they would have in direct discourse : 


eimev OTL Ovdev AYT@ MéAOL TOD UuETepov DopBov (direct ovdéy mor péAer) he 
said that he cared nothing for your disturbance (Lys.12"). 


a. But after ef in indirect questions, either od or wh can be used: epwréas 
et o8 KaAh mot Soxe? ceiver you ask whether I do not think it (rhetoric) a fine thing 
(PG0.462°), BovrAduevos epéoba ci uabdy tis Tr xt oidev wishing to ask whether 
aman, who has learned a thing, does not know it (PTheaet.1634), cxom@uer ei 
mpémet 3) od let us consider whether it is proper or not (PRp.4514), tod7 ard, ei 
xalpers 7) wh xalpers, avdyxn ve dyvoetv this very thing, whether you are pleased 
or not pleased, you must needs be ignorant of (PPhil.21°). 


1023. The Infinitive, when not in indirect discourse, has py : 


Thy Képripay éBovaovro wh mpoécOu they wished not to abandon Corcyra 
(7.1.44), Erxeyov abrots ui) adicety they told them not to commit injustice (T.2.5), 
eixds cody avdpa ur Anpety wt is fit that a wise man should not talk idly 
(PTheaet.152°), 7d ut darodiidvar xdpiras &Sixoy expivev the not returning of 
favors he accounted dishonest (XAges.4*), ai Seupijves naretyov, cre wh dmvévat 


an abtav the Sirens detained them, so that they could not ge away from them 
(XM.2.611), 


a. In some apparent exceptions, od belongs with the principal verb: vuas 
aéiovvres ov Evupaxely GAA Evvadixety demanding not that you should be allies 
with them, but partners in wrong-doing (T.1.39), where ov belongs properly to 
atvouvTes. 


b. But dore ov, instead of écre wh, is sometimes found with the infinitive: 
KaTelpyaota. wupt, dor ov® tyvos ye Tetxéwy civar capés ’tis destroyed by flame, 
that not a trace of ramparts can be seen (EHel.108). 


1024, The Infinitive in indirect discourse takes regularly ot, 
yet sometimes py: 


nut od« cid€van (direct odk of5a) I declare that I do not know (PAp.87), 
evoucev ovk dy Sivacba péevety Tos moALtopKodvTas (direct ovK dy ddvawTo) he 
thought the besiegers would not be able to remain (XH.'7.4°°). 

amexpivaro wndevds HTTwv eivas he answered that he was no man’s inferior 
(XH.3.8!!), moredo ph petoew pe Tas éamtdas I trust that my hopes will not 
er peint me (X0.1.5'%), After ‘hope,’ ‘promise,’ etc. (948 a), this uy is the 
male. 


320 | NEGATIVE SENTENCES. [1025 


1025. The Participle has yy when it expresses a condition 
(969 d, 971 b); otherwise, od: 

ovk ay Sdvato pip Kapwy evdatuovety thou canst not, ij thou hast not toiled, be 
happy (EFr.464), ds 7d 7d Civ wn Pbovotans Tijs TUXNS how sweet is life, if 
fortune be not envious (MMon.568). 

Kipos avéBn él Ta bpn, ovdevds KwAvovTos Cyrus went up on the mountains, 
(no one opposing) without opposition (XA.1.2?*), ebopuBetre ws ov morhoovTes 
TauTa you made a clamor, as not intending to do this (Lys.12"°), 

a. The participle with 6 py has the force of a conditional relative 
clause: 6 py elds whoever does not know (but 6 ovk eidas the particular 
person who does not know); 6 py Sapeis av8pwros ov mawWevera the man 
unwhipped receives of training nought (MMon.422). 


1026, My is also used with adjectives, adverbs, and even with sub- 
stantives with the sense of a conditional relative: 76 pi ayabdy ‘the 
not-good ’ = whatever is not good, 6 pn tarpds ‘the non-physician,’ 
whoever is not a physician (PGo.459°), 


1027, My FOR ov.—M7 is often used instead of od with participles 
or other words, through an influence of the verbs on which they 
depend, when these verbs either have py, or would have it, if nega- 
tive: 

By xuip’, Arpeldn, repdeow Tois wh Kadots rejoice not, son of Aircus, in dis- 
honest gains (SAj.1849), ds undey idd7 109 w av dxoropets (uh because to 
would take nq) know that J know nought of what thou askest (SPhil.2538), rerever 
uctvat em Tov ToTapod uy SiaBdvTas (un because petvar would take un, 1023) he 
bids them remain at the river without crossing (XA.4.8"°), éav ti aloOn ceavToy 
By ei3d7a (uh because édv atcbn would take uh, 1019) 2/ you perceive yourself 
to be ignorant of anything (XM.3.57°). 


1028, 0d FoR py.—With some particular words, od has a special 
connection, the two expressing a simple idea, as in ot dye deny, ovK 
e® forbid, ov toddoi few, ovy Faaov more and the like; in such expres- 
sions, ov is often retained, when the rules require pr: thus édv ov pyre if 
you deny it (PAp.25”), whereas eay py pyre would be unless you affirm wt. 


1029, Repunpant NecativeE.—In connection with verbs of nega- 
tive meaning, such as hindering, forbidding, denying, refusing, and the 
like, the infinitive usually takes pn, to express the negative result 
aimed at in the action of the verb: 


KneridpnecOa ph padety we are hindered from learning, i. e., so as not to learn 
(Elon 891), awetroy rots SovAos wh psetéxew they forbade the slaves from shar- 
ing, i. e., requiring them not to share (Ae.11), jpyodvTo why wemranéva they 
denied that they had fallen, asserting that they had not fallen (ArEq.572), 
arérxovTo uh em) Thy ExaTepwy yiv oTpatetoa they refrained from making war 
upon the land of either, i. e., so as not to make war (T.5.25). 

Often 76 is prefixed (cf. 961): odtol eiow Aut euroddv 7) wh H5y elva EvOa 
éorevdouev they are a hindrance to our being already where we were hastening 
(XA.4.8!4). b 

a. After ‘deny’ and like verbs, we may even have as ov or Ott ov: apynbije 
vos &s ovr arédwxa to deny that I have paid (Lys.4'). 


1034] NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 321 


DovsLE NEGATIVES. 
1030. When a negative is followed by a compound nega- 


tive of the same kind, the negation 1s simply strengthened : 


ovK cot ovdeis there ts not any one. 


In English, only one negative can be used: ov« éorw ovdéy Kpeiocor 7) plros 
capns there’s nothing better than a faithful friend (EOr.1155), opixpa tors 
ovdey péya ovdcrote ovdéva ove ididtHy ovTE WéAW Spa a Little nature does 
nothing great at any time to any one, either citizen or state (PRp.495"), pndey 


Tereltw unre euol unre wAAw pndévr let him pay nothing either to me or to any 
one else (XA.7.1°). 


1081, When a negative if followed by a simple negative of the same kind, 
each has its separate force: ovK a@yvoig tots exydvos ov Karédeikey avtd "twas 
not through ignorance that he did not make it known to his descendants (PRp. 
406°); and the two often balance each other, so as to make an affirmative: 
ovdels ovx emacxe Te (no one was not affected) every man was affected (XSym.1°). 


1032, Ov p7n.—Ovd followed by py is used with the subjunctive 
(seldom the future indicative) in emphatic negation, referring to the 
future: od pi yévntar % will not happen (D.4"*). 

od my Selons Tov moAguoy you will certainly not fear the foe (XA.7.3%), ovdev 
uy Sewvdy raOnre you will mect with no harm (D.6**), ob cou pr peCeboual wore 
never will I follow thee (SEI.1053). 

a. Od ph is also used with the future indicative to express a strong pro- 
hibition: 03 uy AaAjoers don’t chatter (ArNub.505), ob wh mpocotoes yeipa lay 
not thy hand uyon me (EBacch.343). These are often printed as questions; 
ef. 844 a.—The origin of both these phrases with od uh is obscure. 


1033, M) o?.—M/» followed by od is used in two different ways. 
First, after expressions of fearing, where py means lest, that, pr od 
means lest not, that not (Lat. ne non). For examples, see 887. 


So too without the verb of fearing, in the construction described in 867. 


1034, Secondly, the infinitive takes ji od instead of px) when the 
word on which it depends has a negative: 


ovdels oids T° eoTly GAAWS A€ywv py Ov KaTayéAaCTOS civar NO One speaking in 
any other way (is able not to be) can avoid being ridiculous (PGo.509%), 


a. Hence verbs of hindering, forbidding, denying, etc. (1029), when 
they have a negative, are followed by pi ov with the infinitive. Thus: 

dpvovpa py mounoa L deny that I did it, but 

ovK apvovpat py ov wounoa I dowt deny that I did tt. 

ovK avarideuar wi ov Kadw@s AéyeoGa I don’t gainsay that it was rightly 
argued (PMen.89*), od« amerxduny Td wh ovK emt Todo eAGeiy I did not refrain 
from procecding to that (PRp.854°), wh mapis Tb wh ov dpdou forbear not to 
make it known (SOt.2&3). 

b. My ov is used in the same way, when the principal verb stands in a 
question which implies a negative: tiva ofe: admapynoecOa ph ovx) éxlatacba 


Ta Steaua; who, think you, will deny (=no one will deny) that he understands 
what is just ? (PGo.461°). 





322 INTENSIVE PARTICLES. [1085 


SomE NEGATIVE EXPRESSIONS. 


1035, a. od Sri, pa Ste not only (probably ‘I do not (say) that,’ ‘do not 
(say) that’ = it is not enough to say that): ui Ori Oeds GAAG Kal avOpwmor not 
a god only but also men (XC.7.2"), 

ovX Srws, wu) Omws, are used in the same way: pi dmws (Sc. ok eddvacbe) 
épxeicOa ev pv0us, GAA’ oVT OpOotcba ESvvacbe not only were ye not able to 
dunce in measure, but ye were not able even to stand erect (XC.1.3"). 


b. pdvoy od, povov odxf only not, hence all but, almost (tantum non); and, 
in reference to time, dcov od almost: udvoy ob Thy ’ATTiKhy vuay mepinpnvTaAr 
they have all but stripped you of Attica (D.19”°), dcov obk dn évdusCov avrovs 
mapetvar they thought they were already all but arrived (T.8.96). 


c. od py GAG, od pévror GANG nevertheless, notwithstanding. They are to 
be explained by supplying before aAAa some idea drawn from the preceding 
context: 6 tmmos wixpod éxetvoy ekerpaxhdAicev: ov wyv (sc. ekeTpaxhaAier) 
GAAG éemeuewev 6 Kipos the horse almost threw him over its head ; (yet it did 
not throw him, but) nevertheless Cyrus kept his seat (XC.1.48). 


PARTICLES. 


Notr.—The term particles includes the conjunctions (1038), besides a 
number of adverbs, which, though not having of themselves a very definite 
meaning, yet serve to show the relations of other words. 


1036, Prepostrive AnD PosrpostrrvE.—A particle is said to be 
prepositive, when it is always put first in its own sentence; postposi- 
tive, when it is always put after one or more words of the sentence. 


I. Interrogative Particles.—See 1010-1017. 
II. Negative Particles.—See 1018-1035. 


1037. Ill. Jntensive Particles—These add emphasis to 
particular words, or give additional force to the whole sen- 
tence. 


1. yé (postpositive and enclitic) even, at least, Lat. quidem, 


adds emphasis to the preceding word: wAnOe ye odx smepBadroluce® dy Tods 
modeulous in numbers at least we should not surpass the enemy (XC.2.18), od yap 
vov ye juav ~ouas Baoreds ely for now at least thow seemest lo be our king 
(XC.1.4°), Hm. aaad ot, ef Sivacat ye, mepicxeo maudds but do thou, if only thow 
art able, protect thy son (A 398).—It is added with especial frequency to pro- 
nouns: éywye I for my part, dye in Hm. even he, ds ye Lat. gui quidem. 


a. When yé belongs to a word which has the article, it is usually attached 
to the article: 4 ye pidccodia philosophy at least (PSym.182°). So too after a 
preposition, if the word depends on one: #xovgev ovdets Ev ye TH havep| NO 
ene heard, in public at least (XA.1.3??). 


nig 
f 


i 


1037 | INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 323 


2. yotv (postpositive) at any rate, Lat. certe, 


contracted from ye ovv. It is used especially to mark the transition from a 
less positive statement to one which is certainly true: od mAacTiy Thy diAlay 
mapelxovTo* €Vedovoin your av’Tg cvveBonOncay they offered no pretended friend- 
ship ; at any rate, they willingly joined him in giving aid (XAges.1*). 


3. mép (postpositive and enclitic) very, just, even. 
In Attic, it is used to strengthen relatives: domep just who, the one who, damep 
even as; also in cimep (€dvmep, jvmep) if really, natmep though. In Hm.,, it is 
used with a variety of words: mpardv wep for the very first time (Z 295), ta Te 
oruyéovet Oeol mep which even gods detest (¥ 65); and especially with participles, 
in the sense of kalmep (979). 


4. 84 (postpositive) now, indeed, in particular, 
marks something as being immediately present to the mind. It is commonly 
put after the emphatic word, and admits a great variety of rendering: moAAol 
df (obviously many) a great many, wdvos 5n all alone, dijrAa 5H it is quite plain. 
It adds urgency to imperative expressions: é€vvoetre 84 consider, I pray you, 
tye 54 come now. It strengthens the superlative: péyioros 57 the very great- 
est ; and gives definiteness to demonstratives and relatives: 6s 67 the (very) 
one who, o’tws 84 just so. So with other pronouns and particles: ti 67; 
what now? mov 5n; where pray? et 5H if indeed, if really. For ral 5) kal, 
see 1042 c. 

a. It often means accordingly, referring to something preceding: ZAeyor 
OTe KaTlOoey orparevua: eddKer 5) odK aopadres civar StacKyvody they said that 
they had seen an army ; tt seemed accordingly unsafe to encamp apart (XA.4.4!°), 
oltw dn thus then (as previously described): and hence often in the apodosis 
(879), as dre... TOTE SN When... then, I say. 


b. It sometimes approaches the meaning of #5n, Lat. gam: viv 8h (nune 
jam) now already, mada 5H (jam duduim) long since. So in xa 64, often used 
in answer to a command: émerye viv: Kal 5) BéBnna A. hasten now. B. see, 
LI am already gone (SEI.1436). 


ce. The epic 8% yep, and poetic 5) rére, may stand at the beginning of a 
sentence. © 

5. 8Hrov (or 67 mov) I suppose, probably, methinks, 
often used, with slight irony, in cases which admit no doubt: rpépera 5¢é 
Woxh tim; mabhuact Shmov with what is the spirit nourished? with learning, 
doubtless (PProt.313°).—A stronger form is Shove. 

6. dSira (a stronger 67) surely, in truth, 
nearly confined to the Attic: od d7jTa surely not, mas Sjta; how in iruih? 


7. Sev truly, forsooth, 
mosily in reference to a seeming or pretended truth. 


8. Sat (an Attic equivalent of 57), 
used only in questions, and chiefly in ri Sai; mas Sal; what now? how now? 
with surprise or passion. 

9. 4 (prepositive) really, truly, 
(not to be confounded with # interrog., 1015, and # ov, than, 1045, 1) adds 


324. CONJUNCTIONS. [1088 


force to an assertion.—j phy (Hm. 7 mév) is used especially in declarations 
under oath: dudcayres dpxovs 4} why wh pynoiaxyjoey having sworn oaths that 
on very truth they would not bear resentment (XH.2.44*), 


10. rot (postpositive and enclitic) surely, doubtless, 
may often be rendered you know, you must know, be assured, and the like. It 
is frequent in statements of general truths: rdév to rupavvoy evoeBetv oF padtiov 
Sor princes *tis no easy task to be devout (SAj.1350).—Compounds of tof are 
fito verily (only epic), oro: surely not.—For mévro, see 1047, 4: for rolvuy, 
Tol'yap, Tovyapovv, Torydpta, see 1048, 4 and 5. For the disjunctive #ro... 
H either... or, see 1045, 1 a. 


11. pay (postpositive) in truth, Lat. vero, 
Jon. wév, Dor. wav. Hm. has pév, wav, and phy: @de yap ekepéw, kal phy Tere- 
Aecuevoy gota for thus 1’ll speak, and verily twill be fulfilled (¥ 410). The 
word has also an adversative use, yel, however. In Attic tt why; (‘what in- 
deed ?’) means of course. 


12. pév (postpositive) indeed, Lat. quidem ; 
originally the same as why: oftenest used in connection with 8¢ (1046, 1 2), 


but found also alone (so in questions), and with other particles, as pey oby, 
uev On. 


13. val yes, surely,—vq and pa surely, 
used in oaths and followed by the accusative (728). 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


1038. The conjunctions are particles used to connect sentences or 
words with each other. They are divided into classes, according to 
their meaning. Some conjunctions belong to more than one class. 


a. The first four classes of conjunctions (copulative, disjunctive, 
adversative, and inferential) connect co-ordinate sentences (876 a): so 
too the causal yap. The other classes connect subordinate sentences 
with the principal sentences on which they depend. 


1039, AsynpETON.—In continued discourse, every Greek sentence 
has, in general, a conjunction to connect it with what goes before. 
The absence of such connective is called asyndeton (aavvderov not 
bound together): it is most common in explanatory sentences. Some- 
times it is preferred as a livelier and more striking mode of expression. 


1040, IV. Copulative Conjunctions. 


The principal copulatives are «al, ré, and. Té is postpositive and 
enclitic: it corresponds in general to Lat. que, as cai to Lat. e. The 
poets have also 48é, t8€, and ; idé is epic only. 


a. The copulative is often used with both members (correlation): 
so very frequently ré... kai, ré...7é; often where in English simple 


“tpt 


4 
1043] COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 325 


and would be used. Kai... xai emphasizes the two members separ- 
ately, both... and: 


Sidoxov GAAhAwy Bacirevs Te Kal of “EAAnves ws TpiaKovTa otadia the king 
and the Greeks were about thirty stades apart from each other (XA.1.10*), Hm. 
aie) ydp Tor epis Te PlAn wéArcuol Te paxa Te for always strife is dear to thee and 
wars and battles (A 177), AceAvc Oat pot Saxe? Kad 7) exelvwy UBpis Kal 7] tpmeTEpa 
brolia I think there is an end, both of their insolence and of our suspicion 
(XA.3.1?!).—In like manner, the epic has juev.. . n5é as well... as also. 


b. Occasionally we find ré... 5¢, the two members being at first thought 
of as simply connected, but afterwards as standing in a certain contrast. 


1041, In the epic language, ré is used very extensively to mark the con- 
nection of sentences and parts of sentences, being often attached to other 
particles, as ral, wév, 5é, yap, aAAd, and to relatives (8s Te, cids Te). In such 
cases, it cannot be translated into English. The common words éore and 
oids Te, used by all writers, are remnants of this early usage. 


1042. To cai belong further the meanings also and. even. 


Hm. wap’ @uovye rad GAA of KE pe Tiuhoover with me are others also who will 
honor me (A 174), Tod adeApod kal reOynxdros Hdn aaroTeuay Thy Kepadrhy 
having cut off his brother's head, even after he was already dead (XA.3.1""). 
In the meaning also, it is often repeated with both members of a compound 
sentence: kal juty TavTad Sone? Gmrep kal Bacire? to us also the same things seem 
good, which seem good also to the king (XA.2.1”). In ka) 5é, the proper con- 
nective is dé, while xaf means also, even: kad dpxikds & édréyero civa: and he 
was also said to be fit to rule (XA.2.6%). 

a. After words of likeness, cai may be rendered as: duolws nat Lat. 
aeque ac. 

b. *AAAws Te kal means especially (literally ‘both in other ways and particu- 
larly in this’): xademdy olwai diaBalvew, AAAws Te Kal ToAcULwY TOAAGY Eurpoc- 
Oev dvtwy I consider it hard to cross, especially when the enemy in force is 
opposing (XA.5.6°). 

ce. Kal 5) kat and in particular also, gives special prominence to that which 
follows it: dmucvéovra és Sdpdis AAO. Te wayTes ex THs ‘EAAADOs codioral, 
kal 02) Kal drwy there come to Sardis both all the other wise men from Greece, 
and particularly Solon (Hd.1.29). 


1043, NEGATIVE SENTENCES are connected by ovSé, pndé, or ode, 
pyre. Of these, od5é, pySé are the negatives of cai (standing singly), 
and have two uses: 


1. As connective, and not, nor, continuing a preceding negative: 

dyopay ovdels mapeter nuty, oS érdbev emicitioducba nobody will provide us 
a market, nor any means of obtaining supplies (XA.2.4°). Very seldom after 
an affirmative; ond not, but not: mpds cov ydp, ov éuov, ppdow in thy behalf 
I'll speak, and not mine own (SOt.1434): the Attic prose in such cases always 
employs kal ov or GAA’ ov. 


2. With emphasizing sense, not even (Lat. ne... quidem): 


GAN ovde To’Twy oTephaovta but not even of these shall they be deprived 
(XA.1.48), 


£ 


_, 


326 DISJUNCTIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. [1044 


a. Ovdé. .. ovdé are never correlated (neither... nor); when they occur, 
they mean not even... nor yet. 


1044, otre . . . obre, pire... pire, neither... nor, are used in 
correlation; they are the negatives of ré. . . ré: 

otTe Gmodedpaxaow ore aromepevyaow they have neither stolen away nor 
escaped openly (XA.1.4°). 

a. Sometimes obre (unre)... 7é occur (as in Lat. neque... qué): Spocay 
unre mpoddoew adAAhAous ciumaxol te ExeoOu they swore that they would not 
betray cach other, and would be allies (XA.2.2°). | 

b. Ovre (unre)... ovdé (unde) is a slightly irregular form, corresponding 
to Té... 5€ (see 1040 b). But otre... ovre may be continued by ovd¢ with- 
out any irregularity. 


1045, V. Disjunctive Conjunctions. 
1. #4 or, than (not to be confounded with 7: 1015; 1037, 9): 


a. Meaning or ; and repeated, 47... % etther...or; also #Ta... %, with 
special emphasis on the first member: 7) katayeA@ow 7) xadematvovow they 
either laugh at him, or are angry (PProt.3238?), | 

b. Meaning than, after the comparative degree and adjectives like aAAos, 
ETepos, Sidopos, evaytios, which have a comparative meaning. See 643. 


2. elre. . . elre whether... or, Lat. sive... sive, 
presenting a choice of two suppositions: 6 péy ody Oeds, etre ovx éBovdAeTo, elre 
Tis avayKn émiiv, émolnoe play udvov now the god, be it that he chose not to, or 
that he was under some necessity, made one (bed) only (PRp.597°). Sometimes 
the first eZre is omitted, or # is used for the second. With the subjunctive, 
édyte (jHvre, avre) is used instead of e?re. For etre... etre in indirect ques- 
tions, see 1017. 


1046. VI. Adversative Conjunctions. 


1. 8€ (postpositive) but, and, 
marks a slight contrast, being much weaker than d\da. Hence, 
though generally meaning dwt, it is often better rendered by and. 


a. Mév... 0€ indeed... but, on the one hand... on the other are 
very common; though, in many cases, pév can hardly be rendered in 
English. 

Thus 6 wey Bios Bpaxts, 7 Se réxvn pwaxpa life indeed is short, but art ts long 
(Luc.Herm.63), Hm. of wept wey Bovady Aavawy wep) © Zore udxeoba ye who 
én counsel (on the one hand), and (on the other) in fighting, do excel the Danat 
(A 258), wdratov pev, &xovoov 8¢ strike, but listen (Plut.Them.11). 

b. For 6 pév...% 5é, see 654. Mév may be followed by dada, arap, etc., 
instead of 5¢; and sometimes the thought to be contrasted with it, is ex- 
pressed in other ways or omitted altogether. 

c. After a conditional or relative sentence, the apodosis (principal sentence) 
is sometimes introduced by 5¢: Hm. efos 3 rav@ Spuouve xara ppéva kad Kare 
Goudy, AVE F °AOHhvn while he revolved these things in mind and soul, then came 


ae 
: 


1048] INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 327 


Athena (A 193). Here S€ is used as if the former sentence were co-ordinate 
with, not subordinate to, the latter. This construction, which is rare in 
Attic, occurs frequently in Homer. 


2. adda but, yet (from aos other), 
marks a stronger contrast than 6¢: Hm. @&@ AAO: pev mdvtes erevbhunoay 
"Axatol, GAN ove ’Atpeldn ’Ayaucuvove Hvdave Odug, GAA Kans aplee then all 
the other Greeks did shout assent, yet Agamennon, Atreus’ son, tt did not please 
an soul, but harshly he dismissed him (A 22). 

a. After a conditional clause expressed or implied, &AaAd is often to be 
rendered at least: eé c@ua SovAov, add’ 6 vows éAcVOepos though body captive be, 
the soul at least ts free (SFr.855), & Qeot marp@oi, cvyyevec0E y GAA viv gods 
of my fathers, help me now at least (SEI.41.1). 

b. *AAA@ is used in abrupt transitions. At the beginning of a speech it 
may often be translated by well: aA Spere ev Kipos (jv well, I wish that 
Cyrus were alive (XA.2.14). 

c. After negative expressions, aA’ # (less often &AAd alone) is used in the 
sense of other than, except: dpytpiov pey odk exw, GAN 7) pixpdy te I have no 
money, except some little (XA.7.7°°), For ob phy &dAd, see 1035 c. 


1047. Other conjunctions which express a contrast, or a transition 
to something different, are 


1. av (postpositive, properly again, hence) on the other hand, on the 
contrary. So epic avre. 


2. ardp (prepositive, Hm. also atrdp) but, however. 

phy (postpositive) yet, however: see 1037, 11. 

péevror (postpositive: from péy and roi) yet, however. 
karo. (from cai and roi: not in Hm.) and yet, though. 


. Spas nevertheless, notwithstanding. For its use with participles, 
see 979 b. 


OR oo 


1048. VII. Inferential Conjunctions. 


1. épa (Hm. dpa, dp, and enclitic pa, all postpositive) then, accord- 
ingly, so: 

ovk Spa ert paxetra then he will not fight at all (XA.1.7'8). It is especially 
frequent in Homer, where it sometimes can hardly be translated: 4 tro: 6 ¥ 
&s eimav Kat’ ap’ ECero now when he thus had spoken, he sat down (A 68). Ei 
apa means supposing that really, et wh apa unless indeed. This word must not 
be confounded with the interrogative apa: see 1015. 


2. ovv (postpositive, Hd. and Dor. dv) therefore, then, consequently, 
stronger than dpa: 


TovTots jo0n Kipos: BovAera: obv kad ot Totrwy yerourban Cyrus liked these ; 
he therefore wishes you to taste them too (XA.1.9%). When preceded by an- 
other particle (as &AAd), ody often means for that matter, at any rate, certainly 
(so & ody at any rate). With relatives, it has the force of Lat. -cumgue: 


dorigody whosoever (285). 
: 


< 


i 


328 DECLARATIVE AND CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. [1049 


a. From ov and ody, arise both ovxoty therefore (and in questions 
not therefore? nonne igitur ?) and ovxovy therefore not, non igitur. 

(a) The first is properly interrogative, ‘not therefore?’: ovxotvy tovTe 
djAov; isn’t then this clear? (XM.3.6*).—(B8) But since questions with ov ex- 
pect an affirmative answer, ovKovy came to be used without interrogation, as 
an affirmative, ‘therefore’: odxoty, Stay 57) wy a0éve, memdvoouat well then, 
wheneer my strength shall fail I will give over (SAnt.91).—(y) To express the 
sense ‘therefore not’ without interrogation, ovxovy is used (with accent on 
the negative): ovkovy amorciWouat yé cov, ei ToUTO A€yets I will not depart from 
you, then, if you say this (XC.4.17*). Some editors employ ovxovy also in the 
first case (a). 


3. viv or viv (Hm. vuy and wv) postpositive and enclitic, 
a weakened form of viv, like English now used for then, therefore. According 
to many critics, the word should be written vty (not enclitic) in all prose- 
authors except Hd.; and in poetry too, unless the verse requires a short 
syllable. 

4, solvuv (postpositive) therefore, then, 
from tof (1037, 10) and ywy: never found in Homer. 


5. tovyapotv, tovyaprot so then, therefore, ‘ 
prepositive, like poet. rofyap, of which they are strengthened forms, 


6. dere so that, and so: see 927. 


1049, VIII. Declarative Conjunctions. 


1. ér that (Hm. also 6 and 6 re), 


originally the same as 6 7, neuter of the pronoun doris. Like Lat. 
quod it has both a declarative sense, that ; and a causal sense, because. 


a. Meaning that; see indirect discourse, 980. Hence the phrases d7Aov 
drt (also written SyAovdrr) it is clear that, evidently, and of8 Sti or ed o18 Ort 
I know that, certainly: wayrwy oi8 ott pnodvtwy y ay though all, I am sure, 
would say (D.9'). 7 

b. Meaning because ; see 925. 

REMARK.—drt ph is used after a negative sentence, in the sense of except: 
ov womoTe ek THs WoAcws e&HAOES, OTL wy Gmak eis “IoOudy you never went out 
of the city, except once to the Isthmus (PCr.52) lit. ‘what you did not go out 
that one time’. For 67: with superlatives, see 651. 


2. Another declarative in general use is #s that, see 1054, 1 d. 
Little used are Sidr and ovvexa that, cf. 1050, 3. 


1050. IX. Causal Conjunctions. 


1. 8rv because, see 1049, 1. 
2. Sre and émel since, see 1055, 1 and 5. 
3. Sidr, and poet. ovvena, dbotvexa because, 


: | 
' 


4 


3 


1053] CONDITIONAL AND CONCESSIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 329 


didtt is for SC 8 Tt = Sid TodTO Bre on account of this that. And so obvexa, 
60ovvexa are for ov (dTov) evexa, = evexa TovTov S71. They are used also as 
declaratives, that, see 1049, 2. 


4, yap (postpositive) for, 
introduces a reason or explanation, mostly for a preceding thought, but some- 
times for a following one: viv 5¢, cpddpa yap Wevdduevos Soxets adndH A€yerv, 
61 TadTa ce Weyw but now since, in speaking what is utterly false, you think that 
you are speaking the truth, for this cause I blame you (PProt.347*). 


a. Other uses of ydp grow out of an older meaning indeed or indeed then 
(yé and &pa). Thus especially in answers to questions: aywvicréoy mev apa 
Hiv mpds Tous &ySpas; avayKn yep, pn must we, then, contend with the men ? 
we must indeed, said he (XC.2.1*). 


b. In questions, yap expresses surprise, and may often be rendered by what 
or why: bAwde yap; what, is he dead? (SOc.1583), mas yap Kkdrowda; why, how 
do I know thee ? (SPhil.250).—But 4 ydp; ob ydp; asking for assent to a state- 
ment just made, imply no surprise: giAocopytéov Gmoroyhoauey: 7H yap; we 
agreed that one should pursue philosophy, did we not ? (PEuthyd.288*). 

c. So ydp is used in wishes: kaxas yap é&éAo1o (would indeed that you 
might perish wretchedly) a curse upon you (ECycl.261). For ef yap (utinam) 
in wishes, see 870 a. 

d. Kal yap (etenim) is translated simply for; a@AA& yap (at enim) but, and 
GAN ov ydp but not: TodTo emotes éx TOU xadembs civat’ Kal yap dpay oTVyvds iv 
he accomplished this by harshness; for he was ugly wm appearance (XA.2.6°), 
éyw euavTod Séouae Oécuvae ToUTaLs akoAovOety: GAA’ ov yap Svvaya: I demand it 
of myself to keep up with these in running ; but I am not able (PProt.336*).— 
These are sometimes explained by ellipsis: and (this is certain) for, but (this 
is not so) for. 


e. But kat yap sometimes means for even, for also; nat emphasizing the 
following word: kal yap 7dicnméevor otynoduecOa for even though I’m wronged, 
Pll hold my peace (EMed.314). 


f. In 0d yap aAAd there is an ellipsis after yap: wh cxGmré w wdeAp’- ov 
yap GAN exw Kkax@s do not mock me, brother ; for I (am not to be mocked, but) 
am in wretched plight (ArRan.58). 


1051, X. Final Conjunctions.—-See 881-888. 


1052, XI. Conditional Conjunctions. 

fet if ; 

2. édv (for ei dy) or by contraction jv, dy, if. 

For their use in conditional sentences, see 889 ff: for ef in indirect ques- 
tions, 1016: in expressions of wishing, 870 a. For ei uf except, see 905 a. So 
ei uy «i except if, Lat. nist si. For etrep = Lat. siquidem, if indeed, see 10387, 8. 

For ay, epic xé, xév, Dor. xa (postpos. and enclitic), see 857-864. 


1053, XII. Concessive Conjunctions.—These are really con- 
ditional conjunctions (1052), but indicate that the condition 


; 


> es 
i. 
wi 


330 COMPARATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. — [1054 


which they introduce may be granted without destroying the 
conclusion. ‘They are: 

1. e& wal (éiv nat) although: 

modu pev, ei Kal ph Bréwecs, ppoveis F Suws ot4 vdow tbveor as for the town, 


though thow art blind, thow yet dost know with what a plague it is afflicted 
(SOt.302). 

2. wal eb (kal édy, kav) even if, Lat. etiamsi: 

Hyotpeves avdpos civat Gryabov wperciv Tovs pidous, Kal ei undels meAAOL Etoe- 
c0a thinking it was the part of a good man to assist his friends, even if no 
one were wbout to know of it (Lys.19°*). 

a. The difference between ei kai and xa) ei is often slight, but xa) ei lays 


more stress on the condition as an extreme or perhaps improbable supposi- 
tion. 


O- Kolarep (Hm. kai... wep) with the participle, see 979. 


1054, XIII. Comparative Conjunctions.—These are prop- 
erly relative adverbs of manner. 


1. os as, that, Lat. wt, 
a proclitic (111 e, yet see 112 b). It has a great variety of uses, viz.: 


a. COMPARATIVE use: @s BotarAe: as thou wilt, as moAeulois avtois ypwprat 
they treat them as enemies (XC.3.1°*), So im expressions like ovk &ddbvaros, os 
Aaxedaimovos, etrety not unskilled in speaking, for a Lacedaemonian, i. e., eonsid- 
ering that he was a L, (T.4.84).—It corresponds to Lat. guam in exclamations 
(see 1001 a).—For os with superlatives: @s taxioTa Lat. guam celerrime, see 
651.—With words of nwmber and measure, it has the meaning about, not far 
from: as déxa about ten, ds éxi 1d woAd (pretty much over the greater part) 
for the most part.—in expressions of action, it often denotes that which is 
apparent, supposed, or professed: éeméxaumrey as eis xiKdwow he wheeled as if 
to surround them (XA.1.8”). Henee its use as an adjunct of the participle, 
see 978. For its use with the infiniteve, see 956, 

b. TEMPORAL use, as, as soon as, when? Hm. ds cif, ds piv pardov €d0 xdAas 
when he espied them, then the more did anger come upon him (T 16). So os 
Taxiora (Lat. ut primum) as soon as; 1008 a. 

c. CAUSAL use, as, inasmuch as, secing that: Se? Kal xpioOas a’rois, as ovdev 
bmeros Tis KTHoTEws ylyvera one must make use of them, since no advantage 
comes from the acquiring (PEuthyd.280*). 

d. DECLARATIVE use, thats hey ayyéAAwy Tis Os “"EAdrera KaretAnmra there 
came one with the tidings that Hlatea ts taken (D.18'°), cf. 930. , 


e. Frnau use, that, in order that: @s ph advres dAwyra that all mau not 
perish (® 87), cf. 881. 

- f. Consecutive use, like éare so that, to express result; mostly with the 
infinitive (953): ixavd wpoctryor as demvijca thy orpariay they brought enough, 
so that the army could dine (XC.5.2°); see also the example in 935 a, 

g. For és in expressions of wishing (Lat. utinam), see 870 hb. 


2. aowep (ws and wép) even as, just as, 
a. strengthened ws, but found only in the comparative use. 


J 


a 


1055] TEMPORAL CONJUNCTIONS. 331 


3. 8rws as, that, in order that, 


is the indefinite relative corresponding to és. For its use as a final conjunc- 
tion, see 881, 885. Like other indefinite relatives, it is used in dependent 
questions (1011) how, in what manner. 


4, dove (1041) is used in two ways: 

a. COMPARATIVE use, as (= és, &omep): this is Ionic and poetic, and is 
especially frequent in Homer: dove Ats like a lion (A 239). 

b. ConsECUTIVE use, so that: see 927. 


5. &re as, used with participles, see 977. 
6. 7, Sry as, see 1056, 4. 
‘. 


Hm. fire, evre as, like as. 


1055. XIV. Zemporal Conjunctions—These are mostly 
relative adverbs of time. 


1. Sre, dadre, when; and (with dy) drav, owdrav. “Ore is rarely used 
in a causal sense: whereas, since. 


2. edre (poetic and Ionic) = dre, both temporal and causal. 
3. tvika, daqvixa, af which time, when, more precise than ore. 
4, Hm. qos when (= jvixa): only with the indicative. 


5. éwel when, since; and (with dy) érqv or éwav (Hm. émei xe, Hd. 
emedv). ‘Emei is very often used as a causal conjunction, since, seeing 
that. 


6. émady since now, when now (émei and 6). With dy, it forms 
émeSdav, which is much more used than éemny, ésay. 


7. tore (not in Hm.), ws, and poet. dpa (Hm. els 6 ke, eis Ore ke) 


until, as long as: see 920-9238. For dpa as a final conjunction, see 
881. 


8. péxpt, dxpr until. These stand for péype of, dxpe of (cf. 758) 
up to the point at which ; which also occur. 


9. «wptv before (that), ere. 


In this use, it stands for mply 4 (sooner than, Lat. prius quam): it may be 
connected either with the infinitive (955) or with a finite verb (924). In its 
proper use (= prius, sooner, earlier), it has no relative force and is not a 
conjunction; this use is found in Attic Greek only after the article: €y rots 
apy Adyots in the foregoing statements (T.2.62); but is very frequent in Hm.: 
Thy © eye ov Avcw: mply wu Kad yipas ereow but I will not release her ; age 
shall come upon her first (A 29). Hm, often uses this adverbial mpiv in corre- 
spondence with a conjunction mpiv: ov5é tis €rAn mply mew mpiy Aetpar nor 
any man durst sooner drink ere he had made libation (H 480). 


332 FIGURES OF SYNTAX. [1056 


1056. XV. Local Conjunctions.—These are relative adverbs 
of place. They are also occasionally used to denote position 
in t2me,; and very often to denote conditions or circumstances, 

1. ov, mov where (epic and lyric 661, 6766). 

2. 88ev, ordbev whence. . 

3. ot, Sarou whither. 

4, 9, 8ry (Hm. also 7xe), which way, in which part, where: also, in 
comparative sense, as. 

5. 8a where, Wev whence. Also, as demonstratives, there, thence. 

6. tva where; oftener as final conjunction (cf. 881), in order that. 


FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 


1057. Exurpsis (defect) is the omission of words which are requisite 
to a full logical expression of the thought. 


For examples of elliptical constructions already described, see 612, 648 c, 
863, 883, 9038-905, 996, 1015 b; but many of those constructions fall under 
the special head of brachylogy. 


1058, BracuyLocy (brief expression) is a species of ellipsis, by 
which a word appears but once, when in the complete expression it 
would be repeated, and, usually, with some change of form or con- 
struction : 


empatauey juets (sc. mpds éxelvovs), kal xeivor mpds juas eiphyny we made 
peace with them, and they with us (D.8").—Very often the complete expression, 
instead of repeating the same word, would use another word of kindred mean- 
Ing: GueAhoads av of wodAol (sc. émpedodvra) neglecting things which the most 
care for (PAp.36). Thus exacros or tls must sometimes be supplied from a 
preceding ovdels: ovdels Exdy Sixaios, GAAG Weyer TO GdiKely aduvaTa@v avTd Spav 
no one is just by his own will, but each one blames injustice, because he is unable 
to practise it (PRp.366°). 


1059. Zeuema (junction) is a variety of brachylogy, by which two 
connected subjects or objects are made to depend on the same verb, 
when this is appropriate to but one of them: 


Hm. xe éxdor@ tro depoimodes kal rociaa tedxe Exerro where for each 
man (stood, €oracav) his stecds ficet-footed and his cunningly-wrought arms were 
lying (T 327), éoOjra popéover TH SxvOinq duolnv, yAoaoar Se idinv they wear a 
dress similar to the Scythian, but (have, €xover) a peculiar language (Hd.4.106). 


1060. Avostorrsis (becoming silent) occurs when from strong or sudden 
feeling a sentence is abruptly broken off and left incomplete: Hm. etmep yap 
Ke e6éAnow "OAdpmios aorepomntys e& ESéwy oTupeAtiot—for if in sooth Olym- 
pus’ thunderer shall will to hurl us from our thrones—implying ‘it will go 
hard with us’ (A 580). It is a figure of rhetoric rather than oi syntax. 


. 


> 


1063] FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 833 


1061. Pimonasm (ercess) is the admission of words which are not 
required for the complete logical expression of the thought: 

Telpagoua Te waemy, Kpatioctos dy inme’s, cumpaxety arte to my grandfather 
J will try, being an excellent horseman, to be an ally to him (X©,1.8"), For 
other instances, see 652 c, 697. 


1062. HyPERBATON (transposition) is an extraordinary departure 
from the usual and natural order of words in a sentence. Thus words 
closely connected in construction are separated by other words which 
do not usually and naturally come between them: 


& mpds ve yovdtwy (for mpds yovdtwy oe sc. ixeredw) by thy knees I entreat 
thee (KHipp.607), e& oiua: tis axpotarns éAevdepids dovAcla wAclaTy as a con- 
sequence, I suppose, of extreme freedcm, comes utter servitude (PRp.564*). It 
often gives emphases to some particular word or words: woAAa@v, & avdpes 
"AOnvaiot, Adywy yryvouevwr though many, O Athenians, are the speeches made 
(D.9') ;—especially by bringing similar or contrasted words into immediate 
juxtaposition: éyw kuvijv nAikidtas jndduevcs HOouéevois euol I associated with 
persons of my own age, taking pleasure in them, and they in me (XHier.6’), 
Hm. rap’ ovn €0€Awy ebcrovon unwilling with her willing (€ 155). 


1063. ANAcoLUTHON (inconsistency). —This occurs, when in the 
course of a sentence, whether simple or compound, the speaker, pur- 
posely or inadvertently, varies the scheme of its construction: 

kal Siareyduevos adT@, €Soté mor ovTOS 6 avnp civae copds and conversing with 
him, this man appeared to me to be wise (PAp.21°), for ‘I thought the man to 
be wise,’ évdus(ov roy &vdpa, etc.; mera TatTa H Edvodos jy, Apyetor wey opyi 
xwpouvtes after this the engagement commenced, the Argives advancing eagerly 
(T.5.70), ’Apyeto: instead of ’Apyelwy, as if the sentence began with fuv7jA@ov 
they engaged ; ros “EAAnvas Tovs év TH ’Acla oikotytas ovdéy mw capes A€yeTat 
et emovta but the Greeks that live in Asia, nothing certain is as yet reported, 
whether they are following (XC.2.1°), ef erovra instead of Emec@a, the expres- 
sion changing to an indirect question; Hm. pnrépa © eF of Ovuds epopuarau 
yaueeoOau, dW trw és péyapov marpés but thy mother, if her mind is bent on 
wedlock, then let her to her father’s house go back (a 275), &) trw instead of 
andmeuboy send back; domep of aOAntat, Otay Tay GyTaywrioTay yévwevTat 
HTTOUs, TOUT avTovs ava as the athletes, when they prove inferior to their 
antagonists, this troubles them (XHier.4°), as if of a@@Anrat belonged to the 
relative sentence, properly rovtm avia@vtra are troubled by this. 

Sometimes the anacoluthon is caused by an endeavor to keep up a simi- 
larity of form between two corresponding sentences: Totaita yap 6 epws 
emidelkvuTat: SuotuxovvTas mev & wh AvTHY Tots GAAS Wapexer aviapa mores 
voulCew* evtuvxovvtas 5 kal TA wh Hdovijs &kia wap exelvwy emalvov avaryka cet 
tuyxdavew for such effects does love exhibit: unfortunate persons he causes to 
regard as troublesome, things which give no pain to others ; but fortunate per- 
sons, he makes it necessary that even things unworthy of pleasure should obtain 
praise from them (PPhaedr.233°), evruxotvras map éxelywy instead of map’ 
evTUXOUYTWY. 


APP dh SD) bee 


VERSIFICATION. 


1064, Kinps or Porrry.—Greek poetry is of two kinds; that 
which was recited (émn spoken verses), and that which was sung 
(uéAn songs). ; 

a. It is not always possible for us to distinguish the two. In the earliest 
times all kinds of poetry were sung; and, respecting some parts of the Attic 
drama, we do not know how they were performed. 


R 
| 
7 





1065, In recited poetry, one kind of verse (dactylic hexameter, — 


iambic trimeter,,etc.) is repeated indefinitely; the verse is then said 
to be used by the line. 

In sung poetry (also called lyric poetry), verses are combined into 
groups or strophes. 'The same form of strophe is usually repeated 
one or more times to the same melody (though with different words), 
precisely like the stanzas of a modern ballad or church-hymn. A 
strophe commonly contains a variety of verses. 


a. The simplest strophe is the distich, or couplet of two verses, differing 


somewhat from each other. Any number of distichs may constitute the poem. 


b. Songs for the single voice (like those of Alcaeus and Sappho) consist 
of a short strophe, usually of four verses, repeated indefinitely. 

c. Choral poetry, as seen, for instance, in the lyric portions of tragedy and 
comedy, consists of longer and more complex strophes. These are usually 
arranged in pairs. Each pair consists of a strophe and antistrophe, the latter 
of which is like the former, containing the same kinds of verse arranged in 
the same order. Such a pair is sometimes followed by a single strophe— 
called an epode (after-song)—differing from them in rhythms, and serving as 
a conclusion to them. In the lyric odes of Pindar, this is the general law; 
most of them consist of ¢70s, in which a like pair, strophe and antistrophe, are 
followed by an unlike epode,; but the successive trios of the same ode are 
all alike, showing the same kinds of verse in the same order of arrangement. 

d. The anapaestic systems of the drama (see 1105) have no distinct division 
into strophes; and the same is true of many of the monodies (solos) which 
occur in some plays, composed in a great variety of irregular rhythms. 


1066, Ruytum anp Metre.—Greek verse, like English, has rhythm 
(pvdu0ds), or regular movement; and metre (yérpov), that is, definite 
measurement, by feet and lines of a given length. 


It is unlike English verse, in that a regular arrangement of long 


and short syllables is observed in its construction. 


a. English verse, on the other hand, is based on word-accent, the rule 
being that the accented syllable of every word must be so placed as to re- 


1068] VERSIFICA TION. 





ceive the rhythmic stress (éetus, 1071), But in Greek versification, the word- 
accent was entirely disregarded; that is, the poet was wholly indifferent 
whether the ictus fell on the same syllables as the word-accent, or on differ- 
ent syllables. ‘The reason of this lies in the nature of the Greek accent (95). 
In sung poetry, the word-accent disappeared altogether, as the pitch of each 
syllable was determined by the melody. In recited verse, it could still be 
observed along with the rhythmic stress, since it did not conflict with it. 
Thus the Greeks could pronounce ék-wép-oat Ilpi-c-wot-o md-Aw, giving the 
stress to the syllables printed in heavy type, while speaking the syllables 
marked with the acute in a higher key. 


1067. SyzruABLEs.—In verse, the ordinary long syllable (—) has 
double the value of the short syllable (~). Prolonged long syllables 
sometimes occur: the triseme (), equal to three short syllables; and 
the tetraseme (), equal to four. In musical notation these values 
may be thus expressed: 


o a a. oS 


fee oe be LJ 


1068, Frrr.—Verses are composed of metrical elements called feet. 
The most important are the following: 


Feet of three tumes (% tume). 


Trochee —~u Aeire es 
Iambus Ue Aumety o a 
Tribrach ON 2durov as a 
Feet of four times (2 time). . 
Dactyl —UL Aeitromev aaa 
Anapaest ek NITETO ode 
Spondee _—— elroy he 
Feet of five times (& tume). 
Cretic — UR heiT@éT@ B ige ae 
First Paeon —UULY AewropeOa ae oe 
Fourth Paeon WwrUvi— e€Acm opnv sa ies ay a 
Bacchius , unr AuTrovT@pv Ae ae 
Antibacchius ——VvT Aettrouc Oe oe Say 
Feet of six times (% time). 
Tonic amajore ——vVv Aectroipeba ee geese a 
Ionic a minore Wwo—— éduréa On plas OA re 
Molossus —-—— NeurdvT@v Sas pe 
Choriambus —UU Aectropévous a a a 


VERSIFICA TION. [1069 






r a. Less important are the procecleusmatic (16 uu W), the second paecon 
(+ —~v), and the third pacon(-~—W). Two short syllables (U ~) are 
called a pyrrhic. 

b. It will be seen from the above that the Greek music, like the modern, 
employed common time (%), and triple time (8, 2). The former was called 
yévos isov, because thesis and arsis (1071) were equal; the latter yévos durAd- 
otov, because the thesis was double the arsis. Besides these, the Greeks used 
% time (yévos jutddtov), which is unknown in modern music; in this the ratio 
of thesis to arsis is as 3 to 2. 


1069, A dactyl occurring in % time has the rhythm 
as ey (not o gets 


this is called a cyclic dactyl, and is marked —-v. There is also a 
long trochee, - ~: that is, 


d- o (not J J), 


used in common time. 


1070, IrrationaL SyLtLaBLe.—A long syllable sometimes stands 
in the place of a short one, in iambic and trochaic rhythms; thus 
instead of —~ a trochee, or ~— an iambus, we have apparently — — 
a spondee. Such a syllable is called irrational,* and is marked >; 
the seeming spondee is called an irrational trochee or iambus. 

a. It is likely that the irrational syllable had a value between that of an 
ordinary long syllable and a short one. The irrational trochee would then 


be JJ x, and its effect would be a slight retardation or dragging of the 
£# rhythm. 


1071. Tests anp Arsts.—In each foot, one part is distin- 
guished from the other by a stress of voice, called the ictus, or 
rhythmic accent. The ictus has nothing to do with the written 
word-accent, which was disregarded in versification (1066 a). 

That part of the foot which has the ictus is called the thesis (Ogots 
setting, down-beat); the other part is called the arsis (dpois raising, up- 
beat). 

a. The ictus is marked, in the rhythmical schemes, by a stroke (+); a 
weaker ictus (see 1082) by a dot (+). 

b. The ictus usually falls on a long syllable. But if this is resolved into 
two short syllables, the jist of them receives the ictus. For example, see 1080. 

c. The names ¢hesis and arsis came from the practice of marching, or of 
beating time with the foot. The Greeks used them as given above. In modern 
usage (which follows later Roman writers) they are commonly, but perversely, — 
interchanged; arsis being used for the ictus-part, and thesis for the other. 


1072. Grours or Frret.—A single foot, taken by itself, is called 


a monopody; two feet, taken together, a dipody, three feet, a tripody; 
four, five, six, etc., a tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, etc. 


* Because it destroys the proper ratio between thesis and arsis. 


1076 | VERSIFICA TION. Bot 


a. More than six feet cannot unite as a single group, and even a group of 
six is possible only in trochaic, iambic, and logaoedic verses. 


1073, Verses.—Verses are named trochaic, iambic, dactylic, etc., 
according to the principal (or fundamental) foot used in them. They 
are further distinguished as monometer, dimeter, trimeter, etc., accord- 
ing to the number of their feet, or of their bases. 


a. A basis (Bdois step, in dancing or marching) is sometimes one, sometimes 
two feet. In ¢trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, a basis consists of two 
feet: thus, an iambic trimeter consists of six feet; a trochaic tetrameter, of 
eight, etc. In other kinds of verse, each foot is reckoned as a basis: thus, 
a dactylic hexameter consists of six feet; an ionic tetrameter, of four. 


1074. Frvau Sy~uaBLe.—A verse must end with the end of a 
word; and its final syllable is unrestricted as to quantity (syllaba 
anceps). A long syllable may be used in that place instead of a short, 
and a short syllable instead of a long. 


Thus in the verse texvodyta kal texvovuevoy the last syllable is short, 
although the scheme of the verse (1. + + +wW~—) requires a long one. 
—In the rhythmical schemes throughout the following sections, the final 
syllable of each verse will be marked long or short, as the rhythm may 
require, without reference to its quantity in the annexed specimen. 


a. The reason of this freedom is the pause which occurs at the end of 
every verse; this obscures the difference between a long and a short syllable. 
For the same reason, /zatus (75) is not avoided at the end of a verse. 


b. Yet we sometimes find a system of dines, having the same or similar 
rhythm throughout, in which the liberties above described (syllaba anceps 
and hiatus) are allowed only in the closing line. A system of this kind is 
properly a single long verse, the lines which compose it being metrical sevzes 
(1075) rather than verses. Hence the lines of such a system are sometimes 
found ending in the middle of a word, which can never be true of a verse, 
strictly so called. 


1075, Dicotic Verses.—A long verse sometimes contains two (or 
even more) separate groups of feet. Thus the trochaic tetrameter 
(1083) consists, not of one group of eight feet, but of two groups of 
jour feet. The groups are called also metrical serzes or cola (k@dov 
member). 'The first group may end in the middle of a word. 


In the following schemes dicolic verses are marked by a dot under the 
first thesis of each group. 


1076. Syncore.—The arsis of a foot is sometimes omitted. When 
this occurs in the middle of a verse, it is called syncope. The time 
of the omitted arsis is made up by prolonging the preceding long 
thesis. 


Thus the verse aud) vaev KdpuyyBa (YC + U+VL) is a trochaic 
tetrapody with the second arsis omitted: the syllable va- is prolonged so ag 
to take the time of a whole trochee. 


338 VERSIFICATION. [1074 


1077. CaraLexis.—If the last foot of a verse is incomplete, this is 
called catalezis (karadnéis stopping short), and the verse is said to be 
catalectic. On the other hand, verses which close with a complete 
. foot are called acatalectic. 


Thus pndé tis KikaAnokérw (4 ++ -) is a catalectic trochaic tetra- 
pody; the time of the missing final arsis is made up by a pause. 


a. Generally it is the last part of the foot that is omitted; and in ana- 
paestic verses this is the thesis. But in catalectic iambic verses, the jirst 
syllable of the foot is wanting; see 1090. 


1078, a. A verse is doubly catalectie when the arses of the last two feet 
are omitted: thus rapdlas repackdmov mortar (+c+>Vtr+vc" =)isa 
doubly catalectic trochaic hexapody. ; 


b. The name hypercatalectic is sometimes applied to a verse which extends 
one syllable beyond a given measure. For an example, see 1096 f. 


1079, Anacrusis.—An initial arsis (long, short, or irrational sylla- 
ble) prefixed to rhythms beginning with an ictus, is called an ana- 
crusis (upward beat). Sometimes we find a double anacrusis, of two 
short syllables. 


Thus, the verses b, c, d, are like a, but have anacruses prefixed: 


a. Adpuiddwy yuvaKar. pe 
b. mpokndomeva. Bapetay. wesew~AVTe £ 
C. mh TapBarea Odvorus. SS oh eee 
d. dre kal Aids dorepwrds. 4 weutvrtAcTHt + 


RemarK.—The names tambie (1088 ff) and anapaestie (1103 ff), applied 
to large classes of rhythms, though convenient from their brevity, are not 
indispensable: the iambic rhythms might with propriety be designated as 
anacrustic-trochaic, the anapaestic as anacrustic-dactylic, since they are in fact 
simply trochaic and dactylic rhythms with preceding anacrusis. 


1080, ResoLuTION AND CoNTRACTION.—Many kinds of verse allow 
the use of two short syllables in place of a long one, which is then 
said to be resolved ; or, vice versa, the use of a long syllable in place 
of two short ones, which are then said to be contracted. 


Thus, in the trochaic tetrapody ’ApaBlas 7° aperov dvOos (WOU +VY 4+U+v), 
a tribrach stands by resolution in place of the first trochee. An example of 
contraction is the substitution of a spondee for the dactyl in the dactylic 
hexameter (1100). 


1081, CarsurA—Caesura (roun cutting or dividing) is a break in a 


verse, produced by the end of a word. 
According to one use of the term, there is a caesura whenever a word ends 


within a verse. But in the stricter sense, caesura is an important break in ~ 


a verse, usually marked by a pause in the sense, and occurring for the most 
part in certain fixed places. Sometimes this is called the principal caesura; 
and the others lesser caesuras. 


1085] ° TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 339 


Thus in the dactylic hexameter “AréAAwm tvaxti, Tov jiKouos TéeKe AnTé 
, , fs fe 


($—4ovty,vivvtv vy +~—) the principal caesura is after ¢ GVAKT 
though there are lesser caesuras after “AndéAAwn, Tv, HiKopos, and réke. 


TrocHaic RuytTuMs. 


1082. The fundamental foot is the trochee. In verses which have 
an even number of feet (4, 6, etc.), the feet are commonly grouped by 
twos (dipodic bases, see 1073 a), the first foot of each dipody having 
a stronger ictus than the second. The second foot of the dipody may 
then be irrational (1070); that is: 

+ o4+ > may stand in place of +U+v. 
Hence the rule is that the dimeter, trimeter, etc., may have the irra- 
tional trochee (apparent spondee) for the even feet (second, fourth, 
etc,), but never for the odd feet (first, third, etc.). The tripody, 
having an odd number of feet, never admits the irrational trochee, 

The thesis of a foot may be resolved (1050), giving ~vu vw (tribrach) 
in place of the pure trochee, and ~~ > in place of the irrational 
trochee. But the last thesis of a verse cannot be resolved. 


1088. Tue Trocuaic TETRAMETER Catalectic is often used by the 
line (1065) in comedy and tragedy. It consists of two dimeters, the 
second of which is catalectic.* There is usually a caesura between 
the two parts, after the fourth foot. 


° lA ° ° 
$4t+04o+70,4ut+ctu+ 


TOAAG pev yap ex Oadacons, ToAAG S ex YEépoov Kaxd 
/ “A [4 f. , N ~ 1 
yiryveTa Oynrots, 6 paicowy BloTos iy Tal mpdcw. 
Observe the resolution in Bioros (UY VU). A dactyl is very rarely used in 


place of a trochee, chiefly in proper names. Compare the use of the anapaest 
in spoken iambic verse, 1089 a, 1091, 3. 


1084, The tetrameter scazon (hobbling) or Hipponactean—a satiric verse 
—differs from the above in having the last foot complete, and the next to the 


last syncopated (1076). This unexpected close gives the verse an humorous 
effect : 


eita & early ex Oardoons Ovvvos od Kaxdy Bpama.” 
tot uvutut >FrtvTFe yy 
1085, Lyric Trocuaic Ruyrums.—The following are specimens: 
a, b. tripody (tthyphallic); b, catalectic. 
@xeT’ év Sduoior® (a). a 
KelgeTat TAAGS * (b). aa 





1 APers.707. 2? Ananius. 3 EA1Ic.905. 4 SEI.246. 


* Cf. ‘Tell me not in mournful numbers, life is but an empty dream.’ 


340 | IAMBIO RHYTHMS. tee *[1086 


c, d, e. tetrapody, or dimeter; d, catalectic; e, doubly catalectic. 


GAAG Kai viv éexmdpi¢e ! (c). 44+>4U+0 
és TO wh) TeAeadpoy * (d). 4ot+ctu+ z 
év Bpototoy eEkers ® (e). 4o2+ TK + 
f, g. hexapody, or trimeter; f, catalectic; g, doubly catalectic. 
aprayal 5& diadpomay duatuoves* (f). Aotusvevrtetu+t 
Aids trayndAigua oeuvoy"Hpa®(g). YoU tutuztvuKe =| 


h. tetrameter acatalectic (two complete dimeters, 1075). 
KADOL pev, yépovTos evebeipe XpvadmemA€ Kovpy.® 


RemMark.—The forms a and e have the same syllables, but very different 
rhythms. Which is the right measurement in a given case can be determined 
only by the surroundings, and is often doubtful. 


1086. The following are specimens of syncopated forms (1076): a is a 
syncopated tetrapody; b, a tetrapody catalectic; c, d, catalectic hexapodies ; 
e, f, g, catalectic tetrameters. Such forms as d appear to begin with a spon- 
dee, which, however, is really a syncopated dipody. 


a. au) vaey KdpuuBa." Soke 450-0 

b. was yap immnadras.® 4~uk +4 0+ 

C. wh TUXODTM Pew@y "OAvuTioy.® Soke 450+ C4 0+ 

d. etonudy Te bdopa vavBarass.!° Ye 4404+ 04 C+ 

e. Zebs tivak amocrepoin yduov Suvcavopa.!§ 4eCt+Ut+CE 4+out+VvTtu+ 
f. wraxa, uatrpSov &yvicpa Kupioy ddvov.® $F 4CHF 4+oU+ Ct C+ 
g. wnuovas éAvoaT ed xXeLpl mawvig.! $utvuFtveFk 4$uUF +4uU+ 


1087. In lyric strophes, the tragedy avoids the irrational syllable alto. 
gether; the comedy admits it——Systems (1074 b) are sometimes found, in 
which a succession of complete dimeters, with here and there a monometer, 
is closed by a dimeter catalectic. 


Tampic RuyTuns. 


1088, The fundamental foot is the iambus; and the ictus is on the 
second syllable, ~+. In verses which have an even number of feet 
(4, 6, etc.) the feet are commonly grouped by twos (dipodic bases, 
1072 a), the first thesis of such dipody having a stronger ictus than 
the second. The jirst foot of each dipody may then be irrational 
(1070): that is, > + ~+ may stand in place of -+ +. Hence the 
rule is that the dimeter, trimeter, etc., may have the irrational iambus 
(apparent spondee) for the odd feet (1st, 3d, 5th), but only pure iambi 
for the even feet (2d, 4th, 6th). In a tripody or pentapody, only the 
first foot can be irrational. 


1 ArVesp.365. 2 AAg.1000. 3 ArNub.460. 4 ASept.351. 5 EHel.242. ® Anacreon. 
7 Hla.258. §& APers.126. °® ASupp.161. 1° Hla.252. 41 ASupp.1064. 12 AEKum.326. 
13 A Supp.1066. 





1091] ITAMBIC TRIMETER. 341 


a. The principle cf the irrational arsis is the same in iambic and trochaic 
rhythms (1082); namely, that the arsis following the first thesis of each 
dipody must be rational (~), while other arses may be irrational. 


1089. The thesis of a foot may be resolved (1080), giving Uwu 
(tribrach) in place of the pure iambus, and > ~w (apparent dactyl) 
in place of the irrational iambus.—But the last foot of a verse (in 
catalectic verses the last complete foot) must always be a pure iambus. 


a. The anapaest (6 ~ +) in place of the iambus is found only in spoken 
verse; and except in comedy, is restricted to the first foot. It is probable 
that the two short syllables were rapidly pronounced, in the time of one. 


1090. In catalectic iambic verses, the arsis (not the thesis) of the 
last foot is omitted, and its time is filled by prolonging the preceding 
thesis: thus“ + (not +v). 


Tue JaAmBpic TRIMETER. 


1091. The iambic trimeter is, next to the dactylic hexameter, the 
most widely used of all rhythms. It prevails especially in tragedy and 
comedy, the dramatic dialogue being mainly carried on in this measure. 

The trimeter of tragedy consists primarily of six iambi, of which 
the first, third, and fifth may be irrational: 


ee ee o > 2 


Furthermore:—(1) By resolution of the thesis (1089), the tribrach 
may stand for any foot but the last; and (2) the apparent dactyl 
(> ~ L) for the first and third; but these liberties are not frequent: 
see examples b and c below. (8) The anapaest (1089 a) is in tragedy 
confined to the first foot (see example a, second line); only in proper 
names it is occasionally admitted in other places. 


(4) The chief caesura is most commonly in the middle of the third foot 
( penthemimeral caesura). The least approved caesura is that which divides 
the verse into equal haives. 

(5) When the fifth foot is divided by a caesura, the syllable before that 
eaesura (if it is not a monosyllabic word) is almost always short (‘ Porson’s 
rule’), 


Examples are: 


a. ® Stos aidhp kal Taxvmrepot Tvoat, SS ee Sy eS Se ee 
TOTaOV TE THA, WoyTiwy Te KUMATWY WO t4U+ >, 4 VU tU4USs 
avhpWmov yéAacua, maumntép Te yR *® GC 4E+ 4 4 UV, +>+4u+ 

b. caba@s ériorac’, Idvios kexAhoer a.” we Set UYU tuU4U 

c. gol mpOTov “lot, woAVdovoy mAdynv ppdow.® 4 ++ >,4GU +VL+ALC4 


2APr.88. 2 APr.840. % APr.788. 


* Cf. O light immortal, winds on wings of swiftness borne, 
O viver sources, and the countless flashing smile 
Of ocean's wavelets, universal mother earth, etc. 


342 IAMBIC RHYTHMS. [1092 


1092. The trimeter of comedy differs from the above in these re- 
spects: 

(1) The anapaest is freely used for every foot except the last. 

(2) The apparent dactyl may stand as the fifth foot (as well as the 
first and third). ae 

(3) The resolved feet (tribrach and dactyl) are far more frequent 
than in tragedy. 

(4) Porson’s rule of the fifth foot (1091, 5) is often neglected. 
® Zev Bacirev, TO xpjua Tov vuKTay booy > 4+, 4 4 C+ >4U+ 
amépaytov. ovdémo? jucpa. yevhoerat ; we Feu tw 4vet=vtu+ 


_ amddoto 877, & woAeue, TOAAGY obvera.’ CO4 UV +, > YOU+>4uU+ 


1098, Scheme of the iambic trimeter (forms in parentheses are con- 
fined to comedy). 


oo Bee ee as ee =f SZ eos a 28 a 
wv ww 

i A > + pe an = 

NT REL og see Ite NS Oia ey) ON rt RBs 

> vu > YL (> vv) 


1094, The rameter scazon (hobbling), called also choliambus, or Hippo- 
nactean—a satiric verse—omits the syllable before the last thesis, but adds 
another syllable at the end; this unexpected close produces a humorous 
effect. 

Ve trutE4uUtUF +uU 


Ov jucpar yuvaicds ciow HOvora.? 


1095, The cararrcTic IAMBIC TETRAMETER is often used by the line in 
comedy: it consists of two dimeters, the second of which is catalectic, 
There is generally a caesura between the two parts. The resolved thesis and 
the anapaest are freely admitted. 

ne Oe gue 2 see . [AA pier 


FO ea NI ES aE eed, ST ee on et 


@ wacw avOporas pavels weyioTrov w@péeAnua.® 


1096, Lyric Iamprc Ruyrums. The following are specimens: 
a. dipody or monometer : 


Tt 570 dpas.4 wtuot 

b, c. tripody; c, catalectic: 
“EAAGvides Képat” (b). >4utc+ 
Kpataoy eyxos ® (c). vtivt + 

d, e, f. tetrapody or dimeter; e, catalectic: f, hypercatalectic : 
(NAG oe THs evBovAlas™ (d). >4U0+>40+ 
eo! Bporots vewovory ® (e). vw tue uF& 
® BuKx, pdpuaroy & a&pioror ® (f). >4ut+ 4 4utKU 











1 ArNub.2. 2 Hipponax. 3 ArEq.836. 4 ArNub.1098. © EHel.193. ® Pind. Pyth.6,34 
7 ArAch.1008. ® ESupp.616. ® Alcaeus. 





1099} DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 343 


g. pentapody : 

BéBaxev dis ov weOvorepor.' VFtvt4cvtvetvse 
h. hexapody or trimeter catalectic: 

erwbéAnoa médrcos ekeAcoOau.” Stu tuyuvtTs + 
i. tetrameter acatalectic = dimeter repeated : 

Sétar me KwudCovTa, déEar, Aloooual oe, Aicooma.® 


1097. The following are specimens of syncopated forms: a—e are tetra- 
podies (the last two catalectic); f is a pentapody; g—k are hexapodies (the 
last two catalectic); 1 and m are tetrameters (tetrapodies repeated). The 
form m is occasionally used by the line. 


a. Bapetar kaTradraAayal.4 Vv~& +ot+C+ 
b. kaxov 6€ xaAKod TpdTov.° Vetch 4+ 
C, meAaumdaryhs meret.® CA & 4 U+ 
d. pddrots ® méots pot." wae ve + 
e. Sumadera Tima.® wick He = 
f. poBotua 8 eros 768 exBareiv.® ve 4504 0+4U4 
g, BeBaot yap Tolmep aypéra aorparov9 CtYE 4uU+ 04 U+ 
h. Bia xadivav & avatdw weve! Veeu& 4eEeF 40+ 
i. émavxhoas 5€ Tota cots Adyots.)” VEX & 450+ 040+ 
j. Sapynddpots BovO¥Tois. Tiwais.!® Vetere 4560404 4+ 
k. tw apxas & obtivos OoaCwy.'4 LE & 4u+ 04 + 
]. wévot Sduwv véor TaAaotot Cupmueyets Kakots.)> 
f - , Lez aes — aS SOs. 
Se Amand Sat or ee ee Ne 7 fh WY Ww 


a ~ / ) n LY) 
m. Bpoty ara, veoy Te kal mecuaTwy apedeis.!® 


lA , © 2? . Ye ° 


1098. In the iambic strophes of tragedy, the irrational syllable is in 
general avoided ; in those of comedy, it is freqfient. Cf. 1087. 

Systems (1074 b) are sometimes found, in which a succession of complete 
dimeters, with here and there a monometer, is closed by a dimeter catalectic. 


Dactyntic RuytTums. 


1099, The fundamental foot is the dactyl. But a spondee is very 
often used instead (1080): at the end of a verse, it is much more 
common than the dactyl. A proceleusmatic, used for the dactyl 
(1068 a), is rare, and only found in lyric poetry. The ictus is on the 
first syllable of each foot. 


1 AAg.425. 2 S$0c.541. % Alcaeus. * ASept.767. 5 AAg.390. § AAg.392. 7 ETro.587. 
8 HSupp.781. ® ACho.46. 1° APers.1002. 11 AAg.2388, 12 ArAv.629. 1% ASupp.706. 
14 ASupp.595. 35 ASept.740. 16 AAg.195. 


344 DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. {1100 


THe Dactryntic HEXAMETER. 


1100, This is the most common of all Greek verses, being the 
established measure for epic, didactic, and bucolic poetry. It con- 
sists of six feet, of which the last is always a spondee.* Each of the 
others may be at pleasure a dactyl or a spondee, but the dactyl pre- 
vails; especially in the fifth place, where hardly one line in twenty 
has the spondee (spondaie verse, see example c below). 

The third foot is almost always divided by a caesura, and this is 
usually the principal caesura of the verse (1081). It may be either 
masculine, i. e. after the long thesis of a dactyl or spondee ( penthe- 
mimeral caesura),—or feminine, 1. e., between the two shorts of a 
dactyl. Often also there is a caesura after the thesis of the fourth 
foot (hephthemimeral caesura), or at the end of the fourth foot (called 
bucolic caesura, from its frequent occurrence in bucolic poetry); and 
occasionally one of these is made the principal caesura. - 


The scheme therefore is: . 


Se eae is MN ee eee 
Examples : 
é / =A 
a. of & émavéotnoay, welOoyvTd Te Troimert AGOy.! 
VA rd , £ 
a NN a ere a ct Nee Ne rn Sa ON Pa 


b. GAA’ abros Te KaOnGO, Kad BAAous tSpve Adous.* 
arabe s Vee eae 
ee Le. Eee he Hy Na eye NS 

c. Tint abt’, aiyidxo1o0 Atds Tékos, eiAjAovOas ; ? 


, , s , , , 
a ge a NF PN a Rh Rig rt oer eee eee 


Remark.—The hexameter is properly a dicolic verse (1075), consisting of 
two tripodies, less often of a tetrapody and a dipody. 


1101. Tur Exxerac Disticu.—This was not confined to the elegy, 
but was the usual form for gnomic or reflective poetry. Its first line 
is the hexameter; its second is a verse containing two catalectic tri- 
podies, which are always separated by a caesura. Of this verse the 
first two feet may be dactyls or spondees at pleasure; the fourth and 
fifth feet are always dactyls. The third foot is filled out by the pro- 


, ————— ./ 
Sie RD ay ey re a eee 


UE IE: U 2 ‘> X > ; 
Tiuiev Te yap éott Kal ayAady avdp udxeo dau 
yiis wépt Kad matdwy Koupidins T add xov.* 


1102, Lyric Dactytic Ruytams.—The following are specimens: 
a, dimeter : 

potoa Si@Kes.” +ou+— 
1B 8. ?7B191. § A202. 4Callinus. 5 EHeracl.612. 


* Cf. ‘Under the open sky, in the odorous air of the orchard.’ But English 
dactylic and anapaestic verses are read in $ time, unlike the Greek. 





1105] ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS. 345 


b. trimeter catalectic ( penthemimeris) : 
mapbevor 6uBpopdpor.' 4ovtvuccH 
c, d. tetrameter; d, catalectic (hephthemimeris) : 


ovpaviots Te Oeois Swphwata” (Cc). Sov tovt—t4uu 
€rOer” erroduevar Svvapuv® (d). SouvtvvtzAvc+ 
e. pentameter : 
GAA maray 6 mpd9ouos ael mévoy Eber? 4+OL AVY AU 4UV += 


f. lyric hexameter (two trimeters): 
bépaiua & ovte puyetv Oduis, od copla Tis ar@oerat.? 
, , , , , <‘£ 
a ne eee ee eS ae Ne SP Ee rt he oe LF NS ad 
g. octameter (= two tetrameters): 
&® wémol, 7} peydAds ayalas Te ToALcTovduou BioTas emexipaaper.® 


2, -, , Vs td , , 2, 
re ee ee re) SNe a NSAP ON NF NaF NF NF FOTN NF NS BS 


ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS. 


1103. The fundamental foot is the anapaest, with the ictus on the 
last syllable, ~~ +. But a spondee (— +) or a dactyl (—~ LW) is very 
often used (1080) instead of the anapaest; much less often, a proce- 
leusmatic (- ~~ ~). In catalectic verses, the last foot lacks the ictus 
(1077 a). 


a, Anapaests are properly a marching rhythm. The feet are commonly 
grouped by twos (1072 a), the two feet of each dipody corresponding to a 
step with the right and left foot in succession. 


1104, In marching-songs and lyric strophes the foliowing kinds of 
verses occur : 


a, b. dipody or monometer; b, catalectic: 


Gmokets ue, amoActs” (a). VeutuUUH 
véxus 787 ® (b). Vvute 
c, d. tripody ( prosodiac); d, catalectic: 

Sarauiviaor otupédov ? (c). VeueutuvtuUVes 
vaot @ oi PoiBov }° (d). —+—+— 

e. tetrapody or dimeter catalectic ( paroemiac): 
kal wiv Td5€ KVpLov map." —4euvut+uev+t=— 
mdyTa yap dn TeTéEAcCoTAU.” —YoeH- tute 

f. tetrapody or dimeter (acatalectic) : 


MéAeos yevva y& Te maTpya.'? Vu tet YU K+ 


1105, Anapasstic Systems (1074 b) are much used in tragedy 
and comedy. They are composed of several complete dimeters (and 


1 ArNub.299. 2 ArNub.305. 3 ArRan.879. 4 EHeracl.617. 5 EHeracl.615. ® A Pers.852. 
planta - 8 HAlc.93. °° APers.964. 19 EIon 178. 2! EAIlc.105. 42 EAlc.i32 
APers.933. . 


346 LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. [1106 


sometimes a monometer), with a catalectic dimeter ( paroemiac) always 
added as a close. . 


They are subject to the following rules: (a) A succession of four short 
syllables is avoided: hence a proceleusmatic almost never occurs, or a dactyl 
followed by an anapaest.—-(b) The dimeter has a regular caesura, generally 
at the end of the second foot, but sometimes in the middle of the third.— 
(c} The paroemiac admits a dactyl only as the first foot, and almost always 
has an anapaest for the third. 

The following is a short anapaestic system: 


Téhde mev TMepsayv Tay oixoucvwy vu + — Ft — 4 GEt 

‘EAAGS és alay mista KaAEtT aL, —-YvY - fF H—- vO -— + 

kal Tay apve@y Kal ToAVXpUTwV —- 4 4uet+ —- YU -—- = 

Edpavey pvaAaxes KATO mpeo Belay eye 4+ Gut Uvit _- > 

ovs avTos avat Zepins BaciAeds — £4 wot | 4 oe 
~ Adpetoyevys —- 4 Gu 

efAeTo xapas epopevery.! — Yo — Ft VFA = 


1106. There are also freer (lyrical) systems, which are not subject to 
these restrictions. They sometimes consist, for lines together, of spondees 
only, or dactyls only; and sometimes they have two or more paroemiacs in 
succession. They are much less used than the stricter systems, and are 
mainly confined to the expression of complaint or mourning. 


1107, The aNAPAESTIC TETRAMETER is much used by the line (1065) in 
comedy. It consists of a dimeter and paroemiac. These two parts are 
almost always separated by a caesura; and each of them is subject, in gen- 
eral, to the rules given above (1105) for dimeters and paroemiacs in ana- 
paestic systems. 

ampdoaxeTe TY voy Tots GPavaTols Hiv, Tots aiev eovet, 
Tots aifeplois, Toto ayNpws, Tois aPOiTa wndouevorow.* 


_ Logaorpic Ruytums. 


1108. Logaoedic verses consist of mixed dactyls and trochees. The 
dactyls may stand before the trochees, or between them; but trochees 
never stand between the dactyls. Each trochee may be resolved into 
a tribrach ; but a dactyl is not contracted to a spondee. The dactyls 
are cyclic (1069), and the movement is in % time. 

a. Logaoedic verse differs from the compound dactylo-trochaic rhythms 
described in 1118, in having the dactyls and trochees united in the same 
group or metrical series. 


1109, A trochee standing as the first foot is treated with great 
freedom: besides being a tribrach (v ~ v), it may be irrational (+ >), 





1 APers.1. 3 ArAy.688. 





, 


1111] .LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 347 


or may be replaced by an iambus (¥ —) or an apparent anapaest 
(¥ ~ >), and, in Aeolic poetry, even by a pyrrhie. 

A logaoedic verse may have an anacrusis (short or irrational) pre- 
fixed to its first foot. Also a double anacrusis (two short syllables) 
may be used. 


1110, (a) If two trochees precede the first dactyl, the second may be 
irrational, or a tribrach, but admits no other substitution.—(b) An irrational 
trochee may be used as the second foot, even when the first foot is a dactyl. 
—(c) Further, in catalectic verses, an irrational trochee may stand before 
the final thesis.—Thus : 


a. wmrep axapriotwy media.) Yevut >tuHt 
b. xaAKoxpétwy tnmwy KtvtTos.” Fae A oye ae ae 
C. Tas HAEKTpodacis abyas.3 4>+44c0+>+ 


d. Trochaic rhythms used in near connection with logaoedic, may have 
anacruses, and the same freedom of substitution in the first foot. Thus: 


mpos vuas eAcvepws.4 v-4ut+cu+ 


L111, The following are specimens of logaocedic rhythms with one dactyl. 
The Pherecratean is called jist or sccond, according as the dactyl is its first 
or second foot: the Glyconic is called jirst, second, or third, by a similar dis- 
tinction. 


Dipody. 
a. Adonic (dactyl and trochee): 
ovdey er ike? toouhuy 
Tripodies. 
b, c. Pherecratean (first, second); d, e, catalectic: 
ds xapirwy pev ber ® (b), 4trv4etu 
Séteral 7 em picdG 7 (c). totcrvctAr 
Wevdeor workidrors ® (d). 44,40 4C4 
Kalmep axvimevos ® (e). SotryeHt 
f, g. Pherecratean with anacrusis (logaoedic paroemiac) : 
cya 5& udva, Kabevdw 1° (f). etre tuUstYU 
eWSotov Epuart vinay | (g). >4utUstLU 
h, i. Pherecratean catalectic with anacrusis (/ogaoedze prosodiac) : 
“Hpg tor’ *OAvumia ! (h). >t LAcH 
Kadictwy bdarwyv '8 (3). >4tveutu+ 
Tetrapodies. 


The forms b, ¢, f, g, are often to be read as doubly catalectic tetrapodies, 
instead of tripodies. Thus: 


Jj. Aduriddwy yuvatrdy 4 (= b). eC, yy ee 
k. xpiods aidduevov mip (= c), 4ou 4404 





1 EPhoen.210. 2 ArEg.552. 3 EHipp.741. # ArNub.518. 5 Sappho. & Eupolis ii.494. 
7 Crates i1.246. 8 Pind.Ol.1.46. 9% Pind.Isth.7.5. 1° Sappho. 1 Pind.Pyth.6.1%. 
22 ArAy.1731. 18 Pind.Ol.14.1. 14 Pind.Ol.4.32. 15 Pind.O1.1.2. 


348 LOGAOEDIC REYTHUHS. {1112 


1, m, n. Glyconic (first, second, third): 


kad kvavéuBoror Boat } (1). Srv tutct 
Epws mapbevios mé0w * (m). 4—-t4b4AU4 
6 wéyas UABos a 7 apera 3 (n). YoevtvArcH+ 
0, p. acatalectic tetrapodies; p, with anacrusis: 
Tay ev OcpuoTrvAais CavdvTwy * (0). 44> 4vt+vutu 
TAnpns mev épalye? a geAdvva® (p) > 4 C4U4+C+4+uU 
Pentapodies. 
q. Phalaecéan (hendecasyllable) : 
éy puptou KAadl Tb Elpos popjcw.® 41> 4 ve 4u4ut4u 
r. Sapphic (hendecasyllable) : 
moutrddpoy’ abdvar’ ’"Appodita.” tvt4utvctvety 
s. Alcaic (hendecasyllable), begins with anacrusis: 
ov Xph Kakotor Odudy éemitpémny.® >4veu4cvcHvr+vueHt 
1112, The following have more than one dactyl: 
a. olvoy éverkapévois wcbvaOnv.? tro trututye 
b. wéAee Té odioe KadaArdrra..}° vet UHV 
c. mapbéve Tay nedaday Ta Evepde vipa! +, 4 tr 4G HV tutu 
d. oivos & ide wai Aéyera nal adabean!® —§ UL 4, VU 4 VU HUT AUS 
€. pos avOcudevtos éemaiov épxouevoro.!® 
Softee fee we UO fe st 


The forms d and e belong to the so-called Aecolic daetyls. The form ec is 
called Praxilléan. 


1113, The following have a double anacrusis (logaoedic anapaestic) : 


a. ixerevoate 8, & kdpat.4 eu tee tus 

b. karéAauwWas, Gderkas euday7.! we tyvutvtus 

c. ‘EAévay éAvcaro Tpoids.'® vue tutvuwtrvue 
d. tivt Tv wapos, & waKapa O7Ba.!" ee tee tAvtvtY, 


Trochaic forms with double anacrusis are also regarded as logaoedic 
anapaestic: 


e, Xapitwy Exar Tévde KGpor.'8 vututetute 


1114, SyncopaTep Forms are very numerous. The following are speci- 


mens : 
a. vauTiAlas éoxdras.?9 45404% 404 
b. od WebSet rTéyiw Adyow.?° >t cH 44 
C. pws avinare paxay.”} vtrk 40+ 


1 Arkq.554. 2 Anacreon. % EHOr.807. ‘4 Simonides. 5 Sappho.  ® Scolion. 
7 Sappho. 8 Alcaens. ® Alcaeus. 1° Pind.Ol.10.18. 11 Praxilla. 412 Theoc.29.1. 
13 Alcaeus. 14 EJon 468. 15 EE1.586. 16 Pind.Isth.8.112. 17 Pind.Isth.7.1. 18 Pind.Ol.4.15. 
19 Pind.N.3.39. 2° Pind.Ol.4.28, 2! SAnt.781. 






1117] DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS. 349 


d. & marpls, & dduara pi.! SS eee Oe 

+ 
e. Saxpudeccdy 7° epirncer aixuav.” 4504 to4utctF L 
f. ef d¢ kupe? Tis TéAS oiwvorddwv.® 4,44 44504 tous 


1115, Some verses consist of more than one serics: thus 
a. Asclepiadéan (two Pherecrateans catalectic, second and first): 
HAGes éx mepatwy yas éAchaytivay.* Sete’ t504c4 
b. greater Asclepiadean (dipody catalectic between two Pherecrateans) : 
undev &AAO outTedons mpdTepov Sévdpiov aumérw.5 
c. Priapéan (= Glyconic and doubly catalectic tetrapody) : 
etpevis 8 6 Adxewos 2oTw ricg veorald.® 
d. Eupolidéan (= Glyconic and trochaic tetrapody catalectic :) 
@ Occhuevor kareps mpds vas érevdepws, 
ovTw vikhoau T eyw Kad vourColuny codds.” 
ee th SS 
The Eupolidean is sometimes used by the line: in both halves of the verse 
the first two feet allow the substitutions described in 1109 and 1110. 


1116, Pherecratean verses are sometimes combined in systems (1074 b), 
but much more frequent are Glyconic systems closing with a Pherecratean. 


a. In antistrophic composition, the first and second Pherecratean some- 
times correspond to each other in strophe and antistrophe, as equivalent 
forms. So too the second and third Glyconic. Other interchanges are very 
infrequent. 


Dactyzio-Erirritic RayrTrums. 


1117. Dactylo-epitritic (or Doric) strophes are composed of the 
following elements: 


1.4+UV~4WU~ + — dactylic tripody with spondee as the 3d foot. 
2.4 +UW~ + ‘the same, catalectic. 
eo i epitrite = long trochee (1069) and spondee. 
4,4 +4 the same, catalectic. 
These are variously combined; for the most part two or three unite 
to form averse. Forms 1 and 3 may have a short final syllable in 
cxesura, even in the middle of a verse. The final syllable of 2 and 4, 
in the middle of a verse, is prolonged to “. An anacrusis may be 


prefixed to any verse. Sometimes, especially at the end of the strophe, 
other dactylic or trochaic rhythms are employed. 





1 EMed.643. 2? Anacreon. % ASupp.57. ‘4 Alcaeus. 5 Alcaeus. ® ASupp.686. 
7 ArNub.518,519. 


16 


350 


The following verses are specimens: 
&yw ToTapay tepay xwpovot wayal, UL + 
kal Olea Kal wdvta madd otpépera.! 4 VT 


dy aidAG VdE évapiCoueva.? vHeu 

v = 

EpXeTar Tia yuvairelyy yéver.® Yost 
/ ~ es A A 

KEKAUTE, Taldes UTEepGuwy Te dwTaY Kal Geav.4 


2, , ? f Vc td 
Sou Ve UE EC eH SF VL ARK EV Yt 


CRETIC RHYTHMS. 


1118, Dacryno-Trocaaic Ruyrams.—In another class of lyric strophes, 
we find a mixture of dactylic and trochaic verses, in greater variety than 
those just described; these probably moved in 2 time, so that the dactyls 


were cyclic. 
Examples of such compound verses are: 


Sometimes dactylic and trochaic groups are united in one verse. 


a. dactylic tripody (with anacrusis, and syll. anceps), and trochaic tripody: 


tovToot 8 bmiabev itw pépwy Sippoy Avxovpyos.® 


id 2 if 2, 


2 2 
OS mye Se Ve SU eV SV Sea 


b. dactylic tetrapody and trochaic tetrapody doubly catalectic: 


Toios yap PirdTnTos Epws bwd Kapdiav édAvabets.® 
ae 2 


2 2 


2 , , 2 
+> SF NSF IN I No SF 


Cretic RHYTHMS. 


1119, Apparent cretics often occur, as the result of syncope (1076), 


in trochaic, iambic, and logaoedic rhythms. 
in 1086, 1097, 1114. 


Examples may be seen © 


Much rarer are the real cretic rhythms, in which the cretic (or, by — 
resolution, the first or fourth paeon) stands as the fundamental foot. — 
In these, the movement is in § time (see 1068 b). 


The ictus falls on the first long syllable of the cretic; -at the same time 
there is a certain stress, though weaker, on the second long. 


The following will serve as specimens : 
a, b, c. dimeter; c, with anacrusis: 
jooua y ndouar” (a). tu 


ne Pe > | 
pndé Aéye por ob Adyov ® (b). Sosy 4uve 
® Zev, tt wore xpnorducba® (c). —4ouv 4uve 
d. dimeter catalectic: 
KaT éAayoOnpe.!° Sou teu 
e. trimeter : 
@s éue AaBotaa Tov Syudtyv."! to wy 4y == 
f. tetrameter : 


GAN? adtet Toy avdp’, El de BN, one eye.” +o 4AU— 4 — SAU 


1 EMed.410. ?STr.94. §% HMed.418. 4 Pind.P.4.22. 


5 Cratinus. °® Archilochus, 


7 ArPax 1127. 8 ArAch.297. ® ArLys.476. 19 ArLys.789. 14 ArAch.675. 12 ArVesp.428 


1122] IONIC RHYTHMS. 351 





g. pentameter : 
i gov y axotowpey ; GmoAcl* KaTd ce XOoomEY Tots AlGors.? 


D , Z 
Soe fuer fe eV SE re 


CuoriAMBICc RuytTums. 


1120. Apparent choriambi are very frequent in logaoedic verse as the 
result of syncope (1076). These have the rhythmical value+,~%. For 
examples, see 1114. 

Verses with the real choriambus (+ W—) as the fundamental foot, 
would move in 3 time. But such, if they were ever used at all by the Greeks, 
were exceedingly rare. The following is perhaps an instance: 

Sewad pev ody, Sede tTapdooe gopds oiwvoléras.? 


2 , , , 
et NF ee ee 


Ionic Rayrums. 


1121. The fundamental foot is the ionic a minore (~~ + —), with 
the ictus on the first long syllable. 


a. ANACLASIS.—Two trochees (4+ ~ — ~) may be substituted for the 
two longs of one foot with the two shorts of the next(+—vvw). This 
change is very frequent: its effect is to produce a breaking up (ana- 
eldsis) of the ionic rhythm, which passes into the trochaic. 


1122. Specimens of ionic rhythms: 
a, b. dimeter; b, with anaclasis: 


Tlerat & aiodduntis ® (a). veutqeuvte 
moAtol pey ily 45 * (db). wu tueU t= 
c. dimeter catalectic: 
Sicerds kombds avnhp.° errr ere 
d, e. trimeter (acatalectic); e, with anaclasis: 
memépixev ev 6 mepoemroAis H5n ° (d). eutm—uv teu ste 


f / / A 
Avots €x mévwy yévolT’, ovdaua TaVSET(C). VCO 4U—V4A—VUU A= 


f. trimeter catalectic: 
Karapas Oidirdda BAabippoves.® we tm—uv seus 
g, h. tetrameter (acatalectic); h, with anaclasis: 
> XM mw fy = biel | - A a4 / 9 
€ue dciAay, ue Tacay KaxoTaTay Twedéexocay ° (z). 
, ? , Z 
Se ree a tent Nao Bede reed amen Nese Ree feme U ne ie age) me 
warTépwy Te Kat TexdyTwy yoos evdikos pareve * (h). 


2, 2, tA ? 
es Aiea Wesel eat Noo roar Laren sia» eh pO at Noe oe ee” ce ee 





1 ArAch.295. 2SO0t.484. 3 ASupp.1037. 4 Anacreon. 5Timocreon. ® APers.65, 
¥ Anacreon. ® ASept.726. ® Alcaeus. 1° ACho.330. 


ee a se 


- 
™ 


Boe DOCHMIAC RHYTHMS. [1123 


i, j. tetrameter catal. (Galliambic); j, with anaclasis: 
bayat@ AvomEeAc? Onpoly dpetoros Bopay ! (i). 
vats ovx Cdwxe pdoxXm AdAovy Amd: ordua? (j). 
1123, a. Sometimes the last long of the ionic is omitted by syncope 
(1076); the first long is then prolonged to supply its place: 


moAvyoupoy Odio pa.® in el eee 


b. Very seldom indeed, one of the long syllables is resolved into two 
shorts, or the two short syllables contracted into a long: 
— _xpucday wrépvya bépers.4 VutuvuvH 
Atovicov cavra Bacoapldes.® veut —-4— Vv 
ce. In the form with anaclasis, the first of the two trochees is sometimes 
irrational (+ >): 
mepwvatoyra: maraidy.® Vvut> Hv te 


1124. The SorapEaN verse of the Alexandrian period has the ionic a 
majore as its fundamental foot. It is a catalectic tetrameter. Each of the 
three complete ionics may be replaced by two trochees, either of which may 
be irrational. Resolutions and contractions are frequent; so that the verse 
has a great variety of forms. Two examples will suffice: 

THY xXpicoddpwy ovde yuvaK@v BabuKdATOY." 


2 ? Vd ta 
POET Beene etl eer ee Ree Ne arate eee oe | RC RC rape Seat 


/ / - / na 
evoeBns Ths éoriv, wevidy Sébwxev adTa.® 


, z la /, 
oe pha See ee Sah eee tN at Tee a ase eat Ske ea Tees gl 


DocuMmMIAc AND Baccuic RHYTHMS. 


1125, The dochmius is a dipody, consisting of a bacchius with a 
following iambus (-+—~-~+). The ictus is on the first long of the 
bacchius, and the long of the iambus. 

a. Dochmii have, therefore, a broken rhythm, in which 3% time (1068 b) 
alternates with $. They are used only in lyric passages which express great 
mental agitation. 


1126. Either of the two shorts may be replaced by an irrational 
syllable; and each of the three longs may be resolved into two shorts. 
These liberties give rise to a great variety of forms, most of which 
are given below. The forms a, c, d are the most frequent. 


a. icy mpdomodot.® wae = 
b. €v y@ Ta5e ped.!? >+-vH+ 
c. otparémedov Airéy.!! Uy ust 
d. dovrAocivas Biep.'? > venue st 


1ESupp.46. 2 Diog.La.viiiend. % APers.72. 4 EBacch.372. § Anacreon. * ASupp.i021. 
‘ Lycophronides. ® Sotades. *® SAnt.1821. 19 AKum.781. 41 ASept.79. 42 ASept.112. 


an : rae 


1127] DOCHMIAC AND BACCHIC RHYTHMS. 353 
e. uritov &r1 oe xpn.} ewe vwwrvrt 
f. pet odds Ode Acws.” > we ur st 
g. dvépeAoy émePares.® Neon eet Aeon d ey e 
h. ovmote katadvoipoy.4 > YE VUE Vv we 
i. darayer” éxtdémoy.® OOO, 
j. Toy Katapardratov.® > Ye KU YY 
k. ti odk aytalay.” wt-—>+t 
l, €xOets "Atpeldas.8 >+-—->+ 
m. pecoraBel kévTpw.® ws—->+ 
n. twAaéuevoy Acvocay.!9 >Ye-—->+ 
0. ov 7, & Atoyevés.'! we tuvrct 
p. 1 aidépos tvw.'? > tu TCs 
q. pavelog mpamid:.'% Vet Us 


Remarx.—Forms like 0, p, q, in which the second or third long is resolved 
when the first is not, are very uncommon. 


Dochmii are oftenest combined in groups of two (dimeters). Usually two 
or more groups unite to form a system (1074 b). 


1127, Ormer Baccuic RHYTHMS are little used in Greek poetry, and only 
~ in connection with dochmii. Thus we find a bacchic 


a. dimeter: 


xopevdevr’ avavaAas.'* vt ut 
b. trimeter catalectic (= bacchius and dochmius): 
iw ya Te kal maupans.!> Vvt—ev4t+—uU+ 
feero tepudvioy em) mdyoy.'® Vee m—uEvuvvvs 
e. tetrameter : 
tls ax, tis 65ua moooenTa w apeyyfs.§§ GCt—-vt—vt—v+— 


1 AAg.1428. 2 ASept.80. 3 SEI.1246. # SE1.1246. 5 SOt.1340. ® SOt.1344. 7 SAnt.1807. 
8 SPhil.510. ® AEKum.157. 1° SAj.886. 1! ASept.127. 42 SPhil.1092. 4% EBacch.999. 
i eo, 2" BMed 1251, 46 APr.117. . *7 APr.115. 


ee 





ABBREVIATIONS 


USED IN CITING THE EXAMPLES, 


A.= Aeschylus. 
Ag(amemnon), Cholephori), 
Eum(enides}, Pers(qe), 
Pr(ometheus), Sept(em), 
Supp(lices). 

Ae. = Aeschines. 

Andos. = Andocides. 

Ant. = Antiphon. 

Antiph. = Antiphanes. 

Ar. = Aristophanes. 
Ach(arnenses), Av(es), 
Eccl(estazusae), Eq(uztes), 
Lys(istreta), Nub(es), Plut(ws), 
Ran(@e), Thesm(ophoriazusae), 
Vesp(qae). 

Arist. = Aristotle. 

Pol(zéiea), Rhet{orica). 

Carc. = Carcinus. 

Chaer. = Chaeremo. 

D. = Demosthenes. 

K.= Huripides. 

Alc(estis), And(romache), 
Bacch(ae), Cycl(ops), El(cetra), 
Hec(uba), Hel(ena), Heracl(idue), 
Hf. = Hercules furens, 
Hipp(olytus), la. = Iphigenia 
Aulidensis, Med(ea)}, Or(esies), 
Phoen(éssce), Supp(iees), Tro(ades). 

Hd. = Herodotus. 

Hm. = Homer. 

I. = Isocrates. 

Isae. = Isaeus. 

Luc. = Lucian. 


Herm(otimus), Marin(orum dialogz), 


Lycurg. = Lycurgus. 


L 


M.= 


- 


Pic 


| r 
= 
3 
| 
| 


A 





Stob. = Stobaeus. 


AS 


ys. = Lysias. 

Menander. 

Mon(ostzchi). 

hilem. = Philemon. 

ind. = Pindar. 

Plato. 

Ale({zéiades), Apology), 

Charm(zdes), Cr(ito), Crat(ylus), 

Criti(as), Huthyd(emus), 

Euthyphr(o), Go(rgias), 

Hipp(tas) maj(or), Lach(es), 

Lg. = Leges, Lys(is), Men(o), 

Menex(enus), Par(menides), 

Phaed(o), Phaedr(us), Phil(ebus), 

Pol(iticus), Prot(agoras), 

Rp. = Republic, Sophf{istes), 

Sym(postum), Theaet(elus), 

Theag(es), Tim(aeus). 

lut. = Plutarch. 

Them(éstocles), Sol(on). 

Sophocles. 

Aj(az), Ant(igone), El(eetra), 
Oc. = Oedipus Coloneus, 

Ot. = Oedipus Tyrannus, 

Phil(océetes), Tr(achiniae). 


Flor(elegiun). 
= Thucydides. 

- Xenophon. 
A(nabasis), Ages(ilaus), 
C(yropaedia), Eq. = de re equestre, 
H(ellenica), Hier(o), Hipp(archieus), 
M(emorabilia), O(economicus), 
Ra, = Respubliek Athenicnsis, 
Rl. = Respublica Lacedaemonia, 
Sym(posiwm). 


The books of the Iliad are designated by Greek capitals (A, B, F, etc.) ; 


those of the Odyssey by Greek small letters (a, B, y, etc.). 


Tragic fragments 


(Fr. or Krag.) are cited by Nauck’s numbers, Comic fragments (except — 


Menander’s monostichi) by Meineke’s volumes and pages. 


dramatists are cited by Dindorf’s lines. 


of the speeches and sections. 


Otherwise, the © 
The Orators are cited by numbers — 


ae 
3 ae oe 





ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


Tus list contains all the verbs described in the classified verb-list (502 ff.), 
besides a few mentioned in other sections, on account of some peculiarity of 


inflection or tense-formation., 
index. 
The Attic ‘principal parts’ 


For other verbal forms, see the general Greek 


of the verbs contained in the body of the 


classified verb-list, are given here in full. 


*Ad-w harm (aaca, doa, adocOny) 504 D, 9. 
&ya-mar. admire (nyaoOnv, jyaocduny) 
535, 4. 
ayd-oua, ayatouat, 535 D, 4. 
&yelpw collect (Hyerpa) 518, 1; 
iryepeOovr at, arypduevos, D. 
ayivéw = ayw, 508 D, 6. 
&y-viue break (kw, eata, arya, éaynv) 
528, 1. 
as ty-w lead (akw, fyayov, xa, hymat, 
NXOnv) 5038, 6. 
adhacte, Sein, 863 D. 
Gelpw raise (Hepa, nepeovTat, &wpTo) 
518 D, 2 
dct-w = abtw, atdvw, 522 D, 3. 
tea slept ; see tavw, 506 D, 7. 
anu blow 538 D, 1. 
aidé-ouar am ashamed {aidécouct, #5e- 
oa, AdecOnv) 503, 7; aid- oe ib. 
Naivé-co praise (aivéow, fveca, veka, 
nunuat, yvéOnv) 504, 4. 
aiviCoua, atynu:, 504 D, 4. 
al-vupat, ar(o)aivupoe take, 526 D, 5. 
Naipé-w seize (alphow, etrov, Fpnka, -mat, 
npednv) 539, 1; dpaipnica Dy 
alpo ete aa Ip %y Apka, Apuat, Apenv) 
518, 2. 
SS aiz0-dvoua perceive (aicOjcoua, 7o00d- 
pny, Noonua) 522,13 atcd-oua, ib. 
at-w hear (atov, én-hica) 356 a. 


3 


dKaxl(a pain (Hraxov, axaxnoa) 528 D, 
1%. 


&cé-oucn heal (jrerdunv) 503, 8. 


“axod-w hear (axovoouat, jrovoa, duchicod, 
nrovaOnv) 507, 1. 


&Aadkov, adkadery, 510 D, 1. 


GAd-ouae wander Gaueazae) 368 D, 
389 D b, 497 a. 


GAS-aivw, -hoKw, nourish, 518 D, 22. 
aArcip-w anoint (archbw, HAenba, GAHAL 
a, -yumar, NAELPOnv) 511, 5 
aréi-w ward off (arAckouat, wAckduny) 
510, 1; GAadxoy D. 
GA€-ouae Or GAev-ouce avoid (HhrAEedunp, 
hAevaunv) 512 D, 7; daeetyw ib. 
dd€é-w grind (HAeca, dAHAE(c) ua) 503, 9. 
GA-jjvat, edAny; see eAw, 518 D, 23. 
BAD-ouan am healed (-heopat) 510 D, 20. 


aa-Lexouo am taken (dAdcoum, étAwy 
or fjAwv, E@AwKa OF jjAwKa) 583, 1. 


GAtT-alvw sin (-nuwevos, HAtTov) 522 D, 


1]. 

dAAdoow change (adAdAdkw, HAdrata, 
NAAAXA, -Ypmat, WAAGYHY OF -x4Anv) 
514, 1. 

@A- ~Aoman Leap ea nadunyv) 518, 3; 
adATo 489 D, 

aAUKTAaL@ am A ea (GAGAUKT NMA) 
368 D. 


dAvoKw avoid (aAviw, HAvta) 533, 7; 
advok-dlw, -dvw, D. 

eh ages procure (jApov) 522 D, 10. 

apapT-d ava er (QuapThooua, ijuaprov, 
TudpT nia, -—Nuat, HuapThenv) 522, 
2; HuBporoy D. 

cian ices miscarry (7juBAwoa, AuBAw- 
Ka, -éat) 533, 3 


of 


356 ALPHABETICAL 


dpevat 489 D, 19. 

GmirArd-ouat contend (jusrArAnOnv) 497 a. 

dun-ioxveowa, aum-exouce have on 
(Qupézoucn, Humoxdunr) 524, 4. 

dun-loxw, aum-éxwm put on (aupetw, 
qumixoyv) 524, 4. 

aumrdak-ionw miss (humrraxov) 533 D, 12. 

duiy-w, aurvddw defend 494. 

dy-Gr-lokw, av-drAd-w spend (avardca, 
avnrAwoad, -Ka, -wat, -Onyv) 5338, 2. 

avSdyw please 523, 1; adjow, éqviavor, 
&Sov, evadov, €ada, D. 

ay-éx-oucn endure (Averxduny) 861 a. 

avnvobe 368 D. 


. 1. lee’ / 
ay-ol'y-w open (avoltw, avewta, avewya, 


dvémxa, avewyuat, avesxOnv) 508, 
20; dy-oly-vopu ib. 

dy-op0d-w erect (hvdplwoa, -wuct) 861 a. 

avd-w, avitw accomplish (avicw, Hvuca, 
hvuxa, hvvopo) 508, 17; avw D. 

tvwy-a command (dvwx6; ivervyea, 
jvwyoy; avetw, Hvwta) 492 D, 11. 

dmap-ioxw deceive (j{rapov, nrapnoa) 
533 D, 13. 

drovoéouc despair (amevonOnv) 497 a. 

amd-xpn suffices 486 ; amoxp% D. 

Grew touch (abw, jya, Hupat, ipOnv) 
513, 1. 

apd-ouc: pray (aphueva) 535 D, 9. 

Gp-ap-loxw fit (jpoa, hpapov, a&pnpa, 
dpuevos) 5383 D, 143 a&pdapa ib. 

dpé-crw please (apérw, hpera, npéoOnv) 
530, 10. 

dphucvos 363 D. 

dpiée-w suffice (aprécw, Hpieoa) 503, 10. 

apudlw = apudttw, 516, 1. 

GpudTtw fit (apudcw, ipuora, ipuocpat, 
npudaOnv) 516, 1. 

dpvé-ouat deny (npynOnv) 497 a. 

&p-vumor win (apovual, Apduny) 528, 2. 

apd-w plough (jpoca, npd0nv) 503, 16. 

apmdlw snatch (aprdcw, ipraca, ipmraa, 
-cpat, npmwacOnv) 517, 1. 

dpt-w or aovtw draw (Hpvca, 1pvdnv) 
503, 18. 

wicaes Ha dpto, hpta, Apymat, ipxonv) 


) 


a 
¥ 


- 


LIST OF VERBS, 


doa, See ddw; aoauev, see ladw. 

&opevos (a8-, avidyw) 489 D, 46. 

adé-dyw, avé-w increase (adthow, nitnaa, 
nitnna, -uat, nuénenv) 522, 8. 

an-avpd-w deprive (&movpas) 489 D, 20. 

éen-aup-lokouat enjoy (eémavphoopat, én- 
nuvpoy, -dunv) 588, 4. 

apdoow jsecl (para) 516 D, 8. 

ee dip up (aptiw, Hpvoea) 517 D, 


i" ¥ 
4 


“fl 


fo" 


iM 


&x0-oucr am vexed (axOécoum, nxOéo- 


@nv) 510, 2. 

&x-vupa. am pained (nraxdunv, andxn- 
fal, aKAXEUaL), aKaxllw, aXEwV, 
axevwy, 528 D, 1%. 

&wpto (deipw) 518 D, 2. 


Baivw go (Bigoua, EBnv, BeBnra) 519, 7; 
éBnoa, BéBawor, €B&eny ib. 

Badr-rAw throw (Bar@, €Badrov, BEBAnka, 
~mat, €BATOnv) 518, 4; BeBorjaro, 
éBanto, Bacto, D. 

Barry dip (Babw, EBaba, BéRaupat, 
éBdony) 518, 2. 

Bda-orw = Balyw, 519 D, 7; 5380 D, 11. 

Bactd{w carry (Baotdow, éBarraca) 
517, 2. 

Belouat, Béoua (Bidw) 507 D, 2. 

BiBdve make go (BiBaow, BiB) 424. 

BiBds, BBS, 519 D, 7; 584 D, 10. 

BiBpdsnw cat (BéEBpwra, -uot, €Bpany) 
581, 8; BeBpdlw, EBpwv, D 

Bid-w live (Bidcopmo, éBiwv, -woa, BeBiw- 
ka, BeBlwua) 507, 2. 

dva-Bidonouc revive (aveBiwyv) 581, 1. 

Brdarrw hurt (BrAaWw, €BrAapa, BEBAaha, 
-~uuor, €BAAPOnv, €BAGBnv) 5138, 3; 
BAdBera D. 

BAact-dvw sprout (BAacTriow, €BAac- 
tov, (B)éBAdrTHKa) 522, 4. 

Bré-w look (BAdpa, €BAeva) 508, 8. 

Brirrw take honey (€BAtoa) 516, 2. 

Pardorw go (morodpat, @0Aov, weuBrAwKa) 
531, 2. 

BdbAcoOou (BovrAoua) 510 D, 4. 

BérKxw feed (Bornhaw) 510, 3. 

Bova-ou.cr wish (BovrdAhgoucu, BeBodan 
wat, eBovandny) 510, 4. 


ne ES Se 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


Bpdoow boil 516, 3. 

%-Boaxe, -Bpdtere, -Bpoxets, 508 D, 9. 

Boéx-w wet (&Bpeta, BéBpeyuat, éBpéx- 
Onv) 508, 9 

Bpt0-w am heavy (Bpiow, EBpioa, BeBpr- 
62) 508, 10. 

Bpvx doua roar (BéBpixa) 509 D, 18. 

Bi-véw stop up (Bicw, €Bica, BéBucpat) 


“af ae 


Tau-éw wed (yaya, éynua, yeydunka, 
-nuat) 509, 1 

yd-vuuar rejoice, yalwy, 525 D, 5. 

vé-yay-a, yeywv-lokw, -éw, Shout 608 D, 
30. 

yelvoua am born (éyewduny tr.)506 D,1. 

yerd-w laugh (yeddooua, éeyédAaca, 
eyeAdoOnv) 503, 1 

yev-to 489 D, 37; &yevr-ro 506 D, 1. 

yndé- rejoice (ynOnow, eynOnoa, yeyn- 
6a) 509, 2 

ynpa-oxw grow old (ynpaow, eyhpioa, 
yeynpaxa) 530, 1; ynpd-w ib. 

yeyvopan become (yerhoouar, eyevduny, 
yéyova, yeyevnua) 506, 1. 

yiyvaokw know (yvdcoun, éyvev, &yvw- 
Ka, cual, eyvecOny) 531, 4. 

yvaun-re bend 513 D, 19. 

yod-w wail (€yoov) 509 D, 19. 

ypdp-w write (ypdije, “yeaa yevpapa, 
“mya, eypapny) 508, 


Aa-, Shw, Sédaov, SeSdynuxa, eSdynv, 533 
D, 8. 

Sal-vius feast (€5a:oa) 526 D, 6. 

Saloua divide (édacdunv, S€5acraz), 
520 D, 4 

Salw burn (8€6yna, Sdyra) 520 D, 3 

dax-vw bite (Shtoua, edaxov, Sé6nyyat, 
éd5nxOnv) 521, 6. 

Sdu-yynut, -vdw subdue (eddunv, edauds- 
Ony, edunOnv), daudw, 529 D, 1. 

Sap0-dyw sleep (€dapbov, SeddpOnna) 522, 
5; €dpafov D 

Saréoucn divide (Saréaca) 520 D, 4. 

Sé-aro seemed 430 D. 

(béb0Ka, S€510 fear (Z5er7x) 490 5; Sel- 
Goua, eddeca, D. 


B00 


Set oportct (Senora, edénoe) 510, 5 a 

Sel-di-a, Seldw fear, 490 D, 5 

Seix-vipe show (Selfw, eka, Fe5erya, 
~ypat, delxOnv) 528, 3; détw, dei- 
deyuo, Seckavdoun, Sevdirxoua, D. 

5éu-w build (€Semua, SeSunua) 529 D, 1. 

Sépx-ouet look (€dpaxov, 5é50pxa) 508 D, 
Ol. 


5ép-w, Selpw flay (Sepa, Weipa, Sébapuat, 
eddpnv) 508, 12. 

dev-oucw lack (é5ednoe, Sjoe) 510 D, 5. 

Séx-oua reecive (dékoun, edetduny, 
ddeyuat, ed€xOny) 499; edéyuny, 
SéxrTo 489 D, 388; déxaTa 3863 D. 

dé-w bind (Show, @5noa, 5€dexa, Fedeucn, 
é5¢0nv) 504, 1. 

Sé-w lack (Sehow, edénoa, Sedénna, -uat, 
edeHOnv) 510, 5 

Snpid-oua quarrel (edypivOnv) 509 D, 20. 

Siaitd-w live (Sujtrynoa) 862 b. 

5ia-A€y-ouae converse (dreAexOnv) 497 a. 

Siavoéoucn meditate (StevohOnv) 497 a. 

diddonw teach (Siddiw, edldata, Sedldaxa, 
~yuat, €d1daxOnv) 533, 8. 

Onur bind = Sé-w, 534, 2. 

51-dpa-oxnw escape (Spicoum, edpay, Sé- 
Spara) 530, 2. 

Sidwut give (Sdow, ZdwKa, S€dwKa, 5€50- 
fat, €dd0nv) 534, 4. 

Ole, Stov 490 D, 5. 

Ol-evTat, év-Slecav, Siwua, 538 D, 2. 

Si¢nua seek (8¢(hoopar) 538 D, 3. 

dupd-w thirst (Supq, Subiiow) 412. 

Sidk-w pursue, Siwkdlw, 494, 

Soxé-w seem (ddkw, Sota, 
eddxOnv) 509, 8 

SdoKov (Sidwput) 534 YD, 4. 

Soumé-w sound (éySovmrnoa) 509 D, 9. 


Sé507ypat, 


Spay-ovpat, €-Spauoy etc. ; 
539, 5. 

Spd-w do (Spdow, paca, Sédpana, 5¢- 
Spdua, dpacnv) 505, 1. 

Suva-uat can (Suvhoouat, Sedvynuat, 
eduvnOnv) 535, 5; 487. 

divw = Siw, 507 D, 3. 

du-w enter (Svow, Zdioa, div, 5€drKa, 
-vKa, 5é5uuar, e6d0nv) 507, 3. 


see TPEXM, 


308 


"Ed-w permit (elav, Fake) 359. 
eyelpo rouse (evepa, NYElpa, Ayeeuny, 


eyptiyopa, = eyiryepat, —ryepOny) 
518, 5; €ype, -ouas, ib. 


€5-oua, 24Sora, see é€oGiw, 539, 3. 

€8-w cat, €3-uevor 538 D, 9. 

eCouoe sit 517, 7; see cabeCoua. 

e0éA-w wish (ebeAnow, HOéAnTA, NOEAN- 
xa) 510, 10. 

€0i(w accustom (etOroa, <t6ixa) 359, 

eldov saw; see épdw, 539, 4. 

eid-ds, €i9-evat (oida) 491, 

eix-w, eidbew yield, 494, 

eix-ds, eix-évor (Eouxa) 492, 7; 
éixtny etc. D. 


cihw press (EAca, ZeApat, edrAny, edrer), 
eiAéw, eihéw, etAAw, TAAw, 518 D, 
23, 


ciuat, ciato (€vvipt) 526 D, 1. 

eiut am (Ecouas) 537, 1; 478; fa, da, 
gov, env, anv, Eos, €ogo ete. 
478 D. 

eit 9? (7a, ihew) 586,1; 4773 fie, He, 
ioav, (e)errduny, at D. 

elyvoy (évvigs) 526 D, 1. 

elit-ov said (pa. elpnia, =pau, épinOny) 
539, 8; elpw, év(v)-€mw, eviorov, 
eviteo, D 

eipy- voql, cipyo shut in (eiptw, eipta, 
eipypau, etpxeny) 528, 4; efpyw ib. ; 
éépyw, e€pxaro, epyabor, D, 

eZp-ouat = époucu, 508 D, 14. 

eipv-arat, etpiTo, cipvodat, elpyocouat, 
etc. 538 D, 6. 

elow say 539 D, 8. 

elpw join (éepuévos) 369 D. 

eioa (eco, eods) 517 D, 7. 

eicxw, toxw liken 533 D, 15. 

elw0a am wont 369; twa D. 

ératvw drive, @A@, Aaa, €AhAaka, 
-uat, PAGOnv) 521, 1; é€Adw ib. 

éAéyx-@ convict (eAnrAcyua) 368. 

éA-ely, eiAov, See aipew, 539, 1. 


eiKe, 


see tpxoua, 539, 2. 
21D, 1; 464 Da. 
539, 2. 


érctoouat, eAnAVIA: S 
e€ATNAATO, canacdaro, & 52 
€A0-etv, RAGov, See Epyouat, 

éAlacw wind (ciaiooov) 359. 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


eAx-@ drag (€Atw, efAxuga, efAKuxa, 
eiAkucpat, eiAkuoc9yv) 508, 19; 
éAxéw D. 

éan-w hope (€orma) 508 D, 82. 

éué-w vomit (jueoa) 503, 11. 

ae ay (#vapov, éevnparc) 518 D, 


évaytidouar oppose (nvayridOnv) 497 a. 

EveyK-ely, TvEeyKa, -ov, evhnvoxa, evnvey-= 
por; see pépw, 539, 6; Avera, 
“OV, D 

évérw, evverw, eéviome(s), evibw, évt- 
onhjow; 539 D, 8. 

ér-evi'vole 368 D. 

éviuc-oua: consider (évebipunonv) 497 a. 

évin-rw chide (nvtmamov, évevimov) 513 
D, 20. 

éviocw (= évimtw) 515 D, 3. 

évvocoucu consider (évevonOnv) 497 a. 

EVV, Gucpi-evviqt clothe (audie, -éce- 
pice, tiuptera, Anpleo pat) 526, 1; 

elvuov, goa, cial, EoTal, ElaTOo, D. 


evoxré-w annoy (nvexAnoa, -ka) 361 a. 

Zouxa am like (éwnn, eixa@s ; eléw) 492, 7, 

ified éwpryea 514 D, 14. 

éoptaiw keep festival (Edpracov) 359 d. 

emierouae care (émeweanOnv) 497 a. 

értora-ua. understand (émiathoopat, 
AmiotnOnv) 5385, 6; 487. 

é-oncr follow (eWoum, éomdunv) 508, 
18; én-w, €orov, oreto, D 

pa-uen love 508, 2; 535, 7. 

épd-w love (npac@nv) 508, 2. 

epydfoua work (eipyaruat) 359, 

epyw = elpyw, 528 D, 4. 


%pdw do (ptw, epta) 514, 14; eopya, 
ewpyea 

épeld-w Ican (éphperoua, éepnpedaro) 
464 D a. 

épetxar rend (Hpixov, épnpvypa) 511 D, 
18 

épelran overthrow (epetfa, épelpeamy 


511, 6; Hpurov, épnpima 
epéco'w row B16, 4; Roeca D. 
épedyoucs spew (Hpuyov), épuyydvw, 511 
His we 


épedibw rcdden, épvd-clvoua, 511 D, 20. 





ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


épid-alyw contend (-hoacba:), épiduatvo, 
522 D, 12. 

%p-ouct ask (épjrouce, npduny) 508, 14; 
efoouat, epé-w, -ovat, -cive, 

€om-w, -UCw creep (<ipmov, cipmuca) 3859. 

Eiiw 90 (3bhow, ‘ifbnos, ihre) 

eat 

amd-ep-oa 431 Dc. 

épix-w hold back (ipita) 508, 15; 
hpuKaroy, épdx-dvw, -avdw, D. 

Epvouar preserve, eipvaTat, EpuTo, etc. 
538 D, 6. 


2 


épt-w draw (etpvoa, etpiuat) 504 D, 11. 

Epx-ouat go (eAcvoouat, iAPov, EAHAVOA) 
539, 2; HAvoov, jvOov, eiAndrovba, D. 

€p-@, elpnka, eps7nOnv ; see eimov, 539, 8. 

écbiw cat (Zdoua, Zpayov, d4S5ora, é57- 
Seopa, /5éc0nv) 539, 3; EvOw, D. 

éoxoy (eiut) 478 D. 

éomete 539 D, 8. 

éoméuny; see Eroua 508, 138. 

€o-oa, €o-Tat (Evvipt) 526 D, 1. 

Eooal, eorouc ({(w) 517 D, 7. 

éoTid-w entertain (ciortaca, -Ka) 359. 

€Ud-w sleep 510, 8. 

evAaBé-ouar beware (nvdaBjOny) 497 a. 

ebp-loxw find (eipnrw, nupov, nipnra, 
~pat, nipednv) 533, 5. 

ir-ex9-dvoua am hated (-exOnroua, 
nx Sonny, -AXOnuat) 522, 6; Exdw, 
-oal, ib. 

ex-w have (ekw, oxhow, trxov, ax 7nKa, 
-nuat) 508, 16; éxwKa, ér-dxaTo, 
erxeboy, 

ey-w boil (Evhow, finoa) 510, 9. 

Ewuev (&-w) 489 D, 19. 

av-ewyTat (tnus) 476 D. 


Zd-w live (Cn, €(n), Ion. (bw, 412. 

Ceby-vius yoke (Cevéo, ECevéa, ECevypau, 
eCbynv) 528, 5. 

é-w boil (Céow, ECeoau) 508, 12. 

(i-vvige gird (ECwoa, E(w(o)ua) 527, 1. 


'HBa-oxw come to puberty, iBd-w (4Bh- 
ow, 7Bnoa, HAnKa) 530, 8. 
H5n, nopuev etc. (ofda) 491; heldn etc. D. 


509 


78-ouae am glad (joOnv, jnodjcouat) 
497 a. 

hua sit 587, 2; 483; ear, €ara, 
483 D. 


jas say (jv, #) 535, 2. 


Odr-Aw flourish (ré0nra) 518, 6; Oaré- 
Cwy, THACOdwy, D. 

Oam-rw bury (Odbw, eOaba, Téaupat, 
erdpnyv) 513, 4. 

Gclvw beat (deve, €0evov) 518 D, 25. 

0éA-w (OeAhow) = e0éA-w, 510, 10. 

Ogovar, Oorro (TLOnut) 534 D, 1. 

Ogp-oua grow warm 508, 17; béprouar, 
Oepéw, D. 

béw run (Oevoouat) 512, 1. 

Onrd-w = OdAAw, 518 D, 6. 

Giyydvew touch (Olioua, €Gryov) 523, 2. 

6Ad-w bruise 503, 5. 

OATB-w press (@AtWw, COAiWa, EOATPOnr) 
508, 1. 

Ovijoxw dic (Oavotpa, tOavoy, réOvnKa) 
530, 4. 

Odp-vuua = Opdonw, 531, 5. 

Opdoow trouble (€Opata) 514, 8. 

Opav-w break (Opatcw, Opava, Té- 
Gpau(c)}uat, €Opava nv) 505, 16. 

Opctounm, Z0peta; see Tpéxw 539, 5. 

OpeWw, COpewa; see tpédw 508, 29. 

Opvn-Tw weaken (Optbw, €Opupa, TéOpuu- 
pot) 513, 5. 

OpdoKw leap (Bopovpa, @opov) 531, 5. 

O0-vw, Ov-véw rush (== O-w), 521 D, 
10. 

Ov-w sacrifice (iow, 2Oicu, TéOvKa, Té- 

- O@vpar, érvOnv) 504, 2. 
Giw rush 521 D, 10. 


id-ouat heal (taodunv, ta0nv) 499. 

iavw sleep (tera, aoauev) 506 D, 7. 

idx-w, iaxé-w cry, 508 D, 33. 

id-eiv, eidov; see dpdw 539, 4. 

t8-uev, ict, todo (05a), 491. 

idpt-w seat (idvOny, SpdvOnv) 469 D. 

iw sit 517, 7; eioa, é€ooaro D. 

inus send (iow, Ta, eika, eiyor, elOnvr) 
534, 3; 476. . 


360 ALPHABETICAL 

ik-ave, tkw 524 D, 2. 

ixucvos 489 D, 47. 

ix-véouor come (ouc, tedunv, Tymas) 
524, 9 

frAa-par propitiate (tAnO, tAaGe) 585 D, 
10. 


iAd-oxomon propitiate (tAdvoma, thacd- 
pny, thacOnv) 5380, 5; iAdouar, 
tAnka D. 

tArw roll 518 D, 28. 

inaocow whip (tuaca) 516 D, 9. 

inrapoa fly 508 D, 28. 

todays 491 D. 

toxw, éloxw liken, 533 D, 15. 

iornut station (ornow, éornoa, torny, 
éoTnka, eoTdeny) 534, 5. 

isxdvw, isxavdw, 506 D, 2. 

ioxw = exw, 506, 2. 


KahéCouat sit (kabedovuat) 517, 7. 
Kabevdw sleep (Kabevdiow) 510, 8. 
KdOnwat sit 5387, 2; 484. 

Kable sit (Kab, Kabi(jnooum, exddica 
or xafioa) 517, 7; Kadetoa D. 
kalyupor surpass (Kéxagpat) 528 D, 18. 

kalvw kill (€xavov) 518, 7. 

Katw, Kaw burn (Katow, txavoa, KéeKauKa, 
-mat, exavOnv), 520, 1; Exna, Keds, 
exanv D. 

Kar€-w call (Kade, exdAeoa, KEKANKA, 
KexAnuat, ekANOnv) 504, 5. 

mpo-KarlCoua, KiKAnoKw, 504 D, 5. 

KaddrrTe cover (Kartwlw, éxddaua, Kexd- 
Avpmou, exarvPpOnv) 513, 6 

Kdp-vw am weary (Kamodpmal, examor, 
Kéxpnna) 521, 7 

kaun-tw bend (kdubw, Fxauwa, Kéxop- 
pot, exdudOnv) 513, 7. 

kavdtats 528 D, 1. 

KeSd-vvipu, Kldynut scatter, 525 D, 4. 

Reto lie (retrouan) 536, 2- 482: 
KEaTal, KETKETO, Kelw, Kew, "482 D. 

Kelpw shear (epe, Ekerpa, KéKapua) 
518, * éxepaa, exdpnv 

Kéxadov, -how 514 D, 18; Scab teed 
510 D, 21. 


keradé-w roar (keAddwy) 509 D, 10. 


LIST OF VERBS. 


kered-w bid (keractow, exéAcvoa, Keke 
Aevka, -ouat, exeAcvocOnv) 505, 


KéA-A@ land (KéAow, ExeAca) 422 b, 
431 ¢. 

KéeA-ouct command (éxexadunv) 508 D, 
o4, 

Kevté-w goad eno 509 D, 11. 

Kepd.- yyiar m ix (éxépaca, Kenpapo, é. 
KpaOnv, exepacOnv) 525, 13 Keaden, 
kepalw D, 

Kepdalyw gain (Kepdava, éexépdava, KeKép- 
Sa) 519, 6. 

kevdavw = KevOw 511 D, 12. 

Kevdm hide (kevow, Exevoa, KekevOa) 
511, 12. 

KexAGdws, -ovTas 455 D a, 

Kn9-w trouble (kexadjoowa) 510 D, 21. 

Knpicow proclaim (Kknpikw, éxhpita, Ke- 
Khpvxa, ~ymat, exnpvxOnv) 514, 2. 

Kiyxdva reach (Kixheopat, exrxov) 
523, 3. 

Kloyny = Keda-vvipu, 529 D, 8. 

KiKAnoKw = Kadéw, 530 D, 12. 

Ki-vuwar move (exov, éxtabov) 526 D, 4, 

kipynut, -vdw (= repd-vvduu) 529 D, 2. 

Kix-avw reach 523 D, 8; éxtixers, Kixh- 
THY, Kixjvat etc., 538 D, 4. 

kixpnut lend (xphow, Expnoa, Kéxpnka, 
Kéxpynuat) 5384, 9. 

KAdlw resound (Kraytw, 
KAayya) 514, 12; 
KAnyes, D. 

kAalw, KAaw weep (KAavcopual, -covpat, 
exAavoa, KéKAavpat) 520, 2. 

KAd-w break (€kAaca, KéxAaocmat, éxrAd- 
cOnv) 5038, 3 

KAel-w shut (KAcirw, xAera, réKAer(o)- 
so, exAetcOnv) 505, 14. 

KAelw, Kréw celebrate, 512 D, 8. 

kAén-Tw steal (KAdbw, ExreWa, KeKAopa, 
KéxAcumat, exAdmny) 513, §. 

KAj-w shut (KAjow, eeAnoa, KéeKANKA, 
KeKAnmal, exKAnTOnY) 505, 14. 

KAtv@ lean (KAWwO, ExAtva, KEeKALat, 
exAlOny, -exAlynv) 519, 1. 


exAoyka, Ké- 
EKAayov, Ke- 


KAvw hear (€xAvov, KADOL, KeKAVOL, KAD 


pevos) 512 D, 8. 


~issinsecelill 


whet 


eane 
é4) 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS, 


kval-w scratch (kvalow, @xvaica, KéKvat- 
Ka, -oma, exvaia@ny) 505, 11. 

nvd-w scrape (éxyha@ny) 505, 2 

kém-tTw cut (Kdvw, exowa, 
-ommoat, exdmnyv) 513, 9 

Kope-vviu satiate (Kexdpeoum, éxopéc- 
Onv) 526, 2; Kope(a)w, Kexopyas, 
kexdpnuct, D. 

Kopvoow equip (Kekopvbuevos) 516 D, 
10. 


KéKOpa, 


KoTé-w am angry (éxédreca, KeKoTnw&s) 
504 D, 10, 

Kpacw cry (€xpayov, kéxpaya) 514, 13. 

Kpema-uae hang (Kpeunjooua) 535, 8; 
487. 

Kpeud-vviue hang (Kpeua, éexpeuaca, 
éxpendoOnyv) 525, 2 

Kphuvayae (= kpeua-uae) 529 D, 3. 

kpi(w creak (ple, xéxpiya) 514 D, 20. 

Kptvw judge (kpiv@, expiva, rékpira, -wat, 
exptOnyv) 519, 2. 

Kpov-w beat (kpovow, & expovoa, KéKpouKa,, 
KeKpou(c)uat, expovobyv) 505, 21. 

xpumTw hide (kptyw, Expua, Kéxpuypat, 
expvpeny, -pnv) 513, 10 

KTd-ouer acquire (KéxTnpat) 365 db, 
465 a. 


krelyw kill (nreve, Extavoy, am-éxTova) 
519, 4; exray 489, 4. 

Kti(w found (xrt-uevos) 489 D, 28. 

Gro-KTivvipu kill 528, 6. 

eTuTe-w crash (€krumoyv) 509 D, 12. 


ku-lokomat conceive (Exioa), Kiw, Kuéw, . 


532, 1. 
KvAT-w or KvAlydw roll (éxvAioa, Kexd- 
Aiopat, exvdtcOnv) 505, 5. 
ku-vew kiss (€xvoa) 524, 8. 
Kir-Tw stoop (Ki~w, ekipa, Kéxida) 
d 


kupé-w happen (xvpoa), kvp-w, 509, 4. 


hayxave get by lot (Ahtoua, raxor, 
elAnxa, ~ymat, EANXOnv) 523, 4; 
Adfouat, A€Aaxov, AéAoyxa D. 

Adoun take 515 D, 5. 

AauBavw take (AjWoua, EraBov, ctanoa, 
etAnumot, eAnPOnv) 523, 5; Adu- 
Woua, AcAgByKa, D 


361 


Adum-w shine (Aamo, €Aauya, A€AauaTa) 
508, 18. 

AavOdyw lie hid (Ahaw, €rabov, AéAnOa, 
-gpat) 523, 6; A€Aaboy D. 

Adoxw speak (Aakhooua, édrdKnoa, 
éAarov, A€AGKa) 53838, 9; Ankew D. 

Aéy-w gather (A¢éw, erecta, elrAoxa, 
etAeyuat, eAeynv) 508, 19a; €Aéy- 
env D. 

Aéy-w speak (A€kw, Ereta, eZpnra, ACAey- 
feat, €A€XOnv) 508, 19 b 

Aclrw leave (Aclbw, €Aurov, Aé€AorTa, 
A€Aetmpmau, €AelPOnv) 511, 7. 

Aev-w stone (Acvow, tAevoa, €Actobny) 
505, 19. 

Aex- lay (frAeKTo, Ax Oat, A€ypevos) 
489 D, 40 

AnOw = AavOdvw, 511, 1. 

Anbavw make forget 523 D, 6. 

Ankéw = Adokw, 533 D, 9. 

Atumave = Aelrw 511, 7. 

Alocouat, Ait-ouc pray, 516 D, 11. 

Aixud-w lick (AeAerxpdres) 509 Dz 
21. 

Aov-w wash (Zrov, Aovua, Ade) 412 b. 

Av-w loose (Avow, ZAdoa, A€AvKA, A€AU- 
ua, eAVOnv) 504, 3; eAduny D. 


Maivoua am mad (pavotpa, meunva, 
euavnv) 518, 11. 

patoua 7 cach afier ( pEpova, penaev) 
poaudw, 520 D, 5; udpevos ib. 

par-av (uncdouar) 509 D, 22. 

pavOdyw learn (uabjcoua, Zuabov, meud- 
O@nka) 528, 7. 

mapvapat fight 529 D, 4. 

pdpT-Tw seize (wewapmoy, meudrorey) 
513 Dy 21. 

paprupe- w, MapTUpouat wetness, 509, 5. 

pacow knead (pdtw, tuata, pméewaxa, 
~yuot, euaynv) 514, 3. 

paxéowa 510 D, 11. 

max-ouce fight (uaxotvua, euaxerduny, 
peudxnuor) 510, 11. 

pd-ouar attend to (uedhooua), undouar, 
510 D, 22. 

pcOd-cxw intoxicate (éuéévoa, euebtor 
Onv), wcbtw, 532, 2 


362 ALPHABETICAL 


welpouct reccive part (Eupope, etuaprat) 
518 D, 

peAA-w am about (uedAAtow, €ueAAnoa) 
510, 13. 

péed-w care (wedAnow, eucAnoa, meu“eAnKa,, 
uot, meat Onv) 510,12; wéunaa,D. 

euBrerat (ueAw) 510 D, 12. 

ucuBawna (BAdoxw) 531, 2. 

ucuetimevos (uebtnus) 476 D. 

pemova: see watoucs 520 D, 5 

pev-w remain (werd, Euewa, mewevna) 
510, 14, 

peTaperouae repent (ueremeanOnv) 497 a. 

ennd-ouat bleat (uaxdv, weunnds) 509 D, 
22. 

untid-w, unttouoa plan, 509 D, 23. 

pby-vips, ployo mix (utéw, Euita, peé- 
piypwot, €utxOny, éptynv) 528, 7; 
biKTo 

piue-ouai imitate (ueutpnuar) 499 a. 

puryoka remind (uviow, tuvynoca, Me- 
pyjpat, euyicOnv) 530, 6. 

plure = pév-w, 506, 3. 

ploryo = pryviws, 528, 7; 533, 10. 

uoA-ely, €-oA-ov (BAdcKw) 531, 2. 

wicw suck (éuo¢noa) 517 D, 9. 

puKd-oua roar (euveov, weuona) 509 D, 


pi-w Shut (Euvoa, wéuixa) 504, 6. 


Naiw dwell (gvaroa, évégOnv) 520 D, 6. 

vacow press (vévacuat) 517,83; évata, D. 

veué-w quarrel (évelkeoa) 503 D, 21. 

véu-w distribute (vend, evera, veveunra, 
-nyuat, eveunOnv) 510, 15. 

véouca go 516 D, 12. 

véw swim (vevoodua, Evevoa, vevevea) 
512, 2 

vé-w heap (vhow, evynoa, vévn(o)uat) 
505, 4, 

vhx-w swim 512 D, 2. 

vido wash (vido, évyrba, vera, éevio- 
Onv) 515, 2; virrouas, 

viccoua go 516 D, 12. 


Eé-w scrape (teoa, tkeopuo) 508, 13. 
fv-w polish (tica, ékiaOnv) 505, 9 


LIST OF VERBS, 


OdHdvoTa: 368 D. 


igw smell (o¢row, &(noa) 517, 8; 
vdwda, D 


oty-w open (ita), ofyvipu, 508 D, 20. 

vida know (icdot, cidds, 75n) 491. 

oi5-dvw, oidéw swell (@dnoca, @dnKa) 
522, 1. 

olka, olxds (ora) 492 D, 7. 

oivoxo€-w pour wine (ewvoxder) 859 D. 

of-ouar, oiuae think (oijoouat, @eijOnv), 
510, 16; ot-w, dt-w, dt-ouat (wiod- 
ENY, gicSnv) D. 

oicw, olive etc.; see pepw 539, 6. 

otxX-omat am gone (oixjropat) 510, 17; 
oixvew, Wap-oxKHKA, OLXwKA, D. 

6A100-dvw slip (@AtcOov) 522, 8. 

UA-ADmL destroy (GAG, @Aeoa, wAduNY, 
OADAEKAL, JAwAa) 528, 8; dAeKe, 
ovAduevos, D. 

bu-vig swear (ouodpat, Guoca, 6udmora, 
Oudpolo)uar, wud(a Any) 528, 9 

oudpy-vim wipe (dudpkoua, dopte, 
a@pdpxOnv) 528, 10. 

évivnus benefit (dvhow, Svnca, evnuny, 
avnenv) 534, 6. 

évo-uat blame (avosaunv, avdabnv) 538 

ob: 

érutw wed (oricw) 520 D, 7. 

trwra, WWouat, Pony; see dpaw 539, 4. 

dpd-w sce (drpouau, eidov, Edpara or Ewpara, 
edpapuou Or @umat, opPenv) 539, 4; 
vawma ib. 

épyalyw cnrage (épyava) 431 b. 

Opey-vi, Opéy-w reach (dpwpéxarat), 

2 ? 

épivw rouse 528 D, 11. 

Up-vipu rouse (8prw, @poa, dpwpa) 528, 
11; &popov, pro, D 

dpovw rush 528 D, 11. 

dptocw dig (optviw, asputa, dpdpuxa,, 
~ypor, apvxOnv) 514, 4 

tcooua soresee 515 D, 4. 

dchp-atvoua smell (6opphroum, aoppd- 
nv, wodpavOny) 519, 8. 

odpée-w make water (éovpynoa, -nra) 359. 

obrd-w wound (obra), ovrd(w, 507 D, 5. 

6pelAw owe (dpeiAjow, apelrAnca, 


any 

‘ ie 

ap lip plan ciceceeiae eae 
“ 





Pe 


ALPHABETICAL 


edov, apelAnta, aperrAndny) 518, 
12; dpérdw, D. 
bbeArw increase (6péAAete) 518 D, 12. 
dpa-tckdyw incur (dpAjTw, pdAor, 
SpaAnta, -mat) 522, 9. 


Tla0-ety, €-ma0-ov ; see médaxw 533, 11. 

naive sport (mototuat, eraca, Tenac- 
poor, 517, 4. 

mal-w sirike (ratow or taijow, eraica, 
memauna, emaic@nv) 505, 12. 

marai-w wrestle (maralow, émadaica, 
eradato@nv) 505, 13. 

mdA-Aw brandish (rnda, -weTaddy) 
518 D, 27. 

raupatvev, maupavdwy, 518 D, 19. 

mapowe-w behave drunken (émapdvovr, 
meTap@vynKka) 562 a. 

wacow sprinkle (ragw, traca, erdoOnv) 
516, 5. 

nacxw sufcr (welooua, &rabov, wémovOa) 
533, 11; wémocde D. 

maré-oucr eat (émacdny, mwéemaocuat) 
509 D, 13. 


U / v / 
 mat-w make cease (ravow, emavoa, Té- 


Tava, Téemaupal, eravenv, mavaTé- 
os) 505, 17. 

melw persuade (melow, mero, TéeTELka, 
mrémoo, memeropat, emetoOny) 511, 
8; @ri@oy ib.; mémidov, wemiOjow, 
mionow, D. 

mweixw comb, shear 509 D, 6. 

wewvd-w hunger (wewh, wewhow) 412. 

meipw pierce (wep@, memapuc) 518, 13; 
exapyy D. 

melcouat; see méaxw, 533, 11. 

mex-Téw comb (émréxOnv) 509, 6. 

meAd(w approach (weA@, WARTO, ewAG- 
Onv); weddw, werddw, mAGOw, 
midvaua, 514 D, 21. 

mwéA-ouat move (exAdunv), TEAw, 508 D, 
OD. 

méun-w send (réubw, rena, wémoupa, 
mémenuat, emeuddny) 508, 21. 

wémiGov, mentOhow, 511 D, 8. 

rérAnyov (wmAhoow) 514 D, 5. 

mémvona (rvew) 512 D, 4. 

mémpwrat, -wéevos, 508 D, 37. 


LIST OF VERBS. 363 


mépd-ouat pedo (mapihjcoucr, emapdov, 
mémopda) 508, 22. 

mép0-w sack (&mpabov) 508 D, 36. 

mépynut sell (mepdw, emépaga) 529 D, 5. 

néecow cook (mréyw, Enea, méemeupat, 
emepenv) 515, 1. 

merauat fly 508 D, 23. 

metd-vvip spread (meta, éréraca, mé 
Tropa, ereTacOnv) 525, 3, 

weT-oma fly (Thoma, meThToma, 
errouny) 508, 23. 

mevOouat, = muvOdvouat, 511, 13. 

mepiddunyv, -nooua 511 D, 11. 

méepvoyv, erepvov, Tépapat, mephoouat 
bis. - 9: 

why-vius fix (whtw, érnia, wemrnya, end- 
ynv) 528, 12; érnnto D. 

midvapat, -vdw, = meAdw, 514 D, 21, 
529 D, 6. 

riumAnur fill (rAhow, erAnoa, remAnKa, 
men An(o)uct, erAH@nv) 534, 7. 

aiumpnur burn (mphow, érpnoa, wémpn- 
Mat, emphnadnv) 534, 8. 

mivt-cnw make wise (érivvoca) 512 D, 4. 

mi-vw drink (mlowa, emov, wémwxa, 
mémoua, emddnv) 521, 3. 

mintckn give to drink (miow, érioa) 582 
D, 3. 

mimpacke sell (wrémpaxa, -wat, érpadny) 
530, 7. 

ninte fall (recotua, erecoy, wéemTwKa) 
506, 4. 

airynt, -vaw (== wetd-vvigt) 529 D, 7. 

aityw fall 521, 9. 

mipavonw deelare 532 D, 4. 

mado make wander (€mrayka, éewady- 
xOnv) 398 b. 

radcow mould (érraca, mémAacpat, 
érddcOnv) 516, 6. 

mAréK-w twist (errcka, wérAeyyuat, erAd.- 
Knv) 508, 24. 

TAéw sail (wAEVGCOpai, -cotpal, ExAevea, 
mémAcuica, -cmat) 512, 3. 

éx-rAhyvucGau 514, 5. 

TrIOw am full (méwrnba) 534, ‘7. 

mahcaw strike (wAhtw, érania, méwAn- 
“ya, ~ypal, emanynv) 514, 5. 


364 


TAUVH wash (mAvve, erddva, WéemAUMAL, 
éraAvdnyv) 519, 3. 

TAO-w, = TAew, 512 D, 3. 

avéew blow (arvetooua, -covpat, émrvevoa, 
mémvevxa) 512, 4. 

aviy-w choke (avitw, evita, wémviryjuas, 
émviyny) 508, 2. 

mo0é-w desire 504, 8. 

moimvi-w puff 574. 

mop-eiv, -mrop-ov, wémpwrai, 508 D, 37. 

moppip-w boil 574. 

moTd-ouo fly 508 D, 23. 

apacow do (mpitw, erpita, wémparya, -Xa, 
~yuot, empaxOnv) 514, 6. 

mpnew burn 584 D, 8. 

mpiacGat, empiduny ; see wvéoua, 539, 7. 

mpt-w saw (expioa, mémpiouat, empiaOnv) 
505, 6. 

mpodiue-ouce am eager (mpovdiundnv) 
497 a. 

mpovo€é-ouat foresce (mpovvon9nv) 497 a. 

mTdp-vuuat sneeze (wrap, €mrrapov) 528, 
13. 

aTnoow crouch (érrnta, érrnxa) 514, 7; 
-ITNTHV, TENTNOS, 

mticow pound (érrica, érrispuct) 516, 7. 

mTu-w spit (€mrvoa) 503, 20. 

NTHTTW, = TTHTTw, 514, 7. 

muvidvouc inquire (mevoouat, érvduny, 
méruopoa) 523, 8. 


‘Pal-w shatier (palow, éppatoOnv) 505 D, 
22. 


parrw sew (pabw, eppapa, eppaupa, 
gsidionv) 613, 12. 

pécw do (békw, peta, épéxOnv) 514, 14. 

péw flow (pevcoum, puhcoum, épsinta, 
Zab bay) iD. ©: | 

pry-voue break (phtw, epinta, eppwya, 
epiayny) 528, 14. 

pryé-w shudder (@p6iya) 509 D, 14. 

piryd-w am cold (piyav, piydnv) 412 a. 

bimré-w, = pirrw, 509, 7. 

biarw throw (piwew, ppt 
Eppipeny, épsimnv) 518, 13. 

fii-ouat preserve (piaro, poaOmu, éppi- 
céunv) 5388 D, 7. 


Wa, &pp ipa, ~KEGL, © 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


pund-w soil (pepumwuévos) 365 D. 
po-vyipe strengthen (ppwoa, eppwpat, 
épicbaOnv) 527, 2. 


Saipw swecp (éonpa, ceonpa) 518, 14. 

cadmivea blow trumpet (ésddrmryéa) 
398 b. 

gad-w save (eodwoa) 517 D, 5. 

oBé-vyie quench (oBéow, oPBhoouat, 
éxBeoa, ta Bnv, er Bnka, er BeoOnv) 
526, 3. 

o€B-omcu revere (eoépOnv) 497 a. 

aecl-w shake (ceiow, toeioa, océcetka, 
céoespat, eoelaO@nv) 505, 15. 

getw drive (Ecceva, Exovpat, cvTO) 512 
D9. 

anne make rot (ohwe, o¢onma, éodmrny) 

> 

cxantw dig (oxdWw, @onala, eoxada, 
-muat, eoxapny) 518, 14. 

gKedd-vyips scatter (onedd, eoxédaca, 
eoxedacua, eoxeddoOnv) 525, 4. 

oKéA-Aw dry (€oxdnv) 518, 15; écxn- 
Aa D. 

oKén-Toua, oKomé-w view (axeboua, 
eoxeWduny, eoxeppor) 518, 15. 

oKnn-Tw prop (oxhlw, eoxna, oxnp- 
pat, eoxnpenyv) 5138, 16. 

onldynut (= oxeddvvipu) 529 D, 8. 

oKen-Tw jecr (oxdpoucn, toxapa, eoxw- 
ponv) 518, 17. 

oud-w wash (apn) 412. 

o6d-ns, o6n, cdwot, 517 D, 5. 

ond-w draw (omdow, éomaca, tomaka, 
éomacma, eoracOny) 503, 4. 

onelpw sow (omep®, Zomepa, Eomappat, 
eomapny) 518, 16. 

oméevd-w pour (ometow, tometoa, -opat) 
421 a, 429, 463 c. 

évt-omoy, €-on-eTe, 539 D, 8. 

ordokoy (iornur) 534 D, 5. 

orelBw tread (€creupa, éoriBnuc) 511, 
9. 


orelxw march (érrixov) 511, 10. 
oréd-dw send (oTEAG, ZoTELAa, ETTAAKA, 
éoTaAma, eotdAnv) 518, 17. 
atépy-w love (créptw, tarepta, Earopya} 


? 


ii a Salas ag 


gt, bE py 


ALPHABETICAL 


otup-loxw, orepew deprive (orephow, 
éorépnoa, eoTepnka, -wal, eorepi- 
Onv) 533, 6; oTépowat ib. 

orev-Ta threatens, orev-ro, 5388 D, 8. 

ordp-vie spread (ctTope, éatdpeca) 
528, 15. 

otped-w turn (orpelw, torpeba, €orpo- 
ga, CoTpappa, eoTpdpny) 508, 26. 

oTpd-vviue spread (orpdaw, toTpwoa, 
coTpwopat, eoTpoOny) 527, 8. 

otuyé-w hate (atvyov) 509 D, 15. 

cpdw or cpdtre slay (opdiw, topata, 
topayuat, eopaynv) 514, 15. 

oddr-rAw trip (odare, eagpnaa, topar- 
pa, eopadrnyv) 518, 18. 

oxeOciv, toxebov, oxow; see exw, 
508, 16. 

gow save (cdow, trwea, Téowka, ofow- 
(o)ucu, eowOnv) 517, 5. 


Ta-Ojva, érdOnv, réraxa; see Telvw, 
519, 5. 

Tauvn = Téuvw 521 D, 8. 

ravv-w stretch (erdvuca, TeTdvvo pat) 519 
Do. 

tapacow trouble (rapdiw, érdpata, rerd- 
payyuot, erapaxdny) 514, 8. 

Tigow arrange (tdéw, rata, téraxa, 
TeTaypa, eraxOnv) 514, 9. 

Tadp-jva, erddyny; see GdrrTw, 513, 4. 

Tap-ov, téOnma am amazed, 511 D, 
16. 

telvw stretch (revG, erewa, rTétaka, 
Teraya, éraOnv) 519, 5. 

TeK-elv, e&rexov, TéTOKA, See TIKTY, 
506, 5. 

mehé-w finish (rere, érédcou, TETEAEKA, 
reTécAeguat, €TEAETONY) 503, 14. 

Téuw == réuvw 521 D, 8. 

Teu-veo cut (reue, @reuov, eropov, Té- 
TpHKa, -mat, erunOnv) 521, 8. 
répr-w delight (réppw, rep a, éréppOny) 

508, 27; rerapréunvy D 
Tépa-ouc, Tepoatye dry 508 D, 38. 

Tetayev having scized 436 D. 
Tetinua gricve, rerinds 446 D. 
rTéetpuov attained, 436 D. 
tetpaivew bore 506, 6. 


LIST OF VERBS. 


365 


tevxw make (revkw, @revta, téruypat) 
511, 14; réruxoy, -duny, 

Thre melt (Thkw, ernta, TET HK, eTdKHV) 
511, 3. 

Tnrcbawy blooming 518 D, 6. 

TiOnus put (Onow, €Onka, TEeOerka, TeOEL 
pat, eréOnv) 534, 1, 

tiurw bear (rékoun, erexov, TéToKa) 
506, 5. 

tl-vw pay (Tiow, erica, Tétixa, TETI- 
ono, ericOnv) 521, 4; Tivipe D. 

titalyw stretch 519 D, 5. 

titpdw bore (érpnoa, TéeTpnuo) 506, 6. 

TITpooKw wound (Tpdow, eETpwaa, TEé- 
Tpwual, erp@Onv) 531, 6; Tpaw D. 

TiTvoKoUa aim 533 D, 16. 

tAa-, étAnv endured 489, 7; rétAnka 
492-1, 10, 

Tunyw cut (éruayov) 511 D, 17. 

tpan-eloueyv (Tépmw) 508 D, 27. 

Tpanw, Tparéw, = Tpérw, 508 D, 28. 

Tpapw, = Tpédw, 508 D, 29. 

tpém-w turn (tpébw, erpea, Térpoda, 
TéTpaypot, erpdanyv) 508, 28. 

Tpép-w nourish (Opeyw, Zpe Wa, TéTpoda, 
TéOpapuat, éetpadpyv) 508, 29. 

Tpéx-w@ run (Spapyodua, Zpauov, S<edpa- 
enka, -not) 539, 5; Opekouat, eOpe- 
Ea ib.; Tpaxw, 5édpoua, D 

tpe-w tremble (€rpera) 508, 15. 

TpiB-w rub (rpidw, erpila, rérpida, 
TéTpimpat, erpiBnv) 508, 3. 

Tpi(w squeak (rérpiya) 514, 16. 

TpoTew, = Tpémw, 508 D, 28. 

Tpoyw gnaw (Tpdtoua, erpayov, Té- 
Tpwyua) 511, 4. 

Tpéw, = TiTpdcKw, 531 D, 6. 

Tuyxave happen (revéoua, ervxor, 
reTUXNKA) 523, 9. 

tin-tw strike (tumthow, étumnv) 513, 
18. 

rup-w smoke (rébippot, érdpnv) 508, 4. 


‘Ymoxvésua promise (trorxhoomat, 
imesxounv, birérxnwat) 524, 5. 

B-w rain (iow, toa, iouat, VoOnv) 505, 
10. 


8366 ALPHABETICAL 

dbay-etv, Eparyov; see éobiw, 539, 3. 

gacive shine (padvenv) 518 D, 19. 

gaivw show (dave, ednva, médayra, 
népyya, Tépac par, epavny, epavOny) 
518, 19; gde, rephoera, D 

pdpyvip, = ppdyvipu, 528, 16. 

od-cKw, = onpul, 5380, 8 

dia-pavonw, -pdcnw dawn 532 D, 4. 

gelSouct spare (pelroua, eperoduny) 
511, 11; wedidouny, -noouc, D 

péepre 538 D, 10. 

dép-w bear (olow, iveykoy or -Ka, év- 
ivoxa, eviveypmat, nvexOnv) 539, 6; 
AVELKA 

gevyw fice (Pevtoucs or -otpat, epvyor, 
mepevya) 511, 15; wepuCdres D. 

onul say (djow, Epynoa) 5385, 1; 481; 
eoadunv, ¢ac@a, etc., 481 D. 

Pld-veo anticipate ( Ohio open or dbdcw, 
épbaca, EpOnv) 521, 2. 

Plelpw corrupt (bbepa, &POerpa, EpOapxa, 
-ual, Epbopa, epOdpyv) 518, 20. 

Pbi-vw perish (dbbicw, pica, EpOipar) 
521, 5; ep@iunv, POivtOw, D. 

pre-e love (epirdunyv) 509 D, 16. 

Prorine-ouat am ambitious (épiroti- 
wnOny) 497 a. 

prd-w bruise, = OAd-w, 508, 5. 

préy-a, prcyebw blaze, 494. 

ppdy-vipi, ppdcaw enclose (eppata, ré- 
ppayya, eppaxOnv) 528, 16. 

deayw declare (ppdow, Eppaca, réeppara, 
weppacua, eppdoOnv) 514, 17; 
exeppadoy D 

ppicow bristle (Zppita, méppixa) 514, 10. 

dvyydvw, = pevyw, 511, 15. 

gurcocw guard (dvadkw, épvaata, mre- 
Pvraxa, ~yuat, epuadxOnv) 514, 11. 

piip-w mix (pipow aor., wépupya) 431 
De. 


LIST OF VERBS. 


pi-w produce wis epioa, epiv, we 
pura) 507, 4 


Xdlw make retire (éxacduny) 514, 18; 
KEéKad-OV, -Now, 

xalpw rejoice (xaiphow, kexdpnra, -pat, 
exdpnv) 518, 21; Kexapdéuny, ke 
xapnes, D. 

xard-w loosen (éxddaca, éxardcOnv) 
503, 6. 

xaviavw contain (xelacua, Exadov) 523 

xd-onw gape (xavodua, xavov, réxnva) 

? 

xélw caco (xecotma, %xeoa, Kéexoda, 
Kexeopa) 514, 19. 

xéw pour (xéw, tea, KéexvKa, KEXUMAL, 
exudnv) 512, 6; xele, Exeva, xVTO, 
D. 


xé-0 heap (xéow, exwoa, KéexXwxa, 
‘Kexwopan, exdsOnv) 505, 8. 

é-xpaicu-ov, éexpalounoa, 509 D, 17. 

xXpd-oua wse (xpiTar) 412. 

xpa-w give oracle (xpicw, 
expraOnv) 505, 38. 

xen oportet (xphoet) 535, 3; 486. 

Xpi-w anoint (xptow, ee Kéxpi(o)- 
pa, expia@ny) 5 ‘ 


xpilw, xpoitw, xpd- wie color (ké- 
Xpwopo, expHoOnv) 517, 6 


xuTo (xéw) 512 D, 6. 


EXpnge, 


Wd-w rub (WH) 412. 


Wix-w cool (ke, ee 
eWixeny, epuxny) 508, 


dporyuar, 


N0é-w push (bow, Ewoa, Ewopat, edoOnv) 
509, 8. 

avé-ouo buy (dvicouat, empiaunv, eavy 
po, ewynenv) 539, 





j 





GREEK INDEX. 


Notrt.—The references are made in all cases to the sections, not the pages, 


of the Grammar. 


The letters 7/7, placed after the number of a section, show 


that the same subject extends into the following sections. 

This index does not cover the Classified List of Verbs, sections 502-539. 
To find any of the verbs or verbal forms contained in that list, consult the 
foregoing Alphabetical List of Verbs. 


A, quant. 9; pronune. 11. 

a, €, 0, interch. 28. 448 a. 
451 a, 435 a, 455 a. 460 
a. 469. 471. 544 c. 545 
b. 548. 575 a, b. 

a, n, interch. 32. 3894. 451 
ert: 

ato e183 D. 190 D. 488 a. | 

ato e 33 D. 444 D. 

& to n 33. 188. 146. 412. 
421 b. 429. 481 a. 451 
b. 444 D. 

& for a 35. 

a& after e, 1, p, 30. 138. 
140, 146. 222 a. 431 a. 

a for 7 80 D(2). 188 Db. 
146 D. 363 D. 3876 Da. 
431 a, b. 442. 

a for 7 139 D. 451 De. 

& for w 409 D g. 

a- priv. 589; bef. F 589 
b; in adj. w. gen. 753 ¢. 

a-, d-, to n- (augm.) 356. 

-a- theme-vowel 415 a. 
444 D, 451 c. 489. 525. 
535. : 

-d-stems 134; in comp. 
575 a, b. 

-a- form, suff. 548. 

a- tense-suffix 372. 450. 
455 a. 490. 





-@ quant. 136. 138-9. 
146-7. 192. 208 c. 222 
aC. 

@ acc. sing. 133. 169. 
179 a; voc. sing. masce. | 


147; neut. pl. 123 (8). 
151 b. 183. 

- gen. sing. for ov 149. 

-a adv. 258. 

@ diphth. 13; pronune. 
14 ¢. 

aa, a2, for ac, an 409 D. 

aya9ds comp. 254, 1; adv. 
ev 258. 

&yaua pass. dep. 497 a,b; 
w. gen. 744. 

aryavaxtréw w. dat. 778; 
ayav. et 926; w. part. 
983. 

ayamrde w. dat. 778; aya- 
1a €6 926; w. part. 9838. 


| &yyéAAw pass. pers. 944 


a; w. part. 981. 


| &ye 67 1087, 4. 
|ayelpw accent 389 Da; 


syncope, 437 D; ayepée- 
Bovra 494, 


| ayhpws (-aos) 160. 
layKdAn 213 D. 


wyvoeéw w. gen. 733; w. 
part. 982. 


| ayvola 139 e; ayvola 776. 


&yviue 72D. 451 c, aug. 
359; redupl. 369; pf. 
intr. 501. 

ayvas 246. 

wyopa wt. art. 661; ayo- 
pidey 217 D. 

ayds 548 b. 

aypduevor (aryelow) 437 D. 

aypds wt. art. 661, 








Gypdérepos, &ypios, 248 D. 

ayxt, -ov, compar. 260 D. 

ayw aor. 486; w. gen. 
738 b; mid, 818; a&ywy 
with 968 b. 

aywviCoua mid. 817; ma- 
Anv 716 a. 

-ad- verb-themes 424. 

adeAdds voc. sing. 155 a. 

adtoee, adnkds, 363 D. 

adicéew fut. mid. 496 a; w. 
part. 985; pres. for 
pf. 827. 

adtvara for adévaror 635 ; 
advvatov ty 973. 

dw fut. mid. 495. 

&dapos xpnudtwy 753 c. 

ae to aa, etc. 409 Da; 
493 b. | 

-aet to -ag, etc. 409 D a, 

Get 35, 


detxns 40 b. (F) 589 b. 


| deipw 40 b, 494. 


aéexav 37 D f. 589 b. 

-afw vbs. 398. 514 ff. 446 
a;der.571,6; fut. 424. 

an, an, to aa, etc. 409 Da. 

andav, anSor, 200. 

anu: 414 D. 

anp 216 D. 22. 

*Addva, 30 D (2). 

’AOhvace 219 a; -nbev 218; 
-now 220, 

a0Aéw 856 a. 

aOpéw W. wh 887 c. 

GOpdos, -6d, 222 a, 


368 


“AOws 161; "AOdws 159 D. 

at 13; pronun. 14 a. 

-at elided 80 D; short for 
accent 102 a. 886; 2 
sing. for oa 383, 4. 
462 D. 

ai for ef 870 a. 

Aias 15 a. 

aidéoua: pass. dep. 497 a; 
w. ace, 712. 

"Aldns (“ASns) 73 D. 216 
D. 23: "Aidéo8e 219 D; 
év (eis) “Ardov 730 a. 

aidotos 545 a. 

*"Aidwved-s 216 D, 23. 

aidés 196. 

aiFet 72 D. 

aide for e%0e 870 b. 

aidhp 165. 215 a. 

Al9op 174. 213 D. 

aixkns 40 b. 589 b. 

-aiut for -aw 409 Dh. 

-aiva 1 decl. 1389 a. 

-aivw denom. 571. 7. 

-ato-s adj. 564 b. 

aipéw augm. aor. 359 a; 
pf. 868 D; w. two ace. 
726; w. gen. 745; mid. 
816; pass. 819 d. 

atow 40 b. 431 b. 

~ais, -aioi(v), dat. pl. 142. 
142 D (c). 

-ais in ace. pl. 143 D. 

-uoa for -doa 34 D. 242 D. 

aicddvoug W. acc. or gen. 
712 b. 742; w. part. 
982. 

aicxpdés compar. 253. 

aicxivouua w. acc. 712; 
w. dat. 778; w. part. 
or inf. 983, 986; xoxi- 
vouny without &y 897 b. 

-altepos, -alraros 250 a. 

aitéw w. two ace. 724. 

aitios W. gen. 753 e. 

aixunta 147 D. 

aiw 356 a. 7 

axakyta 147 D. 

arav0a 139 e. 

axaxuevos 53 D a. 368 D. 

aunxedara: (axéw) 464 
Da 


QKLS adv. 297. 


GREEK INDEX. 


axun 58 a. 

axo(u)h 44, 

axdrovsos w. gen. 754 d; 
w. dat. 772 b. 

dxodw 2d perf. 450 a. 368; 
fut. mid. 495; w. gen. 
742 and c; w. part. 
982; am called 820; 
pres. 827. 

&kparos compar, 251 b. 

axpodoua Ww. gen. 742 
and c. 

axpdmoAs 585 b; wt. art. 
661, : 

&kpos w. art. 671. 

axtis(-v-) 166. 

axwy 87 D f. 589 b; adj. 
for adv. 619 a; gen. 
abs. 972 b. 

&Aadkoy (arééw) 436 D. 

dAdouae 3868 D; accent 
3889 D b; pass. dep. 
497 a. 

ddkaracw 398 D. 

adyewds, GAylov, wAyiC- 
Tos 254. 8. 

&Aeupap, -aTos 182. 

aAdelow pf. 868. 451 d. 

aAextpuov 165. | D. 

adéée 2 aor. redupl. 436 

GAéouat, GAevoua, aor. 
430 D. 

aAndera 139. 545 a; dat. 
779 b. 

aAndetn 139 D. 

GAnens, &Anbes 232 a. 

dAis 72 D; w. gen. 753 c. 

aAlcxoun 72 D; augm. 
359; 2 aor. 489, 13; 
w. gen. 745; w. part. 
982. 

GAKH, GAKt, 218 D. 

aAKvoy 166. 

GAAd 1046, 2; GAA’ F 
1046, 2 ¢; od why (uer- 
Tot) GAAG 1035 ©; GAAG 
ydp, GAN ob yap 1050, 
4d; ov yap adad 1050, 
Af 


dAAdcow 346. 328. 452; 
w. gen. 746, 

GAAnAwY 268; 686 b. 

&AAoM 217. 





&AAouat aor. 481 b. 489 
D, 35. 

&Aros 267. 704; w. art. ~ 
653; appos. 705; w. 7 
gen. 753 g; posit. 704; 
&AAos &AAO 704 a; peé- 
yiotos (udvos) Tay &h- 
Awy 755 b; ef Tis GAAOS 
$05; @Aos H 1045, 1 
b; @AAo re (H) 1015 bs 
Ti AAO H, oVdeY GAA’ H 
612. 

&AAoge 219 b. 

dAAUw 84 D. 

&rAws, Thy GAdAws 622; 
&hAws Te Kat 1042 b, 

arddbev 217 D. 

GAs 85 b. 187 a. 

aAgo, aAto 489 D, 85. 

aAuKTacw redupl. 368 D. 

arwmanké 175. 

GAws 213. 

Gua 80 c. 258; w. dat.- 
772 c: w. part. 976, 

dpata (auata) 73 D. 

apakités 152 ¢. 

duaprayvw Ww. gen. 748; w. 
part. 985. | 

&uBporos 60 D. 

a&ué 261 Db. 

duectvwy (ayabds) 254, 1. 

duerew w. gen. 742. 

dues, -ewy, -lv, 261 D b. 

auntwp 589 a. 

GutAAdomat pass. 
497 a. 

dupes, -e(v), -e, 261 D. 17 
D b. 87 D. 


ae ee os Mi 7. 
en ¢ anh AP ee 


dep. 


dpyhuwy w. gen. 753 d. 

auves 216. 2. 

éuds, duds, 269 D. 

duos 283 D. 

aumeros fem. 152. 

dut-éxw, -laxw, 73 d. 

aumvoveny (mvew) 469 D. 

dpvuowy 81. 

duivew with dat. 767 a; 
mid. 818 a; -déw 
494, 

audi 110; w. case 791. 

dudievvvmt Ww. two acc, 
724; perf. 849. 


| a&udis 88 D. 


“Soa 


ye ~~ 


pemcnnere gen. 739 a; 
w. dat. 772. 
ce 296; -ov, 
appos. 626 b; w. 
673 a. 

dupotépwOev w. gen. 757. 

Gudw 295; w. art. 673 a. 

-ay- verb-themes, 571, 8. 

ay- priv. 589. 

-ay from -dwy gen. pl. 
141 De; from -dey 
410 b. 

dy for avd 84 D. 

ay 857 ff; w. cond. sent. 
889 ff; w. pot. opt. 
872. 900; w. hyp. ind. 
895; of customary ac- 
tion 835 and a; w. fut. 
ind. 845; w. subj. for 
fut. 868; w. final os, 
dmws, 882; w. subj. in 
rel. clauses, ‘ae 934 ; 

w. inf. 964. part. 
987 ; ay ited 872. e. 
894 b. 897 b. 898 b. 
914 a, b. 921 a. 

dy see éay. 

av for & ay 76 a. 

avd 110.120; w. case 792. 


-a, 
art. 


ava up 110. 120, 


ava voc. of avat 170 Db. 

avaBidcnrouc 817. 

Gvaykatos pers. 
944 a, 

avayrn w. inf. 952. 

dvausuyvnokew Ww. two obj. 
"24. 

gat 72 D. 170 D b. 

avaéios W. gen. 753 f. 

avSdvw 72 D; augm. 359. 

avdpamodoy 213 D. 

-ave-  tense-suflix, 
-ay?|e-, 

avev w. gen. 758. 

diyev8e( vy) 87 D.- 

avexoua 3861 a; w. part. 
983. 

ay-ewya, ay-ewxa 369. 

avfivode 368 D. 

avnp 188 b. 60; as appos. 
(avdpes Sra cal) 625 a; 
avhp TED: 

av? wy 999. 


constr. 


see 


GREEK INDEX. 


dvOpwros 126; as appos. 
(av@. yéns) 625 a. 

avinut 476 D. 

-avo- form. suff. 555, 

-ay0|e- tense-suff. 872. 
402 b, c. 522. 

avolyw aug. 859; red. 369. 

avouotws w. dat. 773. 

avop0dw 361 a. 

-ayT- stems in, 241. 

aytaw 409 D a. 

avre for édyte 1045, 2 

ayTéxoua w. gen. 738. 

ayrt 110; w. case 793; 
after compar. 648 5 tO? 
oy 999. 

avTiavetpa 246 D. 

avrTixpu(s), 88 D. 

ayTimoveoua W. gen. 739 a. 

ayvordés w. superl. 651 a. 

aviw as fut. 427 D; dyv- 
cas 968 a. 

ayw adv. compar. 260. 

aywya 492 D, 11. 458 D; 
redupl. 863 D. 

avéyvumos 31. 

atios w. gen. 753 ff; w 
inf. 952. 

ao, ew, interch. 36. 141 D 


b. 148 D, 2. 160. 409 
Dd: 

ao to ow, etc. 409 Da; 
to <o 409 D d. 


-ao for -ov gen. 148 D, 1. 

ao.dn 37 D f. 

dodider 409 D a. 

aop 166 Dk. 

aov to ow, etc. 409 Da; 
to eov 409 D d. 

am- for amo- 84 D. 

amayopevw Ww. part. 981. 

&mats 246; w. gen. 753 c. 

amayTdw fut. mid. 495; 
w. dat. 772. 

mat 288. 

Gras w. art. 672. 

amardw pass. W. gen. 
750 a. 

amdrwo 245. 

daravpaw aor. 489 D, 20. 

ametkéw, ameAnrny 412 
Pec. 


arikata, ato 464 D a. 


369 


amurtéw pass. 819 a. 
amAovs 228. 295 b. 
amé with case 794; com. 
par. 260; ad’ of 999 b. 
amroatvuua: 626 D, 5 
arodidpuokw w.acc. 712 ¢. 
amodidwur w. gen. 746; 
mid. 816, 2. 
amoepyabe (elryw) 494, 
amdepoa 431 D ce. 
amobvnckw am killed 820, 
amoAatw fut, mid. 495; w. 
gen. 740. 
*"ATroAAwy 185. 186. 
Gmrovocouat pass. 
497 a. 

&mropew Tt 716 b. 
amooTepém W. two ace. 
724; w. gen, 748 a. 

amovpas 489 D, 20. 

ancgatvw w. part. 981. 

amopetyw w. gen. 745, 

amrdxpn 486. 

anméeuer 84 D. 

ampemis W. dat. 765. 

&mrw mid. 816, 3; w. gen. 
788; anréov 992. 

amwtépw 260. 

-ap-Stems, 164a; ap-nom. 
from st. in -ar-, 182. 
ap for dpa 84 D. 1048, 1. 

aoa 1048, 1. 120. 

pa 1015. 1016. 120. 

apauds onde 

apatonKe (aipéw) 868 D. 

apapioxw red. 868 D; aor. 
436D; : doupma 451 De 

apyas, -ayra 288 D. 

*Apyetot 1 Dz 

dpelwy 254 D, 1. 

aphyw 28 a. 

apnuevos 363 D. 

aphy 216, 2. 


dep. 


“Aons 94 D. 216, 1. 


-apto- form. suff. 558, 2. 
dpiorepa wt. art. 661. 
apior ets 206 D. 

tovrros (aya8es) 254, 1. 
apy (apyéds, &pves,) 216, 2. 
&pvéouar pass. dep. 497 a 
apéw 409 D ec. 

&ipmak 246. 

-apT- stems in, 182. 


37t0 


apxatos 545 a, 

apxn; (Thy) apxiy 719 a. 

-apxos comp’ds, accent 
582 ¢. 

&pxw fut. mid. 496 a; w. 
gen. 741. 819 a; aor. 
841; &pyoum mid. 816, 
4; w. gen. 738; w. 
part. 981; % agotwua 
883; apxduevos 968 a. 

dpwyds 28 a. 544 ¢. 

-ao- stems in, 164 b. 
190 ff. 

-as nom, from st. in -ar- 
183. 

-ds nouns 
295 d. 
-as ace. pl. 133. 
-ds ace. pl. 1438. 
-dot dat. and 

and a. 

-cot 8 pl. 377. 385, 7. 
455 a, 

-a-oxoy iterat. 498 a, 

&oucvos 251 b. 489 D, 46. 

agmls coll. 609; ex’ (rap’) 
acmlda 651. 

jooa 277 b; aooa 280 D. 

aoooy compar. 260 D. 
250° D: 

acTnp 188 a. 

asTpamrre: subj. om. 602c. 

torvy 72D. 201-25. wt. 
art. 661. 

acuydSerov 1039. 

-ar- stems 164 a. 181 ff. 
571, 8. 

-aTat, -aTo, 8 pl. 876 Dd. 
415 De. 464 a. 

ardp 1047, 2. 

arapwés 64 D. 

Gre 1054, 5; w. part, 977. 

arepos 77 d. 

’"AtOis 52 a. 

-ato for -yto 3 pl., see 
-OT Ot. 

arparés 64 D. 152 ¢. 

arpéua(s) 88 D. 

arta 277 b; arta 280 b. 

av diphth, 13; pronune. 
14 a, 

eau-stems 206; 
401. 


of number 
169 a, b. 


208 e. 
loc, 220 


themes 


GREEK INDEX. 


ad 1047, 1, 

avis 73 D. 

avtTap 1047, 2. 

avre 1047, 1. 

avTn 16 a. 

avrTixa w. part. 976. 

avris 73 D. 

avrés 265 ;—Synt. 677 a. 
678 ff. 690. 691, 2; w. 
and wt. art. 679; po- 
sit. 680; for refl. 684 
a; for € adrdv 687 a; 
w. dat. of accomp. 774 
a; w. reflex. 644; av- 
vos 6 avnp and 6 avnp 
avtés 680 ff; ue ad- 
roy etc. 687 ; abtd ToU- 
To 626 b; avTa TavTa 
719 ¢;—6é avréds 265. 
679. 680; w. dat. 773 
a; TavTd TovTo 626 b. 

avrés 77 b. 265. 

avrod gen. 673 b; adv. 
760 a. 

avTov = éavTov 266. 

apaipéw w. obj. 
748 a, 

apdptepos (apap) 255 D. 


724, 


| apewdéw w. gen. 742, 





a&pevos 215 D b. 

apinu w. gen. 736. 

apixveoua pf. mid. 464 D. 

apn, apuhs 150. 

"Axaoi 1D. 

axapis compar, 252 De. 

axéw (axnxedara) 464 
Da. 


axOouc: pass. dep. 497 a; 
w. dat. 778; w. part. 
983. 

"AXIA(A )eds 47 D. 

&xvuyo accent 389 D b. 

a&xpus) 80 b. 88 D. 920 
fF, 1065, a: wy, pen. 
758. 

aw, ew, interch. 36, 141 
D. 409 D d. 444 D. 

aw to ow, etc., 409 D a. 

-aw vbs 571, 2; desid. 
etc. 573; contr. 323. 
409-12, 493 b; fut. 
424, 

&w 2 aor. 489 D, 19. 


-iwy gen, pl. 141 Da. 


B, 24 ff; bef. r-mute 51; 
bef. w 58; bef. o 54, 

8 for mw 60; in u(B)p 60 
D; to @ 452. 470. 
464 a, ) 

-Ba& for BHO: (Balyw) 442. 

BadiGw fut. mid. 495. 

Badvs 229 D. 258 D. 

Baivw 2 aor. 489, 1; 2 pf. 
490, 2; €Bngero 428 D 
b; Belw 444 D; intr. 
500, 2; perf. 849; w. 
cog. ace. 716 a rem. 

Baxxos 47. 91 a. 

BadrrAw 3876 D d. 448 c¢. 
466. 489 D, 21; aor. 
mid. 496 D. 440 D; 
BeBAjaro 464 Da; w. 


dat. 776; in comp. 
810 a. 
Bapdioros (Bpadds) 253 D. 
Bapus 98, 


Bdaoavos 152 a. 

BasitAcia 189 b. 545 a. 
552, 

BactAera 189 b. 545 a, 
557 b. 

Bactveos 564, 

BactAcvs 206; wt. art. 
660 c; BactAevTepos, 
-Tatos 255 D. 

Bacirketw w. gen. 741; 
aor, S41. 

BaotAikds 545 e@. 

BastAtooa 545 a. 

BéBaAnau 92 De. 

Beioua, Beoua  (Bidw) 
427 D. 


Bciw (Batyw) 444 D, 

BéAtepos, -Tatos 254 D, 1 

BeATiov, -ictos, 254, |. 

Bia, dat. 776; w. gen. 
729 crem.; mpds Biap 
805 c; Bing: 221 Da. 

BidCouce pass. 819 d, 

Biba ew fut. 424, 

BiBros 152 e. 

BiBpdonw 2 aor. 489 D, 
26+ pt. 492 D, 16. 

Bidw 2 aor. 489, 14; fut 
427 D. 





Sc eee ee 


Ba- redupl. 365 a. 
BAdmrw aor. pass. 472 a; 
w. cogn. ace. 725 c. 

Bacio 489 D, 21. 

BAérw fut. mid. 495; w. 
cog. acc. 716 b. 

BAnxewy 166. 

BAdéoxw 60 D. 

Bodw fut. mid. 495. 

Bo% 138 a. 

Béara 34 D. 

Bopéds 149. 

Bétpus 166. 201. 

Bovaedw w. cog. acc. 715 
a; mid. 814 a. 

Bovat 152 d, 

BovAoum aug. 355 b; 2 
sing. 3884; pass. dep. 
497 a; Bovrde with 
subjunc. 866, 3b; eual 
BovAopévw 771 a; Bov- 
Aoluny ay, éBovdAduny 


ay, 903; éBovdAduny 
without ay 897 b. 
Bovs 206. 


Bpadvs compar. 253 D. 
Bpaxvs compar. 253 D. 
Bpéras 190 D. 

Bpores 60 D. 

Bas 206 D. 

Bwridverpa 246 D. 


Tr, pronunc. 19; bef. +- 
mute 51; bef. ¢ 54; to 
x 51. 452. 464 a. 470; 
bef. « 68. 897-8; in- 
serted 402 c; dropped 
3828 b. 

y- nasal 20; from pv 55. 
448 b. 

-y-themes 397-8. 

vata 144 D. 

ydra 181. 

yardows 159 D. 

vyouew mid, 816, 5. 

yap 1050, 4; co-ord. 
1038 a; after art. 666 
c; after prep. 786 a; 
after rel. clauses 1009 
a; e& yap 871. 

yacTnp 166. 188. 

~yy- 463 b; stems 174; 
themes 398 b. 


GREEK INDEX. 


| yé 1087, 1. 80 a, 113d; 


after art. 666 c; after 
prep. 786 a; before 
iota paragogicum 274, 

yéyova 458 D, 

yeyes 490, 3. 

yelvoucs intr. 500, 8. 

yerarelw 573. 

yeAdw fut. mid. 495; éye- 
Aaroa 428 D a; aor. 
842. 

yeAws 176 D. 

yéuw w. gen. 743. 


371 
yuvh 216, 4; wt. art 
660 a. 
pea 152 a. 
A, to o 52. 53. 470; 
dropped 54. 56. 86. 


447 a; bef. 1 68. 898; 
bef. -ara, -aro, 464 D 
a; in o(d)p 60; added 
549; doubl. aft. augm. 
355 D a. 

-d- stems 164 d; 176 ff. 
549; themes 398. 


yévos isov, SimAdciov, Tut- | -8-, -18-, -dd-, -18d-, patro- 


ddcov 1068 b. 
yevto 489 D, 37. 
yepaids compar. 250. 
yepas 191. 190 D. 


nymic suff. 559. 
danp 185 D. 
Sahcoua (eddnv) 474 D. 
Sat 1037, 8: Sat 215 Db. 


yetw, yevoua w. gen. 742. | daifw 398 D, 
yn 144; om. 621 ¢; wt. | dalvius opt. 419 Db. 


art. 661. 
ynpdicKkw aor. 489, 2. 


daloua 401 D; Sedalarau 
464 Da. 


yt to oa 67. 397; to ¢| dalw 401 D. 


68. 398. 


Saxpiw 393 a: aor. 841. 


yiyvoua 2 pf. 490, 33) dauap 178. 


redupl. 393 b. 4038 b; 
copulative 596; impers. 
602°.d- om: 612s --w. 
gen. 750; w. dat. poss. 
768. 

yiyvockm 2 aor. 489, 
15; pf. 849; w. part. 
982. 

ya- redupl. 365 a. 

yAavKamis 179 D, 586. 

yAuKus 229, 248, 253 D. 

yAwxts 166. 

yv- redupl. 365 a. 

yudbos 152 b. 

yvaun 840 a; om. 621 ¢; 
gen.732d; dat. 779 b. 

-yov- stems in, 164 e. 

yévu 216, 3. 

yovy 1087, 2. 

youvara (yévu) 216 D, 3. 

ypavs 206. 

ypaphy om. 745 a. 

ypdow w. gen. 745; w. 
two acc. 725; mid. 
816, 6. 

venus, ypnus, 14 D d. 

yumyns 246. 


| yuuvds w. gen. 753 g, 


Sduynut, Sayelere 473 Da, 

Aavaol 1 D. 

davei(w mid. 816, 7. 

dgs 172 a. 

Saréouas aor. 480 D. 

-Se local 217; enclit. 
113 d. 

é¢ 1046, 1; 80a; after 
art. 666 c; after prep. 
786 a; Te.. 5€ 1040 
bs nal... 84 1042: 

déaro 430 D. 

dédorKa, Seda 490, 5 ; Fer8- 
865 D: SeBolew 455 D 
a; pi. 849 b; w. un 887. 

5e7, see Séw. 

Selxvius 852. 332.365 D; 
w. part. 981. 

defAn wt. art. 661. 

Serads 569, 6. 

detva 279. 

Sewds 569, 4; Sewov ef 
926. 

Selous (S€os) 190 D. 

Seumvéw, Sedeumvijkerw 458 





eee & 578 a. 586. 
Sexas 295 d. 


O¢2 


dexaxiao 288 D. 

déxoua 73 D. 

déAcap 182. 

SeAdis, -tv, 168 a. 

Séuas 215 Db. 

déy3poy 216 D, 24. 

Seéids 248 D3; Sette, Setidy 
wt. art. 6615; é« dekas 
788 c. 

Sefiteods 248 D, 

Séouat pass. dep. 497 a; 
w. gen. 743 and a. 

Séov om. of cop. w. 6lia. 

Séovres, Evds (or Svotv) 
elxoot etc. 292. 

déo0s 190 D. 

Sémas 190 D. 

dépn 138 a. 

dépxoua aor. 435 D; pass. 
dep. 497 a; w. cogn. 
ace. 716 a. 

Seouds 213 D. 214. 

Seomdrys 147 c; Seondres, 
acc. 147 D d. 





Sedpo w. gen. 757, 

Sevtaros 255 D. 

Sevrepos 288; w. gen. | 
755. 

déxara: (redupl.) 363 D. 

Sexijucpos 82. 

Séxouar 73 D; redupl. om. 
363 D; aor. 489 D, 38 ; 
We dat. Jol aotfe ee 
mid. 817; pass. 499. 

déw bind 411; fut. pf. 
850 a. 

dém want 409 De. 411; 
pass. dep. 497 a; w. 
gen. 743 ;—de? w. gen. 
743 b; w. dat. and 
gen. or acc. and gen. 





712) bs we dnt. 949; 
€der 834. 897 ; Sety 956; 
em. Gb cop wb lia; 
évos (Svotv) SéoyTes 292. 

8m 1037, 4; after art. 
666c; éxe 67 810; Kal 
5) Kal 1042 ¢. 

670ev 1037, 7. 

Snrovdri 1049, 1 a. 


GREEK INDEX. 


SnAdw 341, 825; w. part. 
Sl. 

Anunrnp 188 a. 

Snuoupyds 575 a, 

6nuooia T79 a. 

dnv 93 D. 

Ofjmote 285. 

dimou, Sjmovdev, 1037, 5. 

-dn-s, See -da-. 

Shira 1087, 6. 

Siw (edanv) 427 D. 

5: to € 68. 398. - 

dia 110; w. case 795. 

dia 222 Da. 

diaBaivw w. ace. 712 ¢. 

dicta 139 e. 

SiaiTaw augm. 362 b. 

Siadéyoua: redupl. 346; 
pass. dep. 497 a; w. 
dat. 772. 

Siadclrw w. part. 981; 
Siadimav 968 a. 
SitdekTos 3 e. 152 d. 

Siduetpos 152 d. 

Siavogouae pass. 
497 a. 

SuamemroAcunadpevov 466c. 

Siackomew WwW. gen. 733 a. 

SiareAew W. part. 981. 

Siadéow prep. 795 end; 
w. gen. 748; mid. w. 
dat. 772. 

Sidpopos w. gen. 753 g; 
with dat. 772 b; w. # 
1045, 1 b. 

Siyaupa 7. 

diddonw fut. mid. 496 a; 
w. two acc, 724; w. 
gen. 746; mid. 815. 
816 a; vbl. w. gen. 
750 a. 

diSpacnw aor. 489, 8. 

Sidwut 850. 330. 334, 415 
D a, b; imperf. 419 a; 
aor. 432. 443; w. gen. 
736; in comp. 810a; 
pres. 825. 

di-ci-Aeyuar 366. 

diéxw w. gen. 748. 

di¢nua 414 D. 


dep. 





SjAos w. part. 981; S7Aa! Sinrdorce 288 D. 
54 1037, 4; dHAov Ors | Sixa¢w mid. 816, 8. 
1049, 1 a. 


| Stavos pers, constr, 944 a. | Svat 290 b. 


ae 
alt 
ee 
am 7 


a 

Sinn om. 621 c; Steyy w. 
gen. 719 a. 

Siéds 259 D b. 

Avoviowa 215 a, 

Stos, Sta, 222 D a. 

5.671 925, 1049, 2. 1050, 3. 

dimAdazos 295 b. 

SimAfjotos 295 D b. 

dimAous 295 b. 

dfs 288. 

diaads 295 b. 

Sipboyyo: 18. 

dixa 295 ¢. 

dixh 295 c. 

dix6d 295 D c. 

duldw 412; w. gen. 742. 

dimndbw 494. 

didkw W. cogn. ace. 715 b; 
w. gen. 733, 748. 

duds 172 a. 

de1@, Sool, ete., 290 D, 2. 

doxéw themes 405; with 
dat. 764,2; w. inf, 949 ; 
pers.constr. 944 a; éuol 
Soxety 956; SdéavTa 
(ddéav) Tatra 974 a. : 

Soxds 152 e, 

dduovSe 219 D. 

-dov- stems in, 164 e. 

dept-Anmros 575 c. 

ddpu 216, 5; em) ddpuv 661. 

SovrAeta, SovAdw 572. 

SovdActw w. cog. ace. 715 a. 

Sovpara (Sépv) 216 D, 5. 

dpdoeiw 578. 

Spécos 152 e. 

Spuuds 214 D. 

duas 295 d. 

duvety 290 b. 

Stvayat 415 De. 416. 417 
a; 418 b. 487; aug. 
355 b; pass. dep. 497 
a; w. superl. 651 a. 

duvayus dat. 780. 

dUo 288, 290; Suvoiy Care- 
pov 626 b. 

Suvoxaldera 288 D. 

duo- 590; augm. aft., 
362 ¢. 

dvcajnwy 33 D. 

ducaperTéw 362 C, 

dvcepws 103 a, 














Se en 


Suopevhs w. dat. 765. 

Avo-rapis 590. 

ducTuxéw 362 ¢. 

dvw 393.a; 2 aor. 835.489 
D, 17. 444-5; édvcero 
428 Db; trans. 500, 4. 

dw, -@v, -otor, 290 D, 2. 

Suddexa, Suwdéxaros, 288 


$6 for SGua 215 D b. 
S@poy w. dat. 765 a. 


E, vow. 9 ff; name of, 
S> pranune.. 11; in- 
terch. w. a, 0, See a; W. 
4, 31. 

« toa 435 a. 448 a. 460 a. 

eto7 84a. 168. 206 D. 
356. 

e to et 34, 859, 444 D. 

e too 190, 451. 544 ¢. 

e contr. by syniz. 42 D; 
dropped 188. 409 D b, 
e. 487.493 b. 

e- augm. 354-5; redupl. 
365. 369. 

-e voc. sg. 154 ¢, 

-e dual 133. 

-e- theme-vowel 489. 526. 

-e- added to theme 405. 
509 ff. 

-e- tense-suff. see -9|¢-; 
aor. pass. 468; for e 
458. 464 Da. 

€ pron. 261. | 

-ea- tense-suff. 372 D. 
458 D. 

-ea for -era 229 D; for -vy 
229 D; fr. stems in -eo- 
192; -ca& fr. st. in -ev- 
208; -ea- in plup. 458 
D. 372 D. | 

-ea, for -ny acc. sing. 147 | 
Dd. 

éarya (ayvipr) 369. 

eadoy (avddvw) 359 D. 

eat to ec 40 c. 383, 4. 

edAgy (etAw) 359 D. 

édy 860. 1052, 2; in con- 
dit. sent. 889 ff; after 
oxoTréw, cte. 1016 c. | 

édyrep 1037, 8; édyte 
1045, 2. | 


17 














GREEK INDEX. 


gap 72 D. 172 b; wt. art. 
661. 

éaot 885 D, 7. 415 D a. 

earat 483 D. 
EavTov 266; 683. 692, 3; 
w. BéeAtiotos 644 a. 
édw augm. 3859; ovK e@ 
1028. 

EBScouds 295 d; EBSduaros 
288 D. 

eyyts compar. 260. 

éyelpw red. 368; accent 
389 Da; 2 aor.437 D; 
intr. 501. 

éycata 215 D a. 

eyKparys gen. 753 b. 

eyp-nyopa 368. 

eyxeAus 204 a. 

eyo 261.78. 603 a; Eywye 
1037, 1; éué w. inf. 
684 b. 

eyaua 77, 

éeya(v) 87 D. 261 D. 

éddyy fut. of, 474. 427 D. 

€-ddeive 355 D a. 

edvoy 72 D. 

edount (écbiw) 427. 

-ee to -7 192. 202. 


ée€ 261 D. 
-é-e-o1 tO -ezae or -€ar 409 
D b. 


éelxoot 72 D a. 288 D. 

éerxootds 288 D. 

-eery for -ery 435 D b. 

-c-e-0 to -efo or -€o 409 
De. 

éépyw 72 D a; redupl. 363 
D ; -adey 494, 

éepuevos (e%pw) 369 D, 

ecprn 72 D a. 

ejos 258 D. 

ejvdavov 359 D. 

ens for hs 275 D. 

e0éAnoOa 377 D. 

ebey 261 D. 

e0i(w aug. 859; red. 369. 

é6vos 72 D. 

es 13; pronunc. 14 a; 
spurious 14 b; for e 
33 D. see e; interch. 
w. « 32. 394. 447 b. 
451 b 511; yw. ot 29. 
451 b. 544 ¢ 548. 


3785 


et- unch. by augm. 357 a, 

et- result of augm. 359. 

e- redupl. 3866. 358. cf. 
369, 

-e. 3 sing. act. 407 b; 2 
sing. mid. 40 c. 384. 
-et- plup. 453; pf. 455 

Da. 

eb 1062, bs ThE eae 
cond. sent. 889 ff ;=7/ 
perchance 907; indir. 
quest. 930. 1016. 1017; 
in causal sent. 926; 
in wish (ei, ee, ei yap) 
870 a. 871 anda; ef dé 
uh 904 a. 906; ef dd 
906 bs ef pn, ef phy Oia 
905 a; eiov 1021 ¢. 1022 
a; ei (€av) kal 1053, 1, 2 
a; kal ei (édv) 1053, 2; 
el dpa, et w1) Gpa 1048, 1; 
et for éay 894 b. 898 b. 

ef (eiut) 479. 

-ea fem. 552; ea 139 b, 
c. 229. 246 D. 247 D. 
iT D. 

ciapivds 83 D. 

-elas, -ere, -ecay for -aus, 
-at, -arvey 434, 

etarat, -ato, 483 D; elaro 
526 D, 1. 

eidap 182. 

eidos in comp. 586 a; ace. 
718 b. 

eldas 491. 

-ery for -era 139 D. 

ee 118 a. 870 a. 871 and 
a. 904. 

e16ika 369. 

eixan, ete. 494, 

eixas 295 d. 

eixate 288 D. 

etxeAos 72 D. 

etxoot 288. 72 D. 

eixw 72 D. 494; w. dat. 
764, 2. 

eixaov 166, 200. 

eixds 492, 7; eixds jv 834, 

etAjAovéa 29 D. 33 D. 

et-Angda 366. 

et-Anxa 366. 

eiAoyv augm. 859 a. 

et-Aoxa (Aeyw gather) 366. 


O74. 


eiAw 72 D. 899 Da; aug. 
359 D; aor. 431 De. 

eiva 72 D. 

eiuar (Evvipn) red. 363 D. 

el-uapTa redup. 366. 

eiul 478; 1138 ¢. 885 D, 7; 
copula 596; om. 611 a. 
988; w. dat. poss. 768; 
w. part. 981; 457. 
465. 467 a3 €orw of 
(ofrives, OTe, ov, etc.) 
998 ;—1d voy eival, KaTa 
TOUTOV Eival, EKwY ElYaL 
956 a;—ay circumst. 
968; case abs. 972 b; 
om. 984 a; Toe dvTt 
FEI IN 

ejuc 477. 881 D. 385 D, 
m2. om. 612% as ‘fut. 
828 a. 

-ev infin. 381. 

eiv for év 797. 

eivadxis 288 D ; -xtAzor ib. 

eivaxdowo 288 D. 

elvaros 288 D. 

etverxa, -Kev, 34 D. 

eivt for ev 797. 

elo 261 D. 

-eto-y neut. 561, 1 b. 

eios for ews 283 D. 

-elo-s adj. 566 a. 

eimra, 438. 

elrep 1037, 3. 

elroy 72 D; redupl. 436 
a. cf. 488; w. 671, ws 
946 b; ws (€mos) eimety 
956. 

elpyw fut. mid. 496 a; w. 








gen. 748; W€dpyadev 
494, 

ez-pynka 366. 

eipoua accent 389 D a. 

eipuca (€pvw) 359 D. 

eiow 72 D ; redupl. 369 D. 

ers 2 sing. act. 407 b. 

<1s, -eooa, -ev, adj. 237 ff. 
567. 

eers accus. plu, 231 a. 

eis 111 b; w. case 796.. 
788. 

eis 288. 290; eis (avnp) 
w. superl. 652 b. 

eis (eiut) 113 D. 478 D. 





GREEK INDEX. 


eioa (4(w) augm. 359 a, 

eioduny 477 D. 

eicBAaAAw intrans. 810 a. 

éton 12 Da. 

eiadxe 920. 

elompaTTw Ww. two ace. 
724, 

eioTnKkn augm, 358 a. 
359 a. 

elow w. gen. 757. 

eita 80 c; w. part. 976 b. 

cire 1045, 2. 1017, 118. 

eirov (tnus) augm. 359 a. 

-elw vbs. 409 D b. 

et-w0a 369. 451 e; 849 b. 

efws 283 D. 

ex 798; 61 b. 85 b. 88. 
93a. 111 \b. 

Exds 260 D. 

Exarrans 297, 

exaortos 72 D. 296; col- 
lect. 609 a; w. art. 673 
a; supplied from ovdels 
1058; €xaords Tis 708. 

Exdtepos 296; w. art. 
673 a. 

éxatépw0ey w. gen. 757. 
788 ©. 

Exatovras 295 d. 

éxBatve w. ace. 712 e. 

exdow 500, 4 a; w. two 
acc. 724. 

exet, exeidev, 283 a. 

éxetvos 271. 695; w. art. 
673; wt. art. 674; 
éxelyn 779 a; exewoot 
274; Tour éketvo etc. 
697 c. 

exetae 2838 a, 

exexAdunv (xéAouat) 436 
D. 


éxexetpla 73 d. 

exnBodos 72 D. 

éxnte 72 D. 

éxov (ueT-extadov) 494. 

éxkAnota dat. 782 a. 

exkAnoiaw aug. 362 a. 

exminmte am cast out 820. 

éxTAnoow, 2 aor. pass. 
471 a. 


| éxetTnuat 365 D b. 
| éerds w. gen. 757. 


éxupds 72 D. 


éxév 72 D; adj. for adv. 
619a; w.gen.abs. 972 — 
b; €xay eivar 956 a. 

eAdoowy, éhatTwy 254, 4; 
wt. 7 647; wep) edrdr- } 
Tovos 746 a. 7 

éAatyw redupl. 368; fut. 
424; plup. 464 Da; 
sense 810. 

erddxera 246 D. 

eAdxioros 254, 4. [D. 

eEACYXITTOS, EAEyXEES, 253 

eAeyxw 3828. 368. 468 b. 

eAevdepos w. gen. 753 g. 

eAevbepdw w. gen. 748. 

*EAevotvade. 

eAnacdato (e€Aatyw) 464 
D a. , 

éxré 72 D. 

éAloow augm. 359, 

eAk@ augm. 359, 

é-AAaBe 47 D. 

‘EAAds 1. 

eAAclirw w. part. 981. 

“EAAnves 1. 4 g. 624 a, 

EAAnVICw 4 Ff. i 

‘EAAnuiotnhs 4 f. | 

eApus 58. 85 b. 

Eat, -ouo 72 D; redupl. 
369 D. 

éhoa (eiAw) 431 De. 

ehwp 166 D k. j 

euavTov 266; 683. 692, 3; 
éue avrdy ete. 687. 

é€uBddrdAw intr. 810 a. 

eucbev, eueto, euéo, cued, 





Re ease 


euewuTov 266 D. 

éuly for éuot 261 D b. 

é-upabe 355 D a. 

Eu(mev, Eu(u)evar, 478 D. 

é-upope 865 D. 

éuds 269; 689 ff. 

éuminmanut 534, 7 a; we ; 
gen. 743. ? : 

éumrorew W. dat. 775. 5 | 

gumpoobev w. gen. 757. j 

-e(v) 3 sing. 87. 4 

-ev 8 pl. aor. pass. 473 Dy — 
infin. 881. 383, 5. mp 

év 59. 111 b; with case 
797; in comp. 775; we 
dat. time 782 a; adv — . 


§ 


785; éy rots w. superl. 
652 a. 

-évat inf. 448 ¢. 

€vayTidouat pass. 
497 a; aug. 362 a. 

évaytlos w. gen. 754 £3 w. 
dat. 765; w. # 1045, 1 
b; 7d évaytioy 626 b; 
e& évaytlas 622. 

evapi(w 398 D. 

evdidwus intrans. 810 a. 

évduw 500, 4a; w. two 
acc. 724. 

évera, -kev, 758. 

evéviroy {evintw) 436 D. 

evepfe(v) 87 D. 

evjvobe 368 D. 

€v0a 283. 284. 1056, 5; 
997 a; as rel. 284. 

ev0ade 283. 

evOaira 74 D. 

ZyOev 283. 284: 1056, 5; 
w. gen. 757; as rel. 
284; eyOev nad evOev 
788 ©. 

évOevde 2838. 

evdevrev 74D. 

évOiuceouc pass. dep. 497 
a; Ww. gen. or acc. 712 


dep. 


evi for év 797. 
év for éveor: 109 b; 785 
a. 

virtes aor. 436 D. 

yveads 295 d. 

évyvedxiAa 288 D. 

é-vveov 355 D a. 

éevyjKxovta 288 D. 

évvocouat pass. dep. 497 a. 

evviom 72 D; pf. 363 D. 

évoxAéew aug. 861a; case 
712d. 

évoxos w. gen. 753 e. 

-eyT- adj. suff. 567. 237. 
241. 

évTavda, -ev0ey 283. 74 D. 

évrt 478 D. 

evtés w. gen. 757. 

évrpémoua w. gen. 742. 

evudpis 18 a. 

éf 61 b. 72 D. 111 b. 798: 
e& ay because 999: see 
ex. 


wv HM Mu 


GREEK INDEX. 


ttapvos w. ace. 713. 

etdpyw w. ace. 713. 

étds 295 d. 

étehéyxw w. part. 981. 

efépxouat W. Cog. acc. 
715 b. 

éfeor. impers. 602 d rem. 
949; éfdy 973. 

ébixvéouae w. gen. 739. 

efw compar. 260; w. gen. 
757. 

eo for ao 409 Dd; to ev 
190 D. 383 D, 4. 409 
D b, d, e. 

eo 72 D. 261 D. 685 a. 

éot 261 D. 

gona 492, 7; 72D; augm. 
358 a; red. 369; w. dat. 
773; pf. 849 b; pers. 
const. 944 a; w. part. 
Opie 

goAma (€Amw) 369 Ds 

copya (épiw) 369 D. 

Eoptatw 359 b. 

-co-s adj. 566. 223 ff. 

éds 269 D; see Gs. 

eov to ev 409 D b, e. 

érayv 860. 918. 1055, 5. 

eraccuTepos 255 D. 

éracow w. dda 716 rem. 

eredy 860, 

émel 78, 925. 1055, 5; w. 
evGéws, TaXLoTA 1008. 

emeidy, emerdav, 860. 913. 
1055, 6. 

emerta w. part. 976 b. 

érevjvobe 868 D, 

emnioos W. gen. 753 d. 

éxhy 860. 913. 1055, 5. 

ext 799; in comp. 712 b. 
175: adv. 785; é@’ 
etre 999 a. 

emt for émeort 785 a. 

émBalyw w. gen. 751. 

émiBovAevw pass. 819 a. 

émideikvome mid. 812. 

émdtdwur intrans. 810 a. 

emGvuew w. gen. 742. 

émixdpotos wW. gen. 754 f. 

émixeruar W. dat. 775. 

emiAauBavoun w.gen. 738, 

emiAavOdvouat W. gen, 742; 
w. part. 982. 


375 


émtAefrw w. part. 981. 

emmmeAns W. gen. 753 d. 

€miuéAoua pass. dep. 497 
a; w. gen. 7425 w. 
dmws 885, 

éxlaraua 416. 417 a.418 
b. 489; pass. dep. 497 
&; Ww. part. 982, 

éemeotatnow 220 a. 

émioThuwy Ww. acc. 713; 
w. gen. 754 a, 

émirTparevw w.case 712 b. 

érioxes 391 a. 

emiTnoetos pers. 
944 a, 

émitiudw Ww. dat. 764, 2b. 

entrpitos 293. 

émixapis compar. 252 ¢. 

érAdunv (wéAouar) 437 D. 

emowar augm. 359; 2 aor, 
437; w. dat. 772. 

éxos 72 D; rn 1064; os 
emos eimety 956. 

-ep- syncop. stems in, 188. 

Zoae 219 D. 

epdw w. gen. 742. 819 a; 
inc. aor. 841. 

epya(oua aug. 359. 

épyov 72 D; dat. 779 b. 

epyw (efpyw) redupl. 363 
D; form. w. -6- 494. 

Zpdw redupl. 369 D. 

épelSw, epnpddaro 464 Da. 

epel7w, epépit@To 368 D. 

épeuvds 53 b. 

epete 49 D. 

épépimro (épelrw) 368 D. 

épnpédaTo ( épetdw)464 D a. 

epitw w. dat. 772. 

epinpos, -es, 247 D. 

Zpis 176. 179 D. 

‘Epuetas 148 D, 3. 

‘Eps 145. 

Epowa accent 389 D a. 

épos 176 D. 

epmw, épTuw, augm. 3859 

éppw 72 D. 

Essa 451 e. 

ésSwuevos 251 b. 

-cpoa, amd-cpca 431 De, 

épon 139 exc. 

épuxw redupl. 436 D. 

epvodpuates 579 b. 


constr. 


B76 


éopvw 72 D. 359 D; as} 
fut. 427 D. 

tpxatot, pxato, eépxaro 
(€pyw) redupl. 363 D. 

Zpxouar accent 3887 b; 
augm. and red. 358 b; 
2 pf. 489 D, 13. 

Epws 176 D. 

épwrdw w. two acc. 724. 

-eo- suff. 553, 2; 164 b. 
190 ff; adj. 230. 562, 2. 
578 ; accent 582. 

-es nom. pl. 133. 

és 796. 111 b; see eis. 

eoO7s 72 D. 166; coll. 609. 

écbiw fut. (€Souat) 427. 

-eot dat. pl. 171 D b. 

eomepa wt. art. 661. 

exmepos 72 D. 214 D. 

-ecoa fem, adj. 237. 

€ooa, Eora red. 363 D. 

-eoou(y) dat. pl. 133. 171 
D b. 188 D. 190 D. 

égoi 1138 D. 

ésouna 365 D. 

ecowy 254 D, 2. 

eora: (Evyixu) red. 863 D. 

éore 920 ff. 1055, 7. 

-€orepos, -€oTaTos, 251. 

gory 440.43 €ornKadsd58 a. 

éotiy of 998. 

éoTidw augm. 359. 

eoTas 244. 

exxapdgi 221 Da. 

toxaros 255 as w. art. 
ef A 

éxxeboy, oxebdew (exw) 
494, 





€ow compar. 260; cf. 
elow. 

ereOnmea, -eas, 458 D. 

erereleTo 409 D b. 

etepos 282; crasis 77 ds 
appos. 705; w. gen. 
758. 643 b; w. # 1045, 
iBp ie 

érns 72 D. 

eric 150. 215 a, 

ére 80 c. 88 b. 

éros 72 D; gen. 759; dat. | 
782. 

ev 13; pronune. 14 a; in- 
terch. w. ov 29. 409 D 





GREEK INDEX. 


f. 548 a; w. vu 82. 394, 
447 b. 464 D a. 511. 
ev from eo, eou See €0, cou. 
ev to € 206 D, 394 a, 512 
b. 

ev unch. in augm. 357 a. 

-ev-stems 164 g. 206. 
559 b. 

-ev- form. suff. 557, 1. 
580, 1. 571, 4. 

ev 258 ; augm. aft., 362 c; 
w. motety 712; é6 258 D. 

ev 261 D. 685 b. 690 a. 

evdamovl(w w. gen. 744, 

evdaiuwy 235, 251 a. 

evdtos 250 a, 

eveAmis 245. 

evepyeTéw aug. 362 ¢. 

evév 88 D; w. gen. 757, 

evdus 88 D; w. part. 976 ; 
Thy evOetay 719 a. 

evKAcla 139 e. 

evAaBéoua pass. dep. 497 
&; W. Omws 885. 

éivyyntos 47 D. 

evvola 139 e. 

evvous compar. 251 c. 

evrarépera 246 D. 


| evmopéw w. gen. 743. 


edoloxa aug. 357; accent 
387 b; w. part. 982, 

evpocs 49. 

evpos acc. 718 b. 

evpvora 147 D, 

evpvs 229. 

-ev-s masc. 206 ff. 557, 1. 
560, 1. 571, 4. 

-evs gen. sg. 190 D. 206 D. 

és 258 D. 

edre 1054, 7. 1055, 2. 

evdpatyw aor. pass. 498. 

evpurs 231 b. 

evxapis 245. 

-ev» denom. verbs 552. 
571, 4. 

evdvupoy wt. art. 661. 

evwxéeoun w. gen. 740. 

ep ere 999 a. 

Zhavva (paivw) 431 D d. 

edeanvatixdy (v) 87 b. 

épéAcw mid, 813. 

epetiis w. dat. 772 c. 

EpPOnuepos 82. 


epteua w. gen. 789. 

edixvéowa W. gen. 739. 

€xPdvoua accent 389 D a 

éxGouas, accent 389 D a. 

€xOeds compar. 258. 

exes 166. 

éxw 73 e; augm. 559; 
2 aor. 437. 489, 12; 
éaxeOov, sxebcivy 494; 
fut. mid. 496 a; w. 
acc. specif. 71S “ae 
w. gen. 746; mid. w. 
gen. 7388; impers. 602 
d; intrans. 810; mid- 
dle 816, 9; aor. 841; 
w. part. 981 a;—éxwy 
with 968 b; dAvdpeis 
éxwov 968 a; ovTws 
exovTos 973 a. 

ew interch, w. ao, aw, see 
a0, Oe, 

ew in Att, 2 decl. 159 ff, 

ew for not (36). 465 D. 

-ew gen. sing. 148 D, 2. 

-ew verbs 824. 328. 409- 
12; fut. for -cw 422; 
der. 571, 3. 

éwla 369 D. 

edn (€oxa) 358 a. 

€wAmea (€Amw) 869 D. 

-éwy g. pl. 1 dee. 141 Da. 

é€wvoxdet 359 D. 

Ewpaa (dpdw) 369. 

ewpryea (Epdw) 869 D. 

-cws gen. sing. 203. 208 b. 

éws noun 73 D. 161. 196 
D; wt. art. 661. 

€ws conj. 1055, 7. 283 D. 
920 ff, 

éewvtov 14 D d. 266 D. 


F, 7; pronunc. 23 a; re- 
tained 72 D; influ- 
ence 75 Da. 92D c. 98 
D. 197 ff. 359 a. 369, 
436 a. 575 a. 589 b. 

¢’ (numeral) 289. 

F-stems 197 ff. 

Fadus 72. 

Féros 72 D. 

Ftdtos 72 D. 

Fiorta 72 Db. 

Fotvos 72. 





Fés 72. 
Fparpa 72 D vb. 


Z, pronunc. 21 a; from 
ga 695 0 for, 63D; 
from 81, yi, 68; in pres. 

W. cog. acc. 

-Ce local 219 a. 63. 

Zevs 216, 6; om. 602 c. 

<nrdw with gen. 744. 

Znyvds, etc. 216 D, 6. 

-(w verbs in 398 (D). 514 
ff; fut. 424-5; Aeol. 
-c5w 63 D 

(és 227 D. 


H, pronune. 11; interch. 
w. a 32. 394. 5115 w. 
w 28a. 544 ©. 

7 for a 30. 32. 33. 138. 
146. 409 Dg. 412. 431 
a, b. 575 b. 

n from e, see e«. 

7 13; pronune. 14 c; for 
a 409 D g. 

n- syll. aug. 355 b. 

-n- tense- suff, ., pass. 372. 
468; plup. 453. 458. 

-n- mode-suff., see -9)y-. 

-n voc. sing. masc. 147 b. 
in dual 192. 202; acc. 
sing. 231 b. 

2 sing. 40 c. 3883, 4. 
384; 3 sing. 407 b. 

# or 1045, 1. 78. 120. 608: 
interrog, 930; ;. £017. 
1016 a. 

9% than 1045, 1; w. com- 
par. 643. 645; 4 Kara 
646; 7 (7) @s, 7) Gore) 
w. inf. 954; om. 647. 

H truly 1037, 9. 120. 

# interrog. 101 5. 1017 b. 
78. 120. 

y said, 275 b. 485. 655 a. 

# 283. 779 a. 1056, 4. 
1054, 6; w. superl. 651. 

7Baw 409 D a. 

qycouae w. gen. 741. 

ayepebovTat (ayelpw) 494. 

nde 1040. 


GREEK INDEX. 


Hoe(v) 87 a. 
%én 1037, 4b. 
jooum pass. dep. 497 a; 


w. dat. 778; w. part. 
983 ; _8ouévm cor 771 a. 
dos 215 D b. 


qoverea 247 D. 

Adds 72 D. 229. 253. 

pe 1016 a. LOT by 
1017 b. 

net to n 39. 

nev) 87 a. 

neAvos 73 D. 

nepeOovTat (aelpw) 494. 

népos 216 D, 22. 

nea 72 D. 

jiwy 166. 

ca, (ine) 432. 

neiota 254, 2. 

jkw om, 612; 
827. 

nar€é or Hace 215 D b. 

nAikta w. inf. 952. 

nAltkos 997. 276. 282. 

jaAvos 73 D. 

hua 483; w. acc. 712 b. 

jiuap 182. 

Tuas, Tuas, 264. 

nuces, juctwy etc. 261 D. 

Aude 104 a 

nuepa w. eyevero 602 d; 
om. 621 ¢; wt. art. 661; 
gen, 759; dat. 782. 

nueTepdvde 219 D. 

nueTepos 269. 689 ff. 

-yut for -ew 409 D h. 

Huw, hlv, 264. 

Hpidatos 2938. 

jrous 293; w. art. 671; 
w. gen. 730 e. 

quitddavtov 293. 

jos 283 D. 1055, 4. 

jypwy 264, 

hv see édy. 

jvoavoy 359 D. 

nvina 283. 1055, 3. 

jvioxos 218 D. 

nvinamoy (évirTw) 436 D. 

nvopen 33 D. 

qvmep 1087, 
1045, 2. 

“NOS, -NA, ~7GS, 208 b, c. 

nmap 181. 182. 


as pf. 


3; hve 


ott 


hmetpos 152. 

jpa 215 D b. 

‘Hpaxdéns 194 D. 

iipapov 436 D. 

hpuyevere, 247 oe 

fipos (Eapos) 172 

npuKaKoy (epuxw) ne D. 

jpws 197-8. 

-ns 2 sing. 407 b. 

-js nom. pl. 208 a. 

-ns adj., see -eo-; 
par. 252 a, b. 

-ns, -noi(v), dat. pl. 142 
(D) 


com- 


-no°l|e- tense-suff. 372. 
474. 

ioowy, iTTwv 254, 2; ox 
jnoocov 1028. 

jovxos 225. 250 a. 

-nt-stems, 164 i. 

Hrot 1045, 1. 118. 

HToi 1037, 10. 
jtop 166 Dk. 
ef. ‘716 a. 
NTT&éw pass. w. gen. 749; 

w. part. 985. 
mv diphth. 13. 14 d. 
nus 258 D. 
nite 1054, 7. 
Axe 283 D. 1056, 4. 
nos 73 D. 159 D. 196 D. 


215 Db. 


©, pronune. 21; to¢ 
52-3. 470. ef. 443 b: 
bef. 167. 397; doubled 
47; added 543 c¢:; 
dropped 54. 56, 447 a. 

-§-stems 164 d. 176 ff; 
themes 597; forma- 
tion in, 494, 

Odracoa wt. art. 661. 

OdrAc1a 246 D. 

OdAAw (TeOadvia) 451 De. 

Oauées, Oamerat, 247 D. 

Odvatos gen. 745 b. 

Oartw 74 ©. 

Oasséewm w. acc. 712; 
pay boldly 968 a. 

Od.550s 50. 

Gapoos 50. 64. 190 D. 

Giccw w. ace. 712 b. 


bap- 


| Pigowy (Taxds) 74 b. 253 


378 


Oarepov 77 d. 82; duo 
Oarepov 626 b. 

Oavua 14 Dd; w. inf. 952. 

Oavyacw fut. mid. 495; w. 
gen. 733. 744; Cavmalw 
et 926. 

Oauvpacros doos, Pavpac- 
ras &s, 1008 b. 

-fe- tense-suffix 372. 468. 

dea 188 Dee. 

Oetos 248 D. 

Oguis 216, 7. 

-Oev, -0e, local 217; Bev 
gen, 217 D. 

@eds 42, 126. 155; om. 
602 c; wt. art. 660 b; 
Gedo: 221 Db. 

Oépeios 564. 

bépw: Oéprouae 422 Db. 

@couodopiots 782. 

Gewrepos 248 D. 

-Oy- tense-suffix 468. 

O/BaCe 219 a. cf. 63. 

OjAus aS fem. 229 a. 248 
D 


OnAvTepos 248 D. 

6nv 113 D. 

Onpdw 338. 

-Onc°|<- tense-sufi. 372. 
474, 

& to oo 67. 397. 

-0: local 217. 

-G: imper. 380, 385, 2. 73 
b. cf. 443 b; om, 383, 
2. 415 b. 

Oryyave w. gen. 738. 

OvnoKw perf, 454, 490, 4, 
455 b; imper. 456; 
fut. perf. 467; w. acc. 
7138. 

-§0|-- tense-suffix, 494. 

Coiuartoy 77. 

Govpis, Ootipes, 247 D. 

Opacus 64. See Odpcos. 

Opgoce 67. 

Opétoum (tTpéxw) 74 oc. 

Spéyw (rpépe) T4 ©. 

Opivus 166. 

Opté 74 a. 174. 

Opimrw 74 c. 

Buyarnp 188. 

ObpaCe 63. 219 a. 

Bipact 220, 


GREEK INDEX. 


Giw 73 c. 398 a. 
6és 172 a. 
Owiua 14 Dd. 


1, quant, 9. 94 rem. ; pro- 
nune. 11; om. 44. 35. 
401. 482, 

t interch. w. ¢ 31; w. o 
31; w. et 82. 894. 447 
b. 511; w. a: 82. 451 b. 

t changes prod. by, 65-9, 
396 ff. 

t subscript 13. 39 a; in 
dat. sing. of -ac-stems 
195; in Att. 2d decl. 
159. 

sof 4th cl. 396 ff. 514 ff; 
as redupl. 371. 

--stems 164 ¢, 164 f. 201 
ff. 549; vb. themes 
489. 5382. 536. 

-t- form. suff. 549. 571, 5. 

-- mode-suffix 374. 3888. 
408. 418 a. 484, 445. 
473 a. 

-t case ending 133. 

-t loc. 220, 

-i paragogicum 274. 

-a- form. suff. 556, 3. 
552. 576 b. 136 ff. 

-a- node-suff. 3874 b. 
434, 

ta for pia 290 D, 1. 

-ddys 559. 

tdouat Voice 499. 

tao1 (ciut) 415 Da. 

idxw, -éw, 72 D. 

-1aw desider. ete. 573. 

-18- prim. suff. 549. 

-18-, -r15-, gent. suff. 560, 
3. 

-5- verb-theme 425. 
rae oe 

-i6d-, -30-, -1a0d-, mase., 
-18-, -d- fem. patro. suff. 
559. 

idé 1040. 

iSety 72 D. 

stO1o- dim. suff. 558, 2. 

tdios 72 D; w. gen, 754 
c; idia 779 a. 

wuey 538 D a. 

tdpis 246, 


|-w ace. sing. 179; dual a 


{Spdw 393.03 [Spiveny 468 
D a 


idpws 176 D. 

-te- opt.-suffix bef. v 374 
b. 3879 a; tense-suff., 
see -19le-. . 

iépaé 73 D. 

iepds 837 D £; w. gen. 
754 ¢. 

-tew for -19w 425. 

-i(w v’bs 398. 514 ff. 446 
a; Att. fut. 425; der. 
571, 5. 

%o augm. aor. 359 a. 

-in- mode-suffix 374. 379 
a. 410.418 a, 445. 456. 
473 a. 

tm 476. 94 D. 417 D a. 
419 Da; aor. 359 a. 
432, 448. 445 b. 

20u(s) 88 D3; tédvrara 
249 D. 

ixavas w. gen. 757 a. 

txeAos 72 D. 

tieuevos 53 D a. 489 D, 47. 

-iko-s adj. 565; w. gen, 
754 b. 

ik, ite, tov 428 D b. 

tAdos 227 D. 

tAcws 226. 

“tAtos 72 D3; *tArd@e 217 
D; “IArd¢@e 221 D b. 

iuetpw 571, 9. 

-iv-stems 168 a. 















138. 

w for of 261 D b. 

wa 881. 1056, 6; wa ch 
612, 

-tvo-s adj. 566. 

-to gen. sing. 183. 154 Da. 

o- dim, suff, 558, 1; 
place 561; adj. 564. 
566 a. 

-19|¢- tense-suff, 372. 396. 
514 ff. 

touev, twpev 94 D, 

-to-v (dim.) See -to-. 

-iov-, -veoy- patr. suff. 559¢@ 

tov 72 D. ae 

-to-s adj. 564. ad 

toxéaipa 246 D. 

inmoddaceia 246 D. 


trmos coll. 609. 

imméta 147 D. 

tpné 73 D. 

*Ipts 72 D. 

ipds 37 D f. 

is 72 D. 166. 

-is See -10-, -1da-. 

Yo: 31. 478+ 491. 

IoOuot 220. 

-ot dat. case-ending 133. 

-tgko-, -toKd-, dim. suff. 
558, 3. 

-7k°|<- tense-suffix 403. 
530 ff. 

igduotpos Ww. gen. 753 a. 

toos, itoos, 72 D. 250 a; 
w. dat. 773. 

-lerepos, -toratos, 252 a. 

torn 351. 331. 335-6. 
456. 444 D. 381 D; re- 
dupl. 70; augm. 358 a; 
impf. 419 D a; fut. 
perf. 467; transit. 500, 
1; w. gen. 748 b; mid. 

688; aor. 841; pf. 849. 

isxiw 393 a; aor. 841. 

toxw redupl. 393 b. 

itén 72 D. 

ix0bs 166. 201. 

ixdp 218 D. 

-iw verbs 396 ff. 571, 9. 

ig (= évt) 290 D, 1. 

iwkn, i@ka, 213 D. 

-twy-, -toy- patron. 559 c. 

-lwy, -toTos, 253 ff. 


K, 24-27; pronunc. 19; 
dropped 86; bef. lin- 
gual 51; bef. u 53; bef. 
o 54: bef. ¢ 67. 397. 

re for 7, 278 D. 281 D. 

x to x 452. 464 Da. 470. 

-x- themes 397. 

-« movable in ovk 88 a. 

-ka- tense-sufiix 372.446; 
in aor. 432, 443. 

wa for Ké 1052, 2. 

Kay, Kad, ete. 84 D. 85 D. 

Kcadduoca $4 D. 

Kabatpw 571, 9. 

«adapds w. gen, 753 g, 

Kadevdw 361. - 

Kdonuon 484. 


GREEK INDEX. 


Kadi(w aug. 361, 

Kadiornu imper. 419 Da. 

kat 1040 ff; cras. 77 ¢c; 
w. num. 291; w. two 
subj. 606; w. part. 
979 nad 8s 275 b. 655 
a; Kal ravta 612 a; Kal 
ds 284; ka ror, Thy, 
655 a; Ta Kal Td, etc. 


655 b; Kat ydép 1050, 4. 


d,e; ef (ed) kal, Kad 
ei (edv) 1053, 2; Kab 67 
1037, 4 b; nal 8) Kal 
1042 ¢. 

kalrep w. part. 979. 1037, 
3. 1053, 3. 

Kaivot 1047, 5. 118. 

kalw (kav-1w) 85.401; aor. 
430 D. 

kan (kard) 84 D. 

kakés compar. 254, 2; w. 
cog. ace. 717. 

kaxoupyos w. gen. 754 a. 

Kaxtave 84 D. 

kak@s movecy w. acc. 712. 

Kkadew perf. 849. 

KadAvyvvaiKa 246 D. 

kKaAAidvws 259 a. 

Kkadds compar. 254, 6; 
KaAds 94 D. 

kddos 159 D. 

KaAUBy 395 a. 

KadvrTw 395; mid. 812. 

kadws exes 602 d. 

KdAws 159. 

kdpivos 152 b. 

Kdumopos 84 D. 

kduvw: Kkexunds 446 D; 
w. cog. acc. 715 b; w. 
part. 983. 

Kav 77 a; nav 1058, 2. 

Kdveov, Kavooy, 157. 

kam, Kap (kara) 84 D. 

Kapa, Kdpn, kde, 216, 8. 

Kdpdomos 152 b. 

kapnva 216, 8. 

kapta 258 D. 

kaptepéw w. part. 983. 

kaptepds 64 D. 

kdpriotos 64 D, 254 D, 1. 

Kas 77 ¢. 

Kar (kara) 84 D. 

Kita 77 c. 


379 


‘kardéd 800; eomp’ds w. 
gen. 752; 2) xara 646, 
KaTapa 442, 
katayeAdw w. gen. 752. 
karayvyveckw Ww. gen. 752 
a. 
Kardyvou. W. gen. 738 b. 
katadovAwots w. dat. 765 
a. 
kaTrakAdtTw w. dat. 772. 
KaTaAvw w. gen. 748. 
KatarAnoow 471 a. 
Karappnyvow. Ww. ace. 714 
b 


kaTapxw w. ace. 713. 

Katappovéw w. gen. 752; 
pass. 819 a. 

Karavevdoua w. gen. 752. 

karaynpicoua: WwW. gen. 
152. 2, 

kaTnyopéw W. gen. 752 a. 

kat@aveiy 84 D. 

Kka7w compar. 260. 800. 

KavTés 77 c. 

kéiw for katw 35. 401. 

Ké, xév, 857 ff. 87 D. 118 
D ; see dy. 

-kea- tense-suff. 372 D. 

-rer- tense-suff. 8372. 449. 

kei, kets ‘77 ©. 

KeiOl, Keidev, Ketoe, 283 
D a. 

ketuae 482; fut. 427 D; 
w. acc. 712b; am put 
820. 

keivos 271 D. 

kewvds 84 D. 

kelpw aor. 481 De. 

kexAnhyovtes (KAdGw) 455 
D a. 

kexunos (kduvw) 458 D. 

kexopvduevos 53 D a. 

Ké-KTnuat 365 b. 

KéAcvdos 152 ce. 214 D. 

KéAAw fut. 422 b; aor. 
431 ¢. 

KéAouar 2 aor. 436 D. 

kevds W. gen. 758 ©. 

Kepdvvoms W. dat. 772. 

Képas 181. 183. 

Kepdaivw 431 b. 

Kepdaréos 254 D, 9. 

Kepdlwy, -woTos, 254 D, 9 


8380 


kepdAaoy appos. 626 b. 

KexAadovTas 455 D a. 

kéw, kelw (fut.) 427 D. 

Kéws 161. 

-«y- tense-suffix 372. 449. 

Kndetos, Kjdigtos 254 D, 
(ei 

khp fem. 166. 

Kijpvé 175. 

Ki to oo 67. 397. 

KiBwros 152 b. 

Kiev T4 D. 

Kivdovevw aor. 841. 

Ki-s 203 b. 

kad(w 298 b; pf. 849 b: 
KexAnyovtes 455 D a, 

kKAalow@a 377 D. 

KAais 179 D a. 

kKAaio, (KAav-iw) 35. 401. 

Kazé 179 D a. 

KAauoidw 5738. 

KAaw for KAalw 401; fut. 
mid, 495. 

KréFos 72 D. 

-KAens 280 D a,b; proper 
names 194, 

kAcis 179 a. 

KAeiw pf. mid. 461 a. 

kAérrTys compar. 252 a. 

KAerrw pf. 452. 

KAynts 179 Da. 

-KAj}s prop. names in, 194. 

KAtoings 221 D a. 

KAtvw 393 a; 2 aor. 489 
D, 89; am called 820. 

Kvdw 412. 

kvion, Kvioa, 189 D. 

-ko- adj. suff. 565. 

Koludoun aor. 841. 

kowos w. gen. 754 ¢;3 7 
Kon 8 e; Kown 779 a. 

kowwvéw W. gen. 737; w. 
dat. 772. 

Kowwrla w. dat. 772 b. 

Kowwves, -wves, 216, 9. 

kotos 278 D. 

KoAmos om. 621 ©. 

kouieo 848, 425, 398 D. 

Kévis 201 D b. 

Kémma 289. 

Kkompos 152 a. 

xdr7w fut. pf. 850 a; in 
comp. 810 a. 


GREEK INDEX. 


| cdpn 138 a. 


Képrn, Kopin, 189 e, 50. 
-xo-s adj. 565; w. gen. 
754 b. 


Kécos, KéTe, KdTEpos, 278 


KoTvAndovédr 221 D e. 

kov 278 D. 

Kovpos 34 D3; koupdrepos 
255 D. 

Kéws 159 D. 

Kpd(w 898; pf. 451 c¢. 
456. 4928: 849 b. 

Kpara (Kapa) 216, 8, 

Kparecg. 221 D ce. 

Kpatéw w. gen. 741. 735, 

Kpariotos 254, 1. 

Kpatos 64 D. 

Kpatvs 254 D, 1; 258 D. 

Kpéas 191. 190 D. 

Kpeloowy 254, 1. 

Kpéeuauat 417 a. 418 b. 
487, 

Kpéoowy 254 D, 1. 

KpiOev 217 D. 

Kpiiooa 67. 

Kpt for Kpi0y 215 D b. 

KpiCw pf. 849 b. 

Kpivw pf. 448 b; w. cog. 
ace. 715 a. 725 c. 

Kpoviwy 559 c. 

KpumtTw w. two acc. 724; 
-asKov 493 a. 

Kpvoa w. gen. 757 a. 

KTduevos (kTeElvw) 496 D. 

KTdowat red. 365 b; pf. 
subj. opt. 465 a; fut. 
pf. 466 b; mid. 817; 
pi. 849. 

Kredreoot 215 Db. 


kTelvw 2 aor. 496 D. 440 


D. 489, 4. 
Kreis 168 b. 
xrépas 190 D. 
KTi¢w 2 aor. 489 D, 28. 
Kvdidverpa 246 D. 
xvdpds compar. 2538 D. 
kuxedy 186 D. 
kuxrdbey 218, 
Kbvtepos 255 D. 
kupéw w. gen. 7393; w. 
part. 984. 
xpos gen. 7538 b. 


Kipw fut. 422 b.; aor 
431 ¢. . 

Kvwy 216, 10. 

Kx for xx 47. 

k@as 190 D. 

KkoKiw 898 a. 

kwdvw 393 a; fut. mid. 
496 a. 

Kos 161. 


A, 22-27; doubl. after 
augm. 355 Da; bef. «¢ 
66.399. See Liquids. 

-A-stems 187 a; themes 
599. 

Adas 216, 11. 

Aayds 159 D. 


Aayxdévw 402 c; reduplL 


366; w. gen. 737. 

Aaydés 160-1. 

AdAos compar. 252 a. 

AauBavw 402 c; aug. 47 
D; redupl. 866; ac- 
cent 887 bs w. gen. 
736. 7388 and a; mid. 
814; w. part. 982; Aa 
Body with 968 b. 

AavOdyw w. acc. 7123; w. 
part. 984; Aaddy se- 
cretly 968 a. 

Adoddua 170 D b. 

Adds 160. 

Aas 216, 11. 

Adxera 246 D. 

Aéypuevos aor. 489 D, 40. 

Aéyw gather redupl. 366. 

Aéyo speak 2 aor. 489 D, 
39; two acc. 725 a; 
om, 612; pers. or im- 
pers. 944 and a. 946 
a, b. 949; 1d Aeyduevoy 
626 b; ed Aéyew Tie 
ace 

Aclrw 29, 32. 344, 320-1. 
451 b; mid. w. gen. 
749, 

Aéko, Acéeo, 428 Db; 489 
D, 40. 

Aexd 199 a. 

Aeds 159. 160. 

Ajyw w. part. 981. 

Anda 188 a. 

anvés 152 b. 


Ands 159 D. 

At to AA 66. 399. 

Afya 258 D; Avyus ib. 

Mogoua, aug. 355 Da; 
w. gen. 738 b. 

Adyos dat. 779 b; eis Ad- 
yous 772 a. 

Aoidopew, -efoPai, constr. 
164, 2 b. 

Aoimds 29. 544 ©. ace. 
719 b3; Tov Aorod 759. 

-Ad-s adj. 567, 6 

Aovw 412 b. 

Avréw w. ace. 716 b. 

Avxvos 214 D. 

Adw 94 D. 313-19. 393.2; 
pf. opt. 465 D; 2 aor. 
489 D, 31. 

Awiwy, -trepos, 254 D, 1. 

Awpdw w. gen. 748. 

Adwy, AgoTos, 254, 1. 


M, 23. 27; bef. p (or 
A) 60; mutes bef. pu 
53; doub!. after augm. 
355 D a; inserted 402 
ce. See Liquids. 

-wa- form. sulf, 551, 2 a. 

-wa neut. 181. See -yar-. 

ud 1037, 18. 723. 

-uat 1 sing. 376; elision 
80 D. 

Maia 15 a. 

pousw 574. 

patoua 401 D; 2 pf. 492 
D: 2 


ae 

pdiccupes 247 D. 

pechicat 246. 248. 

aR ade 253 D5 paxps 781 

a; (és) paxpay 622. 

parpdxerp 586. 

dda 80 c. 258. 66; uaa- 
Aov, padtcra 258; to 
form comp. sup. 256; 
Ww. comp. sup. 652 c. 

-way for -unv 1 sing. 376 
D 


a. 
pay for why 1087, 11. 
uwavOdve 402 ¢c; augm. 
355 Da; w. gen. 750; 
w. part. (inf. ) 982. 986 ; 
Th paddy 968 ec. 
Mapad@v: 783 b. 


GREEK INDEX. 


papripoue 571, 9. 

pdprupos 216 D, 12. 

paptus, 165. 216, 12. 

pacowy 253 D. 

paorié 174, 218 D. 

-wat- form. suff. 553, 1. 
576 a. 

eadxoua w. cog. ace. 715 
a; w. dat. cf. 772. 

ué 113 a, 261. 

Méyapd-Se 219. 

péeyas 247. 253. 719 b; 
peya w. gen. 730 c; 
cog. acc. 716 bs wéyo- 
Toy W. superl. 652 c; 
= MeyloTov appos. 626 


nose 253 D. 

-me9a 1 pl. 376. 

-wefov 1 dual 378. 

pcbvokw w. gen. 743. 

peddw 398 a. 

pel(wy 258. 

pelpouas redupl. 365 D, 
366, 

pels = phy 216 D, 25. 

Melwy 254, 3; pstov wt. 
647 


peaAds 235. 248. 233. 

meré 215 Db. 

meat 181. 

MeAitn 783 b. 

MeAiTTOUTA 238. 

MEeAAw augm. 355 b; w. 
inf. 846. 

méAos, mean, 1064. 

pédw w. gen. 742 and a; 
HeAoy 973 a. 

HEN BaL, See mluvnoKw. 


381 


uévrot 1047, 4; ov mévrat 
GAAd 1085 c, 

pevw w. ace. 712, 

pepls om. 621 ¢. 

Lepunpi(w 398 D. 

~ues 1 pl. 876 D a, 

uconuBpla 60. 

“mer Ban for -ue0a 3876 De. 

béoos compar. 250 a. 255 
D; w. art. 671; wt. 
art. 661; ev uéow 621 b, 

béooatos 255 D. 

peo(a)nyv(s) 88 D. 

meotoés w. gen. 753 c 

meta 801; adv. 785; wera 
785 a. 

peTadliwus w. gen. 737. 

eTardauBavew w. gen. 737, 


meTapéAee W. gen. 742 a; 
w. part. 985. 
MeTaucAouae pass. dep. 


497 a; w. part. 988. 
metaiv w. gen. 757; w. 
part. 976, 
eraréurw mid. 8138. 
peTamrrAagudes 218. 
meTeKtaboy (€xiov) 494. 
meteors W. gen. 734. 
peTexw W. gen. 737. 
meTewpl(w 862 a. 
MeTewpos 36. 
MeToXOS W. gen. 
meéeTpov 1066. 
pev 261 D. 
mexpe 80 b; w. gen. 758; 
conj. 920 ff. 1055, 8; 
W. 04, Ogov, 999 b. 
Bexpu(s) 88 D. 
“HM, SCC -Md-. 


758 a. 


ai w. gen. 712 b.| wh 1018 ff. 78. 88 bs w. 


ee a pl 376. 

uéy 1037, 12, 1046, 1 a: 
after art. 654. 666 c; 
after prep. 786 a; for 
phy 1037, 11; pev ody, 
ey 84, 1087, 12. 

-mevat, -wev, inf. 281 D; 
for -va 385 D, 5. 478 D. 

MevéAcws 162 a. 

-wevo- part. suff, 382, 563. 

uevorvdw 409 D a. 

mevtay 77 b. 


ind. 1021; . w. subj. 
866, 2. 867: w. impr. 
S74: W. part. 969 d; 
final 881. 887 ; inter- 
rog. 10153 wn po 612; 
a for ov 1027; wi 671, 
pn Saws 1085 a; pi) cd 
867. 887-8. 1033-4; 
ov ph 1082; Ste ph 
1049 rem.; ef un, ef ph 
et except (77) 905 a 
1052, 2. 
pendaun, -00, -@s, 2877. 


o82 


GREEK INDEX. 


pndé 10483; unde eis 290 | wdvos Tov tAAwvy 755 bd; 


a; pnd’ &s 284. 

pnodets 290.a3; neut. 719 b. 

pndérepos 287. 

pndouc 510 D, 22. 

enkdoucn plup. 458 D. 

pnkers 88 b. 

pnnotos 253 D. 

pykwy 166. 

-uny pers. ending 376. 

phy month 184; gen. 759 ; 
doo pyves 1002 b. 

why in truth 1037, 11. 
1047, 38; o} why GAAG 
1035 ¢; why (i) mer) 
1037, 9. 

pnviw 393 a. 

unre 1044. 118. 

pntnp 188; wt. art. 660 a. 

pntieta 147 D. 

pAtis, wnt: 287. 

paris, pnti 201 D b. 

untpws 197. 

-ut 1 sing. 876. 379 a. 883 
DyL; 885, 1 ysils-om. 
383, 1. See Eng. in- 
dex, M:-forms. 

juia (eis) 290. 

piyvown fut. pass. 474 d; 
2 aor. 489 D, 41. 

pixpds 254, 3; gen. 743 b. 

Mianotos 564 a. 

Miueouat voice 499, 

puyuvhokw pf. 865 b. 465 
a; meuvnoa 462 D; fut. 
perf. 466 b; w. gen. 
142; pf. 849; w. part. 
(inf.) 982. 986. 

ply 261 D. 113 D. 

Mivws 161. 212 D. 198 D. 

plaoyw 408 ¢. 

picOdw mid. 816, 10. 

yu bef. w 463 b. 

pva, prea 144, 

pvdoua 409 D a. 

pywduevos 409 D a. 

-wo- form. suff, 551, 2. 

pot 261. 80 D. 118 a. 

sotpa om. 621 c. 

poroa 84 D, 

-wov- adj. suff. 562, 3 

povas 295 d. 

uovaxn 295 c. 


povoy ov 1085 b. 
povopeyos compar, 252 a. 
-yo-s mase. 551, 2. 
pov 261. 1138 a3 as pos- 

Sess. 689. 
povvos 34 D. 
pvdéouce 409 D b. 
pura 139 e. 
popias 295 d. 
puptot (udpior) 288. 
pis 166. 201. 

Buxolraros 255 D. 

piw 393 a. 

-moy adj. 562, 3. 576 a. 
pav (un obv) 1015. 
pooa 34 D. 


N, 23. 27; bef. other 
cons. 55. 463 ff; bef. . 
65, 400; doubled af- 
ter augm. 3855 D a; 
dropped in pf. 448 b; 
in theme 519. 448 a. 
460. 463; inserted 
402 c, 528: 469 D: 
ch. to y-nasal 448 b. 
460; added in forma- 
tion 543 c. 

vy 5th class 402. 521 ff. 

-v- stems 164 7; adj. 233 ; 
themes 400. 518 ff. 

-y neut, 151. 

-y ace. sg. 133. 169. 179; 
voc, sg. 188. 151 a. 

-v 1 sg. 376; om, 4338 a; 
8 pl. 376. 379 a. 383, 
3. 385 D, 3. 473 D. 

-va- tense-suffix, 5th class 
372. 402 f. 521 ff. 

-vat inf, 881. 885, 5; acc. 
389 d; elis. 80 D. 

val 1087, 13. 728. 

vouetadacKov 493 b ; vaera- 
ovra 409 D a. 

vatye 118 a. =~ 

vaiw 401 D. 

vads 36. 160. 

vavs 206. 

vavolmopos 575 ¢. 

vato. 221 De. 

v6 dropped bef. o 56. 

-ve- tense-suffix, see -v9¢-. 


vearos 255 a. 

-vee- tense-suffix, 
-ve|¢-, 

veixelw 409 D b. 

véxus 166, 

-veo|e- tense-suffix 402 d. 
524, 

veupngt 221 D a. 

véw swim, augm. 355 Da. 

veas 36, 159-60. 

vewootos 575 ¢. 

vh 1037, 18. 723. 

-ynui Wbs 488. 

yynds 159 D. 

vijoos 153. 

vnvs 14 D d. 206 D. 

v0 dropped bef. o 56. 

vice theme 398 e¢. 

virdw w. cog. ace. 716 a; 
w. gen, 7495 w- part. 
985 + ae. for pf. 827. 

vly 261 D a. 113 D. 

viper wt. subj. 602 e. 

-vyv- tense-suffix 402. 
525 ff. 

-y°| <- tense-suffix 372. 402 
a, 521, 

voul(w w. part. 982. 

ydos, vous, 157. 

-vo-s adj. 569, 4. 

vooéw Ww. cog. acc. 715 a; 
inc. aor. 841, 

vooos 152 e. 

vdoptv) 87 D. : 

véros dat. 782 a. 

-vs ace, plu. 133, 143. 154 
e. 169 a. 201 D. 204. 

-vo. 3 pl. 876 and a. 

-vT- bef. o 56. 463 a; 
stems in, 164 h. 2387; 
part. suffix 382. 563; 
decl. 241. 

-vTai 3 pl. 876. 464. 

-vtt 3 pl. 876 and a. 407 
D. 69 D. 

-vro 3 pl. 376. 464. 

-vTwy 8 pl. impr. 380. 

-vu- tense-suff. 5th class 
872. 402 e. 525 ff. 

vous vbs. 419 b. 488 a. 

vipa 139 D. 

vo(v) 118 D. 87 D. 126 
1048, 3. 


5ee - 





viv 120. 1048, 3. 

poe gen. 759; dat. 782; 
wt. art. 661. 

voi, vaiy, 261 D. 

vwitepos 269 D, 


=, pronune. 21 b. 

écivos 84 D; tévFos 72 
D b. 

Evy = oty 806. 

éiw 393 a. 

-tw fut. perf. 467. 


O, name, 8; pronune. 11; 
interch. w. a, €, see a; 
w.v3l. 

o-1or @ 218.: 575 a, b; 
for w 373 D, 444 D. 

otordl. 

o to ov 34. 33 d. 

-o- to w 33. 168 (2); 249. 
407. 356. 

-o- dropped 545 c. 559 b; 
after -ai- 250. 

-o- tense-suffix, see -°|¢-. 

-o- form. suff. 548; ac- 
cent 582 ¢. 

-o- stems 151 ff; in comp. 
575 a. 

-o- themes 489. 531. 

-o- added to theme 405; 
to stem 575 a. 

5, 4, 76, 270. 272. 111 
a; in poetry 653; de- 
monstr. 654 ff. 272 
b; as rel. 275 D; 6 
pev, 0 8é, 654; Ww. Tis 
654 a; w. appos. 625 
b; 0 84, 654e; Kal réy 
ete. 655 a; 7d Kal rd 
655 b; mpd rod 655 d; 
as art. 656 ff ; of rdyTes 
w. num. 6724; éy rots 
w. sup. 652 a; Tov w. 
inf. 960; rd uy w. inf. 
961 a. 1029. 

6 neut. of ds 275; crasis 
fe Ws foros 275): 
for dri 1049, 1. 

dBpiuomatpy 246 D. 

6ySods 295 d. 

- byddaros 288 D. 

Oydoos 288. 42 D. 


GREEK INDEX. 


oySédxovta 288 D. 

Sye 1037, 1. 

d5e, HOe, Tdde, 271. 272, 
282. 118; use 695 ff; 
Ww. art, 673; wt. art. 
674; dd¢ 274; 760 
exeivo 697 Cc. 

65u7 53 D a. 

6dés 152 c; om. 621-2; 
gen. 760 a. 

é5ovs 168 b; 63éy 168 D. 

’Odua(a)evs 47 D. 

-ol<- variable vowel 310. 
372.a. 388. 406; tense- 
suffix 372. 393 ff. 435. 
503 ff; mode-suff. for 
-|,- 373 D. 433 D b. 
444 PD. 487 D a; in 
plup. 458 D. 

oct to ov 40 a. 410 b. 

-o-el0ns adj. 586 a. 

on to w 417. 

d0ey 283. 284. 1056, 2; 
attraction 997 a. 

061 283 D. 1056, 1. 

60ovvera 1050, 3. 82. 

oe 18; pronunc. 14 a; 
to » (aug.) 357; un- 
changed in aug. 357 a; 
interch, w. ez 29. 544 ¢. 
548. 

-ot elided 80 D; short for 
accent 102 a. 386. 

-ot voc. sing. 199. 

of pron. 261. 113 a; ac- 
cent 685 a. 

of adv. 288. 284. 1056, 3; 
w. gen. 757. 

-o.a fem. 139 c. 

oia conj. w. part. 977. 

oida 491. 72 D. 849 b; 
redupl. 863 D; plup. 
458 D; w. part. (inf.) 
982. 986; eb off Sri 
1049) Das ated” 
dpacov 875. 

Oisirovs 216, 18. 

-o1n for -o1a 139 D. 

-olnv, -clns, -oln opt. 457. 
410 a. 

di(ipérepos 249 D. 

-ouv for -ow in dual 154 
Dail tit Dax 


383 


oixade 217, 219. 118. 

oixetos 564; w. gen. 754 ¢. 

oikéw fut. mid. 496 a; pf. 
mid. 464 D a, 

otxobey 217. 

otxo0. 217 D. 

otxot 102 b. 220. 

otxovde 219 D. 

oixos 72 D; om. 730 a, 

oikTipw aug. 357; w. gen. 
744, 

oixtpés compar. 253 D. 

otjua. 80 D. 

oiud(w fut. mid. 495. 

-ow dual 133. 

-ow for -ouut opt. 379 b. 

oilvos 72 D; om. 621 ¢. 

oivoxoéw aug. 859 D. 

~o.o gen, sing. 154 D a, 

olouat, oiua, 2 sing. 384; 
pass. dep. 497 a; w. 
gen. 733 a; mid. 817; 
hyperb. 1062. 786 a; 
w. infin. 946 b. 

-oto-s adj. 564 b. 

oios 276. 282. 92, Dad. 
699. 997. 1000 ff; w. 
sup. 651; olov, ofa, w. 
part. 977; in exclam. 
1001 a; ofos ov, ete. 
1002. 

olds Te, cidare 1000, 1041. 
118. 

-ors ace. pl. 154 De. 

ois 210. 72. 

-ouva for -ovca 34 D. 242 
D 


-o.oi{v) dat. pl. 156. 

otxoua pr. for pf. 827. 

dkny 281 D. 

dkvos w. inf. 952. 

6kotos, 6xd0ev, Gkov 281 D. 

6xéoos, 6kdTepos 281 D. 

GAclCwy 254, 4. 

OrryaKis 297. j 

dAlyos 254, 4; w. art. 
665; gen. 743 b; dat, 
781 a. 

dAvywpéew w. gen. 742. 

baiCov 264 D, 4. 

vAAdDu pf. 501. 848, 

dAos w. art. 672. 

6ulAéw w. dat. 772. 


384 


duvous imper. 415 D b; 
w. acc. 712. 

Gpotos, duordw, w. dat. 778. 

dmoxAdw 409 D a. 

duoroyew fut. mid. 496 a; 
w. dat. 772; w. part. 
981. 

éuov 760 a; w. dat. 772 c¢. 

éusvuuos w. gen. 754d; 
w. dat. 773. 

Sums 1047, 6; w. part. 
a79°b, 

-oy-, -wy-, form. suff. 555. 

-oy- compar. stems in, 
236. 

-ova- form. suff. 555. 

évap 215 b. 

Gvde Sduovde 219 D. 

éverdiCw with dat. or acc. 
464 b. 

bvetpos 213. | 

évivnut 81; aor. 440 b. 
489, 5; accent 445 a; | 
mid. w. gen. 740. 

évoua dat. 780 a. 

-ovt-stems 241. 3883, 6. 
385, 6. 

dtuvw pf. mid. 468 a. 

atts 98, 

-c0s adj. in, 223, 

dov = Go for ob 275 D. 

8mm 283. 1056, 4. 1054, 6. 

dmnAixos 281. 282. 

omnvika 288. 1055, 8. 

bmicbe(v) 87 D. 255 D; w. 
pen. 757. 

bnlo(o)e 47 D. 

omistatos 255 D. 

dr AGrepos, -raros, 255 D. 

é7dGey 283, 997 a. 1056, 2. 

6766 1056, 1. 

Gat 283. 1056, 3. : 


eS ee ee eee 





évrotos 281 ff. 699 a. 

dmdcos 281. 699 a. 

éméaTtos 294, 

ém7éray 860. 918. 1055, 1. 
6rére 283. 1055, 1. 

é67dTep0s 281. 282, 

Orov 2838. 1056, 1. 

éxmotos, 6mmdétepos, 47 D 

281 D. 
érméoe 283 D. 
érrore, rmws, etc. 281 D. 


-0-S, -0-V, SCC -0-. 


boos 276, 282; 699. 997; 


doos mep 286. 
domep 1037, 3 
éoodKe 297 D. 
docdrios 276 D. 
tooe 215 Da. 


GRHEK INDEX. 


Omws 288. 1054, 38; w 
super]. 651; fin. 881 
ff. 885 ff. 887 a; odx 
(uh) ¢ omws 1035 a. 

dpdw aug. 359; redupl 
369; fut. 383 D, 4 
idé 887 b; w. Saws S85 
fi: ow. py 887 Cs w 
part. 982. 

dpyatyw aor. 431 b. 

opylCouat w. part. 9838. 

opéyouc w. gen. 739. 

pelos, Opéarepos, 248 D 

opFos 72 D b. 

épOpos wt. art. 661. 

épxdw w. two acc. 725. 

opvibodiipas 149. 

Upvis, Uputs, 166. 176. 216, 

14, 


tpvim fut. 422 b; aor 
431 c¢. 428 D b. 426 D 
489 D, 42; pf. 868 D 
éptcow redupl. 368. 
appavés W. gen. 753 g. 
vpxis 166. 


-co-stems 196. 
-os neut. 190. 553, 2; in 
comp. 578 a. 
-os gen. sing. 183; acc 
pl. 154 De. 
ds possess. 72 D. 
686 a. 690 a. 692. 
és rel. 275. 282: 627 ff. 
699. 993 ff; as de- 
monst. 275 b. 654 d; 
ap’ ov, €& 08, év @, eis & 
999 b; av? ay, é€& av 
999; Gs ye 1037, 1; 
neut. 6 or 6 re for Ort 
"1049, 1. 
6odkis 297, 
donuepot 1002 b. 


269; 


w. superl. 651. 1000 ff ; 
acc. 719 a; dat. 78la; 
dcov ov 1035 b; in ex- 
clam. 1001 a. 


dooos 47 D. 276 D. 

Gore 856 a, 

ootéoy, 6oTorv, 157. 

doris 280. 282. 285. 118: 
699 a. 997. 1002 a, 
1011, 

doTtcdh, déorTicouy, 
285, 1002 a. 

dogpatvouce with gen. 742. 

-oT- part. suffix 382. 568. 

oray 860. 913. 

ore 288. 121 a. 
1055,- 1; 
1008 a; 
1055, 7. 

dTev, OTTEV, OTTEO, STEW, 
oTewy, 6Téo1g1, 280 D. 

ote 80 b. 121 a; declar. 
1049, 1. 980 ff; caus. 
925; w. superl. 651; 
expressed by pron. 
999; irreg. after rel. 
1009 a; ovx Gre 1035 
a; ore wh 1049, 1 rem. 

d71s, OTiva, STivas, 280 D. 

OTov, 6TH, etc. 280 a. 

ortt 47 D. 280 D. 

ov 18; pronune. 14 a; 
spurious 14 b; for o 
88 D; interch. with ev 
29, 409 D f. 548 a; 
from 0, see o. 

-ov-Stems, 206. 

ov gen. sing. 148. 154 a. 

ov- unch. in augm. 357 a. 

-ov 2 sing. imper. accent 
391 ¢. 

ov, ovK, ovxX, ovxt, 88 a. 
lll d. 85 b. 1018 ff; 
interrog. 1015; wt. ud 
723 a; ov for wh 1028; 
ovx ST1, ovx brws 1035 
a; ov piv (mevTot) GAAG 
1085 c; ob ph 1082; 
Bn ob 1088 ff. 

of, of, €, 261. 118 a; 685. 
677 a. 690 a. 687. 

o3 adv. 283. 284. 1056, 1. 

ovaTos (ovs) 216 D, 15. 

ovdauq, -ov, -@s, 287. 

ovdas 190 D. 

ovdé 1048; o888 cfs 290 
a; avd &s 284. 


etc. 


1052, 
W. TAXLOTO, 
cis OTE Ke 





ovdels 290 a; w. pl. 609 a; 
ovdels Goris ov 10038 a; 
ovdevy 719 b. 703 a; 
ovdevds 746, 

ovderepos 287. 

ove, see ob; ode 77. 

ovxére 88 b. 

ovxt 73 D. 

cuxody, ovxovy 1048, 2 a. 
1015. 120. 

ovAducvos 33 D. 

OvAvuroto 33 D. 

-ovy ace. sing. 199 D. 

ovv 1048, 2; w. rel. 285; 
aft. art. 666 c; after 
prep. 786 a. 

o¥vexa 1049, 2. 1050, 3. 

ovvoua 33 D. 

ojmi 77 a. 

ovpayvddey 217 D. 

ovpew augm. 359. 

ovpcos 83 D; ovpos 73 D. 

-ovs acc. plu. 154 e. 

-ous adj. 223-4. 566. 

-ovs particip. 385, 6. 

ods 172 a. 216, 15. 

-ovor (for -o-vor) 407 c. 

ovTdw, aor. 440 D. 489 D, 
22. 

ovTe 1044. 608. 

otis 287. 

otro: 1037, 10. 

ovtos 271. 272. 282. 695 
ff; w. art. 673; wt. art. 
674; w. nom. for voc. 
707. cf. 723 b; w. verb 
om. 612; pl. for sing. 
635; masce. or fem. for 
neut. 632 a; neut. for 
masc. fem. 682; as 
adv. 719 c; w. gen. 
730 c; w. pev, dé, 654 
b; tovr’ éxctvo 697 c. 

ostost 274. 721. 

otw(s) 272 c. 283. 8 ¢; 
w. part. 976 b. 

ovxX, ovxt, See ov. 

épciAw 399 a; aor. in wish 
871 a. 

ObéAAw 431 D d. 

Bderos 215 b. 

bpbarpidw 573. 

bis 166. 


GREEK INDEX. 


dpArokdvw w. gen. 745. 

vppa 920 ff. 1055, 7; = 
ews 283 D. 881. 

bxos, oxea 215 D a; 
bxeogt 221 Dc. 

-oxos c’p’ds, accent, 582 c. 

ove w. jv 602 d; w. gen. 
757 a. 

oyiuadns w. gen. 754 a. 

éWios compar. 250 a. 

éWopdyos compar. 252 a. 

ow for aw, etc. 409 D a. 
424 D; for oov 409 De. 

-ow verbs 825. 409-12. 


II, 24 ff; -am- in pro- 
nouns, etc. 281 D. 

a bef. r-mute 51; bef. wu 

33; bef. o 54. 

ator 278 D. 281.D; to 
@ 452. 470. 

mais 172 a. 180. 86; wt. 
art. 660 a. 

méAa. with pres. and im- 
perf. 826. 

madaids compar. 250. 

moaAty in comp. 59. 

mdAAw 2 aor. 489 D, 44. 

may in comp. 59. 

mayvTaxn 295 ¢c. 

maytodey 218. 

mayvreas 257, 

réo 84 D. 802. 

mand 802. 787; in comp. 
775; w. compar. 648. 

mdépa for mépeore 109 b. 
785 a. 

mapaBaive w. acc. 712 ¢. 

mapat 802. 

mapamrAnois w. dat. 773. 

mapaskeva(w pf. mid. 
464 Da; impers. 602 d. 

maodoTa 442, 

mapaTtOnur mid. 815. 

mapaxwpew w. gen. 748, 

maces W. dat. 775. 

napeckevadata: 464 D a. 

mapéexw w. two acc, 726; 
mid. $14, 

wapiorapa w. dat. 775. 

mapoe(v) 87 D. 

mapoilas, To THs 626 b. 

mapowew augm. 362 a. 


385 
mapotrepos 255 D. 
mdépos W. inf. 955 a. 


mas 240, 239; w. and wt. 
art. 672; was ris 609 a, 
703; may w. gen. 730 
c; mayrt 781 a. 

nacowy 2538 D. 

macxw 403 c; pf. mid. 
492 D, 14; am treated 
820; Ti mdédw 866, 3; 
Ti wabdv 968 c. 

matnp 188; wt. art. 660 a, 

Marpoxdros 213 D. 

mavw mid. 812 a; fut. 
perf. 466 b. 850 a; w. 
part. 981. 

maxus compar, 253 D. 

metde 197, 

melOw 347, 828; 2 aor. 
436 D:; 2 pf. 492 D, 
15; intr. 501; pf. 849; 
mid. 812 a; w. ace. 
716 b; w. two ace. 
724; w. dat. 764, 2; 
metoTéeov 992. 

mewdovra 409 D a. 

mevaw 412; w. gen. 742, 

Teipaevs 208 d. 

metpdouar W. gen. 738. 

metpap 182. 

meAad(w 2 aor. 489 D, 24: 
1 aor. 428 Db; w. dat. 
V72. 

méAexus 166. 201. 

mwéAouot 2 aor. 4387 D. 

TeAordyv-vnoos 575 ¢. 

meumas 295 d. 

méume 288 D. 

méumw pf. mid. 463 b; w. 
cog. ace. 715 a. 

mevns 246. 248; w. gen. 
7538 ¢. 

mevOéw, mevOjuevat, 412 
Die; 

mevia dat. 776. 

mwérocbe 492 D, 14. 

mempauevn 621 c. 

mé-mTauat 865 b. 

mé-nTw@Ka 3865 b. 

mwémwy compar. 251 a. 

mwép 118 d. 118. 1037, 3; 
w. rel. 286; w. part 
979 a. 


od 


386 


méepa compar. 260. 

mépay w. gen. 757. 

mepas 188. 

mepdw moda 716 rem. 

mépéw aor, 435 D. 489 D, 
45. 

mept 803. 80 b. 109 a. 
110. 785; w. num. 600 
b; in comp. 3860 a. 
775. 

mwépt 785. 109 b. 

meoylyvoua w. gen. 749. 

meplopdw Ww. part. 982. 

meoininte Ww. dat. 775, 

meptoT@a@pevos 98. 

mécow theme 397 b. 

merayvos redupl. 865 b. 

Metres, Were@-o 159 D. 

méerouat aor, 437. 489, 6. 

mepidecda (peldouar) 436 
D 


mepvoy (pev-) 436 D. 

mepptkovtas 455 D a. 

ri, 7h, 288. 113 b. 779 a. 

anyvoue intr. 501; 2 aor. 
489 D, 43. 

anoaw w. ace. 712 b. 

TinAniadns 559 b. 

anAtkos 278. 282. 

myvika 283 ; w. gen. 757 a. 

mixvs 166. 201. 

micipa 247 D. 

miurAnu 2 aor. 489 D, 


23. 440 D; w. gen. 
743. 
wiv fut. 427; aor. tr. 


500, 7; 2 aor. 489, 16; 
w. gen. 736. 
mimpackw fut. pf. 850 a. 
wintw redupl. 365 b; pf. 
part. 492 D, 17. 
mioreve with dat. 764, 2; 
pass. 819 a. 
miotis 551, 1. 
aioupes 290 D, 4. 
miwy 247 D, 251 a. 
mTwAd Cw 398 b. 
-rAaoios mult. 
755 a. 
TlAatraats 783 b; -act 220. 
mwAées, -as, 254 D, 5. 
mAety (wAgov) 254, 5. 647. 
wAewos 227 D. 


295: b. 


GREEK INDEX. 


mwArciotdKis 297, 

wAcotTos 254, 563;  w. 
superl. 652 c. 

TAciwy, TAéwy, 254, 5. 

mwAéoyv Ww. or wt. % 647. 

mAcoverTéew W. gen. 749, 

mréos 227 D. ; 

mwAeuy, wAevves, 254 D, 5. 

mAevpa 213 D. 

mwAéw 411; w. acc. 712, 

TAéws 227, 

mAjGos ace. 718 b; w. pl. 
609. 

mAndvs 216 D, 26. 

mwTANHOw Ww. gen. 7438. 

mTAnY Ww. gen. 758. 

TAnpéw W. gen. 743. 

TAnGlov, TAnTLalTEpos 250 
a; w. gen. 757. 

TwAncow 471 a. 

TAnTO 440 D. 

matvOos 152 a; coll. 609. 

-whoos, -wAovs, multipl. 
295 b. 755 a. 

mAovois 564; with gen. 
753 ¢. 

mTAouTéew W. gen. 743. 

mwAdéw 2 aor. 489 D, 27. 

mvew fut. 426; aor. 469 
D. 489 D, 382. 

TlvbE 216, 16, 

moa 188 a. 

ndbev, wo0év, 283. 118 b. 

mobéw, woOhjuevar 412 De. 

7661, mobi, 288 D. 118 b. 

mot, wot, 283. 113 b. 

morew 339; om. 612; w. 
two acc. 725 a; w. part. 
981; mid. 813. 814; 
mid. w. two acc. 726; 
—ed (xax@s) mow Ww. 
ace. 712; w. part. 985. 

motos, motds 278, 282. 

mourviw 574, 

moAenew pass. 819 a; -fCw, 
-6w, 572; w. dat. 772; 
mohepiCw 398 D. 

woAts 201 ff. 202; wt. 
art. 661; wéAtas 42 D; 
aéAwde 219 D. 

mwokirevw mid. 814 a; 
pass. 819 ¢. 

mohAdxi{s) 88 D. 297. 








woAhawrAagtos, 
295 b. 

moAAaxn 295 c. 

moAAooT és 294, 

moAviotwp 18 a. 

moAvs 247 s-compar. 254, 
5; w. article 665; w. 
gen. 730 e; ov odds 
1028 ;—(7d) woXd, (Te) 
mwoAAd, 719 b. cf. 665. 
781 a; wep) modo ete. 
746 a. 808, 1 b; moAAod 
743 b; woaAA@ 781 a; 
em) moAv 799, 8;— 
Trelwy, TWA€wY, W. art. 
665; wt. 47 6473 wer 
oTov w. superl. 652 ¢; 
ot wAEtoTot 665. 

moumiy mweumew 715 a. 

mopiCw mid, 813. 

Twoppw w. gen. 757. 

moppipw 574. 

mooe 283 D. 

Tlove:day (-cwv, -éwy, -Gv) 
384 D. 37 Dh. 185. 186. 

mocos 278. 282; adécov 
746; dat. 781 a. 

moods 278. 282. 

mocot 54 D. 171 Db. 

méaTos 294. 

mor for mpds 84 D. 

mwotauds w. attrib. app. 
624 a, 

more, meré, 283. 113 b. 

Moreiday 37 Dh. 

aérepos 278, 282; mdérepov 
(wérepa) 1017. 980. 

moti for mpds 84 D. 805. 

awétva, moTvia, 246 D. 

mortay 84 D. 

qwov 283. 118 b. 760 a; 
w. gen. 757; mov 283. 
118 b. 

movauBdre:pa 246 D, 

TlovAvddua 170 D b. 

rovads 247 D, 229 D. 

movs 166. 178. 247 b. 

mpgos 247 a. 

mpacow 452 a; w. two 
acc. 724; w. ev, KaK®3, 
810; w. Gmws 885; 
mid. 724. 

mparos 255 D, 


-TAOQUS, 





mpavs 247 D. 

mpemw 764, 2. 949. 

mpéaBa, mpéaBerpa, 247 D. 

mpecBevTys, mpéaBets, 
216, 17. 

mpecBevw w. acc. 714 b; 
mid. 814 a. 

mpéaBus 216, 17. 247 D. 

apeapuTns 216, 17. 

apnus 247 D. 

mptv 1055, 9; w. inf. 955 ; 
w. fin. verb 924; 7d 
mplv 653 ; amply # w. inf. 
955 b. 

mplmuat, moatuny 444 a. 

- 4450 a, 

mpd 804. 76 b; in comp. 
060 a, 82 a3 Ww. com- 
par. 648 ; mpd rou 655 d. 

mpodecis 784 a. 

mpodvucouae pass. 
497 a. 

mpdxeyuon W. gen. 751. 

mpoxdmTw intrans. 810 a. 

apoanis 878. 

mpovogouat pass. 
497 a. 

mods 805. 84 D; in comp. 
Tio = adv, 7855. wxpds 
oe yovatwy 1062. 

mpocavdaw contr. 412 De. 

mpocepxoua w. dat. 775. 

mpoonkee W. gen. 734; 
w. inf. 949; mpoojjKoy 
974 a. 

mpocde(v) 87 D; w. gen. 
757; w. mply 955 a. 

mpoorax ev ace. abs. 973. 

apdow W. Tov 760 a. 

mpoomdia 98. 

mpdcwmov, -ata, 213 D. 

mpoTepos 255 ; w. art. 667 ; 
apotepoy 719 b; mpdre- 
pov mpty 955 a. 

mpott 805. 

apotov 655 d. 

mpovpyou, mpoupytattepos 
250 a. 

mpopacts dat. 779 b. 

mpopepw w. gen. 749. 

mpopowy, -ppacca, 247 D. 

mpvuvn, mpvuva, 139 D. 

mputavers Wt. art. 660 c. 


dep. 


dep. 


GREEK INDEX. 


mpwios compar. 250 a. 

mpatictos 255 D. 

mpo@tos 255. 288. 619 b; 
(rd) mporov 719 b; rH 
mparny 622, 

aT EepovyTa 238. 

athoow 2 aor. 489 D, 25. 

aruxh 216 D, 27. 

mTvw 393 a. 

atwxds compar. 252 a. 

Tlvdot 220), 

Tuxvds (Tivdé) 216, 16. 

mouatos 255 D. 

muvodvoua w. gen. 750, 
742; w. part. 982. 

rip 166. 187 b. 213. 

ap for oo 47. 

mw 113 b. 

mas 283. 113b; mas ay in 
wishes 870 e; w. gen. 
757 a; mw@s ov méAAw 
846 b; m@s 283. 113 b. 


P, 18. 23; w. « 65. 400; 
doubled 49, 855 a; see 
Liquids. 

6, 63, 18. 49. 355 a. 

-p-stems 164 k; themes 
400. 

5a 1048, 1. 80 D. 113 D. 

5d@50s 152 e. 

padios compar. 254, 7. 

‘Pauvovs 238. 

pawy, pacros, 254, 7. 

péa, peta, 254 D, 7. 

bepuTmmevos 365 D. 

péw w. gen. 743. 

pnyvome: pnyvior 415 D 

a; €ppwya 451 e; intr. 
501, 
ntdios, pnirepos, 254 D, 7. 
iylwv, piy.oros (piynrds) 
254 D, 10. 


“Oa “Dn 


piCddev 218. 

pimtw 345. 8283 -aoKov 
493 a. 

pts 166. 

pon 188 a, 

-po-s adj. 569, 5. 

pp 49; for pao 50. 

pu@uds 551, 2. 1066. 

puméw redupl. 365 D. 








5387 


% (co, s) 6; pronune. 19. 

o after mutes 54, 421 a; 
after vy 55-59. 

o bef. cons. 55 ff. 

o from 7, see T. 

a to h 70. 359 c. 508, 
13 a. 508, 16 a. 

og assimilated 431 D d; 
omitted 61. 62. 71. 
190. 575 b; in -oum, 
-7o, 383, 4. 385, 4 a. 
416, 441. 462 d; in 
tense-suffix 422 a, 423 
ff, 504. 

-g- added to verh-themes 
461, 503. 505. 643, 
579 b; to roots 543 ec. 

o doubled 47 D. 273 D. 
276 D. 420 D. 428 Da. 
855 Da. 

o movable 88 ec. 88 D. 

-s nom. sing. 183. 168. 
241. 

-s gen. sing. 185. 

-s 2 sing. 376. 

-s imper. (for -6:) 443 b. 

-s patronym. and gentile; 
see -10-, -idd-. 

-s in -deis 297 D. 

-c-, vb. themes in, 587. 

-oa- tense-suff. 372. 428. 

-oa fem. adj. (part.) 237. 

-oat 2 sing. 376. 383, 4. 
385, 4; elided 80 D. 

Sarautve 783 b. 

gadTiGw 398 b; subj. om. 
602 c. 

caumt 289 a. 

-cov 3 pl. 3876. 379 a. 
385, 3. 

Zaroeo, Sarpy 199. 

Zaprniav 206 D. 

cdrToua w. gen. 7438. 

cavTov 266 a. 

cdoa 258 D. 

capns 248, 258 D. 

gaétepos 227 D. 

oBévvipun intrans. 500, 5; 
2, aor. 489, 10. 

od for ¢ 63. 

-cdw for -(w 398 D. 

-ve local 219 b. 

-ce- tense-suff. see -¢ |¢- 


388 


oé 261. 118 a. 

geavTou 266 ; 685. 692, 3; 
ce avtéy etc. 687. 

oéBoua pass. dep. 497 a. 

acto, sev, 261 D. 

-cerw desider. 573. 

geiw augm. 855 D a; 
subj. om. 602 ¢. 

cepryds 53 b. 569, 4. 716 b. 

oéo, oev, 261 D: 

-ce°|<- tense-suff. 372 D. 
426. 

gevw augm. 355 D a; re- 
dupl. 865 D; accent 
389 D b; aor. 480 D. 
489 D, 83. 

cewutov 266 D. 

onetoy appos. 626 b. 

ofwepov 69 a. 

ofr intr. 501. 

ons 172 a. 

o@ after cons. 61. 

-79a 2 sing. 877. 

-70a, elision 80 D; infin. 
381. 

-oGay for -cOnv 376 D a. 

-o0e, -cBov, -cOnv, mid. 
376. 380. 

-oGov for -c@ynv 376 D b. 

-00w, -cOwy, -c0woay, mid. 
380 and a. 

-o. 2 sing. 876. 479. 

ot for te 69, 551, 1. 

-ol- form. suff. 551, 1; 
in comp. 579 b. 

-ollv) dat. pl. 57. 188. 
L7iD db. 

-clv) locative 220. 

-ou(v) 3 sing. 876. 888 D, 
1. 885, 1; for -re 69; 
om. 383, 1. 

-o.d- form. suff. 551, 1. 
ciydw fut. mid. 495; w. 
ace. 712; aor. 841. 

cin dat. 776. 

-oimo-s adj. 569, 2. 

-O1-s, SC@ -G1-. 

gitos 214. 

oiwmrdw fut. mid. 495; 
we aee, (12: 

-ore- tense-suff. see -okle. 

oxéAAw intrans. 500, 6; 
2 aor. 489, 11. 


GREEK INDEX. 


-oK°\e- tense-suff. 3772. 
403. 493. 580 ff. 

oKoméw mid. 814; w. ph 
887 c;3 Ww. 6rws 885 ff. 

oxdros 212. 

SKvAAN, Sxvada, 139 D. 

oxdp 182 a. 

opdw 412, 

-co 2 sing. 376. 380. 416. 

-o°|<- tense-suff, 372. 420. 
466. 474. 

col, cov 261. 80 D. 118 a; 
gov as possess. 689; 
oé w. inf. 684 b. 

odos 227 D. 

copds 152 b. 

ods 269. 689 ff. 

omavicw w. gen. 748. 

onde mid. 813. 

oméviw 56. 421 a. 429. 
463 ¢. 

oméos, ometos, 190 D. 

omevdw 29. 548 a. 

omoddés 152 a. 

orovdacw fut. mid. 495. 

aomovdn 29. 548 a; dat. 
776. 

oo =r 48; in iota class 
597. 

-oo. dat. plu. 1388. 

-cow verbs 397. 514 fi. 

ot abbrev. 6 a. 

-ord for or70u 442. 

orddioy 214, 

oTabuds 214. 

oTdy 440 a, 

oTrdxus 166. 

oréap 182. 

oTEAAw 842, 322. 328. 

orevwrds 152 c. 

orepéw fut. mid. 496 a. 

otixos 216 D, 28. 

orTod 188 a. 

orédos 548. 

oroxaCoum w. gen. 739. 

OTpaTevw W. COg. acc. 
Gib: ts, 

orpatnyéew w. gen. 741; 
pass. 819 ¢. 

orTparémedoy wt. art. 661. 

oTpépw pf. mid. 460 a; 
aor. pass. 469 a. 472 a. 
498. 


oruyew w. gen. 744, 

oTudedtCw 398 D. 

oTwpvrAraw 571, 9. 

ov 261. 603. 

ovyyevhs w. gen. 754 d. 

ovyyryveckw Ww. gen. 744 

ovyKAntos 152 d. 

ovyxalpw w. gen. 744. 

gvAdw w. two acc. 724. 

SvAAGs, SVAAG, 149. 

cuuBaiyw pers. constr. 
944 a. 

ovpras w. art. 672. 

guutroAcuew w. dat. 775. 

cvy 59. 806; in comp. 
295 a. 775; adv. 785. 

-cuva- form. suff. 556, 
2. 

cuvaipéws; (as) cuveddyre 
eimety 771 b. 956. 

cuvavTaw, cuvayTAThy 412 
D6, 

ovvdvo 295 a. 

-cUvn See -cuva-. 

cvvoida w. part. 982 a. 

guvTéwyw 3 @S CUVTEew 
883. 

guyTptBoun w. gen. 738 b. 

gts or ts 166. 70. 

opdvw; oparyels w. gen. 
750 a. 

ové 113 D. 261 D. 

ohéa 261 D a. 

opéeas, opewy etc. 261 D; 
690 a. 

opérepos 269. 690. 692. 

cpi(v) 261 D. 87 D. 118 
D. 


odio: 118 a. 261. 

ods 269 D. 

THd, TPB, Thwé, etc. 261 
ff 


opwitrepos 269 D. 

cpav for eavtayv 692, 
3 a. 

oxebeew (Exw) 494. 

oxXoAatos compar. 250. — 

Swkparys 193. 

copa; acc. 718 a; dat 
780. 

coos, o@s, 227. 

cwThp 185. 

odppwy compar. 251 a, 


= 
: 


* 


T, pronunc. 19; to 673; 
to go 52-8. 69. 248. 
470; 7 for @ 74; bef. 
Put, 897. 

rt dropped 54. 56-7. 86. 
167. 181 ff. 

-r-stems 176; themes 397. 

-ra for -rns 147. 

-rd- form. suff. 550. 557, 
2, 560, 2. 

tat for ai 272 D. 

-Tat 3 sing. 876; elision 
80 D. 

TaAGS 235. 

Tarra 106. 

rautaot 220 a, 

tapos 283 D. 

_ roy for -tyyv 876 D a. 

Tay (ray) 216, 18. 

tavopés 77 b. 

raviw as fut. 427 D. 

Taits dat. 780. 

Tapa 77 b. 

tapdoow 397; fut. mid. 
496 a. 

Tappées, Tapperal, 247 D. 

Tacow 897; pf. mid. 464 
a. 

-ratos superl, 248 ff. 

TAITE, TAIT, TAUTOY, 265; 
TavT TouTO, 626 b. 

TavTn 283. 779 a. 

Tappos 152 b. 

Taxa 80 c. 258. 

Taxvs compar. 253. 74 
b; tiv taxlornv 622. 
719 a. 

rawy 272 D. 

Taos 213. 

-re 2 pl. 376. 380. 

-re- tense-sufi., see -T°le-. 

vé 1040 ff, 113 d. 80a: 
after art. 666 c; after 
prep. 786 a. 

té for é 261 Db. 

TéOpimmos 82 a. 

TeOipuce (rvpw) 74 c. 

rey 261 D. 

Teivw pf. 448 b. 

Teios 283 D. 

-reipa- form. suff. 550, 

retxos Wt. art. 661. 

relws 283 D. 


GREEK INDEX. 


Texuap, Téexuwp, 166 Dk. 
215 D b. 

TeKuNploy appos. 626 b. 

TéXelos W. gen. 754 e. 

TeXevTaY 968 a. 

trercw 840, 828; fut. 423; 
TeAclw 409 D b. 

Tédos ace. 719. 

Téuva 402 a; w.acc. 714; 
w. gen. 736. 

-reo- vb. adj. suff. 475. 

Téo, Téoror, 277 D. 

-réoy (-réa) 990; éort om. 
611 a; plur. 635 a. 
-réos verb. adj. 299 ec. 
475. 5638. 988 ff; w. 

dat. 769 b.. 991. 

reds for ods 269 D. 

Tépas 183. 

Tépyy 234. 

-Tepos compar. 
296. 269, 278. 

téprw aor. 486 D; aor. 
pass. 473 Da; mid. w. 
gen. 740; w. part. 983. 

téacapes 288, 290; Téa- 
Oepes,  TEeToEpdKovTa,, 
290 D, 4. 

terayév 436 D. 

TeTapTnpopioy 293. 

TeTinws 446 D, 

TéeTHoyv 436 D. 

zTéTopes 290 D, 4. 

TetpamrAn 295 Dc. 

tetpas 295 d. 

Térpace 290 D, 4; rérpa- 
tos 288 D; vrerpax6d 
295 D e¢. 

rev 277 D. 

TEV, TeEovs, TevS, 261 D b. 

TEevxXw, TeTEVKaTa 464 D 


248-52. 


a. 
Téxvn om. 621 e. 
Téw, Téewv, 277 D. 
Téws 283 D. 
ride 283. 
thxw 394; pf. intr. 501. 
Tide Superl. 260 D. 
TnAlios, -éa5e, -ouTos, 273. 
282: 696. 
TnAOv, THAOTaTw, 260 D. 
Thuepoy 69 a. 
Thmos 283 D. 


389 


-rnv 8 dual 876; 2 dual 
378 a. 

Tnvixa, -d5e, -avTa, 283. 

-rnp- form. suff. 550. 

tnpew fut. mid. 496 a. 

-Tn-s (mase. ), See -Ta-. 

-Tns (fem.), see -T7T-. 

-Tnp-to-y neut. 561, la; 
-Tnp-to-s ad}, 569, 3. 

tHo(e) 272 D. 

-rnt- form. suff. 556, 1. 
164 d. 

76 for 60 477. 

tt to oo 67. 397; to o 
69,551, 1. 

-Tt- form, suff, 551, 1. 

-ri 3 sing. 376. 479. 

-T. for -6: 73 b. 473 a. 

-ri6- form. suff. 557, 2. 
560, 3. 

TiOnur 349, 329. 383. 414 
By 405: De av 13a, 
imperf. 419 a, c; aor. 
432. 443. 445 b; mid. 
8138. 816, 11; TiOqpe- 
vos 33 D. 

-TiKo- adj. suff. 565 a. 
tixrw pres. 506, 5; pf. 
451; 6 rexdy 966 a. 
Tiudw 387, 328 ; fut. mid. 
496 a; w. gen. 746; 
w. gen. and dat. 746 b. 

Timijs (-jeis) 238 D. 40 a. 

Tiuwpéw constr. 764, 2 b. 
816, 12. 

tiv for cot 261 D b. 

tivw, tive, 94 D. 

Tipuvs 58. 85 b. 

-Tl-S, SC@ -TI-. 

-TIS, SCC -TLd-. 

gts interrog. 277. 282. 
113 b. 700. 1011; ac- 
cent 277 a; ri 719; 
To TL 676; iva Ti 612; 
tt Tour ZAckas 1012 a3 
tt ov with aor. 839; 
tt ov pédAAw 846 b; th 
phy 1037, 11. 

gis indef. 277. 282. 285. 
113 b. 701; coll. 609 
a; after article 666 c; 
om. bef. gen. 734. 735 ; 
supplied from ovdels 


290 


1058; w. adj. etc. 702 
—3; 71, 719 b; éyyds wT 


719 bs 6 dé Tis, ete. 
654 a. 

tlw 307. 

tha- (@TAnv, TéTAHKA) 


489, 7; 492 D, 10. 

Tuo 580 a. 

-To 3 sing. 376. 

-To- vb. adj. suff. 475. 

-70-¢- tense-suff. 372. 395. 
513. 

Td0ev, 7601, 283 D. 

rot 1037, 10. 77 b. 113 d. 

rot for of 272 D; for col 
261 D. 80 D. 

Tolyap, Tolyapody, Tovydp- 
to, 1048, 5 

toviy for roty 272 D. 

Totvuy 1048, 4. 

toto for tov 272 D. 

Totos, Toidade, ToLovTOS, 
273, 282. 696. 

Toicdea(o)t, 272 D. 

Toiat, Toroide 272 Dz 

TéAua 1389 e; TOAMa 139 
D 


-rov 2, 3 du. 376. 380; 
for -rnv 3876 Db. 

Tovos 98. 

-rop- form. suff. 550. 

-rd-s verb. adj. 299 ¢. 475. 
563. 

TocauTaKis 297, 

téc0s, ToGdG5¢e, TOTOUTOS, 
273. 282.696; tocovTo 
719 bs rocovT® 781 a. 

técoo0s for tTécos 278 D. 

Tote 283; w. part. 976 
b. 

tov from Tis, tls, 277. 

tovvaytioy 77. 

| Toby oja 76. 

TOUT Epoy 77 Dd. 82 D. 

TOUTL, SC OvTOCT. 

TouToyt 274. 

téppa = Téws 283 D. 

-Tpa- for -rep- dat. pl. 188. 

-Tpa- form. suff. 554. 

Tpaywodds 15 a, 

rpamelouey (répmrw) 64 D. 
417 a. 

Tpets, Tpia, 288, 290. . 


GREEK INDEX. 


Tpémw 460 a. 469 a. 472 
a; mid. 812. 818 a, 
tpépw 74 c, 460 a. 469 a. 
472a; fut. mid. 496 a; 
w. two ace. 725. 

Tpéxw 74 C3; W. cogn. ace. 
715. 

-rpia- form. suff. 550, 

-Tpia quant. 139 b. 

Tpids 295 d. 

tptBw fut. mid. 496 a. 

-7p.8- form. suff. 550, 

TpinkovTa 288 D. 

Tpinpns 232. 

tpitds 295 D b. 

TpiTAGTLOS, -TANGLOsS, 295 
b and D. 

TpitAn 295 D ce. 

TpimAovs 295 b. 

tplirous 247 b. 

Tpis 288. 

-Tpl-s, See -Tp1d-. 

tpicods 295 b. 

TpitTavos 619. 

tptraros 288 D. 

Tpernwdptov 293. 

Tpiros 288. 

TPLX 295 ¢; TPXG Tplx- 
64 295 De 

Tpoia 15 a. 

-Tpo-y neut. 554. 

tpdémos acc. 719 a; dat. 
776; mpos tpdmov 805, 
i b: 


Tpds 172 a. 

™ —o0 48. 

-ru- form. suff. 551, 3 

vv for ov or cé 261 D b. 

Tuyxave Ww. gen. 739. 750; 
w. part. 984 and a; 
tux6v 719 b. 

tuvn 261 D. 

TUmTw W. cogn. acc. 725 ¢: 

Tupavvew W gen. 741. 

-TU-S, SC@ -TuU-. 

Tudads w. gen. 758 d, 

Tigw 74 c. 

Topas 218, 

tvxn gen. 761; dat. 776. 

-T@, -TWV, -TwOay, ImMper. 
380 and a. 

t® from Tis, TIs, 277. 

TowAndées 77 D b. 


-TWP, SCE -TOp-. 
Tas 284 D, 
twuTs 14 D ds; twutot 


77-D b. 


Y, name of, 8; quant. 9. 


94. 393a; pronunce. 11 
and a; &-17b. 


v, v interch. with o, @, 


51; w. ev 32. 394, 447 
b. 464 D a. 511. 

v not elided 80 d. 

v om. 44, 207, 401. 412 
b. 559° b. 


-v- stems in, 164 ¢ and f,. 


201 ff., accent 205; 
adj. 229. 562, 1; vb. 
themes 394 a. 445, 489. 
512. 532. 

bBBadrAAew 84 D. 

bBpioris compar, 252 b. 

byins 231 b. 

-vdpio-y neut. 558, 2. 

vowp 182 a. 

ve to v 88 a, 204. 

vt diphth. 13, 14 d. 

vi to v 419 Db. 446 D; 
to vs 201 D. 

-via fem. part. 244. 

vids 216, 19;,.0m. 730 a. 

vuas 264, 

vue, vues, ete, 261 D b. 

vuéas, Duetwy etc. 261 D. 

Uuéerepos 269. 689 ff. 

buy, Uuiv, vw, 264. 

duuc, Buues, 261 D. 17 D 
b 


duu(v) 87 D; 
vuds 269 D. 
-vy- vb. theme 571, 8. 
-uy ace. sing. 205. 
-uyT-stems B41. 

-bvw denom. verbs 571, 8. 
tm for bd 84 D. 

dmat 808. 

dmap 215 b. 

brapxw w. part. 981. 
Uraros (trép) 255 a. 

imép (imrelp) 807. 
dmepdikew W. gen. 751, 
UrepOe(v) 87 D. 
éméprepos, -TaTos, 255 a. 
bmeppalvouc: w. gen. 751. 


see dupe. 








ee Se 


ce ea tr ee ee a ee ee a 


tage ggaitis 


es 
m ~ 
eee 


Smeppuas ws 1008 b. 

umevdovos w. gen. 753 e. 

bmhKoos Ww. gen. 753 d. 

imnpecta w. dat. 765 a. 

bmicxveoua mid. 817. 

imvdw 409 D e. 

tré 808; w. pass. 818 a; 
in comp. 775. 

bmdd5ixos w. gen. 753 e. 

brdkeiua Ww. dat. 775. 

bromrevw aug. 362 a. 

bmoreAns W. gen. 753 e. 

Uroxos Ww. dat. 765. 

-U-S, -€la, -U SCC -v-. 

ds 166 f. 70. 

Souivyn 213 D. 

boTarios 255 D. 

totaros 255. 

boTepaia w. gen. 755; dat. 
782. 

boTepew 816, 4. 

borepi(w w. gen. 749. 

vorepos, -TaTos, 255, 619 
a; w. gen, 755. 

iwikepws 103 a. 

ilumérynros 33 D. 

twiwy, ioros, 254 D, 12. 

-tw vbs. 398 a. 

vw 893 a; vee 602 c 
vovtos 972 a. 


®@, pronunc. 21; doubled 
47. 


GREEK INDEX. 


pevos 969 a; 
with, 968 b. 
ged w. gen. 761. 
pevyw 426; fut. mid. 495; 
w. ace, 712; w. cog. 
acc, 715 a; w. gen. 
745; pr. for pf. am 
banished 820, 82'7. 

gnyds 152. 

gnul 481. 118 ¢; act 
602 ¢3 ob dyu 1028; 
w. infin. 946 b. 

~bdvw 2 aor. 489, 8; w. 
part. 984. 

H0cipw pf. 448 a. 

Poivvbovsr etc. 494. 

~bivw aor. 445 D. 489 D, 
29. 

pliciuBporos 60 D. 

pbovepds 569, 5. 

pbovéw w. dat. 764, 2; w. 
gen, 744; pass. 819 a. 

-pi(yv) 221 D. 87 D. 

pidaitepos, -altatos 250 b. 

oiréw 324. 409 De; fut. 
mid. 496 a; w. two 
ace. 725. 


; Pirouperdns 47 D. 
| piAos compar. 250 b. 258 


D; w. dat. 765. 
pidorivéouae pass. 
497 a. 
plArepos, btAtatos 250 b. 


dep. 


@ bef. r-mute 51; bef. uw | prcyébw 494. 
53; bef. o 54; : for m, B, | pAdE 547, 


459, 


gascivds, padvtatos, 249 D.| bdBos dat. 


dacivw, padvInv, 469 D. 

@alve 343. 326-8. 431 D 
d. 448 b. 451 ¢. 498: 
aor. pass. 473 D a; 
intr. 501; mid. 812 
a; w. part. (inf.) 981. 
986. 

gavepds w. part. 981. 

odos 183 D. 

geidoua: redupl. 436 D. 
742, 


poBéw w. uh 887. 

T76: we. wh 
887; péBovde 219 D. 

doime 175. 

gpovaw 573. 

popew, pophuevat, popjvat 
412 De. 

ddws 183 D. 

ppatw 2 aor. 436 D. 

ppéap 182. 

gpphv 166; in comp. 576 
a. 

dpiocw pf. part. 455 D a. 


epTepos, -TaTos, pepiaros, | ppovTi(w w. Saws 885. 


254 D, 1 
épw aor. 428 D b. 438; 
w. part. 983; w. cogn. 
acc. 715 rem. 


ppovtioTns w. ace. 713. 
ppovdos 82a; om. of cop. 
Way OlL a. 


; epd-! dpoupds 82 a. 


pepar | 





391 


-ppwy 576 a. 

puyade 219 D. 

guyas 246. 

-puns adj. 231 b. 

pvAanos 216 D, 12. 

pvaak 174. 

gpvadcow fut. mid. 496 a; 
w. ace. 712; mid. 816, 
13; dvdakréov 992. 

pviimos 569, 2; w. ace. 
718. 

pipw aor. 431 De. 

piw 393 a; mweptacr 446 
D; -ner 455 Da; 2 aor. 
489, 18; pf. 849; intr. 
500, 3. 

pwpdoua w. part 982, 

pes 172 a. 

as 166. 172 a. 183. 


X, pronunc. 21; bef. +- 
mute 51; bef. p 538; 
bef. o 54; bef. « 67. 
397; doubled 47; for 
ke, y 452. 

-x-themes 397. 

Xaipw w. acc. 712 b. 716 
bivw. dat. 7784 cae 
part. 983; xalpwy im- 
pune 968 a. 

xarerratyw w. dat. 764, 2 
TS: 

xarkera@s dépw w. dat. 
778; w. part. 983. 

xarkoBapera 247 D. 

xapmace 219 D. 

xapters 248, 567. 

xapiCouce with dat. 764, 2. 

xdpis 179 a. 252 ¢; ace. 
719 a. 694. 

xdoKw pf. imper. 456. 

Xeimmov gen. 759, 

xelp 166. 216, 20; om. 
621 c; eis xetpas 772 a. 

xelpwy, -toTos, 254, 2. 

Xepelwv, xépyi, ete. 254 
D, 2 


yee 

xéew fut. 427; aor. 480, 
489 D, 34 

xnadés 152 b. 

xOdv 166. 

x to oo 67. 397, 

xtAds 295 d. 


392 


xitév, nOdv, T4 D. 
xiayv 166. 

xondépos 575 b. 
xopevw w. acc. 712 b. 
xXopyyew W. acc. 714 b. 


xovs 209. 

xXpkoue: 409 Da, d. 412; 
w. dat. 777; in part. 
968 b. 


xpéos 192; xpéws 216, 21. 
Xpeouat, Xxpewmevos, 409 
a, 

xpedy, om. of copula w., 
611 a. 

xpn 486; w. case 712 b; 
w. inf. 949; impf. 854. 
897. 

xpuc@ pf. 849 b. 

xphopmos 569, 2. 

xphorns 150; xpnords ib. 

xpda 138 a. 

xpovos gen. 759; dat. w. 
éy 782 a. 

xpes 176 D. 

x®, xn, xol, 77 c. 82. 

xdéoucar w. gen. 744. 

xapa om. 621 c¢. 

‘xwpis w. gen. 757 a. 


WY, pronunc. 21 b. 

. masc., fem. 
174. 

Waupos 152 a. 

wap 166. 

Wavw w. gen. 738. 

Wwaw 412. 

We for opé 261 D b. 

Wevdoun w. acc. 716 b; 
w. gen. 748. 

Wigdos 152 a. 

Woxh dat. 780. 


164 1. 


O, name of, 8; pronune. 
11; from -o-, see -o-. 
-w- for -o- 455 Db; for 

ov 34 D. 412 a. 
w, 7, interch. 28 a; , i, 


GREEK INDEX. 


w in Att. decl. 159 ff. 

-w fem. 197; for -& (dual) 
272 a. 

-w for -éo (gen. sing.) 
148 D, 3; 154 Da. 

-» Or wy acc. sing. 161. 
198. 

-@ nom. dual 154 b. 

-w adv. 260, 88 c. 

-w verbs 311 c. 406. 

-w- theme vowel 527. 

@ diphth. 18; pronune. 
14.c; for o: 412 a, 

-~ dat. sing. 154 b. 

-@ nom. sing. 199. 

® 76b. 77; w. voc. 709 
as ow. ace, 723:D: 

wyade 77. 

@be 272 c. 2838. 

@d7 13 a. 87 D Ff. 

-wons adj. 586 a. 

@dis 166. 

-/»- variable vowel 310 
a; mode-suffix 378. 
408. 417. 483 b. 444. 
455 a. 473 a. 

@0é augm. 359; &eo- 
kov 493 b, 

ka 258 D. 

aKtpoos 49 D. 

anus 229 D, 253 D. 

-wut for -ow 409 Dh. 

-wy-, -ov-, form. suff. 555. 


561, 2. 
-wy part. ending 883, 6. 
-wy gen. pl. 183. 141. 
154 d. 


ay part. 479. 

Sv 1048, 2. 

@véouae augm. 359; aor. 
éxpigunv 441. 444 a, 
445 a. 489, 9; w. gen. 
746. 

avip, Svepwirot, 77 Db. 

avnros w. gen. 758 f. 

pa dat. 782; w. inf. 
952; omis. of copula 
6lla. 


wpaios Ww. gen. 754 e. 

pact 220, 

epistos 77 Db, 

épopov (Upvigmt) 486 D. 

-ws Att. 2 decl. 159 ff; 3 
decl. 197 ff; gen. sing. 
208, 207 bs gee eae 
154 De; adj. 226 ff; 
pt. part. 244 ; adv. 257 
ff 


&s 111¢. 283; uses 1054, 


1; w. gen. 757 a; after 
pos. 642; w. superl. 
651.1054,1a; in wish 
§70 c; indirect 930 ff. 
1049, 2; final 881 ff. 
885 c; causal 925; w. 
part. 974. 978; in ex- 
clam. 1001 a; @s Td- 
xtoTa 1008 a; w. prine. 
verb 1009 a; w. inf. 
956. 

as to 722 a. 

és 112 b. 120. 283; nad 
&s, od &s, und &s 284. 

@s for ods 216 D, 15. 

ws for és 284 D. 

-wot {for -w-vo1) 407 c. 

éomep 1054, 2. 1037, 3. 
118. 286; w. acc. abs. 
974; with part. 978 a; 
domwep dy et 905 a; 
&omepovy 286. 

dore 1054, 4. 1048, 6. 
1041. 118; after pos. 
642; w. finite verb 
927; with infin. 953; 
expressed by pronoun 
989; dove ov (un) 1028 
b 


-wr- stems in, 1641; 455 
Dy 

wv diphth. 13, 14 4. 

witos, wutds, 14 D d. 77 
Db. 

axpiaw 573. 

ww, wo for aw etc. 409 D 
a, 424 D. 








. 
: 


ay ae) 


ENGLISH INDEX, 


Abbreviations 6 a. 

Ability, adj. 565. 

Ablative in Lat. = Gr. gen. 727. 7477. 
972; = dat. 762. 797. 

Absolute, gen. 970 ff; acc. 973 ff. 

Abstract words 125 c. 621 b rem; 
nouns of number 295 d; in comp. 
576 b; in plural 636; w. art. 660; 
participle 966 b. 

Abundance, adj. 567. 

Acatalectic verse 1077. 

Accent 95 ff; nouns !28 ff; 1st decl. 
141. 147 c. 150; contr. forms 158 ; 
2d decl. 162; 3d decl. 172. 185. 188; 
Swxparns 193. 203; adj. 222 b. 224. 
232 a. 236.4; comp. adj. 232; part. 
242 a. 248.477 c. 480 a; pron. 263— 
4, 272 b. 277 a; verbs 386 ff. 105. 
381 D; mwi-forms 445 a. 482 a. 484 
a. 487, 2, 33; eiui 480; in formation, 
546; in comp. 582-3 ;—in versi- 
fication 1066 a; rhythmic accent 
1071. 

Accompaniment, dat. 774. 

Accountability, gen. 753 e. 

Accusative 123 (3); sing. 1st decl. 139. 
143; 2d. decl. sing. 151. 161; 8rd 
decl. neut. 167; masc. and fem. 169. 
186; barytone stems 179; in -ea@ 
208 c; pl. Ist decl. 148; 2d decl. 
154 e; 8d decl. 169 a, b; in -es 
202; in -eas 208 c; with -de 219; 
adv. 259. 719;—-Synt. 710 ff; dou- 

ble 724; in pass. 724 a; for gen. 
742 b; app. w. sent. 626; w. gen. 
138 a. 743 a. 752 a; w. dat. 764, 1; 
w. prep. 787 ff; aft. as to 722 a; 
w. inf. 939 ff; acc. abs, 973 ff; inf. 
as acc. 959; om. 745 a; acc. antec. 
incorp. 995 a. 996 a. 

Action, suffixes 551-2; expressed by 
tenses 821. 300, 





ff ; trans. and intrans. in diff. tenses 
500 ff ;—Synt. 809 ff; act. for pass. 
952 a; act. for pass. of another vb. 
820. 

Acute accent 96 ff; ch. to grave 
108. 

Addition of vowels 45. 543 b. 579. 

Address, voc. 709; nom. 707 ; w. ovTos 
698. 

Adjectives 222 ff; comparison 248 ff; 
formation 562 ff; comp. 578-9; w. 
xdpis 252 c3;—Synt. 640 ff; attr. 
and pred. 594; position 666 a. 670 
ff; equiv. 600; adj. pron. as adj. 
600; agr’t 620; wt. subst. 621-2; 
fem. wt. subst. 779 a; of place w. 
art. 671; w. cog. acc. 717; w. gen. 
7b3-ff. 730 ¢, e5 w. dat. 765.772 D; 
W. poss. pron. 691; w. rls 702 a; 
w. inf. 962; w. wh 1026;—Verbal 
adj. 299 c. 475. 988 ff; see -réos 
(-réov, -réa) in Greek Ind. See Veu- 
ter, Attributive, Predicate-Noun. 

Adjuncts of participle 975 ff. 

Adonic verse 1111 a. 

Advantage, dat. 767. 

Adverbial acc. 719. 956; part. 968 a. 

Adverbs, elision 80 c; enclit. 113 b; 
formation 257; accent 257 ; end’g in 
-a2 258; compar. 259; demonst. 272 
c; correl. 2838: neg. 287; numeral 
288. 295 c. 297. in compos. w aug. 
360 cf. 580 a; Synt. 641; pred. adj. 
for adv. 619 b; of swearing 723; 
place w. gen. 757. 760 a; w. art. (for 
adj.) 600. 641 a. 666 a; w. gen. 756 
ff ; w.dat. 772 c; w. ri 702 b; we my 
1026; in constr. praegnans 788 b; 
prep. as adv. 785; participle for 
adv. 968 a; rel. adv. 908. 997 a. 
1008. 1054. 

Adversative conjunctions 1046 ff. 


Active voice 298. 802 b; endings 376 | Aegean islands, Ionic of, 2. 


ae 


O94. 


Aeolic, dialect 2.3 a; accent 104 Db; 
inflec. of contract vbs. 409 D h; 
poetry 1109; dactyls 1112 d, e. 

Aeschines, Attic of, 3 d. 

Aeschylus, Attic of, 3 d. 

Affection of body, verbs of 573. 

Age, demonst. pron. 273; correl. 282. 

Agent, suff. 550. 548 b; accent 582 
es; gen. 760 as dat. "709: 991° ace, 
991 a; w. pass. 818 a. 808, 1 b. 798 
G.-805, be. 

Agreement, gen. rules 603-32; pecul. 
of number and gender 688 ff. 

Aiming: gen. 786 a. 739. 

Alcaeus, Aeolic of 8 a; odes of 1065 
b; Alcaic verse 1111 s. 

Alpha priv. 589; c’p’ds w. gen. 753 ¢c; 
see a in Greek Ind. 

Alphabet 5 ff. 

Alternative questions 1017. 

Anaclasis 1121 a. 

Anacoluthon 1063, 

Anacrusis 1079. 

Anapaest 1068; anapaestic rhythms 
1108 ff; logaoedic anap. 1113. See 
Systems. 

Anastrophe, 109. 

Anceps, syllaba anc. 1074, 

Antecedent 598; agr’t with 627; om. 
996 ff; collective 629; definite 699 
a. 909; indefinite 699. 912; in rel. 
sent. 998 ff. 

Antepenult 90. 

Antibacchius 1968. 

Antistrophe 1065 e. 

Aorist 800-3 ; augm. 3543; iter. 493; 
—Synt. 822. 856 ff. 851. 854. 856 
and b; for future 848 ; in wish 871 ; 
subj. w. wy 874; in condit. sent. 895 ; 
subj. for fut. pf. 898 c; part. act. 
972 c; aor. in indir. disc. 935 c. 

Aorist, First, system 316. 327-8. 428 
ff ; tense-suffix 8372; endings 383, 5 
b; accent 389 c. 390; in -Ka 432; 
transitive sense 500. 

Aorist, Second, system 320. 322. 383- 
4.4385 ff; accent 387. 389 a. 391. 
439 ff. 445 b; preform 811. 489 ff. 
489; formation w. @ 494 ; intransi- 
tive sense 500. 

Aorist, Passive, system 319. 822. 468 
ff; tense-suffix 872; endings, 375 


ff ; in depon. verbs 497 ff. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Apocope 84 D. 

Apodosis 879. 889. 

Aposiopesis 1060. 

Apostrophe 79 ff. 

Apposition, kinds of, 624 ff; infinitive 
in, 950; to a sentence 626. 

Appositive 595 a; agr’t 623; subst. 
implied 688 b, c. 691; pron. 705; w. 
voc. 707 a; rel. sent. 1009. 

Aristophanes, Attic of, 3 d. 

Aristotle, dialect of, 3 e. 

Arsis 1071. 1068 b. 


Article 270; crasis 76 b. 77b; proc: 


liticllla; w.adrdés 265. 679 ff; for 
rel. 275 D; as demonstr. 272 b. 272 
D. 275 b;—Synt. 653 ff ; posit. 666 ff; 
attrib. 600 ; as poss. 658 ; w. proper 
name 663; w. num. 664; w. attrib. 
665 ff; w. adj. of place 671; w. pred. 
noun 669; w. pron. 673 ff; w. gen. 
730b; w. was, ete. 672; w. avrds 
aitod 688 a; w.inf. 958 ff; w. oios 
1002; w. yé 1037 a; of incorp. 
antec. 995 ¢; om. 660 ff. 674. See 
Neuter. 

Asclepiadean verse 1115 a, b. 

Aspiration, rej. or transf. 73 ff; of lab. 
or pal. 452. 464 a. 

Assimilation of consonants 46. 431 Da; 
of vowels, 409 D. 

Association, dat. 772. 

Asyndeton 10389. 

Attempted action 825, 832. 

Attic, dial. 3 d; 2d decl. 159 ff. 198, 
227; redup. 368. 358 b. 451 d; fu- 
ture 425. 

Attraction in relat. sentences 994 ff ; 
inverse 1003; of relat. clause into 
infin. 947, 

Attributive 594 a. 620 ff. 633; appos. 
624a; subst. om. 621; w. article 
666 ff; w. cogn. acc. 715; part. 965 
ff; gen. 728 a. 7380. 

Attributive position 666 a. 679. 692, 3. 
730 d. 

Augment 354 ff; w. redupl. 358; on 
sec. syll. 358 a. 859 b,d; comp. vbs. 
360 ff; bef. prep. 861, cf. 580a; 
double 361 a, 362a, b; om. 365 D, 
356 D. 358. 498. 

Bacchius, 1068; 
1126 ff. 

Barytone 99; stems 179. 


bacchic rhythms, 








a 


a it es Pil 


ee © 


ENGLISH INDEX. 395 


Basis 1078 a. Comparative, adj. 248 ff. 236, cf. 296 ; 
Boeotia, Aeolic of, 2. adv. 259 ; = pos. 248 D; from subst, 
Brachylogy 1058. 7 255 D ;—Synt. 642 ff; w. gen. 644, 
Breathings 17 ff. ef. 755. 749; w. # 6438. 645, 1045, 1 
Bucolic, poetry 3 b,d; caesura 1100. b; w. dat. 781; too or very, ete. 
Caesura 1081. 75 D d: mase., fem. 649a; w. inf. 954; conjunc. 1054. 
1100. Compensative lengthening 34. 55 d. 56 
Capacity, adj. w. gen. 754 b. —7. 168 (2). 481. 
Cardinal numbers 288 ff. Completed action 821 ff. 851. 


Cases 123 (8); defect. 215 b;—Synt. | Composition of words 575 ff; eclision 
706 ff; of infin. 959 ff; in rel. sent. 81ff; prep. in comp. 784. 791 ff. 
993 ff. 580 ff. 576 b. 587 ff. 

Case-endings 133. Compound words 540, 575 ff; accent 

Catalexis, catalectic verse, 1077; of 582 ;—Subst. 147 a. 185. 194 ;—Adj. 
iambic verse 1090 ; doubly catalectic 225, 232. 245, 247b. 578; w. gen. 
verses 1078 a. 758 ce, d;—Verbs, 580 ff; aug. 360 

Causal clauses 925 ff. ff; redup. 370; accent 391. 887 b. 

Causal rel. claus. 910; w. wh 1021 b. 445 b; w. gen. 751 ff; w. dat. 775 ;— 

Causal conjunctions 1050, 1054, le. Sentences 876 ff;—Negatives 1018, 

Causative, verbs 571, 2,8; use of mid. 10380. 

816 a. Concession, part. 969 e. 971 c. 979. 
Cause, gen. 744. 746c; dat. 776. 778; | Concessive conjunctions 1053. 

circumst. part. 969 b. 977; gen. abs. | Conclusion 889 ff. 

971 a. Concrete words, pl. for sing. 636 b. 
Characteristic, gen. 732 d. Condition 889 ff; w..un 1021. 1025; 
Choliambus 1094, supplied 872.a; part. 969d. 971 b. 
Choral poetry 1065 c. Conditional, sentences 889 ff; mixed 
Choriambus 1068; choriambic rhythms 901; condit. conjunctions 1052. 889. 

1120. Conditional relat. clauses 910 ff; w. 
Chorus, as individual 688. py 1021. 1025 a. 1026. 

Circumflex accent 96 ff. Couxruence of mode 919. 881 b. 921 b. 

Circumstantial part. 968 ff. Conjunctions 1038 ff; elision 80 b. 

Claiming, vbs, w. gen. 739 a. 107; proclit. 111 ¢; wAqv 758 a; in 

Classes of verbs 392 ff. 502 ff; Ist. fin. clauses 881 ff; condit. claus, 
393. 508 ff; 2d. 394. 511 ff. 421c.| 889 ff; rel. pron. for conj. 999. _ 
429, 447 b. 451b; 3d. 395. 513 ff; | Connection, gen. 729 a rem; w. adj. 
4th. 396 ff. 514 ff; 5th. 402. 521 ff; | 754d; dat. 772b. 754d. 
6th. 403. 530 ff; 7th. 404. 534 ff; | Consecutive conjunctions 1054, 1 f. 
8th. 502. 539. 927, 

Clause 876; as subst. 600; gen. w. | Consonants 19; changes 46 ff; 545d; 

733. See Sentence. doubled 47 ff; added 543 ¢; bef. ¢ 

Close vowels 12.31.87 a. 88 a.75 Db; 65-9 ; position 92 fi; stems in, 130 

stems in, 130. 131. ff. 163 ff. 174 ff. 228 ff; vb. themes 

Cognate, mutes 24 ; accus. 715 ff. 725 ; 463. 528, 532. 

w. adj. 717; om. 745 a. Consonant - declension 131 ff. 163 ff; 

Collective subject 609. 615a; antec. 629. 228 ff. 

Colon 121; in versification 1075. | Constructio ad sensum 633. 

Comma 121. Constructio praegnans 788, 

Command 844 and a. 957 and a. Continued action 800. 821 ff. 851 ff. 

Common, dialect 3¢; quantity 93; | Contraction 37 ff; crasis 76 ff; accent 
gender 126. 165; common form vb. 105 ;—in subst. 144, 157 ff. 160. 183, 
inflec. 311. 383. 406: time (in mu- 190. 192. 198. 194. 198, 202. 201 D. 
sic) 1068 b. 204 ;—in adj. 223. 231 b. 288, 243, 








5396 


244 ;—in adv. 257 ;—in verbs 409- 
12. 323-6. 493 b; aug. 359-60; re- 
dup. 369; aor. pass. 473 a; fut. 
422-27; w. -(o)ai, -(o)o, 883, 43; pur 
forms 415-19; iter. 493 b;—#in 
formation 545 a ;—in verse 1080. 

Co-ordinate, mutes 25. 51;—sentences 

876 a. 1005. 1038 a. 

Copula 595; omitted 611 and a. 988. 

Copulative forms wt. art. 660 a; con- 
junctions 1040 ff. 

Coronis 76. 

Correlation, of pron. 282. 276; of adv. 
283. 

Crasis 76 ff. 82; accent 106, 

Cretic 1068 ; rhythms 1119. 

Crime, gen. 745. 752 a. 

Customary action 824 a, b. 830. 835 
and a. 894 a. 923. 

Cyclic dactyl 1069. 

Dactyl 1068; dactylic rhythms 1099 ff, 

Dactylo-epitritic rhythms 1117. 

Dactylo-trochaic rhythms 1118. 

Dative 123 (3); accent 129. 162b.172; 
sing. Ist decl. 140; 2d decl. 154)b; 
8d decl. 195; plu. Ist decl. 142. 
220 a; 2d decl. 156; 8d decl. 57. 
171 Db; -g for 221 D;—Synt. 
762 ff; w. prep. 787 ff; w. -réos, 
-reovy 991; inf. as dat. 959; dat. 
antec. incorpor. 995 a, 996 a. 

Declarative conjunctions 1049. 1054, 
1d. 

Declension 122 ff. 131 ff; Ist. 134 ff; 
2d. 1514£; 3d. 163 ff; irreg, 210 ff, 

Defectives 215 ff. 166 Dk; adj. 246. 
254 D, 2, 5. 258D; compar. 255; 
perf. 368 D; perf. part. 363 D; aor. 
431 De, 486 D. 

Definitive apposition 624 c. 

Degree, of comparison 248 ff; w. gen. 
730¢c; of difference, dat. 781. 

Deliberation, subjunc. of, 866, 3. 932. 

Demonstratives (pron. and adv.) 270- 
74, 275 b. 282 ;—Synt. 695 ff ; agr’t 
632. as antec. 995 b. 996 b. 997 a; 
w. art. 673 ff; w. interrog. 1012 a; 
of ref. 599; as rel, 284; art. as 
dem. 654-5; rel. as dem. 275 b. 
655 a; dem. w. appos. 625 b; co- 
ord. w. rel. 1005. 

Demosthenes, Attic of, 3 d. 

Nenominative, subst. 541. 556 ff ;—adj. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


564 ff; w. gen. 749;—verbs 3808, 
392 a. 570 ff. 581; augm. 362. 
Denying, vbs. w. wh 1029. 1034 a. 
Dependent, sentences or clauses 876 ff; 
w. gen. 733; with partic. absol. 
973 a; w. interrogatives 1012; w. 
negatives 1019 ff. See Subordinate. 
—Depend. questions; see Indirect. 
Deponent verbs 298 a; w. aor. pass. 
497; w. passive meaning 499, 819d; 
use of mid. 817. 
Depriving, vbs. of, 748 a. 
Descriptive apposition 624 b. 
Desiderative verbs 573. 
Designation, gen. 729 g. 
Determinative comp. 585. 587a; ae- 
cent 582¢, 589. 
Diaeresis 16. 
Dialects 1 ff; dialectic formations, in 
verb 493 ff, 
Diastole 121 a. 
Dicolic verses 1075. 
Digamma 7. See Vau. 
Dimeter 1078. 
Diminutives, suff. 558; neut. 125 d. 
Diphthongs 13; contraction 89; before 
p 49; crasis 77 a,b,¢; syniz. 78; 
elision 80D; om. 545¢.; quant. 
92 ff; short for accent 102. 386; 
shortened bef. vowel 92 D ¢, d; 
; stems 206; augm. 357. 
Dipody 1072. 
| 
| 
| 


Direct, middle 812; object 595; ques- ° 


tion 1011. 1015. 1017. 700; dis- 
course 928. 
Direction, exp. by fem. adj. 622. 
Disadvantage, dat. 767. 
Disjunctive, conjunctions 1045. 
Distich 1065 a; elegiac 1101. 
Distinction, gen. 747-9. 753 g. 
Distributives 295 a. 
Dividing, vbs. of, 725 b. 
Division, adverbs of, 295 c. 

Dochmius, dochmiac rhythms 1125 ff. 
Doric, dialect 2.3b; future 426 ; con- 
traction 409 D g; strophes 1117. 
Double, consonants 26. 46 ff. 355. 

365. 420 D. 428 Da. 545d; position 
92; double object 724; double neg. 
1030 ff; augm. 361 a. 362 a, b. 
Drama, Doric in, 38 b. 
Dual 123; dual fem. of adj. 222 c; of 
pron. 272 a. 275 a;—Synt., w. two 





ENGLIISH INDEX. 


sing. subj. 606 a. 623 b; w. sing. 
vb. 605. 

Duration, gen. 729 d. 

Effect, acc. 714. 

Effort, verbs of, 885 ff. 

Elegiac distich 1101. 

Elements of verb 358 ff. 

Elision 79 ff; accent 107. 119 c¢. 

Ellipsis 1057. See Omission. 

Emphatic; enclit. 119b; pronouns 
263. 273. 274 (with -i), 285. 677. 
697; avrds 680 ff. 687-8; superl. 
651 ff; negatives 1032; particles 
1037. 1045 a; subj. of inf. 940b; 
prolepsis 878; place of ay 862; 
ovde eis 290 a. 

Enclitics 113 ff; adv. 283; vb. 480. 
48la. 

Endings, of decl. 122; accented 172. 
188; local 217 ff ; adj. of two, 225. 
230. 234. 286. 245; adj. of one, 
246. 252a; comp. sup. 248 ff; 
258 ff. 296; verbs 306. 375 ff. 383 ff; 
suffixes 542 ff. 

English verse 1066 a. 

Enjoying, gen. 736 a. 740. 

Epenthesis 65. 407. 

Epic dialect 3 ce. 

Epicene 127. 

Epistolary aorist 838. 

Epitrite 1117. 

Epode 1065 ¢. 

Equivalents of subst. and adj. 600. 

Kthical dative 770. 

Hupolidean verse 1115 d. 

Euripides, Attic of, 3 d. 





397 


85 ff ;—clauses 880 ff. 911 ;—con- 
-junc. 881 ff. 1054, le;—-syll. of 
verse 1074, 

Finite modes 299 a;—Synt. 865 ff; 
pred. 592; agr’t 603 ff; w. mpiy 
924; w. dore 927. 

First tenses 303, 304 a. 

Fitness, adj. 565. 

Forbidding, vbs. w. uA 1029. 1084 a. 

Formation of words 540ff; of vbs. 
358 ff. 392 ff. 

Formative lengthening 33 a. 

Fractional expressions 293. 

Fulness, adj. 567. See Plenty. 

Function, suff. expressing 557, 1. 

Future 300-3; system 815, 326. 420 
ff; tense-suffix 372. 420; like pres- 
ent 423.427; contract 423-7 ; trans. 
500; wanting 495. 496 a; mid. as 
act. or pass. 495, 496 ;—Syntax 822. 
843; opt. and inf. 855; univ. truth 
824 b; pres. for 828 a; subj. for 
868; in final sent. 881 c. 885 ff; 
w. ov wy 1032;—Fut. pass., endings 
375 ff; formation 474. 

Future Perfect 300-3; formation 459 
ff. 466 and b; tense-suffix 372; 
active 467; Synt. 822. 850, 849 ¢. 
855 b; aor. subj. for, 898 c. 

Future supposition 898 ff. 900; con- 
dit. rel. 916. 917. 

Galliambic verse 1122 i, j. 

Gender 123 (1). 124 ff. 152. 164 ff; 
hetegog. 214; adj. of one, 246. 252 
a; pecul. of synt. 6338 ff. 630. 632 a; 
in formation 546 ff. 


Exclamation, nom. 707b; acc. 723b; | General condition 890. 894; condit- 


gen. 761; rel. 100la; infin. in. 
962. 

Expectation, modes for, 898 ff. 900 ff. 
921; of answer 1015. 

Extent, acc, 720; gen. 729d. 

Factitive aorist 836 a. 841 b. 

Fearing, fin. clauses 887 ff; w. ut ov 
1033, 

Feet, in verse 1068. 

Feminine 123 (1). 125b; 2 decl. 152; 
3 decl. 164 ff; adj. 222 a, b,c. 228; 
wt. masc. 246 D; irreg. 247; 2 pf. 
part. 451 De; for neut. 730 e;— 
fem. caesura 1100. 

Figures of syntax 1057 ff. 

Final sounds, laws of, 75 ff ;—cons. 


18 


rel, 914. 928. 

General truth 824 a, b. 840. 

Generic article 656 ff. 

Genitive 123 (3); accent 129. 162 b. 
172; sing. 1st decl. 140. 148 ff; 2a 
decl. 154; 8d decl. 203. 208 b; 
plur. Ist deel. 141. 150; 2d deel. 
154; 38d decl. 192. 208; -@ey for, 
217 D; -ge for, 221 D ;—-Synt. 727 
ff; as attrib. or pred. noun 600. 
666 b; pred. w. infin. 732 c; as 
subj. 734; as obj. 735; two 731; w. 
xdouw, Sixnv, 719 a; w. vbs. 738 ff; 
epd vbs. 751 ff; w. acc. 738 a. 
743 a. 752 a; for acc. 748 a.; w. 
dat. 765 a; w. prep. 787 ff; w. 


398 


compar. 643 b; w. poss. pron. 691. 
692, 2; w. adj. and adv. 753 ff; w. 
part. 966 a; gen. abs. 970 ff; inf. 
as gen. 959; = about 7383 a; gen. 
antec. incorp. 995 a. 996 a. See 
Objective, Subjective, Time, ete. 

Gentiles, suff. 560. 564 a. 

Glyconic verse 1111 I-n, 1116. 

Gnomic aorist 840. 

Grave accent 96 ff. 

Groups of feet 1072. 1075. 

Hellas, Hellenes, 1 

Hellenistic dialect 4 f. 

Hephthemimeris 1102 d; hephthemi- 
meral caesura 1100. 

Herodotus, Ionic of, 3 ¢. 

Hesiod, Epic of, 8 ce. 

Heteroclites 212. 

Heterogeneous 214. 

Hexameter 1078; dactylic 1100. 

Hexapody 1072. 

Hiatus 75; in epic poetry 75 D; at 
end of verse 1074 a. 

Hindering, vbs. of, 963; w. wy 1029. 
1084 a, 

Hippocrates, Ionic of, 8 ce. 

Hipponactean verse 1084. 1094, 

Historical present 828. 

Homer, epic of, 8 c; vau 72 D. 

Hoping, vbs. of, 948 a. 

Hortative subjunc. 866, 1. 909 a. 

Hyperbaton 1062. 

Hypercatalectic verse 1078 b. 

Hypodiastole 121 a. 

Hypothetical indic. 895. 925 a. 935 a8 
infin. for, 964; part. for, 987. 
Tambus 1068: irrational 1070 ; iambic 

’ rhythms 1088 ff. 

Ictus 1071. 

Imperative 299; endings 380. 383, 2. 
385, 2, 73 b. 415 b. 441-3; accent 
387. 391 ¢; perf. act. 456; fut. for, 
844 ; time of, 851 b; potent. opt. for 
872 d; in simp. sent. 878 ff; in con- 
dit. sent. 893 b. 898; in rel. sent. 
909 a; inf. for, 957; for condit. 
902; w. uh 1019; om. 612. 

Imperfect 800-1. 308; aug. 354; for- 
mation and infl. 372. 392 ff; w-form 
418 ff. 419 a; 
6 494 ;--Synt. 822. 829 ff. 849 c; in 
wish 871; in condit. sent. 894, 895 
ff; in final claus. 884; in wnidl- 


iter. 493; form with | 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


clauses 921 b; in ind. dise. 935 b, 
936. 

Impersonal verbs 602 d and rem. 635 a. 
743 b. 949; part. 973; v. a. in -réop 
(-réa) 990; pers. for i impers. 944, 

Implied indirect discourse 937. 881 a. 
921 rem. 925 b. 

Improper, diphthongs 13. 96 a; hiatus 
75 De; prepos. 758. 784 a. 

Inceptive, class 408. 5380 ff. 495 a; 
aorist 841. 

Incorporation 995. 

Indeclinable pron. 279; 
b, d. 

Indefinites (pron. and adv.) 277-9. 
282-8, 267; enclit. 118 b;—Synt. 
701 ff;--indef. action 821 ff. 300; 
subj. of inf, 942. 

Indefinite Relatives (pron. and adv.) 
280-83. 294; str’gth’d 285-6 -— 
Synt. 699 a; as indefin. 1002a; as 
interrog. 1011 ff. 

Independent, nom. 708; 
ov or wy, 1019 ff. 

Indeterminate, subj. 602 d. 973 a, 

Indicative 299 ; endings 876 ff; tenses 
823. 824 ff; in simp. sent. 865; in 
wishes 871; fin. clauses 881 ¢. 884. 
885 ff. 888; in condit. sent. 893. 
894. 896, ff. 898 ff; rel. clauses 909 
ff. 914 ff. 921 b. 922; causal clauses 
925 ff; result 927; indir. dise. 982 
ff; w. neg. 1020 ff. 1032. 

Indirect, compounds 581; middle 813; 
object 593 ; dat. 7638 ff. 951; reflex- 
ives 6838 a ff. 

Indirect discourse 928 ff; inf. in., 946; 
neg. in,, 1022; questions 700. 9380. 
1016. 1017. 1022 a; implied ind. 
disc. 925 b. 987. 881 a. 921 rem, 

Inferential conjunctions 1048. 

Infinitive 299 b: endings 381. 383, 5. 
385,5; accent 889; 2 aor. 4385 D b. 
443 ¢ ;—Synt. 938 ff: time of, 851. 
852 ff; w. pred. noun 732 C3; equiv. 
of subst. 600; as subj. 602 ‘d, rem. 
939 a. 946 a. 949 : w. kal pS 655 
a; w. pos. for compar. 6423 w. 
MéeAAw 846; w. &pedov 871 a; in 
indir. disc. 980. 946; by attraction 
947; for supp. part. 986; w. neg. 
1023. 1024. 1084; w. é¢” re 999 
a; w. oios 1000. 


num. 290 


sentence w. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Inflection 122 ff; verbs 306. 354 ff. 
875 ff. 406 ff 
Initial vowels, crasis 76; syniz. 78; 


aphaeresis 83; aug. 356. 359; re- 
dupl. 867-9 ;—initial o 70. 

Insertion of mute 60. 464 D a. 

Instrument, suff. 554; dat. 776 ff. 

Intensive, pron. 265 ;—Synt. 678 ff; 
w. dat. of accomp. 774 a;—verbs 
574 ;—particles 1037. 

Interchange of vowels 28 ff. 511 (see 
Variation) ; in formation 575 a;— 
of quantity 36. 

Interest, dat. 766 ff. 

Interjection 709 a. 761. 

Interrogation, mark of, 121. 

Interrosatives (pron. and adv.) 277. 
278. “994 ; Synt. 700. 1011 ff; w. 
art: 676; as pred. adj. 1012 a; in- 
terr. particles 1015; ovxovy 1048, 
2 a;—interrog. sentences 1010 ff; 
followed by imperat. 875. 

Intransitive verbs 593 a; mixed sense, 
trans. and intr. 500 ff; sometimes 
tr. 712. b, c 810; = Eng. trans. 
712 a; w. verbal noun 713; denom. 
571,4; w. acc. 714 b; w. dat. 764, 
2; w. gen. as subj. 7384; mid. 814 
a wass. S19.a; b, ¢. 

Introductory rel. clause 1009. 

Inverse attraction 1003. 

lonie, dialect 2. 3 c; 
rhythms 1121 ff. 

Iota paragogicum 274. 

Tota subscript, see « in Greek Ind. 

Tota-class 396 ff. 514 ff. 

Irrational sylable 1070. 

Irregular, decl. 211 ff; adj. 247; 
meaning in verb-forms 495 ff. 

Isocrates, Attic of, 3 d. 

Italy, Doric of, 2. 

Iterative formation 498. 

Ithyphallic verse 1085 a. 

Kindred, accus. 715 a, b. 

Koppa 7. 289. 

Labials 24; aspirated 452.470. 464 a; 
labial stems 164]. 174 ff; themes 
395. 421 a. 513. 515. 

Latin alphabet 8 a. 

Latin letters corr. to Greek 5. 7. 15. 

Lengthening of vowels 33 a. 34 ff. 64 
a. 168. 187 b. 237. 249; augm. 354 
ff; redup. 367; after Att. redup. 


feet 1068; 


399 


368; verb-theme 421 b. 431. 440, 
447 b. 451 c. 504, 444 D. 359. 400, 
403. 466 a; pe-forms 414. 415 b, 
440; in contract verbs 409 D; perf. 
part. 455 D b; in formation 544 d. 

Lesbos, Aeolic of, 3 a. 

Letters 5; names neut. 125 d; for 
numbers 288 ff. 

Likeness, dat. 772. 

Line, verses used’ by the, 1065. 

Linguals 24. 470; bef. o 54. 421 a; 
ling. stems 176 ff; ling. verbs 421 
a. 516, 447 a. 

Liquids 28. 58. 64; mute and liq. 93. 
249 a. 865 a ;—liq. stems 184 ff. 170 
a; lig. themes 309. 519; liq. verbs 
309, 326-8, 448. 460. 463. 518 ff; 
fut. 422; 1 aor.431; 1 pf. 448; pf. 
mid, 463. 

Local, endings 217 ff; 
1056. See Place. 
Locative case 220, 762. 

Logaoedic rhythms 1108 ff. 

Long vowels 9; interchange w. short 
83; syniz. 78; quant. 92; accent 
100 ff; augment 356 a; in subj. 
tense-suffix 372. See Lengthening. 

Lyric poetry 3 a, b, d. 1065. 

Lysias, Attic of, 3 d. 

Menner, adv. 283. 1054; expr. by fem. 


conjunctions 


adj. 622; dat. 776 ff; circ. part. 
969 a; suppl. part. 985; rel. claus. 
908 


Masculine 123 (1). 125. 164; for fem. 
225, 229 a. 246.637 b; in dual 222 
c; for neut. 632 a. 730 c; for per- 
son in general 639 ;—caesura 1100. 

Material, adj. 566; gen. 729 f. 732 a 

Meaning, irregularities 495 ff; in 
comp. 584 ff. 

Means, suff. 554; dat. 778 ff; part. 
969 a. 

Measure, gen. 729 d. 732 a. 

Mental action, gen. 742. 

Metaplastic 213. 

Metathesis 64 ff. 219 a. 400. 448 e. 
460. 485 D. 473 Da; of quantity 
36, 455 b. 

Metre 1066. 

M.-forms, inflection 311. 329 ff. 413 ff. 
439 ff. 476. 5384; mode-suffix 373-4, 
aor. subj. 873 D; opt. 888; endings 
377. 385. 


400 


Middle mutes 25. 47; w. liquid 93 b. 

Middle voice 298. 302 a. 459 ff; parti- 
ciple-suffix 3882; endings 376 ff. 
383, 4. 385, 4; perf. 459 ff; fut. 
495, 496 ;:—Synt. 811 ff. 819 d. 992. 

Mixed, class 502. 539; senses, trans. 
and intrans. 500; forms of supposi- 
tion 901. 

Modes 299. 857 ff. 

Mode-stem 305 b. 

Mode-suffixes 372 ff. 417. 483 b. 444 
D; of aor. opt. 434, 

Modern Greek 4 g, 

Molossus 1068. 

Monodies 1065 d. 

Monometer 1078. 

Monopody 1072. 

Motion, obj. 722; w. prep. 788 ff; w. 
adv. 788 b; vbs. w. gen. 748 b. 

Movable consonants 87 ff cf. 80 rem. 

Multiplicatives 295 b; w. gen. 755 a. 

Mutes 24 ff; changes 51-54; dropped 
403 c; mute and liquid 93. 249 a. 
365 a;—stems 174 ff. 1641; mute 
themes 309; verbs 3809. 328. 439 
D. 468. 470. 511; fut. 421 a. 424 
ff; 1 perf. 447 a; pf. mid. 468. 

Nasals 28; inserted 402 c;—nasal 
class 402. 521 ff. 418. 495 a. 

Nature, long by, 92. 

Negatives 88 a, b. 287. 290 a; w. ud 
723; w. apxhv 719 a; w. fut. for 
imper. 844; w.imper. 874; fearing 
887; ef dé wn after, 906 b; purpose 
960; neg. result 961;—Neg. pron. 
and adv. 287 ;—Neg. sentences 1018 
ff. 1043 ff; foll. by aan 4 1046, 2 
c; by dre wn 1049, 1 rem. 

Neuter 123 (1). 125 d, e. 164. 246; pl. 
w. sing. verb 604, 610 a; in app. w. 
sent. 626 b; attrib. 621 b; for 
masc. or fem. 617. 681 a; pronoun 
w. gen. 733; verbal in -réos 990; 
relative 999. 1009;—neut. art. w. 
gen. 730 b; w. inf. 958 ff. 1029; 
w.. part. 966 b;—neut. adj., as a 
259. 719 b; as cogn. ace. 716 b; w. 
gen. part. 7380 c; as degree of diff. 
781 a. 

Nominative 123 (8); sing. Ist. decl. 
134. 189; in adj. 222. 228; 2d. 
decl. 151; 8d. decl. 167. 168. 241; 
plur. 1st decl. 222 b; 3d decl. 


ENGLIISH INDEX. 


208 a;—Synt. 706 ff; indep. 708; 
for voc. 707. 155; as subj. 601; in 
app. w. voc. 709 a; w. sent. 626; 
w. inf. 940. 957; inf. as nom, 959; 
nom. antec. incorp. 995 a; omitt. 
996 a. 

Non-reality 871. 884. 895 ff. 900 e. 
915. 919 b. 921 b. 935-4, 

Notation of numbers 289, 

Nouns 122 ff; in comp. 575 ff. ef. 
581; of number 295d. 

Number 123 (2); heterog. 214; defec- 
tive 215; in verbs 299 a; pecul. of 
syntax 633 ff ;—words of, 282. 295 
d. 296. 

Numerals 288-97 ; advbs. 288. 295 ¢, 
297; w. prep. 600 b; w. art. 664; 
W. oi wavTes 672a; w. avrés 681 b; 
w. tls 702 a; w. ws 1054, 1 a. 

Object 593; accus. 711-138. 725-6; 
of motion 722; double 724; w. 
cogn. acc. 715; w. pred. acc. 726; 
gen. 735 ff; w. inf. or part. 9388b; 
as subj. of inf. 941; w. supp. part. 
980; w. -réos, -réov, 990; inf. as obj. 
945. 946. 948. See Direct, Indirect. 

Objective, gen. 729 c. 7382 a. 735. 

Obligation, imperf. of 834. 897. 

Oblique cases 123 a; as obj. 5938. 

Odes of Pindar 1065 ce. 

Omission, of diaer. 16 a; vowels 43-4. 
545c¢; aug. 354 D. 356 D. 358. 4938 ; 
redup. 863 D. 491; cons. of redup. 
365; o of fut. and 1 aor. 422 ff. 
431; a in pf. 454; stem-vowel in 
comp. 575 a; endings 383. 1, 2;— 
of subj. 602; subst. 621. 966. 972 
a; antec. 996 ff; article 660 ff. 
674; cog. acc. Siknv, etc. 745 a; 
obj. after wd 723 a; vids, oikos '730 
a; Ts, Tl, 784. 7385; de@ 743 Db; H 
647; av 872 e. 894 b. 897 b. 898 b. 
921a; subj. w. inf. 940 ff; part. w. 
Tuyxdvw 984 a; before dws 886; 
in fin. clauses 883; condit. sent. 
903 ff; rel. sent. 1006. 1007; gen. 
abs. 972 a ;—omission of arsis 1076. 

Open vowels 12. 28. 31. 37 ff. 

Opposition, dat. 772. 

Optative 299; mode-suffix 374. 484; 
pu-form 418 a. 419 b, c. 445. 473 a; 
endings 876. 879..377 D; accent 
102. 386. 888. 390. 418 b. 445 a: 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


1 aor. 434; pf. act. 457; pf. mid. 
465; contract 410 Da; wanting 
445:—Synt., time of, 851. 852 ff; 
fut. opt. 855. 872 f; opt. in simp. 
sent. 869 ff; fin. clauses 881 ff; 
condit. sent. 893 b. 894. 896. 900 ; 
rel. sent. 909 a. 914. 917. 921. 923; 
causal clauses 925b; indir. disc, 
932, 2. 9338; implied indir. disc. 
881 a. 925 b; w. neg. 1020 ff. 

Oratio recta, obliqua, 928. See Jn- 
direct discourse. 

Ordinals 288 ff; w. acc. 721; w. airds 
681b; adj. inst. of adv. 619 a. 

Origin, gen. 729 a rem. 732 a. 

Orthothone 113 b. 119. 

Oxytone 99 ff; stems 170 a. 199. 205. 

Paeons 1068 and a. 1119. 

Palatals 24. 41. 55; aspir. 452, 470. 
464 a; pal. stems 1641. 174 ff; 
themes 42] a. 

Paroemiac verse 1104 e. 1105 ff; loga- 
oedic 1111 f, g. 

Paroxytone 99 ff. 

Participle 299 b; inflection 241-44; 
suffixes 382. 563; endings 382. 383, 
6. 385, 6; accent 389.477 ¢;2 pf. 451 
De; pf. w. eiui 457. 464. 465. 467; 
comparison 256 ;—Synt. 965 ff. 938 ; 


time of, 856; agr’t 620; agr’t w. | 
pred. noun 610; equiv. of adj. 600; | 


om. 984a; attrib. 666 ff; w. dat. of 
interest 771 a,b; neut. pass. 819 c; 
w. av 987; for condit. 902. 969d. 
971b; rel. w. 1004; w. interrog. 
1012; w. neg. 1025. 1027; w. wé 
979 a. 

Particles 1036 ff; accent 113 d. 120; w. 
indef, rel. 285; of wishing 870 a, 
b, ¢; adjuncts of part. 975 ff; in- 
terrog. 1015 ff; neg. 1018 ff. 

Particular conditions 890. 893. 

Partitive, appos. 624d; gen. 729e. 
730 c, d,e. 782a. 734. 755 b. 

Passive voice 298. 302 a. 468 ff; pas- 
Sive systems 468 ff; tense-suffixes 
372; endings 875 ff; as mid. in dep. 
verbs 497 ff;—Synt. 818 ff; w. in- 
det. subj. 602d; w. acc. 724 a. 
725¢; w. nom. for ace. 726b; w. 
gen. 750 a; w.dat. of agent 769; w. 
prep. 798 c. 805, 1 c. 808, 1 b; w. inf. 
as subj. 946 a. 


401 


Past supposition 892 ff. 895 ff; condit. 
rel, 914. 915. 

Past tenses 301, 2. 376. 379. 388, 3; 
endings 376; contrary to fact, see 
Non-reality. 

Past time 301. 354. 828. 829. 836. 847. 
851 ff. 

Patronymics, suff. 559. 

Pause, caesural 1081; at end of verse 
1074 a. 

Pentapody 1072. 

Penthemimeris 1102 b; penthemimeral 
caesura 1100, 

Penult 90. 

Perfect 3800-1. 303; redup. 3638 ff; 
perf. system 446 ff ;—Synt. 822. 847. 
851 and b. 853. 856; univ. truth 
824 b; pres. for, 827; aor. for, 837. 

Perfect Active system 317 ff. 321 ff. 


372. 882; endings of inf. 888, 5b; 
w. pres. form 455 Da; pf. act. with- 
out -a- 454. 490 ff; meaning 456. 
491-2; intrans. 501. 

Perfect, Middle ; system 459 ff; accent 
889 b; 3 pl. 376 D d;—Passive, w. 
indeterm. subj. 602 d; w. dat. of 
agent 769. 

Yeriod 121. 

Periphrastic fut. w. wéAAw 846. 

Perispomenon 99 ff. 

| Person 261 ff. 299 a. 375 ff; subj. 608 a; 

rel. subj. 627a; two or more subj. 
606; 1 pl. for sing. 637; for dual 
378; 8d for Ist, 2d, 686a; person 
in general 602 c. 639. 

Person (= functionary), suff. 557. 

Personal, pron. 262 ff; a’rdés 265 a; 
Synt. 677. 603 a; avrés 682; for 
poss. 689; for reflex. 684; for rel. 
1005 ; equiv. of subst. 600; gen. w. 
art. 673 b. 676; as eth. dat. 770 ;— 
endings 375 ff;—-constr. for impers. 
944; constr, w. -réos 989. 

Phalaecean verse 1111 q. 

Pherecratean verse 1111 b—i. 1116. 

Phoenician alphabet 8 a. 

Phrase as subst. 600 a; prep. in comp. 
588. 

Pindar, Dor. 3b; odes, 1065 c. 

Place, adj. 255 D; 671. 754 f;—adv. 
63. 217 if. 283... 757. -760: a; 90% 
1056 ;—endings 217 ff; suff. 561; 


336. 446 ff; part. 244 ; tense-suffixes 





4.02 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


design. wt. art. 661. 663; gen. 760. | Prepositions, crasis 76 b; elis. 80 b; 


754 f; dat. 783; w. prep. 787 ff. 
791 ff; in rel. expr. 998 b. 999b; 
condit. rel. clauses 912. 

Plato, Attic of, 8d, cf. rem.; use of 
avd 681 a. 

Plenty, gen. 748. 753 ¢. 

Pleonasm, 1061. 

Pluperfect, 300-1. 803. 449; aug. 354. 
358; redup. 363; tense-suffix 372 
D; 3 pl. 376 Dd; formation and 
inflect. 446 ff ; endings 458 a; plupf. 
without -a- 454. 490 ff.—Synt. 822. 
847 ff; in wish 871; in condit. 
clause 895 ;—plup. pass. 602 d. 769 ; 
—in ind. disc. 935 b. 

Plural 123 (2); w. sing. vb. 604-5; pl. 
and dual, 634; pl. for sing. 635; 
pl. ending for dual 878 ; generaliz- 
ing plur. 636 b; pl. of ‘modesty’ 
637; pl. vb. w. sing. subj. 606 ff; 
w. coll. subj. 609. cf. 629. 

Poetry, kinds of, 1064 ff. 

Porson’s rule, 1091 (5). 

Position, long by, 92. 249 a. 258 D. 

Position, phrases of, 788 c. 

Positive, 248 ff. 642. 

Possession, gen. 729 a. 732 a. 754 ¢. 
768 a, 

Possessive pron. 269. 689 ff; as reflex. 
692-3; w. art. 675; art. as, 653; for 
obj. gen. 694 ;—poss. compounds 
586. 587 b. 589. 

Possessor, dat. 768. 

Possibility, vb. w. superl. 651 a. 

Postpositive 1036. 

Potential opt. 872; 900. 925 a. 927. 

Power gen. 753 b. 

Praxillean verse 1112 e. 

Predicate 592; w. acc. of specif. 718 
rem.; pred. noun 614 ff; adj. 549 b. 
615 ff. 610 a. 619; subst. 595 b. 614. 
618. 706 b; vb. agrees w. 610; pred. 
noun w. attrib. part. 667 b; w. art. 
669 ff; in nom. 706 b; in acc. 726; 
in gen. 732; in dat. 777 a; w. inf. 
939 ff; inf. as pred. 950; interrog. 
1012 a; v. a. in -réos 988 ff; pred. 
part. 967 ff. 

Predicate position 670 ff. 680. 689-90. 
692, 8 a. 
Prepositional 

from, 588. 


phrases, 





compounds 





| 





apocope 84 D; accent 107. 109, 111 
b; w. pron, 2638. 275 D; aug. 360 ff. 
362 a, b. ef. 580 a; in comp. 360 ff. 
580. 576 b. 587; 712 ¢ 751 f.— 
Synt. 784 ff; w. case, for adj. or 
subst. 600. 666 ff. 648; with nu- 


meral 600 b; for condition 902; _ 


c 


bef. 6 pév, 6 5é, 786 b; w. avros 
avrov 688 a; w. inf. 958; om. in rel. 
sent. 1007; w. ye 1037, 1 a; w. 
particle and article 786 b;—im- 
proper 784 a; w. gen. 758. 

Prepositive 1036, 

Present 300 ff. 303; system 314. 323 
ff. 329 ff; formation 372. 392 ff; 
inflection 406 ff; i-form 413 b; 
redupl. 371. 506 ff. 403 b. 404; 
tense-suffixes 872; endings 876 ff; 
contract 409-12.—Synt. 822 ff, 824. 
851. 858. 856 and a; imper. w. pA 
874, 

Present supposition 892 ff. 895 ff; 
condit. rel. 914. 915. 

Priapean verse 1115 ¢. 

Primitives 541, 546 ff. 562 ff; verbs 
308. 392 a. 

Principal, tenses 301. 376. 879; parts 
of verbs 804 e. 508 ff; sentences or 
clauses 876. 1009 a; principal cae- 
sura 1081. 1100. 

Probability 898. 900. 916, 917. 

Proceleusmatic 1068 a, 

Proclitics 111 ff. 

Prohibition 866, 2. 874. 1032 a. 


| Prolepsis 878. 
Prolonged long syllables 1067. 


Promising, vbs. of, 948 a. 

Pronoun 261 ff; enclit. 118 a; accent 
263. 272 b. 277 a.—Synt. 677 ff; of 
ref. 597. 627 ff; adj. and subst. 
pron. 600; app. w. sent. 626; om. 
602 a; w. art. 678 ff; w. yé 1087, 1; 
w. 67 1037, 4. See Neuter, Refer- 
ence, Personal, etc. 

Pronunciation 11 a.14. 18 a. 19. 20. 
rt Mae: 8 8 2 

Proparoxytone 99 ff. 

Proper names 138 a. 149. 159 D. 185. 
198. 194. 206 D; nomin. imdep. 
708; w. or wt. art. 663; w. dd¢ 
etc., 674. 

Properispomenon 99 ff. 


0 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Prosodiac verse 1104 c; logaoedic 
1101 bh, 

Protasis 879. 889. 

Prothetic vowel 45, 543 b. 

Punctuation 121. 75 De. 

Purpose 881 ff. 911; inf. 951. 960. 
953 a; fut. part. 969 c; w. uh 1021. 

Pyrrhic 1068 a. 

Quality, pronouns of, 273. 282; suf- 
fixes 556. 553 a. 

Quantity, of vow. 92 ff; variable 393 a. 
508; transfer of, 36. 160. 208 a. 
208 b, d. 455 b. 465 D;—pron. of, 
2'73, 282; gen. of, 743 b. See Acas- 
ure. 

Questions; vb. omitted 612. See Jnter- 
rogative. 

Quotation, direct, indirect, 928. 

Keality 865. 893; contrary to reality, 
871. 884. 895 ff. 900 c. 915. 919 b. 
921 b. 935 a. 

Recessive accent 104 b. 386. 546. 445 
b. 487, 8; in comp’ds. 582. 

Reciprocal pron. 268. 686 b. 

Redundant neg. 1029. 

Reduplication 863 ff. 446. 450. 459. 
73 a; aug. 358; accent 391 b; in 
pres. 371. 408 b. 404; in Ist class 
506; in 6th class 530; in 7th class 
534; in 2 aor. 436 and D. 

Reference, pron. of, 597. 627 ff; an- 
tec. implied 633 b,c. See Demon- 
strative, Relative. 

Reflexive pron. 266. 261 D a;—Synt. 
683 ff. 692-3. cf. 677 a; equiv. of 
subst. 600; w. art. 673 b; for re- 
cipr. 686 b; emphat. 688; w. com- 
par. 644; w. mid. 812 b. 

Refusing, vbs. w. uf 1029. 1034 a. 

Relatives (pron. and adv.) 275. 276. 
282, 284. 76 b;—Synt. 699. 598. 
908 ff. 993 ff; agr’t 627 ff; antec. 
om. 996; after art. 655 c; as de- 
monst. 275 b. 654 d; in indir. quest. 
1011 a; w. particles 1048, 2. 285; 
w. mép 286. 1037, 3; w. 64 1037, 4; 
art. as rel. 275 D;—rel. clauses 908 
ff; w. wh 1021 a, b; sentences, 993 
ff; 1046, 1 ¢; rel. continued by dem. 
1005. See Indefinite Relatives, and 
Reference, 

Resolution in verse 1080. 

Respect, dat. 780. 


403 


Rest, with prep. 788; with adv. 788 b. 

Restrictive article 656 ff. 

Result, suffixes 553 ; infin. 953 ; clauses 
of, 927; rel. claus. 910; w. un 1021 b. 

Rhythm 1066. 

Romaic language 4 g. 

Root 543. 807. 253. 

Root-class 404, 413. 534 ff. 

Root-vowel. See Variation. 

Rough, breathing 17 ff; after od 88a; 
in aug. 357 b;—-mutes 25, 27; pro- 
nunc. 21; changed to smooth 73-4. 
47. 364. 

Ruling, vbs. w. gen. 741. 

Sampi 289, 

Sappho, Aeolic of, 3a; odes of, 1065 
b; Sapphic verse 1111 r. 

Saying, vbs. of, 929. 946; pass. pers. 
944 a. 

Scazon 1084. 1094. 

Second tenses 303. 304 a. 320-22. 489 
ff. 501. 507 ff. 514, 518. 

Secondary tense-stems 305 a. 372. 

Semivowels 23. 47 D. 

Sensation, gen. 742. 753 d. 

Sentence 601 ff. 876 ff ; equiv. of subst. 
600; as subj. 602 d rem. ; in appos. 
626; connected by conj. 1088; sen- 
tence-quest. 1010. 1015 ff. See 
Clause, Simple, Compound, De- 
pendent, ete. 

Separation, gen. 747-8. 753 g. 757 a. 

Series, metrical 1075. 

Sharing, gen. 736 a. 737. 753 a. 

Short vowels 9 ff; interchange 28; 
interch. w. long 338. 400. 408. 421 b; 
inst. of long 373 D. 433 D, b. 444 D; 
elision 79. 274; accent 100 ff; re- 
tained in verb-inflection 508 ff. 451 
d; in redupl. 363 D. 

Shortening of vowels in poetry 92 De. 

Sibilant 23. 

Sicily, Doric of, 2. 

Simple, vowels 39. 49; correl. 282; 
words 540 ff; sentence 865 ff; sup- 
pos. 892 ff; condit. rel. clause 914, 

Singular 123 (2); vb. w. pl. subj. 604 
ff; pred. adj. 610 a; sing. and pl. 
604 ff. 606 ff. 615 ff. 623 ff; sing. 
for pl. 638. 

Size, correlatives 282. 

Smooth, breathing 17 ff; mutes 26. 
27; for rough 47, 73-4. 


404 ENGLISH INDEX. 


Sonant sounds 27 a. Superlative 248 ff. 259 ff (cf. 296) ;— 
Sophocles, Attic of, 3 d. Synt. 650 ff; = very 650 b; w. gen, 
Sotadean verse 1124. 650. 644 a. 755b; w. dat. of diff. 
Source, gen. 747. 750. 781 b; w. év rots 652 a; w. eis 652 
Space, ace. 720. b; Ww. ws, drt, # etc. 6515; w. 84 1037, 
Specification, ace. 718. 961. 4; in rel. clause 1008; w. ds 1054, 
Spirants 23; disappearance 70-72. The 


Spondee 1068; spondaic hexam. 1100. | Supplementary participle 980 ff. 967. 

Spurious compounds 575 c; spurious | Supposition, 889 ff. 
diphthongs 14 b. 40 a. 410 b. Surd sounds 27 a. 

Stems 130. 540 ff; pronoun 262. 268 | Swearing, particles 1037, 13; w. ace. 
a; verb 305. 392 ff; changed in 723; gen. w. mpds 805, 1. 
formation 575. Syllaba anceps 1074. 

Strong vowels interch. w. weak 32. | Syllabic augment 353-4. 358 ff. 

435 a. 511. 544 a; strong vowel | Syllables 89 ff; quant. 92 ff; accent 
class 394. 511 ff. 421 c. 429. 447 b. 95 ff; in versif. 1067; irrational 

Strophe 1065. 1070. 

Subject 592. 601. 706; indet. 602 d; | Syncope 38; stems in -ep- 188; 2 aor. 
agr’t 603 ff; omitted 602; two or 456 D. 487; of arsis 1076. 
more 606 ff; collective 609; of | Synizesis 42. 78; 141 D b. 148 D, 2. 
pass. 818 a. 819 a, b; w. inf. | Synopses of verbs 313. 337-52. 

939 ff. 957; w. supp. part. 980; | Syntax 591 ff. 

sentence as subj. 602 d rem.; gen. | Systems, of tenses 308 ff. 314 ff. 392 
as subj. 734; inf. as subj. 945. 946 ff;—in verse 1074 b; anapaestic 
a. 949. See Indeterminate, Sentence, 1105. 1065 d; trochaic 1087 ; iambic 


Verb, Attributive, ete. 1098; glyconic and pherecratean 
Subjective, gen. 729 b; subjective 1116; dochmiae 1126. 
middle 814. Tau-class 395. 518 ff. 


Subjunctive 299. 310 a; mode-suffix | Temporal, aug. 354, 2. 356-8. 360 ff ; 
373. 408. 417. 433 b. 444. 455. 473 conjunc. 1056. 1054, 1b. See 
a; endings 376. 379. 377 D. 383 D, Time. 

1.407; perf. act. 457; pf. mid. 465; | Tenses 300 ff; of indic. 821 ff; in 

time of, 851; in simp. sentences other modes 851 ff. See First, See- 

866 ff. 874; indir. disc. 932 ff; ond, Principal, Historical, Present, 

final sent. 881 ff; condit. sent. 894. ete. 

898; rel. clauses 914. 916. 921. | Tense-stem 805. 310; formation 372 

923; w. neg. 1019. 1082. ff. 392 ff. 
Subordinate sentence or clause 876 ff. | Tense-suffixes 372 ff. 

1033 a.; sub. clause, rel. w., 1004. | Tense-systems, see Systems. 

See Dependeni. Tetrameter 1073; troch. catal. 10838; 
Subscript, sce « in Greek Index. iamb. cat. 1095; anap. cat. 1107. 
Substantives 1384; accent 546; com- | Tetrapody 1072. 

par. 255 D; formation 547 ff; com- | Tetraseme syllables 1067. 

pos. 575 ff; qualified 594 ff; equiv. | Theme, of vbs. 307 ff; in comp. 579; 

600; substantive of attrib. omitted. theme-vowel 3894. 400. 481. 

621. 966; in agr’t 620. 623; quali- | Theocritus, Doric of, 3 b. 

fying, in acc. 716 a; w. gen. 728 ff. | Theophrastus, dial. of, 3 e. 

754 e; w. two gen. 731; w. dat. | Thesis 1071. 1068 b; 75 Dd. 92 De. 

765.a; 768° b. 172 bis woinEObe ; 94 D. 

w. uh 1026; inf. as subst. 938. 958 | Thessaly, Aeolic of, 2. 

ff. Thinking, vbs. of, 929. 946; pass. 
Suffixes 372 ff. 393 ff. 542. 545. 548; pers. 944 a. 

omitted 336. 454. 490 ff. Thucydides, Attic of, 3 d. cf. rem. ; 





ENGLISH INDEX. 


use of spay 692, 3a; of neut. part. 
966 b. 

Time, adj. 566 b; as adv. 619 a; adv. 
283. 908. 1055. 1056; design. wt, 
art. 661; acc. 720; time since 721; 
gen. 759. 757 a; dat. 782; w. prep. 

.791 f£; tenses 821. 823, 851 ff. 870 
d. 872 b, c; part. 968 a. 971. 976; 
rel. expr. 998 b. 999 b; Saov ov 
1035 b;—in music 1068 b. 

Tmesis 580 a. 786. 

Touching, vbs. w. gen. 736 a. 738. 

Tragedy, Attic of, 3 d, cf. rem. 

Transfer of quantity 36. 160. 208 a. 
208 b. 455 b. 465 D. 

Transitive verbs 593 a; sometimes 
intr. 712 b, c. 810; trans. phrase 
713; w. acc. 710 ff; w. two acc. 
724-6; w. dat. 764, 1; adj. w. gen. 
754 a; mixed senses 500-1. 

Transposition, see MJetathesis. 

Tribrach 1068. 

Trimeter 1073; iambic 1091 ff. 

Triple time (in music) 1068 b. 

Tripody 1072. 

Triseme syllables 1067. 

Trochee 1068; long 1069; irrational 
1070; trochaic rhythms 1082 ff. 
1110 d. 

Ultima 90; accented in decl. 129. 
172. 

Unattainable, wish 871; purpose 884. 

Unlikeness, dat. 773. 

‘Until,’ rel. clauses, 920. 

Value, gen. 729 d. 746. 745 b. 758 f. 

Variation, of vowels in roots 544. 435. 
451. 471. 508. 574; of themes 405, 


405 


Vau 7; pronunce. 23 a; retained 72 D: 
numeral 289; influence 197 ff. 359, 
569. 486 a. 575 a. 589 b. 

Verba sentiendi et declarandi 929. 

Verbal noun, w. acc. 713; adj., see 
-Tds -réos, in Greek Index. 

Verbs 298 ; formative elements 353 ff; 
in -ut 311 ¢; primitive 308; denom. 
308. 570 ff. 581; comp. 580. 581; 
agi’t 608 ff; omitted 611 ff. 905. 
1006 ; subj. om. 602 ff; w. gen. 733 
ff; w. dat. 763 ff. See Finite, Jm- 
personal, Transitive, Intrans., Vowel, 
Liquid, ete. 

Verb-stem 807. 

Verses 1078. 

Versification 1064 ff. 

Vocative 123 (3); voc. sing. 1st decl. 
147; 2d decl. 154. 155; 8d decl. 
170. 167. 180. 185. 188. 1938. 199. 
205; Synt. 709. 707. 

Voices 298. 495 ff. 809 ff. 

Vowels 9 ff; changes 28 ff; metath. 
64 ff; quant. 92 ff; accent 95ff. See 
Interchange, Long, Short, Lengthen- 
ing, Shortening, Close, Open, Strong, 
Weak, Variable, Variation, Addi- 
tion, Omission, ete. 

Vowel-deel. 132. 222 ff;:—Vowel-stems 
130 ff. 134 ff 151 ff. 201 ff 222 ff; 
— Vowel themes 4th class 401. 520; 
added o 461. 469; made by transp. 
448 c. See Vowel-Verbs. 

Vowel-verbs 309, 328. 401. 409. 421 
b. 423 ff. 429. 447 b. 508 ff. 507. 
520. 

Want, gen. 743. 753 ¢. 


517; of stems 179. 190. 202. 236 b. | Way, adv. 283. 779 a. 
237. 211 ff; in comp. 575 a. 576. | Weak and strong vowels 32. 435 a. 


See Interchange, Strong and Weak, 
Long and Short, Variable Vowel. 
Variable Vowel 310; in suffixes, 372 
a. 373. 383. 393 ff. 406. 408. 417. 
419. 428 D b. 433 b. 435. 444. 455. 
473 a. 494. 508 ff; see Variation. 


511. 
Whole, gen. 729 e. 
Wishing 870 ff. 957 a. 1020. 1050, 4 ¢ 
Word-questions 1010. 1011 ff. 
Xenophon, Attic of, 3 d. 
Zeugma 1059. 


THE END. 


2 ee 


SHOWING THE CORRESPONDING ARTICLES IN HADLEY’S 
AND HADLEY AND ALLEN’S GREEK GRAMMARS. 








OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW. . 
Petes anes wy eae Ly pO = slaw Oey ree 86D) 47 Rem. @.c7. @eeeeee 61 b 
Be Vemarie a... f 6 gas’ S GUST bat oe val eae sme eos 31) 4B ns oc wa spiel bane 55 
Speier: os er och Go seep see @ Nmap hen 33,49...) 1.5 suseneeeea 56 
US he oo a ar Bich 20 Sees bie cw hha berets 33 D | 500.6053 7enne ee 57 
EE AGOUE OL. ccoiwiw witha eng 7S EON eae ay A AS 0 NN 30) 50. Exe. a... :.cceeemeae 237 
eRe tol Rises oie ibe. ede 9/29 D a. cceeseccce OO LD | Ol Oy ot: oe caer 
a a ce eines aly iereon aries a POS OU ho eisstele etter apr ais D2) pt D2 eee 58 and 463 a 
Dae: waite yindbab os EG) Sd are weeny aed ote D4 | D2. caus oe ne eee 9 
DU De a Vo Gee ae dae Ts 1S | Ge tans ww e  aie wie elects BT | OSs. wc» veel a 60 
OA PAS he ryote Samara eos AB) OO eso reg th ee ee 31 Df) 53 Des ieee eee 0 
AAT GOM. Win iciou hea oe $23) 32 AOE os ev sben Si Dg | 64... ic. eee 61 anda 
OT, Es 5) 3%. ke ARH Ch| OR LRG coa'sie a tpieiarg 37 D1.) 55.0.4.4 soe, 6 
cD 2S Sea E laa 12D. deo oe Bus Soe. 37D h'| 55D. ds oso eee 62 D 
EA aiistw one bib 5 ees (a ah ait | RW a Dita es gaan ae a aie at 38. | OG. sce «2.5 sialon 63 
PT AUS Oc aS ty couscous ED Bares specimen toa 39 and a) 56 Di .: eee 63 D 
ga es cc in | ee ae 14 bee, SS ok see 39:D') 07. so eae em 64. 
boty AUCH Rio's te 8 cain’? FUE iss oi mrar eres muphy assur s 40 b:| OT Ts. os ae eee 64 D 
EMS ora Behe cla tas erate diate eine LG {esky ig ccd see tow om nd AD G.) D8 ..scin sclera eet he ane 65 
ot Re fe a eee ae WO coe os ow «tea eva 39 C'| BD. 62.1. cic es ate ee 66 
Then Bases a keys foes PU PAU PAB Har irs Posy sie alaee ee AL) 60. ss eae eee 67 
EME ents way ET A ATL BS As se ow spss tv nye Se She 23191161... <6 308i meen 68 
ABO Buss co. e Aare ee ess nae 49'| @2..3... 0 0ceee eee 69 
Meher Beles 5 oes | Gir Ba ai eof aa) & Meee en ag eay ae 49 1) |) 62, Rem. aja oe eee 69 a 
gb Se 5 eee TS ARG BO oO pew eae ven er eae 4S 1 BOD LN andra een 69 D 
Nea enh ia chs we eS CMBR a as DALE ERSTE AAs BS wat Oda s o's alee cies oe 70 
BY 8 0) ae DLN) HU Oio cio Hine wists oral ea e ow wike AA.) BH 6 096 sae oe tine 71 
Teche waters ES AN a Bi), Oe, ANOUML (hs ace ace a oleie 44)|.64, Rem: a2 teen — 
SO ois we piste aipkatete sche Le EL ere hae ein pernan ds ANT | 6D..-< .%)\¢ 20's oe 73 
7-4 a ae ee geen ee Da AOR con cise wie wee oaks 47 DD) OD B.. ses Seen tn etna 733 
DO WRC: ss otees ayes DO A eee baie satya ee AS |: 65. b.A4 stcee eee 73 b 
1g Re cei cee at ere BGA eam acini x eek mele 48.0 | 6D. visn'ws salen iter 73¢ 
21, Rem. a ee DEAN AO a alesse toate atcke oor ler aes 49) 60d obs ee 73d 
irs SNe a AE ESO MOE Ag 2, Ao. ALOWy dis tsk wee eee 50: 68 @.2%.< 2 tee eee 73 6 
NL VN s6d et: aa eA CA NAS Be ao. eee 49D '65° D cos 2. ee 73 D 
BAe Boat cay Cette oy Ee A a eee ee he DE) -66.'.% 6.2". «sae ole ee 74 
255). eis A, Sa 72 Dial 44, Rem. al... 1.2 eee ——'| 66 8. iss + «sas 74.4 
Pile ARP an age tiger BOD! (Py AB oes DN ied 521 66'b......555 ee 74b 
OD ti oa, BOT) AG a eae ell ea a BS |.660)... sca 74.¢ 
2, 8 pe mes One amie eal es O41) ) AG Woe sa ete see i 53. 1) -a.|.66, Reme.0. 5/0 eae 74.4 
MEO A ees wee ae 34D | 46, em: a. .as 3 \sie ss 58a) 66 D... uid. ae 74 D 
ree ai eats 28 and 29°) Seem... oe hoes Ge OM Gy GE 75 
BaD. ra cee te ware OED AP rca hala awh a Os Brae terennee: 54-67 AD 0:2" iw cho 75 D 
Os sie yee asd Ga nana eee OG TER cia we oopa cine 54 D| 67 Da....... woes ODS 





TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 407 


OLD NEW. | OLD. NEW. | OLD NEW 
ME Diss fakevocet Be Ge ade sldviels ae a innwe s IO Lawn ddivas calnde Cea CRE 134 
Se NC Ob hd mins caw n 0.99 6-4 SO te | A oe aes eas 135 
eee eee PS ay EMO ae tomliverdcuce aja peck MOO Sea tceen dhe as eee 136 
MPEP ays 6 hoc ¥ sss GO Ue Cera tic dvd oer ecues LGA TS By ona ae gneve as 138 
eer Fuad Y ) PGiAOnt. Gna fo. wee 104 oi) POG an Ja eee nda et 139 a 
Ot Pm Aan aise past Be) a ee eee eee 138 
i ae API OP RICK wis sioe wis 5 utes 104 D | 125, Exe. d 138 a and 
RE ds wdc oe us ee BBY eles. Gui > avs veut 105 139 Exe 
Pe OTS AD sess sis) ace'e MY Se wit odsat eg wien sale showin es OH Dau wh yaaa hee ae 138 D b 
68, Beato nes ho ANGE | LOO... ce saxcevceaces CNB G08 baie RRR ene 1388 De 
68, Rem. c. fin Bet sbaPas is Le MOULD rashes weed as PUPS tI Gaewa srk a pes ere 140 
BPR Goin we /-jais ace. o/s Tel LOM tae so whws oo e'oe se hOR LOO) ERO, 2.4.) (Eee ae ee 
0 ere ya oa 80 | COL! ROW. 6 <a ee one roe LAAT ia 's ates asayaenceie- te pape -— 
PROD ogee a vw Ua fs [lO ale RR OP I Bee asda Acaisie pareve oie ae 141 
ee GO Mee geal ecchevs a ures wes BOOT Ee Lee Is ata c we be wares 141 D 
arate oes ese 48 Saree ceciran cteve ss TOG Git hae va o's a 4p y adel arenes 142 
Oe Lidia wom «56 Gera PO CE visa diya aie aso TOE) Lae ae eels odes 142 D 
eee ee Reise. ke vs vat Se 08 ee ao wa oe ws TOS 1o:| 180" 4. cs. 3.5 eee 1388 
larg alae cies wen a sas Ba Pia eho os nonin me TET oi coe eee 139 
Le cing a EOE Re Pe ae eae 119 a,and | 130, Exe, ¢, 1, 3.43: 139 b 
Pe Oe os oie cs 0's c's 8 NS 8 Re ene 112¢ 130, FONG Oy Bet ease 139 ¢ 
ie Beni fue. veces 113 | 180, Exe. ¢,3...... 139 d 
MPS ec s h a5 ,8 = « lie SS ne BR i ea pare 113 D | 180, Rem. d....189, Rem. 
Me ive ccbe%e & & voce le aie Bers Ie Sones aceaie eG) eleikas ol ones 1 O08 S.A 4) alee ere ae 138 and 139 
MR ila o<.6.s)e's\ chee & why LF a A A lt aL Vetch event ies Cones cin us 3.8 eee 144 
OV AS ee ee OO ls cian cin ie lavdiele: mln: eid ee fe a B15 7-9 Sgn nero >" 144 D 
Cs Sd A a ene Oy 10s, welts Ae, ccc TUG) Bai chats oes 'eletanten es ane 145 
PMN Ge ee ass Be WA OOiawta Reh ee wes oa% o-4 Piel 2's sw 9 sae wip keene 146 
OU ee De dies. severe: akitts «aise oa gy BR ae DR ir 146 D 
a : Sei. ete ss SF (2st V0) enh Acie sas ANG Bac. «sooth ee See 147 
2 eee SIT bee cen, oes 118 1800 Rent a. on0 decal 
r 6 Be OC) Pee mH ANOS OC aig soc anos rie. ORR Sat. See a neg ep 134 
TEE Fe a ana ei Douce Soe wee fe AOD Oo coos oak Gages eee 
oy 2 Mate Yop & 5 'eie.0' 5s Boe) Wid. Rents Bins 5 ss EB gil baG LP Ble wa sage oe 147 D 
0 eR eae ag uae eee a eee 10) 184 UF de oak 148 D, 1 
Dy als siniein's)'s Spiess = Det AMO Ee na tretcn swine ss 123 (1) | tou Sos. ao 148 D, 2 
eee ee, BBN. Tie bcos oe 123 (2) | 186 D b, 3....... 148 D, 3 
hg Re CREE Saeco ee e 123 (3) | 136, Rem. ¢......ses 148 
os NE a are eee Se Econ cce Mitel iohocwiestuals-« == | 156, Rem. do... ce. eee 149 
OS ae a ORC a at 738 7h Aa gala FSS WATOR ot Sais Vane are 150 
ah, ROS SSS SSR A se As RG A i Hn ea a PR Below rs vas ees 151 and 153 
oF ERS Oe ear neae SAN ESP ttle da oe ole os gi 4530 a Os ee Pe ee ae De 152 
NE ae Pia ig te HEL 25 soles es POP GEO sows aekene wee 154 (a) 
MS SS ccscr case SI Co a wnin'cels's 195 dean: 6c) 140 Does as. ip 154 Da 
2 ete A seks ot COr LINCOM, <i: <2 PIG ICU aN aN cto ae 154 Df 
2S GR a a a EN AUR said ai en oes 1ocane 137 | 105 bees eee ales 156 D 
ET a ee cal oak SY ee Ot and O72) SO Gos. eae 154 De 
BEM on swe Sachs acs O2-2E 110) Rem cai os 6565 Ce eS ames 154 (c) and 155 
Diels ca Sin blackish ey Sure 93 119, Kem: Bo Sages 709 a| 141, Rem. a...c. 155 a 
Meee Oks cas Sow 28 o4 93:41 119 'D Dreier wat atataiite 272 D 142° er iewets teu ia (d) 
eo i Se eae Cee Re POO coral city es ry aoe wel WS WAS Se ee le es ere 156 
SMe Sts sh oi OS Ea Vas oe ares of alerdie Biase: Mesias POT Tae te. oan wk aie ie 157 
OT et entanin s: O48 | 19). Betis Bees aa su 120 bul Dee oe 157 D 
Bere oer Se EE OP en te ue hia ET AL ad RC: Sateen RG 158 a 
Ree iea ally "aia wi-vowie Cec (0 at Rs Be ee 5 628 DA as eR 158 b 
"1 ERS ne aoe lah A ae oe Fie os Ge 1s pe 2d 224 
2) = EAS aS RN ae ives Po eb uae) eyes ae Th Wee, oo) cree 159 
oly SAR ae ep a PaPC Ee OE teak et EY ow Stas eo tistiws atwee ae Sa 2 eb eee er 159 D 
Me ute bere ao ois «ain BO: he ALOED 2's 55,96 < ve 3 Pea LAN. x ace. nie o-sie a wens 160 


408 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 

















ae ae OLD NEW. | OLD NEW. 
MB. eeeeeeeseeeee 161 170 Bee coco uae 178 | 201-D neem 215Da 
cE eeeaieememane en) aca 179 | 201 Dh 2. ceee 215 Db 
_ Sa VLD es sseeseeees. 179 D202... ses eeeereree. 216 
DLs a eeveeeeeeee sec LOB Bs eeeceeeeeereers 18h 202 Loo esieceerees 
_ asec cat 163 a HO es Oe 187 | 202 D1... si6D i 
SL ames rbalie Sager a pgJ85 202, 2.-.s eee, 1-216, 2 
fn oe eS eh | ee Dies 6 iw vie 6 @ wupl wash 3 
152 6 sesso ee seees M64 D TB ese sees 188 and 189 | 202'D,8........ 26 D3 
5B d see seeeeseee. 164 ¢ 173 ear en ae 186 D | 2024... cee 216, 4 
152 @ soseeeeseeeess BOL d | 174... eeeeeeeeens, 236 | 202, B...ces ae 216, 5 
Poe eee ee 236 a | 202 D, 5...<uem 216 D, 5 
1B Besse sees eens sfPke | TB Dose eeveee noe. 936b | 202, 62. as oats eae 216, 6 
See ; ABT | M75 Gs. eee seene pg 388 | 202 D, 6... -se. 216 D, 6 
Pk ee ctiny, 6 ye eda Df ee 
7 ee 164 g Bees es 191 and 230 | 202 D, 7 ........ sie D , 
tt re G4 D176 Dass eee veee. 190-D | 202, 8. +. saan 216, 9 
152 Leese eseeeeee es MOLL) TT soe eer eee 190 | 202; 9.7, e.g 216, 10 
ABD Ma... ++ sane, 645 1 118 a 190 and 192 | 202, 10........... 216, 11 
Bo Mee eeeeeeeeeees 64 & is .190 D and 230 D b | 202, 11........... 216. 12 
| Se eas B41) 179... eee 193 and 232 202 D, ii; eee 216 D, 12 
Rem. Pe-sss++++-165 | 1802. 0+....ee-sseee 194 | 202, 12s. eare ere 216, 1 
7 “gas 180 Seveeiar ws 194 D | 209’D, 12...... S16 D! 14 
5B Da... s+... 3D | 18h sees eeeees 191 and 197 | 202, 18........... 216, 15 
15 sees vos gas c1BB | ISR. esses esees 191-198 | 202 D, 18...... 216 D, 15 
154 Da.......-+-171 Da |162D.......... 190-D fin, | 202, 14....-.++00. 216, 16 
es b (P85. Geb cietagsee, 415. 216, 1 
155. e sess eeeeeesees 167 Skee eeeeeee sere 198 | 209, 26.2.2 .6.aneme 216, 13 
Be ci oe jj408 | 185...-+-+-sseseseees 901 | 202, 17... cssaeeae 6, 19 
156, Exe. a...+.++ 04 88 4 | 186. eeeeeeeeeee a 202 | 202'D, 17...... 216 D, 19 
ee 201 D | 209, 18....0 eee 216, 20 
oe oo ISP weve noee 204 and 229 | 202 D,18...... 216 D, 20 
16D... ssesene ee 68 187 ee ees e meets 904 | 209, 10... .2.: oneee uae 209 
Be seeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 188 ves eeeseeeeeeees 904: a | 909,90. <<... eee 216, 21 
BB. evs eeeeereees sti AB seo ee 206 | 202’D, 21...... 216 D, 22 
15B Qe eee ee eseee OPS TN. oo ce e 206 D | 202 D, 22...... 216 D, 23 
Ce ae 170 a | 190 | 
158 170 a | 190,---+0+---. snengs 207 |202 D, 28..... 216 D, 24 
158 Gs eeeeeseeeees 7 ees, aes 208 b | 202 D, 24....... 216 D, 8 
ee a 170 b <2» Re I pg Ts — | 202 D, 26 J. 7 encase 
158 ¢ + seeseeseee 2170 190 C..+s2eeseseeees 208 ¢ | 902 D, 96 ss ae ee 
158 fesse sees Se ining 208 a| 202 D, 27 ...... 516 D, 5 
158 Deeeeeee eee, DD | 100 8 ese ents coors 208 d| 202 D, 28...... 216 D, 26 
ics AO el ee Oi ewer: ane: ae ee 2 <aeeles 216 D, 27 
160. oc ccceceesersscs17B | 191. o see ecesee ss B47 b | 202 D, 80 .--- + 216 D, 
mo es 4 eae a 949 a.) TORI ari waas 216 D, 18 | 208 a0 oo ee - 
[Os “i289 1 ee 210 | 203 fin....... 006. 218, 219 
160 ey eres pos : es pie Soe ieee ais ere we D....217 Dand 219 D 
161 eee 178, 939: 187 b|198D............. 199 19-(205..05.cee ge eo : 
Pe. eee CCAR re eee OD 
163. se seeseeeesevers 14 194 PS AEC 199-a | 207... :- cs.» coe 222, 
16k se eeeeese esses e MTB | 194 6 oars ceereree seas 900 | 207 D:..'.. cactus 222 D 
165 a FUG Aah somes of, 188 | 208.2 .- see 223 
1B, sees vee 1, 188 197 oe eee tense 911, 919} 908 D .<: 1. 223 D 
166 D....s.eeeoe 3D 197 Des sssenesees, 219 D | 909.050: 0a cee 225, 226 
Te veeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 | 198..-e-0eo2- os 193,194 | 209, Rem. a........ 225 a 
168. veeeeteeeeees g188 | 199... ssesreeeeeee 9131 910..,..- 2. 207 
168 Dees seeeeees. Dy Oe 912'D | 210-D..-. 25a 227 D 
St eC ee ee 176 | B00 cc. cc+0es+s+ see ce oOl4 | 211. 705-55 one 


TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 409 








OLD. NEw. | OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW. 
MeO. G2. oo see's CA PRS greece cc cnewe 960. TF SbO a a ican kewals 297 D 
ER cS a a's'eat s hele acd) wid) -a-n-ovaceicn as SOM GOO. nce wean ey oR a ee 298 
NE at a braced asso a: ore ae Od Ek bab sins sp sos 40h BD WE ok ws a tcre werk ae ae 299 
EMEC ale versie’ wialevs 6/00 BOL See | BO se wrae a coves 263, 264 | ZAZ. . cc cccenccvccccnct 300 
EN San tG o« cawin iw 0's BAM ED oor bas kee vs Gt Tey Bee ass 70 tink acre 300 D 
Bie ROM. Be vice we cae ET A fesis hao bdo smim aja sani 4 a ae eee ring se 
eis oad iwicele ceeds PAC OME) a bo 5 ria v dg Hs Pe ha ee ne ae 802 
Oa ace eT Em Cer 966: S60 Doc. ve eed< ck pe 
1G emM.. 2... .....00% SOE e | Sede. ase wen ewes COGS BOG aes oo aa ewes 307, 308 
Bie emer. b.......:-- Soe GaSe mae p Ta OA eR ES 308 
ee eran 1 oe OO IEEE Re Ce OGH:T S66 ROMs B vurkeuntg 304 a 
Oy, ee REN Yc ten Cp igss -K, 4s Bsos Sosem aid pa saan 269'| 266, bem. Dives <e 304 b 
SGT ieee ss'e oe 2 « ga | 286. TAM: Bos < a can 269 a | 266, Rem. ¢,........ 304 ¢ 
eee TEC 0 ie eee A ae 7d od A» CR a oe Teo dll 
ee a seat ELD alin. ah wide sph we 8 Fe L Bee APs Wan Eos oie as nlesy a re slice 
oO ae ee BAIS OO EE a2 ob Viebit'y key Dre a 9 gaty i GN & Nene rane ork 311 b 
lS PA Et P80. RORY. Gy. 5-3. os Gad Gr Ris 05905 ee 311 fin 
ee ew A iss... .: ENA Mea oo Bi Wie NG oie ia ace ee hee 312 
ee Dre ca 3 ee 271 D | 268, Rem. a.......... ae 
nw ana. us 0 DENA iat kadetwcree deen 973. (268, note: De, cate es 393 a 
CL a eA ih ee elie, dole Mirwiasolnj'c ba es ua AE DG stista: cone, dae ee 313 
ea ite ae o'e'sta is vows s PEO Une iia: kwk> nin ate aa eae SOE ec wwtd Stina Chea ces Sas 514 
ERE Pos W awa sie 0 a0 GAG O42, OMI A. se. ess GAP WAT Wate ee tuk a eat ewrken 315 
OT ae OTs SA aR 2 CL aa eee a PMN elete ky abe 0000's pied 316 
0 Re NRE: © CA oe oe Cena Peta a6 a is'0-o: « ncdiawia mre tntete 317 
ies ies en's 250 aand b | 244, Rem. a........ DEON Oe. isdn’ ens eae 318 
Jd! as nie a Bole O04, Reis Ds, + x 's5 03 ts (Cet ee 519 
I eg Sans sles eos ys Oe ee 2 2 A OT Laie ld 0 ov sv neo ee oe pee eee 320 
ae Biinee aa EN oS eiaik aie'e-a%s DT er Ia a-w so 0,0 se i ee 821 
I ale aig bie wa d's CNEL Mee ado asecw cele (et. Salers 6 DRIP Q EB «+: «s:nss'n kee nike 
- le ee ee eae OAT PEON itis eS Sed ee ZOO Bly sees sone bored 323 
PUT ate wavaws ae « SODA BAG, ROMS sie. «5 $3 DBO at DOD «. son 62 ats n. no 324 
MS coe 253 | 246, Rem b......... Rach Neel So... ence, Seen 825 
oy ae eg PA ie 9 iia ss 8 URC eae BOD BBR asa foale nis ais oem 526 
NER sos oe miain hip wa ioe ial ee COR 9 pie ee MA NOR eo alan 8b iosaie aaa 327 
ree oS, TS ae Ea one tia aa B86 (OGM oo. toa ee 328 
A SE Sega 254, 2| 247,248 D..... OP PAIN |) DRS case acon ag tre 837 
oD ay 254 D, 2 ZO BOG ts s's'.s he sk a oi 338 
SS eee ane ae AST aS Bl ayo oe © Se be EMO ee ara s ainerapavaen ef, 339 
1 ae aaa NG GRE TG ieee aan eee Bae Ss cca Wome 340 
1 CW A DAO ie a dcc te se oc Dee Pas RAR ce os wp olaiae. a aie 341 
PR ren ale a Bisse 5 are Net eS eae ies SA WOO aka 5 i yr Sinaia 4 eats 342 
Sb es Ba PIR A si gee sy 8%: BOR ETON is 5 a/5 tis aa ke ec ttcanes 343 
gM Oss a wisp ae wee! een po Menta ayiie my noce, csi w PSS BG Beet © sinra bs ete «ae ae 344 
| ae PR eae re Lis ek; La eee ame a 2 345 
SS ee Bete eS ie ur dines Ba aS rs cee 346 
ee oes ree ahe es MPA a Le Sac aly «' is cafe's DERE |: DOG ob 5 vs lye ahaa apa 347 
ae Os ce sss pe A) MS 0a Ae ee ge SON OO cia steams create ef, 348 
274 D, 10-0. 204 DAO 254. Tem. (a. +./0s BBO DOT. 5.6 aia cnx oe OS 329 
oe 1) Oe een ee AT RO a bale Sixes are so ed Ly i BOB a ar re acnptate trae eae 330 
O22D, 120.0. 954 D149 1985 D1. 2.2 CUS Oye at Sean ep t 331 
Pee ater kis Gvarteae BS: «0-00 7: a aia he © AN Bee eer BOER OURS: cece hiwinle 6 anmese aae 332 
C2 ea an 955:D 255 Dede. ceva PUTT UP ai oC. Sues 333 
Rs a pw cia a eran aie ae. ae Bae Oa on creer elas cau xs PO BO VR 6x: vc: 5\ para emote ae ae 334 
eee O59 | O57... eee 290 d and 294 | 308........0sceeeueee 335 
a aos Sama We lays sh eecs es CE FS RRR, x 335 
2 | Re oe eae Bee ral Dalen ely wid! ace'Vi nara oecate Soe WOR sors xd axtharerdiat Selma 336 
Bess wrataiaolg a: gs EV AR OO EP og ee: ni eo Stan BOSE IS SOU. 5 «ic omnia wie aoe See 353 








410 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 


OLD, NEW. | OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW, 





SOL Sie Wise tnt as als we 854, 1 | 829 b, Rem...402 c, Rem. | 855 D d.......... 376 De 
DU aww ase dead a B42} O201G Vans chins baw se 402 d'| 355 Dei2...0 5a 464 Da 
OU fa WOM Bb ip wished enh EOE lle cise oes nee 402 6.) 356 8. J. .aee gue e — 
BAIN oy htos esa Sh TF Sauer ete aes 402 f| 356 a. fin... 4) oe 377 
BU Saw ate is sede GUD -) MI ea ele wid ohiabalchw aia pemlas 403.| 356. D.i..6sesheeee 

BEC ieee See oe S05 IA Solass es ss Sivcee neon Ve 405 | 856c.....458 and 478, ri 
SUG Deeks iis cess SOO | Beer ckew a Aioire aye eee S11) 857.562 eee eee 379 
30S, SET Beis. cane 2 G00 | cos Biss cnesieks Veaes 403 b'| 357, Exe. @sesmieok an 879 a 
OU tee cele wae wets eo is DO oe a oe wees a aol piano aay Dod | 3b7 Ds. eee 376 De 
Tos 3 EAR Rar BUGAT | Ga ee dies 5 wie kre eiwlewk swe 451.'| 358. . .\\cule satan oe 380 
EL een Sp eta ease G0 HG) See A nik a het s GeGaeew ee 28 | 858 D2 cee 380 D 
50s Rem. "a..s. wie SSW EOe Dac c) seh ames 451. b| 359... 2. en 381 
SSI] GHA a es ip Anan a raped SUG, | DOE Os new eda eas nes -— | 859: D.. vce G eee 881 D 
A ei Cian ies, = EMAL Oh as sine Ries 451 @ | 360... 1< ule oop eee 382 
Sl, BOM, Boss S58 B06 C'| DaOer a esse 421 b, 431, 440, | 360 D...... 455 D a and b 
oleh se % Bie Ys Seta ieee 309 447 len 451 C. DOL aw & siclaeeeeee 883, 1 and 2 
7 8 § Ne patra see ate 859 D | 385, Exe, a:.....:.5 0 412 | 361 Di. 7 883 D, 1 
Se, PROTA sie ee whe BOO OT BOO a «ke ke) Se eh abn oe ALA | 362... \. sas ee eee 3838, 6 
Sl BE 2 ae is se BOAT SO. Din sisiehe.anlen witeiee 440. \362D ov vxeoneeene 242 D 
SG RS AL OS ete 79) OX is ee 6 Rm ee 444 D.| 368.... 02.000 vo ee BOO, & 
ier he es OSs pauls eens BOL OST ss es bs bak ve eee are 431 | 368, Rem.:a: ste 384 
2 RR A are Ob2 andes | aoa tsi oe uree oat, 451. @'| 868.D. . sien2 . «008 D4 
3) OD Oe A eee ae S026) Soe eae he 451 D c | 864...383, land 2, and 5b 
Ly Geaeed pas Be en Se CL. OOM | Bao siwidia eae & waa ee ais 43 1 364 Ds cs cs tnieee — 
ay Reset 5. ws, oye ee eT SOO: Haake bk rey shia ARs 64. | 36D... sys. re elena 386 
BUCA ies idee Rote Soee| BEL Sar aeiose es oes A452 | 360. 0.0 os ss ae ere 387 
Bree ata eiure hs oS Re BE) Create «ala vie he's Ay uc pekeentets 461 | 366 8, ..@ 23 capone 387 a 
De a ea ence ata SOG \"BAS sas iewaw we weal ss ys 468) 366-D i 2 's\c eee 387 b 
ey eS AL |S aie eat BOD | O45 Dr oes 473 Da |\'366 Rem. 7.2 ee 388 
5S a 9.0 Chae © ae eee pe BOS | oes hese soa ee bios nk 372) BET... «sae etapa 389 
Suk gl a hg oa RRR BGS Bs See Se ona vere 372 Dl B67 ai. te eee cee 589 a 
BO: Mixes ds. vi .ce so Bhar) lo ok Vee date ha eee. | 367 Dal eee 889 D a 
Dh ALCOR. eae hee ach SOU CAIs A aes 3) bestow eee oe 499 | 367 D's '<.tee eee 389 ¢ 
Sass Sra a wan, s pees wis DOK t Seah eu sw Snes. ¥ adamant 4ST S67 DDD: crcntenmeene 389 D b 
Cole he oes Seite bam 368-| 04D, REM. A) f.36 cde c — | O67 Ca cass sae anes 389 d 
py TE SURG es gt Sa en 368 I Bap. Remi Doce 499'a | SET: scons eee 889 e 
eds See SE uise ears TOO SAM ED ae setghe wk wid G 431 D ¢ | 367, Rem. @5 572 soya 390 
BA ices aes 2h 5p be eae tener ee 373, 374 | 868... ++ veces 391 
eR me as ny ce, ghee FUR TSC Ee eT OPE 373 | 308 Bi... ts soe oe 391 a 
ake ee ae ee 209 | Saye Renn 60233. o yuk | 368 °D 0 2 391 b 
Se Te rice vad ws totes BOG | ey gee SS Gils selec g re ES eee 406, 407 
BOO ee eal Coie n Ges ke OOS 4 SAW: fo to ca hoigienbes 873.D:| S700. uate eee 409 
Oe yk toes ak aes Bo Oo SUEY Oe me ealnlishe a alcte aneiate S14, O10 Di iat sae eee 409 D 
5) ial aaien hea sions wk S05 (S48 Day sa asea es 374 D S70 asst eaee ces 409 Da 
ELGE en ems ese eae ee $96) 848. Rema iiss) eae ——1 370. Db nweareeee 409 D b 
CD delete a aie Ste & epee ee OUT ees tees Sea kea eek Cone 428 |. 370-D' Gi... sonnei 409 De 
Foe PRLCINE alee a! sate a'ile S97 | O49 Docu cplelatetes 498 Db | 370 Didanceas 409 Dd 
Sao ENN astm nee ie eon te ee BHO) DO kes ae eer oekeE 446°) 870 D Oso. atosaatan 409 De 
Soma) wei eta i pemel O2e h 5[8 iB EEA i 450 Da (870 DI: epee 409 Df 
DOA ys AVON F082 oa OG a deere oe) Cie aie Ronen ey Se 449 | 370'D ao. oon 409 D 
a) MIOUC... 5's 1a os bilal BOSD) Sol elas osha 458° "| BULB. Pisee See 410 
328° Oo Mantel its Sonera noosa a DIDI OOD Gane Wales sm mali ——| OFA: Ds ss oo oe ALL 
Scie OMe Ute fog ea URN PCR BB ge) ie 8 ete Wa mee aes 435. D'b-| 8710 3... 5 oe4 see 412 
Pe te Bee a apans toe BAO Seles Ws iit tale tate Sole! beaks Che — 13871 D Goes anes 412 D 
5 LGM a a IE te eer st Ae S| epebdc ONO eae her aa STD |) OtL GC. ideeuen shee 412 a 
Sheol O48 ae i rea EAR AOD DW Ra ENS att hel ate ate stata B76) Sl 6... Jose pete 412 b 
ale Wr ste ie ia. mheeteaehe AOD) SOOM Biss see yas 876:D a | 87l D6... se see —_ 
Or sn Sie tis cidarlc petane £028 Sao Doo 4 Mia, 376. Di 1ST Bek wiece'x acters ae eeeee 420 


TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 


OLD. NEW 
NE ta ek so 491 Da 
PME 4c) Wa esas 421 b 
so ns cw cn’ 0 420 D 
a ae 421 ¢ 
Se sis is 0 6.0 422 anda 
2S) 422 b 
OU ae ae 422 D 
Sr 423 
MT i nes Goes, 0/0 o0 494 
areanee Ck a bec ova 424 D 
TR Sita cd a'0.e bdsene é 425 
2 rr ae 426 
0 | A er 426 D 
cof 8 RE 497 
ost i 9 Se ae 427 D 
et ee oa boa a x 495, 496 
ch ae 433, 434 
A) SE 433 D b 
ee ee oe cic aie 429 
881 D...428 D and 430 D 
"oN nae 431 
Bony MOM, Bie. on 431 b 
382, Rem. b....481 b, fin 
382'D ny 431 D Cc and d 
Bose. es 4.35 and a and b 
2 al a a 435 D 
igs i Apa 436 and 437 
ee ws 436 D 
MT ee aca: ce widieie — 
Sy Ur sictaey beac 455 Da 
eG) SL 446 
SOIR Mee oak a a6 sw a 446 a 
he cic tiv serstecs 447 b 
ee pies o oei.< 448 a-c 
Suc os. Ue ar ra 446 D 
5 il» I A a a 450 
Ee Sarai waves 451 a-e 
Be oh akec seis odin 451 D 
Sp 2s Se ae en 452 anda 
CELL IM en 452 D 
io 2 2 gee aa 459 
ee) og om echo 462 D 
ee ee se ego a as 460 
=|) OR Ot aa 461 and a 
Sl ENS ae ee 463 
<0 Se, ey ane 463 a 
ERS rake. Goan’ & cofove 463 b 
18S CCEA a ag 463 ¢ 
5 he a Rg oe a 464 
Sida DED: fi <,3:0:0' «o's, 464 a 
392, TL eRe a SA 464 D 
Ea ba ao hig woevanb oe 465 
Ose. Bs ss s'en ee 465 a 
393 'D eee as crag 465 D 
Se sro Gore se ate cad 466 
Be, BOM Bins’ see sss 467 
Seats vals ic 4 468, 473, 474 
293.) ...473 D and 474 D 
ROMs Gate cc es ee ae 469 





OLD. NEW 
oc ee 470 
BOE Pes... yea we’ 469 D 
A 8 SS a 471 anda 
Re Passe 50:0 472 and a 
i 6 oo a 473 Da 
Sh) 4 Ret RE en ie Ph 475 
1 ee 508 D, 12 
ia aes bs as 3885 and 413 
Ve a eee 385, 1 
ER EOS 5 <4 giaia b's, ach 376a 
nT ee ene 385, 2 
OEY ie ea 885, 4 
es bo eas 385, 3 
8.) 28 Bre ape ene eae 385 D 3 
BO eee ca us eee. oe 885, 5 
£0 Tg oc 885 D, 5 
MO ites: < 385, 6 
NS Ae LE chai eae, eel 377 
1S UGE ore aeeianie eet 377 D 
AO Des eas. 415 and 419 
CRT) A ae 415 D 
i Se 417 and 444 
GU hd Bey SRO Sneaea iearaes 444 [DD 
CG) oil: Cat ae elles OUR ee 418 b 
BEE ANNS cyoa cce nie neg we 44 
ETO (es 0 07 eee 414 D 
SUMMA ee tee yen evaet & 44() 
15, ONS ae ans a 414 D 
407 sbieg -415 b, 443 b, 449, 
401 D b ass thine; wos 415. Db! 
1 SA CRESS ERNE ea 44] 
715 ene eee a 419 anda 
ACT ie Tasers toe 419 Da 
FLT a OS MR Ce A 417 
710 ee“ Rahat Ry 417 a 
7 eh Ba? ae ge 417 Da 
SOV se 419 b and 418 
A ee 419 Db 
P46 ba Melanin a ge Pa 443 ¢ 
Pe PEs Geyser: 440 D 
2 ih A a a ae BEd iyi 432 
SM og Be ee, 476 
AOS. 1, Rem. a... 0. «.. 476 
403 ’D, SE Sara ah cinta 9% 476 D 
co ES rapes Renee 534, 1 
BOG AKS oe ads. 584 D, 1 
hoe) Ge ede Ys 534, 2 
He Ge NG cea wees 534, 4 
ce Oe See ee 584 D, 4 
Fe Woe or ee ae 584, 5 
403 D, Ep neOnaes 584 D, 5 
403, 6...489, 5, and 584, 6 
Ca) Pe ee eee 489, 5 
BOE eas ee ce ot 5384, 7 
403 D, fe ae 5384 D. vf 
403, 1, Rem. a...534, q, a 
a a 534, 8 
OP So. Se 534 D, 8 








41] 
OLD. NEW. 
cg be | ae 534 D, 10 
BOER yf vox See 485 
EE TS ae 481 
FTV G | oa: ae Ame 481 D 
404, 2, Rem. a..... 481, a 
oP RES Ui 486 
0 ee ee eee 486 D 
AM ey, Aan 5 aia 8 g's 535, 4 and D 
ie Ce er ene 535, 5 
AOL Bless ess 5385 D, 5 
ROCs 5 te3 st yoke 535, 6 
TG ey nee 535 D, 6 
PY ae Se er 535, 7 
SOE Re ties cae 535, 8 
AOA Ds 9: s 35.5753 3a ee 
£04. 10 52s: 585 D, 10 
And TD ae sce 583 D, 1 
404 D bo, 5 tid 583 D, 2 
AOL Dee. 3 ook 583 D, 3 
AE ID dle, ses cehoee 583 D, 4 
ANON Oe ats ak eats aha 477 
405, 1, Rem. a......- 477 a 
405,14, Rem: bist... 477 b 
405, ie Hen: €. sss 477 ¢ 
rin Uggs OS aaereer ia, ee 477 D 
Me ios a ee 482 
405, 2, Rem, a...... 482 a 
4 Ds ee 482 D 
HO) Biss. sex Se 538 D 6 
SOO Dc uGion sateen 538 D 7 
AGS G she sce ate 538 D 8 
ROG Dictate aaa ee ae care 478 
tLe 5a Deeremnine trie 478 D 
406, Rem. a. ; 2 <a 479 
406 Ais Remce.. wooeee =~ 
406, Rem. Daven ceneer 480 
406, bE 654 13 ar coe 480 a 
B06 Geos Po eee 484 
AGB ESS se eee ss 483 D 
Let pee eee er 484 a 
PU ict, Vee eke 588 D, 9 
AG68D Any. eet. 539 D, 6 
AOR Boss ay bas eee eee -— 
AQT WOMB. Leds s.c0k 484 a 
AVON < cas. 6 Camas hs Oe 489 
BID oe eet ade 489, 1 
Ais Wie eas. 489 D, 1 
AOR a. c sateen 489, 2 
MOST Bionic ed 489 D, 2 
GG ir ta ered 489, 3 
Te eee. 489 D, 8 
ele Ny eacecioeee a eae Ne 489, 4 
AOD: Aisi po ik 489 D, 4 
Re Esa y nae 489, 6 
AGED). By o.iey in 489 De 
BG B 5 Pls So esos 489, 7 
Fis a pe pee 489 D, 7 
rr ee 489, 8 
B08 DT esis «xa ..489 D, 8 














OLD NEW. | OLD NEW. | OLD NEW. 
Be oe cals a vices 489° 0) AQOBiacce itches kes 499.8 | 420, 2)\ cage 504, 2 
rte Paka, eg £89.10 | 409 BO ays 492 D, 0 | 420,:'3.... eae 504, 8 
BOF cas Teen 489, 11} 409 D, 10....... 492 D, 10 | 420 D, 8s. ee 504 D, 8 
PU oes bas oase 489, 12/409 D, 11...... 492.D, 11 | 490, 4e.s. 15. eee 504, 4 
BU ine tates Dei ce 489, 13 | 409 D, 12...... 492 1), 12) 420:D, 4......-. 504 D, 4 
£060), 125... 2. 489 D, 13| 409 D,18...... 492 D, 13 | 490;-3.5.3eeee 504, 5 
ae Ce ate 489, 14| 409 D, 14...... 492 D, 14 | 420 D, 5......... 504 D, 5 
i oe ee 489, 15| 409 D, 15 ...... 492 D, 15 | 420; 6. 2c seein 504, 6 
408'D 145. <5 489 D, 14/409 D, 16...... 492 D, 16 | 420, Toes ances eee 
Be La aes date 489. 16|409 D, 17...... 492 1D, 17 |420, 6.1. sep 504, 8 
Se Oe ae AOS 1] SAO ene ee ee 498 | 420, 9.4... ue -- 
coe hae Sasa $99.2). UE ATE oc ah apes eee 494 | 420 D, 10........ 504 D, 9 
cee (Pine eee ABO AG) AIO asc. Pe cae ore oeus 495 | 420 Dy 12. snoe 504 D, 10 
70 a a Ae 489 DP, 18 41S foes waren 496 | 420 D, 12...... 504 D, 11 
USD Wa ee a F890). 919) AIS > eae akcae 497 and a | 421.....5.cs0eeeeeee 505 
PG 0 ie Canaan 489 D, 20 | 418, Rem. a........ 497 b | 421, Tice 505, 1 
408 D, 20...... £00 T)°O0| AAA ec end Was 498 | 421, 2.6 o.te epee 505, 2 
408 D, 21...... ABD DD OE AL 0 0,5 ly oa 499 and @ | 421, 3.4...) eee 505, 8 
“AE Se De, aaa 489: D5 'B4 PETG. ies eae ean we 500 |.421, 4..." . cena 412 
ANS D8. ey es. S89 D5 | PUG. Gig. oes 500,11: 421, 3... eee 505, 4 
408 D, = Perey 489: D, 26)) 416, 1) ais sc cewee « 500; 1,0) 421, 6..icceeeeenee 505, 5 
408 D, 25.0... 489 DBT} SIGs Bek Jo aiges os he 500, 2.| 401, 7. cs ese eeeee 505, 6 
MOR De O6 sao £89 D, 128) 416; Sy ene ye vena 500, 3 | 421,°8. .< igen eee 505, 7 
408 D, 7 espns WS). p80) Ate ee eee 500, 4 | 421,90... 5 505, 8 
408 D, - abe dad), 30 AIG. Se oee ws ce ees 500, 5.| 421, 10. .s.e0eeree 505, 9 
408 BD, 29.5408 8937416, Bio. aves 500, 6 | 421, Th. cso oeeee 505, 10 
408 D, 30 Soom 409 1), 282) 46, To ee ete aseese 500, 7 | 491, 422 e cae 505, 11 
408 D, 31 ...65. 480 TO BS | AVG 6 555 ose snsa ce 500, 8 | 421, Teco 505, 12 
456 WO BO ros ca ABO. 34) ANS Ads saw ase » 501 | 421, 1420. coe 505, 18 
408 0. 8d. wi<. «cBOD, OD) AB oad uhicweae ee ee 502 | 421, 1S. . secu 505, 14 
408°), 84.0... S86. 1D), BO: FAG oy Gin suceenh oe 503 | 421 D, 15 tscccg 505 D, 14 
ced a eee ASOD), SE APG ae 2k. vary ae, 508, a | 421, 16.2 cee -...505, 14 
ie eee 489 D, 38 | 419 D, a....0.... 498 D, a | 491, 47. ee 505, 15 
4061). BY \.co50 469 DO ALOE OD yet 4x wate 5385, 4 | 49), 18205 scm 505, 16 
AS ID BBo vee 439 DAO VAIO EY Doo ie wars 535 D, 4.| 421) 19S sae 505, 17 
AOS TY. B0e a owe $59 Dy APP AT Os Bose sek eck ear 503, 1 | 401, 20... ese 505, 18 
ANB 1040. es -033 459 DD, 4e4 AIO. Sac) Sa. oa 503, 2 | 421,21. Scere 505, 19 
$08 Ti ALS oo. 0 489 D, 43 | 419, 4...... 508, 5, and D | 421, 22.........0. 505, 20 
408 D, 42......- AOD DOSE FANG Oe cea rece 503, 8.421, BBute eee 505, 21 
408), 48...... ABO 1); BO Ons oi, oon eee 508, 4:| 421 Dy 24 5s. es 505 D, 22 
408 D, 44....... 439 D, 46 Be MD week Ve ctaa d 535, 6'| 420, 1.2 eee 510, 2 
406 D 46. 60504 489 D, 47 HOD Sig. ah ante cone 535,68 | 422, "S.. aaa ee 510, 8 
Bree kt aie Sues 490 La! eae ere Te 535, 9, 492. 3... 0. age 510, 4 
HOA PSK a Glace cee CUR iP a Leia |: eit ene 585, 10 | 492 Dis soe 510 D, 4 
NES SG Be Aare? 490i, 2) AROS oo oecak, 508, 11 492, 4... ce 510, 5 
LN, or An EN AU De eS es ep 503, 12 422°D, do Smee 510 D, 5 
A aoa ateiaigs ADD TD, Ail BOT acta date 508, 13'| 422.5... Jae 510, 6 
BOS os isc ss seen AO gd APO Lara td ous 503, 14 | 422, 8 BT i 510, 7 
ADO TINS S244 Sues A900 DSB ANG AR ee cee ete 508, 15 | 402. 70... ee 510, 8 
2 Ree Ca as ana 490, 4| 419, 16..503, 16,and D16| 422, 8.:........00 510, 9 
Tae 8 Fae aber ASO Ds Ay ALOU ae seacue 508, U7 | 480.59> 4 scien 510, 10 
UNEP e ery 400,°B;) 419 Dy 17 25 ose 508 D, 27 | 402-40... 510, 11 
409 2S AVOWD. Birsiss thie 4 sl  bAtOS TG ed ao aten 503, 18 | 422 D: 10c. aasen 510 D, 11 
ADO ID: aie t. 490: D.26'| 419, a As a anek wi 503, 19:| 422. 11. eee 510, 12 
BOO AGS ia hctise eadieinak 49%) 219 TR BO Sse 503 D, 19} 422 D, 11.208 510 D, 12 
409, 6, Rem. a...... S92 | ALO OO sy cael 508; 20 | 492; 42.16) pee 510, 13 
ago ad hE ct eae 491 Dy DO oo. a 508 D, 91|.422, 13... oscar 510, 14 
B09, Hass PH ene Mok BOD OF | EM cake wins whe he win cele 604 | 429. 14,\5,4 ieee 510, 15 











TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 418 
OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW. | OLD. NEW. 
422 D,15...... 510 D, 16 | 424 D, 81...... POe-D; Bt | 4et Bs. otc 513, 7 
SS rer 510, 17 | 424 D, 82...... BOSD 0. MOT We eons curate 513, 8 
422.D,16...... 510 D, 17 | 424 D, 83...... BORD), BG Cate Bi ceasremca: 513, 9 
a 510, 18 | 424 D, 84...... 508 D, 84| 427 D, 10....... 513 D, 9 
SS, 510, 19 | 424 D, 35...... BOS. 88} ADR hoc eum 513, 10 
3. 19....... 510 D, 20 | 424 D, 36...... 50RD: 86 400, TS) icy cde vas 513, 11 
492 D, 20...... 510 D, 21 ee ae 508 De 87 14 OFS Wick endive 513, 12 
pw ...... 510 D, 22 | 424 D, 38...... B08 Di 88427, 14) case ase 513, 13 
a Or, 1 iy eS Ste ae fa | 513, 14 
MME eke a es, Rome | on Bie os ci '- Sto he Ves fae. eee 518, 15 
oo ee BG AGB Bias cas ne BY SAA VE se stress 513, 16 
oy ee Beet Ca ee ena Oe ago Gy. ane 513, 17 
Ts. ae Ne SAO Be es ik ess Shwe gel ke See 513, 18 
OS ee Boe hae. Cocke we sens an B11, 6| 497 D, 20...... 513 D, 20 
ee Pee ae ors ie ee ne sa dae Ie, OL oe 518 D, 21 
os ilar a eo a eee eee aL CA i NOS 514, 1 
ee iad aa oe Dee eee Re gy oo ee eta 514, 2 
oS) a B06 TD 6495, 8.6. c6:. Bit Dice 4080 Bree cage 3s Bie 514, 3 
ae Bie oa Go). ora: S10 Mao ae een oe 514, 4 
Cie RNS 495.0200. bea cs Pier iO eaeencton scec eka B14, 5 
Pees ss. Me Pe Nek oat. Bi RADA) Bans. see 514.D, 5 
oie Se Oe D8 | 405 DD, Wc... SER CUE | 96 rac eh 514, 6 
aes 508, 10| 425, 12......... Bid OE PAB ce Gc e 514, 7 
> eae BOGEN 1405. 13); Cees cas. FN be LOB ANCE sichein' wc 514 D, 7 
Se 508, 12/425 D,18...... yall; doe, a 514, 8 
ae GOS 11 495s WA oye. « Bo paos a2 ag aia 514, 9 
BPA; Bocce. BOeM pias Sop H Clas. o8 Cone eG Ce i een es a 514, 10 
on ee 508, 14| 425 D,15...... pil Da tet aes D106 osc < 514 D, 10 
oo ie aaa ts| SAG Seu Cho. any ae 514, 11 
“ae 508, 15| 4295 D,16...... St Dy eT Age 12... ees 514, 12 
24) 10... . 808 D. 15 | 495 D, 17.2... 511'D, 16 498), 19's... 514 D, 12 
TS ee 508, 16| 425 D,18...... SLE OGAT | 2200 16 Goons 514, 13 
7G os ee 500/D, 16 | 495°D. 19 .;.... BAY ad, 18 | Agky Fae. ye 514, 14 
Serene 508, 17 | 425 D, 20...... 611, 20. 428096 so... sa ee 514, 15 
Paty 12... POO Ty | 496) hobs seseh sss. 619. 1 | AGN UG on ieee 514, 16 
Goer BAe CORE Beet cin Bie @ | 4G eben oe 514, 17 
“ES Sen 508, 18| 426 D, 2........ 519 D2 | 498 D, 17 ...... 514 D, 17 
See ey 00 HOG 8 oc hn ae ce |. eae are 514, 18 
AED AG... 2s. BOBDO19 1496 De 8/0 o. 6.5. B12 1h°3 | 498 D, 18 «6.00 514 D, 18 
Sh Se Ee Ae 0 ae a ee eo ae See 514, 19 
424.D, 16...... BOS 90} 296 Ws 4. 512 D, 4| 428 D, 20...... 514 D, 20 
OS a A UE CA ae ene ee B19, 8 4260. OL os aah 514 D, 21 
lS) lee 08, S21 496 6. alec dans: SP Secret pee 515, 1 
i Seereeias m0) 281 226 De 6.0. « CR ea ae Se ae De bare B15, 2 
ere BS, 04 | AOD. Fac: BIS Dee) eee ac 515 D, 8 
a eee BOG} AGED. Boo... 512 Dy 8 | 429. Doi k 515 D, 4 
Oe SS ae 508, 25 | 426 D,9........ 512 D, 9| 429 D,5........ 515 D, 5 
i aes POR ANS yas anise. GiB 4 4e04 te awe fives 516, 1 
3 ees DOERR ADT, Bo oe oe a BAS. FASO Oi. ee 516, 2 
“OE Trees ee Bae hy moet 5c Be Pay Satya eee 516, 3 
Ae i ee 508 D, 27 | 427, 2.........00-- Be OF HS08 ia ode 516, 4 
BOO ea cn CC AWD aan Ree age Bee iS Aa Bos dad cae 516, 5 
494 D, 25...... 808 D, 28 | 427 D, 3........ Bie Ace, Binsin) ce, 516, 6 
Ca eee G08, BUA Ans SUG DG ASO ee ca ae 516, 7 
AGED 26 21.3: BSP 29 | AIRE ccc anos Ris 2) ASO EE Bo ots oye. 516 D, 8 
Cy | ane 508, 8/427 D,5........ 315.9, 4430, 9. ca 516 D, 9 
“eee 508, 4 Ba Se Seis soncir BiG, & Pa8b0 De 10. 202 occ 516 D, 10 
a eee 508, ae eo Oa Bia Des |430 D- 11.5646 516 D, 11 
494 DT), 80...... B08 De B01 407 7 so sencvess »b18, 6 | 480-D, 12 oeiacs 516 D, 12 


414 
OLD. NEW 
pa ee Nea tea aap 517, 1 
i tse Ree B17, 2 
CL eee 517, 8 
ou : OR ods cea oe 
ie he See 517 D, 5 
OTST ae eae ei 517, 7 
2) oe naa 517 D,7 
231, Teese ee BVT b, 9 
dey as 517 D, 10 
ss tees Rar Porta 518, 1 
Mee Woy ae: 518 D, 1 
ie ask he 518, 2 
CON Se ene 518 D, 2 
£32, Bosevereeeeees 518, 8 
OL Ke5escesnsecevecs 
fo Re a gen 518 D, 4 
4132, Beeeveeeeveees 518, 5 
ES rs 518 D, 6 
LE SAREE 518, 7 
BBA S) BD oiahie ss wane: )e'e 518, 8 
LD Loe. eee 518 D, 8 
a eee 518, 9 
432, 10... seseee, 518, 10 
ree | aa 518 D. Li 
a B18, 12 
fee ete ys 518 D, 12 
ae, Seer 518, 13 
PLOY Seal ne B18, 14 
LOOM eae a 518, 15 
4889) 15 2.2... 518 D, 15 
5) Seer 518, 16 
Be AT 6.25. 5 os 518, 17 
Na nae 518, 18 
dae eae or ae 518, 19 
482,19 ...... 518 D, 19 
AOD 5s « vcatihi 518, 20 
4e00). 005.0, 33 518 D> 20 
rena 518, 21 
432'D, 21 ...... 518 D, 21 
432 D, Boks sae. 518 D, 23 
439 D, 23 i... B1S D, 24 
rie gees 518 D, 95 
439 D, 25 ...... 518 D, 26 
432 D, 26.1... 518 D, 27 
se gee coe ), 1 
Me BT as 519D, 1 
5 Sort oe 519, 2 
Pee Os: 519 D, 2 
193, Beveveveeeee 519, 3 
aD 2 cuss. 4 519 D, 4 
EEL Shae 519, 5 
dee Deo Sie eat 519 D, 5 
TS Vd Dae eens 519, 6 
$5 Vhsb8 eo) 519 D, 6 











OLD. NEW, 
Age EUs ol 3 519 D, 9 
Pi), RES ee ean 520, 1 
ree es eee 520 D, 1 
OR i a ee 520, 2 
434 DO eas 520 D, 8 
4340 he. se 520 D, 4 
PES sae 520 D, 5 | 
AAD 8 oiouae 520 D, 6 
ABET se es ee 520 D, 7 
Gab Lee 519, 7 
PO te Renee 519 D, 7 
oT SS Galery sete 521, 1 
S85 Dich coca. tan 521 D, 1 
Soe eo 521, 2 
TEM eee MAR 521, 3 
Bae eat ae) Made, B21, 4 
Pig Oa Cap ee 521 D, 4 
ch ae Pe aeneelbeets Bol, 5 
45 DB ets 521 D, 5 
Bee Pete reek 521, 6 
B55 Babes ca eee? B21, 7 
405 1). Bovis os 521 D, 7 
PU PRR Re 521, 8 
435 ae BEA 521 D, 8 
495 a so 521 D, 10 
ret eg a OL ie 522, 1 
SEG Day Baa re 522, 2 
CS CRO Sa 522 D, 2 
Te OE 522, 8 | 
CAR Nenana 522, 4 
BOE AS tics ocr 522, 5 
PETS ae aie: 522 D, 5 
SA Sana pate 522, 6 
i eats as 523, 8 
BBG AD, 5 «sto 523 D, 3 
TP ae See pe 522, 7 
ae ae eee J 522, 8 
ABE 1D, hone mee 519, 8 
ED F075 .88 519 D, 8 
Mee ad os Coa 522, 9 
466 Di 19 oe, 518 D, 22 
$e 18 85. 522 D, 11 
aeTS Ae 522 D, 10 
pee Mat eee 522 D, 12 
FEV Oe ue erty eat 523, 1 
Pel bar ge ee 523 D, 1 
AS Re OO 523, 2 
Ce SSA eee 523, 4 
BENNO Sr Os 523 D, 4 
CE Bee a eae eas 523, 5 
AO ae ea 523 D, 5 
pr Se eae eee 523, 6 
pike aera 523 D, 6 
Cae ee eRe 523, 7 
CPs Smee es 523, 8 
By Dy ee as ees 523 D, 8 
$a BD ees 528, 9 
a 523 D, 9 
dag i, Oc 523 D, 10 


TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 


OLD. 


NEW. 
438.1235 ae «ade 
488,95. 0. a 524, 2 
438 Dy 8c xe 524 D, 2 
438.3... .2; 524, 8 
438, 40.0 se B21, 9 
438, 5... cuanto Bo4, 4 
438, 6. scene 524, 5 
489, 12...c.0s ene 525, 1 
439 Dy, des cee 525 D, 1 
489,32... ip ee 525, 2 
439, 8.20014 525, 8 
439. °4, B25, 4 
439 Dy 4 oon 525 D, 4 
439 D, 5. 525 D, 5 
440, 1s. 526, 1 
440 Dy eee 526 D, 1 
440, 9. vee eee 526, 2 
440° D, 2 ee 526 D, 2 
440, <8. 0. «0 hee 526, 3 
440.04: | eee 528, 15 
440 D, Bo see 526 D, 4 
440° D,°6 .wetene 526 D, 5 
440, 7 cee 526 D, 6 
Wale weeeiyer 527, 1 
441," 9... «bee eee 527, 2 
441, Bis. oceeeee 527, 8 
Wiley Waa 517, 6 
449. 1... eet 528, 1 
449 TD), ig oe 528 D, 1 
AAD. Be: Se 528, 2 
ie Peo 528, 8 
449. D, 3s ceeae 528 D, 8 
449.4... snd ee 528, 4 
449 Doh clea 528 D, 4 
449-5. Aig ee 528, 5 
449. 6... 528, 6 
449 ESS eae 528, 7 
449 Dy ee 528 D, 7 
4408 528, 8 
449 8: ccs 528 D, 8 
440 8 528, 9 
OO Me pe 528, 10 
420. 11 eee 528, 11 
440 Dts ede 528 D, 11 
449, 49... 528. 12 
449° DE, 12. c0eee 528 D, 12 
AAD AB, og See 528, 18 
44514: cae 528, 14 
449 15. tee 528, 16 
Ato D3 Gee 528 D, 17 
Aad Dod Oa 528 D, 18 
449 De 18 . sae 528 D, 19 
443 D4 eee 529 D 
448 DAG eee 529 D, 1 
443 DBs, eee 529 D, 2 
448 TY, 3 vue 529 D, 8 
443 Dds, ee 529 D, 4 
448 DB. .we eee 529 D, 5 
443 D, 6 .:cnceee 529 D, 6 











OLD NEW OLD. NEW OLD 
Yi ADOT AEST Biss sesso 0s 509, 4| 455 ¢ bi 
MM Bessa. a Rock ore B00, GT ABBAEs byt ks acon oe 44% 
: ee Sg (0 Se Vi as areas a 
. 2a ee et 60) D418 | 4nes so eee er 
oe a Spe le. Ou & ane de Ge ake 4 
rere Dy 2 | S80, Fennec en cere O09, D | BOT essere ence ererast 948 
Sains oe te! 509, 7| 457 a : 
* ee ova ae 500.8] 46% Bec. csi ce cos ee 
Po cus vax 530, 5| 448 D,12....... B00 Phy Gel Abe Qa Gsas saan 548 b 
eo... «- 530 D, 5| 448 D,18...... BAO UE bABEGS ahi cetuarea ere 
Wk a - 530, 6 | 448 D, 14...... BOO WS ARABS A. cos cos nee sor 4 
444°), 6.2.2... 530 D, 6| 448 D, 15......509 D, 12| 458 a ......00-.-0e pelt, 
..  Saee 530, '7 | 448 D, 16....... OS Mn O° calmly eet ee 
2 529 D, 5 | 448 D, 17...... 509 D, 151459 a...---.+6 are 
We cas hse 530, 8| 448 D, 18...... 509 D16 | 480 aoe. BBL, 1 
ci he SS Rs ea 530, 9| 448 D, 19...... SOM D Wed ARUN a goes nx uke Bo’ 3 
ON) Wiese. ss 530 10| 448 D, 20...... BUG OUT AM a=. cs ce vones Wer 
Mairi ...... 50.10) UL 448. D1... 2. Cia 8 rc: Nae? aa 2 at 
444D,12...... 530 D, 12| 448 D, 22...... Boddae an) Aa Ul) =a c coke aaa 
/ CO ie 531, 1| 448 D, 28...... 509 D, 21 | 461 b, fin.......... 58 a 
BF. 531, 2| 448 D, 24...... eve igae cto. ae ab 
i ae 531, 3| 448 D,25...... PA) OV Agi oe cut gs ay aig 
44s D, ec, « 581 D, 3| 448 D, 26...... B00 0.244 460 be ssc 561 b 
A as rae ee oon BONN 468 ge Cte 
a ee i ee es eee oi jee tig cose eae ae 
ee Bie ey A NG Ts oc SG WN wit ein a ese 2 
ee PARR: Lg ee eee Bere AGL Go... b cc ua ts me 
eae 581 D, 6) 440°, 2. e. BOD 8 abh ds: 568" : 
Bee a Ce eae anaes ON MAS a2. Ss BOe a3 
ea... co Und 67 ey «it aia ines ee oe 558, land 2 
ee 539, 2|449'D,4........ 506 D. 4:| 466......559 and a he 
Ne ae ROOT) MARS Bele cise once 506.5 | 466 a.... and a and b 
eer}: paged ae igs a ea ee oe 
or eee 583, 2 | 440.D, Tones, mie Wee co ee 560" 
Gayo: Sa oe a oe ee maa 
4a, beeeeseee. ais 19 250.0, 1...» 539 Di ine if hegedlee tc eer 
Od be cae: ee Mie |i ee ee BO 406 aes ee 
441, 6 SNR is 583, 5 450'D, 2 EOE 359 Ds Lee hahaa s 564 a 
Ao ee eater Bae edo. bagi. sa oan 
Pee... ....-. 25.01 450 DB eso fc 559 D's ps RE as i ig 
1 ee 510, 1| 450, 4 and a........ ASG laos and a ee eo? 
iD, 8 ........ Sa Dea) De diet... gn ee 
BP ese ce Pee tO. Bak bo 6s ok ue Gnas ag Ge ke toa tes es 
a7 D, Bee, 38D, 7 Eg a ee LCUGT MOOS 1c a inane eate Nie er Be 
Be ssn ne aa ae ee ( 
ear iF 10 .....:. oa are O56 1 550 D6 pee FONE ENA aR cue 
447 UL. essen, OSes al Ben. Fi Peees a ec cee 
Bee See BSAA OF ABO. 7 We. ais os ans Bede Pome Ao dona os ae 
447, LRoe ee eeeeee. STEN, Sa BOL Bi eare4 etek, cae ate 
te Ph eee 538, 11 450, 8, aeeseee es aS at coy a ce ie 
aa D, 18.0... 33D, 1 es eee Ree 8 |4yoe.. ae eo 2 
aide os" BW Te MB as 6.5, TIE eee 2 
i ee Bee eda 45000 hese. se. Sle ie ae eee ie 
447 D, 16...... Ps | AGS ire Soe, 541 py Perea a 
447 Dy AT +... ee ie tol ae ries ee fee He 
448, Lee seeve reas, 503, 7| 454, Rem. a........ gin ee pte 
HS, Bees ceeeeeae 500, 1 454, ie ey Sega ara 547 oie ee 
Tae = ee B44, 5451478 b......--.B7B D- 
_ ESR iat CoC Sy aeeaeeeane nn ae BAG ail Aas cs... : ° : ae 

















416 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 

@LD. NEW. | OLD, NEW. | OLD ; huge 
LAGE SUS Uae a ier erate G78 CO cad eae eee 626 and a | 526 bes... cee 
ABMs seen ess sas Shee BUC ly) gakar aaee ie e e — | 527 a... eee 

2 A A SS Sea Se BY O:| SOR Mee ences See 626 527 WD evs ocala ee 
A Ee ee ok a Se Seas BF Pa- ates. weal Sees va dices — | 527-@ 1.3.20. oe 

AS BEES 5 Siete ba aes 5790.) oe ake ss toe he sop em ne 627 | 527 d.2.35, eee 

A Oe RS DSO and a O04 eS cect eens coke 602 | 527 ©. cus ee 

Ces re a ee DOLE Oia, eee Bie Cartan ete — | 598. 3. eee eee 

£79) 582 acand band 583 |: 5060. 000: fc was wees — | 528 a4... .0e eee 
eee Se whee SBE er OOP, 2, one eae ee —~— | 529... so ee Se 6 

PO ose Glee Wiloletote cate ee DSS |S. osc SaaaR eee G11 | 529 a... oe eee 

ro) al See ae ae ake HAR ANG BO DUG Dark kame ees 612 | 580.\... oem cee 
OLS x Sistas: isehe a DOO IO Wis Cet s Sle Bete 613 | 580° @. . . oi ae 
AST O seh estes oe sk BSB 1 -O09 iwc sda heme cheng 621 d | 530° b.z.sue eee ee € 
462. Bem 8% i. ss.5 se BOt:1 SOON atu sc oe be Charane 621 -¢ | 5380 C... ac wee ee §6\ 
489. Rem: by... 95k cae ee Go: 692 | 581........cs0s 0 
ASS “Roms ©5128 BB a DOLBY. 52.22 es 730 a | BB2...02 cast one a 
Bore bio cit we RS ae eee BS9 ONO Bees Sev awcreee 621 b\'532 8.. 200 667 ag 

BERG i's teres wiarere bia EAU SI orice shh epic eS ad ots Sha ene 996 532.D.. 22 %.0.c = 
Bees c2's thee ege 591, 592) Ollea, C, and ducevst. 606 | 588.... 05500. e 0 
= Dy I aie eee a GO Anette oe hoc oe eee 606 a | 583 a and b........ cee 
BE ners hee ia. og eget: 615 (1) | 584% 0.2 de ee be 
LTS, Oe Pa aan Sates Saute aa ee CR Ma 0 ie papers ae, cpg ak a 615(2) |-035°a 2. .i00 ose 
i) Rae a HOS Cn ae kee 615 (3) 58D Dye an ee & 
Pima ety vi is ues WGA, oda bees ceeecae 616 | B86...3 220 ae 
BAGO. beeen ek O58 bl SE cae 610 a and 617 | 537...) eee ay 
15) Corto mee we oe BOS SOD | DLR Bis Sainte wiley oe 608 and a | 588 2... cise eee . 
Se So ce Bee 2 ee a Ry Ce aN 620 a | 588 bide. sy eee oc 
Ot. aoc 6 mcs re BoA bh (Ele et 614 a and 623 b | 5388 G..4 22sec Ge 
SORE pr Sas ths ale GlOcond |} Sawa: os eta ketene 628 | 588 d.... sven 6 
BO UK ek ceo tae oe BUD 1 Bee Ie, a ake Coase 610-1 588.0 <5. c eee 7 
BE HO Ber,P ie. ' gh, tee area BOD Bt Ola wk take coke 631 | 589) .sax Se ee eb 
BAO Gas Pc wetter ae, Se OLN, So. . ho.2 eas 632.9, | 54004..54 02 TOF 
Ais ene tneek Be Le tease — bOLA AIG Bo viens ae en's oe 609.1 DAL. «disne etapa en one 
i ae eames 2 Hag ct e Oe AR CES 609.2 | 542... 40 eee 2708 
EO NO Et ee Liaise, ele bs Soe Oia eo oles ak eeeeee 629 | 443°. ss wee ee Law 
2 Re ee DOO NOIEE . oe. cc onanees 629 a | 5445.1 - ogni 710, 7 
BWM ic OF i aisles on PALES cue ol ate eee — | 644 ao... ose ed 
BO Ore. Sic ok Soak Sais Ts Se se 604. | 544: b =. 2... dake cee 71: 
Oe peek a Pe ONG ee ss oc ee 605 | 544.0 ......) Se 97 
See Sc ae Boa ine hee one 634| 544 dic. ...: eee 12 
Boe as iy Os ec %i: Mes eat On| Le aa G4 oe So bine oe 685 | 544.6... 622+. 0e0 ee 
Wop) eS Neo Neg a G66: and 4 te ce oo. dew eee cee — | $45.44 eae 
AGA eae chee ee ce GGG sd ieee ee as hee oe oes 636 |. 546-45.5 oe ee e 
cea ae Coy Oars Oe ea GOO PATA cierto 687 | 547 aand b...715 ak 
SOP eee ce oes SUELO TB: Spine ar eer Ok eM me 638 | 547 @°.... 2a eee . 

29S Pog lee oo eae GOOD VOLO Bree Sheu eee he — | 547 do 2c 
493 o ath Aer OR, SEN ER ee Shes (| NRO ean aa AR eS Cpe aR 639 | 548... 0. 
BOL SS FES. ty dates ote 602 d | 521 ....272 a, 275 a, 222 c| 549, a, b, ¢... Tepe ae 
404 Bes 2s 602 d anid Remi }o20) oi. scape ween a 617 | 550, a8, Deckecame 720, & 
SEDs ous fens ee ee == | Beales ox the ook hee te 633 | 550, Rem. @......e06 Th 
BOG ohh eae te ere Bal Poet fier eres pose Roos 653 | O51; ». 2.5% 3 eee 2 
BOE Bol deg koa ee 603.| 525 and a..... 654. a. and b| 652; ... eee 719 a ¢ 
AR Dy A S56 Sis il G04) 508 (ah eee oe 654.¢| 552 a......00- 719 bt ds 
SAGs ch Nhe lo ed Gam wae 620: ! B20 (BY. ois opaen bees 654 d| 553 anda...... 724 a-G & 
HON Tori severioges ees 608 595 ty. s cbse) Ue 654.6 | 554... 53 ane = 
OUO Mes cas 624 a and 6254) 525b........ 655 a and 'b | 805.0... 00a ee 5 
HOO WS oa 694d and CIRC 1 525 OV. 2 8. cele 655 ¢.|:555 a. <<. cane eee Sen 
DOO: Cid. wade atafete S40 Goes 25: A oe week eee 655 d | BOG « «oe wwe ania int 
500 de.5 3% 624 Gand 620: 04626 s0'sjc oie eaecale oe Gb6 0564... apie Rees % 


ons by) 
eye ee 
TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 417 
or 2 We NEW. | OLD. NEw. | OLD. NEW 
ee ORRIN fo. vy duced d. rt WEL ee ee pe "75 a 
Ms ores soca pee ede obit.) © as Tn Cbucas vicbewd awed 776 
| ees vil, {eee hE Gt GOR cb Shaka sc yesius oe ah 776 
es ka WOO CN GEN Mt. >’. vaar vcex es URE a UOOT EL os Sen's oadleeaey wT7 
{ - | £ (ip bs a Me ee ee fee 9a Perey Peer rT 776 
earns (oo) GRR WM oashcesiceants 780 
ee (POS Se tee) Ply Giada tro oa 9 a's 781 anda 
— Ce aouGy UCM OCS. cee ne econ. (Oe @ OR Re, Bs asia wa — 
RE aie MARE Bh dctc< cies vives CL + 6 ane ite "76 
aa ME AIny WASHER DS 5.3 dss Beka wd yoo Be 10 ay eerste 2 77 
mean. .c1. 729 a and Rem.-| 586 &......cceccere: PAR a OI ee ce. oa as bee 783 
an PRN Cta Ais g s ss tetid sate od a pan Ole BS eae eae 783 b 
aa P20'G Mom, | 5800... lvacsins es aE Dd BID. neo per'nci ne Rae 782 
ES ae eee ia GL EO oy a oa aM ne ee res a oo ee a Re P= 784 
We ee aa « Seer olbal tokens ie csales (iy BO A Cae, Bass 785 
Rt a os csc ois Poe MEO css edhe «ile ae 25) Sn LS. Orn ae Se") "S85 a 
a eee a PU Cy aca poet dere 8 Re A el le ee ne oe 786 
ae Tey MOST Gisva oscar sh aecsiene> cscs Vii a he ale ate ee eee Pee = 787 
noe. Me en os Pot eT Le 0c wl ncas ees 3 Wiehe OUR. rao 5. va na oaecene 787 
A WE Oe nies ss malaise m pes ,s Gee Bie es oi ane a eee 788 
ee acs si» P20 cial P80 a B80 sce nde ce oa a poles dob sis inte dees 789 
| ie eee BE in| GIO) mn esk-0 ost’ odes PO AI OO occ caer ondon grate 796 
ASS ee a SESE 1 gl) a en aa RA GORE wena en an awe 796a 
Re ak sy ake de GN ane tic Gisaad's bcc sw a Pag Yi 5S capa me eaten eee 796 b 
| SoS ee ee CEU UD Binal asks sean ae ak ISS ona ohcinecca pn oe 796¢ 
Mey clo ys ae ess BOL en Uns cbs hake oS ee ee RMSE: c's ks widia oe e 796 ¢ 
a ie Nk OTL | IS «ta Risin wile bce Sestecss S70: 620, Bote. seeie8 796, note 
ed Tenge werd es TG IO Bhaco eb odd wae oe si, I OS Ge a ela REI 799 a 
Le RAs swale sss POA A DOA. Wate oe warn ¢ Seta eee OMe) Os 6-5 ee cial eee eee 793 
Ses Tis HANG een sis Gaacaere su, TODs o | Oteins s stive spe tamed 794 
ey does Ghee 8 Te ches eae OE AMG eh ai o's howe oye 794 a 
Be Gea eOe eee), ga... 20 RpQon Gee Decca babe 794 b 
Oe ET tele eck om ses OED a iow ea elas hae meee Uh ae oe ace ee See 794 @ 
aba Bree Gy i ol. f Oe Gl DUD: Beis. we owes wens hic pe oF IG: ener reer 798 
Mes wa Seid os Ss "35 WOR Miata a dws» 6 a's LOL, SOLE Ry. aud. ace ae 
a 054 (tt SL ee ee eee 65) GOED <4, c. s caeeee 798 b 
Who Ss cea bas ce bec gE) Br? ar Og ae FG a ON a cepa leo 798 ¢ 
2, SASS Pega Td ae) EO ete ae aioe wince @cale a HL, INA cb OG a AAR hg Jc 798 d 
DEN ete Aree 605 2 bees eb ate sed MLAS sas eate: ksace, 208, ayer TOL VOLO. Saad web ae ee 804 
MEM eS kG epi litlss ete cove advance OS Oe at os aloes 804 a 
BB aiho os oo vk es Wer er tn es wed Gs Sia jare a's Stay tte Di... pc alee eo eee 804 b 
RSs a ook cua wie 6 FW BCL) Cpa ee ere FS 7 Renee ogee ae gt 804 ¢ 
Me Merch ss ohn ws. ee ARON Clo tel ade Siw ie Bec laces PD Gan 2 es akalg dane 804 d 
Pe ee Oe cates d oor e ea 767 | 626, 5. ) 
Pe es ok es ae 8s i DYES, ol 5 Rg ae pe ar Sa eI 768 | 626, 6. 59 
ee ee se fo (CLOTS cx Bate: aera Tog SOs6. Ge, fit eee A 
ee ees: OOS ry AeA Caroaceot 768 b | 626, 8. 
Bir, bem. Goa... . Te. tes inixtleSe kw weet. TOO" ab 2G Re vin We da 758 
573. Peter id eto Sha ose ee CLOG ato) RO ee ie ae a PGA SG Ge Wh .dian oat ee eee 758 
& 4 See ee a cm hae ARO a a Sa oS Sig sh ales 771 |-626, Rem: F... 2 ee of. 75T 
fee ets Cee fk. WAG Uae © aw sid Sa abscess TA Bh: iS 2 ee 797 
a bce... ...... Teva Ue eee ee 762; SREB. .ioacs i RO 806 
2 he ae eereee ENC ae Cenk aie ela eRe Pro Gate 02 2) dee 795, 1 
A ee a ry AG a EOD eas: cases cc 172 @ POS0.a ocak: 795, 2b 
OE a Pere ae eee ae Be OGURAB i! gels orc terstid Gu, crake Tee OC Duis, veers 795, 2a 
NM bees Sh hai wats x Me Oro rats & aise wa ee ene Tac Gak (5. Goce tem aes 800 
SES eer aE POONA. «4c ss wu, olare bi whe Vis O3GaL Bos bbc 800, 1 aand b 
Bs Sasa haa ecw sabes NA Cero gts Sara. a lacbhaiter eins 774 als Wi cone cee 800, le 
EE eine kes ee OO a Pa Cet ee v5 Ged... .).\ oa 800, 2 


~ Stir pues bo 









418 TABLE OF CORRESPONDING 4 
OLD NEw. | OLD NEW . sia - oo” 
WG res Ss aktnliiae} S07. 14 OT. ewan tei apache 710 i... Ae és 
oS eee SOY, 94 GPR cs eee , 6871 710 bi ocicv ee 
CS ote Aig elves’ 702, 11-79 Mcecl e seads af O TIO Gis ..911 and 881¢ 
WOR Gin CBE a cin os 799, 2 VOTE. lo uconeet Mace ae Sr , 846 
vy SR ee 701; 01 676: . 5. aedee 675 and ee NBs Wena eee and b> 
NEE ae Re ae, Tei, Ui} GPb wii ciee Oboes 689 | 712 a. 2 .<< Sacaeeeen een 
See erie ee 791, BL GTS bes... ah Aaa 691. | 713... v vies > ccna 
i. te ee EEE CPR 900. 2) GOs avaweeeee G2 | 714. ee avelnam ,, Ae Se 
a ee ee MOO, Sal PONE. vse sonst een 64 | 715. . +. see aa 
OS a tees COG. Sie MAYMT I, «acs eee 696: | 738... ce ae i: A ae 
EEE Oey ae, eee nate i 696 | 716 8... .s8Gsesdbw= ss eNom 
Al ae 799, 1a git bh} GRGcc cum auena: lk GOT | Tit... tee ee. Se 
DL Ee Me. 799, 10/680 a. ..... sanded. 2098 PY] a eee 856 and b> 
oS Ree tee Ute To At OO: uot dee 699° fin..| #27"... s cae ae Goes 
EY Mes 750,968 & cu. aeeaaeees 699 | 718....004 ake | en 
SET: O03:'9 WEE De as .resee v2 699 a} T18 @4s.éaacememee 855 b 
ODES eT: EL, dA Rv de Son «SG kearaee 700 | 719. vs uses eee 865 
TE re oe oC | eee oe eae 702 | 719, Rem. a —_ ~ 
BMS Sigs cu coup 801, 861 SOF S onc. ew dsas, 702 tb | 190% «00-03 ace 866 
WO i cn vtsca es a Ge pee ete oe 708 | 790 @.<0a sean ae 866, 1 
ER ey es $04.01 GB%:c. oii. nat aimee 708.0 | 720°D..\. ss cease 866, 2 
-) eae ag? O08. F1ROK. Mv. docdvees eae 809 | 720.aneaiuae ee wane 866,38 
BORE oe, ba an he 809, 3 | 684 d.vewrssennewEttt 610) 790d... ..c.0 ace ee 
Oe anos axpida as 809, $1680... cawense ene 810 a | 990 6... cae eae ne 868 
WE ain aabis. ys AG BS nie Se eh ee eee ee ef; 815 | TZ). «.. «ding eeemeeeee 869 
See oe at ea ee ae tek, 4 ee aaa 870 
ba pian gaieetee ee ge ne Say 819 | 91,1 a. vaca 870 a-c 
Upper econemed Sip ae ae: See ey soar 819'b | 721, 1 hse cae Sflanda 
658 d..:-.. 805, 1yeand Bi OR l. 65. denres sabes 813.) 790. o..cme cece ones we 
og a oe ee ee et ree eee 818 8 | 189 @.. Lead 2 aE 
SoS ii ae ae 9065.31 800 Besos... cae 815 | 792". .\.. xasenn Bee 972 a. Ss 
eee ec 4. at whe B08, S1BOD. Ay. - sdue eae 814 | VO90... ay cee O72 dk oats 
“Cg asta: 5082 E OUP, iach Ne B16 | 798. ..... cna 873, 
WRG bs5 cash haan B08 | A Bich) +s mica BIG | 729 dy. sicun Semen s74anda = 
a ne tee 6001 BBS...) Baha 81S end a'} FSB. . <uaeiianaie Bik: By os 
SS cae aie 649684. :igvic emda. Bel 19 | 904.5 ease tea 5 ee 
he TEE G43 | O8E Gi. Ua ae te 819°@ | 724 &......0:kepe ene 8768 f5 4 
WE esiev inc uceev ee hd O08 ce uk sent 819 ¢ | FO8 1s. cn sce 876a 
ee Tae AONE ee O06 1 WEES. «cone ceecen 810d 1/725... 3: heen eee Cy eee 
SS eee are Tere 646 | 694, Rem. d....819, Rem. | 726. ..5...isneee eeu 878 
ES re - eh eo pre 621 | 79%... cca tanga + ies 
a a OER TONG A 50d cages > | FOR 5. .0s 2a me ee 
is ice necks cae bg. eee eat 883 | 728... ike sds ee a 
GRO ek iden Sbeie se ea a A ee ee $23 a} 729 fice oa seme Gee — 
BRE a cede, sed id OR ss a ts coe 851 +799 b wxiescsdatanleen 4 
BREE oes niet sks loss seks ee eres swig 924 a atid. b | 780... .....< 2 dpe a € 
Biel ts. wis cups peut Se oe pe an rr i 827 | 731.0 aydtonwanaatinene . 
eo aes 659:n and b1 O09... ..: ..caametans ee ee 
eh ences Gi5.6 | P00... .<aplanenten 698) 731-b... ... case — 
eT Ore re mee bg ge, ee aa 683 | TES... vied see 
Nilkk. 5 ntheres ee RPMS: «ows cn keauud 629 | $38... iano eek 929, ) 
oe aor 7 ae "ae he, eee 839 | FBdi.; .. cise eae eee ie Fe 
00:8... «enue Ce he, eee ee aay, + eats ? eee Bs sd 
669 Bore ces 680, 2and 3/704............ 835 and a|734Db.......+20>+s go 
BOG Pie Rb hiakccvnte De GO0 1) FOB ins xo acne 836 and a} 734°C... +. custom cf, 980: ... ¥ 
WF directo <; pwaomanes 683 OR: « i pnekeeu eek ee, ee e929 ° §s 
fh Se er re 6047 iis. ys ciywcaneth oe O40. | 966... dvi ree +2982, © 2 
5 gees ee Gh | RC sas yu teteateas vee ee Come nyt ee a 
og epee ewan BBE} POR ce cada neon rd: eee +982 D ay 

. - 

ee 


ABLE OF OORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 419 








Sy Oe 5G Wl 1 eae eae Ceuee dr banks 982a 
Sao aed, > ee CAR aaa et airs ba edete 983 

Bot anes | 77 Gree eet sd ok casas GaN ai os oo diccd-n tare velop 
ae nt WRC A ys COE ANG D | BOL ica ve nsce s UO, 985 
Eee Boe) TTP Reha dawe e's senna —- | COL SCAR 7° 
Bites cae a | fF ae es ds de 6 os CSO | Oke a nnn n oe bec one eae 
a Bay eT Gua Bek e six oce's-s 6 BOD | SOBs. aw hws.weiviels bis bee 
en eae) | 770 aes feria ooo 60 be G80: | SOB ca we heeds 987 a 
BCA OSS | [80 avtaees es oad coe ss Ode | SOR ince ye keceae 987 b 
Peg eB al cia SSG | ROM ee aa alain a date divy BOE | COUmiei ots o's 6.4. ae le 9 ecp'e ames 
ere MP tb BLAS Vielay Gace sees sais O58 || PORE 21.5445 s bo aerate 989 
eter aks chat: Fa Siw 9. BOREL Ds cera cok oi dx days a ag PAO | MM EN ceo ocbhasgm aa 
ES re oe SOLET te Fe ae nee ee OT Oe Or fa ca die. @ wont 991 anda 
BiG. 2 22): BOSS OLE Wi Aae <a ons iare ts eae as WOE POMONA. ale as ¥'0' bo 3 63 ieey 990 
RY el CO EGO else acne disease bs DE 1 ORG Dr te ss a.u iowa tebe 992 
Ta ees. 894, 1, and SO ay ie sage ated ye aoe Bact OE, col es 's Saruule Deas 993 
Dea eaiele nis BUSCA PORs OM, Os css ccae cr — pOO8 BNO By oss veg eles 994 
5 0 Se eee ae a OPAC kaise ead Wo eaal'ace Oe MF i) RRS cy. ear actos .995 a and b 
COE TS A tri BOO Wy) PB ate sd has Saree eee G68 1 SOD Ah aos meltleteead 995 ¢@ 
Ch eee 1939, 2, b and MOUs el ced: aca coe were Gil: SL os bisthnin wale 996 anda 
ER ee SO Se Sale ae GR RUN eos ide * 
Pe es cae ch ee JC ee eee ee OU Ree a da Ss wig aad bee 997 
a eee ele Sec sy GOO NAVA Bees «hee ae 0 Die AL sce Sh wc. cwadon ee 997 a 
[Th OS eee ee nase oat Rr ea kik ioe & 6.8 ee ea UR eee eo. as 5 et 998 
ME ee kek chess FE gig: lec amavorenes Sieteraisw.¢ Gt, QGO Wedee ook ae ees 999 anda 
Vo anda ...... OD Mae ESO AP ec wk aes oS Ss 969 Ba Gas Gy. wa wires aete ns 999 b 
Ae ere a Ee ere aia, ovate W ave.e ed Mote G69 ba Sides ou eed ems we aan 1000 
ene a VAIN VO) POO ene wean ia eet < OGD Ciena Cec ee eee 1001 
Me rane a 5 ci'o bo aa « WU ty 2. hae vei hd sec ee seem 969 Greta chide B ees 1001 a 
i SS a rae PO Tre, o's. de ccateas ang Oe Ca Ts OL ic acy kOe tet 1002 
RA gon a ol se Gf9-9168 789, Rem. o. os O60sTnemty OSLO ay och. sae ne ws ob 1002 a 
eae DUD Atv | POO a Aes eats le bin dees OFS UGK oor ae oe 1002 b 
ee i a gg See as aimee a's s/s wee "as I RY ea a ee vi 1003 
te oie esc os 09370715790; Dae baie i'ens CfOrl at Clie ss u.c.c550 deme 1003 a 
eee oy: OR aengt Meee eaten = 6 GORE GL ated h hy hax osm kte'p acetone 1003 b 
POO sy sk ec ss 914 B (2) SOU ss asics S's 5s» 971 b| 818 and aand b..... 1004 
CONG 2 eae re er GU Ce craiste tae een ele Gs OF elrOlar-eanad. ¢ <<. . an nek 1005 
Be se ss tee es ATS ab ey BC, 5 an ae ag De ee i bt k Gun ins ee oe 1006 
LR ee eee ea Upto ate A, ag Amand Oe ae a OF On ted bauios Natt tx kee Siete 1007 
Eero he bad s os « « A Ne PIN Sk esate ten 6 Sie Ce aOR 3 on (aaa ae 1008 anda 

ei 8. as sia Seen edt Ga. sc Ria 4 ob Sa be GUIS MOaaee tals cw tree nea ae 
oh ae Oa ma 920 | 701d. es cess ew ws Se esc oe hice orem 1009 ain a 
OU oe cota RUNS a iE oP a chat @ \caps'arin're is Paine Saha Nene Oi onl Sova. oes tua ae a owe 1010, 1 
ee 948 |792 a and b......... Ora Bed tei; 2k. 55 vata 1010, 2 
pg SE Se Ne on eth aitc fol al OTA npn Geen ison 3 one oa 1011 
70c digests wiles oe le, wile eb 6) cle 951 794: eral elelee\ers se sues © 0-6 ssl | ERIN EL wo ang oetaies Soe ee eee —— 
ERNE eat RR ae ace eae aE NIV pista ate cess « Sax ie Bs hire ia oe Soe 10ll a 
8 ee Se) 5 a GGA ee OSE di hale oe 1012 
fe 2 DEE ALE ie wk twain dies e's eecme PRG | eC a) d ain! 0 ik cams 1012 a 
POE AA ii tte. ves eso NT OS ictat eas Waa rete aia tic: es O76), SaGeD es Se cea ee 1012 
7 Pao ad, a ANG P| 79D-d. ws aes sees oes DT | CRT. ca sims ae miepseaeuters 1013 
SM ete oe ek Sawak SHES: We baad Cicsiaotin wah Dieu Kav vik GYB. Soe tes «es os sees 10l5a 
etc a De aaier O24 17 Oy fo nw foretewann 04 s EO ee Wo sk de Oe 1015 
ES. Ae ee eae OE LO unr kia eis Vacs ue aie 960; S20. ROM. C.". < aiee's able — 
“hig SU eae a Be PO Gh te Sosts Sieteie So cave EU: eae oo os, coke a ceed 1015 
Be SARS gE Ge Et, Pere OG Wilahers ck ie nas 8 ee GOO Ee Bs soe OS ae 1015 b 
Re Meee Cd eos pies 947 | 7 A ate a ie 98t-ancd.a (7802... ss 1016 and a-c 
7 Be Pike un ie Wed SR of he er Ce APNE ET eel | epee as sie twra ued eee 1017 
92. OR a a Me 940 799 Seat haars a oe seca Be ewe a ae ot orcas eee 1017 b 


420 TABLE OF " CORRESPONDING . 

OLD NEW. | OLD. 

Mi aS 1018 | 858 a.......-. 

GER ee 1019-4 BESS i nade we 4 

Ae ck sd 1020 | 859........-. 

COs se 1098 | SORwieked oes 5 ces 

Me aa 2004 3 1B F cess. 

ie orcs 1022 | 860, 1 a 

OIG 55 ie: 1023 | 860, 1b 

fy oe eras Paar Ere ne g a MOREE WR, vii xo sashnn sas 

AS Re oy a ee 

RR epee 1029 | 862, 1a.. 

eee 1025 862, 1b 

ae 1026 | 863. 2 Teal Rensea te 

et Re ous, ae 4 1097 | 863, 2 a 

ddr patiecdiedts 5. 1028 | 863, 2b 

sen a here GE, 1030 | 863, 2 ¢ 

EE ay ig ee 1031 | 864, 8............2047, 1 

es. on os eg tes mh ei te 

Si PRS eR eee 1088 |BB4, Be on ccccss... 

Oe RE BF 204 } 004, B. cccedocascs 

Eee ees G4 & S64, TF .Wnttano adn 

EES 1034 b | 864, 8........ s--1047, 6 

aes 1048, 1044 | 865, 1......00..0. 

gg eee 287, 719 b | 66, 2.. 

SO tect — | 866, 2a 

CORE ies viene. 10865 8 | BOP E SG, ... sicieesc nee 

1 re mack | SO Wh. veiccscect 

O80 6 cen 1085 0 | 867, 5...c..ce.ee- 

Ribas pees oes LONG’ GM, A ee ne so ks 

TF Tee Sy ieee 1097 [BOB AL. cc ceece Bees 

Eg anes ee 1037, 1| 868, 1a 

Se eee ee 1037, 1 a| 868, 1b 

Bite Sn. yee 1037, 2 50841, Rom. ¢..1049, Bem, 

ong ae See 1087, | 868, Goce. cescsere 

MEE oh Shoe FOR 7 4 VOR, 1. oe ow 

Ot Sos 1087, 4a| 869, 2.....4..0.- 

SS See 1037, 4b | 869, 8........ 000. 

5 2 ESS 1087, 4¢| 870, 4...0..s000e- 

BRS coe oe 1087, 5| 870, 4a 

NE SE EE 1037, 6 | 870, 4b 

She ge tege eee 1037, 7| 870, 4¢ 

Tg Sa eee a 1037, 8| 870,44 

ag are 6 ks ae eae 

1 Wis ea Se. .. aR eas 

ye ee 1087-201 Bifins. an ck abe 

BBS Bibs oec. 1007. S0.te ss Sim. ©: a. Pies cese 

852,.18....1037, 11 and 12 873 b.....mote before 857 

S55 $e oe = TE 6 1053 

85S. «eee a8 87 4B covert 

a, a w AOBS & BTS, 2... owe deeees ; 

fs See 1038 a, fin. | 874, 2a........- 1053, 2.0 | 896 b....-+eeneees 1079 b 

i Tacge «tk ieeae P0801 BUE o wae sh anes 1058, 8 | 896 c.......- aide 1079 ¢ 

pa SS te aes 1040 | 874, 3 b......-ee- 1047, 6 | 896 dy sivsgeetese 1079 d 

BESS coGhahase WH Sd OPTS coda Geese caked 1054 896, Rem. e...1079, Rem. 

Shhh. 9: Pa es 1040- Aare To eden sory 1054, 1 897. a+ eae se 1074 

ry ea 5 eg, 1041 | 875, 1 a......-s. 1054, 1a | 897, Rem. a....... 1074 a 

ani be ees 1042|.875, 1 b.....0e 1054, 1b | 897, Rem. b.....-. 1074 b 

58 826s i eee 1042 0 | 875, 1 Cscsveeee 1054, 1¢| 898 '2........ce00e 1065 

SRD PS 1042 b| 875, 1 d...sseeee 1054,1d|898 D..csceeseeeesl@65Q 

SiR. oo aaeaneiaee 10437 895, Lao... .2%.. 1054, 1e | 898 ¢....... aan re DS 
\ ae 











TABLE OF CORRESPONDING ARTICLES. 491 
NEW | OLD. NEW. | OLD NEW. 
Berita TORT Te Aloe cia wis cccoccuecoLOODO OLE Bescecccconevcosttiau® 
Rte ere TOGE ee occ cece ccc LOOG OL Beedasvscdscecolklia® 
SE canta © LE, cikg's a via bb 0 | Bleccweneeveucecceseakhem 
LO AEE Te eo 1Q08 TUE Wa dees ce chc wee om eee = 
PE odds 6 a he nic en ce Lk OO vec s caddveovelMee 
eee tdi és TORU Eades nce ccceudee wate, EOE a at, & x ccegisrins 1112 b 
eater rgceck ke AGE I etek. vc coos ARO EET OLS O vccid:e vdeveeecean 
CE te 1 ORM DMN GINO r yokes co oe LLG OLOLO OccGy ws ewa wears bee 
eet a's 6 T OREGON S65 ces usc a varie SL PE pecs sce paeesdaeeee 
Pe. tke Br OUR ceine ia ss. - LL0RE | FES hens coven css MELD 
eee hy 5s pod ee aie ty ET ne wo 6 ue kee as bars ob back ee coe 
ere ee dla. 6 ee wort PRS hide ds xk n'ds'e swe 1113 a 
BS ci che. oats Fa eS, occa bade Oe Ve OU aes ekdeenseete a om 
Poids lasts ee OG Pee i oo sack a Ad 2 | OES O cn de Cece eicesreeee 
Be aaa ain an, ee We ss. a edn etc ee e OL ace 6 0.8 nie a Oe me 
a aa Mink S0e Ts.  eeecene | O19 ais, o's «Kavala hans Ra 
iC Re rae a Se Oe Baa es ie es a es c's — | DIGL,.. vos dacnb Jee eke 
Sew v2. 5% EES Ty OOER H ee ero we ct ae OA Ds cuwasa tn wea eae ee oe 
ae ane Pores Petey oe 1G: 2 ae pa, en | QUO MEL 75 5, oxtnaee eee 
SE alga SOURS oo. ols Cees Chae EO NT Wee's a ea ep safe aie tre 
NG cinta ors a Vat caress wees vale RE | CEs Besa ud bg cas en eee 
eee ns a’ Bien vee inserts fo ects hor Ee ee et wet aalecate he ae 
og ta eS eae ai OB Sy © Aap a Re CN ee eg REE Ore og xa ke ewe 1114 a 
Co ie Wie ee Ole Sooo a decks One OO cua vedewbetne kee 
ag 10838, 1084 DIES oe se ove Ce LO EM Co oes cvarnceeenee 
ae Eo dias Ll Rape Loa pe eee pa Pee er wee cb SOS eos 11146 
meee PORe—-1000.1 913 Ge. ck. ce eee 1104 Se ee oo ek ee -—— 
Me Sela s oss SPUUG af 1 Gh ook cease caeccvl lee Ba0 te So vt eee 
~~ ee eae PO ha ee eee ic See y's ok LORE 3a eee ae 1115 b 
(PR ae SCG COP OLS, fc Re wiv asc aes wc LEP OeO Bl. se ee ncaa eee 
= OG ey WEA re ee be co's LO Oa hy ab ws ce a ee eee 
ees ors was AG Ob OIA a. Soe fT a ee ai 
TOR 1096 2 OYA ty thes ss oo. LO eee oo eo eta See 
1 ae ig se} GA Geena os veen ow PhOO Ge 1 wees a ess ss ceeoe ake eee 
Diy an O06 4) O14 ret oo. cs oes ch edd Oe ae acetate. eee 
Bete Maa Je TOOL a-O Ole le cod eek oe a bb PD con cu oe deka eee 
| Pee SIOOt SIR. he ee ce 1108) 1109.1 998 5 oy ve seen ek ine 
i alee roa et eee ea eo LEA) el Ge Os a ce ob a Sele ee 
re a ee wis vie ee Gre le Ui sivee ee as LEIO py SON eo, 3) vcag ed cetera 
ere BE OE Oa ees cc aA Oy Uae L.. c. ccc wcee cactus 
SP einer HSE oreo ek. use. es ss de Ne eee EPP EA SS: iw 
ere dice op Cy Gk ag 7 aR i ce ae Ms am] 8 Ug! 1 SN eR ed ee 
Ripveaheus MO. BOM OL Asa 'c Cid eee eek: Pa i esd Steg eaeme epee ten 1119 
ME Bie GE a A) cache keh x-n wis 6S x er EES lade wie wikia 1119 fin. 
URE era oats “an ce ESA TO Lic SRR Pe eR ne gaara’ 13 Fa BA 9a | 0, RR ee SES 
Be Dis arch te axa Shae Ea Gite Sele oS bap) te OE noc ea | a oe 
Mee ose owes 1G E eet eo eo, ON IAN oot ee Se. co eee 
ees wo ect a are She See, Por tito. Get [< @) OOerye. oe ee. | 
ent Rte MOG Dip oto. coy IEEE | Maa. sc. Sey ee 
te ieaetes Sx°2 BOC E POET ae at ceesaie cave ELLE PEE cénds sean cree 
ase Cie a oe 1097 Na ag ee Ca on SER ELE DoE Ay ca eees ae 
Bete sie Sié'e 1097 Di ne Oe ea ee hee ee ee a ee 
eee PO Pee ee. as. <sin weRdde t Uaibae 2 aa on eee 
BE eee —|9171...... orn Shr. SS. Cee fla Dae aes 1121 
i eg ziat sg, DT ta Wks So <a a ox cha gh D ERIE O SD Bes a wa cuss pace 
Seer re tae sw Geico’ eA a Ea pe > PURO Bsn «coma walewione 1122 ¢ 
Beant ee oh xk eae LT ale oo ko: dco ea 0s LEER ABE OO0-D occa deeenln 
eee te c's’ « 20 MEME ED wicca lal e- o-0. s 0. ae. 2 1111 Baar. Pes aoe 1122 a 
Po A NEE i 0b 0) ee La Gel 920 es. ss caonae 1122 b 
19 









‘or Soph shite tereerered 1128 b | L 2 


tees ap 


- 
tie 
ot 

sa 
ie 
ees 
a 
ie 
ay tye 
POL 
+o. 


Tae 4 abc Dy . 
: ad ; 
Me B 2 : a 47 ae - 
a 25! ‘ % << MY a 2 
i‘ Sy ec a ; 
> oe i e@ “” 
EE eek ey = 
% * : 4 . ¥ basa 
a — gj Me ¥ 
ie | - ~ = 
_ ; ee, 
mph f *. 

« ed , 
ieallig aA a his Siectemcnghe 
wt - +5 5 
4 } 

; * ‘ io — 
be : ‘ 
as ¥* 
> - 3 
bat ie be 4 > a #* 
«. ¢ be wy Lee 
Ne be _- *) : * 
. +? “ 2 . 
w o Wet >. es « 
hes 3 : 
<. a 4-0 - 
2 +e 
>» : ‘ 
” <a 4 * 
wt Bae . 
4% 44,%. & - 4 
3 a 
| , 
*. « 
~ 
| . 
Saas = 
> ; * 
Ps . ° . 
‘ + a «< 
#. . = : 
ee Pe A / 
he, 
ee a 
igs ° i ne is f 
Sey ae 
Pe “e » ¢ 
een « 
bet rep - x 
yu su 

w + i, gla k 

= ¢ 

oI = ‘ . x . 
sl eee | Pi : 

B : p: ang 
“te . a . 
% = i me 
o ™ » ae ” 
y ay 
7 ° . 
a Fs a 
" 
eee 
3 
- - 
an 
i 
. 
. - 
a 
wv 
¢ 
‘. ate 
¥ » 
* 
w 
# hs 
: Ant 
; 
aw a™. ae 





ere 


renee abe 





¥ i 9961... eo P apee $aukeee. 1122 P A Fi i & 7. x 


oma eee) SD 928° 
‘Sees 92 


. 


eG Se cata 4 re 


° x a * 


a » se = »*? - << a 
en o> oe. » 
a ‘ol 2 ~ 
— a . 
free : 2s - 
. * > -7* 
"4 mi, 4 
"y r “x 
‘ Ste 5 H “se ee . 
cng! alte nsee 1 cok ae oe a eee 
Gi ine by ne > ses 
eke. i ptt SD 
ters _ ‘ o 
5 ve «< Fin, -. 
ae «. ** 











Aarper and Burgess’s Inductive 


Latin Method. 


Prof. WM. ~ Harper and Isaac B. Burcess, A.M 


e new methc 'oyed for beginning the study of Latin is 
it followed by f.i- _ 'arper with such signal success in his 
isses at Chautauqua ai. = bere, A sentence of the original text 
first placed before the pup. “he pronunciation and exact trans- 


tion of each word are furnisheu aim. With the aid which the teacher 
ives him in advance, and with the material given in the book, he 
‘thoroughly masters the words and phrases of this sentence or section. 
‘Tis knowledge is tested by requiring him to recite or write the Latin 
‘entence, with only the translation before his eye. 

With this as the foundation, and with adequate notes, the words are 
transposed and introduced in various relations, and by thus following 
4 thoroughly inductive method, a knowledge of the language is obtained 
in much less time than that usually required. 

The book is a guide to the language— not a companion to the 
Grammar. The pupil deals with the language. He discovers a 
principle in the sentence before him. He observes and remembers. 
He does not learn what he may or may not observe hereafter. He 
thus creates for himself a working grammar of essential principles, and 
idds at each step what is then needed. 

Most introductory Latin books prepare for Caesar, yet they are often 
nade up of different authors, different styles, and different vocabularies. 
(his is based wholly upon the first book of the Gallic War, and insures 
. thorough drill upon the words, construction, and idioms of Caesar. 
systematic instruction is given in reading Latin in the order of the 

xt. This, and the attention given to word study give proficiency in 
ight reading. 

Among the special features are: the entire absence of everything 
ot essential, its thoroughness, and the genuine interest it arouses in 
ie pupil. It holds his attention, quickens his mind, and makes the 
udy of the language pleasant for him and his teacher. 


12mo, cloth. 323 pages. Price, $1.00. 


tarper and Burgess’s Inductive Latin Primer (in preparation), 
Harper and Toiman’s Caesar’s Gallic War . . $1.20 
Harper and Miller’s Vergil (in preparation), 


Copies mailed, postpaid, to any address, on receipt of price. Full descriptive 
circulars of Latin and Greek books sent on application, 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


NEW YORK oo CINCINNATI wa CHICAGO. 
(*95) : = 


“ <9 Poe ‘a e ee >. a, of 


Harper and Waters’s Inductive 













Greek Method. Ee 

By Wm. R. Harper, Ph.D., and Wm. E. Waters, Ph.D. | mea 
i» 

oad 


The ‘‘ Greek Method ” is prepared on the same plan as the ‘‘ Induc- 
tive Latin Method.” A sentence of the original text is first placed oF 
before the pupil. The pronunciation and exact translation of each 7 
word are furnished him. With the aid which the teacher gives him in ret 
advance, and with the material given in the book, he thoroughly masters 
the words and phrases of this sentence or section. His knowledge is 
tested by requiring him to recite or write the Greek sentence with only 
the translation before his eye. 

In connection with this mastery of the words and phrases of the 
sentences assigned, the pupil reads and digests the contents of the 
** Notes”’ on these words. When the text and notes have been learned, 
out of the material thus mastered, the most important principles are 
pointed out under the head of ‘‘ Observations,” 

Next, the grammatical material obtained in the lesson is systematized ; 
the words of the sentence or section are then separated from their con- 
text and placed in alphabeticalorder. The exercises for the translation 
of Greek into English and English into Greek are based upon the 
sentence which furnishes the basis of the lesson. , 

linally, the leading points of the lesson, suggested in the ‘‘ Notes,” 
‘* Observations,” or the ‘‘ Grammar Lesson,” are treated under the 
head of ‘‘ Topics for Study.” Upon each topic the student is expected 
to make a statement of what ze knows— not what has been in the 
books. 

The method employed is zzductive, and yet a slight departure is made 
at times to allow a more complete treatment of a subject in order to 
elucidate some detail of which an example has not occurred. . 

-The Lessons cover Book I. of Xenophon’s Anabasis, and include 
a formal study of almost every portion of the Grammar, Special 
attention is given to review, lessons for the purpose being frequently 
inserted, 


1zmo, cloth. 355 pages. Price, $1.00. 


Harper and Wallace’s Xenophon’s Anabasis (in preparation). 


Copies mailed, postpaid, to any address, on receipt of price. Full descriptive 
circulars of Latin and Greek books sent on application. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


NEW YORK “% CINCINNATI Y, CHICAGO. a 
(*96) se 


eine i a. 


tie = Speed as 
i _ PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 


& 


-Harkness’s Standard Latin Grammar. 


FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 
By ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D., 


PROFESSOR IN BROWN UNIVERSITY. 


This is a complete, philosophical, and attractive work. Facts 
are presented in clear and simple language. The work has been 
pronounced “a model for perspicuity of statement and clearness 
of arrangement.” It is characterized by great accuracy of 
Statement. It is a Grammar of the Latin Language based upon 
the facts of that language. The facts and laws of the language 
are all presented in the light of the latest and best grammatical 
studies, including comparative grammar. 

It practically embraces three works in one, 

The present edition is the result of a thorough and complete 
revision of that of 1874. To a large extent it is a new and 
independent work, yet the paradigms, rules of construction, and 
in general all parts intended for recitation, have been only 
slightly changed. The aim of the work in its present form is 
threefold : 

1. To be a clear, simple, and convenient elementary Latin 
Grammar, giving the essentials for that use in distinctive type, 
and in the form best adapted to the end. 

2. To be an adequate and trustworthy grammar for the ad- 
vanced student—a complete grammar of the Latin language, 
for the use of critical students of every grade of scholarship. 

3. To be a practical introduction to the broader fields of 
philology and modern linguistic research with references to the 
latest and best authoritics upon the numerous questions which 
arise in such study, 

Price, $1.12. 


A copy of the above ook will be mailed, postpaid, to any address, om receipt 
of price. Full descriptive circulars sent on application, 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


[eg ¥ EW YORK os CINCINNATI es CHICAGO. 
2 ; 


PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 


POPULAR GREEK METHODS. 





ADAMS’S GREEK PREPOSITIONS. 
By F. A. ApAMs, Ph.D. 12mo, cloth. 131 pages . 60cents 


re Greek prepositions studied from their original meanings as designations 
of space. 


ARNOLD’S FIRST GREEK BOOK. 
By Tuos. K. ARNOLD,'M.A. 12mo, cloth. 297 pages, 87 cents 


On the same plan as Arnold’s First Latin Book. The author has prepared 
with great care, in both Greek and English, such exercises as serve to illustrate 
those portions of grammar which are needful at the outset. 


ARNOLD’S GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 
By T. K. ARNOLD, M.A. 12mo, cloth. 237 pages . $1.05 


The object of this book is to enable the student, as soon as he can decline 
and conjugate with tolerable facility, to translate simple sentences after given 
examples with given words. 


BOISE’S EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE. 
By JAs. R. BorsE, 12mo, cloth. 185 pages . . $1.05 


These exercises were prepared simply as an accompaniment to the first book 
of the Anabasis. 


COY’S GREEK FOR BEGINNERS. 


By Epwarp G. Coy, M.A, 12mo, cloth. 152 pages . $1.00 


A companion book to Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar and an introduc- 
tion to Coy’s First Reader or Xenophon’s Anabasis. 


COY’S FIRST GREEK READER. 


By EDwARD G. Coy, M.A. 12mo, cloth. 150 pages. 84 cents 


Designed as an introduction to Xenophon’s Anabasis. The work contains 
easy selections adapted from Kenophon and Thucydides, carefully graded, 
with notes and exercises adapted to both Hadley-Allen’s and Goodwin’s Greek 
Grammars. 


CROSBY’S GREEK GRAMMAR, 
By A. Crossy. 12mo, cloth. 477 pages : ; $1.40 


"Yesigned for schools and colleges. ‘This book is simple enough to be put in 
the hands of the beginner, and yet sufficiently scientific and complete to accom- 
pany him through his whole course. 


HADLEY’S GREEK GRAMMAR. 


Revised, and in part rewritten, by FREDERIC DE FOREST ALLEN, 
Professor in Harvard College. 12mo , ; - $1.50 


This grammar not only presents the latest and best results of Greek studies, 
but also treats the language in the light received from comparative philology. 


HARKNESS’S FIRST GREEK BOOK. 
By ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D. . 
12mo, cloth. 276 pages . ‘ : F : $1.05 


Designed especially to accompany Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar, with 
ie also to Goodwin’s and Crosby’s Grammars. 
7a 


; a 5 ie oe a 
3 £ j : oa all 
ful t 


_ PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 


POPULAR GREEK METHODS— Continuep. 





4YARPER’S INDUCTIVE GREEK METHOD. 
By Prof. WM. R. HARPER, Ph.D., Yale University, and WILLIAM 
I. WATERS, Ph.D., Cincinnati, Ohio < : , $1.00 
This book corresponds to Harper and Burgess’s Inductive Latin Method. 
‘t is incended to be a guide and help to the pupil in beginning the study of the 

Greek language. 

<EEP’S GREEK LESSONS. | 
By Rosert P, Kerp, Ph.D. 12mo, cloth. 257 pages . $1.20 


Prepared to accompany Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar. It was with 

ve design of making the path to the acquaintance with the new Hadley clear, 
are, bre not unnecessarily difficult, that the preparation of these Lessons was 
‘ndertaken. 


XENDRICK’S GREEK OLLENDORFF. 
By A. C. KENDRICK. 1I2mo, cloth. 371 pages j $1.22 


A progressive exhibition of the principles of Greek Grammar, designed for 
>Seginners in Greek and as a book of exercises for academies and colleges, 


XUHNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR. 
By RALPH KUHNER. Translated from the German by B. B. 
EpwaArps and S. H. TAyLor. §8vo, cloth. 620 pages, $1.40 


For the use of high schools and colleges. A valuable book of reference 
founded upon the work of one of the highest German authorities. 


SCAF. BOROUGH’S FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. 
By Wo. S. SCARBOROUGH, A.M. 
12mo, cloth. 147 pages : , » P -  gocents 


A two-term text-book, with copious notes and references tothe Grammars of 
‘oodwin and Hadley, and an adequate vocabulary. 


SILBER’S PROGRESSIVE LESSONS IN GREEK. 
By Wo. B. SILBER, A.M. iI2mo, cloth. 79 pages . 57 cents 


A course of progressive lessons in Greek, together with notes and frequent 
references to the grammars of Sophocles, Hadley, and Crosby. 


WHITON'S THREE MONTHS’ PREPARATION FOR 
READING XENOPHON. ; . 

By JAmMes Morris WuiTon, Ph.D., and MAry BARTLETT 
WHiITON, 4.B, I2mo, cloth. 94 pages. 5 48 cents 


Adapted for use in connection with Hadley and Alien’s or Goodwin’s 
arammars, 


NINCHELL’S ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN GREEK 
SYNTAX. 


By S. R. WINcHELL, A.M. 12mo, cloth. 121 pages, 54 cents 


Designed to accomapany the reading of Xenophon’s Anabasis. A series of 
sssons on Attic Greek syntax, designed to follow about one year’s study of 
1e etymolog™ of the language. 


Coptes of the above books will be mailed, postpaid, to any address, on receipt 
f price. Full descriptive circulars sent on application, QQ 


| AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
; Ney YORK te CINCINNATI e CHICAGO. 
re) 


PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 


Standard Greek Texts, Lexicons, Et | 


-DEMOSTHENES’S PHILIPPICS. 
With Notes. By M. J. SMEAD, Ph.D. ; ; . Baye 


With historical introductions and critical and explanatory notes, In its pre 
ent shape, the work will be found well adapted to the wants of the young | 
students in high schools and colleges. 


HERODOTUS—SELECTIONS FROM. 
By H. M. JoHNson. : : : : P ‘ $i c 


This comprises mainly such portions of Herodotus as give a connected his: >: 
of the East, to the fali of Babylon and the death of Cyrus the Great. 


HOMER’S ILIAD. 
Three Books with Notes. By HENRY CLARK JOHNSON, ra 
1.0 
The same. With Notes and Lexicon : } : 1762 


According to the text of Dindorf; with revised notes, critical and explan. 
atory, and references to Hadley-Allen’s, Crosby’s, and Goodwin’s Greek Gram 
mars, and to Goodwin’s Greek Moods and Tenses; together with an appendi 
containing an outline of the ‘‘ Homeric Question,” a sketch of the versificat' 
and the dialect of Homer, and a number of selected passages for sight readir 


HOMER’S ILIAD. 
By JoHN J. Owen, D.D. ; : : : 2 


The Iliad according to the text of Wolf, with notes for the use »* sc 
and colleges. 


LEXICON “OF . THE... FIRST : THREE “RG. 
HOMER’S ILIAD. 
By CLARENCE E. BLAKE, A.M. . : ‘ 


It is the design of this work to furnish the pupil a lexicon of vv 
in which the full and unabridged explanation of each Homeric w- 
the same as could be found in a large lexicon. 


HOMER’S ODYSSEY. 
By JOHN J. Owen, D.D. : : : ee , 


The Odyssey according to Wolf’s text, with notes for the use of s 
and colleges. 


PLATO’S APOLOGY AND CRITO. ' 
With Notes. By W.S. TYLERandH.M. TyvtER . @ 


This edition has been carefully revised, the notes have been largely rew | 
the text has been changed, and the whole has been reprinted and stereotyp 
anew. The text is that of Cron. 


SOPHOCLES’S CEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 
By Howarp Crossy, D.D. : i : ; . ae 
With English notes, For the use of students in schools and colleges. 
SOPHOCLES’S ANTIGONE. 
By Mi JccSMaan, PhDs eae ies) eae eee 


For the use of academies and colleges. A revised and corrected editio.: 
ee introduction, and critical and explanatory notes. 
“Ot 





Se SS 
en ee Poa 





f ya. « — aa “ oo oe id ~* ‘ 
5 ee a P| om *. 4 be» ee 2 Oe ii 9 Gags 
, uf $2 rae» we . ) at . < <" 
abe ee wee eee : : 
a i " Sa ae { 


* rT eg ee | - 
__-upnications OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 





s2inpARD GREEK TEXTS, LEXICONS, ETC.— Continued. 





~JCYDIDES. 


ec With Map. By Joun J. Owen,D.D. . . . $1.75 


ae history of the Peloponnesian War, by Thucydides, according to the text 
.. Dindorf, with notes for the use of colleges. 


» INOPHON’S ANABASIS. 
Four Books. By JAs. R. Boise, Ph.D. ‘ : . $1.08 


°° The same. Four Books with Lexicon ; é " 1.32 
nost colleges require only three or four books of the Anabasis for admis- 


tt 5, the majority specifying four books, a four-book edition of ‘‘ Boise’s 
cabasis”’ has been substituted for the three-book and five-book editions here- 
-pre published. 

ENOPHON’S ANABASIS. 

« By A. Crossy. 

.. Menophon’s Anabasis. Complete, with Lexicon . $1.60 


~ The same. Four Books and Lexicon . : > 1.40 
0: The sailic. Text only - ° s » > T.00 
>», Lexicon to Xenophon’s Anabasis R . 70 cents 


Lexicon and Notes to Xenophon’s Anabasis . go cents 


= copious notes, introduction, map of the expedition and of the retreat of 
©. a Thousand, and a full and complete lexicon. The notes are thoroughly 
mit : __ricaj,and continually refer to the Grammar for exact and complete infor- 
“3. philological points; they are also instructive, particularly in the 

*  -.aragraphs of enlarged comment and criticism. 


“Sys ANABASIS. 


. yj. OWEN, D.D. : , y ; : $1.40 


._ ition, with Kiepert’s map showing the route of the Ten Thousand. 
' Ue Or the use of schools and colleges. 


- .JPHON’S CYROPADIA, | 
3y JouHn |. Owen, D.D. ; : > ‘ : $1.75 
atte i Pe potes. For the use of schools and colleges. According to the text of 
7 rf. 


? 


-_NOPHON’S MEMORABILIA OF SOCRATES. 

By R. D. C. Ropsrns , : ; ; ! 3 $1.40 
>. (a a sketch of the Life of. Socrates. Copious notes, and complete 
-~» in Greek and English. 


HE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES. 


By Joun J. Owen, D.D. . ; : : : $1.22 


With Notes and a Lexicon. For the use of schools, colleges, and theological 
seminaries, According to the text of Augustus Hahn. 





Copies of the above books will be matled, postpaid, to any address, on receipt 
; “price. Full descript:ve circulars seni on application, 
Pe x 


fee 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
NEW YORK ~ CINCINNATI ats CHICAGO, 


* G2 


PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 





Harkness’s Series of Preparatory 
Latin Text-Books. 


By ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D., 
PROFESSOR IN BROWN UNIVERSITY, 


LATIN GRAMMAR. 7 | 
Standard Edition of 1881, I2mo, cloth. 430 pages . $3 
For schools and colleges. This is a complete, philosophical, and attrac. 
work. It presents a-systematic arrangement of the great facts and 'aw: 
the language, exhibiting not only the grammatical forms and constru ‘«- 
but also those vital principles which underlie, control, and explain them. 


EASY METHOD FOR BEGINNERS IN LATIN. 
12mo, cloth. 348 pages . . : $r 


This volume is not a mere companion to the Grammar, but a practical gui 
for the pupil in the work of reading and writing Latin. It approaches t* 
language on its practical side. The very first lesson, without a word of grai, 
mar, introduces the learner to complete Latin sentences, with verb, subject 
and object. Thus, at the very outset, he finds himself already using tk 
language. He is not only reading Latin, but actually writing it. 


FIRST YEAR IN LATIN. 


Complete Course. 12mo, cloth. 332 pages : ; $1.12 

An outline of Latin Grammar and progressive exercises in reading ana 

writing Latin, with frequent practice in reading at sight. This volume con- 

tains a series of simple exercises progressively arranged, and designed to lead 

the way directly to connected discourse, together with numerous exercises and 
passages intended for practice in sight reading and composition exercise. 


LATIN EXERCISES FOR THE FIRST YEAR. 


12mo, cloth. 268 pages . . : ; : ; $1.00 

A course of progressive exercises in reading and writing Latin, with fre- 

quent practice in reading at sight, intended as a companion to Harkness’s 
Latin Grammar. 


NEW LATIN READER. 


12mo, cloth. 227 pages ; ; é ; : 87 cents 

With exercises in Latin composition, intended asa companion to the author’s 
Latin Grammar. With references, suggestions, notes, and vocabularies. 

The ‘‘ New Reader”’ differs from the ‘* Reader”’ in several respects. The 
first parts of the two books are wholly different. ‘The New has in this part 
alternating exercises in translation both ways from one language into the 
other, with numbered references to the ‘‘ Grammar’”’ at every step. 


INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK. 


12mo, cloth. _ 162 pages : A . : ? 87 cents 
Intended as an elementary drill book on the inflections and principles of the 
language. This work gives a distinct outline of the whole grammar. 


INTRODUCTION TO LATIN COMPOSITION. 


12mo, cloth. 306 pages : : ‘ : : $1.05 

For schools and colleges. Part I. Elementary Exercises, intended as a com- 

panion to the Reader. Part II. Latin Syntax. Part III. Elements of Latin 
style, with special reference to idioms and synonyms. 





Copies of the above books witli be matled, postpaid, to any address, on receipt 
of price. Full descriptive circulars sent on application. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


egqEW YORK CINCINNATI = CHICAGO, 
"03 


eee es OE ease el, Si 
fe - Tt ru Po pre d 7?’ < 
“e SD ie x ae eee Ae , 


PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 


Preparatory Latin, Texts. 
(NOT. INCLUDING VIRGIL). 


“JESAR’S GALLIC WAR; 
By G, K. BARTHOLOMEW, : ‘ A . gocents 
This- ofa and, complete edition of ‘* C -esar’s Commentaries.” 
“ESAR’S COMMENTARIES ON THE GALLIC WAR. 
(New Pictorial Edition.) With Notes, Dictionary, and a Map of 
Gaul. By ALBERT HARKN4Ss, LL.D. ‘ : $1.20 


- ais revised edition of Harkness’s Czesar contains many important additions 
oh. cimprovements, including an outline of the Roman military system during 


ovritast half century of the republic. 


ZECAR’S GALLIC WAR. (Eight Books.) 
By Wm. R. HArPER, Ph.D., and HERBERT C. TOLMAN, 
a : : $1.20 
Am entirely new work on an original ‘plan; “with numerous examples of 
“> active studies, and lists of topics for investigation. 


“ICERO’S ORATIONS, NOTES, AND VOCABULARY. 
« By A. Harkness, LL. D. . : $1.22 


TN 


« This book contains ten select orations, giving specimens of Roman eloquence 
2: its various departments — forensic, senatoriai, and judicial, 


“ICERO’S ORATIONS AND LETTERS. 
With Vocabulary. By J. H. HANson, A.M. . $1.20 


The thirty-five letters which have been selected cover a period of twenty 
years, commencing with the [year succeeding Cicero’s consulship and ending 
with the year of his death. 


CICERO’S LAELIUS DE AMICITIA. 
By JoHn K. Lorp ‘ . 72 cents 
With English notes, containing references to the standard Latin Grammars. 
Preceded by an account of the life of Cicero. 


CICERO’S DE OFFICIIS. 
By Tuomas A. THACHER . - 87 cents 
With English notes, chiefly selected and translated from the editions of 
Zumpt Brg pee 
ZALLUST. JUGURTHINE WAR. 
_ By CHARLES GEORGE HERBERMANN, Ph.D, .  $r.12 
With full explanatory notes, references to Harkness’s Revised Latin Gram- 
Mar, and a copious Latin-English vocabulary. Also an introduction, with life 
of Sallust, and a short history of Numidia (with map). 


SALLUST. JUGURTHA AND CATILINE. 


Notes by N. BuTLER and M. SturcIs : 4 i> Gnse 
Revised edition, with notes and a, vocabulary. 


SALLUST. CATILINE., 
Notes and Vocabulary by A. HARKNESS, Ph.D, : 90 cents 
With explanatory notes and a special vocabulary. Adapted to Harkness’s 
Revised Latin Grammar. Prepared expressly for school use. 
“SOURSE IN CAESAR, SALLUST, AND CICERO. 


By ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D. $1.40 

New pictorial edition. With notes and dictiona _ plans of battles, outline of 

ne Roman military system,etc. It contains four ooks of Czesar’s “* Commen- 
taries,’’ the ‘‘ Catiline”’ of Sallust, and eight of Cicero’s  orations, 








Copies of :he above books will be matled, postpaid, to any address, on receipt 
Wl price, Lull descriptive circulars sent on application, 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
[* Pd YORK os CINCINNATI a CHICAGO. 























PUBLICATIONS OF THE AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 
FOR ADVANCED CLASSES. | 

HORACE. 

~ By, J. L. LINCOLN, LL.D. - 12m0, cloth... 574 paces eee 


_ With copious English notes and a life of Horace. The text of this ed 
is that of Orelli; but other important readings are also given in foot-notes 


JUVENAL. SATIRES. : 
By T. B. LINDsAy. 12mo, cloth. 226 pages. cae 


A carefully-edited edition of this author prepared with special referenc 
the requirements of schools and colleges. Fully illustrated. 


LIVY. 
With Notes. By J. L. LINcoLN. 12mo, cloth. 372 pages, $ 


Selections from the first five books, together with the twenty-first 
twenty-second books entire; with a plan of Rome, a map of the passag 
Hanniba}, and English notes for the use of schools. 


CORNELIUS NEPOS. 
With Notes and Vocabulary. By Tuomas LinpsAy, Ph 
I2mo, cloth. 357 pages : : A ; P $r 


With notes, vocabulary, index of proper names, and exercises for tr 
tion into Latin. Illustrated by numerous cuts, : 


CORNELIUS NEPOS FOR SIGHT READING. 
I2mo, cloth. 283 pages . ; ‘ , . . Gr 


An edition of the preceding book without notes and vocabulary. Desig 
especially for sight reading. 


OVID. 
With Notes and Vocabulary. By J. L. Lincotn, LL.D. 12 
cloth. 332 pages . : : f ; : $1, 


The text_is very carefully annotated, and references made to Harkne 
Standard Grammar. Selections have been made from the Aurores Fasti é 
Tristia, in addition to those from the Metamorphoses, oh 


SELECTIONS FROM OVID AND VERGIL. “ 
With Vocabulary. By J. H. HAnson, A.M., and W. A. RoLF | 
12mo, cloth. 770 pages : ; ‘ : : $r a 


A hand-book of Latin poetry, containing selections from Ovid and Vergi 
with Vocabulary, Notes, and references to the standard Latin grammars. ~ 


TACITUS. HISTORIES. ; 
Notes by W. S. TYLER. 12mo, cloth. 453 pages . $1/@% 


References to Harkness’s Revised Latin Grammar ; copious notes; and @ 
essay on the ‘‘Style of Tacitus.”’ 


TACITUS. GERMANIA AND AGRICOLA. 
Notes by W. S. TYLER. 12mo, cloth; 216 pages . ~87ce" 


Revised edition, with additions and references to Harkness’s New Standard 
Latin Grammar. 


Copies of the above books will be mailed, postpaid, to any address, on rece 
of price. Full descriptive circulars sent on application. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


rg came YORK ne CINCINNATI os CHICAGO. 
5 














“0 m IN 


3 0112 023623876 


